JP6368901B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, a game console provided with display means has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application No. 2008-200302

However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in display means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

A game stand according to the present invention is a game stand provided with an operating means and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, one of the plurality of displays being a fifth display. One of the plurality of displays is a sixth display, and the fifth display is a display including an image (hereinafter referred to as a "first image") representing the appearance of the operation means. And the sixth display is a display including an image (hereinafter referred to as a “second image”) representing the appearance of the operation means, which is different from the first image. The display is a display including an image of the meter (hereinafter referred to as “third image”), and the display size of the second image is larger than the display size of the first image. The sixth display is a portion of the second image overlapped by the third image. That Ri display der, the fifth display, the a third display including an image of the meter of the same display size as the image, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the present invention, a game console characterized by display means can be realized.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a Pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure pre-reading process. This is an example of a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (B) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 1 in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure high probability state. (C) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 2 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (D) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 2 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (A) Special figure 1 It is an example of a special figure determination table in a change game. (B) It is an example of a table for special figure determination in special figure 2 change game. It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time decision table which is used in order to decide the fluctuation time of special figure 1 It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time decision table which is used in order to decide the fluctuation time of special figure 2. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of notice lottery processing. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the first embodiment in time series. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the second embodiment in time series. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the third embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the fourth embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the fifth embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the sixth embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the seventh embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means of the eighth embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means of the twelfth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a view showing operation means image display of the modification of the twelfth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a view showing operation means image display of the modification of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the nineteenth embodiment in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time alerting | reporting image, and the remaining time alerting | reporting image. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a Pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the back side. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol, (c) Has shown an example of the stop symbol aspect of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main-control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main-control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of main processing, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interruption processing, (c) is timer interruption. A flowchart of processing, (d) is a flowchart of image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 2nd sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of main processing, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interruption processing, (c) is timer interruption. It is a flowchart of a process. It is a fluctuation time determination table used in the special figure related lottery process of the main control unit according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a notice lottery process of the 1st sub control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a notification mode determination table used in the advance notice lottery process according to one embodiment of the present invention. They are a button reception period of Example 1 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and a time chart which shows the time change of a notice. FIG. 58 A schematic view showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each time point of FIG. 57. They are a button reception period of Example 2 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and a time chart which shows the time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the presentation image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 3 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 4 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 5 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 6 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the presentation image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 7 of a notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. FIG. 70 A schematic view showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each time point of FIG. 69. It is a table used in the seventh embodiment of the notification mode of the remaining time of the present invention to determine the contents of the effect according to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the notice performed before and after the button reception period. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 8 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. FIG. 73 A schematic view showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is not operated at each time point of FIG. 72. FIG. 73 is a schematic view showing an effect image on and after time point (j) in FIG. 72 displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is operated at time points (j) and (k) in FIG. 72; It is a table which determines the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of each button reception period used in Example 8 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a figure based on Example 9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view showing an example in which the game console of the present invention is a slot machine. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at Pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table in which the characteristics of the special figure shown in (a) are summarized. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a common figure, (b) shows an example of a common figure decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a figure which put together the table | surface which put together the operation mode of the common drawing motor combination 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for common drawing equivalence determination, (c) is for common drawing equivalence judgment It is a figure which shows a high probability table. (A) is a diagram showing a low probability per common table fluctuation period determination table, (b) is a diagram showing a low probability failure table for common diagram fluctuation period determination, (c) is for generality chart fluctuation period determination It is a figure which shows a loss table per high probability, and (d) is a figure which shows the high probability loss table for common drawing fluctuation period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure conformance determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure conformance determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for big hit special figure determination It is. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a regular drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a general drawing low probability special figure fluctuation period, and (c) is a diagram It is a figure which shows the loss table for general drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, and (d) is a figure which shows the loss table for general drawing low probability special figure fluctuation period determination. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of effect control processing shown in (a) of the figure, (c) FIG. 10 is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart showing a part of the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decorative symbol display apparatus in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 91 in steps. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decorative symbol display apparatus in case the first hit was a big hit without a definite variation in steps. FIG. 94 is a view showing a modification of the additional opportunity shown in FIG. 94 (c). It is a time chart of a common pattern symbol variation production and a prize ball payment production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure fluctuation production | presentation and a prize ball | stream payout presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common drawing reservation increase production and a prize ball delivery production in the state in which a common design symbol variation production is performed. It is a time chart in which common-design symbol variation production changes to winning a ball payout presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example which changes from a common-design figure fluctuation production | presentation to a prize ball | stream payout production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example from which a common drawing reserve increase production changes in the state in which a common drawing symbol variation production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which returns to a common drawing reservation increase presentation, after an effect changes from a common drawing reservation increase presentation to a prize ball payout presentation. It is a figure which shows the example in which a game ball delivery effect is started a little behind from the timing that the game ball passed the center general winning a prize mouth 226. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of 2nd Embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, (b) shows an example of the decorative symbol of the special figure, (c) shows the common figure An example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of is shown, and (d) shows an example of the decoration symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of the special view prefetching process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a diagram showing the special view adequacy judgment table, and (c) is a special It is a figure which shows the table for prior determination of figures. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the table for timer number determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. (C) is a figure which shows the relationship between a timer number and symbol fluctuation display time. (A) is a figure which shows the common drawing probability determination table stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the common drawing determination table stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. It is. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure fluctuation production, a special-design pattern fluctuation production, and a prefetch notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure change production | presentation and advance notice production | presentation production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure fluctuation production and a special figure reservation increase production. It is a figure which shows the specific example from which a common-design figure fluctuation production itself changes. It is the schematic view front view which looked at the game board 200 of 3rd Embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special view to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of symbols in the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol of the special figure, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the ordinary symbol displayed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 after the variable display of the symbol. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect), and (d) is the figure which showed the stop symbol aspect of the decoration symbol of a common figure. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for commonplace judging, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for commonplace judging, (c) shows the low probability table for common drawing determination. It is a figure and (d) is a figure showing a high probability table for common drawing determination. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the opening-and-closing pattern of electric chow in a pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment, (b) is a drawing of the common drawing effect in decorative symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating several examples. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a common drawing production determination process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, (c) is ROM306 of the main control part 300 It is a figure which shows the table for small hit determination memorize | stored, (d) is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. FIG. It is a figure showing 1/5 part of the example of an effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 2/5 part of the specific example of the production | presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 3/5 part of the specific example of the production | presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 4/5 part of the example of an effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 5/5 part of the example of an effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which mixed the look-ahead production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which the big hit notice was mixed with the popular map production in this embodiment. FIG. 117 (b) shows in a step-by-step manner an example in which the common drawing effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 117 (b) is performed. It is a figure showing the example of other production. (A) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 1 in 4th Embodiment, The figure (b) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 2. (A) is a figure which shows the table for special figure 1 prior judgment which is used when prefetching the start information of the special figure 1 and making a priori determination, (b) shows the start information of the special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 success / failure determination used when prefetching and performing prior determination, and (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure prior determination. (A) is a diagram showing a common drawing probability determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a drawing showing a common drawing determination table, (c) is a common drawing determination table It is a figure which shows a figure timer table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for the common drawing prior decision whether it is used when pre-reading start information of a common drawing and making a priori determination, (b) is a figure which shows the table for the common drawing prior judgment It is. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the popular figure production determination processing in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the predetermined area | region notice production determination processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart showing a flow in an example of a production in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. 134. It is a time chart showing the flow of the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. 136. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the second popular drawing effect. It is a time chart which shows an example when a predetermined condition is changed from an established state to an unestablished state. It is a figure which shows an example of a 図 figure prior notice. It is a figure which shows the example which performs big hit notice production of a special figure in the common drawing effect area | region 283 of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the advance notice production | presentation to the specific effect of a special figure in the common drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the common drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 functions as a display area | region of a pending | prescribed digestive effect. FIG. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, c) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol, and (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the ordinary symbol. FIG. 21 is a view showing operation means image display of Example 20 in time series. FIG. 21 is a view showing operation means image display of the working example 21 in time series. FIG. 21 is a view showing the image display of the operation means of the twenty-second embodiment in time series. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-third embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fourth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fourth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fourth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fourth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fourth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fifth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 26 in chronological order. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 27 in chronological order. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 28 in chronological order. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 29 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 30 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 31 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 31 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 32 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 33 in chronological order. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 34 in time series. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 35 in chronological order. It is a figure showing operation means picture display of Example 36 in time series. FIG. 44 shows time-series image displays of operation means of the thirty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 44 shows time-series image displays of operation means of the thirty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 40 shows time-series image displays of operation means of the thirty-eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing operation means picture display of Example 39 in time series. Fig. 40 shows time-series image displays of operation means of the forty-first embodiment. FIG. 46 shows image display of operation means of the forty-first embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 5th Embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the first state of a 5th embodiment, and the 2nd state. It is a figure which shows the modification of the meter display of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of movable body control processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of movable body interruption processing. (A) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position. (B) It is a sectional side view of the chance button 700 whole in an operation completion position. (C) It is a sectional side view of the whole chance button 700 when a player presses down the chance button 700 which existed in the operation completion position. It is the figure which extracted and showed only lower case 704b and rotation member 708b in each state of (d)-(f) (a)-(c). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a sphere storage plate in case the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball | storage cup in the state (during operation | movement) which the chance button 700 has moved to the operation completion position from the initial position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball | storage tray when the chance button 700 is in an operation completion position. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the operation state of the chance button 700, the acceptability of the detection result of the pressing operation on the chance button 700, and the feasibility of the operation reception effect. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a sphere storage plate in case the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball | storage tank when the chance button 700 is in an operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of the door 108 with a ball storage tray, when the chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when the chance button 700 is in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 stops between an initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (A) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation | movement. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 after completion | finish of operation | movement. FIG. 31 is a front view of the chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of a second operation unit 758. (A) It is a sectional side view of chance button 750 when chance button 750 is in an initial position. (B) It is a sectional side view of chance button 750 when chance button 750 is in an operation completion position. (C) It is a sectional side view of chance button 750 when chance button 700 stops between an initial position and an operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an initial position. (E) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when the chance button 750 exists in an operation completion position. (F) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 stops between an initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). FIG. 18 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 10 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state in which the front door 102 is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the second sub control unit 500. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of a bet button 132 periphery in case the bet button 132 exists in an initial position. (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 periphery in the state (in operation) which the bet button 132 has moved to the operation completion position from the initial position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of a bet button 132 periphery in case the bet button 132 exists in an operation completion position. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which can use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which can not use the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (D) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 exists in an initial position. (A) It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). (B) It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (C) It is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure). (D) It is the figure which showed an example of a normal presentation. (E) It is a figure showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position. (G) It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 stops between an initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is a figure showing an example of various effects. (A) It is an example of the high probability table for the pass / fail judgment used for the pass / fail determination of the special view 1 (or the special view 2) in the case where the special view probability is in the special view high probability state. (B) It is an example of the low probability table for the pass / fail judgment used for the pass / fail determination of the special view 1 (or the special view 2) in the case where the special view probability is in the special view low probability state. (C) It is an example of the table for special figure determination for determining the stop symbol of special figure 1 (or special figure 2). (A) It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure 1. (B) It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure 2. (A) It is an example of a pending change notice lottery table used to determine the mode of pending change. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect of a pending | holding change. (A) It is an example of a reach A time effect character lottery table used to determine a character image used for effect. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the character image. (C) It is an example of a state lottery table used to determine a state. (A) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (B) An example of a decorative symbol for a normal symbol is shown. (C) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the kind of common drawing, the kind of common drawing decorative pattern, and the electric chew open pattern. (D) It is the figure which showed the pattern of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol for normal symbols. (A) It is an example of the common drawing effect type | system | group 1 execution availability lottery table used in order to determine whether the advance notification of the common drawing effect system 1 is given. (B) It is an example of the common drawing effect system 1 lottery table used in order to determine the presentation pattern of the common drawing effect system 1. FIG. (C) It is an example of the common drawing effect type | system | group 2 execution availability lottery table used in order to determine whether the advance notification of the common drawing effect system 2 is given. (D) It is an example of the common drawing effect system 2 lottery table used in order to determine the presentation pattern of the common drawing effect system 2. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the side pre-reading advance notice execution processing of starting winning a prize side. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the sub side advance notice etc. execution processing at the time of a change start. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 1 in execution processing of the sub side notice etc. at the time of start of change. (A) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 2 in execution processing of the sub side advance notice etc. at the time of change start. (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of the sub side notice execution processing at the time of the common drawing change start. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach A is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach A is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails in the effective period of pressing-down operation of the chance button 700. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails in the effective period of pressing-down operation of the chance button 700. FIG. It is the figure which showed the modification of operation reception production (per reach B) in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of operation reception production (per reach B) in time series. (A) It is an example of the step-up notice lottery table used to determine the notice effect mode. (B) It is an example of a state lottery table used to determine a state. (C) Reach B is an example of a reach B big hit state lottery table used to determine the state of the big hit time. (D) It is an example of the production lottery table used in order to decide production mode. (A) It is a disassembled perspective view of the chance button unit 750. FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 1st-3rd state. (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of notice lottery processing (reach B sub). (A) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of notice lottery processing (step up). (B) It is the flowchart which showed an example of the flow of notice lottery processing (reach B sub). It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when a normal reach loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the presentation at the time of the case where the after-loss resurrection hit (the second presentation) is selected by the effect lottery in time series. It is a figure showing modification 1 of operation receptionist production and step-up notice production. It is a figure showing modification 2 of operation receptionist production and step-up notice production. It is an example of a lottery table, such as the number of consecutive hits used to determine the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. It is a figure showing an example of an effect at the time of reach C losing being chosen as a change pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach C is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach C is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. It is a figure showing modification 1 of operation receptionist production (per reach C). It is a figure showing modification 2 of operation receptionist production (per reach C). It is a figure showing modification 3 of operation receptionist production (per reach C). It is the figure which showed the modification 4 of operation reception production (per reach C). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the display which concerns on other embodiment (effective time is paused). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the display which concerns on other embodiment (effective time is paused). (A) An example of a button effect when there is no operation of the chance button 136 during the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) An example of button effects on a game console which can receive an operation of the chance button 136 only once during the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button presentation example 1 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button presentation example 2 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button presentation example 3 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button presentation example 4 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button presentation example 5 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 6 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button effect example 7 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 8 in which the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button presentation example 1 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 2 in which the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button effect example 3 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button presentation example 4 in which the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 5 in which the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (C) A button effect example 6 in which the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A) A button presentation example 7 in which the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (B) A button effect example 8 in which the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 is shown in time series. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of button presentation in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of (b-1)-(b-6) button presentation in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of (c-1)-(c-6) button presentation in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of (a-1)-(a-6) button effect in time series. (B)-(e) It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of button presentation. It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of (a-1)-(a-6) button presentation in time series. It is a figure showing other concrete examples of button production. It is the figure which showed the specific example 6 of the button effect in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the basic concept of the game stand which concerns on other embodiment (a normal button and a big button). It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of a normal button and a big button. It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the button effect which hides various displays in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the button effect which hides various displays in time series. It is the figure which showed the specific example 3 of the button effect which hides various displays in time series. (A-1) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the presentation at the time of operation of the operation means in the state of an auto-button function inoperative (invalid). (A-2) It is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation when the auto button function is operate | moving (when it is effective). (B-1) In the example shown to (a-1), it is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the presentation at the time of operation of the operation means in the middle of animation. (B-2) In the example shown to (a-2), it is the time chart which showed an example of the flow of the presentation at the time of the predetermined conditions in an auto button function being satisfied in the middle of animation. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect in the state which the auto-button function is non-operating in time series. (B-1)-(b-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 1 of the button effect of the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in a time series. (A-1)-(a-6) It is the figure which showed the specific example 2 of the button effect of the state in which the auto button function is operate | moving in time series. (B-1)-(ab6) It is the figure which showed the example 3 of the button effect of the state in which the auto-button function is working in time series. (A-1)-(a-7) It is the figure which showed the specific example 4 of the button effect of the state in which the auto button function is operate | moving in time series. (B-1)-(b-7) It is the figure which showed the specific example 5 of the button effect of the state in which the auto button function is act | operating in a time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of an auto button function. It is a figure for demonstrating a character selection function. It is a figure for demonstrating a character selection function. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 1 shows a flow of a sub control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows a flow of a first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows a flow of an image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric Chu-long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st 2 shows a flow of secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows a flow of second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the flow of the button presentation control processing performed by presentation control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, and (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. The various settings of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention are shown. The setting method of mode 1 of automatic button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention is shown. The setting method of mode 4 of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 1 of one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 2 of one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 3 of one embodiment of this invention. The chance button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of one embodiment of this invention is shown is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 5 of one embodiment of this invention. The timing chart which shows the state of the chance button sensor 426 in Example 5 of one embodiment of this invention, an auto button process determination result, and a button reception flag is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 6 of one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 7 of one embodiment of this invention. FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. A game according to a modification of an embodiment of the present invention, wherein (a) shows a casino machine 2000, and (b) a portable unit provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention The telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 equipped with a storage unit storing electronic data embodying the present invention, (d) equipped with a storage unit storing electronic data implementing the present invention Shows a home video game console 5000, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example A-5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example B-3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example C-1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example C-2 in time series. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which is a game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure which is a game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure explaining the animation example at the time of appearance of a button image among the button images used by the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the animation example of the button image used by the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining display of a button operation animation which is a game effect by the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining display of a button operation animation which is a game effect by the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining display of a button operation animation which is a game effect by the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining display of a button operation animation which is a game effect by the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure which is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of a button operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of a button operation animation. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining display of a button operation animation which is a game effect by the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining display of a button operation animation which is a game effect by the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the timing chart about the display regarding the chance button operation reception in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, a chance button sensor detection, and the operation reception period. It is an external appearance perspective view in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining a display of touch operation animation. It is a figure which shows the chance button 136 in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure which compares the rotational speed of the operation means and rotation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which compares the rotational speed of the operation means and rotation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which compares the rotational speed of the operation means and rotation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is screen transition diagram of the original mode and user mode in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the demonstration effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the user menu in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the real machine customization in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the production and sound presentation of a button image. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the production and sound presentation of a button image. It is a game presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the production and sound presentation of a button image. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the chance button operation reception in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and a button operation sound output. It is a figure which is a game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure which is a game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is a figure which is a game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure explaining the display of a button operation animation. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. FIG. 25 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention, and (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration symbol, c) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows it. The flow of the 1st sub control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part image processing . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) shows it. The flow of 2nd secondary control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of 2nd secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the table for yes / no determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is an example of the table for yes / no determination used at high probability. FIG. 7B shows an example of a success / failure determination table used at low probability. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the table for special figure 1 determination, (B) shows an example of the special view 2 determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending | holding change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the suspension display of the special figure change game of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows the suspension display mode without change, (b) shows suspension A The pending display mode is shown, and (c) shows the pending display mode of the pending B. It is a figure which shows an example of the board | substrate lamp pre-reading lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice lottery table 1 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice lottery table 2 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prior art lottery table 3 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a character image of a notice notification of a notice of success or failure determination of a special figure change game in progress being executed in a pachinko machine 100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. (B) shows the character image of "Sabohani" as "character B", and (c) shows the character image of "hime" as "character C". Is shown. It is a figure showing an example of notice lottery table 4 memorized by ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of pachinko machine 100 by a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the chance button of the alerting | reporting notification displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in the special figure change game currently performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the button aspect of the chance button 136 in the special figure fluctuation game in process of execution in the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of notice lottery table 5 memorized by ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of pachinko machine 100 by a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character image of the advance notice of the notice result of the success / failure determination after the reach of the special figure change game in progress in the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the seventh embodiment of the present invention. (B) shows the character image of "boxer" as "character E", and (c) shows the character image of "bancho" as "character F". Is shown. It is an example of the flowchart (the 1) which shows the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the flowchart (the 2) which shows the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prefetch notice execution process at the time of start information acquisition in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st secondary control part look-ahead notice execution processing at the time of the special figure change game start in the 1st secondary control part of pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the normal notice lottery process in the 1st sub control part at the time of the special figure fluctuation game in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 3) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 4) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 5) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 6) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 35 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a game console according to a modification of the seventh embodiment of the present invention, wherein (a) shows a casino machine 2000, and (b) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention, and (d) a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention. , And (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example of the button image by Example 14 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the gauge image (effective period image) by Example 15 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of the present invention, and (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 An example is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special figures in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric Chuo Long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second secondary control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure showing the flow of the button production control processing performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by a 9th embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, and (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The various settings of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th embodiment of the present invention are shown. The setting method of mode 1 of auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention is shown. A setting method of mode 4 of an auto button mode of a pachinko machine 100 according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 1 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 2 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 3 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The chance button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention is provided is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 5 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The timing chart which shows the state of the chance button sensor 426 in Example 5 of 9th Embodiment of this invention, an auto button process determination result, and a button reception flag is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 6 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 7 of the 9th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 55 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the ninth embodiment of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 35 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the ninth embodiment of the present invention, wherein (a) shows a casino machine 2000, and (b) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention, and (d) a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention. , And (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of a decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 and a decorative portion 814 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to an example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812 and the decoration part 814 with which the pachinko machine 100 by the Example of 10th Embodiment of this invention is seen from the player side. It is a figure which shows the specific rendition in the pachinko machine 100 by the example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific rendition in the pachinko machine 100 by the example of the 10th Embodiment of this invention. In a pachinko machine 100 according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the visibility of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes is described. In a pachinko machine 100 according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention, an example in which the visibility of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes is described. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (A) Main control unit A flowchart showing a flow of main processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for the precedence read-ahead. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for special-design pass / fail read results. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for yes-no decision. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for special figure determination. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the table set selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure timer number selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a change time table. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of a 1st sub control part. It is a figure showing an example of character selection effect. It is a time chart of character selection production. It is the figure which showed an example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of a 2nd character (爺) in detail. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button is pressed during the character movement display. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button is pressed during the character movement display. It is a figure showing the 2nd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the 2nd example of character selection production. It is a figure showing the 3rd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the 3rd example of character selection production. It is a figure showing the modification of the production period of character selection production. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the other example of a character selection presentation. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (A) Main control unit A flowchart showing a flow of main processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for the precedence read-ahead. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for special-design pass / fail read results. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for yes-no decision. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table for special figure determination. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the table set selection table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure timer number selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a change time table. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of a 1st sub control part. It is a figure showing an example of character selection effect. It is a time chart of character selection production. It is the figure which showed an example of the temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of a 2nd character (爺) in detail. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button is pressed during the character movement display. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button is pressed during the character movement display. It is a figure showing the 2nd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the 2nd example of character selection production. It is a figure showing the 3rd example of character selection production. It is a time chart of the 3rd example of character selection production. It is a figure showing the modification of the production period of character selection production. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the other example of a character selection presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is a circuit block diagram of other embodiments. (A) It is the schematic which shows the structure of the data of other embodiment. (B) It is a schematic diagram of the command of other embodiments. (C) It is a timing chart explaining the situation of transmission and reception of the command of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of command transmission and reception of other embodiments. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the button effect of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the button effect of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the button effect of other embodiment. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the button production and effect display of other embodiment in time series. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of other embodiment. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change production of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change production of other embodiments. It is an example of the timing chart of the character change production of other embodiments. It is the figure which showed the character change production | generation display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change production | generation display of other embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the character change production | generation display of other embodiment in time series. It is an example of the setting screen of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the basic concept of the production | presentation in which operation becomes invalid. It is the figure which showed the example which performs tutorial display in the production | presentation in which operation becomes invalid in time series. It is the figure which showed the other example of the tutorial display. It is the figure which showed in time series the example which performs the display according to the operation by a 2nd operation means in the production | presentation in which operation becomes invalid. It is the figure which showed in time series the example which performs the display according to the operation by 2nd operation means, and sound emission in the production | presentation in which operation becomes invalid. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation invalid period in the production | presentation in which operation becomes invalid. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation invalid period in the production | presentation in which operation becomes invalid. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button presentation of this embodiment, and a selection presentation in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the selection presentation of this embodiment, and a button presentation in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of a display of the setting screen of the auto button mode of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the button effect of this embodiment in time series.

  First Embodiment

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 43 are basically used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where the overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 1 to 43 have priority. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door open sensor 109 is provided to detect the opening of the front frame door 106.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "balls"), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit for guiding the gaming balls to the launcher. The upper tray 126, the lower tray 128 for storing gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 126, and the ball extraction button 130 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 126 by the operation of the player to the lower tray 128 The ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player A ball emission handle 134 for emitting a ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136 are emitted. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch which can be pressed by a setter (for example, a player), and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, and the lower side of the confirmation button And a right button located to the right of the enter button, a left button located to the left of the enter button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. There is. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 4) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. Note that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may have a function similar to that of the above-described chance button 136.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.
<Back side of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.
<Front of the game board>

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball that has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that a counter is built in), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the lower-side full-tank sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high confidence) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view starting port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the signal is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Driving circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of chance button 136, and pressing of each button of setting operation unit 137 An operation unit sensor 427 for detecting an operation, a sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430, the chance button detection sensor 426 and the operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read out stored image data etc. and work on VRAM 436 It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing F" and "special drawing a" to "special drawing d" are shown as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display The white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure a" is 16R special big hit symbol, "special figure b" is 8R special big hit symbol, and all are special figure high probability spread figure high probability states. In addition, “special figure c” is an 8R big hit design, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, "special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R. "Special figure E" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure F” and “special figure d” are out symbols, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern".

  For example, when notifying 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit corresponding to 15R big hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of notifying 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which the same three odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 To stop. On the other hand, when notifying of the exfoliation of "special figure F" and "special figure d", symbol display other than the symbol combination shown in the figure (b) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of

  That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, the special drawing prefetch process is performed for each of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 (details will be described later). Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In addition, after the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 performs the on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214, the determination of the special view 2 is performed using the second special symbol display device 214 Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and it is for solving this. Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes the value of the big hit flag or the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special figure related lottery process, timer number It includes information indicating (special figure fluctuation time) etc., and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes the value of the big hit flag or small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of the command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, or the like is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the number of the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to

On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.
<Special drawing prefetch processing>

  FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as the pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information in the special view 2 is increasing (step S251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S253 following step S252, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S255. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode, the process proceeds to step S256, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode (that is, it is in the power support mode), the process proceeds to step S258. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S256, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S 257 following step S 256, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S258, without pre-reading the special view 1 start information that has been increased, “not determined” information indicating that the start information is not read ahead is replaced with the stop symbol information and the special view 1 read-ahead result storage in the RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information except for during power support. And, whether or not to preread the start information of the special figure 2 may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result. Furthermore, even if the start information and the prefetch result storage unit of one start information and the prefetch result storage unit are configured to store the start information and the prefetch result of each of the special views without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special view. good.
<Pre-reading result information>

  FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. The same figure (a) has shown an example of the state by which the special figure 1 prefetch result information was memorize | stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage part. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in (a) of the figure, "special figure E" (displaced) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure E" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". (Defect) is stored, and "special figure D" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  The figure (b) has shown an example of the state by which the special figure 2 prefetch result information was memorize | stored in the special view 2 prefetch result memory | storage part. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in (b) of the figure, "special figure d" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in the figure (b), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  The same figure (c) has shown the example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage section in power support. As shown in FIG. 6C, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

In the above description, only the stop symbol is determined in advance, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the success / failure determination result, the change timer number (change time), the timer group described later, etc. The determination may be made, and the information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Special figure 1 related lottery process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a special figure 1 related lottery process in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S 281, it is determined whether the special symbol or the special electric combination is in operation, that is, whether the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the big hit is in progress, and the processing is ended if applicable. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether there is a reserve of special figure 1 change game or not. If there is no reserve of special figure 1 change game, the processing is ended, and if there is a reserve, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability change flag is ON or OFF, and when the special figure probability change flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for success determination described later The big hit judgment (big hit judgment) and the small hit judgment (small hit judgment) are performed using the lottery data of [], and when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S 285, which will be described later. A big hit determination (big hit success or failure determination) and a small hit determination (small hit or not determination) are performed using the lottery data of the low probability table for determination [special figure 1].

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination result of the big hit is a big hit, and if so, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, the symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 1, any of the special view A to special view D, the special view 2 In the case of (1), the special figure a to special figure c) is determined, and then the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether the small hit success or failure determination result is a small hit, and if so, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S289, the symbol lottery is performed based on the above-mentioned small hit success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the small hit symbol (in the present embodiment, special figure E in the case of special figure 1, special figure 2 is small hit After determining “none”, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, a symbol lottery is performed based on symbol random number values, and after an out symbol (in the present embodiment, special figure F in the case of special figure 1 and special figure d in the case of special figure 2) is determined, The process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a fluctuation type lottery is performed based on the type of the special drawing stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the number of pending memories currently (at the start of fluctuation of special drawing 2), and the fluctuation pattern and the special drawing fluctuation time are determined. Do.

In the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, the lottery process for the special figure 2 is performed, but in the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. The table [Special figure 1] is replaced with a high probability table for success or failure judgment [special figure 2], and the low probability table for success or failure judgment [special figure 1] is read into a low probability table for success or failure judgment [special figure 2]. Since the process is the same as the process without the determination, the description thereof is omitted.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Table for judging the success or failure>

  The low probability table for winning determination [special figure 1] shown in FIG. 11 (a) is an example of a table used for the win determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of a numerical value, and the success / failure result of the special figure 1. In addition, the high probability table for success / fail judgment [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 6B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of a winning random number value, and the pass / fail result of the special figure 1.

  When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for special decision [special figure 1], and based on the acquired special figure winning random value. Judgment as to whether special figure 1 fluctuation game is elected (big hit), special figure 1 fluctuation game is elected (small hit) or not elected (missed) (big hit judgment or small hit judgment of special figure 1 If the special figure 1 is in the special figure high probability state, the high probability table for special decision [special figure 1] is referred to, and the special figure is selected based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later). The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is won (big hit) Information indicating a big hit is set in the flag storage area (hereinafter, setting big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “set big hit flag on”).

  In the case where the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10383, it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating small hit is set in the small hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "set small hit flag ON").

  In addition, when the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value which is acquired is 0-10000, or 10384-65535, it decides with special figure 1 fluctuation game off, it mentions Information indicating that the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag is shifted (hereinafter, setting the information for the shift area for the stored area of the big hit flag is referred to as "set the big hit flag off," Setting deviation information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "set the small hit flag off").

  The low probability table [Special figure 2] for success / failure determination shown in the same figure (c) is an example of a table used for the success / failure decision of the special figure 2 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of a numerical value, and the success or failure result of the special figure 2. Further, the high probability table for success / fail determination [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 6D is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of a winning random number value, and the pass / fail result of the special figure 2.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for success / fail determination [special figure 2] when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and acquires the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) Based on), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation game is to be elected (big hit) or not elected (missing) (big hit determination of special figure 2), special figure 2 is special figure high probability state In the case, the big hit determination of the special figure 2 is performed based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) with reference to the high probability table for special decision [special figure 2]. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, it is constituted so that it does not win in the small hitting.
<Table for special drawing determination>

  The special view determination table [special view 1] and the special view determination table [special view 2] shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b) are the big hit flag and the small hit flag (the result of the pass / fail judgment) described above It is a data table which linked and stored a random number value and the kind of special figure stop symbol by the 1st, 2nd Special figure display 212, 214.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special drawing determination table, the above-described big hit determination result (big hit flag value), the small hit determination result (small hit flag value), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on the special drawing symbol lottery that determines the type of special drawing stop symbol. In addition, when the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as a symbol random number value, and when the small hit flag is on, the small hit symbol generated from the above-mentioned special figure winning random number value The random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are disconnected), the obtained out-of-lot symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value Do.

  In this embodiment, in the special figure 1 fluctuation game, referring to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] of the figure (a), when the big hit flag is on (when the result of the judgment is big hit), Special figure A is acquired with probability 25/100 when acquired symbol random number value is 0-24, and special figure B is acquired with probability of 25/49 when acquired symbol random number value is 25-49. The special figure C is selected at a probability of 5/100 when the symbol is 50 to 54, and the special figure D is selected at a probability of 45/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 55 to 99. Also, if the small hit flag is on (if the judgment result is a small hit), special figure E (small hit) is selected with 100% probability regardless of the symbol random number value, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag If it is off (if the result of the determination is the removal), the special figure F (the removal) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the symbol random number value.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, when the big hit flag is on (when the decision result is big hit), the special figure a with probability of 70/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 0-69 The special figure b is selected at a probability of 5/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 70 to 74, and the special figure c is selected at a probability of 25/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 75 to 99. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the decision result of the decision is the removal) special figure d (off) is selected with 100% probability regardless of the symbol random number value Do. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, unlike the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.
<Variable display time determination table>

  FIG. 13 is an example of a special view 1 variation display time determination table used to determine the variation time of the special view 1, and FIG. 14 is a special view 2 variation used to determine the variation time of the special view 2 It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the type of the special figure stop symbol described above, the special figure variation time, and the effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at the special figure variation time are stored in association with random number values. It is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a fluctuation pattern lottery that determines the fluctuation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the fluctuation display time determination table and the acquired random number value.

For example, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is determined, the special figure 1 symbol display time determination table shown in FIG. When the numerical range is 1001 to 20000, 45000 ms is selected as the variation time, and per super reach A is selected as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is decided, the kind of special figure stop design referring to the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory time decision table which is shown in Figure 14 with the special figure a-the special figure c When the numerical range is 20001 to 65535, 65000 ms is selected as the variation time, and per super reach B is selected as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. In step S311, when depression of the operation means such as the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the depression of the operation means. In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main processing, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.
<Operation means image display processing>

  Next, the operation means image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the above-mentioned first sub-control unit main process will be described in detail using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the reception period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137) has arrived, and if it corresponds, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if it does not correspond, the step It progresses to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137, and may be, for example, a ball emission handle 134 etc., as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the “reception period of the operation means” is a period in which the operation is determined to be valid when the operation of the operation means is detected, and a process corresponding to the operation can be executed.

  Further, the condition for determining that "the start timing of the reception period of the operation means has arrived" is not particularly limited, but for example, when winning a big hit or small hit of the special figure fluctuation game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When the balls are paid out, if the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state advantageous to the player (or the third gaming state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game When a special figure change game is performed a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined lottery is won, etc. may be mentioned.

  In step S1002, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read out from the ROM 406 in order to display the operation means image (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136, which will be described in detail later) on the decorative symbol display device 208. And so on, and the process advances to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image also serving as an operation means image described later and an elapsed time notification image accompanied with display of the operation means image. In order to display the same on the decorative symbol display device 208, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data update processing To finish the process.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image (an operation means image capable of grasping that some operation is necessary to the operation means; for example, an progress information notification image simulating the operation means) is displayed, for example, A process such as reading out effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, an effect data updating process is performed. In addition, an elapsed time notification image (an elapsed time notification image in which it is not possible to determine that the operation of the operation unit is necessary, for example, an elapsed time notification image consisting of only numbers representing elapsed time) is displayed. If it is present, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In this embodiment, although an example in which an elapsed time notification image (for example, an image of a scale of a meter) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in each embodiment described later, the elapsed time notification image is not displayed. May be If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not an operation means image is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If it is not being displayed, the process is ended. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 in the case of the image of the operation means imitating the chance button 136) is accepted and the operation is accepted. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1007. If the operation is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1007. If not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that "the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived" is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation means in step S1002, the gaming state is different. The case where it shifts to the game state etc is listed.

  In step S1007, the operation means image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including the operation means image also serving as the elapsed time notification image and the operation means image accompanied with the display of the elapsed time notification image. The same applies hereinafter) The display of the operation means image is ended. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means matches a predetermined time (T seconds) determined in advance. If it does, the process proceeds to step S1009. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S1010. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image triggered by the fact that the elapsed time of the operation means acceptance period matches the predetermined time (T seconds) determined in advance, effect data corresponding to the specific image is selected. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the operation means image is performed from the ROM 406, etc. I do.

For example, an operation means image (also an operation means image capable of grasping an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation means) serving as an elapsed time notification image. For example, a display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters according to the elapsed time) If an operation means image (for example) changes) is displayed, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed to continue the display of the operation means image. When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation means image (an operation means image which can not grasp an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation means, for example, an operation means image consisting only of an image imitating the operation means, or an operation means When an operation means image consisting only of character information representing a name (for example, a chance button) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406 in order to continue the display of the operation means image. The processing such as reading out from is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.
<Preliminary lottery process>

  Next, the advance lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the above-mentioned first sub control unit main process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the advance lottery process.

  In step S1101, the value of the big hit flag included in the command (for example, the symbol variation start command) received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and when the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won and step S1102 If the value of the jackpot flag is off, it is determined that the jackpot has not been won, and the process advances to step S1103. In step S1102, after performing a notice lottery using a lottery value corresponding to "big hit (15R system)", "big hit (sudden probability change)", or "big hit (latency change)" of a notice lottery table to be described later, step S1106 Go to

In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command (for example, the symbol variation start command) received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and when the value of the small hit flag is on, it is determined that the small hit is won. The flow advances to step S1104, and if the value of the small hit flag is off, it is determined that the small hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1105. In step S1104, after performing a notice lottery using a lottery value corresponding to "small hit" of a notice lottery table described later, the process proceeds to step S1106. Further, in step S1105, after performing a notice lottery using a lottery value corresponding to "losing" of a notice lottery table described later, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process is ended after transmitting a command including information on the lottery result of the preliminary lottery to the second sub control unit 500.
<Data table of first sub control unit>

Next, the data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
<Notice lottery table>

  The notice lottery table shown in FIG. 19 is an example of a table used for the notice lottery performed in the above-mentioned notice lottery processing, and the symbol types (results of the test) of the special drawing, the variation time of the special drawing, the notice table number, and the lottery value. It is a table in which numerical ranges are associated and stored.

  When the jackpot flag is on, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 has the item "symbol type" in the notice lottery table as "big hit (15R system)", "big hit (sudden probability change)", or "big hit ( The lottery value corresponding to “certainty change” is referred to, and a lottery for selecting any one of the notice tables 1 to 5 is performed based on the acquired random number value for the notice lottery.

  For example, when the big hit flag is on, the special symbol 1 special symbol A is special drawing A or special symbol B, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time is 15000 ms, the item "symbol type" in the notice lottery table is "big hit (15R System), the item "variation time" refers to the lottery value corresponding to "15000 ms", and when the acquired random number value for the advance lottery is 0 to 9, select the announcement table 2 and obtain the acquired announcement random deviation When the numerical value is 10-29, notice table 3 is selected. When the obtained random number for notice lottery is 30-94, notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained random number for notice lottery is 95-99, The notice table 5 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (displaced), and the variation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is displayed regardless of the random value for the notice lottery. select. In addition, the notice table 5 is selected when the big hit flag is on, and the symbol type of the special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B (or the special symbol 2 is special figure a to special figure c). It is only the case. Further, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of the special figure 1 is special view D (latency probability change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set identically. In the present embodiment, the notice lottery is performed on the small hit table for the small hit, but the advance lottery may be performed on the same table as the big hit table.
<Notice table>

  The notice table shown in FIG. 20A is an example of the notice table 4 among the notice tables described above, and is a table in which the notice mode and the numerical value range of the lottery value are associated and stored.

  When the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery described above, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. Make a notice mode lottery. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, "button pressed (once) advance notice" is selected, the acquired mode is determined, and when the acquired random number value is 10 to 24, "button pushed (twice) ) "Notice" is selected, and when the acquired random number value is 25 to 39, "conversation notice" is selected, and when the acquired random number is 40 to 59, "door opening notice" is selected, and acquired irregularity If the numerical value is 60 to 74, select "treasure box selection advance notice", if the acquired random number value is 75 to 89, select "step-up advance notice", and if the acquired random value is 90 to 99, "title Select "Notice".

  FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (d) and FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (b) are subdivisions of the contents of "Ahead to open the door", for example, the first notice. When "Open Door" is selected in the form lottery, the table corresponding to "Open Door" is shown in FIG. 20 (b), and the meter color is selected based on the acquired random number value. The second notice mode lottery to be decided is performed. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when “meter color blue → red” is selected, the table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. Then, based on the acquired random number value, a third notice mode lottery to determine the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when "Hime" Chance! "Is selected, reference is made to the table shown in FIG. 20 (d) corresponding to" Hime "Chance!" On the basis of the random number value, the fourth notice mode lottery to determine the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach is ”” is selected, the table shown in FIG. 21A corresponding to “signboard“ reach is ”” is referred to and acquired On the basis of the random number value, the fifth notice mode lottery to determine the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, in the case of selecting "Hime no Fan (Hanamaru)", a table corresponding to "Hime no Fan (Hanamaru)" shown in FIG. Based on the acquired random number value, a sixth notice mode lottery is performed to determine the next notice mode.
<Example 1 of image display of operation means>

  Next, Example 1 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered when the start timing of the reception period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives. The first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed on the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is decorated at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed in the right side display area of the display device 208.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but two operations for the chance button 136 are performed. In order to urge the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, and the display of the character information "Press the chance button!" doing.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1). An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  Although the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the same image TG2 'as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is , And is displayed below the second operation means image BG2.

  In the timing shown in (b) of the figure, a predetermined time (two seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure, and the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. It shows the timing. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (two seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. The second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, it is adjusted to the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 The image has been switched to an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed . In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (two seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (five seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 5 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 1 second) is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure indicates the timing at which a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the same. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. It is erased. In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) is displayed There is. In this example, although the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing of FIG. 7F, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the first embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the timing shown in FIG. 6A is the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example), and FIG. The timing shown in) is an example in which the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing shown in a) is the start timing of the reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the first operation of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the second operation of the chance button 136 It may be That is, the start timing of the acceptance period of the Nth (N is a positive integer) operation of the operation means may be the same timing (the same applies to the other embodiments).

In addition, when the start timing of the reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the first operation of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the second operation of the chance button 136 are the same timing. Even when there is a difference in the reception time of each reception time, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be made different. In this example, after 2 seconds have passed from the start of the operation reception, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 The elapsed time of may be notified.
<Example 2 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a second embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. In addition, since the display shown to the figure (a)-the figure (f) is the same as the example of a display shown to the said FIG. 22 (a)-(f), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 (g) shows the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to (d), that is, the state before a predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. , Indicates the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and instead of the image display, the decorative symbol display device A character image (表示) is displayed in the left display area 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure indicates the timing at which a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the same. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 Image is displayed.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are used. It is erased. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 7J, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed. The character image (爺) may be displayed instead of the display of the elapsed time notification image TG2. When the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in the example, (g) in the example) Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 7J, the character image (爺) may be displayed in place of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is received immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. There is. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. Since it is deleted and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (爺) is displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 doing. When the chance button 136 is operated during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the same figure (g)) while the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed. Alternatively, as shown in (j) of the figure, instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2, a character image (a mochi and a mochi) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows the timing immediately after a predetermined time (in this example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 are not performed, The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the second embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 3 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a third example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series.

  In the third embodiment, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied in place of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the first embodiment. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image indicating the success or failure result of the special view fluctuation game in addition to being an image notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, although the result of the pass / fail judgment is suggested using an elapsed time notification image for notifying an elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, in addition to this (or to this Alternatively, the result of the pass / fail judgment may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image to notify the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, or three or more progress information notification images may be used. In this case, at least one progress information notification image may be used to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the pass / fail determination using the progress information notification image, the other display area may be configured to suggest the result of the pass / fail determination. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives, but the display is performed at another timing For example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the third embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 4 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, a fourth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136. Means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) and a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification for notifying an elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136) is the image of the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed below.

  In addition, a second elapsed time notification for notifying an elapsed time (in this example, six seconds) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2 The image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136) is the image of the second operation means image BG2. It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is also continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) is displayed There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, so the predetermined time from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 Immediately after (6 seconds) has elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the state is continued.

  In addition, since the predetermined time (eight seconds) has passed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at this timing, the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, and the state is continued.

  FIG. 6E shows the state shown in FIG. 5B, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. A character image is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  The figure (f) shows the situation shown in the figure (e), that is, the situation before the predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Indicates the timing at which the second operation was performed. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. In the right side display area of the device 208, a character image (表示) different from the character image (殿) is displayed. Note that even if a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 11G shows a timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed because a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the fourth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 5 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a fifth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, a fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is applied in place of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the fourth embodiment. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image indicating the success or failure result of the special view fluctuation game in addition to being an image notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, although the result of the pass / fail judgment is suggested using an elapsed time notification image for notifying an elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, in addition to this (or to this Alternatively, the result of the pass / fail judgment may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image to notify the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, or three or more progress information notification images may be used. In this case, at least one progress information notification image may be used to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the pass / fail determination using the progress information notification image, the other display area may be configured to suggest the result of the pass / fail determination. Further, in this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives, but the display is performed at another timing For example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the fifth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Operational Means Image Display Embodiment 6>

  Next, a sixth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the notice effect by the above-mentioned notice lottery processing is performed. For example, when the special pattern stop symbol of the special figure 1 is determined to be the special figure A in the special pattern symbol lottery, and the fluctuation time of the special figure is determined to be 45000 ms in the variation pattern lottery. The 1 sub-control unit 400 is based on the fact that the value of the big hit flag is on, the special figure stop symbol is the special figure A, and the special figure fluctuation time has received a command including information of 45000 ms from the main control unit 300 above. A notice lottery is performed using a lottery value corresponding to a fluctuation time of 45000 ms of “big hit (15R system)” of the notice lottery table shown in FIG. Assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94 in this advance notice lottery, the advance notice table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 shown in FIG. 20A and determines the notice manner of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. Although it is performed, for example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 59, "a door open notice" will be selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the "door opening advance notice" shown in FIG. 20 (b) and determines the meter color a second time based on the acquired random number value. For example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the range of 50 to 64, "meter color blue → red" will be selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in the above-mentioned FIG. For example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess "chance!" Is selected. In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect is executed in accordance with the notice effect mode determined by the notice lottery and the notice mode lottery.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 27A, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136 An image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed on the right side display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to urge the player to operate the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the display of character information "Open the door !!!" is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, the opportunity for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1). The first operation means image BG1 in the first color (in this example, blue) with the first color (blue in this example) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreasing in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the button 136 operation. Is displayed below.

  In addition, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "Please open the door notice" at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, the letter "Open the door !!!" A display and an image simulating a door are displayed on the right side display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, a first elapsed time notification for notifying a part of the image of the advance notice effect (in this example, an image imitating a door) an elapsed time of a reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 It doubles as image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that one second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is five seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2, which also serves as the advance notice effect, is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and thus the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 1 second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). In addition, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is set to the first color (in this example, blue) as an image corresponding to the above-mentioned "meter color (blue → red)" preview effect. ) To a second color (in this example, red).

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the third color. It is changed to 4 colors (in this example, red). With such a configuration, the player may be strongly urged to operate.

  Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, the predetermined time from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 Although it has been informed that (4 seconds) has elapsed, the change of the color may indicate, for example, the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 6 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2, which also serves as the advance notice effect, is not changed.

  FIG. 6E shows the timing at which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the above-mentioned princess "chance!" The image corresponding to the preview effect of (in this example, the character display of “chance!” And the character image (princess) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that this advance notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  The figure (f) has shown the timing to which predetermined time (6 second) passed from the start timing of the reception period of operation, without operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation without the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification are notified. After erasing the images TG1-1 and TG-2, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 6 (g) is a view showing an example of reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reach display is performed after the state shown in FIG. 6 (d), (e) or (f). Is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the sixth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved. In the case of the present embodiment, the lottery is also performed for the display (the color of the meter) of the elapsed time notification image in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed in the notice table for the elapsed time notification image. In this case, the elapsed time notification image notifies only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and changes the display mode after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the color of the meter changes when T seconds elapse). It may be. In addition, the elapsed time notification image may notify only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and may not change the display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters, etc.) with the passage of time. .
<Operational Means Image Display Embodiment 7>

  Next, a seventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the notice effect by the above-mentioned notice lottery processing is performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, the opportunity for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1). The first operation means image BG1 in the first color (in this example, blue) with the first color (blue in this example) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreasing in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the button 136 operation. Is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that one second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is five seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that the reception period of 3 seconds has elapsed. Further, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (this one for notifying the remaining time (3 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 above the first operation means image BG1) In the example, an image of numerical information is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, at this timing, an image notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is one second is displayed as the remaining time notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 6 seconds have elapsed. Moreover, at this timing, the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds as the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136) ) Is displayed.

  In addition, the figure (f) is the figure which showed an example of the omission display in case the success or failure result of a special figure change game is a removal, and the figure (g) shows the big hit when the success result of a special figure change game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these state of the off display or the big hit display, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state (during the period of receiving the operation) before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button If the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the display is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Operational Means Image Display Embodiment 8>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, an eighth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the notice effect by the above-mentioned notice lottery processing is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the right of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period (6 seconds in this example) of operations of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a treasure box, white) corresponding to the operation of the button is displayed on the right side display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the left button of the setting operation unit 137 A corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box, white) is displayed in the left display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, in order to prompt the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the display of the character information "Select a treasure box to open with the direction key!" It is displayed above the area.

  Also, for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation unit image BG1 and the second operation unit image BG2. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Are displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a first color (in this example, blue).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (one second) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button 137 has passed one second (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button 137 has passed one second (the remaining time of the reception period is two seconds) is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (in this example, blue) to the second as an image corresponding to the preview effect of “color of treasure box (blue → red)”. The color of (in this example, red) is changed.

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is changed to red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 Although it has been notified that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to indicate the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button 137 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 which also serves as the advance notice effect is not changed.

  In the same figure (e), in the state before a predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the operation of the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted, An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing how a book pops out of a treasure box) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, in the same figure (f), in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, It indicates when the operation was performed. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing how a book pops out of a treasure box) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. In addition, when the judgment result of the special figure fluctuation game is the big hit, as shown in the figure (g), it is possible to do the announcement production whose reliability and expectation are higher than the announcement production of the figure (f). It may be configured.

  (H) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the right button and left button of the setting operation unit 137 being operated. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is erased because a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the right button and left button of the setting operation unit 137 being operated. ing. The first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in accordance with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 9 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a ninth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the display of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is performed.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of holdings of the special figure variation game, and as an animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "increase animation of hold icon"), the hold order changes due to the previous hold being digested, and the hold icon is displayed at another display position (for example, the position next to the left) Animation to be executed when moving to) (hereinafter referred to as "moving animation of holding icon"), animation to be executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the pre-reading result etc. Change of hold icon), the hold is digested and the hold icon Animation that is executed when it is removed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "deletion icon deletion animation"), when the priority of the special figure on the priority side increases, the reserve icon for the special figure on the non-priority side There is an animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “retraction animation of a hold icon”) that is executed when the In addition to the animation described above, the animation is executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease in the hold or change in the hold icon) Hereinafter, there may be “waiting icon pending animation”. A plurality of animations of increase, movement, change, deletion, evacuation, and standby of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  In addition, after the suspension is digested and the special figure variation game is started, one variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game may be displayed. The fluctuating icon is, for example, a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon, and is displayed as an animation of a texture image in the same manner as the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of the success or failure of the change according to the display mode (the change notification), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be considered as a kind of suspension icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure variation game is suspended.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is an area different from the hold icon display area when the hold is digested. Animation to move as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movement animation between hold and change icons") Animation to change the display mode of a hold icon to the display mode of change icons (hereinafter "between hold and change icons" Change animation (in some cases). These animations may be combined and performed simultaneously. If the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, it is possible to omit the execution of the change animation between the hold and change icons.

  As the animation related to the fluctuation icon, an animation executed during the execution of the special drawing fluctuation game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "wait animation of the fluctuation icon"), or the special icon fluctuation game is ended and the fluctuation icon Animation executed when the character is erased (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “animation animation of the fluctuation icon”), animation executed when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is changed halfway (hereinafter, “change of the fluctuation icon” Sometimes referred to as animation). These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination with one another. Also, the waiting animation of the changing icon may be executed simultaneously with the moving animation between the holding and changing icons or the changing animation.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing which the special figure change game ends, and is performing stop display of the decoration symbol. At this timing, by displaying four reserve icons (in this example, circular images) PI1 to PI4 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are four reserves of special figure fluctuation games.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was put on hold is started, and the hold of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing the change animation to change the first (first) pending icon PI1 displayed in the pending icon display area to the fluctuating icon CI, the fluctuating icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The CI is displayed stopped. The fluctuation icon CI is a fluctuation icon for suggesting the result of the special drawing fluctuation display corresponding to the first reserved icon PI1. In this example, the character icon "chance" and the star-shaped graphic Configured.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136. An image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered by the fluctuating icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. .

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below , And is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 3 as a first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  In the case of (f) in the figure, in the state shown in (c) of the figure, that is, in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting a result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation (this In the example, the text information "reach!" Is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information indicating that the special image fluctuation result is covered by the fluctuation icon CI makes the part of the information invisible or difficult to recognize.

  In addition, when operation of the chance button 136 is performed before predetermined time passes from the start timing of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136, as shown to the figure (g), a 1st operation means image After deleting the BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the success or failure of the special view change may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not illustrated, even after the fluctuation icon CI is deleted in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, even if information indicating the result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation is displayed Good.

  In addition, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (f) or (g) may be performed. Also, FIG. 7 (h) is a view showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display is displayed after any of the states of FIG. 5 (e), (f) and (g). It is also good.

According to the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 10 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a tenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the display of the hold icon and the notice effect is performed.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing which the special figure change game ends, and is performing stop display of the decoration symbol. At this timing, by displaying four reserve icons (in this example, circular images) PI1 to PI4 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are four reserves of special figure fluctuation games.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was put on hold is started, and the hold of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3. At this timing, a deletion animation is performed to delete the first pending icon PI1 displayed in the pending icon display area, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the chance An image resembling a button is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below It is displayed on.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game, a notice effect is produced (in this example, the upside-down character image (display of an image having a signboard written “Like?” Is displayed)) There is.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image Everything in TG1 is considered invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be in a state in which the visual recognition is not possible or the visual recognition is difficult.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, so the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state in which it is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state in which it is not visible.

  FIG. 6F shows the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting a result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation (this In the example, the text information "super heat !!!" is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information that indicates the result of the special feature change is covered by the image of the notice effect, so that the part of the information is in an invisible state.

  In addition, when operation of the chance button 136 is performed before predetermined time passes from the start timing of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136, as shown to the figure (g), a 1st operation means image After deleting the BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the advance notice effect, information suggesting the result of the special figure change may be displayed.

  In addition, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (f) or (g) may be performed. Also, FIG. 7 (h) is a view showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display is displayed after any of the states of FIG. 5 (e), (f) and (g). It is also good.

According to the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 11 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, an eleventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, the display of the notice effect based on the regularity determination of the common drawing fluctuation display and the common drawing fluctuation display is configured to be performed.

  The same figure (a) has shown the timing by which the common drawing fluctuation display was started during special drawing fluctuation display, and the presentation accompanying the said common drawing fluctuation display was started. At this timing, a common drawing fluctuation display is started in the common drawing fluctuation display area 208s, and a notice effect is produced based on the judgment of the common drawing fluctuation display, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination of the common drawing variation game is performed using the common drawing determination table of FIG. 109 described later, the common drawing control state is low probability, and the acquired random number is 90 to 99. Since it is a numerical value range of, an example is shown in the case where the symbol 2 per common drawing (general drawing decoration 2 shown in FIG. 105 (d) described later) is selected. Note that details of the pass / fail determination of the common drawing change game using the common drawing determination table of FIG. 109 will be described in the third embodiment.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below It is displayed on.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (in this example, a display in which the character image (princess) appears from the bottom) is performed based on the common drawing change display and the judgment of success or failure of the common drawing change game.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the period of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that one second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is five seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible. In addition to (or in place of) this, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, while continuing the advance notice effect based on the success or failure result of the common drawing fluctuation game, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed for 3 seconds as the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the remainder of the acceptance period An image notifying that the time is 3 seconds is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in an invisible state.

  The same figure (e) has shown the timing which performed stop display of the common figure. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information (in this example, the character image (Hime) has a fan) indicating the result of the success or failure of the general drawing change. Image is displayed. Further, as described above, since the symbol 2 per common drawing is selected in the common drawing variation game, a common drawing decorative symbol corresponding to "general drawing decoration 2" is displayed in the common drawing variation display area 208s.

  FIG. 6F shows the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting a result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation (this In the example, the text information "is it a chance?" Is displayed. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (e) or (f) may be performed.

According to the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 12 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a twelfth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the display of the hold icon and the notice effect is performed.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing which the special figure change game ends, and is performing stop display of the decoration symbol. At this timing, by displaying the three suspension icons PI1 to PI3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are three suspension of special figure variation games. Note that, in this example, displaying the character image (Sabohani) as the third reserve icon PI3 suggests the result of the success or failure of the third special figure change game pre-reading.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was suspended is started, and the suspension of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 3 to 2. At this timing, a deletion animation is performed to delete the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are placed at the positions of the adjacent hold icons. There are moving animations to move to.

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) has shown the timing to which the movement animation of pending | holding icon PI2 and PI3 was complete | finished. At this timing, a first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below It is displayed on. However, in order to display the first operation means image BG1 behind the reserve icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the reserve icon PI3 and is in an invisible state. In addition to (or in place of) this, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be made invisible or hard to recognize with the hold icon PI3 (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 3 as a first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  In (f) of the figure, in the state shown in (b) of the figure, that is, in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the operation of the chance button 136 is It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the special figure fluctuation after the special figure fluctuation (in this example, , And a notice (in this example, text information "That's hot after 2 revolutions!") Which indicates the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation after 2 revolutions. The notice is an example of “prefetch notice” that indicates the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation after the special figure fluctuation.

  In this example, the display of the reserve icons PI2 and PI3 is not deleted, but may be deleted simultaneously with the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. Further, FIG. 7 (g) is a view showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display may be displayed after any state of FIG. 6 (e) or (f).

  According to the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to further urge the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, image display of operation means of the modification of the twelfth embodiment. In this example, as shown in (c) to (e) of the figure, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a hold icon PI3. It is considered to be visible without being covered by

According to the operation means image display of the modification of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 13 of image display of operation means>

  A thirteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described next with reference to FIGS. 35 to 36 are diagrams showing the image display of the operation means of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, a part of one of the two operation means images is configured to be covered with a variation icon.

  FIG. 35 (a) shows the timing at which the special figure variation game is ended and the stop display of the decorative symbol is being performed. At this timing, by displaying four reserve icons (in this example, circular images) PI1 to PI4 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are four reserves of special figure fluctuation games.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was put on hold is started, and the hold of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation to change the first (first) pending icon PI1 displayed in the pending icon display area to the fluctuating icon CI, the fluctuating icon is displayed on the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The CI is displayed stopped. The fluctuation icon CI is a fluctuation icon for suggesting the result of the special drawing fluctuation display corresponding to the first reserved icon PI1. In this example, the character icon "chance" and the star-shaped graphic Configured.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating the chance button) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered by the fluctuating icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. .

  In addition, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is decorated at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed in the right side display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered by the fluctuation icon CI, and all the second operation means image BG2 can be viewed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below , And is displayed behind the back of the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the second operation means is the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, a predetermined time (two seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. It shows the timing. At this timing, since a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 2 as a first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  Further, at this timing, the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, so the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. Second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying an elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, an elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 In addition, it has switched to the image of the meter scale (filling part) gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (two seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. It is erased. In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) is displayed There is.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same. At this timing, a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, so the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. It is erased.

  FIG. 36 (i) shows the timing when the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. It shows. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. A character image is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (殿) is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the character image (殿) is in an invisible or hard-to-see state. (J) to (k) show the chance button before the predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display of the figure (i). The example of a display when the 2nd operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  (L) in the same figure shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. It shows. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. A character image (爺) is displayed in the right side display area of the device 208. Even when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG. Good. Note that (m) of the figure shows a display example after the character image (() is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of (l) of the figure.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, image display of operation means of the modification of the thirteenth embodiment. In this example, as in the fourth embodiment, the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing.

  In addition, with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying an elapsed time of a reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. Then, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is configured to be covered with the fluctuation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the same elapsed time (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is changed by the fluctuation icon CI. Since it is covered, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.

  According to the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  The position where the fluctuation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon, and only one image of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the fluctuation icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image of may be displayed at a position covered by the fluctuation icon.

  Moreover, even if only two images among the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the position covered by the fluctuation icon Preferably, at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the fluctuation icon. Preferably, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the fluctuation icon. The first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

In addition, the image displayed in the position covered by the variation icon may be at least partially covered, may be partially covered, or may be entirely covered. .
<Example 14 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a fourteenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the fourteenth embodiment in time series.

In this embodiment, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 27) (in this example, the first image By covering the elapsed time notification image TG1-1) with the image of the notice effect shown in (b) to (d) of the figure, a part of the one image (first elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is It is configured to be in an invisible or hard-to-see state. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered with the character image (殿) at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (b), and the character image (hime) is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is covered. Further, in the present embodiment, the advance lottery process using FIGS. 19 to 21 is performed as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 27). The other displays are the same as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 27), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.
<Example 15 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a fifteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the embodiment 15 in time series.

In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 and all of the first operation means image BG1 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 28) are shown. By covering with the image of the advance notice effect shown in (d), all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 can not be visually recognized or visually recognized. It is configured to be in a difficult state. The other displays are the same as those of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 28), and the description thereof will be omitted.
<Example 16 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a sixteenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the sixteenth embodiment in time series.

In this embodiment, as shown in (b) to (h) in the figure, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the eighth embodiment (refer to FIG. 29) is a judgment result of success or failure of the common view fluctuation display. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 is configured so as to be in a state in which a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible or difficult to be recognized by covering the image with a notice effect effect indicating the. The other displays are the same as in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 29), and thus the description thereof is omitted.
<Example 17 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a seventeenth embodiment of display of an operation means image performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the seventeenth embodiment in time series.

  The present embodiment corresponds to the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6B, a part of the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is partially Is displayed so as to overlap on the operation means image BG1. That is, in the present embodiment, by covering a part of the first operation means image BG1 with the second operation means image BG2, the first operation means image BG1 is in a state in which a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to view It was constructed in

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 6B, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the first and second operations of the chance button 136, the same figure. When the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, as shown in (d) of the figure, it is changed to the first operation means image BG1. When the character image (殿) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (図) is changed to the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which two operation means images the same as the number of times of operation are displayed when prompting for two operations, for example, when the operation of three or more times is urged, the operation The same number of operation means images as the number may be displayed. Moreover, when prompting for one operation, the number of operation means images may be displayed more than the number of times of the operation. In this case, the player may be strongly urged to perform one operation.
<Example 18 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a eighteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the eighteenth embodiment in time series.

  At the timing shown in the figure (d), in response to the occurrence of a new hold of the special figure fluctuation game, while performing the increase animation of the hold icon, the second hold icon PI2 after increase (in this example, the chance A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first retention icon PI1 are configured to be covered by the icon combining the image simulating the button 136 and the star-shaped figure). . That is, in the present embodiment, by partially covering the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 with the hold icon PI2, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 can not be viewed or It is configured to be in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  With such a configuration, the player can draw attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon, which has become invisible or difficult to recognize, so that the player can urge to operate the operation means. In order to concentrate on the game than before, there are cases where it is possible to increase the operation rate of the game console.

  Further, the hold icon PI2 doubles as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. An image indicating the result of success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 from the operation icon image (an icon obtained by combining the image simulating the chance button 136 and the star-shaped figure) with the display mode of the hold icon PI2 In this example, it is configured to change to a character image (Sabohani) that suggests that the success or failure result of the special image variation game pre-reading is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain game information by means of the holding icon changing by the operation of the operation means, so that it is possible to further promote the operation on the operation means and to enhance the interest of the game. is there.

  In this example, the first of the images before change of the reserve icon PI 2 (an icon obtained by combining the image simulating the chance button 136 and the star-shaped figure) and the image after change (character image (Sabohani)) Although it is configured to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the changed image may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, the second operation of the operating means can be reliably performed after prompting the first operation of the operating means, and there may be cases where it is possible to prevent a decline in the game intention.

Also, in the first operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), a notice effect on the variation is started, and in the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. By changing the display mode of the hold icon, the display related to the change may be displayed with priority over the display related to the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. In addition, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation unit (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Alternatively, by operating the chance button 136 once, both of the notice effect relating to the change and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.
<Example 19 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a nineteenth embodiment of display of an operation means image performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the nineteenth embodiment in time series.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f are displayed in the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is provided. The special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e displays the success or failure result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f is an area for displaying the success / failure result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, For example, during the special figure variation game (during special figure variation), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed in a blinking manner.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception start timing of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon and the fluctuation display are moved by the right door 246b. By covering all the decorative symbols in, the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a part of the holding icon, and all of the changing decorative symbols are invisible or hard to see It is configured to be in the state.

  With such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decoration pattern that are not visible or difficult to see, and therefore the user is urged to operate the operation means. In addition, since the player will be more concentrated in the game than in the past, it may be possible to increase the operating rate of the game console. Note that the shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the decorative symbol in change. It is also good.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6D, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, or the shielding device A notch may be formed in a part of 246, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f may be visible through the notch. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably grasp gaming information important to the player, such as the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and therefore, it may be possible to prevent a decline in gaming intention.
<Modification of operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image>

  FIG. 44 is a view showing a modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, an image for reception start displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means comes, and a half of the reception time of the operation means The image for the acceptance period half progress displayed which is displayed when it passes, and the image for acceptance completion displayed when the acceptance end timing of an operation means comes are shown.

  In the same figure (a), an image imitating the design of the operation means is adopted as the operation means image, and an elapsed time notification image (or a remaining time notification image) is metered according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is adopted in which the scale of the mark (filled portion) gradually decreases. Further, in the same figure (b), an image obtained by simplifying the operation means is adopted as the operation means image, and an elapsed time notification image (or a remaining time notification image) is used according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used in which the divisions (filled parts) of the meter divided into multiple sections gradually decrease. Further, in FIG. 6C, an image obtained by simplifying the operation means is adopted as the operation means image, and an elapsed time notification image (or a remaining time notification image) is used according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used that shows how lamps (including those by means of light emitting means such as LEDs and those by means of display means such as LCDs) are gradually turned off.

  The figure (d) is comprised so that the remaining time of the reception period of operation may be counted down as a remaining time alerting | reporting image, and the figure (e) may be an elapsed time alerting | reporting image (or remaining time alerting | reporting image). The color of the image is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time (or the remaining time) of the operation reception period, and the image is erased immediately before the reception period, and FIG. The notification image (or the remaining time notification image) is configured to gradually darken the color of the image in accordance with the elapsed time (or the remaining time) of the reception period of the operation. These operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment has at least the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. And at least one display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub control unit 400) capable of executing a plurality of displays, wherein at least one of the plurality of displays is displayed. Is a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 28 (a) to (e)), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (For example, remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in (c) to (e) in FIG. 28), and the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means ( When And the second display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a remaining time notification image for notifying the remaining time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136). And the display means can display at least the second display while the first display is displayed, and the display means is a display of at least one of the plurality of displays. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, to display an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) Display regarding the operation means by the display (display concerning the operation means, notice effect effect, symbol variation display of common drawing, hold icon etc.) to count down the remaining time At least partially hide) ones, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming table of the first embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for receiving the operation of the operation means (for example, the scale of the meter according to the elapsed time for the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 And at least the second display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the operation of the chance button 136). At least the remaining time of the reception period may be counted down).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation means is started (for example, FIG. 27). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, a variety of displays can be performed, and it may be possible to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, the player may be able to easily participate in the game.

  In addition, the first display (for example, a meter) may be a display mode different from the second display (for example, a number).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to more strongly prompt the player to operate the operation means by the notification by various displays. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to entertain the player by notification by various displays.

  In addition, the first and second displays may end (for example, delete an elapsed time notification image or a remaining time notification image) when at least the reception period is completed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, it is provided with a propriety determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, common drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the propriety determination when there is a formation of a qualification determination condition, and at least one of the first and second displays One of them may be one that suggests the result of the pass / fail determination (for example, the third elapsed time notification image TG3 illustrated in FIG. 24).

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choice of how to play by the player.

  In addition, a third display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIGS. 28A to 28E) notifying that it is a reception period of the operation of the operation means is displayed on the plurality of displays. And the third display does not report an elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for receiving the operation of the operation means, and the third display is during the reception period, It may be at least executable during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game caused by prompting the player to perform the operation more than necessary. Also, in some cases, the display can be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  In addition, the 3rd display which only alert | reports that it is an acceptance period of operation of an operation means may be displayed, and even if the 3rd display which alert | reports that it is an acceptance period of operation of an operation means at least is displayed. Good.

  In addition, the third display may not notify only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. The notification may not be performed, or at least the elapsed time after a specific time after the start of the reception period may be notified, or only the elapsed time after a specific time after the start of the reception period may be notified. It may be one.

  Also, the third display may be at least executable during the execution of the first display, or may be at least executable during the execution of the first display, or It may be at least executable during the execution of the second display or may be at least executable during the execution of the second display. Also, the third display may be at least feasible during the execution of both the first and second displays, or only during the execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed on at least one of the display of at least one of the first and the second display and the reception period of the operation at least partially (or only partially or completely) when the reception period of the operation overlaps. Alternatively, the acceptance result of the operation may be reflected on only one display or both displays.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed on at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the display of at least one of the first and the second display and the reception period of the operation overlap. The acceptance result of the operation may be reflected on (or only the third display or all the first to third displays).

  In addition, the plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 27C) displayed when a specific time has elapsed, and the fourth Is displayed according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red) ) May be performed at least. With such a configuration, the player may be strongly urged to operate.

  In addition, the fourth display may perform only notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period, or at least give (or only give an advance notice) a notification indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment. It may be that which does not give at least (or only a notice) a notice that indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  In addition, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment has a plurality of operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at a position at which the player can operate at least A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing a display of at least one of the plurality of displays, At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display relating to the operation means (a first operation means image BG1, a second operation means Image BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display means displays a third display (for example, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 30). At least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying a time can be displayed, and the display means at least displays a fourth display (for example, a part of the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 30). It is possible, and when the display position of the third display and the display position of the fourth display coincide, the display means gives priority to the fourth display over the third display. Display (for example, display in the foreground), and the third display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display The game console is at least a part of the other display of the first display and the second display.

  According to the gaming table of the first embodiment, it may be possible to further urge the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for receiving the operation of the operation means (for example, the scale of the meter according to the elapsed time for the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 An image may be displayed at least) in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, a part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 30; the first operation shown in FIG. The measure image BG1 (a part or all of the image simulating the chance button) is at least a part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 30), A part or all of the second operation means image BG2 (image imitating the chance button) to be shown may be at least a part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to notice the reception period and it may be possible to further prompt the player's operation.

  In addition, the display means displays a fifth display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIG. 30) when a specific time elapses after the reception of the operation of the operation means is started. The display means is capable of displaying at least the imitation image), and when the display position of the fourth display matches the display position of the fifth display, the display means The fourth display is also displayed preferentially (for example, displayed in the foreground), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. It may be

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 30) may be a display mode different from the fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 30). Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, different transmittances, different colors, or different sizes. In addition, a part of the third display (shape, color, transparency, size, etc. may be used so that different display modes may be used as long as they have the same shape or different colors. Different display modes may be used as long as one or more of the fourth displays (at least one of the shape, the color, the transmittance, the size, and the like) are different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, a part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) so that colors may be different or shapes may be the same and the same display mode may be used. And a part of the fourth display (at least one of the shape, the color, the transmittance, the size, etc., which matches the part of the third display), The display mode may be the same.

  In addition, the third display (for example, an elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 30) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI illustrated in FIG. 30) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With this configuration, the notification of the reception period may be easily viewed, and the player may be able to reliably perform the operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to burn the player and urge to press a button. Also, in some cases, it is possible to concentrate on the game and prevent the player from getting bored.

  (A) In addition, the second display (for example, the advance notice) is provided with a propriety determination unit (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, common drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the propriety determination when there is a satisfaction determination condition. The indication of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. Further, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  (B) In addition, the first display (related to the operation means) is provided with a propriety determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, common drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the propriety determination when there is establishment of the success or failure determination condition. Display) may be a notice that indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. Also, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the advance notice.

  In the case of the above (A) and (B), at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display or both displays) implies the result of the judgment of yes or no. The notice may be included, and the first indication and the second indication may be a notice indicating the same (or different) result of the pass / fail judgment. For example, both may be the success / failure determination results of the special drawing, and both may be the success / failure determination results of the common drawing. In addition, one may be the success or failure judgment result of the special drawing, and the other may be the success or failure judgment result of the common drawing, and the other is the result of the judgment of success or failure next time It may be pre-read) or both may be different judgment result of the change (pre-reading of special figure / general drawing).

  (C) In addition, when at least a part of at least one of the first, second and third displays is made to be hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display is made to draw more attention There are times when you can. Note that only part (or all) of at least one of the first, second and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) In addition, if at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, it may be possible to make the hidden display more noticeable. Also, hidden displays may be able to draw more attention. Note that one of the plurality of other displays is at least partially (or partially or completely) hidden by the one display, and the other is at least partially displayed by the one display. Or, only part or all may be hidden.

In the case of the above (C) and (D), the third indication may at least give a notice that suggests the result of the yes / no determination (or only a notice that indicates the result of the yes / no determination), The third display may be at least an announcement of the reception period of the operation means (or only an announcement of the reception period of the operation means), or a notice of the result of the determination of acceptance or rejection and a reception period of the operation means At least one of the notifications (or only one or both, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.
Second Embodiment

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 77 are basically used only in the description of the second embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIGS. 44 to 77 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 44 to FIG. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game arcade installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertically rectangular game pedestal base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 46 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball that has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that a counter is built in), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the lower-side full-tank sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high confidence) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view starting port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the signal is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<First sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, shielding device sensor 430 and chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 which outputs a detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 434 (displaying an image on the symbol display device 208) Are connected Oh and display processor), the.
<Second sub control unit>

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special figures from "Special figure A" to "Special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display, and the white parts in the figure turn off The locations of the segments to be displayed are indicated, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit design which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, each being a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here corresponds to the same thing as 2R time short no hit big hit. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 49 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit corresponding to 15R big hit in the symbol display area 208a-208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of notifying 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which the same three odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 To stop.

  In addition, the 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure E" hidden probability change, the 2R big hit, which is usually called "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", is "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when reporting 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R big hit called sudden shortness of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 49 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 50 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 48, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display pattern of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off drive control so that the normal symbol display device 210 is turned off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to become the display pattern of the off symbol. The 7 segment LED is on / off drive control. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 49 (c) and the dislocated symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 49 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is out, the common drawing out flag is turned on as described later. When the out-of-normal-pattern deviation flag is on, even in the common-diagram state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the in-use drawing suspension time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in step S225 and step S227, the special figure status update process is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed. Perform (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation time passes (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag 49 (a) shown in FIG. 49 (a), the jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the common figure probability change flag is on. Special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, if general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, common probability When the variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability Fluctuation flag is off. If the fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, if the first out flag is on In the special pattern I, when the second out flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on / off to control the special pattern I, and the RAM 308 In the setting area of, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and it is for solving this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed as step S229 and step S231. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230. The special drawing related lottery process will be described in detail later.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set as command data.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 50 is performed. Return to

On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.
<First sub control unit main processing>

  First, in step S301 of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

In step S311, the chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136 is monitored, and when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is used as effect data according to pressing of the chance button 136. Perform processing to change. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a button reception period is provided which enables reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 136 during the variable display of the special figure and the decorative symbol. This button acceptance period shall begin counting when a predetermined time has elapsed from changes initiated (e.g., when the t ₀ seconds have elapsed in FIG. 57 (b)).

  Further, at the start of the button reception period, effect data for notifying the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received is prepared, and in the image control processing described later, for example, FIG. The notification (in this example, display of an image imitating the chance button 136) as shown in FIG. Further, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected during the button reception period, effect data for giving a notice is prepared, and as shown in the right side of FIG. 58D, for example, in image control processing described later. Make a notice (in this example, the text "It's very hot !!" is displayed). Then, while the timing is ended after the button acceptance period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed, a process for deleting the notification or notice of the button acceptance period is performed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.
<First sub control unit command reception interrupt processing>

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.
<First sub control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 52A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In the following step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.
<First Sub Control Unit Image Control Processing>

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for

  In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

The process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.
<Second sub control unit main processing>

  First, in step S701 of the main process of the second sub control unit 500, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.
<Second sub control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.
<Second sub control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 52A. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.
<Data table of main control unit 300>

  Next, a data table stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a special drawing related lottery process will be described.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 . The special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table are the stop symbol of the special figure, the fluctuation time of the special figure, the random number selection range, the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table It is a data table in which numbers are associated and stored.

  The main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 change time determination table in the special figure 1 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the special result judgment result of the special figure 1 change game. For example, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, when the special figure A or the special figure B is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the table 1 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific fluctuation time from among one or more fluctuation times corresponding to the selected table by lottery using a random number value. For example, when the table number is Table 1 and the acquired random number is 500, a fluctuation time 15000 ms (per normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 0 to 1000 is selected.

Further, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 change time determination table in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the special figure 2 change game success / failure determination result. For example, when special drawing I or special drawing J is selected as a stop symbol of special drawing 2 because the success or failure determination result of special drawing 2 fluctuation game is out, for example, table 9 is selected as a table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific fluctuation time from among one or more fluctuation times corresponding to the selected table by lottery using a random number value. For example, when the table number is the table 9 and the acquired random number value is 55000, the fluctuation time 10000 ms (normal reach is lost) corresponding to the random number selection range 50001 to 60000 is selected.
<Advance notice effect>

  Next, details of the effects (a series of notice effects related to the notice) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the determination result of the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) described above will be described. This effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "preliminary notice") that suggests the player the result of the determination of yes / no during the change display of the decorative symbol. Further, the effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “informing”) for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 to give the above-mentioned advance notice. That is, in the series of notice effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (notification) prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed first, and the symbol is displayed when the player operates the chance button 136. While the variable display is being performed, it is changed to an effect (preliminary notice) that suggests the player the result of the judgment of yes or no. At this time, the effect (notification) for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 may also be set according to the result of the determination of success or failure, and may play a function (preliminary function) to suggest the result of determination of success or failure to the player. The chance button 136 is set to be effective when it is operated within a predetermined reception period, and the player is notified of the button reception period in various notification modes.

  More specifically, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on in the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S229 and S231). If the big hit flag is on, one of the multiple big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special figures A to F) is determined. If the big hit flag is not on, it is determined whether the small hit flag is on. When the small hit flag is on, one of the plurality of small hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special figure G to special figure F) is determined. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is on, one symbol is determined from among a plurality of missing symbols (in the present embodiment, special figures I to J in this embodiment). When the stop symbol of the special drawing is determined, the fluctuation time is determined according to the above-mentioned special drawing change time determination table (see FIG. 54) according to the stop symbol. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), a symbol change start command including at least information on the result of determination of success or failure (stop symbol of the special figure) and fluctuation time is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines, in the above-mentioned effect control process (step S309), the result of determination of success or failure included in the symbol change start command received from the main control unit 300 (stop symbol of special view) and the change time. The advance lottery process is executed based on the notification pattern determination table stored in advance for each stop symbol and fluctuation time of the special view in the ROM 406 and the random number value acquired from the predetermined random number counter.

  For example, when the main control unit 300 receives a 15R big hit symbol (special figure B) and a variation time per super reach A (45000 ms), the main control unit 300 receives table number 2 from a plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. A notification mode determination table for per super reach A is selected, and a notice lottery process is executed. Then, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the notification mode determination table for per super reach A, a notification mode in which the mode changes to notification B → D is selected. Also, for example, in the case of receiving the first out-of-shape symbol (special figure I) and the variation time for super reach A (40000 ms) from the main control unit 300, a table is selected from a plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The notification mode determination table for number 12 Super Reach A is selected, and the notice lottery process is executed. Then, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the notification mode determination table for Super Reach A shift, the notification mode in which the mode of notification F continues and the mode does not change halfway is selected.

  Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 executes, for example, a notice lottery processing as shown in FIG. 55 at the start of variation of the special drawing and the decorative symbol. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the success or failure determination result acquired from the main control unit 300 is a big hit (whether the stop symbol is a special figure A to F). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1003. If not, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1003, a lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the big hit table among the notification mode determination tables. The notification mode determination table is determined based on the jackpot symbol received from the main control unit 300 and the fluctuation time. For example, the jackpot table of table number 2 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a notification mode determination table for per super reach A selected in the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table of FIG. Although the details are not shown in the case of the reach, a notification mode determination table is similarly prepared. Further, in step S1003, based on the notification mode determination table for per super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of a big hit via Super Reach A, if the random number is 0 to 4, select "Attack F continued mode (mode in which the notification does not change)" as the notification mode, and the random number is 5 to 19 In the case, select "mode to switch from notification A to notification E", select "mode to switch from notification B to notification D" if the random number is 20 to 49, and "notify if the random value is 50 to 99 selecting a mode "switching from C ₁ to notification _{C 2.} In the present embodiment, since the numerical value range of the random number is set to 0 to 99, for example, the probability of selecting “a mode for continuing the notification F” as a notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100). If there is a big hit on the special view, the probability that "the mode of continuing the notification F" is selected most among all the notification modes is low.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is a predetermined fluctuation time. If it is a predetermined fluctuation time, it will progress to Step S1007, and if not, it will progress to Step S1009. The predetermined change time here is a lottery using special drawing result of determination (stop symbol) and random number value of 0 to 65535 based on the table shown in FIG. 54 in the special drawing related lottery process. It means the fluctuation time of the special figure determined by. In the present embodiment, the case of drawing the notification mode in the next step S1007 is removed, limited to the case of performing effects relating to the normal reach, super reach A off or super reach B off, and omission of shortening or super shortening is excluded. It is supposed to be In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the special drawing is a small hit, the notification mode is determined from the removal table.

In step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the out-of-table of the notification mode determination table. For example, the out-of-table table of table number 12 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56 is the notification mode determination table for Super Reach A shift selected in the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table of FIG. Similarly to the case of, in the case of other reach or break, a notification mode determination table for advance notice is prepared similarly. Further, in step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period for the notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for the super reach A in FIG. That is, when passing through Super Reach A, if the random number value is 0 to 49, select "Attach mode to continue the notification F" as the notification mode, and if the random number value is 50 to 79, "A notification from the notification A Select the mode to switch to E, and select the mode to switch from notification B to notification D if the random number value is 80 to 94, and change the notification C ₁ to notification C ₂ if the random value is 95 to 99. Select the mode to switch. In addition, the probability of selecting "a mode to switch from a notice C ₁ to a notice C ₂ " as a notice mode is 1/20 (= 5/100), and when the judgment result of the special view is not a big hit, "the notice C ₁ There is a low probability that the mode of “switching from the notification C ₂ to the notification C ₂ ” is selected most among all the notification modes. In step S1009, a command is transmitted to various devices (for example, VDP 434 which control the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208) which performs a notice, and this control flow is ended.

In the above notification modes, in the notification mode in which the notification X is switched to the notification Y, the first notification mode is referred to as a first notification mode, and the notification mode which is switched thereafter is referred to as a second notification mode. Further, at least a notification period is set in each of the modes of the above-mentioned notices A to F. For example, the broadcast A is one second broadcasting period, informing B is broadcast period 2 seconds, the notification C ₁ and C ₂ are broadcasting period is 3 seconds, the notification D is broadcasting period is 4 seconds, the notification E is broadcasting period is 5 seconds The notification F is set such that the notification period is 6 seconds. And when it is elected by the aspect which switches from the 1st informing aspect to the 2nd informing aspect, the informing period according to the 1st informing aspect (hereinafter, also referred to as the 1st informing period) and the informing period according to the 2nd informing aspect (below A period obtained by adding the second notification period and the second notification period) is set to coincide with the button reception period.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, in this notice lottery process, details of the notice are based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection received from the main control unit 300, a predetermined notice lottery table stored in advance in the ROM 406, and the aforementioned random value. It also determines whether the content is displayed (for example, if the button is pressed, the character display of "super heat!", The character display of "...", Or the like is performed).
<Example 1 of Informing Mode of Remaining Time>

  Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of the reception period of the chance button 136 notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 as a result of the above-mentioned advance lottery process will be described using FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. Here, in the case where the success / failure determination result is a 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), in the notification mode determination table for per super reach A of table No. 2 shown in FIG. A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification B (first notification mode) is switched to "the notification D (second notification mode)" halfway.

  As described above, the operation of the chance button 136 is valid only during a preset period (button reception period). The button reception period is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a format in which the remaining time is known (here, in the form of a rectangular meter), and the remaining amount of the button reception period is informed Ru. The notification mode can be set in various modes using parameters such as a notification period, the color of the meter, the initial amount of the meter at the start of notification, and the amount of decrease per unit time of the meter (reduction rate).

In the mode of the notification B in the first embodiment, the meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (d), the meter is displayed in a state of being partially overlapped with the front of the decorative symbol in motion. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the meter is displayed full at the start of the notification according to the mode of the notification B, and gradually decreases as time passes. The reduction rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate of the button reception period (the actual decrease rate of the remaining time).

Further, in the mode of notification D, the meter is displayed in a special color (for example, red) during the notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front of the moving decorative symbol. At the start of the notification according to the mode of the notification D, the remaining amount of the meter immediately before (at the end of the notification according to the mode of the notification B) is maintained, and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter is set to match the actual rate of decrease of the button acceptance period.

  In FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, (a) is the start time of fluctuation of the special drawing and the decorative symbol, (b) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, and (c) is the remaining time of the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode has changed, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is completed.

In this example, as the first of the notification manner, during the broadcasting period of T ₂ seconds (e.g. 2 seconds) and displays the meter in the reference color. The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front of the moving decorative symbol. At the start of the reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases as time passes. The decrease rate of the meter corresponds to the actual decrease rate of the button acceptance period. That is, for example, in the case where the button acceptance period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds elapse from the acceptance start.

When the broadcasting period of the first notification manner is completed switched to the second notification manner, during the broadcasting period of the subsequent T ₄ seconds (e.g. 4 seconds) to display the meter in a special color. The rate of decrease of the meter is the same as in the first notification mode. Therefore, the decrease rate is constant over the entire button reception period. However, in the mode of the notification D, since the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching is continued, the notification of the remaining time is started from the state where the remaining amount of the meter is 2/3.

  When the button acceptance period is over, the display of the meter disappears, and the state is displayed in which the decorative symbol in change is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the player operates the chance button 136 while notifying the button acceptance period by the meter, the meter is turned off and a notice as shown on the right side of FIG. 58 is displayed. Here, the text "It is super hot !!" which indicates that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is displayed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot by giving a notice of "It's hot!"

  Describing the advance notice, in the first embodiment, when the player operates the chance button 136, one of "...", "super hot ??", and "super hot !!" is displayed. It is set to be For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case division by the random number value is divided into smaller parts. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, "..." is displayed, and the random number value is 25 to 25. In the case of 34, "is it hot ??" is displayed, and when the random number value is 35 to 49, it is such that "the hot is!" Is displayed. The same setting is performed when another notification mode other than the notification B → D is selected.

  According to such a notification mode of the first embodiment, the player can grasp the length of the remaining time of the button reception period, so that the player can press the chance button 136 at a desired timing or not press it. Is possible. In particular, when the notification mode switches along with the passage of time (for example, in the case of a notification mode in which the random number value is 5-99 when the 15R big hit is selected, the notification in which the random value is 50-99 when the out of turn Since there is a mode), as the timing to press the chance button 136, "Press immediately after reception is activated", "Press when notification mode changes", "Press at any timing of the player", "Pressed There is an advantage that the range of choices is broadened, and there are many games. That is, since the execution of the notice corresponds to the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, the range of the game is particularly expanded at this point, and the interest of the game may be enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by amplifying the expectation of the player to the big hit by switching the notification mode. In addition, the player may be able to reduce the use of the unnecessary chance button 136 and increase the durability of the chance button 136. In addition, if the color of the meter is changed before and after the switching of the notification mode, the range of effects may be expanded, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 may be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, since the probability of winning in each notification mode is set to be different between when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit and when it is out of place, an expectation given to the player in the case of a big hit is given. In the case of a break, it is possible to increase the probability that the feeling of expectation given to the player is lowered, and to make a difference between the two, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game.
<Example 2 of notification mode of remaining time>

  A second embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the advance notice information table shown in FIG. 56, “informing B (second super reach A per unit) with 15 R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time of 45000 ms (per super reach A) A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification mode is switched from 1) to “notification D (second notification mode)”. However, in the second embodiment, the notice at the time of pressing the button displayed in the notification period according to the first notification mode (the first notification period) and the notification period according to the second notification manner (the second notification period) is different. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is set to

  In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, (a) is the change start time of the decorative symbol, (b) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, and (c) is a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. (D) is the end time of the button reception period.

In this example, as the first of the notification manner, during the broadcasting period of T ₂ seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), and displays the reference color meter (for example, blue). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front of the moving decorative symbol. At the start of the reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter is set to match the actual rate of decrease of the button acceptance period. That is, for example, in the case where the button acceptance period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds elapse from the acceptance start. When the chance button 136 is operated during this first notification period, a notice (first notice) of “...” Is displayed. Thereafter, the notice is continued until the end of the button reception period, and the display of the notice disappears at the end of the reception.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period, the mode is switched to the second notification mode when the first notification period ends, and the meter is turned on during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). Display in a special color (for example, red). The rate at which the meter decreases is the same as in the first notification mode. When the chance button 136 is operated during this second notification period, a notice (second notice) of "It's intense!" Is displayed. After that, the notice continues until the end of the button reception period, and the notice display disappears at the end.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even in the second notification period, the display of the meter continues until the end of the button reception period, and the display of the meter disappears when the button reception period ends, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It returns to the state where the decoration design which is fluctuating is displayed in all. That is, if the chance button 136 is not operated over the first and second notification periods, no advance notice is given.

  In addition, the first notice of “...” And the second notice of “high heat !!!” are the above-mentioned notice lottery based on the result of the determination of yes / no obtained from the main control unit 300 and the fluctuation time. It is set by processing. The first notice gives the player a low sense of expectation, while the second notice gives the player a high sense of expectation.

  In detail, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the chance button 136 in the same manner as the first embodiment, “...”, “Super heat??”, “Super heat !! "" Is set to be displayed. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case division by the random number values 20 to 49 is further divided finely. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, "..." Is displayed when an operation is received at the time of notification B, while "super heat!" Is displayed when an operation is received at notification D. It is set to. If the random number value is 25 to 34, setting is made so that "It is intense?" Is displayed when the operation is accepted at the time of notification B, and "is extremely intense!" Is displayed when the operation is received at the notification D It is done. When the random number value is 35 to 49, when the operation is accepted in both the notification B and the notification D, it is set to display “super heat !!”. The same setting is made even when another notification mode is selected.

  In the second embodiment, in the first notification period, the meter is displayed in the reference color, and the preset notice has a feeling of expectation lower or equal to that of the second notice period. On the other hand, in the second notification period, the meter is displayed in a special color and the preset notice has a higher or equal expectation compared to the notice of the first notification period. As the display color of the meter, the special color has a greater impact on the player than the reference color. That is, in each notification period, the sense of expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is associated with the sense of expectation suggested by the advance notice. By this, the sense of expectation given to the player can be adjusted by the combination of the notification mode and the advance notice, and there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

In addition, the player may be able to grasp the contents of the notice without operating the chance button 136 by understanding that the notification mode of the remaining time and the contents of the notice correspond to each other. That is, the player who is in the jackpot may not be able to press the chance button 136 because the player is conscious of paying out the game balls (moving the game balls to the box). There is also a disadvantage such as spilling the balls paid out when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the notification mode of the remaining time also serves as a notice for suggesting a success / failure determination result, and if it becomes possible to recognize the contents of the notice without pressing the chance button 136, the player pays for the game ball. In addition to being able to concentrate, there are cases where it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the next game.
<Example 3 of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  A third embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The third embodiment is an example of a notification mode in which the meter temporarily stops, and in the table shown in FIG. 56, in the table shown in FIG. 56, the acceptance determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time 45000 ms (per super reach A). A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification A (first notification mode) is switched to "the notification E (second notification mode)" halfway. The button acceptance period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). In FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, (a) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, (b) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period changes, (g) is the button reception period End of the

  In the notification A mode, the notification period is 1 second, and a full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) and a button reception period (apparent reception period) for notifying the player is an actual button reception period. Half of it (3 seconds here). Here, it is possible to make the player illusion that it is shorter than the normal button reception period by setting the reduction rate of the meter to be twice as fast as the reduction rate of the actual button reception period. As a premise of this, in normal times, the game is repeated by setting the reduction amount per unit time (reduction rate) of the meter that is initially full displayed to match the reduction rate of the actual button acceptance period. Preferably, the player can recognize that the button acceptance period is usually set to a fixed length (here, 6 seconds). The BGM may allow the player to sense that the button reception period is normally about 6 seconds. With such preconditions, even if the actual button acceptance period is set to 6 seconds, the full meter will normally be reduced by 1/6 in 1 second, for example, in 1 second If it is reduced by 1/3, it is possible to make the player illusion that the current button acceptance period is 3 seconds. In addition, if it is decreased by 1/5 at one second, it is possible for the player to illusion that the current button acceptance period is five seconds.

  In the mode of the notification E, the notification period is 5 seconds, and the meter of any remaining amount is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue), and the meter is paused for a predetermined time (here 3 seconds) immediately after the start of the notification. After that, in order to keep the balance, the reduction rate of the meter is reduced at a faster rate (here, the rate decreased by 1/3 for 1 second) than the decrease rate for the normal button acceptance period (1/6 for 1 second). Reduce and report the remaining time.

  That is, first, when the notification is started by the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Then, during the first notification period, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in one second.

  When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. In the second notification mode, the reduction of the meter is stopped for the first 3 seconds. Therefore, the meter maintains the remaining amount of 2/3 until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button reception period. Then, when 4 seconds have elapsed, the meter starts to decrease again and decreases by 1/3 in 1 second. Therefore, when 5 seconds have elapsed, the remaining amount of the meter decreases to 1/3, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, that is, when the button acceptance period ends, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0. In the third embodiment, in order to compensate for the pause of the meter, the reduction rate of the meter is made faster than the decrease rate of the normal button reception period, particularly in the second notification period.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the length of the actual remaining time of the button acceptance period and the length of the remaining time suggested by the meter are set differently. Therefore, the reduction of the meter is temporarily stopped by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the player can be made illusion that the remaining time has increased, and the sense of expectation can be amplified, and surprise is also made. In some cases, there is an effect that it can be given to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the notification of the remaining time of the button acceptance period different from the actual one is performed in one of the first and second notification modes, the end can be adjusted in the other notification mode. It is possible to In the third embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, it is preferable that, for example, a notice similar to that of the first embodiment is made.
<Example 4 of Informing Aspect of Remaining Time>

  A fourth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. In the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first and second embodiments, in the notice mode determination table for advance notice shown in FIG. 56, the result of the judgment is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification mode is switched in the middle from "the notification B (the first notification mode)" to "the notification D (the second notification mode)". However, the contents of each of the notices A to F are different from the examples 1 and 2, and the example 4 is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching the notice mode. Further, the button acceptance period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). In FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, (a) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period changes, (g) is the button reception period End of the

  In the notification B mode of the fourth embodiment, the notification period is 2 seconds, and a full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the start of the notification, and a button reception period for notifying the player Period) is half of the actual button reception period (3 seconds here). Here, as in the third embodiment, the reduction rate of the meter is doubled than the decrease rate of the actual button reception period to make the player feel that the button reception period is shorter than the actual button reception period. It is supposed to be.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is 4 seconds, and a full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the start of the notification, and the button acceptance period returns to the original and the meter recovers from the illusion Let Thereafter, the decrease rate of the meter is set to be slower than the decrease rate in the mode of the notification B, and the remaining time is notified.

  That is, first, when the notification is started by the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in one second. By this, the player is made to recognize that this button acceptance period is 3 seconds. When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. After that, the full meter is decreased by 1⁄4 per second. This causes the player to recognize that the remaining time of the button acceptance period after switching to the second notification mode has increased to 4 seconds. The remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the acceptance of the button acceptance period.

  According to the notification in the notification mode of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the decrease rate of the meter in the second notification mode is Since it is slower than the reduction rate in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the player illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased, to amplify the sense of expectation, and to give surprises to enhance the interest of the game. Has the effect of

  In addition, since the decrease rate of the button acceptance period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual one is performed in one of the first and second notification modes. In the other notification mode, it is possible to adjust the balance, and it is possible to give various notices.

In the above example, the display of the meter is returned to full at the time of switching the notification mode, but if the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching is larger than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before switching The remaining amount of the meter (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to the full tank. In the fourth embodiment, it is preferable that, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, a notice similar to that of the first embodiment is given.
<Example 5 of Informing Form of Remaining Time>

  A fifth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. Also in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the first, second and fourth embodiments, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56, the acceptance determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification mode is switched in the middle from "the notification B (the first notification mode)" to "the notification D (the second notification mode)". However, the contents of each of the notices A to F are different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the fifth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter is increased when switching the notification mode and the color is changed and displayed. is there. The button acceptance period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds).

  In FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, (a) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period changes, (g) is the button reception period End of the

  In addition, the color of the meter is associated with the expectation to the big hit, and in the case of the reference color (for example, blue), the expectation is low, and in the case of the special color (for example, red), the expectation is high. This point is the same as that of the second embodiment.

  In the mode of the notification B of the fifth embodiment, the notification period is set to 2 seconds, and the full meter is displayed in the reference color at the start of the notification, and then the game is performed while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter It is set to notify the person of the remaining time of the actual button acceptance period correctly. In this case, the player can correct the actual button acceptance period correctly by setting the reduction rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button acceptance period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/6 per second). It is made to recognize.

  In the mode of notification D, the notification period is set to 4 seconds, and a full meter is displayed in a special color at the start of the notification, and then the actual button for the player is gradually reduced while the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced. It is set to notify the remaining time of the reception period correctly. Also in this case, the remaining time is informed at the same rate as the decrease rate of the actual button acceptance period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1⁄4 in 1 second).

  That is, at the start of the notification of the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Then, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/6 in 1 second. When the notification period of the first notification manner ends, the mode is switched to the second notification manner. At this time, the meter is returned to full and the color of the meter is changed from the reference color to the special color. After that, the full meter is decreased by 1⁄4 per second. Therefore, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  Since the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode even by the notification as in the fifth embodiment, it is possible for the player to have a momentary illusion when the remaining time of the button reception period increases. As well as being able to amplify the sense of expectation, there is an effect that it is possible to give surprise and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the decrease rate of the button acceptance period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual one is performed in one of the first and second notification modes. Since it is possible to adjust the balance in the other notification mode, it is possible to give various notices.

  Furthermore, the change in the color of the meter from the reference color to the special color has the effect of increasing the sense of expectation for the big hit.

In the above-mentioned example, the display of the meter is returned to full at the switching of the notification mode, but the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching increases more than the remaining amount of the meter just before switching as in the fourth embodiment. If it is, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to the full. In the fifth embodiment, it is preferable that, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, a notice similar to that of the second embodiment is given.
<Example 6 of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  A sixth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. Also in the sixth embodiment, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56, “informing B (first notification mode)” with a success / failure determination result of 15R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time of 45000 ms (per super reach A). The case where the notification mode is switched to the "informing D (second notification mode)" halfway will be described as an example. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching the notification mode, and further, the operation condition of the chance button 136 for displaying a notice in the first notification period and the second notification period is It is set to be different. The contents of each of the notices A to F are preferable as long as they are set in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment, but the invention is not particularly limited thereto.

  Also, in FIGS. 67 and 68, (a) is the start time of fluctuation of the special drawing and the decorative symbol, (b) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, and (c) is the remaining time of the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode has changed, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is completed.

Aspects of the notification B of Example 6, with the notification period is set to T _B seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color (e.g. blue), then meter It is set so as to properly inform the player of the remaining amount of the actual button acceptance period while gradually reducing the remaining amount of. Here, by making the decrease rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button acceptance period, the player is made to correctly recognize the actual button acceptance period.

Aspects of the notification D, together with the notification period is set to T _D s (e.g. 4 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color, then, while gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter , It is set to properly inform the player of the remaining time of the actual button acceptance period. Here, the remaining time is reported by equalizing the rate of decrease of the meter with the rate of decrease of the actual remaining time.

First, when the notification of the first notification mode is started, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount per one second [1 / (T _B + T _D )]. When the notification period of the first notification manner ends, the mode is switched to the second notification manner. At this time, return the meter to full. Thereafter, the full meter is decreased by a predetermined amount (1 / T _D ) in one second, and the remaining amount of the meter is set to 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  In the first notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is a single one-time operation. If the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the first notification period, the mode is switched to the second notification mode when the first notification period ends, and the meter is displayed in the reference color during the subsequent second notification period. While displaying, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is switched to continuous hitting (a plurality of consecutive operations). The rate of decrease of the meter is faster than the first notification mode. During the second notification mode, the contents of the effect screen are selected in accordance with the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated and the random value. When the operation of the chance button 136 is received and the effect screen is displayed, then the effect screen is continuously displayed until the end of the button reception period. Then, at the end of the button reception period, the state is returned to the state in which the decorative symbol being changed is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  If the selection of the effect screen during the above second notification period is described in detail, for example, the randomness value is 20 to 49 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. When the numerical value is 20 to 39, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 10 times or more), an effect screen of "Success!" Is displayed, while the chance button 136 is once or more And if it is operated less than the predetermined number of times, the effect screen of "Sorry ..." is displayed. When the random number is 40 to 49, when the chance button 136 is operated one or more times, an effect screen of "Sorry ..." is displayed.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the display of the meter continues until the end of the button reception period, and the display of the meter disappears when the button reception period ends, and the decorative symbol display device It returns to the state where the decorative design in change is displayed on all the screens of 208.

  The notification as in the sixth embodiment also has the effect of momentarily giving the player an illusion that the button acceptance period has increased. In addition, since the operation condition of the chance button 136 changes with the passage of time, there is an advantage that the range of the game is expanded.

Further, since the operation conditions of the chance button 136 differ depending on the passage of time, the range of the game can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
<Example 7 of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  Seventh Embodiment A seventh embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is determined in combination with other notices executed before and after the button reception period.

  In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the contents of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a random number value acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. It is decided based on.

  For example, in the case where the success / failure determination result is a big hit and the variation time of the special figure 1 is a variation time per super reach A, a decorative symbol is displayed using a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the display device 208 and the notice performed before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button acceptance period from the notification B mode as the first notification mode to the notification D mode as the second notification mode. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. The same is true for the other tables.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 71 (b) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. The details of the notice (hereinafter, also referred to as "preceding notice") to be made before the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “10 to 54” is acquired in the table, the effect screen in which the balloon of “?” Is attached to the character image of the princess is selected. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 71 (c) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. To determine the detailed content of the first notification mode. For example, when the random number value 73 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” is acquired in the table, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification B. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 71 (d) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. To determine the detailed content of the second notification mode. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the aspect of the notification D. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 71 (e) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. The details of a notice (hereinafter, also referred to as “following notice”) to be given after the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “10 to 99” is acquired in the table, the effect screen to be displayed as “super heat !!” is displayed as the letter display notice at the time of reaching after the button acceptance period. Be done. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the effect screen displayed as “super heat !!” is more easily selected than the effect screen displayed as “reach”.

  More specifically, for example, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit and the variation time of the special figure 1 is the variation time per super reach A, and when the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 69 and FIG. 70 are performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70, the period from t _{2 to} t ₄ is set as the button reception period. In the button reception period, the remaining time of the button reception period is notified as in the first embodiment.

First, prior notice is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a period of t ₁ to t ₂ before the button reception period. Here, the contents of this advance notice are such that an effect screen with a balloon of “?” Attached to the character image of the princess is displayed as a notice with a low sense of expectation to the big hit here. Then, the button acceptance period starts. Here, as notification manner of the remaining time of the button acceptance period it has won notification manner of switching from the first notification manner at the time of t ₃ to the second notification manner. Then, in the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in blue (reference color) with a low sense of expectation for a big hit at the start of the notification, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes. In the following second notification mode, the meter is displayed in red (special color) with a high sense of expectation for a big hit, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes.

  When the button acceptance period is over, the display of the meter disappears, and the decoration pattern becomes reachable, at which time the following notice is displayed. The contents of the subsequent notice are displayed here as "super heat !!" as a notice that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  In the first notification mode, since the meter is displayed in the reference color of blue, the expectation of the big hit is low. On the other hand, in the second notification mode, the meter is displayed in a special color of red, so the sense of expectation of the big hit is high. That is, in this example, the first notification mode is easily set to a notification mode with a low expectation, and the second notification mode is an expectation, in association with the expectation of the big hit by the notice before and after the button acceptance period. It is easy to be set to the high notification mode of.

  When the notification mode in the button acceptance period is associated with the notice before and after the button acceptance period, at least the following five patterns can be considered.

  In the first pattern, the notice before the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → low) → the notice after the button acceptance period is set to be preview (expected feeling; low) . In the second pattern, the notice before the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → low) → the notice after the button acceptance period is set to be anticipation (expected feeling; high) . In the third pattern, the notice before the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → high) → it is set to be the notice after the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) .

  In the fourth pattern, the notice prior to the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high → high) → the advance notice after the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) is set . In the fifth pattern, the notice prior to the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → low) → the advance notice after the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) is set .

  According to the first pattern, it may be possible to lower the player's expectation for the jackpot and to make the difference between when the player's expectation for the jackpot is high is clearer. In addition, in the case of a big hit with a low expectation, the player's pleasure may be amplified. According to the second and third patterns, it may be possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. According to the fourth pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot may not be raised too much, and it may be possible to reduce the feeling of regret when it is not the jackpot. According to the fifth pattern, since the player's expectation for the jackpot is lowered once and then raised, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be ups and downs, and the expectation can be finally improved. is there.

In the examples shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 of the seventh embodiment, the advance notice before and after the button reception period is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208, but, for example, the effect movable body 224 or any lamp For example, it may be performed by another rendering device. However, in this case as well, the sense of expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period is associated with the sense of expectation suggested by the advance notice.
<Example 8 of Informing Form of Remaining Time>

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the premise of Example 8 will be explained. When the result of the judgment is 15R special big hit (probable big hit), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the decorative symbol in the symbol combination showing 15R big hit (usually big hit). After doing, there may be a re-lottery effect of changing to a symbol combination of a decorative symbol showing a special jackpot of 15R (However, internally it is determined whether it is a definite change or a non-determination, so a re-selection is actually made. I'm not going). At this time, the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the decorative symbol is divided into three periods, for example, (1) before the start of reach from reach of change, (2) in reach, (3) in re-lottery. It is possible to set to give separate notices in each of these three periods. In addition, as shown in FIG. 54, in the re-lottery, the variation time is set longer per 5000 ms between the hit and the exit of each reach. This is because the fluctuation time of the hit includes the time to perform the re-lottery regardless of the positive or negative change.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the case of notifying the remaining time of the button reception period in any two or more of the respective periods (1) to (3) described above, the notification mode or the notification mode in each of the periods (1) to (3) At least two or more expectations given to the player by the advance notice should be related. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the contents of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And based on

  For example, in the case where the success / failure determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is a fluctuation time per super reach A (for example, 45000 ms), a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice performed before and after the button acceptance period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. Information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period to the mode of notification b as the first notification mode before reaching the period (1), to the notification b mode as the second notification mode in notice C, period Information to be changed from the mode of the notification c as the first notification mode to the mode of the notification d as the second notification mode during the reach of (2), as a first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) The information to be changed from the mode of the notification e to the mode of the notification f as the second notification mode is included. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Also, although not shown in the figure, a table corresponding to each case such as a table in the case where the success / failure determination result is a big hit and the variation time of Special Figure 1 is variation time for Super Reach B separately Is stored in

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (b) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the first notification mode before reaching in period (1). For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the aspect of the notification a. In the above table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, in the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability in which the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected are the same.

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (c) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the second notification mode before reaching in period (1). For example, when random number value 13 included in the random number selection range “10 to 39” is acquired in the table, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) as a mode of notification b and the meter is increased by a predetermined amount It is selected. As the mode of the notification b, the mode of “incrementing the meter by a predetermined amount” is set to have a slightly higher expectation given to the player than the mode of “no increase in meter”. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the first notification mode during the reach of period (2). For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the aspect of the notification c. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (e) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the second notification mode during the reach of period (2). For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “30 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as an aspect of the notification d. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (f) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. To determine the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3). For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the aspect of the notification e. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (g) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3). For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the above table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the aspect of the notification f. On the other hand, for example, when the random value 70 included in the random number selection range “50 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the aspect of the notification f. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, in the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability in which the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected are the same.

  More specifically, for example, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, the variation time of the special figure 1 is the variation time per super reach A, and when the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 are performed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the period before 0 to t ₃ seconds reach _(1), t 3 ~t ₇ seconds duration in reach _{(2), t} 7 _{~t 11} seconds redrawing period of (3), t ₁₁ seconds later is set to the period in the jackpot round. And while a button reception period is alerted | reported by all the periods, the feeling of expectation which each is suggested is mutually linked | related and is set. Basically, one game is from the start of the change to the stop of the change and the symbol is determined, but if it is a big hit symbol, one game is taken until the big hit round is over.

  First, during the first button acceptance period before the decorative symbol stops, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) in the first notification mode, and the color of the meter continues to be blue in the subsequent second notification mode (reference color ) And the remaining amount of meter is increasing. That is, although the expectation level is raised from low to slightly low, the expectation to the jackpot given to the player is still low. If the chance button 136 is operated during this button reception period, for example, a notice of “...” Shown in FIG. 60 is displayed.

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ second and when the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds The contents of the notice may be different as described in the second embodiment. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds, “...” Is displayed, and the chance is generated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. When the button 136 is operated, “super heat !!” may be displayed.

In the second button acceptance period in reach, and changes from the first notification manner when t ₅ seconds have elapsed into the second notification manner, the color of the meter changes from blue to red (special color) The expectation to the jackpot shifts from a somewhat low state to a high state. And if the result of the judgment is 15R special big hit (probable variation big hit) or 15R big hit (usually big hit), a combination of a big hit decorative pattern predetermined at t ₇ seconds (for example, “decor 2-decoration 2) stop at the combination of 2) and 2) otherwise stop at the combination of the decorative patterns for the predetermined release (for example, the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2"). If the result of the determination is the 15R special big hit or the 15R big hit, a re-lottery is performed, and the third button acceptance period starts.

  During the second button reception period, as in the first embodiment, for example, the content of the notice performed when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period and the chance button during the second notification period The content of the notice to be given when 136 is operated may be set to be the same. Alternatively, as in the second embodiment, different contents may be set. In addition, the 15R special jackpot and the 15R jackpot are the result of judgment whether the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively large amount of profit.

In the third button reception period, when t ₉ seconds elapse, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, when the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue is selected as the second notification mode in the table shown in FIG. 75 (g), the display shown in the right side of FIG. 73 (k) is performed. When a mode is displayed in which red is displayed, the display shown on the left side of FIG. 73 (k) is performed.

  Thereafter, even if any of the modes is selected, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the button reception period, the effect image shown in (l) of FIG. 72 is displayed, and then the 15R special jackpot is won. In the case where the decoration pattern is a 15R special jackpot (eg, a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), or a combination of a predetermined pattern showing 15R jackpot (for example, "decoration 2 -Stop at the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2". On the other hand, if the 15R big hit has been won, it stops at a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") in which the decorative symbol indicates the 15R big hit. Even if the 15R special jackpot has been won, at this point the decorative symbol may not stop in the symbol combination indicating the 15R special jackpot, but may stop in the symbol combination indicating the 15R jackpot. In that case, a special change promotion game rushes into a certain change state of special figure high probability spread high certain as it is after the big hit round without doing definite change promotion production during the big hit round or at the end or without giving definite change promotion effect It is set to

In the redrawing period (3), when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{8 to} t ₉ seconds, redrawing operation is performed from the time point when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Until the end of period (3), any combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" or the like showing 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot has been won, or When the 15R jackpot has been won, an effect of stopping and displaying a combination of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” or the like indicating the 15R jackpot is performed (see the left side of FIG. 74 (k)). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is not operated, as described above, when t ₉ seconds have elapsed, the button acceptance period is switched from the first to the second notification mode and notified (FIG. 74 (FIG. k) center or right)).

When the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period and the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{9 to} t ₁₀ seconds, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted Until the period (3) during the re-lottery is over, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, if you have won 15R special jackpot, you will receive 15R special jackpot "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" etc. When the combination or the 15R big hit is won, the stop display is performed with "combination of decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" or the like indicating 15R big hit.

  Since the time for re-lottery is fixed to 5000 ms as described above, the time when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in any combination is appropriately adjusted according to the timing of the operation of the chance button 136.

  As described above, in the case of notifying a plurality of remaining times in one game, it is possible to variously change the sense of expectation for the jackpot given to the player. In particular, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted in detail by appropriately setting the notification mode of each period or the expectation by the advance notice in association with each other.

  That is, for example, in the case where the announcement is all low expectation for the player, the expectation for the player's big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) is lowered, and the distinction from the high expectation is clarified. There are times when you can. In addition, in the case of a big hit (in particular, a 15R special big hit) in a state of low expectation, the player's pleasure may be amplified more often.

In addition, when the player changes from a low expectation to a high notice, it may be possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the jackpot (especially the 15R special jackpot). In addition, when the player changes from a high-predictive notice to a low-predictive notice, the player's expectation for the big hit may not be raised too much, and it may be possible to reduce the sense of regret when it is not a big hit. . In addition, in the case where it is a notice with high expectation for all the players, it may be possible to further improve the expectation for the player's big hit (especially the 15R special big hit).
<Others>

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that various changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  For example, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period may be a notification mode as shown in FIG. In this example (Example 9), first, the full meter is displayed in only the reference color (for example, blue). Go.

  When one second has elapsed from the start of notification, a partial area of the meter is changed to a special color (for example, red). The special area changed to the special color is also moved in position as the meter decreases with the passage of time.

  The player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter (here, the left end) is the reference color [the timing of (b), (c), (d) and (f) in FIG. 76]. In this case, a notice of low expectation (for example, a notice “... Shown in FIG. 58) is displayed. On the other hand, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter is in the special color [the timing of (e) in FIG. 76], the notice with high expectation (for example, FIG. The notice "It's hot!" Is displayed. As described above, there are cases where it is possible to widen the game by setting the notification mode such that if the chance button 136 is not pressed in a timely manner, a notice with high expectation can not be seen.

  In addition, the first aspect which displays a meter only by reference color is called 1st alerting | reporting aspect, and the aspect which displays the meter which has a special area | region of a special color is called 2nd alerting | reporting aspect.

  In this example, as shown in (c-1) or (c-2) of FIG. 76, the size of the special area changed to the special color can be set arbitrarily. Furthermore, as shown in (c-3) of FIG. 76, the position of the special area at the time of changing to the special color can be reset to an arbitrary position. Thus, the timing at which the player presses the chan button 136 can be changed.

  Moreover, it is possible to comprise combining the Examples 1-9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the above-mentioned remaining time suitably. Further, for example, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time, the height of the sense of expectation for the big hit given to the player is changed by changing the color of the meter, but the meter blinks or does not blink By changing and displaying the blinking manner as described above, the level of expectation to the big hit may be changed. Further, for example, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the notification is configured to be performed by receiving the operation of the chance button 136, but the operation of the operating means other than the chance button 136 is received. A notice may be given by In addition, as a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, a mode may be provided in which the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and further to the third notification mode. That is, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period includes at least a pattern in which the notification mode does not change according to the passage of time and a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in two steps of the first and second notification modes. What is necessary is not to exclude the configuration further including a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in three or more steps.

  In addition, although the embodiments 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above explain that the meter is reduced by a predetermined amount per second, it may be reduced by a predetermined amount per unit time, and the unit time is It is not limited to one second. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time, the remaining time of the button acceptance period is expressed by the form of a rectangular meter, for example, a form in which a hand of a clock advances or a form in which sand in an hourglass falls Of course, it may be expressed in other forms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the gaming machine according to the present invention “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, and a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, respectively. A stop button 1006 for stopping the rotation of the reel individually, and lottery means (winning combination internal lottery) for judging whether or not internal winnings of a plurality of types of winnings are made by lottery, and lottery means Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control regarding stop of the rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is internally elected Judgment means (prize judgment processing) for judging whether or not it is a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a predetermined one In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium corresponding to the prize mode, the effect means 1010 for executing the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A detection means for detecting a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, a launcher 1014 that launches a ball in a predetermined game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a sphere fired from the launching device Move to a position where means 1018, a payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a position for shielding variable display device 1022 The variable display device 1 is provided with a possible shutter 1024 and a movable body 1026 operating in a predetermined operation mode, triggered by the game ball entering the winning opening and winning. 22 is stopped displayed after varying the design, is also suitable in the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs at least a judgment of success or failure (for example, the main control unit 300) which makes a judgment of success or failure when a predetermined condition of judgment of acceptance is satisfied, In the case of a determination result (for example, a big hit), the second advantage is a first advantage that is an advantage over the player from a first control state to an advantage higher than the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) for shifting the control state to the second control state, operation means (for example, the chance button 136) which can be operated by the player, and the result of the judgment The notification means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for performing effects including a notice, the notification means is effective for the player to receive the operation of the operation means Remaining time notifying means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the remaining time of the reception period in a predetermined notification mode for the additional period, and the operation by the player during the reception period And a specific notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for giving a predetermined notice for suggesting the result of the judgment of acceptance when the operation of the means is received. The notification mode has a first notification mode and a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and the remaining time notification means determines that the remaining time has elapsed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The remaining time is informed by the first notification mode until the length of the vehicle is reduced, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the notification shown in FIG. 56). In the form determination table When the notification F is won, the first notification mode is continued to notify the remaining time, while when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56) In the case of winning A → E, or “notification B → D” or “notification C ₁ → C ₂ ”, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode to notify the remaining time I hope there is.

  Further, in the above-mentioned game stand, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are set according to the result of the judgment of acceptance or rejection, and function as a notice similarly to the notice given by the specific notice means. Is preferred.

  Further, in the above-mentioned game stand, the remaining time notifying means may set the predetermined time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode according to the result of the determination of the pass / fail. For example, when the determination is made based on the notification mode determination table) and the result of the success / failure determination is the specific success / failure determination result, the remaining time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode It is preferable to determine based on a specific table (for example, a jackpot table of the notification mode determination table) of the predetermined table.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the operation means can receive at least one of a single one-time operation and a plurality of continuous operations by the player, and the specific notice means is the predetermined The notice is given on condition of the reception of the one-time operation until the time of lapse of time passes, and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the notice is notified on condition of reception of the plurality of continuous actions. It is preferred to do.

  In the above-mentioned game stand, the remaining time notification means makes the remaining time to be notified by at least one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode different from the actual remaining time. Is preferred.

  At this time, the remaining time notifying unit sets the predetermined length as a first length, and the predetermined time is decreased when the remaining time to be notified by the first notification mode is reduced to the first length. If the condition is satisfied, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and further, the remaining time to be notified by the second notification mode is longer than the first length. It is preferable to increase the size.

  Further, the remaining time notification means indicates the remaining time by representing the remaining amount of the meter, and the meter reports the decreasing speed of the meter notified by the second notification mode by the first notification mode. It is preferable to make it faster than the decrease rate of

  In the present invention, the big hit in the present invention, the next special feature variation game is special feature high probability figure high confidence [for example 15R special big hit (see special figure A in Figure 49 (a)), 2R big hit (suddenly definite variation; Figure 49 (See special drawing C in (a))], special view high probability drawing low definite [eg 2R jackpot (hidden definite variation; see special drawing E in FIG. 49 (a))] special figure low certainty drawing high probability [eg 49R big hit (see special figure B in FIG. 49 (a)), 2R big hit (see sudden time short; see special figure D in FIG. 49 (a)), and special figure low probability figure low certainty [eg 49 (a) (see special figure F in FIG. 49 (a))].

In addition, in the present invention, the exception is that the next special figure variation game is special figure low probability figure low certainty and does not apply to the above [for example, small hit (see special figure G, H in Figure 49 (a)) and Point (refer to the special drawing I, J in FIG. 49 (a))].
Third Embodiment

Hereinafter, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail using the drawings. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 78 to 128 are basically used only in the description of the third embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIGS. 78 to 128 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 78 to FIG. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect that the front frame door 106 is opened. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the description herein, a light source that is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, a ball storage tray equipped door sensor 1082 is also provided which detects that the ball storage tray equipped door 108 is opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board The ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 80) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 The effect button lamp 138 for emitting the exit button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade, and the return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a lower-plate full-tan detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, the cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). I aim it and shoot it.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. In FIG. 78, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 79 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 78 viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 81) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 81) that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 Second sub substrate case 166 which houses the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (refer to FIG. 81) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 81) and a payout substrate case 172 for housing a payout substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch substrate case 176 which houses a launch substrate 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 81) that performs control processing related to the power source, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 81) that supplies power to various electric game machines. And a power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 80 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 80, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is sectioned.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a high probability middle lamp 222 Are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be called "a common figure" below, and a special symbol may be called a "special figure."

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the fourth symbol of the common drawing and the fourth symbol of the special drawing are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the pachinko machine 100, it is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special view, and in the pachinko machine 100, it is configured by a 7-segment LED. The common view display device 210 and the special view display device 212 correspond to an example of notification means.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) of the common drawing display device 210 and the special drawing display device 212 (notification means) and the display region (here display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 (pattern display means The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the screen size. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, while the common-diagram display device 210 and the special-image display device 212 can not display moving pictures, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display moving pictures.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and the pachinko machine 100 has a predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off.

  Also, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, two common drawing starting gates 251, 253, a common drawing electric combination 252, a special drawing starting opening 230, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided. doing.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 78, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (general) 79) is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the pachinko machine 100, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize ball" and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)". Among the plurality of general winning openings 226 disposed, only one general winning opening 226 is disposed below the common view starting gate 251. That is, the general winning opening 226 is disposed between the common drawing start gate 251 and the variable winning opening 234 provided at the lower center of the game board. Hereinafter, when the general winning opening 226 is distinguished from other general winning openings 226, it is referred to as a central general winning opening 226. Further, when the common drawing start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board is distinguished from the other common drawing start gate 253, it is referred to as a central common drawing start gate 251. Unlike the ball entering the general winning opening 226, the ball passing through the central drawing start gate 251 is not discharged to the gaming island side, and the ball can win the central general winning opening 226. It is. However, even if the game ball passes through the central drawing start gate 251, the winning balls are not paid out. The central spread start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area, and the central general winning opening 226 below it corresponds to an example of a second entry area.

  Here, the game nature of the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 80 will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not make a game ball enter the variable winning opening 234 and earns a ball, but makes a game ball enter a common-use electric symbol 252 and earns a game ball. In the normal state (the special figure low probability normal view low probability state described later), first, aiming at the central common view start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board, when the gaming ball enters the central common view start gate 251 , And the generic drawing display device 210 starts variable display. In addition to the variable display of the common view display device 210, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative figure of the common view is performed. That is, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the common-diagram display device 210 in a form in which the effect is enhanced.

  When the hit is determined by the hit / fail determination of the common drawing, the common drawing display device 210 displays the stop symbol (see FIG. 82 (c)) of the predetermined symbol form corresponding to the hit and the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the stop display of the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen instructing to perform a right-handed hit, and the general-purpose electric symbol 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 opens for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds) Do. That is, the general-purpose electric symbol 252 includes a movable member (here, the door member 2521) which can be opened and closed. When the door member 2521 is opened, winning of the special-figure start opening 230 is possible. The door member 2521 is a member for changing the degree of difficulty of winning to the special figure starting port 230. If the door member 2521 is closed, it is impossible to enter the special view starting opening 230, and the closed state in which the door member 2521 is closed is an opening / closing state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, the state where the door member 2521 is open is an open / close state where winning is easy. Therefore, the special figure starting port 230 has either the small size (corresponding to the first size) or the large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable, which changes from the size of one to the other. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the common view starting gate 251, 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the common view starting gate 251, 253 or less than the size of the entrance of those (251, 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the ordinary game electric symbol 252 does not necessarily have to be completely closed, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the special figure start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, seven) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In addition, it can be said that the common drawing electric symbol 252 shown in FIG. 80 is a variable start means and is an electric tulip (electric chew) of an attacker type.

  When the game ball enters the ordinary drawing electric symbol 252 in a state in which the door member 2521 is opened, the special drawing start opening 230 is surely entered. Even if a plurality of gaming balls enter the special drawing start opening 230 by opening the door member 251 once, the determination of the special drawing (lottery) is performed only for the one ball that first enters the ball. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no reservation memory of a special figure. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with the special view holding lamp. In addition, a prize lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity (in this example, on the right side) of the common drawing motorized prize 252. The prize lamp 254 emits light (flashes) when there is a prize to the special drawing start port 230. Also, when the door member 2521 is closed, it emits light (flashes). The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  Although the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), a predetermined number of balls (here, 10 balls) enter the general-purpose electric symbol 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, when the predetermined number of balls enter, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse. When the game ball enters the ordinary drawing motorized role item 252, the special drawing is subjected to a yes / no determination (lottery), and the special drawing display device 212 starts variable display. Further, in conjunction with the variable display of the special view display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs effect display. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the one-time opening of the general-purpose motorized symbol 252 is aimed at acquiring the right of the determination of the one-time special drawing and the increase of the winning balls by the winning of one or more balls. It is a thing.

  If the special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol of the predetermined symbol form corresponding to the big hit when the big figure is won in the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 also produces the effect corresponding to the big hit The variable start port 234 is opened for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or 2 times). Only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. That is, variable winning opening 234 has a predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and a second open / close state (here, open state) in which game balls are easier to win than the first open / closed state. It is a variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one to the other. Note that the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily have to be completely closed either, and it may be a state in which entering of the gaming ball is impossible or difficult even if it is slightly open. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. However, in the pachinko machine 100 as described above, since the open state at the variable winning opening 234 is a very short time (for example, 0.1 second), payment by entering the variable winning opening 234 can hardly be expected. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the normal state (special figure low probability spread figure low probability state), when it is decided that the big hit is made by the judgment of the special figure, it shifts to the electric support state (also called short time state, spread figure high probability state). In the power support state, first, the common view starting gate 253 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is aimed. Directly below the common view start gate 253, a common view electric symbol 252 is provided. The right side common drawing start gate 253 also corresponds to an example of the first entry area, and the special drawing start opening 230 where the game ball can enter when the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 directly below is opened is also the first It corresponds to an example of the entry area of 2.

  Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start gate 253 is not discharged to the gaming island side, and the winning balls are not paid out. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the common drawing start gate 253 on the right side, a judgment of the common drawing is made, and the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210 is started.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in the power support state, it is easy to hit by the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing. If the hit determination in the common drawing is made, the door member 2521 of the common drawing motorized symbol 252 is opened again, and if the gaming ball enters the common drawing motorized symbol 252, the success or failure determination in the special drawing is performed. In the pachinko machine 100, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the non probability variation state (special figure low probability state), although the probability of winning a big hit by the judgment of the special figure changes, the big hit with high probability in any state It is configured to win the The variable winning opening 234 is not opened if the jackpot is not won in the judgment of the special drawing (if it is lost). However, since it is in the power support state, if the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 253 on the right side, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric character 252 is opened with considerable probability. In this way, during the power support state, it is easy to win the jackpot of the special figure several times. In the pachinko machine 100, the duration of the power support state corresponds to the special game state, and a bonus game is produced.

  Generally, it is referred to as winning a jackpot of a special figure repeatedly while the number of balls is not reduced. Therefore, it is sometimes referred to as winning a jackpot of a special figure repeatedly while being in a definite change state even in a non-electric support state, as a continuous block. However, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 80, there is only one special view start opening, and the special view start opening 230 does not win unless the door member 2521 of the common view electric symbol 252 is opened. Therefore, it is referred to herein as repeatedly opening the door member 2521 of the common-use electric symbol 252 while being in the power support state and repeatedly winning the jackpot with the power support. For example, during the power-sap state, the continuous-scissors is also established when the jackpot with the power-sap with special drawing is won with one or a plurality of cancellations of the special drawing. The jackpot of the special figure is prepared with the jackpot with a definite change and the big hit without a definite turn. Although it is easy to win with a definite change with a big change and a non definite change with a big change, it is the number of times that you can get a big change with a definite change from the electric support state to the non electric support state. There is a limit. Hereinafter, the limitation of the probability variation is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is 11 times. When the specified number of times is reached, the power supply state is shifted to the non-power support state, and the non-probability state is shifted. That is, it becomes a special figure low probability common figure low probability state which is a normal state. On the other hand, if the special figure wins the non-probable variation big hit before reaching the specified number of times, the limiter is reset and the number of times the big variation with probability variation is won becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the configuration described above, the time until the success / failure determination result of the common drawing is derived, that is, a plurality of types of time is prepared as the fluctuation time of the common drawing display device 210. A plurality of types of time are also prepared for the time until derivation, that is, the variation time of the special view display device 212. In the power support state, the fluctuation time of the spread diagram is short, and when the game ball passes the spread diagram starting gate 253 on the right side, the success / failure determination result is notified immediately. When the special figure is a big hit, the variation time of the special figure is less than one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the common drawing electric symbol 252, but one opening period It may be longer with a predetermined probability than that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction conversion members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are disposed in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, and At the lowermost portion, an out port 240 for discharging to the side of the gaming island after guiding a ball which did not win any of the winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is provided.

The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening Whether a prize is made for (general drawing start gates 251, 253, special figure starting port 230) or the winning opening and the starting port are reached without reaching any out winning opening and starting opening.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  In the stage 244, the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b and the ball run up by the game nail 238 etc can be rolled, etc. A special route 244a that makes it easy to do so is provided.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

The decorative lamp such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80, and the shielding device 246 correspond to rendering means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the symbol display means .
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the pachinko machine 100, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be formed by one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as predetermined control means, and one of the three control units (300, 400, 500) is combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), The main frame opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor 1082 with a ball storage plate, and the lower plate for detecting that the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. It receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, ball start sensor provided inside each start opening, entrance of winning opening and variable winning opening, and results of comparison of amplification results and reference voltage are disturbed A sensor circuit 322 for outputting data to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 212, and a common view display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing the display control of the display, a drive circuit 330 for performing the display control of the various state display unit 328 (for example, the common view holding lamp 216, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 2521 of the door 252 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 and a drive circuit 335 for controlling the light emission of the prize lamp 254 are connected. There is. The light emission control of the winning lamp 254 may be performed by the first auxiliary control unit 400 side.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that the ball has won the special figure start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318. It stores in the random number storage register corresponding to the starting opening 230. In addition, the random number generation circuit 318 similarly receives a signal indicating that the ball has won in the common drawing start gates 251 and 253 (these two common drawing start gates are collectively referred to as a common drawing start area). , The value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the common drawing start area is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the common drawing start area, which is embedded in the random number generation circuit 318 Do.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a sensor for detecting a ball winning in a predetermined winning opening or starting opening such as the general winning opening 226, the special view starting opening 230, the variable winning opening 234 or , And a sensor for detecting a ball passing through the common gate starting gate 251, 253.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Game information (for example, information indicating a control state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (here, 9 v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control means.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 detects the depression of the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), the drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and the effect button 136 shown in FIG. The effect button detection sensor 426 is connected to a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402.

Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts an AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the emission control unit 630 receive supply of a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. Further, the power management unit 660 is a storage circuit (e.g., for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the pachinko machine 100, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and from the payout control unit 600 the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (a), the type of the special view that the special view display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 displays the stop will be described.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form (second symbol form) of the special view. The door member 2521 of the general-purpose motorized prize 252 is opened, and the special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure start opening 230. When the special figure variation game is started, the special figure display device 212 repeats the "full figure of seven segments" and the lighting of one central segment "special figure variation display" (special figure variation game) Do. Then, when the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special drawing elapses, the special drawing display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special drawing. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the special drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of the special drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the special drawing. The variable stop display of this special view may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows 22 types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing W" as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 82 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the pachinko machine 100, 20 types of big hit symbols ("special drawing A" to "special drawing T") are prepared as the stop symbol form of the special drawing. Each jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds).

  The term "round" as used herein means the number of chances of acquiring a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls). In the pachinko machine 100, it represents the number of times of operation of the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 80, and 15 rounds means one or more opening and closing operations of the variable winning opening 234 one time (one operation), This means that this operation lasts 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is among the entry of game balls of a predetermined round end condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls), and lapse of predetermined time from the start of the round End when one or more of During the predetermined round will be in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 82 (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special view shown in FIG. 82 (a). If the special drawing hits the big game in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal drawing low probability), that is, in the non-power support state, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric actor 252 repeatedly opens and closes. The probability of doing is extremely low, and it is indicated in FIG. 82 (b) that the general drawing motor combination is released (initial). This means one opening of the door member 2521 of the common drawing motor-operated accessory 252 for which the determination on the special drawing is to be made. At the time (initial stage) of releasing the ordinary drawing electric part, the special drawing A to the special drawing P become a big hit with a definite change. If it is a definite change, it will shift to a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is high in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In the pachinko machine 100, during the big hit game, it moves to the special figure low probability state, when it wins to the definite change with the big hit, it moves to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game end. On the other hand, the special figure Q to the special figure T become the jackpot without probability variation.

  In addition, at the time (initial stage) of releasing the ordinary drawing electric part, when the special figure is a big hit, time saving is given. That is, the special figure A to the special figure P become a big hit with time reduction until the next big hit, and the special figure Q to the special figure T is given time reduction while the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. Even after any big hit game from the special figure A to the special figure T, it shifts to a state with electric power support (power support) (hereinafter referred to as power support state). The power-supply state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-saving state. The electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/60 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), but rises to 1 / 1.0003 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state) Do. In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.5 seconds in the power support state. The probability of entering the special figure starting opening 230 is increased due to the definite drawing definite variation or the common drawing variation. In the pachinko machine 100, in the power support state (short time state), the expansion and contraction changes and the expansion and contraction are performed, but the electric thaw open period may be extended or the number of electric thw open may be increased. From the above, in the non power saving state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view starting opening 230 than in the power saving state. That is, in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 tends to be closed, and the rate of entry of the gaming ball into the special drawing start port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the power-on state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is easily opened, and the entry rate of the game ball into the special-figure start opening 230 is enhanced. Therefore, the non-power support state corresponds to an example of the non-specific state (corresponding to the normal gaming state), and the power support state corresponds to an example of the specific state (corresponding to the special game state). Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game state transition means for transitioning the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100, a limit (limiter) is provided for the number of times that the jackpot can be acquired with certainty between transitioning to the power support state and transitioning to the non-power support state. . The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability change counter for counting the number of times the probability change jackpot can be acquired, and when transitioning from the non-power support state to the power support state, the specified number is set in the probability change counter. Each time you get a jackpot with a probability change, the probability change counter is decremented by one. The probability variation counter corresponds to an example of the specified number counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not reached), that is, until the number of acquisitions of the jackpot with the probability change since transitioning to the power support state reaches the specified number, Then, special figure A-special figure P become a big hit with time change until the next big hit with a definite change. Further, in the special drawing A to the special drawing P, the reset of the probability variation counter is not performed. On the other hand, when the limiter has not reached, the special figure Q to special figure T is a big hit without probability variation, and reset to the specified number of probability variation counters is performed and the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is 100 times Granted while taking place.

  Furthermore, when the probability change counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter reaches, the special figure A to the special figure H and the special figure Q, R are big hit without probability change and time saving It is given while symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing is performed 100 times, and reset of a probability change counter is performed. On the other hand, when reaching the limiter, the special image I to the special image P and the special image S and T are big hit with no definite change and no time reduction, and the limiter setting is ended and the normal game state is entered.

  Summarizing the above, from the first hit (at the time of releasing the computer drawing electric symbol (initial)) to the time when the limiter has not reached (during the consecutive villas), the special drawing A to P are special drawing high probability Yes, the special figure Q ~ special figure S is the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. Then, when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to special figure H and the special figure Q, R are in the special figure low probability general figure high probability state, and the special figure I to special figure P and the special figure S, T Probability It is a low probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the profit given to the player on the basis of the stop symbol form of the special drawing is the gaming state (during initial stage) and at the time the limiter is not reached , Different at the time of reaching the limiter), but has made the stop symbol aspect of the special figure common in different gaming states.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, two types of lost designs are prepared. Special figure V shown in FIG. 82 (a) is a first loss symbol, and special figure W is a second loss symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open and close. In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol may be prepared in which the control state (playing state) does not change before and after the small hit game. The special view display device 212 corresponds to an example of a first symbol display means for notifying of the success / failure determination result (second success / failure determination result) of the special view.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form (first symbol form) of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the pachinko machine 100, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a lost design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the common drawing start area (the common drawing start gates 251 and 253), the common drawing display device 210 turns on all seven segments. , Repeating the lighting of one central segment, perform "variation display of common drawing" (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the "common figure A" which is a hit symbol and the "general figure B" which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 83 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing. The common-diagram display device 210 corresponds to an example of the second symbol display means for notifying of the success / failure determination result (first success / failure determination result) of the common-diagram.

  FIG. 83 (b) shows an example of a common figure decorative symbol. There are ten kinds of "decorated 1" to "decorated 10" in the common figure decorative pattern of the pachinko machine 100. Each symbol of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the ball has entered the common figure start region (general view start gates 251 and 253). In the display area, "decorative design" to switch the display in the order "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... Change display of That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the common drawing display device 210. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. When notifying a hit of a common figure, a combination of decorative patterns in which three same decorative patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decorative 2-decorative 2" -Display stop 2) etc.). When a combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbol is arranged is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, when notifying a loss of a common figure, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display combinations (for example, broken lines) of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, the stop symbol form (see FIG. 83 (a)) of a common figure and the stop symbol form of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208 of the decorative symbol display device 208 (FIG. In the case of (b), the decorative pattern (see (b) in the figure) is larger.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 is provided with a special drawing determination random number counter, a special drawing fluctuation time determination random number counter, and a common drawing fluctuation period determination random number counter. Further, the RAM 308 stores the special drawing suitability determination result, the special drawing determination result, the special drawing fluctuation time determination result, the common drawing equivalence determination result, the common drawing fluctuation period determination result, and the common drawing reservation number, respectively. . Furthermore, in the RAM 308, a common drawing reserve storage unit divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas that can hold the start of the regular drawing draft determination (lottery drawing) is prepared.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 84 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the pachinko machine 100, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (here, 9 v). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, a random number counter for generating an initial value for a special figure determination random number counter, a special figure variation time determination random number value, and a common figure variation period determination random number value Update two random number counters to generate. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, once in about 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (here, to prevent occurrence of a processing error) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (here, 32.8 ms). The main control unit restarts once every about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 81 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of false detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81, winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, no detection signal before, detection signal from previous time, detection signal from current) It is determined that there is entry or passage to the general winning opening 226, the common drawing starting gates 251 and 253, the special drawing starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 when they coincide with the information (indicating information). That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234, the starting opening 230 and the gates 251 and 253 have been won. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no detection signal from the previous time, and no detection signal this time). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the special control signal random number counter used by the main control unit 300 , And the random number counter for determining the special drawing fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the common fluctuation period. For example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. In the random number counter storage area of At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a previously obtained initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a result of acquiring a value from a random number counter which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value If the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter, and the random number counter next turns In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display for the special drawing Various timers are updated including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for counting a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting opening 230 have a winning, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning opening etc. is read in the RAM 308 and 1 is added. , Set in the original winning ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, there is a prize in the common drawing start area (general drawing start gate 251, 253), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games on hold is less than a predetermined number (here, 4). , Obtain predetermined start-up information. That is, if the number of reservations of the common drawing is less than the predetermined number, the common drawing winning random number value and the common drawing fluctuation period determination random number value are acquired. The common drawing win random number and the common drawing fluctuation period determination random number correspond to an example of the start information according to the present invention. The common drawing win random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing the hardware random number (the value of the hardware random number + the value of the R register + 1), and the common drawing fluctuation period determination random value is a value obtained by processing the software random number ( Software random number + R register value + 1). A combination of a random number storage register corresponding to a common drawing start area, a common figure fluctuation period determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 which performs random number processing of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. Corresponds to an example of the start information generation means (first start information generation means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the common drawing holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The common drawing reserve storage unit is capable of storing start information acquired when the game ball enters the common drawing start area (general drawing start gate 251, 253) up to a predetermined upper limit number (here four). It corresponds to storage means. At this time, the start information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the suspension storage unit of the map. In this case, the temporary area is also used as the start information storage unit. It is also possible to use a reserve storage unit and a temporary area of a common drawing as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the pending count value of the common drawing stored in the RAM 308, and the pending number of the common view increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, there is no reservation memory of a special figure. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure winning flag is prepared. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened, the special-figure winning flag is in the OFF state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 acquires predetermined start information when there is a winning at the special view start port 230 and the special view winning flag is in the OFF state. That is, a special drawing win random number value, a special drawing determination random number value, and a special drawing fluctuation time determination random number value are acquired as predetermined start information. The special figure winning random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing the hardware random number (value of hardware random number + value of R register + 1), and the special figure determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value are It is the value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). A random number storage register corresponding to the special view start port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 81, a special figure fluctuation time determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 which performs random number processing Corresponds to an example of the start information deriving means (second start information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determination random number value, and the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value acquired here are stored in the special figure start information storage area provided in the RAM 308 as one set of start information. Ru.

  Furthermore, in this winning reception process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (entering) to the common drawing start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start opening 230, or the variable winning opening 234, the first sub In transmission information to be transmitted to the control unit 400, winning reception information indicating the presence or absence of winning (entering) of the common drawing start gates 251 and 253, the special view starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 is set.

  In addition, when there is a winning on the special view starting opening 230, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 80 to emit light.

  The start information of the common drawing is not acquired if the number of reservations of the common drawing is equal to or more than the predetermined number, and the process proceeds to step S219. Further, the start information of the special view is not acquired if the special view prize flag is in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 81 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the common view display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common symbol A shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the lost symbol (a common symbol B shown in FIG. 83 (b)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game. Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later.

  FIG. 86 (a) is a diagram showing a table in which the operation mode of the common drawing motorized part 252 is summarized. In the case of the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) when the common drawing hit flag is on, the setting of the RAM 308 is performed. In addition to setting the normal drawing operation in the area, information indicating a predetermined open period is set in the storage area of the door member open period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, the storage area of the timer for managing the opening period of the door member is 5.8, regardless of whether it is in the power support state (normal state with high probability) or in the non electric support state (normal state with low probability). Set information that indicates the open period of seconds. Therefore, the operation of the drawing electric symbol 252 in the power support state and the movement of the drawing electric symbol 252 in the non-power support state become the same, and the player looks at the operation mode of the drawing electric symbol 252 It can not be determined whether it is in the power support state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 operates for opening and closing the door member 2521 until the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this case) is detected in the special drawing start port 230 for 5.8 seconds set here. A signal for holding the door member 2521 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) of FIG. In the pachinko machine 100, since the variable start means (general-purpose motor electric symbol 252) is in the open state (second state) only once during one operation period, this 5.8 seconds is an example of the second period It corresponds to Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command power-operated motor-operated product release setting processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the processing during operation of the general command general drawing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door member opening period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general drawing set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained during operation At the same time, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer, information indicating the closing period of 0.5 seconds is set in the power support state (general drawing high probability state), and the non electric support state (general drawing low) In the probability state), information indicating a closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the power support state (general drawing high probability state), and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state (general drawing low probability state) is the first period. Corresponds to one example. Therefore, the first period is longer in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. As described above, the power-supply state mentioned here is an example of the specific state, and the non-power-supply state is an example of the non-specific state. Compared with the non-specific state (non-electric support state), the variable start means (general-purpose motorized accessory 252) is more likely to be in the second state (open state) than in the non-specific state (non-electric support state). The entry rate of the game ball to the figure starting opening 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2521 until the closing period set here has elapsed. Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command power-operated combination setting closing process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Then, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the door member closing period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting region of the RAM 308 is set to non-operational state. Further, in order to execute the general command inactivity drawing non-operation process in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the normal drawing operation period is the first operation time (here, 6.3 seconds) in the power support state (general drawing high probability state), and the non-electric support state (general drawing low probability state) In the second operation period (here, 65.8 seconds) longer than the first operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer for counting the progress of these operation periods (general operation period), and the setting region of the RAM 308 is set to general operation state, and the storage region of the operation period timer is set. Information indicating a predetermined period may be set. In the pachinko machine 100, the operation period is started based on the satisfaction of the condition that the player has won the round drawing corresponding to an example of the first predetermined condition. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, the variable start means (the motor-driven symbol 252) is in the second state (open state) only once in one operation period, but a plurality of the variable start means is in the second state (open state). It may be an aspect of turning. For example, the open state is maintained for 1 second simultaneously with the start of the operation period, and the closed state is a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds, and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period ( For example, 0.5 seconds may be maintained, and finally, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the power support state and for 60 seconds in the non-power support state. In this case, two seconds in which the final second state (open state) is maintained corresponds to an example of the second period. Also, in the non-charging state, the 60 seconds for maintaining the last closed state of one operation period is the longest period longer than the period for maintaining the previous closed state (0.5 seconds in this example) It is.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening and closing control of the door member 2521 in this manner corresponds to an example of the variable start control unit that controls the general-purpose electric symbol 252 that is the variable start unit.

  Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, the common drawing loss flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, in step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is executed. First, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the regular drawing variation game is being performed or the opening and closing control of the common drawing motor combination 252 is being performed (the state of the common drawing is in operation), If one of them is being performed, the common drawing related lottery process is ended. On the other hand, if none of the above is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of popular drawing fluctuation games on hold is 1 or more. If it is 0, the common drawing related lottery process is ended, 1 If it is the above, one set of random number values (general drawing winning random number and general drawing fluctuation period determining random number) which is start information stored most in the past is taken out from the common drawing reserve storage unit provided in the RAM 308 The start information (a set of random number values) still stored in the pending storage unit is transferred from the area currently stored to the next area. That is, if the start information stored most recently is taken out from the common drawing reserve storage unit, and further, the start information is stored in the common drawing reserve storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is N-1 in the common drawing reserve storage unit. It will be set as the oldest start information. In addition, the number of reservations of the general drawing stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. The main control unit 300 performing processing for taking out one set of random numbers (normal drawing win random number and common drawing fluctuation period determination random value) from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 is a start information acquisition means (first start Corresponds to an example of the information acquisition means). Next, general-purpose charter propriety judgment processing is performed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a table for determining whether or not the drawing is accepted is stored.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a view showing a low probability table for common use determination or not determination, and FIG. 86 (c) is a view showing a high probability table for common use determination.

  In the regular drawing propriety judgment process, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the judgment is made based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. If the short time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the low probability table shown in FIG. 86 (b) is used to make a pass / fail judgment of the spread map, and if the time short flag is on (power If it is in the state), the high probability table shown in FIG. It is determined based on the common drawing win random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. The Atari probability of the common figure is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 86 (b) and 1 / 1.00003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 86 (c), which is a fairly high probability. In the non-power support state, the central power on view starting gate 251 is main, and when it is in the power support state, the right pushing is urged and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is easily opened. The common view starting gate 253 is the main. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a table used when winning a prize at the central common drawing starting gate 251, and the high probability table shown in FIG. 86 (c) is a table used when winning a common drawing start gate 253 at the right. You can say that. Here, deriving "hit" or "loss" is equivalent to a regular drawing suitability determination (lottery drawing), and here the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the regular drawing suitability determination process is the first success or failure determining means. It corresponds to an example. Moreover, the success or failure judgment result of “hit” corresponds to an example of a specific first success or failure judgment result.

  When the execution of the common drawing propriety judgment process is completed, the common drawing fluctuation period in the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a common drawing fluctuation period determination table.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a view showing a low probability loss table for determining a common drawing fluctuation period, and FIG. 87 (b) is a view showing a low probability per decision common drawing fluctuation period table. Further, FIG. 87 (c) is a view showing a high probability loss table for determining a common drawing fluctuation period, and FIG. 87 (d) is a view showing a high probability per common table fluctuation period determination table.

  Also in the determination of the spread map fluctuation period, the short time flag is referred to, and the determination of whether to accept or not based on whether the current control state is the power support state is performed. If the short time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the spread period fluctuation period is determined using the low probability table shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and (b), and the short time flag Is turned on (in the power-on state), the common drawing fluctuation period is determined using the high probability table shown in FIGS. 87 (c) and (d). Also, based on the above-mentioned common drawing success / failure determination result, if it is a loss, the common drawing fluctuation period is determined using the table at the time of the loss shown in FIG. 87 (b) and FIG. The spread map fluctuation period is determined using the hit time tables shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and (c). Further, the determination of the common drawing fluctuation period is performed based on the common drawing fluctuation period determination random value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. In addition, although acquisition timing of the random value for determination of a common drawing fluctuation period is timing which acquires starting information, it may be timing just before the start of common drawing fluctuation. In addition, in the non-power-supporting state, if the regular drawing suitability determination result is a loss, the common drawing fluctuation period is determined based on the number of reservations at that time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, a hold is made at the timing at which one set of random number values (general drawing win random number and common drawing fluctuation period determination random number) is extracted from the common drawing holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 From the relation of subtracting 1 from the number, the minimum value of the number of holding balls in the general drawing here is 0, and the maximum value is 3. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the random value for determining the common drawing fluctuation period belongs to the range of 0 to 59000, if the number of pending drawings is three, it becomes a common drawing fluctuation period of 3 seconds, 0 If it is ~ 2, it will be a fluctuation period of 10 seconds. When the random value for determining the common fluctuation period is 59001 or more, the common fluctuation period is common regardless of the number of reserved general drawings. Further, in the power support state, even if the commonplace drawing judgment result is a loss, the common drawing fluctuation period is common regardless of the number of holdings of the common drawing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 87 (c) and FIG. 87 (d), in the power support state, the spread fluctuation period is 1.5 regardless of whether the spread determination result is hit or not. It becomes a very shortened fluctuation period of seconds. The common drawing fluctuation period in the case of the power support state is shorter than the opening period of the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 described later. Moreover, the spread diagram fluctuation period in the case of the power support state is shorter than the spread diagram fluctuation period in the case of the non-power support state.

  Further, in each of the tables of FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (d), an effect aspect of the common drawing decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined according to the length of the common drawing fluctuation period is shown. The information representing the common drawing fluctuation time determined here is included in the common drawing fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as described later, and the first received the command. Sub control unit 400 specifically determines the rendering mode of the common drawing decorative symbol shown here based on the information indicating the common drawing fluctuation time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the presentation mode of the common figure decorative pattern. With normal reach, in general, two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 80) stop and display the same decorative symbol, and one remaining symbol display area (for example, middle symbol display area 208b) If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, ie, the symbol display area that is variably displayed, is stopped and displayed, the combination of predetermined big hit symbols (FIG. 83) It is a state which will stop-display the combination of the decorative symbol shown to (b). The Super Reach is a product that improves presentation effects by adding a special variable display etc. to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also an aspect called special variation in the effect aspect of the decorative symbol. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full turn reach, special full turn reach, etc. When simply saying "reach" means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach and special variation. This reach is after the success / failure determination that the result of the determination of the success / failure of the normality in the processing related to the common drawing becomes the specific first success / failure determination result (the predetermined result with a high degree of player's advantage) It is a notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure.

  When the determination of the common drawing fluctuation period is completed, the common drawing related lottery process (step S223) is ended, and then the special drawing state update process is executed (step S225). The special view state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special view. For example, in the special figure state update process in the middle of the symbol variation stop display of the special figure (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is turned on and off Repeated on / off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the special view display device 212 performs variable display (special view variation game) of the special view.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233), and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a big hit flag and a lost flag are prepared. In the special figure status update process starting at the timing when the special figure fluctuation display period has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure determination result in special figure related lottery process The 7 segment LED constituting the special view display device 212 is turned on / off drive control based on the stop pattern aspect of the special view), and the setting indicating the special view stop display in the setting area of the RAM 308 is performed. By performing this control, the special view display device 212 is any one of the big hit symbol (special symbol A to special symbol T), the first loss symbol (special symbol V), and the second loss symbol (special symbol W). Make a final display of one symbol. Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display of a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view fluctuation game is notified to the player.

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be performed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described later, and then the process is ended.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the setting area of the RAM 308 in the special figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The special drawing operation period is set to, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period for displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to make a big hit is waited for the RAM 308 Information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set in the storage area of the special view standby time management timer provided in. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command prize effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special view status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for special view waiting time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 0.1 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 2341 is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open period management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special view state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) variable winning opening Information indicating a closing period in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 while outputting a signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 2341 234 Set Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds), that is, decorative symbol display Information indicating the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the device 208 is finished. Set

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. In addition, the open / close pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of success or failure of the special view fluctuation game from the ROM 306. Get the opening and closing pattern.

  Further, in addition to the time saving flag, a probability change flag is also prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the stop symbol form represented by the special drawing determination result and the special drawing determination result. At the same time as the end of the jackpot game, based on the gaming state when the start information used for the acquisition (at the time of releasing the general drawing motor combination (initial), at the time the limiter is not reached (during consecutive units), at the time the limiter is reached) , And the ON / OFF flag set in the RAM 308.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area is inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308 Set Furthermore, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, the special chart state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the special view stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is In the setting area, set the special figure non-operational. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, the process is shifted to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step S229) is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the second success / failure determination means. In the special figure related lottery process (step S229), execution of the lottery (the first pass / fail judgment), determination of the special figure to be stopped and determination of the variation period (first variation period) in the symbol variation stop display of the special figure . First, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not established. Here, it is determined whether the special view display device 212 is in the special view variation display or in the stop display, and if any display is in progress, the special view related lottery process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is not in any display, it is determined whether it is set during special drawing operation or during special drawing non-operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, special drawing related lottery processing If it is set and the special view is not in operation, it means that the condition is not established, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is established. In this determination, it is determined whether start information is stored in the special view start information storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the start information is not stored, the special drawing-related lottery process is ended, and if the start information is stored, the predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the start information stored in the special view start information storage area (special figure winning random number value, special figure determination random number value, and special figure fluctuation time determination random number value) Are acquired, and special drawing suitability determination (first success or failure determination) processing is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a success / failure determination table of the special view.

  FIG. 88 (a) is a view showing a low probability table for special figure yes / no determination, and FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing a high probability table for special figure yes / no determination.

  In this special drawing suitability determination process, the probability change flag is prepared with reference to the RAM 308, and the determination of propriety is made based on whether the current control state is the special figure definite modification state. If the probability change flag is off (if it is in the special condition low probability state), the success / failure judgment of the special figure is performed using the low probability table shown in FIG. 88 (a), and the probability change flag is on (special figure height probability In the case of the state), the high probability table shown in FIG. It is determined based on the special figure winning random number value (possible range: 0 to 65535) of the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100, when reaching the specified number of times (during limiter), the state shifts to the non-probability state (special figure low probability state). In this case, in the special drawing hit or not determination, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), win a win with no time savings with a probability of 12.5%, symbol fluctuation stop display of the next special drawing with a probability of 12.5% We will win a big hit that will be time-saving until the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing is performed 100 times. In the pachinko machine 100, in the non-probability change state, as shown in the table of FIG. 88 (a) for the special figure eligibility determination table, the pachinko machine 100 results in a big hit with the establishment of 25%. As shown in the table of FIG. 88 (b), the result of the big hit is almost reached. This "big hit" special-design result determination result corresponds to an example of a specific second determination result.

  When the execution of the special figure conformance determination process is completed, special figure determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol form of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table.

  FIG. 88 (c) is a diagram showing a jackpot special view determination table. The number of times for reaching the limiter is also shown in the table for determining the special hit for the big hit shown in FIG. 88 (c).

  This special view determination process is performed based on the special view determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information acquired from the special view start information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, the special figure stop symbol aspect is decided on the basis of the game state when the starting information which is used when obtaining the special feature suitability decision result is acquired. In other words, if the special drawing propriety judgment result is a big hit at the time of releasing the regular drawing motor combination (when per initial initial drawing), the special drawing A ~ special drawing with a probability of 96% based on the special drawing determination random value. Decide on any special figure of P (with a definite variation and a time-saving big hit until next big hit), and with a probability of 4%, select a special figure Q ~ a special figure T (no definite variation and 100 times with a short hit big hit illustration Determined to be one of the special drawings. In addition, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be any of the special figures A to P, it means that the big hit with definite variation is won once, and the maximum number of gains of big hit with definite variation (11 times)-1 time = 10 times. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the special figure Q to the special figure T, it becomes 11 times which is the maximum number of times of acquisition of the jackpot with probability variation. Even when the special drawing hit / not determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not reached (during consecutive residences), the special drawing A to the special drawing P (with definite variation and with a probability of 96% based on the random number value for special drawing determination) Decide on any special figure of the big hit symbol with time reduction until the next big hit, and any of the special figure Q ~ special figure T (no definite variation and 100 big hit symbols with short time mark) with 4% probability Determined to be a special figure. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be any of the special figures A to P, it means that the jackpot with definite variation has been acquired once, and it becomes one subtraction. If it is determined that one of the figure Q to the special figure T is selected, it is reset, and 11 times of the specified number of times are set again. If the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit when reaching the limiter, based on the special drawing determination random number value, the special drawing A ~ special drawing H, special drawing Q, special drawing R with a probability of 53.3% Determined on any of the special drawings of (with no definite variation and 100 time-shortening big-hit symbols), and with a probability of 4%, special drawing I to special drawing P, special drawing S, special drawing T (no definite change and no time reduction) Determined to be one of the special illustrations of the jackpot symbol without). The number of times to reach the limiter in this case is reset if it is determined to be one of Tokusyu A to Toku H, Toku Q, and Toku R, and the specified number of times of 11 is set again. Be done. When it is determined that one of the special drawing I to the special drawing P, the special drawing S, and the special drawing T, it is 0 times.

  That is, the number of times that the probability change jackpot can be acquired between the transition to the power support state and the transition to the non-power support state is 11 times, and the non-probability state changes to the non-probability state (special figure low probability state) When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the definite variation big hit is pulled, it becomes 10 times. In addition, the number of limiters is reset when the non-probability variation big hit is pulled during the multi-run so that the specified number of times of 11 is reset and 100 times of short time is given. That is, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the non-deterministic variation big hit, the hit is added at this time that the limiter count is reset. Furthermore, when reaching the limiter, even if a definite variation symbol is displayed, it will be treated as a non-positive variation big hit, but if a short time is given at this time, as will be described later in detail, a substantial combination will be added.

  When the execution of the special figure determination process is completed, the special figure variation period in the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing fluctuation period determination table.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a regular drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, and FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a common drawing low probability special figure fluctuation period determination mode; The figure (c) is a figure showing the lost table for common drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, and the figure (d) is a figure showing the common table low probability special figure fluctuation period determination loss table.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 89 is used based on the above-mentioned special figure appropriateness determination result, and the power support state (general drawing high probability state) or the non power support state (general drawing low probability state). To determine the fluctuation period of the special map. Furthermore, the determination of the special figure fluctuation period is performed based on the random number value for the special figure fluctuation period determination (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, although acquisition timing of the random number value for special drawing fluctuation period determination is timing which acquires starting information, it may be timing just before special drawing fluctuation start. As shown in the table in FIG. 89 (a), in the pachinko machine 100, when the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit in the power support state, the special drawing fluctuation period is a predetermined short period with a fairly high probability (here Then, it will be a fluctuation period of 1 second). The predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252, and while the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened once, During the power support state, the result of the special drawing suitability determination based on winning in the special drawing start port 230 is often notified. In addition, in the power support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are also prepared. The probability of becoming a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of becoming a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 89 (b), when the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit in the non-electric support state, the special drawing fluctuation period uniformly fluctuates for a predetermined period (60 seconds in this case). become.

  Also, as shown in the table of FIG. 89 (c), when the special drawing suitability determination result is lost in the power support state, the fluctuation period of the special drawing is uniformly 10 seconds, and the figure of FIG. As shown in the table, when the special drawing suitability determination result is lost in the non-power-up state, the fluctuation period of the special drawing is uniformly 60 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the special drawing is uniformly 60 seconds. In addition, the period of the symbol variation stop display of the special figure notifying the special figure suitability determination result is made different only when the special figure suitability determination result is a big hit in the power support state, the effect of the bonus game is performed During the special game state to be played, the special feature on / off determination is performed at different intervals.

  The information representing the fluctuation period of the special drawing is included in the symbol fluctuation start command of the special drawing transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receiving the command In the symbol display device 208, if it is a fluctuation period of 120 seconds, the jackpot effect of Premier A is displayed during the fluctuation period, and if it is a fluctuation period of 360 seconds, the jackpot effect of Premier B during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the determination of the special figure fluctuation period ends, the special figure related lottery process (step S229) ends, and then, the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 85 is performed, and various commands are the first sub control unit Sent to 400 The output schedule information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (here, basic command, special symbol design variation start command, special design symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, general drawing reserve increase Information that can specify the type of command (such as a command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Further, in the case of the special symbol design variation start command, information representing the special figure stop symbol, information representing the control state (information representing the setting status of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag), and the special figure variation time In the case of the special figure symbol fluctuation stop command, the information is included, and in the case of the special figure symbol fluctuation stop command, the information indicating the special figure stop symbol, the information indicating the control state, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, the presence or absence of a winning on the special view starting port 230, the presence or absence of a winning on the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  Further, in the above-mentioned general command winning effect setting setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, control state Set the information that represents. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data represents the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, Set the information. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the command related to these effects transmits a control command related to the effect to the second sub control unit 500 based on the received command.

  Further, in the above-mentioned general command large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of rounds, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening closed setting transmission process, information indicating the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, information indicating a control state, and the like is set in command data.

  Further, in step S233, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits, as a common drawing related command, a common drawing symbol fluctuation start command indicating that fluctuation display of the common drawing is started (is performed). In the command data of this common figure symbol fluctuation start command, information indicating the common drawing yes / no determination result, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability change flag), information indicating the common drawing change time, probability change The information etc. which show the value of a counter are included. Furthermore, the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric utility 252 is opened. A general-purpose motor combination release command indicating that it has started (to be started), a common-diagram motor combination close command that indicates that the door member 2521 is closed (to do), or the like is transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the glass frame opening error or the bottom plate full error, etc. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Also, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 81 are driven to control the opening and closing of the common drawing motor combination 252 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common drawing display device 210 and the special drawing through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the display device 212, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. Furthermore, when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is closed, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 80 to emit light. Due to the light emission of the prize lamp 254 at the time of closing the door member 2521, it may be possible for the player to be reminded of the special effect to be described later based on the electric chow prize.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on, in order to determine whether or not the interruption of the power supply has been detected. Then, if the low voltage signal is off (if the power off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. If the low voltage signal is on (if the power off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 84 is performed. To return.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure upon power recovery is saved as recovery data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and processing upon power failure such as initialization of input / output port And then return to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When the power is turned on, the initial setting of step S301 is performed. In this initialization, initialization of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 81, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect control process will be described in detail later.

  In step S311, when pressing of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 79 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the pressing of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, when there is an instruction to the drive circuit 420 of the various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If a control command is set in this transmission area, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 90 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of effect control processing shown in FIG. 90 (a).

  In the first sub control unit 400, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 85, the main control unit 300 causes the common control operation start command to indicate the start of the operation period of the common control; A general-purpose motor-operated combination closing command representing the closing of the door member 2521 in FIG. The common drawing operation start command includes information representing the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 in the common drawing electric symbol 252. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 is a pattern which is opened once and closed once, but the first sub-control unit 400 determines one pattern based on this information. The final closing of the door member 2521 can be recognized during the period of operation of the swing. In other words, it is possible to recognize the closing immediately before the electric chow open end standby time (here, 60 seconds) corresponding to an example of the first period. In the effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether a special effect start condition is satisfied (step S3091). In other words, if the symbol variation start command has not been received at all even after the common drawing operation start command has been received and the common drawing motor combination closing command indicating the final closing has not been received, the special effect is produced. When the start condition is satisfied, a special effect command is set in the transmission area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S3092), and the process proceeds to step S3093. On the other hand, if the special effect start condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3093 without performing the process of step S3092. In step S3093, other effect control processing is performed, and the effect control processing ends. The special effect command set in step S3092 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process of step S319 shown in FIG. 90 (a). When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the special effect command, it controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the special effect command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has an image of a predetermined special effect described later. Is displayed.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 90 (c). FIG. 90C is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is completed.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (here, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process triggers the predetermined cycle of the timer interrupt process. Run with

In step S341 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 84A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S343 of the first auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed, and the timer interrupt process is completed.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  The second sub-control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads out pattern information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub control unit 500 based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display a display image An image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first instructs transfer of image data. Here, first, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM are swapped. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM), etc. in the attribute register of the GPU based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. When the transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU uses information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM, image size, VRAM coordinates Instructs the GPU (such as placement coordinates). The GPU performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU is not input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Then, drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  When the drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the GPU is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When the generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts the number of images of the scene, is incremented (+1) and the process is ended. Do.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the image display means. The combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 corresponds to an example of the effect control means.

The second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing a part of the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 92 is a view stepwise showing the screen of the decorative symbol display device in the flow of the game shown in FIG. In FIG. 92, time elapses in alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, at the left corner of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92, a fourth symbol 217 of a common drawing and a fourth symbol 218 of a special drawing are displayed. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, a white circle represents a display during variation, a black circle represents a display during suspension, and the same applies to the subsequent drawings.

  In the state where the game is started, it is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability common figure low probability state). The player aims at the central blowout start gate 251 and makes a left strike. Eventually, the central common drawing start gate 251 wins (step S501), and the common drawing display device 210 starts symbol fluctuation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a liquid crystal display panel, the symbol variation of the decorative symbol of the common figure is started (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure is in the stop display, the fourth symbol 217 of the common drawing is in the variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is also a reach effect using a decorative symbol of a common figure (step S503), but no reach effect is performed, and the common pattern display device 210 is a lost symbol (see FIG. 83 (a) And stop displaying the combination (for example, loose eyes) of the decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208, and return to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even when the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIG. 92 (b) and FIG. 92 (d) is performed, the hit image display 210 is hit and the symbol (see FIG. 83 (a)) is always stopped and displayed. The combination of the decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged is not necessarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of the common-practice determination is a hit, the common-pattern display device 210 is hit and the symbol (see FIG. 83 (a)) is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 92 (d) The combination of the decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are lined up at 208 is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the common drawing fluctuating game is notified. Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), at the same time as the common view display device 210 is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol 217 of the common view of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed during stop. A screen for instructing to perform a right strike is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 along with the winning of the common drawing variation game (step S 506), and the common drawing motorized prize 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 The door member 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  By opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose motorized prize 252, it is possible to win a prize in the special chart starting port 230, but if there is no prize return, the process returns to step S501 (step S508). In the special-design pass / fail determination (special-pattern lottery) for one ball that has won a prize (step S509). When the special figure suitability determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (e) and FIG. 92 (f), the bowling chance game is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the fourth symbol 217 of the common figure is in the stop display mode, the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure is in the variable display mode. When the special drawing suitability determination result is a loss, a special symbol display device 212 displays a lost symbol (see FIG. 82 (a)) in a stopped state, and as shown in FIG. 92 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the scene where the strike can not be taken is displayed (step S511). Here, the probability that the special drawing suitability determination is lost is 2/65536 (see FIG. 88A). On the other hand, if the special figure propriety judgment result is a big hit, the stop figure (see FIG. 82 (a)) of the special figure A to special figure P which is a big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure display device 212. As shown in FIG. 92 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying that the strike is released and the bonus game is started (step S512). The probability that the special design hit / not judgment here will be a big hit is 65534/65536, which is a very high probability (see FIG. 88A). When winning the big hit of the special figure, it always shifts from the non-power support state (generally low drawing probability state) to the power support state (general drawing high probability state). As shown in FIGS. 92 (g) and 92 (h), the special view display device 212 stops and displays, and at the same time, the fourth symbol 218 of the special view of the decorative symbol display device 208 also becomes a stop display.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 94 is a view stepwise showing the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the first hit is a big hit without definite variation.

  The probability of winning a big hit with a definite change in the special figure variation game here is 96%, and the probability of winning a big hit without a definite change is 4% (see FIG. 88 (c)). When the jackpot of no probability change is won, the value of 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 94 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the big hit game The "remaining 11 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S513). In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time, there is also a display of "during 1 consecutive loafing" from the fact that the door member 2521 of the common figure electric symbol 252 is opened once first (step S507 shown in FIG. 91). Ru. On the other hand, when the big hit with the probability change is won, the value of the probability change counter is set to 10 (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the power support state, the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing is likely to be won, and the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric jack 252 is easy to open. For this reason, the propriety judgment of the special drawing is easy to be carried out, and in the pachinko machine 100, the qualification judgment of the special drawing is won by a big hit with a probability of 25% in the non-probability changing state, and a considerably high probability in the probability changing state. To win a big hit. The probability of winning a big hit with a probability change and time-shortening until the next big hit is 96% when the number of remaining times that can win a big hit with a definite change before transition to the non-electric support state is two or more. The probability of winning in a jackpot with no odds and 100 short-time hits is 4% (see FIG. 88 (c)). For example, if you win a big hit with a probability change with the remaining count of 11 times and a time reduction until the next big hit, the value of the probability change counter is set to a value of 10 minus one from the value of 11 that has been set so far. As shown in 94 (b), "remaining 10 times" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the big hit game. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time, a display of "during two consecutive lines" is also made.

  On the other hand, when winning a jackpot with no odds and 100 short-time hits, the odds counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and the jackpot with definite odds is acquired before shifting to the non-electric support state. The number of remaining can be increased. The reset of the probability change counter is advantageous for the player, but is performed with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 94 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the jackpot game when the remaining number of times is two. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (c), "2 remaining" and "10 consecutive villas" are displayed, and a display such as "add bonus when taking extra chance strike" is also performed. . Then, when the number of remaining times is one, the bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the big hit game. The result of the special figure fluctuation game that was decided to play the big hit game here is a big hit without probability change, but with a probability of 53.3% it is a big hit with 100 time reductions and a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time saving. When the result of the special figure fluctuation game is the big hit without time saving, the bonus ends (step S519), it moves to non power support state, it moves also to non probability change state, becomes normal game state . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (g), an image of a scene where a strike can not be taken is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit with short time 100 times, it shifts to the non-probability state, but the power support state is extended until the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times .

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit in the power support state, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the special drawing state is the special drawing state, or the special drawing state. The fluctuating period of is often as short as one second. However, the probability of 500/65536 results in 120 seconds, and the probability of 35/65536 results in 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the player wins a jackpot without probability change during the bonus, the fluctuation period of the special chart may be selected to be 120 seconds or 360 seconds, which is a long time. It should be noted that the variation period of the special map may be extended for a long time only when the player wins the jackpot without probability change during the bonus. Even in the non-deterministic state, since the time reduction is attached, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 is easy to open, and it is easy to determine whether the special drawing is acceptable. If the variation period of the special drawing is a short period (1 second in this case), the success / failure determination result of the special drawing is immediately notified, and for one opening of the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252, Special figure variation game is often played only once. That is, the number of opening times of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is synchronized with the definite number of limiters. However, if the variation period of the special figure is a long period (here, 120 seconds or 360 seconds), the door member 2521 of the common figure electric symbol 252 is opened multiple times while the special figure variation game is performed once. , The payout can be made by paying out based on the winning on the special figure starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning).

  As shown in FIG. 93, when the fluctuation period of the special drawing is a short period, the process returns to step S513, and as shown in FIG. 94 (f), "remaining 11 times" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Ru. On the other hand, when the variation period of the special figure is a long period, information representing the variation period of the special figure included in the special pattern variation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, information of a long period The first auxiliary control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 several times during the transition to the non-power-supply state after the transition to the power-supply state. Do some prediction calculations. The prediction calculation here is performed based on the fact that one opening period of the door member 2521 of the common drawing motor-operated accessory 252 is uniform at 5.8 seconds. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the predetermined number of times is uniformly made larger than the above-mentioned specified number of times. For example, it is predicted that the door member 2521 of the common drawing motorized product 252 is opened five times in 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times is 16 times where the predicted number of times plus 5 times is added to 11 times. Displayed as an example of information). In addition, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long term (here, 360 seconds) longer than the first long term, display (for example, ??? times) with a predetermined symbol etc. is performed uniformly. You may do so.

Here, the number of times the prediction calculation is made is the number of times the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 can be opened before the transition to the non-electric support state, as described above. The fluctuation period in the figure is often a short period, and the special drawing fluctuation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252, so that The first sub-control unit 400 displays the remaining number as the remaining number on the decorative symbol display device 208, assuming that the number calculated and predicted is the number that can obtain the jackpot with probability change before shifting to the non-electric support state. (Step S520). As can be understood from this, in the pachinko machine 100, one special figure changing game and one opening of the regular drawing electric character 252 are linked if the additional chance is not taken into consideration.
FIG. 95 is a view showing a modified example of the additional opportunity shown in FIG. 94 (c).

  FIG. 95 (a) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the jackpot game in the state where the remaining number of times that can obtain the jackpot with probability change before transitioning to the non-electric support state is five. . On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (a), a display such as "large bonus chance added when bonusing in" is displayed.

  FIG. 95 (c) is a screen displayed when the "large bonus chance" is a false display, in which "sorry" is displayed. That is, the “big bonus chance” shown in FIG. 6A is a screen that is displayed when the player wins a big hit without a definite change during the bonus, and the remaining number is reset. However, in the figure (c), there is no change in the remaining number, and "the remaining 5 times" is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 95 (b) is a screen displayed when the "large bonus chance" is a true display, and a display of "Congratulations" is made.

  FIG. 95 (d) is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (for example, 360 seconds), and the remaining number? ? ? It has been time.

  FIG. 95 (e) is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds), and the remaining number is 120 for 120 times, which is the prescribed number. It is 16 times which added 5 times which is the number of times of prediction.

  As described above, when a long effect period (duration period of the special drawing) is reached during the bonus in the special game state, effects different from the normal effect are performed. In addition, when stop displaying the big hit symbol of the special figure in the power support state, the door member 2521 of the common figure electric symbol 252 is often opened only once for one special figure fluctuation game. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), it is 12 times for the presentation of Premier A and 36 times for the presentation of Premier B. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, although the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is opened, the game ball is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252. In addition, as a prize ball number, 0 ball at the time of winning in the regular drawing start gates 251 and 253, four balls at the time of winning in the variable winning opening 234 (adjacency), 7 at the time of winning in the common drawing electric combination 252 (special figure starting opening) The ball may be 10 balls when winning in the general winning opening 226. The establishment of the predetermined conditions referred to in the present invention corresponds to the entrance of the game ball to the winning opening and the starting opening, and in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the predetermined gaming value is played based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. Game value giving means (a game medium payout means (payout device 152) for paying out game media) to be given to a player. In addition, a variable winning opening 234 (attacker) having a smaller number of winning balls is disposed downstream of the regular drawing electric symbol 252 (special figure starting port) having many winning balls. It is also conceivable to reverse the positional relationship between the common drawing motorized character 252 and the variable winning opening 234, but if this is done, the variable winning opening 234 with few winning balls will be won first. In the present embodiment, during the bonus in the special game state, the gaming ball that leaked into entering the regular game motorized role 252 is able to win the variable winning opening 234 (adjacency) and contributes to the increase in the winning ball Do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the power support state, the intervals (intervals based on 1 second, 120 seconds, and 360 seconds) for deriving the special figure probability change big hit (specific first yes / no determination result) are different. This will improve the interest of the game. Further, the game property of the present embodiment is to increase the number of gaming balls by being a so-called limiter machine (there is an upper limit to the number of probability change units) and the common drawing motorized role 252 (electric chew). In other words, since the time between jackpots of the special figure is different, the number of opening of the electric chow between them is different, so that the amount of gaming balls to be increased can be changed. This game feature is a game feature that the player can fit in. Further, by deriving the hit of the normal symbol in a high probability and in a short time, it is possible to open the electric chew frequently, and the electric chew contributes to the game performance of the game ball increase. In addition, in the power-supply state, it is possible to provide a difference in the open frequency of the power chew by giving a change (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the special drawing. Furthermore, by making the derivation probability of the special figure big hit until reaching the limiter a high probability, it is possible to change the open frequency of the electric chew and the obtainable game balls based on the open frequency almost by the fluctuation time of the special figure. it can. In addition, since the limiter is reset, it is possible to make the result of the special drawing be interesting also in the game property in which the number of game balls is increased by the common drawing electric combination 252 (electric chew). In addition, it is advantageous for the player in the special game state that the fluctuation time of the special drawing is long, but it is possible to determine the long fluctuation time at the time of the limiter reset, so that the special drawing is also performed after the fluctuation ends. It becomes possible to continue the special game state until derivation per predetermined number of times. That is, it is possible to simultaneously provide two advantageous states to the player, the limiter reset and the long-term fluctuation. Furthermore, by reporting the current number of consecutive homes and the remaining number of times to the limiter, the interest of the game during the special game state may be improved. In addition, when notification is performed based on the number of times the electric chow is released, it may be linked to the ball to improve the interest more. Furthermore, although the long-term fluctuation of the special drawing is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation for the limiter, it is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation, but changing the information to be notified in association with the number of times of opening electric power May increase. The game property in this embodiment is a limiter machine, and at any timing, the addition of the special gaming state more than the number of limiters is not committed at any timing, but the game ball obtained by long-time fluctuation is a normal special feature digest 1 It is possible to notify the player as if the special gaming state equal to or more than the number of times of the limiter is provided by using more than the batch (subtraction of the limiter). That is, it is possible to link the ball with the notification. Furthermore, by setting the notification content as the remaining number of times up to the limiter, even if the notification is performed more than the specified number of times, it is possible to link the balls, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the variation period of the special figure may be set to be a long time only when the player wins a jackpot with no probability change during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of a loss, a long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be used, and in this case, a large number of gaming balls can be obtained without the prescribed number of digestions (without the limiter subtraction). It is possible.

  In addition, in the embodiment, the gaming board 200 board surface configuration is configured such that the gaming ball is induced to both of the common-playing electric combination 252 and the variable winning opening 234 when right-handed (in special gaming state) But it is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) may be disposed at a place where it is difficult to win with the launch strength in the special game state. In this case, it is possible to make the point where the attacker does not open during the long variation period (big bonus) of the special figure be inconspicuous.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the next big hit can be realized because the big hit probability at the special figure low probability is 1⁄4, and the number of time reductions given after the addition (after the non probability variation big hit) is 100 times. At the same time, it is possible to increase the number of game balls by opening the common drawing electric symbol 252 during this time due to the loss of the 3/4 special drawing.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may correspond completely to the stop symbol of the special figure 1: 1.

Furthermore, the interval for deriving the special figure probability variation big hit (specific first pass / fail judgment result) can be different depending on the period during the big hit game as well as the variation time of the special figure (representation time). For example, the intervals can be made different by changing the time of the start effect or the end effect of the big hit game or the effect of the interval between rounds. Further, the interval can be made different by changing the stop display period of the special view.
Subsequently, characteristic points in the present invention will be described.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the winning balls are not paid out even if the gaming ball passes (winning) the regular drawing starting gates 251, 253, the regular drawing starting gates 251, 253 benefit from the payout of the winning balls. Corresponds to a non-profitable entry area in which the player is not awarded. It should be noted that, when the gaming ball passes through the regular drawing start gates 251 and 253 (winning), the player is given the benefit of being able to receive the lottery of the regular drawing fluctuation game. On the other hand, when the game ball enters (wins), a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls are paid out from the central general winning hole 226 disposed below the central blowout start gate 251, and the blowout on the right side When the game ball enters (winning) the special figure starting opening 230 where entry of the game ball becomes possible when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 arranged below the figure start gate 251 opens, the predetermined number A prize ball (for example, 7 balls) is paid out. Therefore, the central general winning opening 226 and the special figure starting opening 230 correspond to a profit giving approach area for giving the player a profit of payout of the winning balls when the game ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol fluctuation start command of a general drawing is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 having received the symbol variation start command of the common figure outputs a control command instructing the second sub control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the regular pattern variation effect production, The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a common figure symbol variation effect. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the symbol variation start command of the common figure instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 81 to output a predetermined sound as the common figure symbol variation effect, and the speaker 120 outputs a predetermined sound. To be done. Here, the display of the predetermined effect image performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the predetermined sound output performed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the predetermined effect in the present invention.

  In addition, when the game ball enters central general winning a prize opening 226 and special figure starting mouth 230, as mentioned above, main control section 300 sets winning a prize reception information with winning a prize reception processing, the winning a prize reception information 1st secondary control It is sent to unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 having received the winning reception information outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the award ball payout effect, and the second sub-control unit 400 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a special effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a prize ball payout effect. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 having received the winning reception information instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 81 to output a specific sound as a prize ball payout effect, and the speaker 120 performs a specific sound output. Here, the display of the specific effect image performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the specific sound output performed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the specific effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 96 is a time chart of a common-design symbol variation effect and a winning ball payout effect. In FIG. 96, time passes from the left to the right of the figure, and the same applies to the subsequent time charts.

  When the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit provision entrance area, which is the common drawing start gate 251, 253, detects the entrance of the gaming ball to the common drawing start gate 251, 253, the detection signal is not detected In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 at the timing of (A) shown in the drawing, a common figure symbol fluctuation effect (a profit non-improved entry area entry effect) is started.

  In addition, when the game ball which has passed central drawing start gate 251 enters central general winning a prize opening 226, the ball detection sensor which is provided in central general winning a prize opening 226 detects the entrance of the gaming ball and the detection signal is non It changes from detection to detection, and at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, a prize ball payout effect (a profit giving approach area entry effect) is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and The prize ball payout effect ends at the timing. On the other hand, the regular pattern symbol variation effect started at the timing of (A) shown in the figure continues even after the award ball payout effect ends. That is, the execution period of the common-design symbol variation effect is longer than the execution period of the prize ball payout effect, and the execution period of the prize-ball payout effect is included in the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect.

The main control unit 300 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to move to the first sub-control unit 400 if the number of reservations in the common drawing when the game ball passes the common drawing start gate 251 or 253 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). Send a pending increase command. The first sub control unit 400 having received the common drawing reserve increase command causes the second sub control unit 400 to output a control command instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the common drawing reserve increase effect. It is also good. Further, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the popular drawing reserve increase command may instruct the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 81 to output a predetermined sound as the generic drawing reserve increase effect. By doing this, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general drawing reserve increase effect, and a predetermined sound output is performed on the speaker 120, and these predetermined effect images are displayed The predetermined sound output may be a predetermined effect according to the present invention.
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of common symbol symbol variation effect and award ball payout effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (a), a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols in a common drawing is displayed. That is, it is in the state where the common drawing fluctuation game is stopped. In this state, when the gaming ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 96), symbol fluctuation display is started in the common drawing display device 210, and FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined effect image) of a decorative symbol of a common figure is started. In addition, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. The fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the output of the common drawing fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the common drawing symbol fluctuation presentation. Further, the central spread start gate 251 corresponds to an example of the first entry area.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 96), as shown in FIG. In the center of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, a character image 2081 (corresponding to an example of another image) of a panda with a scary face who uttered "Jarjara" is displayed large. That is, a character image 2081 of a panda with a scary face is displayed so as to cover the middle symbol display area 208b in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the speaker 120 outputs a prize ball payout sound of "Jarrajara" that simulates a payout sound. Be done. The display of the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face and the output of the award ball payout sound “Jarjara” correspond to an example of the award ball payout effect.

  In this specific example, a character image 2081 of a scary-faced panda character is covered with a part of the image of the variation display of the decoration symbol, and a part of the image of the variation display of the decoration symbol (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) disappears ing. In addition, the prize ball payout sound also starts to sound in the middle of the common pattern fluctuation sound, and the prize ball payout sound is heard over the common pattern fluctuation sound. As described above, the common-design symbol variation effect is changed by the winning ball payout effect. As a result, the prize ball payout effect is prioritized, and it becomes easy for the player to notice that the prize balls are being paid out, and it is thought that the ball possession is good, and the impression of the game stand may be improved. That is, since the player never notices the occurrence of the winning balls, it may be possible to make the player and the game stand have a better ball possession than in the case where he does not notice. In addition, the player is more likely to notice the generation of the winning balls because the effect of concentrating the player is changed. Furthermore, since the game ball which has passed central common drawing start gate 251 wins in central general winning a prize opening 226, because it is possible to enjoy the production where common pattern symbol variation production and common pattern design variation production changed with the same game ball The player can enjoy many effects with less investment, and may improve the impression of the game console.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common drawing reserve increase presentation and a prize ball payout presentation in a state in which a common pattern symbol variation presentation is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the common pattern display device 210, and according to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a common pattern. The variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Further, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. That is, a common figure symbol variation representation in the symbol variation display is performed.

  Further, in this example, the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a common view hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the common view hold storage unit of the RAM 308; The start information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The normal drawing hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the first start information storage means (the common view hold storage unit of the RAM 308). That is, the common drawing hold display is performed for each start information of the common drawing stored in the first start information storage means, and the number of the common drawing hold display corresponds to the holding number of the common drawing. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first start hold display means. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives a general drawing reserve increase command, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a reserve increase instruction for the general drawing to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500, based on the instruction. , And controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to increase the number of common drawing hold display by one. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a common drawing reserve decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500 every time it receives a common drawing symbol variation start command which is a signal of holding and digesting the common drawing, and the second sub control The section 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the common view reduction decrease signal to reduce the number of common view hold displays by one. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (a), two common drawing hold displays are displayed. Hereinafter, a generic drawing reserve display representing the older standard drawing reserve (hereinafter referred to as generic drawing reserve 1) will be referred to as a first common drawing reserve display 291 and a newer generic drawing reserve (hereinafter referred to as generic drawing reserve 2) The common view hold display representing) is referred to as a second common view hold display 292. Here, the number of reservations for the common drawing is two.

  If the game ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 while the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, the symbol fluctuation display is being performed here, and the number of reserved common drawings is also a predetermined number. Since it is less than 2, start information based on the current passage of the central flat game start gate 251 of the gaming ball is stored in the common view reservation storage unit of the RAM 308, and the number of held general views increases. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (b), the third common drawing reserve display 293 is additionally displayed. The third common drawing hold display 293 displayed here continues to be displayed until the common drawing hold 3 represented by the third common drawing hold display 293 is digested. Further, at the same time as the third common drawing hold display 293 is additionally displayed, a common drawing hold increase sound for notifying that the common drawing hold is increased is outputted from the speaker 120 for a predetermined period. This common view holding increase sound stops ringing before the symbol variation display ends. The additional display of the third common drawing hold display 293 and the output of the common drawing hold increase sound correspond to an example of the common drawing hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, as in FIG. 97 (c), a voice of "Jarajarra" is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative display is displayed. The character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face that has uttered is displayed in a large size, and the speaker 120 outputs a prize-ball-dispensing sound called "Jarjara" imitating a disbursed sound (see FIG. 98 (c)). The scared face portion 2081a of the panda displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the middle symbol display area 208b, and the balloon portion 2081b "Jarjara" is displayed on the effect display area 208d. Also in the example shown in FIG. 98, the display of the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face and the output of the award ball payout sound of "Jarjara" correspond to an example of the award ball payout effect.

  In this specific example, the scary face portion 2081a of the panda is covered with a part of the image of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and a part of the image of the variation display of the decorative symbol (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) is not visible. . In addition, a balloon portion 2081 b “Jarjara” is covered with most parts of the first to third common drawing suspension display 291 to 293 displayed in the effect display area 208 d, and each general drawing suspension display 291 to 291 I can not see 293. In addition, from the middle of the common drawing fluctuation sound representing that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, first, the common drawing holding increase sound to notify that the holding of the common drawing has increased begins to sound, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is common drawing The hold increase sound is heard over the top. Subsequently, the winning ball payout sound also starts to be emitted, and the winning ball payout sound is heard over the common drawing fluctuation sound and the common drawing holding increase sound. As described above, the common symbol symbol variation effect is changed by the winning ball payout effect, and the general drawing reserve increase effect is also changed by the winning ball payout effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player who is concentrating on the effect that the winning balls have been generated due to the change in the effect, that is, the effect of the winning ball payout effect being performed, thereby improving the impression of the game console. There are times when you can. That is, by covering a part of the effect image that has been performed so far with the effect image by the prize ball payout effect, it is possible to visually notify that the prize ball has been generated, and the impression of the game stand is improved. There are times when you can. In addition, since the effect sound from the speaker 120 is covered, the generation of the winning balls can be aurally notified.

In the above description, although the prize ball payout effect was covered by the common symbol symbol fluctuation effect and / or the common figure reserve increase effect, the common pattern symbol variation effect and / or the common figure reserve increase effect was awarded to the ball payout effect It may be a changing aspect.
FIG. 99 is a time chart in which the common-design symbol variation effect changes to a winning ball payout effect.

  Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 99, when the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit provided approach area, which is the common drawing start gate 251, 253, detects the entrance of the gaming ball to the common drawing start gate 251, 253. The detection signal changes from non-detection to detection, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, a regular pattern variation effect (a profit non-improved entry area entry effect) is started Ru.

  In addition, when the game ball which has passed central drawing start gate 251 enters central general winning a prize opening 226, the ball detection sensor which is provided in central general winning a prize opening 226 detects the entrance of the gaming ball and the detection signal is non In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 which have changed from detection to detection and are performing regular symbol symbol variation effect at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, the regular symbol symbol variation effect is ended, and instead an award is given The ball payout effect (profit giving approach area entering effect) is started. Eventually, the award ball payout effect is ended at the timing of (c) shown in the figure.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example of changing from common symbol symbol variation presentation to prize ball payout presentation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (a), a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols in a common drawing is displayed. That is, it is in the state where the common drawing fluctuation game is stopped. In this state, when the gaming ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 99), as shown in FIG. 100 (b) Is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background screen is not patterned. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a first common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210 is output. The fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the output of the first common drawing fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the common drawing symbol fluctuation presentation.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), the symbol of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The display mode of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed here is the default display mode shown in FIG. 83 (b). On the other hand, in each of the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued. In addition, the output of the first common fluctuation sound is continued from the speaker 120.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 99), as shown in (d) of FIG. The background screen of the symbol display device 208 changes from a no pattern background screen to a predetermined background screen (here, a background screen with a cross hatching pattern), and a decorative pattern ("decor 6") of the left pattern display area 208a stopped and displayed earlier. Also, the display mode of “) changes from the default display mode to a predetermined display mode (here, a display mode of black only). In addition, the display mode of the image representing that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, which is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, is also a predetermined display mode (here, a display mode of the horizontal stripe pattern Change to). In addition, the common drawing fluctuation sound outputted from the speaker 120 is also switched from the first common drawing fluctuation sound which has been outputted so far to the second common drawing fluctuation sound. The display of the predetermined display mode of the predetermined background screen and the decorative symbol and the output of the second common drawing fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout effect, and the common pattern symbol fluctuation production to the prize ball payout effect Is changing. In addition, this production | presentation change can also be regarded as a change of a common figure design fluctuation production itself. In any case, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central general winning opening 226, the effect of changing the common figure symbol fluctuation effect is performed. In addition, the decorative symbol which has been changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display in the common view display device 210 is finished, and the timing when the symbol variation display is finished, that is, the stop symbol is At the displayed timing, the display mode returns to the default display mode, or changes to another display mode. In addition, the common drawing fluctuation sound changed to the second common drawing fluctuation sound also remains changed to the second common drawing fluctuation sound until the symbol fluctuation display on the common drawing display device 210 is finished, and the symbol fluctuation display is When it is finished, the common-mode fluttering noise itself stops ringing.

  As described above, the common symbol symbol variation effect itself is changed by the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as the winning on the central general prize winning opening 226, and the payout of the prize ball is performed. It may be easier for the person to notice, the ball holding may be good, and the impression of the game console may be improved.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the common drawing reserve increase effect is changed in the state where the common symbol symbol fluctuation effect is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the common pattern display device 210, and according to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a common pattern. The variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Further, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. That is, also in the specific example shown in FIG. 101, a common figure symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (a), a first common drawing reservation display 291 representing the common drawing reservation 1 and a second common drawing reservation display 292 representing the common drawing reservation 2 Is displayed.

  When the game ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the number of reserved common drawings also increases here, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (b) is displayed. In the effect display area 208d, a third common drawing reserve display 293 is additionally displayed. In FIG. 101 (b), three normal drawing hold displays including the first common drawing hold display 291 to the third common drawing hold display 293 are displayed, but any hold display is also a default display mode. And it is displayed in the display mode of only black. Further, at the same time as the third common drawing hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a first common drawing hold increase sound notifying that holding of the common drawing has increased for a predetermined period. The additional display of the third common drawing holding display 293 and the output of the first common drawing holding increase sound correspond to an example of the common drawing holding increase effect.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the central general winning opening 226, as shown in FIG. 6C, the display mode of the third common drawing reservation display 293, which is the default display mode, changes to a predetermined display mode. . That is, among the three common drawing reservation displays 291 to 293 displayed in the default display form, the display mode of only the third common drawing reservation display 293 increased this time is a predetermined display form (here, a horizontal stripe pattern). Change. In addition, the common view holding increase sound output from the speaker 120 also switches from the first common view holding increase sound that has been output so far to the second common view holding increase sound. The display according to the predetermined display mode in the third common drawing hold display 293 and the output of the second common drawing hold increase sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout effect, and from the common view hold increment effect to the prize ball payout effect The production is changing. In addition, this production | presentation change can also be regarded as a change of the common drawing reservation increase production itself. In any case, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central general winning opening 226, the effect of changing the general drawing reserve increase effect is performed. In addition, even if it has been changed to the predetermined display mode until the end of the symbol variation display, the third common drawing suspension display 293 which has been changed to the predetermined display mode is digested the hold 3 and the third common figure reservation is suspended It may be changed to a predetermined display mode until the display 293 itself disappears. Further, the common drawing holding increase sound changed to the second common drawing holding increase sound continues to sound while changing to the second common drawing hold increase sound, and stops ringing before the symbol variation display is finished.

  As described above, the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as the winning on the central general prize winning opening 226 causes a change in the general drawing reserve increase effect itself here, and the payout of the prize ball is performed. In particular, the player is likely to notice, the ball holding may be considered good, and the impression of the game stand may be improved.

  Next, in the specific example shown in FIG. 101, the third common drawing suspension display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode at least until the symbol variation display ends. An example of returning to the default display mode before the end of the symbol variation display will be described.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of returning to the popular drawing reserve increase presentation after the effect has been changed from the regular drawing reserve increase presentation to the award ball payout presentation.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 102 (a), a general drawing reserve increase effect (a profit non-granting approach area entering effect) is started at the timing shown in (a) in the figure, and at a timing shown in (a) in the figure. The figure hold increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout effect (profit provision approach area entry effect). Then, after the award ball payout effect is performed for a predetermined period, at the timing shown in (c) in the figure, the routine returns to the general drawing reserve increase effect (effect non-entering approach area entry effect).

  The drawing of (i) in FIG. 102 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (i) shown in FIG. 102 (a) according to layers. The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 102 (a) is a background image, an image showing that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and an image of three pending display. Become. Of these three pending display images, the image of the first common view pending display 291 and the image of the second common view pending display 292 are both images according to the default display mode, that is, an image of no pattern and solid black color . On the other hand, the image of the third common drawing reservation display 293 is changed to an image with black horizontal stripes on a white background due to the award ball payout effect.

  The background image is drawn on the first layer L1 which is displayed on the far side as viewed from the player, and the image showing that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed is the second layer one layer before the first layer L1. It is drawn in L2.

  The images 291 to 293 of the three common drawing suspension display are drawn on the third layer L3 that is one before the second layer L2. All of the images of the three general drawing suspension displays drawn on the third layer L3 are all non-patterned and black only images (black circle images) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, which is located one layer before the third layer L3, a black horizontal stripe is added to the white background at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general drawing reserve display 293 drawn in the third layer L3. An image 290 w is displayed. Here, the fourth layer L4 is the layer that is displayed closest to the player as viewed from the player. In the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293, a black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 is superimposed on a white background image drawn on the fourth layer L4 with a black horizontal stripe image 290w superimposed on the black circle image 290b. Can not be seen, and an image 290 w with black horizontal stripes on a white background drawn on the fourth layer L 4 can be seen.

  The drawing (b) of FIG. 102 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 102 (a) according to layers. The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 102 (b) is also a background image, an image showing that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and an image of three reserved display. Become. The images of the three suspension displays here are all images (black circle images) according to the default display mode. That is, the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293 which has been changed by the prize ball payout effect becomes an image (black circle image) according to the default display mode by returning to the common drawing reserve increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 102 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (i) are used as they are , And only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. As a result, the image 290w with black horizontal stripes on a white background is hidden, and the image of the third common view hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image, that is, the default display mode. In this aspect, the addition of processing for drawing can be reduced.

  Subsequently, in the specific example so far, the prize ball payout effect has been started at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the central general winning opening 226, but an example will be described in which the prize ball payout effect is started a little later .

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example in which the award ball payout effect is started slightly after the timing when the gaming ball passes through the central general winning opening 226.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 103 (a), a general drawing reserve increase effect (a profit non-granting approach area entry effect) is started at a timing shown in (a) in the figure, and a game is played at a timing shown in (a) in the figure. It is detected that the ball has passed through the central general winning opening 226, but at this timing, the general drawing reserve increase effect does not change to the prize ball payout effect (profit provision entry area entry effect), and a predetermined period has elapsed, or Based on a predetermined trigger that occurs thereafter, the general drawing reserve increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout effect at the timing shown in FIG. Specifically, the predetermined trigger here may be that a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach or the like) is executed by the common symbol symbol variation effect. Then, after the award ball payout effect is performed for a predetermined period, the process returns to the general drawing reserve increase effect (effect non-entering approach area entry effect) at the timing shown in FIG.

  The drawing of (c) in FIG. 103 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in the same drawing (a) for each layer. The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 103 (a) is a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three suspension display images. Become. Of these three pending display images, the image of the first common view pending display 291 and the image of the second common view pending display 292 are all images according to the default display mode, that is, an image without pattern and black only (black circle Image). On the other hand, in the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293, the image of the black circle is changed to an image in which white horizontal stripes are added to the black circle due to the prize ball payout effect.

  Also in this example, the background image is drawn on the first layer L1, and the image representing that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is drawn on the second layer L2.

  In addition, the images 291 to 293 of the three common drawing suspension display are drawn on the third layer L3. Also in this case, the images of the three general drawing suspension displays drawn in the third layer L3 are all non-patterned and black only images (black circle images) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, an image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is displayed at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general drawing reserve display 293 drawn in the third layer L3. In the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293, the white circle stripe image 290s drawn in the fourth layer L4 overlaps the black circle image 290b drawn in the third layer L3 so that the white circle is added with the white circle stripe. It looks like an image. That is, although a part of the black circle image 290b is covered by the white horizontal stripe image 290s, the remaining part of the black circle image 290b is visible, and the black circle image 290b and the black circle image 290b drawn in the third layer L3 , And an image 290s of only white horizontal stripes drawn on the fourth layer L4 is an image.

  The drawing of (D) in FIG. 103 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (D) shown in FIG. The three pending display images here are also images in the default display mode (black circle images). That is, the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293 which has been changed by the prize ball payout effect becomes an image (black circle image) according to the default display mode by returning to the common drawing reserve increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (D) shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (C) are used as they are , And only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. As a result, the white horizontal stripe only image 290 s is hidden, and the image of the third common view retention display 293 also returns to the black circle image 290 b, that is, the default display mode. Also in this aspect, the addition of drawing processing can be reduced.

  In a state where a prize ball payout effect is being performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (c), in a state where a panda character image 2081 of a scary face who uttered "Jarjara" is displayed, When the game ball enters (winning) the central blowup start gate 251 and wins the hit by the passability judgment based on the winning, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect instructing to perform a right-handed hit) Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a predetermined effect is covered in a balloon portion 2081b "Jarjara" which is a part of the award ball payout effect, and the prize ball payout effect changes.

  In addition, even when it is not done the production which directs to do the right strike, doing the common figure design fluctuation production with the decoration design display 208, by stopping and displaying the decoration design which displays the decision result of the common drawing There are cases where the player can recognize that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened.

  Also, in the above description, the entry of the game ball into the central flat figure starting gate 251 and the central central winning hole 226 below it has been described as an example, but it is arranged on the right flat figure starting gate 251 and below The same applies to the special-figure starting opening 230 where entry of the game ball is enabled when the door member 2521 of the common-use electric symbol 252 is opened. The same is true for the other general winning opening 226 and the entry area where the winning balls are paid out, not limited to the central general winning opening 226 below the central blowup start gate 251.

  Furthermore, in the above description, the output of the effect sound (for example, the award ball payout sound) is performed using the speaker 120, but the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 152 are on the upper plate 126 or the upper plate 126. The collision sound generated by the collision with the stored game ball may be used as the effect sound (for example, a winning ball payout sound). By doing this, the player may be able to further recognize the occurrence of a profit because the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker 120.

Then, the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. In the following description, items that overlap with the items described above will be described again. Further, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as the symbols used so far.
FIG. 104 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumine S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 79 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 79 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit of the special figure is won and the big hit game is started. The variable winning opening 234 corresponds to an example of a winning device according to the present invention, and winning the jackpot of the special figure corresponds to an example that the second condition according to the present invention is satisfied. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls as game balls pass through or enter, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball which has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamp such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Corresponds to one example.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment is basically the same as the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 (a) to (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the normal symbol display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form (second symbol form) of the special view. A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, and the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 is a ball A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it had entered ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment “the variation indication of the special figure 1” (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment “variation display of special figure 2” ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the fluctuation stop indication of the special figure. The variable stop display of this special view may be performed several times continuously.

  In FIG. 105 (a), six types of special views, "special view A" to "special view F", are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 105 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, four types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and when special figure A is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. The "special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol with a power support, and when the special figure B is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The "special figure C" is a 4R big hit symbol with a probability change, and when the special figure C is stopped and displayed, the control state then becomes a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure D" is a 4R big hit design, and when the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state.

  The term "round" as used herein means the number of chances of acquiring a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls). In the present embodiment, it represents the number of times of operation of the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. This means that this operation lasts 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is among the entry of game balls of a predetermined round end condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls), and lapse of predetermined time from the start of the round End when one or more of In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The big hit by the special figure A and the special figure by the special figure C have a high probability of winning the big hit in the next special figure fluctuation game (special big hit or time big hit). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, it moves to the special figure low probability state, and when it wins the special figure A or the special figure C, the special figure high probability state is maintained until the next big hit after the big hit game end. Be done. On the other hand, when the special view B or the special view D is won, the special view low probability state remains even after the big hit game is over. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of the first probability control state. In addition, special figure high probability state after the big hit game end may be called special figure definite change, the state where the probability of winning the big hit after the big hit game end is high (special figure high probability state) is the player The control state in which the degree of advantage of V.sub.2 is high corresponds to an example of the second probability control state. This special figure high probability state may be called a definite change state. In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the probability control state transition means.

  In addition, when the special figure A or special figure B is won, after the big hit game ends, it shifts to the state with electric power support (power support) (hereinafter referred to as power support state). The power support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. Say This power-supply state is one of the control states prepared for this pachinko machine 100, and may also be referred to as a time saving state. That is, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The time saving flag is also prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/101 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), but increases to 99/101 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.2 seconds in the power support state. Further, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the power Chu open period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the pair of blade members 2321 is more likely to open (increase in the number of times of power-on opening) than in the non-power-on state. For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-power-sustaining state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens three times in the power-sending state (for example, 3 seconds of opening for 1.7 seconds) Times repeated, the closing time between opening and closing is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special view starting opening 232 is increased by the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is the power support state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many gaming balls in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be hit and won during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, the electric support state (shorting state) may be set if either the electric-chu open period extension or the electric-chu open number increase is performed, which increases the probability of entering the second special view starting opening 232. . In the non-power-supply state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second special view start opening 232 than in the power-supply state. As described above, in the second special view start opening 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other. In the second special figure starting port 232, the entrance is large in size in the power-sap state for a longer period of time than in the non-power-sap state. In the present embodiment, when the special view A is displayed in a stop state, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (general drawing high probability state) is maintained until the big hit game is started next. When the stop display is displayed, after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times, and the 101st time is in the non power support state (general drawing low probability state) Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won with no power support (special view C, special view D), it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game. In the non-electric support state, the second special view start port 232 maintains the entrance at a small size. On the other hand, as described above, in the power-on state, the second Toku-zu start port 232 has a large-sized entrance, and the entry rate of the game balls is increased. That is, in the non-power support state, the gaming ball enters the second special view start opening 232 which is the variable start area at the first entry rate, while in the power support state, the gaming ball starts the second special view The mouth 232 is approached at a second approach rate higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-power support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the power support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the special figure E is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for up to only 1.5 seconds per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a part whose control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. In addition, you may prepare small hit symbols (for example, 2nd small hit symbols etc.) other than "special EI."

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 performs one or more opening and closing operations, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Also, a special figure F shown in FIG. 105 (a) is a lost design. When this lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open and close, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a missing symbol (for example, a second missing symbol etc.) other than the "special figure F" may be further prepared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second advantage hit control state (big hit control state and small hit control state) in which the player has a high degree of advantage and the second advantage from the second advantage The loss control state of the first advantage degree with low degree of advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is either one of the hit control state (second control state) and the loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of a special gaming state giving unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable winning hole 234 performs the opening and closing operation, since entering the variable winning hole 234 can hardly be expected, the small hit control state is the first advantageous. It can also be regarded as a degree of control state (first control state).

  Also, the jackpot has a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, the 15R system big hit (special figure A, special figure B) corresponds to an advantageous big hit, and the 4R system big hit (special figure C, special figure D) corresponds to an adverse big hit. In addition, the jackpot according to the special view A and the jackpot according to the special view C correspond to the advantageous jackpot according to whether or not the definite variation is attached, and the jackpot according to the special view B and the jackpot according to the special drawing D correspond to the disadvantageous jackpot. The big hit success / failure determination result relatively advantageous to these players corresponds to an example of the specific success / failure determination result, and the big hit control state relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to one example of the special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “special figure A” is prepared as the big hit symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the big hit symbol 2 and the like.

  The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are notification means for notifying the success / failure determination result (lottery result), and symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after starting symbol fluctuation It corresponds to an example of the symbol display means which performs symbol variation display until the special image A to the special image F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows an example of the decorative symbol of the special view. There are ten types of "design 1" to "design 10" in the decorative design of the special view of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "variation display of the decoration figure of the special figure" to change the. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol of the special view separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode), which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the special drawing, is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying a large hit (special image A to special image D), "combination 1 of decorative symbols" (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative") in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of reporting a big hit other than the probability change big hit (special figure A or special figure C) in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) or the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) , "The combination 2 of the decorative pattern in which the same odd decorative pattern is arranged in three in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example," decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "or" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 " Stop display). When a small hit (special figure E) is to be notified, "combination of decorative symbols" (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 3-decorative 5", etc.) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Moreover, when notifying "special figure F" which is a loss, it is other than "combination 1 of a decoration pattern", "combination 2 of a decoration pattern", and "combination 3 of a decoration pattern" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop and display the combination of decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes). Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the start of the "variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect (for example, "combination 2 of the decorative symbols") of the decorative symbol of the special figure A series of displays of may be referred to as a special stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the special figure.

  In addition, the stop symbol form (refer to FIG. 105 (a)) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the decoration of one special figure displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the left middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 As for the stop symbol form of the symbol (see the same figure (b)), the decorative symbol (see the same figure (b)) of the special figure is larger.

  FIG. 105 (c) shows an example of the stop symbol form (first symbol form) of the common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of this embodiment, "one common drawing A" which is a hit symbol 1, "common drawing B" which is a hit symbol 2, and "common drawing C" which is a lost symbol. . The "common figure A" which is the hit symbol 1 is a common hit corresponding to an open with a relatively short opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, and the hit symbol 2 B "is a common drawing hit where the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 is relatively long. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, any one of the three types of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 105 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing. The common view display device 210 corresponds to an example of the auxiliary symbol notification means.

  FIG. 105 (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol of a common figure. There are three types of decoration designs of the common drawing of the present embodiment, the common drawing decoration 1-3. The effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the common drawing start opening sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start opening 228, that is, the ball has entered the common drawing start opening 228. In the predetermined area, which is the central portion of, the display is changed in the order of “decoration ○” → “decoration」 ”→. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol of the common drawing separately from the common drawing display device 210. Then, the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) of the decorative symbol of the common figure is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the hit symbol 1 (common symbol A) of the common drawing, the "description ○" which is the common drawing decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When notifying the hit pattern 2 (common figure B) of the common drawing, “decoration」 ”which is the common drawing decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the lost figure (general drawing C) of the common drawing, the "description x" which is the common drawing decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of operations from the start of the "variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect (for example, the common drawing decoration 2) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing. The display may be referred to as a floating stop display of a decorative symbol of a common figure.

In addition, the stop symbol aspect (refer to FIG. 105 (c)) of the common drawing A and the common drawing B and the stop symbol aspect (the same drawing of the decorative symbol of one common drawing displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208). As for (d), the decorative symbol (see (d) in the figure) in the common figure is larger.
<Main control unit control processing>

  Next, the main control unit main processing performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second embodiment is the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 85 performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the first embodiment. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  Subsequently, a main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment has two types of special views such as the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the lottery based on the winning of the second special view starting port 232 (judgment determination of the special view 2) Priority is given to the drawing based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 (the determination of success or failure of the special drawing 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the first special start area, the random number is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum holding number, and the second special start is performed. A prize storage unit that stores random numbers up to the maximum number of pending numbers in the second random number storage area when gaming balls win in the area, and both the first random number storage area and the second random number storage area Regardless of when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. While making a yes / no determination based on the random number value stored in the second random number value storage area, no random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, and the second random number value storage If a random value is stored in the area, the second Judgment determination is performed based on the random number value stored in the numerical value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random number value storage area, and the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area In the case where it is determined, there is provided a propriety determination means for performing the propriety determination based on the random number value stored in the first random number value storage area. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special view fluctuation game by the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and the winning of the second special view start opening 232 Based on the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment based on the winning a prize to the first special figure starting port 230 is given priority over the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment based on winning, start information of the special figure 1 When the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored in the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 among the start information of the special figure 2 remains, the start of the newly stored special figure 2 is newly stored. Notification of the result of the pass / fail determination based on the information is performed prior to notification of the result of the pass / fail determination based on the start information of the special view 1 that has already been stored. In addition, when the start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the start information acquisition means for obtaining the start information stores the second start information. In the case where the start information is acquired from the storage means and the start information is stored in one of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the start information is stored. The start information is acquired from the information storage means.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 The state update process is performed (step S 1225), and then the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S 1227). When the special figure state update processing in step S1225 and step S1227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing is performed for special figure 1 and special figure 2 respectively. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the pass / fail determination unit. Main control unit 300 first performs processing for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related lottery processing) (step S1229), and then performs processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) (step S1231) ). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process prior to the special figure 1 related lottery process, based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first special figure starting opening 230 at the same timing. Start information is obtained, and start information is obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special view start opening 232, or the start condition of the special view 2 change game, and the start of the special view 1 change game Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, and even if both the start condition of the special figure 2 change game and the start condition of the special figure 1 change game are satisfied, the special figure 2 change game is in the process of being changed first. Figure 1 Fluctuation game does not start fluctuating.

  Further, the special drawing prefetching process is performed after the winning reception process S1217 is performed and before the special drawing state updating process is performed (step S1224).

  FIG. 107A is a flow chart showing the flow of the special view prefetching process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S1224a, whether or not there is an increase in the start information of the special view 2, that is, the start information about the special view 2 (special figure 2 winning random number, for big hit) It is determined whether the special figure 2 random number value and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value are added, and if it is increased (if it is added), prefetching the start information of the increased special figure 2 Then, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined in advance (step S1224b). In step S1224b, first, the start information of the special view 2 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of the special view 2. That is, triggered by the winning of the second special drawing start port 232, the start information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, before the start information is acquired in the pass / fail determination (special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S1229 shown in FIG. 106), the start information is prefetched. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-reading corresponds to an example of the start information pre-reading means. In the pre-reading here, only the winning portion (hold increase) is pre-reading, but all may be pre-reading. In addition, although pre-reading here means reading start information prior to the pass / fail judgment (the main lottery), in the following explanation, the word “pre-reading” refers to the word “pre-reading (the main judgment or the like Sometimes used in the sense of reading).

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special-featured preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b) and a special-figure preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 107 (c) are prepared.

  When the start information is preread, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines in advance the success / failure determination result in the special drawing 2 related lottery process to be performed in the future and the symbol to be stopped based on the preread start information. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first refers to the probability change flag, and uses the special-featured preliminary decision table shown in FIG. Based on 0 to 65535), it is possible to predetermine whether the result of the success or failure judgment is the result of the big hit, the result of the small hit, or the result of the failure. . That is, triggered by the winning of the second special view starting opening 232, whether the success or failure judgment result based on the starting information generated based on the winning is the big hit success or failure judgment result (specific success or failure judgment result) Determine in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 which performs this predetermination corresponds to an example of the predetermination means, and the result of the predetermination here is treated as the special view 2 acceptance / disapproval decision result.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special drawing suitability determination table having the same contents as the contents of the special feature restriction prior determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b) is stored. Whether this special drawing suitability determination table or the special character qualification prior determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b), the jackpot probability is 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state) On the other hand, it rises to 1/32 in the special figure high probability state (power support state). On the other hand, the small hit probability is 1/100 even in the special figure low probability state (non-power support state) or the special figure high probability state (power support state).

  Next, when the special figure 2 success or failure predetermination result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure predetermination table shown in FIG. Based on the special figure 2 random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99), prior determination of the jackpot symbol to be the stop symbol is performed. The prior determination of the special view here is also executed before the acceptance determination (special figure 2 related lottery processing) based on the start information read ahead is performed, and the result of the prior determination here is treated as the special view 2 prior determination result . The pre-judgment of the jackpot symbol in this case corresponds to predetermining which kind of jackpot among the kinds of jackpots prepared a plurality of types. In addition, in the second embodiment, only one small hit symbol and one lost symbol are prepared. Therefore, when the special figure 2 pre-decision result is a small hit or a loss, it is unambiguous Special figure 2 pre-judgment result is obtained.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special drawing determination table having the same contents as the contents of the special drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 107C is stored. If the jackpot type of the special drawing of the second embodiment is described in detail with reference to the special drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 107 (c), the jackpot symbol 1 (special drawing A) or the big hit symbol 2 (special drawing B) In the big hit game started by stop display, one round is performed 15 times in which the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable winning opening 234 is closed when 10 balls are won). In the big hit game started with the big hit symbol 3 (special symbol C) or the big hit symbol 4 (special symbol D) being stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable winning opening 234 is One round will be held four times to close when 10 balls are won. In addition, the winning probability of jackpot symbol 1 (special image A) is the highest at 50%.

  In step S1224c following step S1224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 advance determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S1224b is stored in the special figure 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308, and step S1224d move on.

  On the other hand, if the start information in the special view 2 does not increase in the determination in step S1224a, the process proceeds to step S1224d, and no pre-reading or prior determination of the start information in the special view 2 is performed.

  In step S1224d, this time, whether or not there is an increase in the start information of special figure 1 (special figure 1 winning random value, special figure 1 random number value for big hit, and special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number). It is determined whether one set of random numbers has been added to the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided, and if it is increased (if added), then the current control state is the power supply state Is determined with reference to the short time flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1224e), and if the current control state is the non-power support state (if the short time flag is in the off state), step S1224f is performed. Go to

  In step S1224f, similarly to step S1224b described above, first, the start information of the special view 1 is prefetched from the hold storage unit of the special view 1. Then, similarly to step S1224b, using the table for special judgment of FIG. 107 (b), the result of special judgment of special figure 1 is obtained based on the prefetched start information (special figure 1 winning random number value). Subsequently, when the special figure 1 success or failure predetermination result is a big hit, as in step S 1224 b, the pre-read start information (for big hit special search) using the special figure predetermination table shown in FIG. Based on (Figure 1 random number value), the special figure 1 advance decision result is acquired.

  In step S 1224 g following step S 1224 f, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S 1224 f is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308. It returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown.

  In this special view look-ahead process, only the prior determination of the stop symbol of the special view was performed, but based on the random number value for special view change time determination among the read-ahead start information, advance of the special view change time The determination may be performed, and the predetermination result of the fluctuation time (the special map fluctuation time predetermination result) may be stored in the predetermination result storage area. Moreover, it may replace with fluctuation time and may determine beforehand the production | presentation aspect (fluctuation pattern) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated with one to one, and it is considered that selecting the variation time means that the variation pattern is selected. It can also be done. Furthermore, the presentation mode may be divided into groups, and for example, only a group of “off / normal reach loss” or a group of “reach A out / reach B loss” may be drawn. Or, it belongs to the group of reach production of “per normal reach, per normal reach loss, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B” or “very short loss, short loss, loss, chance eyes all off” It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to a group without reach.

  The prior determination information (information representing the special figure prior determination result) newly stored in the preliminary determination result storage area of the RAM 308 is command data of the special view reserve increase command as information of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance And is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  On the other hand, if the start information in the special view 1 does not increase in the determination in step S1224 d shown in FIG. 107 (a), the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. There is no pre-judgment.

  Also, even if the current control state is the power support state (time reduction flag is on) in step S1224e, the pre-reading and pre-judgment of the start information of the special view 1 are not performed, and in these cases, the increase this time The “not determined” information representing that the pass / fail determination based on the start information of the selected special figure 1 and the prior determination of the stop symbol are not performed is stored in the special figure 1 prior determination result storage area (step S1224 h), FIG. It returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In addition, based on the big hit game being started, the area in which the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area is rewritten to “not determined” information. Further, in the second embodiment, if the undecided information setting condition (during power saving state) is satisfied, the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed but the pre-reading is not performed and the pre-judging is not performed. Furthermore, although pre-reading and pre-judging are performed, the main control unit 300 may not send the result to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special view advance determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain the special view advance determination result, but the command of the start increase of the special view reserve command is prefetched. The data may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may obtain the special-figure advance determination result as necessary. However, since the main control unit 300 updates the state of the common drawing, if the first sub-control unit 400 tries to determine whether or not power supply is in progress, the state of the common drawing also becomes the first sub-control unit 400. Need to send, not efficient. Therefore, it is more efficient to execute the prior determination in the main control unit 300.

  After executing the special drawing prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231), and the same starting information as the prefetched starting information targeted by the special drawing prefetching process Based on the above, the special drawing suitability determination result using the special drawing suitability determination table described above, the special drawing determination result using the special drawing determination table described above, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing are obtained again.

  Here, a method of determining the variation time of the special figure in the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) will be described. In the following description, since it is the same whether it is the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 or the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, it demonstrates, without distinguishing both.

  In the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 106, when the special figure determination result is obtained using the special figure determination table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination result. , And determine a timer number representing the variation time of the special figure.

  FIG. 108A shows a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this table set selection table, the relationship between a special drawing determination result (special drawing stop symbol), a special drawing fluctuation number, and a timer selection table is defined. In the second embodiment, two types of tables are prepared as timer selection tables. The timer selection table is a table used to determine the variation time of the special view. An area (timer selection table information storage area) for storing information representing a timer selection table is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The RAM 308 is also provided with a special figure variation game execution number counter for counting the number of times the special figure variation game is executed. If the value of the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter is a value larger than 0, the fluctuation display by the special figure display device 212 ends, and the special figure fluctuation game is displayed by the CPU 304 after the determined special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period The value of the execution number counter is decremented by one.

  For example, in the special view status update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop symbol is big hit 15R big hit and the end effect period of the 15R big hit game is completed (steps S1227 and S1229) And the information representing the table 4 is stored in the timer selection table information storage area. In addition, in the special figure status update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the stop display of the special figure ends (steps S1227 and S1229), if the value of the special figure variation game execution frequency counter is greater than 0, the value of the counter is decremented by 1. Information representing Table 2 is kept stored in the timer selection table information storage area until the value of the counter becomes zero. When the value of the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter changes from 1 to 0, the pointer on the RAM 308 is advanced, and the value of 0 is set to the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter, and the timer selection table information storage area Stores information representing Table 1. Then, in the special figure status update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the stop display of the special figure ends (0, the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter continues to be set to 0 until the special figure determination result switches). The selection table information storage area continues to store information representing the table 1. As a result, when the 15R big hit game is over, unless the big hit or the small hit is won, the first 100 times of the special figure fluctuation game the timer selection table 2 is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure, and the timer after 101 times The variation time of the special figure is determined using selection table 1.

  FIG. 108 (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is defined in a timer number determination table shown in FIG. 108 (b) based on the special figure fluctuation time determination random value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the start information. Determine which timer number is present. That is, the determination of this timer number is a special figure determination result, a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), the number of reservations obtained by adding the number of reservations of special figure 1 and the number of reservations of special figure 2, and predetermined period information It is performed based on a table (for example, a timer selection table), and is not performed based on the pre-read result by the pre-read processing or the pre-determination result.

The timer number is the time from when special image 1 display device 212 or special image 2 display device 214 starts changing the symbol until it displays the stop symbol representing the result of the judgment of acceptance, that is, the time for changing the special image (Symbol fluctuation display time) is expressed. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a fluctuation time determination unit that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol. In addition, the time (time of decoration symbol fluctuation stop display) until display the stop design which indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment after the decoration symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation of the decoration symbol of the special figure is also this pattern fluctuation display Time is adjusted.
FIG. 108 (c) shows the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 is determined in accordance with the symbol variation display time. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special figure based on the timer number (symbol variation display time). In FIG. 108 (c), the relationship between the timer number and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special figure is also shown for reference.

  The timer 1 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes 2 seconds, which is an extremely shortened fluctuation time, and the timer 2 represents that the special figure fluctuation time, which is 5 seconds, is a shortened fluctuation time. In addition, what is determined by timer 1 or timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 indicates that the special pattern fluctuation time becomes a normal fluctuation time of 10 seconds (reference fluctuation time). Further, in timer 1 to timer 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The timer 4 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative figure of the special figure in the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as normal reach. The timer 5 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the timer 6 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 50 seconds. When the timers 5 and 6 are determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as Super Reach.

  This reach determination is that the result of the success or failure judgment (full lottery) of the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229, S1231) is a specific success / failure decision result (a predetermined result with a high degree of player's advantage). It is an advance notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the advance notice control unit.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the period from when the special drawing is judged to the success / failure judgment to the time when the result of the judgment is notified (special figure fluctuation time ) To be longer.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the special figure determination result is the out symbol ("special figure F"), if the number of reservations is 0 to 2, timer 3 with no reach has a probability of 90%. If the number of reservations is determined to be 3 to 7, the timer 2 with no reach is also determined with a probability of 98%. In addition, when the table 1 is selected with the off symbol, the super reach timer 5 or 6 is determined with a probability of 1% each regardless of the number of reservations.

  In addition, when the success or failure decision result is a big hit, regardless of the type (big hit symbols 1 to 4) of the special figure, regardless of the timer selection table, moreover, regardless of the number of reservations, of normal reach The timer 4 is determined with a probability of 2%, the timer 5 for super reach 1 is determined with a probability of 32%, and the timer 6 for super reach 2 is determined with a probability of 66%. Moreover, it is also the same as when special drawing determination result is a small hit design.

  Next, the common drawing related lottery processing (step S1223) shown in FIG. 106 will be described. The start information of the common drawing in the second embodiment is the common drawing win random number value and the common common drawing random value. In the common drawing related lottery process (step S1223), a common drawing acceptance determination process is performed.

  FIG. 109A is a diagram showing a common drawing yes / no determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the regular drawing propriety judgment process, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the judgment is made based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. The determination of the generality is made based on the common drawing winning random value (possible range: 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the general drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. In the second embodiment, the Atari probability of the spread map is approximately 10% in the spread map low probability state (non-power support state), and is 100% in the spread map high probability state (power support state).

  When the execution of the common-practice equivalence determination processing is completed and the common-use allotment determination result is a hit, the common drawing stop symbol determination process is executed. In addition, since there is only one kind of out-of-round symbol in the common-use figure, if the common-use drawing judgment result is a loss, the stop symbol in the common-use figure is uniquely determined.

  FIG. 109 (b) is a view showing a common drawing determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here too, the short time flag is referred to, and on the basis of whether or not the current control state is the power support state, the propriety determination is made. The common drawing stop symbol determination processing is performed based on the common drawing random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low probability state (non-power support state), win 90% of the symbols per symbol (symbol A) and win 10% of the probability per symbol (symbol B) . On the other hand, in the general drawing high probability state (power support state), the general drawing per pattern 2 (general drawing B) is won with a probability of 100%.

  Here, referring to the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 109 (b), the detailed drawing of the common drawing of the second embodiment will be described in detail. When the stop display is performed, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view start opening 232 is opened for 1.8 seconds (but closed when 10 balls are won in the second special view start opening 232). On the other hand, when the symbol 2 (general drawing B) is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 is opened for 6.0 seconds (however, the second special drawing When 10 balls are won in the starting opening 232, the ball is closed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time is uniquely determined to the predetermined time according to the control state of the common drawing. For example, it is 10 seconds in the low probability state (non-power support state), and is 5 seconds in the high probability state (power state).
<Sub control unit side control processing>

Next, the first sub control unit main processing and the like executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the second embodiment are shown in FIG. 90 executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the first embodiment. The processes are basically the same as the processes of the first sub control unit, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. Further, the processing in the second sub control unit 500 is also basically the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore the description will be omitted.
Subsequently, the advance notice in the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the second embodiment, the special view 1 reserved display area is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, on the left side of the predetermined area where the decorative pattern of the common drawing is displayed. On the right side, the special view 2 reserve display area is prepared. In the special view 1 reserve display area, the reserve display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 The start information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The suspension display is a display indicating that the startup information is stored or stored in the startup information storage unit (the storage repository of the special view of the RAM 308). In the special view 2 reserve display area, the reserve display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is the reserve storage unit of the special view 2 The start information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). That is, the hold display is performed for each piece of the start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of the hold display corresponds to the number of the hold. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the start hold display means. In this embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round figure is displayed without pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special view hold increase command, it transmits the hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 performs decoration based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending display by one. On the other hand, each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command, which is a signal for holding and digesting, transmits a holding decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to reduce the number of pending displays by one.

  The prefetch notice in the second embodiment is an effect for notifying that there is a possibility that the result of the pass / fail judgment performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 106 may be a big hit. More specifically, in the present embodiment, even a big hit, a big hit (for example, 15 R system big hit: special figure A, special figure B) and relatively large big hit (for example, 15 R series big hit) For example, 4R system big hit: special figure C, special figure D) is prepared, and the advance notice is an effect for giving notice that there is a possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit. In addition, a big hit (special figure C) with a definite change may be an advantageous big hit even in the big hit of the 4R system. In addition, the advance notice in the second embodiment is a notice performed based on the start information (start information read ahead) acquired before the start information is acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231). is there. That is, the pre-reading advance notice is performed based on the pre-decision result based on the pre-reading starting information.

  Also, the pre-reading advance notice here includes a false pre-reading advance notice that falsely gives notice as if the pre-judgment result is not an advantageous jackpot as if it becomes an advantageous jackpot. That is, the advance notice indicates that the result of the pass / fail judgment may be an advantageous jackpot, the advance notice for the player, or that the result of the pass / fail judgment is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to be expected.

  In the second embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to perform pre-reading notice effect using the hold display. In the pre-read notice effect using the hold display, the execution start timing is at the time of winning, and the execution area is within the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when special drawing start port 230, 232 has a prize in the state of reserve of special figure 0, the success or failure judgment of the special figure based on the said prize is performed immediately, and symbol variation display of special figure is also immediate It is conceivable that the special display based on the winning combination is not displayed on hold, but it may be performed for several seconds immediately after the symbol variation display of the special drawing based on the winning combination is started. In this case, the effect of the prefetch notice is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the prefetched start information) notifying the success / failure determination result based on the prefetched start information. The pre-reading notice using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined notice form of pre-reading notice, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of pre-reading notice means.

  In addition, by driving the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, it is also possible to perform preview advance notice effects by the bonus item operation. The preview advance notice effect by the bonus item operation may be at the time of winning or at the time of symbol fluctuation stop, and the execution area is an area covering the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol change stop time in the advance notice is the stop time of at least one of the symbol change display corresponding to the start information read ahead and the symbol change display before the symbol change display. More specifically, if there is a winning with the suspension being 0, the acceptance determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the symbol variation display of the special drawing is also started immediately, so the prefetched start is The stop time of the symbol variation display corresponding to the information is the start time of the execution of the advance notice.

  Also, it is possible to perform preview advance notice effect by making a symbol such as a specific character or symbol appear in the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the preview advance notice effect using this specific symbol may be at the time of winning, or by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first symbol variation start command after winning is received. It may be during the started symbol variation display. Here, when there is a winning in the state of holding 0, since the pass / fail determination based on the said win is immediately performed and the symbol variation display of the special drawing is immediately started, the pass / fail based on the start information read ahead After the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the prefetched start information) for notifying the determination result is started, the symbol variation display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. When there is a prize in the state of one or more suspension, symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display is performed. Moreover, the execution area may be the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the predetermined area according to the effect display area 208d It is also good.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to perform preview advance notice effects by changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the previewing notice effect using the background image is at the time of winning, and the execution area is the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Note that the preview advance notice effect is not limited to a notice using an image or a feature, but may be a notice using sound or light.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special-image hold increase command, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the prefetch notice execution processing in the effect control processing in the first sub-control unit main processing. In this pre-reading notice execution processing, execution possibility lottery of pre-reading notice of each pre-reading notice which uses the reservation indication, pre-reading notice due to feature operation, pre-reading notice which uses specified design, and pre-reading notice using background image is performed. Further, in the case of pre-reading notice using the hold display, the display mode after change due to the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from among display modes of a plurality of kinds of hold display prepared in advance. If it is the advance notice by the bonus item operation, one drive pattern is determined by lottery from among the drive patterns of the plurality of effect movable bodies 224 and the shielding device 246 prepared in advance. In the case of a preview notice using a specific symbol, a symbol to be made to appear in the prefetch notice is selected by lottery from among symbols such as a plurality of types of characters and symbols prepared in advance. In the case of a previewing notice using a background image, a background image to be used in the previewing notice is determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of background images prepared in advance.

  Also in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the common symbol symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the common symbol symbol variation effect. Further, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special symbol variation start command, the special symbol variation effect is also executed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a specific example of common symbol symbol variation effect, special symbol symbol variation effect, and advance notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (a), a combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol of the special drawing is displayed, and in the predetermined area 208x where the decorative symbol of the common figure is displayed in the effect display area 208d The stop symbol of the common figure decorative symbol is displayed. That is, it is in the state where the special figure change game and the common figure change game are also stopped. In this state, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start opening 228, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), symbol fluctuation display is started in the common drawing display device 210, and a predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol is started. In addition, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. The fluctuation display of the ordinary figure decorative symbol and the output of the ordinary figure fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the ordinary figure symbol fluctuation effect, and the ordinary figure symbol fluctuation effect corresponds to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball. Also, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the symbol variation display is started in the special view 1 display device 212, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In area 208c, variable display of a special figure decorative symbol is started. Further, from the speaker 120, a special figure fluctuation sound indicating that symbol variation display is being performed in the special figure 1 display device 212 is output. The variation display of the special figure decorative symbol and the output of the special figure variation sound correspond to an example of the special figure symbol variation effect. In addition, a pre-reading advance notice effect based on pre-reading of the start information stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 is also executed by the winning of the first special view start port 230. Here, when the first special figure starting opening 230 winning a prize the advance notice effect using a specific symbol is executed, and the symbol 2082 of the princess character as the specific symbol includes the lower area including the effect display area 208d. Move from left to right. It should be noted that the pre-read advance effect sound may be output from the speaker 120 while the symbol 2082 of the princess character is moving.

  In the specific example described above, the special drawing fluctuation sound also starts to be generated in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation sound, and the special drawing fluctuation sound is heard over the common drawing fluctuation sound. In addition, the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed is momentarily covered by the symbol 2082 of the princess character passing by the advance notice effect, and the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol disappears for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x is reduced by the design 2082 of the princess character entering the predetermined area 208x. Therefore, the common-design symbol variation effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined effect referred to in the present invention is changed by the special symbol symbol variation effect or the advance notice effect.

  In this case, the movement of the symbol 2082 of the princess character is executed as the advance notice effect, but may be executed as a special pattern variation effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 110 (c '), when the game ball enters the first special figure starting opening 230, the middle symbol of the special figure decorative symbol is a predetermined area in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed. It may be a special symbol design variation presentation displaying variation on 208x. By doing this, the common figure symbol variation effect is changed by the special pattern symbol variation effect. In addition, the effect that the middle figure of the special figure decorative figure is variably displayed over the predetermined area 208x is the prefetching of the start information stored in the special figure 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning of the first special figure start port 230 It may be performed as an effect of pre-reading advance notice based on.

  Further, in FIG. 110 (c), the previewing notice effect based on the prefetching of the start information stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning on the first special view start opening 230 is a notice using a specific symbol. Although it is performed in an aspect, as shown to the same figure (c ''), you may be performed in the warning aspect which drives the presentation movable body 224. FIG. Also in this case, the pivoted forearm portion 224b is covered with the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed, and the common pattern symbol fluctuation effect is changed by the advance notice effect.

  Even in the specific example in the second embodiment described above, here, a change occurs in the common pattern symbol variation production by the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning in the first special figure starting port 230. The player is likely to notice that the payout is being made, the ball holding seems to be good, and the impression of the game stand may be improved. The same applies to the specific examples described below. In addition, since there is a change in the regular symbol pattern fluctuation effect due to the advance notice effect, the player may have a predetermined profit (here, the payout of the winning ball), and the variable winning opening 234 may be in an advantageous state. Can be recognized at one time by the advance notice effect (specific effect), and it is possible to increase the interest of the player's game more than when each is recognized separately, and also to improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where you can

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common-design symbol variation presentation and a preview advance presentation presentation. Hereinafter, differences from the specific example shown in FIG. 110 will be mainly described.

  Also in this specific example, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228, the common drawing symbol variation presentation is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display of the common drawing decorative symbol is started, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball. In addition, special figure design fluctuation production similar to the concrete example which is shown in Figure 110 is started, but pre-reading of the start information which is remembered in special figure 1 reservation memory section of RAM308 by winning in 1st special figure start mouth 230 Pre-reading advance notice effect based on is also executed. The notice mode of the preview notice effect based on the look-ahead here is a mode using a background image, and at the same time as symbol variation display is started on the special view 1 display device 212, as shown in FIG. The entire front screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely dark for a moment, and the common pattern symbol variation effect performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special symbol pattern variation effect started with the decorative symbol display device 208 also disappear momentarily . That is, the common-design symbol change effect is changed by the advance notice effect.

  In addition, although switching of a background image is performed as pre-reading advance notice production here, you may carry out as a special design symbol variation production. That is, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a dark background image (blackout image) for a moment before starting the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure, and then the normal background image is restored to decorate the special image. It is also possible to perform variable display of symbols. Also in the case of common sense, the common figure symbol change effect is changed by the special figure symbol change effect. The blackout image can also be used as a scene switching image, and such switching of the background image can also be viewed as a special symbol design variation presentation that also serves as a scene switching presentation.

  Also, in FIG. 111 (c), the background image is switched to a dark image (blackout image), but as shown in FIG. 111 (c '), the background image is switched to a bright image (here, a whiteout image). It is also good.

  Further, in FIG. 111 (c), the prefetching notice effect based on the prefetching of the start information stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning on the first special view start port 230 is a notice mode using a background image. (C ′ ′), it may be executed in a notice mode of closing the shielding device 246 that was open. Also in this case, the predetermined area 208x in which the fluctuation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed is hidden by the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, and the common pattern fluctuation effect is changed by the advance notice. Note that it is also possible to view as a scene switching effect a switching to a whiteout image and a feature effect in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  The background image may be a translucent image. By being semi-transparent, it becomes possible to visually recognize a common-design symbol variation production and a special-design symbol variation production, and therefore it may be possible to prevent a reduction in the rendering effect.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special view reserve increase command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the special view reserve increase presentation.
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common-design symbol variation effect and a special-image reserve increase effect.

  In FIG. 112 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the special figure 1 display device 212, and variation display of the special figure decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In addition, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a), three special view hold displays are displayed. Hereinafter, the special view reserve display representing the oldest special view reserve (hereinafter referred to as special view reserve 1) will be referred to as first special view reserve display 296, and the second oldest special view reserve (hereinafter special plan reserve 2) will be referred to. The special view reserve display representing) is referred to as a second special view reserve display 297, and the special view reserve display representing the latest special view reserve (hereinafter referred to as special view reserve 3) is referred to as a third special view reserve display 298. Here, the number of reservations for the special view is three. On the other hand, the common-diagram display device 210 is displaying a stop, and in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop design of the common-diagram decorative symbol is displayed.

  When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start port 228 while the symbol change display is being performed, the common drawing symbol change presentation is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display of the common drawing decorative symbol is started, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Next, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball. In addition, the reservation of the special figure increases. Hereinafter, the reservation of the special drawing increased here is referred to as special drawing reservation 4, and the special drawing reservation display representing the special drawing reservation 4 is referred to as a fourth special drawing reservation display 299. When the game ball enters the first special view start opening 230, the special view hold increase sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown), and the fourth display of the default display mode from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 The symbol 2991 of the truck carrying the symbol of the special view reservation display 299 appears, and the symbol 2991 of this truck moves the effect display area 208d toward the left side. As a result, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), the symbol 2991 of the track passes through the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed, and the common drawing ornamental symbol performed in the predetermined area 208x Disappears for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller as the pattern 2991 of the track enters the predetermined area 208x. Also in this specific example, the common figure symbol fluctuation effect is changed due to the special figure reserve increase effect.

  The symbol of black circle 4th special view reservation 299, which is the default display mode placed on the truck, is carried to the right of 3rd special view reservation 298 and then taken down from the truck. The figure reserve display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure reserve display 298. When fourth special view hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of third special view hold display 298, preview advance notice effect using the hold display is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), an effect image 2992 of light aura representing the light diverging radially from the black circle image is added to the black circle image which is the default display mode. The display mode is changed. The aura effect image 2992 of the light enters the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed, and the predetermined area 208x also becomes smaller here. Therefore, the common-design symbol change effect is also changed by the advance notice effect. Note that the light aura effect image 2992 may be a translucent image. By being semi-transparent, since a common-design symbol variation production becomes visible, there may be cases where it is possible to prevent a reduction in the rendering effect of the common-design symbol variation presentation.

  In addition, the display mode of the 4th special figure reservation display 299 displayed on the right side of the 3rd special figure reservation display 298 may change to another display mode. In (d ′) of FIG. 112, the display mode of the fourth special view hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special view hold display 298 is changed to a panda character image of a scary face. In addition, this character image is larger than the image of the black circle of the default display mode, and a part thereof enters the predetermined area 208x, and here too, the common-pattern symbol variation effect is changed by the advance notice effect. The hold display also serving as the advance notice advertisement effect represents a hold that can be expected from the jackpot from the player's point of view, and can be easily understood by the player by making the display size larger than the default display mode. As described above, the size of the hold display may be changed according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the pre-reading advance notice. Note that the display may be made large only during the first predetermined period of the hold display, and thereafter displayed in the same size as the size of the default display mode.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the common-design symbol variation effect itself changes. Hereinafter, differences from the specific example shown in FIG. 110 will be mainly described.

  Also in this specific example, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228, the common drawing symbol variation presentation is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display of the common drawing decorative symbol is started, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball also here. Further, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), the special symbol symbol variation effect similar to that of the specific example shown in FIG. 110 is started. Further, based on the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing, the background screen of the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed changes, and the common figure symbol variation effect itself changes. Here, the non-patterned background image is changed to a diagonally striped background image.

  In addition, as a change of the common figure design fluctuation production itself based on the start of the special figure design fluctuation display, as shown in Figure 113 (d), instead of the fluctuation display of the common figure decorative design which is performed in the predetermined area 208x The countdown display may be performed, and the display may be changed to, for example, 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → O.

  In addition, when the reserve of the special figure increases, the advance notice notice effect based on the pre-reading of the start information stored in the special view reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning to the special view starter opening May be performed in the predetermined area 208x in which the In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (e), a symbol such as a specific character or symbol (here, a character pattern of a panda with a scary face) is displayed in a predetermined area 208x instead of the variable display of the ordinary drawing decorative symbol Is displayed.

  Further, in the above description, the variable display (common symbol symbol fluctuation presentation) of the common drawing decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is always performed each time, but in the case of a loss in the success or failure judgment of the common drawing, predetermined It may be performed with a probability (for example, 10% or 0%). By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to increase the player's degree of expectation for the common figure symbol fluctuation effect.

  Further, the sound effects based on each effect may include silent effects. By doing this, the player can more easily notice that a profit (for example, a payout of a winning ball) has occurred. In addition, in some cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player does not get in the way of producing special effects, and the player is hit if the special drawing is judged to be acceptable.

  It should be noted that during the power support, it is possible not to perform the common symbol design fluctuation rendition. Since the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 is easily opened during the power support and the winning balls are easily generated, the player can concentrate on the effect based on the winning balls generation. There is a case.

  Further, although an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described here, the present invention can be applied to a rotary gaming machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, the game ball can enter in the gaming machine that provides the player with a predetermined game value based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established (for example, entry of the game ball into the winning opening and start opening). Starting information (for example, a common drawing winning random number and a common drawing fluctuation period determination random number based on the first entering area (for example, central common drawing starting gate 251) and the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first entering area Start information generating means (for example, a random number value storage register corresponding to a common drawing start area of random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 81); a common drawing fluctuation period determination random number counter provided in RAM 308; The main control unit 300 which performs random number processing together with the yes / no decision means (for example, the main control that executes the commonplace yes / no decision processing) which makes a yes / no decision based on the start information generated by the start information generation means Based on the CPU 304 of 300, rendering means for producing effects (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the result of the pass / fail judgment of the acceptance / rejection determination means, predetermined effects for the rendering means (for example, common pattern symbol fluctuation effect) Effect control means (for example, the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) for performing the second entry area (for example, the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball) Central general winning opening 226), and the effect control means changes the predetermined effect to the effect based on the game ball entering the second entry area during the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized in that it causes an effect (for example, an effect in which a regular symbol change effect is changed by a prize ball payout effect). The explanation is given.

  Here, the first entry area may be an area (eg, a gate or the like) through which the game ball passes. That is, the first entry area may be provided in a game area where the game ball rolls, and the game ball may further roll on the game area even if the game ball enters. In addition, the predetermined condition may not be established even if the game ball enters the first entry area.

  In addition, the second entry area may be provided in the game area, and when entering, the game ball may be led to the back side more than the game area.

  In the second entry area, entry of the game ball is easy from the first state where entry of the game ball is difficult based on the fact that the result of determination of the result of the determination by the result determining means is a specific result of determination. It may include a variable starting port that changes state to the second state.

  Furthermore, the predetermined effect may be an effect by image display, an effect by sound, or an effect by light.

  Moreover, the effect which changed the predetermined effect said here may be the effect which switched the predetermined effect itself to other effects, or is the effect which gave a change to a part of the predetermined effect, It may also be an effect in which a part or all of the predetermined effect is covered by another effect.

  Further, giving a predetermined game value to a player may be, for example, paying out game media.

  In the above description, “the effect control means causes the effect means to perform a specific effect (for example, a prize ball payout effect) that affects the predetermined effect, in order to change the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by being The explanation is also given.

  In the above description, “the effect means includes an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for displaying an effect image, and the effect control means is a predetermined effect image (for example, decoration of a common figure) A part or all of the predetermined effect image is displayed as the effect of causing the image display means to perform the predetermined effect by displaying the variation display of the symbol on the image display means, and changing the predetermined effect. An image (see, for example, FIG. 97 (c)) covered with a part or all of another image (for example, a panda character image 2081 of a scary face) is displayed on the image display means. Game console. The explanation is also given.

Here, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an effect image which is wholly or partially translucent as the specific effect.
Further, the effect means includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,

  The effect control means causes the sound output means to perform the predetermined effect by causing the sound output means to output the predetermined sound, and the specific effect is output in parallel with the predetermined sound. The sound may be output to the sound output means. By doing this, the player may be able to recognize the generation of the profit by the sound based on the specific effect.

  Further, the sound output means includes a bowl capable of storing gaming balls, and a collision based on the fact that the gaming balls paid out from the payout means for the gaming balls collided with the gaming balls stored in the bowl or the balls. A sound may be output as the specific sound. By doing this, the player may be able to further recognize the occurrence of a profit because the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker.

  In the above description, "the first entry area (for example, the central spread diagram start gate 251) is provided in a game area (for example, the game area 124) where the game balls roll, and the entered game ball is The game area is further rolled, and in the second entry area (for example, the central general winning opening 226), the game ball after entering the first entry area of the game area enters It is provided in the possible position, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. The explanation is also given.

  Furthermore, in the above description, the winning device (for example, the variable winning opening 234 that is in an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the predetermined second condition is satisfied (for example, winning the big hit of the special view)) And the effect control means causes the effect means to perform an effect (for example, an effect of previewed advance notice) indicating that the predetermined second condition is likely to be satisfied as the specific effect. The game stand characterized by being. The explanation is also given.

  Hereinafter, the start information generated based on the game ball entering the first entry area is referred to as first start information, and the pass / fail determination based on the first start information is referred to as the first pass / fail determination. The first determination means is a first determination means.

  In addition, second start information (for example, a special figure) generated based on the game ball having entered the second entry area (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232). Second start information storage means (for example, RAM 308) storing the random number for winning, the special figure random number for big hit, the special figure random value for small hit, the special figure random number for losing, and the random number for special figure fluctuation time determination) The special storage 1 and the special storage 2 of the special storage 2 provided in the above, and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means, and the pass / fail based on the acquired second start information The second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) which makes a judgment and derives the second success or failure judgment result and the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed and the second success or failure is displayed. Row of symbol variation display to stop display symbol aspect representing the judgment result The second symbol display means (for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214) and the second symbol display means stop displaying the symbol aspect representing the specific second acceptance / rejection determination result Control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for shifting the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state after the completion, and the pass / fail judgment based on the predetermined second start information by the second pass / fail judgment means The second success or failure judging means predicts that there is a possibility that the result of the above will be the specific second success or failure judgment result (for example, the success or failure judgment of a big hit), the second success or failure judgment means And a previewing notice effect unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) to be executed with a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined second start information acquired prior to acquisition of the start information. There before The presentation means may include the prefetch advance notice effect means, and the effect control means may cause the prefetch notice effect means to perform the advance notice effect as the specific effect. Good.

  In addition, variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) which is released after the second symbol display means stops and displays the symbol aspect representing the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, special figure big hit determination result) And the like.

  Note that the pre-reading advance notice rendering means executes the pre-reading advance notice effect for giving notice that the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the predetermined start information by the pass / fail judgment means may become the specific pass / fail judgment result. Alternatively, pre-reading advance notice effect may be performed in which information based on the predetermined start information acquired prior to acquisition of the predetermined start information by the success / failure determination means may be notified.

  Further, the pre-read advance notice effect means may start the pre-read advance notice effect prior to the propriety determination means performing the propriety determination based on the predetermined start information.

  In addition, it has symbol display means for performing symbol fluctuation display from the start of symbol fluctuation to the stop display of the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the judgment of the acceptance or rejection for each start information stored in the start information storage means. In the aspect, the pre-read advance notice effect control means is configured to display the predetermined start information in at least one of the symbol change display corresponding to the predetermined start information and the symbol change display executed prior to the symbol change display. The preview advance notice effect may be executed to give notice that the result of the based on the result of the determination on the basis of the determination is the result of the specific determination on the basis of the result of the determination.

  Further, in the pre-read advance notice effect means, the execution decision about the notice that the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the predetermined start information by the pass / fail judgment means may become the specific pass / fail judgment result is the pass / fail judgment means The preview advance notice effect determined prior to the determination on the basis of the predetermined start information may be executed.

  Further, the pre-read advance notice effect unit may execute the pre-read advance notice effect based on the fact that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means, or the pre-read advance effect is The execution may be performed based on the reception of a command representing that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage unit.

  In addition, a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed as an enclosed ball, the enclosed ball is fired to the game area to play a game, and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player based on the enclosed ball winning in a predetermined entry area. And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area to be a circulatingly usable enclosed ball type gaming machine. Further, the gaming value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data which can be shot to the game area, and the effect control means is based on the fact that the game ball number data is given to the player. The presentation means may be made to perform an effect in which the predetermined effect is changed (for example, an effect in which a common pattern symbol variation effect is changed by a prize ball payout effect). Further, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an image indicating the predetermined number of the predetermined number of game ball number data as the specific effect.

Then, the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. In the following description, items that overlap with the items described above may be omitted or may be described redundantly, but the components having the same names as the names of the components described above may be used. Will be described with the same reference numerals as used above.
FIG. 114 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 114 is a game board that performs right strike during power support and during a big hit game. In the game board 200, a common view starting opening (gate) 228 is provided in each of the left area and the right area. The common drawing start port 228 corresponds to an example of the entry area, and the ball having passed through the common drawing start port 228 rolls on the game area 124 without being discharged to the gaming island side. The drawing start port 228 provided in the left area can aim to open the electric tube during the non-charging state (details will be described later), and the drawing start port 228 provided in the right area is It is possible to aim at the electric chow open during the electric support state.

  Also, the first special view start opening 230 and the second special view start opening 232 are provided below the central portion of the game area 124. Both the first special view start port 230 and the second special view start port 232 are start areas where game balls can enter, but the second area (right side in the game area) is rolled by arranging the game nail 238 etc. It is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first special view start opening 232 to enter the game ball. On the other hand, even if the game ball rolls on the first area (left side in the game area), the second special figure start port (electric chew) 232 rolls on the second area (right side in the game area) Even the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the ball. The second special view start opening 232 is provided immediately below the first special view start opening 230, and in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid. It is provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start port 232 corresponds to a variable start means (variable start region), hereinafter referred to as electric chew (electric tulip), and the pair of blade members 2321 open. Is referred to as electric chow open. In the state (first state) in which the pair of wing members 2321 is closed, it is difficult to enter the game ball, and in the open state (second state) where the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball is easily entered . The electric chew is a starting area that can be at least changed between the entry difficult state and the entry easy state. In addition, the size of the reception opening of the game ball of the electric chew in a state where the pair of wing members 2321 is open is a size less than 5 game balls.

Further, the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is provided below the electric chew, and the door member 2341 is moved to be in a possible state of winning. That is, the variable winning opening 234 is a winning area (winning means) in which at least the state can be changed between the non-winning state and the winning state. In addition, the size of the reception opening of the game ball of the attacker in the state where the door member 2341 is open is a size for five or more game balls. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 114, the game balls rolling on the first area (left side in the game area) are difficult to enter into the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 etc. It is configured to be impossible, and the player needs to hit the right during the big hit game.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the normal symbol display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display. The types of special drawings, common drawings, and decorative designs will be described.

  FIG. 115 (a) is an example of the stop symbol form (second symbol form) of the special view to be displayed in a stopped state after the fluctuation display of symbols in the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 FIG. In FIG. 115 (a), ten types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown. In FIG. 115 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, six types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" and "special figure B" are 15 round (R) special big hit symbols, and "special figure E" is 2R big hit symbols (suddenly definite variation). When these symbols (special drawings A, B, E) are stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state. "Special figure C" and "special figure D" are 15R big hit symbols (15R normal big hit). When the special view C or the special view D is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special view low probability normal view high probability state. "Special figure F" is 2R big hit design (hidden probability change). When the special view F is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special view high probability general view low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, during the big hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability state, and when it wins the special figure A, the special figure B, the special figure E, and the special figure F, after the big hit game is over, the next big hit The special figure high probability state is maintained until it does. On the other hand, when the special figure C and the special figure D are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game is over.

  In addition, after the end of the 15R big hit game, and after the big hit game suddenly due to a definite change, it shifts to a state with a power support (power support) (hereinafter referred to as a power support state). Also in the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, the electric support state (shorting state) may be set if either the electric-chu open period extension or the electric-chu open number increase is performed, which increases the probability of entering the second special view starting opening 232. . In the non-power-supply state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second special view start opening 232 than in the power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when the special view A, the special view B, or the special view E is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game to be performed thereafter is over, until the next big hit game is started. State is maintained, and when Special view C or Special view D is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special view fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st time Transition to the non-power support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot (special figure F) without electric support is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game. As described later, the special figure F is a symbol which is selected in the special figure 1 but not selected in the special figure 2.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two kinds of stop symbols are prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. Special figure G shown in Drawing 115 (a) is small hitting design 1 and special figure H is small hitting design 2. Both small hit symbols are stop symbol modes in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively small. As will be described later, the small hit symbol is a symbol which is selected in the special view 1 but not selected in the special view 2.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as lost symbols. The special figure I is a lost design 1 and the special figure J is a lost design 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the jackpot control state of the second advantage with the player's advantage is high, and the first advantage of the first advantage with the advantage lower than the second advantage. The non-big-hit control state is prepared, and the small toy machine 100 takes one of the control states of the big-hit control state (second control state) and the non-big-hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of control state transition means.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the 15R special big hit symbol, a symbol other than the two types of symbols of "special image A" and "special image B" is also prepared. A symbol other than the two types of symbols of “C” and “Special image D” is also prepared, and a plurality of symbols are prepared also for the jackpot symbol of sudden variation and the jackpot symbol of hidden probability variation.

  FIG. 115 (b) is a view showing an example of the decorative symbol of the special view. There are ten types of "design 1" to "design 10" in the decorative design of the special view in the present embodiment. When the reserve digesting condition is satisfied, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "in each symbol display area of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Modification display of decoration pattern” is performed in which the display is switched in the order of decoration 3 ”→. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol of the special view separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) which is a combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. The variation display and stop display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing are synchronized with the variation display and stop display of the symbol in the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214.

  In the case of notifying 15R special big hit (“Special figure A” “Special figure B”) or 15R special big hit (“Special figure C” “Special figure D”), the same decorative pattern is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols with a definite variation and a big hit. In addition, among combinations of these decorative designs, a combination of decorative designs in which three identical odd decorative designs are arranged (for example, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3", "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", etc.) Is a combination of the decorative symbols of the 15R special jackpot decision that is stopped and displayed only in the case of the 15R special jackpot, which is “special drawing A” or “special drawing B”. In addition, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure F”) or small hits (“special figure G”, “special figure H”) of 2R's big hit, “in symbol display areas 208a to 208c, Stop the display of the combination of decoration patterns such as decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3 ". Furthermore, in the case of notifying a sudden definite variation ("special figure E") of the 2R's jackpot, a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" and a combination of decoration designs such as "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure J”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect (combination of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol of the special figure It may be referred to as a variable display of a decorative symbol. The variable display of the special drawing decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  One special figure displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the left middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the stop symbol form (see FIG. 82 (a)) of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 described above As for the stop symbol form (refer to the same figure (c)) of the decorative pattern of, the special symbol (refer to the same figure (c)) is larger.

  FIG. 115 (c) is a view showing an example of a stop symbol form (first symbol form) of a common drawing to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbols in the common drawing display device 210. In the present embodiment, two types of hit symbols ("P and A" and "P and B") and one type of out pattern ("P and C") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the common figure. . “Pubular figure A” is a hit symbol 1 and “PloWful figure B” is a hit symbol 2. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop symbol form of the common drawing shown in FIG. 115 (c) is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 115 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing. The common pattern display device 210 corresponds to an example of the auxiliary symbol notification means, the first symbol display means, or a simple symbol display means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is also performed. FIG. 115 (d) is a diagram showing a stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol of the common drawing. The variation display of the decorative symbol of the common figure is described later in detail, but after the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common figure, the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 6D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when the common-diagram display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol 1 ("common-diagram A") shown in the same figure (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (d) When the decoration 1 "is stopped and displayed, and the common drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol 2 (" general drawing B ") shown in FIG. Is displayed on a stop, and in any case, the hit of a common drawing is notified. Also, when the generic display 210 stops displaying the off-set symbol ("pop C") shown in FIG. 6 (c), the decorative symbol display unit 208 displays "general sketch" shown in FIG. 4 (d). "3" is stopped and displayed, and the release of the common drawing is notified. The symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing in the common drawing display device 210 and the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 may or may not be synchronized.

  Subsequently, the pass / fail determination of the common drawing in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left strike is performed in the non-electric support state, and the right strike is performed in the electric support state. When the player strikes the left in the non-power-supporting state, the determination of whether the general drawing is true or false is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the general drawing start port (gate) 228 provided in the left area. In the case where the right strike is performed in the power-on state, the determination on the success or failure of the common drawing is performed based on the game ball having passed through the common drawing start port (gate) 228 provided in the right region. It should be noted that, even if the game ball passes through the flat view starting port 228 provided in the right area, the player performs right-handed driving despite the non-power-sustaining state, but the left is the power-sustaining state. Even if the game ball has passed a blowout and the game ball has passed the blowout starting port 228 provided in the left area, the passability determination of the blowout is performed. However, the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing will not be performed unless the reserve digestion condition of the common drawing is established. The requirement for establishment of the reserve processing condition of the common drawing here is that when the common drawing is not in operation, the common drawing fluctuation game is not being performed, and the common drawing determination display is not in progress either. Is a requirement that holds true. In addition, when there is no suspension of the common drawing, the electric chute is not in operation, and when the common drawing fluctuation game is not performed and is not in the common drawing determination display, the common drawing starting opening (gate) 228 is played It is a requirement that holds even when the ball passes.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 according to the present embodiment, a table for determining whether or not to accept drawing is stored.

  FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determination of commonplace success or failure; FIG.

  In the present embodiment, one set of random number values (starting information) is stored in the common drawing reserve storage unit provided in the RAM 308 when the common drawing random number acquisition condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the common drawing random number acquisition condition referred to here is a requirement that is established based on the game ball having passed the common drawing start port (gate) 228. That is, in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that holds when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting port 228, and in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is the predetermined upper limit number, This is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball passes through the common drawing start port 228. In the present embodiment, a common drawing winning random number value and a common drawing determination random number value are stored in the common drawing reserve storage unit as one set of random number values (starting information).

  In the regular drawing propriety judgment process, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the judgment is made based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. If the short time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the low probability table shown in FIG. If it is in the state), the high probability table shown in FIG. It is determined based on the common drawing win random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. The hit probability of the common figure is 65532/65536 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 116 (a) and 655341/65536 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 116 (b). The probability of winning per common drawing is higher in the power support state than in the non-power support state. Here, deriving "hit" or "loss" corresponds to a regular drawing hit / not determination (lottery drawing), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the common drawing hit / not determining process here is the first hit judging means. It corresponds to an example of (assistance judging means). Further, the success / failure determination result of “hit” in the common drawing corresponds to an example of the specific success / failure determination result.

  When the regular drawing success / failure determination is completed, the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing is determined. It should be noted that the generic drawing success / failure judgment and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be combined to be a common drawing judgment (first success / failure judgment).

  FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining a common drawing, and FIG. 116 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability table for determining a common drawing.

  Also in the common drawing determination process, the common time determination flag is referred to, and the common drawing determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. If the short-time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the general drawing is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 116 (c), and if the short-time flag is on (in the power-supply state If there is any), the drawing determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. The common drawing determination process is performed based on the common drawing determination random number value (possible range: 0 to 99) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low probability state (non-power support state), it wins the symbol 1 (general drawing A) per common expression with a probability of 99% and wins the symbol 2 (general drawing B) per common drawing with the probability of 1% . On the other hand, in the general drawing high probability state (power support state), the general drawing per pattern 2 (general drawing B) is won with a probability of 100%. In addition, since the lost design is one type, the common drawing determination process based on the common drawing determination random number value may be omitted.

  The decision on success or failure of the common drawing may be to derive "hit" or "loss". Alternatively, the pass / fail determination of the common drawing may be deriving to the common drawing symbol.

  The fluctuation time is described for reference also in the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 116 (c) and in the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 116 (d). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the common drawing in the common drawing display device 210 is uniformly one second in the case of the power support state, and is uniformly twenty seconds in the non-power support state. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the common figure becomes a relatively short first fluctuation time in the power-supply state, and becomes a relatively long second fluctuation time in the power-supply state. In addition, when the common drawing random number acquisition condition is satisfied, the common drawing winning random number value and the common drawing determination random value are combined with the common drawing fluctuation period determination random number value to be acquired, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing is determined by lottery. It is also good.

  Next, the opening and closing operation of the pair of blade members 2321 performed by the main control unit 300, that is, the opening and closing pattern of the electric control will be described.

  FIG. 117 (a) is a figure for demonstrating the opening-and-closing pattern of electric chew in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment.

  If the common drawing determination result is the common drawing A, after the common drawing decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew performs opening once for 0.3 seconds. Even in the pachinko machine in the second embodiment, the firing interval of the gaming balls by the launching device 110 is 0.6 seconds, and in the case of the hit symbol of the common figure A, one opening time of the pair of wing members 2321 is It is shorter than the firing interval of the ball, and it is virtually impossible to enter the ball into the electric tuw even if the player wins the ball in the map A, and it is almost impossible to acquire the ball. Hereinafter, the fact that the pair of wing members 232a is opened by winning the common drawing A may be referred to as electric power short open. This electric Chu-short open (corresponding to the first open pattern) stochastically becomes the open pattern of Electric Chu in the non-electric support state.

  If the common drawing determination result is the common drawing B, after the common drawing decoration 2 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew is first opened for 0.3 seconds, After a closing time of 0.5 seconds, open for 5 seconds. That is, the electric chew performs a specific operation (opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 232a) for 5.8 seconds. Hereinafter, the winning of the common figure B and the release of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as "power open". In this electric Chu-long opening (corresponding to the second opening pattern), it is highly expected that the entrance to the electric chew can be expected and the ball will be won. It should be noted that, in the electric tube long opening, the blade member 2321 may be open at least longer than the firing interval, or may be open longer than the general drawing fluctuation time in the electric support state, omitting the first 0.3 second opening Then, only the second long opening may be performed. This electric Chu-long opening is stochastically the opening pattern of the electric chew in the electric support state.

  In addition, electric Chu will be closed at that time, if there is a predetermined number of balls entering before the predetermined opening time passes.

  If the common drawing determination result is the common drawing C, after the common drawing decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chute does not open and remains closed.

  Next, a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a spread image effect) performed on the side of the sub control unit (second sub control unit 500) will be described. The regular drawing effect in the present embodiment includes at least one of the effects during fluctuation, effects during determination, and effects during operation, or includes a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be any effect to be executed in the area. The effect during fluctuation is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during symbol fluctuation display of a symbol drawing by the symbol drawing display device 210, and the effect during determination is fixed the stop symbol aspect of the symbol drawing by the common symbol display device 210 It is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during display, and an effect during operation is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 while the electric chew is operating. In addition to the effects (for example, prior notice per common drawing) related to the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing, these effects are effects to which the effects (for example Instead of the effect relating to the result of the success or failure determination of the common drawing, the effect relating to the result of the success or failure determination of the special drawing may be performed. Further, although the detailed drawing will be described later, the common drawing effect is executed in an area including a predetermined area provided between the area for displaying the reserved icon of Special Figure 1 and the area for displaying the reserved icon of Special Figure 2. .

FIG. 117 (b) is a view for explaining several examples of common drawing effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.
(A) to (F) are variable display patterns during the non-electric support state.

  (A) is a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common figure (the above-mentioned effect during variation). In the effect shown in (A), high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the common drawing decoration 1, the common drawing decoration 2, and the common drawing decoration 3, and after three seconds, the decorative symbol of the common drawing showing the common drawing determination result is stopped and displayed.

  (A) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (demonstration during the variation). In the effect shown in (A), high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the ordinary drawing decoration 2, the ordinary drawing decoration 2, and the ordinary drawing decoration 3, and after 15 seconds, the decorative drawing of the ordinary drawing showing the common drawing determination result is stopped and displayed. In this effect, during the high-speed fluctuation, the common drawing decoration 2 is displayed in large numbers, so that the degree of expectation of the electric Chu-long opening is improved.

  (C) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (demonstration during variation above). In the effect shown in (c), the high-speed variation in which the ordinary drawing decoration 2 is displayed continuously is repeated, and the display is stopped after 10 seconds. In this effect, since only the ordinary figure decoration 2 is displayed continuously, the stop display is also the ordinary figure decoration 2. Therefore, when this rendition is started, the electric power is released.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common figure (the above-mentioned effect during variation). In the effect shown in (D), the high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the decoration pattern of "super heat" representing the big hit decoration of the common drawing decoration 1, common drawing decoration 2, common drawing decoration 3 and special drawing. One of the decorative symbols will stop. Therefore, the decoration pattern of "super heat" may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the degree of expectation of the electric Chu-long opening does not increase, but the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the special figure increases and the interest of the game improves. . That is, there are cases where it is possible to expect not only electric chow open but also a big hit.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common figure (the above-mentioned effect during variation). In the effect shown in this (e), the high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the decoration figure of the popular figure decoration 2 and the special design of "super heat" representing the big hit notice of the special figure, and after 10 seconds, the common figure decoration 2 or "super heat" One side of the decorative pattern is stopped. In this effect, since the big hit notice of the special figure is displayed in half during high speed fluctuation, it may be possible to expect not only the electric chow open but also the big hit of the special figure during high speed fluctuation.

  In the variation display pattern shown in (f), a decorative symbol of "Hint" that represents a notice of 2R big hit that is a latent probability change of a special figure, a decorative symbol of "probable" that represents a notice of 2R big hit that is a sudden definite change of a special figure, The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the "big hit" decorative symbols representing the 15R big hit notice of the special figure, and after 5 seconds, any of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. When this effect is started, the opening of the variable winning opening 234 is determined.

  In the variation display pattern described above, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in accordance with the timing of the end of the symbol variation display of the common view by the common view display device 210. In particular, in the case of a drawing, since the electric chew is released thereafter, the timing of the end of the symbol variation display by the drawing display device 210 matches the timing of the end of the effects of (A) to (E), It is preferable to give the player a notice of opening the electric chow. On the other hand, in particular, in the case of deviation of a common figure, it is not necessary to make the timings of the two coincide with each other, and it may be performed at any timing during symbol variation display of 20 seconds by the common drawing display device 210. For example, the common drawing effect may be started before the start of the symbol variation display by the common drawing display device 210, or the common drawing effect may be continued until the end of the symbol variation display by the common drawing display device 210. Furthermore, since the effect shown in (f) is an effect relating to the result of the pass / fail determination of the special view rather than the common view, it may be performed during a period in which the symbol variation display by the common view display device 210 is not performed. In addition, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a decorative symbol representing a result of determination of a fake drawing or may be a fake jackpot notice.

  (G) is an example of the effect during operation. In the in-operation effect shown in (f), after the symbol variation display by the common view display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in which a rose character is piece-signing Ru. In the non-power-supporting state, in many cases, it is elected to open the electric chow short, but during the electric chow short opening, the in-operation presentation shown in (K) is executed for an instant. Further, when the electric power tug-long opening is won, the effect during operation shown in (ii) is executed for 5.8 seconds in which the electric liquid opens and closes. In addition, the effect during operation shown in (K) may be executed only while the electric Chu is open for 5 seconds, or only while the Electric Chu is initially open for 0.3 seconds ( The in-operation presentation shown in (ii) may be executed. Hereinafter, the effect that the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in which the character of the lord is piece-signing may be referred to as electric power chow open notification effect.

  Note that the in-operation effect shown in (f) may be executed immediately after the finalization of the fixed display of the common view B by the common view display device 210 (immediately before the power-on operation).

  In addition, not only in the non-power-supporting state, but also in the power-supporting state, the in-operation effect shown in (f) may be executed even when the player is elected to open the power channel. In this case, after the symbol variation display of 1 second is performed, in most cases, the player is elected to open the electric chulong, and during the 5.8 seconds of the electric chu opening and closing, the effect shown in (K) is executed do it. In addition, when electing the electric chew short opening, it may be executed for a moment during the 0.3 second electric chew short opening.

  In addition, the presentation time (first time) of the variable display pattern shown in (A) to (E) of FIG. 117 (b) is that of the electric chow open notification presentation pattern shown in (G) of FIG. 117 (b) Since it is a time longer than the time (second time), and the variable display effect of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is performed in a relatively long effect time, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the release of the electric chew.

  (G) is an example of the effect of the big hit notice of the special figure fluctuation. The effect shown in (G) is executed in a region including a predetermined region in the decorative symbol display device 208 regardless of symbol variation display by the common-diagram display device 210 or regardless of power-on operation. That is, it is executed during the variation display of the symbols in the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 even if the symbol variation display by the common view display device 210 is not being performed or the power chew is not in operation. It is an effect to be performed, and it is an effect to foretell that the big hit symbol will be stopped and displayed in the relevant variable display, and an effect for giving a notice as if it is stopped and displayed even if the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the relevant variable display. So-called fake announcement effects) are also included. Here, the decorative symbol of "hidden" representing the notice of 2R big hit which is the latent definite variation of the special figure, the decorative symbol of "probable" which represents the preliminary notice of 2R big hit which is the sudden definite variation of the special figure, the 15R big hit notice of special figure The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the "big hit" decorative pattern to be represented and the "super hot" decorative pattern to represent the big hit notice of the special image, and after 8 seconds, any of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In addition, it may replace with the decoration pattern of a character, and may use the decoration pattern of a pattern.

  In addition, the electric chew open notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 117 (b) may be executed after the effects of (a) to (iv) and (k) shown in FIG. That is, you may perform electric Chu open notification production in combination with a change display pattern. Furthermore, the electric Chu open notification effect may not be performed when the electric Chu Short is open, but may be performed when the Electric Chu Long is open. By doing this, it is possible to perform the electric chow open notification effect only when the electric chow becomes an advantageous opening for the player, and it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player. Also, when the common drawing A is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative symbol variation display effect) of (a) to (f) and (c) shown in FIG. In the case where the notification effect is not executed, and the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative symbol variation display effect) of (A) to (F) and (G) shown in FIG. After that, the electric whistle open notification effect may also be performed. By doing this, the decorative symbol variation display effect is performed only when the electric power is released in an advantageous manner, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Further, the common drawing effect may be an effect that displays the common drawing decorative symbol shown in FIG. 115 (d) as the effect during determination without performing the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (in the above variation). The effect may be performed during the determination, and further, in the case of a common figure, the effect may be an effect of performing an electric thu open notification effect. In addition, even if it is per common drawing, it may be an effect that performs a power tuw open notification effect only for per common drawing B in which the electric tuong long opening is performed, or in the sense that rare display is performed in a very short time, The effect may be such that the electric chew open notification effect is performed only around the ordinary drawing A in which the electric chow short is released.

Subsequently, a common drawing effect determination process executed by the first auxiliary control unit 400 will be described using FIG.
FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing a flow of common drawing effect determination processing.

  A common drawing change start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. The common drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 118 is started when the first secondary control unit 400 receives this common drawing change start command. The common drawing fluctuation start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not it is the power support state), and the common drawing determination result. It should be noted that the general drawing reserve increase command is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and when the first sub control unit 400 receives the common drawing reserve increase command, the general drawing effect determination process is started. You may

  First, based on the information representing the current control state included in the common drawing change start command, it is determined whether or not non-power support is in progress (step S601). The determination process ends. If it is in the non-power-supporting state, it is determined whether or not a regular drawing effect is to be executed (step S602). In the determination here, for example, if the common drawing determination result included in the common drawing change start command is a common drawing B, a common drawing effect is executed. Also, even if the common drawing determination result is a common drawing C, it may be executed as a false common drawing effect. Furthermore, a dedicated random number may be acquired, and a common drawing effect executability lottery may be performed, and may be executed when the lottery is won. In particular, when the common drawing determination result is the common drawing C, the execution of the false common drawing effect may be determined by the lottery process. Alternatively, if the special symbol symbol variation start command is received and the symbol variation of the special symbol is being executed, the regular drawing effect may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a popular drawing effect including a special hit of a special hit. In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure is under execution, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed due to the symbol variation, the big hit announcement effect of the special figure may be executed as a popular figure effect, Even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed, a jackpot notice effect of false special characters may be executed. Also, the execution of the jackpot notice effect of the special view here may also be performed when an effective / non-performing lottery is performed and the lottery is won.

  If the common drawing effect is not performed, the common drawing effect determination process ends, and if the common drawing effect is performed, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined period (step S603). In the present embodiment, during the big hit game of the special figure (during the opening and closing operation of the attacker) or during the production where the expectation of the big hit of the special figure is high (for example, during super reach in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure) (A) to (e) and (c) of 117 (b) are not executed. The predetermined period of time referred to here is during the jackpot game of the special view and the effect of the high expectation of the jackpot of the special view. If it is not during this predetermined period, an effect pattern is selected from all the effect patterns ((A) to (G)) shown in FIG. 117 (b) (step S604), and the process proceeds to step S606. Note that the electric chow opening notification effect of (K) shown in FIG. 117 (b) may be executed after each of the effects of (A) to (E) shown in FIG. 117 (B), or FIG. Only the electric chew open notification effect may be performed without executing any of the effects (a) to (e) shown in 2.). Moreover, if it is not during the predetermined period, the effect pattern may be selected from the effects ((A) to (E) and (G) shown in FIG. 117 (b)) other than the electric chow open notification effect.

  On the other hand, if it is during the predetermined period, the effect pattern of only the electric chew open notification effect shown in FIG. 117 (b) is selected (step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606. By doing this, during the big hit game, the decorative symbol variation display effect of (a) to (e) and (c) shown in FIG. There are cases where it is possible to concentrate the player on the big hit game, as it is only the effect time of the notification effect.

  In step S606, information representing the effect pattern selected in step S604 or step S605 is set in the spread map effect command and transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the spread pattern effect determination processing ends. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the common drawing effect command controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the information representing the effect pattern included in the common drawing effect command, and the predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208 The regular drawing effect is executed in the area including.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the current control state is the power support state, the general drawing effect is not executed by the determination in step S601. It should be noted that, when the current control state is the power support state, the regular drawing effect is not performed uniformly, but the executability lottery is performed, and the common drawing effect is performed with a predetermined probability. It is also good. As described above, in the present embodiment, the regular drawing effect is a effect that the non-power support state is more easily performed than the power support state. In the non-electric support state, since it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the electric chow, it may be possible to have an expectation for the prize of the gaming ball in the electric chew. On the other hand, in the power support state, since the gaming ball is likely to be won in the power chew, there is a possibility that the expectation of the player does not improve so much even if the game drawing effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period such as during a big hit game, the effect during variation or the effect during determination is not uniformly performed by the determination of step S603, but only the electric whistle open notification effect is performed. It should be noted that, during the predetermined period, instead of uniformly performing the effect during the change or the effect during the determination, the executability lottery is performed to perform the effect during the change or the effect during the change with a predetermined probability. It is also good. In addition, during the predetermined period, the effect during fluctuation or the effect during determination may not be performed, and the spread-pattern effect may not be performed uniformly. Alternatively, even if it is performed, an executability lottery may be performed, and only the electric chew open notification effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. That is, the first effect may be an effect in which the non-big hit control state is more easily executed than the big hit control state. Since winning the success or failure judgment of the generic drawing is also a factor to improve the chance of the success or failure judgment (big hit lottery) of the special drawing, if the player can be expected by making the common drawing effect during the non-big hit game There is. Also, in general, there are more award balls in the attacker than in the electric cho, and in the board layout where the electric chew is located at the upper or upstream side of the attacker, the opening of the electric chew wins the attacker in the big hit game May interfere with Therefore, it may be possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction by making it difficult to perform the regular drawing effect during the big hit game.
Here, the success / failure determination of the special view is also described.

  In the present embodiment, when the special view start information acquisition condition is satisfied, the random number value (start information) for one set is stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit or the special view 2 reserve storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The establishment requirement of the special figure random number acquisition condition referred to here is an requirement established for the special figure 1 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure start opening 230. That is, in the state where the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, this is a requirement that is established when the gaming ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball enters the first special view starting opening 230. In addition, the special figure 2 is a requirement that is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure starting opening 232 (electric chew). That is, in the state where the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, this is a requirement that is established when the gaming ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, this is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball enters the second special view start opening 232. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number, the special figure 1 determination random number value, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number value are stored in the special figure 1 reserve storage unit as one set of random number values (starting information). Do. The special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 determination random number value, and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value are stored in the special figure 2 reserve storage unit as a random number value (starting information) for one set.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for success / failure determination of the special figure, and FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for success / failure determination of the special figure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 takes out the start information from the hold storage unit of the RAM 308, it refers to the probability change flag, and if the probability change flag is on, it is in the special figure high probability state. 1 based on which random number range in the high probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 119 (a) shown in FIG. 119 (a) the winning random number value (both can be taken numerical value range), as a special design acceptance or rejection result " Deriving a "big hit" or "loss". On the other hand, if the probability change flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state, and therefore the special figure 2 winning random number value or the special figure 1 winning random number is any random number in the probability determination high probability table shown in FIG. Based on whether it belongs to the range, "big hit" or "loss" is derived as the special figure 2 success or failure determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is about 1/400 in the special figure low probability state, and about 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit is not in the special view 2 but only in the special view 1. Therefore, when it is a loss as a result of performing a yes-no decision using special figure 1 election random number value, a small hit determination is performed.

  FIG. 119C is a diagram showing a small hitting determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the small hit determination limited to the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random value is again used to perform the small hit determination.
In addition, you may provide a small hit in the special figure 2 similarly to the special figure 1.

Thus, the "big hit", the "small hit" or the "loss" is derived as the special figure 1 success or failure determination result. Moreover, "big hit" or "loss" is derived | led-out as a special figure 2 success or failure determination result.
Next, the symbol of the special drawing is determined based on the special drawing suitability determination result.

  FIG. 119 (d) is a diagram showing the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special drawing determination table is a stop figure pattern of the special drawing for each of the big hit (special drawing A to special drawing F), the small hit (special drawing G, H), and the falling off (special drawing I, J) (FIG. 115 (a A random number range corresponding to) is specified. In addition, the special figure 2 does not have a random number range corresponding to each of the special figure F to the special figure H, and in the special figure 2, the big hit is 15R special big hit (special figure A, B), 15R normal big hit (Special figure C, D), it becomes 2R big hit symbol (special figure E) which is sudden positive variation, there is no small hit.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the special figure 1 random number value or special figure 2 random value among the random number values for one set acquired from the special figure 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 or the special figure 2 reserve storage unit. A special figure is determined using numerical values (both possible values are 0 to 99).

  The winning probability of the 15R special big hit (special figure A, B) that is most advantageous for the game is 30% in the case of special figure 1, compared with 70% in the case of special figure 2, special figure 2 is a big hit that is more advantageous than Special Figure 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  The decision on the special drawing may be to derive "big hit", "small hit" or "loss", or to derive "big hit" or "loss". Alternatively, the success or failure determination of the special view may be derived to a special design symbol.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment will be described. First, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. FIG. 120 is a view showing 1⁄5 part of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, FIG. 121 is a view showing 2⁄5 part of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 123 shows a 3/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in FIG. 123 shows a 4/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 shows a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a 5/5 portion, and FIGS. 120 to 124 are examples connected to one.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in the figure showing each step of FIGS. 120-124. Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special-image display device 212, and a second special-image display device 214 are shown. The common-diagram display device 210 is a 7-segment display device shown on the rightmost side, the second special-image display device 214 is a 7-segment display device shown on the left-most side, and the first special-image display device 212 is , 7-segment display shown in the center. In these seven-segment display devices, only the horizontally oriented segment at the center in the vertical direction lights up during symbol variation. Note that the black parts indicate the locations of the lit segments.

  Further, between FIGS. 120 (A) and (A), it is shown that the game ball B is about to pass through the common view starting opening 228. Further, in FIGS. 120 (), (), 121 (), 122 (), 122 (), 123 (), 124 (), 124 () or (e), The electric chew (the second special view start port 232 and the pair of blade members 232a) is shown.

  Further, a special view 1 suspension display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special view 2 suspension display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a common drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the above-mentioned predetermined area is provided between the special view 1 reserve display area 281 and the special view 2 reserve display area 282. That is, a common drawing effect area 283 is provided in the central portion of the effect display area 208d.

Even in the special view 1 reserve display area 281 or the special figure 2 reserve display area 282, the reserve icon is displayed closer to the common drawing effect area 283 (center side) as the older reserve icon. That is, the first hold icon representing the first hold with the oldest winning timing in the hold of Special Figure 1 is displayed next to the left of the regular drawing effect area 283, and in the special figure 2 hold, the first prize timing is the oldest. A second hold icon representing 2 hold is displayed on the right of the regular drawing effect area 283. In the special view 1 reserve display area 281 shown in FIG. 120 (A), one special view 1 reserve icon (first special figure 1 reserve icon) 2811 indicating that there is one reserve of the special view 1 is shown. It is done. The default mode of the special view 1 hold icon is a black circle. The first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is displayed on the left of the regular drawing effect area 283. Also, a special figure 2 reserve icon (first special figure 2 reserve icon) 2821 showing that there is one reserve of special figure 2 in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 shown in FIG. It is shown. The default mode of the special view 2 hold icon is a white circle different from the default mode of the special view 1 hold icon so that it can be distinguished from the special view 1 hold icon. The first special view 2 reserve icon 2821 is displayed on the right of the regular drawing effect area 283.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The state shown in FIG. 120 (a) is a non-power support state, there is no hold of the special view 2, and in the state where one hold of the special view 1 is left, the first special view display device 212 displays symbol variation display In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 is performed. On the other hand, the common drawing display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, and the symbol of the common drawing decoration 3 of the out which is the previous result is still displayed in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 . It should be noted that there may be a case where no symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 when the common drawing display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display.

  In this case, since the player is in the non-power-supporting state, the player has made a left strike, and eventually, the game ball B of one ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228 provided in the left area. Then symbol variation display is started.

  In the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is started. The variation display pattern of the decorative symbol in the common drawing here is the variation display pattern shown in (A) of FIG. In addition, in this decorative symbol display device 208, as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 1, a character C1 of a rose flower imitating a cactus appears. The character C1 is largely displayed beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display in the common view display device 210 can be visually recognized well. Note that the whole of the common drawing effect area 283 may be hidden by the character C1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c), the character C1 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 develops into reach effect. Since the character C1 disappears, the symbol variation display in the common drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (D), the variable symbol display of the special symbol 1 develops into a super reach, and the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1 is small at the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 The character C2 of the maid appears as an effect of super reach. Super reach itself is a kind of big hit notice, the production of the super reach also corresponds to the big hit notice production. The character C2 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the variable display is performed. As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing becomes difficult to see again, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display in the common view display device 210 can be visually recognized well. Note that all of the common drawing effect area 283 may be hidden by the character C2. In addition, when developing into super reach, the hold icon (here, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811) that has been displayed so far disappears. Here, although a part of the common drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character C2, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing 1 is not moved to the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, A part may be concealed by the change display of the decorative symbol of Toku-zu 1. The mode of hiding a part or all of the common drawing effect area 283 by the change display of the special figure decorative symbol is not limited to during the super reach but may be any timing during the change display of the special view.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (e), a disappointing effect is given to tell that the decorative symbol to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 7 with the appearance of the female character C2 At 120 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and at the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6—decemb -"Decoration 6" is displayed stopped. On the other hand, the symbol variation display on the common drawing display device 210 is also finished, and although it is in the non-power support state, the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, and even in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The variable display is finished, and the ordinary drawing decoration 2 corresponding to the ordinary drawing B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric power is released.

  In FIG. 120 (k), the electric tuong open is started, and in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric tuw open notification effect (a character of the lord is a piece shown in FIG. An effect of displaying a decorative symbol being signed is executed. In addition, the reserve of the remaining one special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display is started in the first special view display device 212, and the variation display of the decorative symbol in the special figure 1 is started in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 120 (G), the game ball enters the electric chew that is in the open state for 5 seconds, and the reserve of the special figure 2 increases by one. Display of one special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 (first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821) representing that there is one reserve of special figure 2 in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is started. Further, the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the off Stop display.

  Next, the first hold of the special view 2 represented by the first special view 2 hold icon 2821 shown in FIG. 120 (g) is digested, and symbol variation display is started in the second special view display 214, and the decorative symbol display 208 In this case, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is started. In addition, in electric Chu, opening for 5 seconds is continued, two game balls enter electric Chu, the retention of Toku 2 increases by two. The first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 are shown in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold icon 2822 is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C3 of a princess appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 2. This character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the electric Chu open notification effect is performed. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect in the decoration pattern of the common drawing, and the interest of the game is improved. That is, by the predetermined effect (big hit advance effect) of the special view 2 based on the entry of the electric chew open, the popular drawing effect (here, the electric chew open notification effect) is difficult to be recognized visually. The effect (in this case the big hit advance effect) to be performed during the symbol change (during the change of the decorative symbol of the special figure) of the special figure that occurs when winning during the electric chew is more the player than the electric chew open notification The interest of the game may be improved by making it difficult to visually recognize the other (here, the electric Chu open notification effect) by giving priority to the effect in which the player is interested. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 119 (d), in the symbol change of the special view 2 performed here, the 15R special jackpot advantageous for the player is more likely to occur than the symbol change of the special view 1. In some cases, it may be possible to make the character C3 that notices the occurrence of an advantageous big hit noticeable. Note that all of the common drawing effect area 283 may be hidden by the character C3. On the other hand, in the common drawing display device 210, although the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, the common drawing display device 210 can be visually recognized well.

  In FIG. 121 (k), the opening for 5 seconds of the electric chew is finished, and the electric chew returns to the closed state. In addition, the electric chew open notification effect in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (co) is also ended, and no symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 here. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character C3 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into reach effect. By the disappearance of the character C3, although no symbol is displayed, the common drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the meantime, between FIG. 120 (A) and FIG. 121 (C), the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228, and the holding of the common drawing is stored.

  While symbol variation display is started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 121 (sa), any symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (sa). In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design of the common drawing is non-execution. This is because, in the determination in step S602 shown in FIG. 118, the common drawing determination result included in the common drawing change start command is the common drawing A and thus it is determined that the common drawing effect is not performed. . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into a super reach, and a maid character C2 appears as a super reach effect. This character C2 is also displayed large beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283, making the common drawing effect area 283 difficult to see The interest of the game is improved. Although any symbol is not displayed in the common drawing effect area 283, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (ii), with the appearance of the female character C2, a big hit notification effect is given to tell that the decorative symbol to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 7, In FIG. 122 (S), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished, and the special symbol A which is the 15R special big hit symbol is displaying the stop symbol, and the special symbol A in the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” which is a combination of the decorative designs corresponding to is displayed stopped. Also, the symbol variation display on the common drawing display device 210 is also finished, and the common drawing A is stopped and displayed, but in the common drawing effect area 283, the variation display of the decorative drawing of the common drawing is not performed, and the common drawing display Even if the symbol variation display on the device 210 is finished, no symbol is displayed. As a result of the stop display of the common view A on the common view display device 210, the electric chew short open is performed, but there is no ball entering during one open period of 0.3 seconds, and the special view 2 There is no change in the number of pending calls.

  Eventually, the 15R big hit game is started, and the player switches from left to right. In FIG. 122 (D), the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 1R's eye is shown. In the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208, a jackpot effect in which a panda character appears is performed. Further, during the big hit game, the hold icon (here, the first special view 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special view 2 hold icon 2822) which have been displayed so far disappears, and a predetermined area (here, the common drawing effect area 283 is included) Then, in the lower area including the popular drawing effect area 283 and the special view 1 reserved display area 281, an effect different from that of the ordinary drawing effect (first effect) is performed. In this example, the character "one consecutive villa" is displayed in the special view 1 reservation display area 281, and the face of the character in one consecutive villa is displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283. It has been done. By doing this, the regular drawing effect area 283 can be used effectively. Further, even during the big hit game, as long as there is a hold of the common drawing (as long as there is an entry into the common drawing start port 228), the symbol variation display on the common drawing display device 210 is performed. However, in the common drawing effect area 283, the notification of the number of consecutive blocks is performed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is not performed (see step S603 shown in FIG. 118). In the spread diagram display device 210 shown in FIG. 122 (d), symbol variation display is started. In addition, the effect different from the regular drawing effect performed in the lower area is the remaining round number notification effect, the current round (digestion round) number notification effect, the attacking ball number notification effect, the attacking open time remaining notification, the attacking open time It may be a notification effect or an effect for winning an award for an attacker. In addition, even during a big hit game, the reserve icon may be displayed without erasing, and an effect different from the regular drawing effect (e.g., a notification of the number of consecutive times in a row) may be performed only in the regular drawing effect area 283 Alternatively, this may be performed only in the area next to the regular drawing effect area 283 (for example, the hold display area). Furthermore, even during a big hit game, a common drawing effect may be performed in the common drawing effect area 283 if, for example, the common drawing effect executability lottery is won.

  A state of the decorative symbol display device 208 for the eighth R is shown in FIG. In this decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot effect is continued and the notification of the number of consecutive units is also continued. Further, in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 122 (f), the symbol variation display which has been performed so far is ended, and the common drawing B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric power is released.

  In FIG. 122 (T), the electric chu-long opening is started, and in the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chu-opening informing effect is An effect is displayed in which a decorative symbol of which the character is piece-signing is displayed (see step S605 shown in FIG. 118). That is, since the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is not performed in the common drawing effect area 283, the electric chow open notification presentation is suddenly started. During the opening of the electric tube long, four game balls enter the electric tube and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by four. However, the hold icon is not displayed during the big hit game.

  FIG. 122 (ta ') is a figure which shows the modification of the figure (ta), and FIG. 122 (ta') does not perform the electric Chu open notification production in the common drawing effect area 283, but the sound from the speaker 120. The electric Chu open notification effect is performed to tell that the electric Chu is open. In the spread map effect area 283 shown in FIG. 122 (Ta ′) in which the electric Chu open notification effect is not performed, the informing effect on the number of consecutive times is continued. In addition, since there is more award balls in the direction of the attacker than in the electric chow, there may be a case where it is not necessary to perform any positive electric chow open notification effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (h), the end effect of the big hit game is performed, and it is notified that the jackpot is promoted to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. The symbol variation display is also started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 123 (h).

  FIG. 123 () shows the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. The special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 represents the number of reserve figures of the special figure 2 that is increased by entering the electric chew at the timing of FIG. 122 (T) when the big hit game is over. The first to fourth special view 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed.

  In the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (T), a character display of "in the middle of positive variation" is performed to indicate that it is in the positive variation state. That is, an effect of notifying game information is performed. In addition, the electric support state continues until the next big hit. Further, in FIG. 123 (T), the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol of the special view 2 is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the common drawing display device 210 which has been performing the symbol variation display until now performs the stop display, and the common drawing display 210 of the common drawing display 210 shown in FIG. There is. The symbol change display of the common view stopped and displayed here is a symbol change display performed over the big hit game, and is a symbol change display notifying the result of the success / failure determination of the common view in the non-electric support state during the big hit game. is there.

  Furthermore, in the regular drawing effect area 283, the regular drawing effect is not performed because it is in the power support state (see step S601 shown in FIG. 118), and the common drawing effect area 283 functions as a display area of the digestion holding icon. There is. That is, the first special view 2 reserve icon 2821 representing the first reserve of the special view 2 started here is a separate drawing area from the special view 2 reserve display area 282 together with the symbol variation display of the special view. It moves to 283 and then disappears in the popular drawing effect area 283 before the symbol variation ends. Further, in the special view 2 reserve display area 282, the reserve icon which has been the second special figure 2 reserve icon 2822 is shifted to the first special figure 2 reserve icon display position which is next to the right of the popular drawing effect area 283. The movement is performed, and the hold icon subsequent to the second special view 80 hold icon 2823 is similarly shifted to the left by one. In addition, the time (second movement completion time) to move to the common drawing effect area 283 (second area) where the digestion / retention icon which has been the first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 until now becomes the display area of the digestion / retention icon Is a special icon 2 pending display area 282 (first area), the undigested pending icon (the pending icon which was the second to fourth special view 2 pending icon 2822-2824 so far) is the special The time to move to another position in the hold display area 282 (first movement completion time) is different. Also, in order to show the player the holding icon (digestion holding icon) corresponding to the change for a long time and strongly impress that one holding has been made, the second movement completion time is the second movement completion time. It is preferable to be longer than one transfer completion time. Furthermore, although the common drawing effect area 283 is a common destination of the digestion holding icon of Toku-zu 1 and the digestion holding icon of Toku 2, the common drawing effect area 283 is divided into two, The moving destination of the icon and the moving destination of the digest icon in Special Figure 2 may be provided separately.

  In FIG. 123 (g), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols of the off-set. -"Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the common drawing display device 210, symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing is started. The first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 (digestion reserve icon) moved to the popular drawing effect area 283 disappears, and in the power support state, the probability figure of almost power Chu Long will be elected, so Even when the symbol variation display is started at 210, the common drawing effect is not performed (see step S601 shown in FIG. 118).

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started again, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special view 2 is started again in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. On the display device 208, a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the special hit of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283, and the part of the head is called "during change". It hides part of the character display (game information notification effect). In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 123 (na), the display mode (here, the face of the panda) of the jackpot notice (including a fake jackpot notice) in the variation different from the display mode of the digestion / retention icon 2820 (Display mode), but it is difficult for the character C3 to visually recognize, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the digest reserve icon 2820 changes the display mode during the movement to the common drawing effect area 283 or after the movement is completed. Further, the game information notification effect is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, on the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 123 (na), the common drawing B of the open electric Chu-long is stopped and displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (D), the character C3 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into reach effect. Since the character C3 disappears, the big hit notice by the digestive reserve icon 2820 in the popular drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well. In FIG. 123 (D), the electric Chu-long opening is started, but in the electric support state, since the electric Chu-long opening is almost stochastically won, the electric Chu-open notification effect is not performed either (Fig. Refer to step S601 shown in 118). During the opening of the electric tube, the game ball enters the electric tube, and the reservation of the special figure 2 becomes full (four).

  Although symbol variation display is started in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 123 (N), no symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283, and variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is not executed. is there. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into a super reach, and a maid character C2 appears as a super reach effect. This character C2 is also displayed large beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283, making the common drawing effect area 283 difficult to see There is. Although any symbol is not displayed in the common drawing effect area 283, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (ne), with the appearance of the female character C2, a big hit notification effect is given to tell that the decorative symbol to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 6, In FIG. 124 (no), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished, and the special symbol D which is the 15R normal big hit symbol is displaying the stop symbol, and the special symbol D in the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. “Decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the above, is stopped and displayed. Further, although the symbol variation display is ended in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 123 (ne) and the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, in the common drawing effect region 283, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is performed. Even if the symbol variation display on the common view display device 210 ends, no symbol is displayed. As a result that the drawing B is stopped and displayed on the drawing display device 210, in FIG.

  Eventually, the 15R big hit game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (ha), the end effect of the big hit game is performed, and it is reported that it is promoted to the power support state (time saving state) after the big hit game is over ing. In the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 124 (C), symbol variation display is performed.

  In FIG. 124 (h), the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game is shown. Moreover, the common drawing display device 210 which has been performing the symbol variation display until now performs the stop display, and the common drawing display 210 of the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. There is. The symbol variation display of the common view stopped and displayed here is also a symbol variation display performed across the big hit game, and is a symbol variation display notifying the result of the success / failure determination of the common view in the non-electric support state during the big hit game. is there. The control state shown in FIG. 124 (h) is the power support state, and even if the notification of the result of the propriety determination of the common drawing in the non-power support state, the common drawing effect is not performed. However, you may perform a common drawing effect here.

  In the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (f), a character display of "time saving" is displayed indicating that it is in the power support state. That is, an effect of notifying game information is performed. Further, in FIG. 124 (f), the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol of the special view 2 is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the symbol variation display is also started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 124 (F). Furthermore, if 15R normal big hit is won, the power support state is maintained until the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 100 times after the big hit game end, in the state shown in Figure 124 (F), the special figure of the first special figure Since the variable display is started, the remaining number of times the power support state is maintained is 99 times. In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (F), since the display is in the power support state, even if the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing by the common drawing display device 210 is started, the common drawing effect is not performed. The remaining number of states is displayed. That is, in the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (f), an effect of notifying the game information is performed. Since the opening of the electric chow can occur normally during the electric support state, etc., the interest of the game may be improved by displaying the remaining number of electric support states instead of the popular drawing effect.

  In FIG. 124 (f), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decoration symbols of the off-set. -"Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, even in the common drawing display device 210, the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing ends, and the common drawing B of the power long open is stopped and displayed, but in the common drawing effect region 283, the symbol fluctuation display in the common drawing display device 210 No symbol is displayed even though the is finished. As a result that the drawing B is stopped and displayed on the drawing display device 210, as shown in FIG. 124 (e), the electric telephone is released and the reservation of the special drawing 2 becomes full. Further, in FIG. 124 (e), the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started again, and the remaining number of times the power support state is maintained is 98 times. The numeral 98 is displayed in the spread diagram effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (e).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (ma), a character C3 of a princess appears as an effect of the big hit advance notice of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 and the part of the head is called "time-scene-time". It hides part of the character display (game information notification effect). Also in the game information notification effect (number 98) displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (ma), the game information notification effect displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208 (character display of "time" is displayed ) Is also difficult to view by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Subsequently, an example of the effect including the pre-read effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect that includes the pre-read effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 125 (a) is the non-power support state, there is no hold of the special view 2, and in the state where one hold of the special view 1 is left, the first special view display device 212 displays the symbol variation display. While the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the special symbol 1 reserve display area 281, the first special figure 1 reserve icon 2811 is shown in the default display mode. It is done. Further, symbol fluctuation display is performed in the common drawing display device 210, and in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is started.

  FIG. 125 (b) shows that the game ball B has entered the first special view starting opening 230, and the special view 1 reserved display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (b). , A second special view 1 hold icon 2812 is additionally displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice different from the default display mode. That is, the hold icon representing the second hold of the special view 1 is being displayed in the display mode of the aged character. The pre-reading notice mentioned here is a notice which starts the notice about the result of the yes-no decision of a special figure before the symbol change start which reports the result of the yes-no decision. More specifically, the start information is prefetched before the start of symbol variation of the special drawing, the result of the success or failure judgment of the special drawing is determined in advance based on the start information, and the result of judgment of success or failure is notified based on the start information Prior to the start of symbol fluctuation, based on the preliminary judgment result, it is foretelling that the judgment result based on the start information will be a big hit, or the special view A or the special view B, and based on the start information Even in the case where the result of determination of acceptance is disapproval or special image I or J is selected, a notice (so-called false) as to whether the result of determination of acceptance based on the start information is a big hit or special image A or special image B Also includes In addition, although the prefetch notice is started from the display start (start mouth opening ball entry timing) of the display of the hold icon here, it is changed from the display mode of the default display mode to the display mode of the preview notice. The display mode may be different from the default display mode and the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the display mode may be changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. For example, it may be changed to the display mode of pre-reading notice at the timing when the reserve icon shifts (the symbol fluctuation start timing of the special figure), or it is changed to the display mode of pre-reading notice by pressing the chance button 136 May be

  Further, in FIG. 125 (i), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols of the off side. "Decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in Fig. 125 (c), symbol variation display by the first special view display device 212 for digesting the first suspension is started, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the special figure 1 decoration The variable display of the symbol has been started. On the other hand, in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 125 (c), the symbol variation display which has been performed until now is finished, the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, and even in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, The variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is finished, and the common drawing decoration 2 corresponding to the common drawing B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric power is released.

  In FIG. 125 (D), the electric chulong opening is started, and in the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chu opening information effect (the decorative pattern in which the character is piece sign is displayed Production is being performed. In this electric Chu open notification effect, the character of the statue is displayed large beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, enters the special view 1 hold display area 281, and the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the display of the advance notice) Hiding part of the mode's hold icon). As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view. In this manner, when the player is able to make the player interested in the trend of the regular drawing effect by daringly hiding the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 whose display mode has changed to the preliminary notice mode. There is. Further, the pre-reading notice is a notice of a future big hit, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation of opening the electric chow by making the current progressive type public presentation stand out. In addition, you may hide all the 1st special figure 1 reservation icons 2811 by electric Chu open notification production. In addition, the character of the lord also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides part of the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 125 (i ') is a figure which shows the modification of a prefetch notice. In FIG. 125 (a), the effect of the advance notice is performed using the display mode of the hold icon, but in FIG. 125 (b), the display of the effect image in which the bowl-like characters are arranged in a large V shape The pre-reading notice effect is performed by the letter indication that pre-reading notice is in progress. Although this preview advance notice effect enters the common drawing effect area 283, a part is hidden by the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing. Note that, on the contrary, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing may be hidden by the advance notice effect.

  FIG. 125 (U ') is a figure which shows the modification of the aspect of the common figure decorative symbol stopped-displayed. In FIG. 125 (c '), the symbol of the common drawing decoration 2 stopped and displayed is displayed larger than the common drawing effect area 283, and enters the special drawing 1 holding display area 281, and the first special drawing 1 holding icon 2811 ( Here, part of the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is hidden. As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view, and the interest of the game is improved. Note that all of the first special view 1 suspension icons 2811 may be hidden by the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing or the common drawing decoration symbol displayed by the stop display. In addition, the stop-displayed regular drawing decoration 2 also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 125 (D ') is a figure which shows the modification of electric Chu open notification production. In the electric Chu open notification effect in FIG. 125 (E '), the character of Tonosama is displayed large beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and enters the special view 1 suspension display area 281. Is hidden by the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice). In addition, the character of the lord enters the middle symbol display area 208b, but a part of the character of the lord is hidden by the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result of these, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect.

  In addition, the advance notice by the hold icon is a kind of continuous notice continuously performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. In the special figure 2 priority variable machine, while executing the continuous notice about the special figure 1, the symbol change indication of the special figure 2 may interrupt, but even with the symbol change indication of the special figure 2 which has been interrupted, the continuous notice is continued . That is, the special figure 1 reserve icon is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted even if the symbol variation indication of the special figure 2 is interrupted before the reserve digestion of the special figure 1 reserve icon. Also, the special view 1 hold icon continues to be displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. In the example shown in FIG. 125 (D '), the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 of the display mode of the advance notice is making it difficult to visually recognize a part of the electric Chu open notification effect, and the player's In some cases, it is possible to make the advance notice noticeable and maintain the expectation for the big hit while maintaining the expectation.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect in which a big hit notice is mixed with a regular drawing effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is a non-electric support state, and "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of out-of-round decorative designs, is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, although the common drawing display device 210 performs symbol variation display, in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the design of the common drawing decoration 3 of the out of the previous result is still displayed. , The variation display of the decoration figure of the common figure is not done.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 126 (A), symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started. When the symbol variation display of this special drawing is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is started also in the common drawing effect region 283. That is, according to the change of the special drawing (the change display of the decoration symbol of the special drawing), the common drawing effect (the change display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing) is started.

  In FIG. 126 (C), the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing in the common drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character display effect of "super heat" which is a kind of the big hit notice effect of the special drawing. That is, the jackpot notice effect of the special view here is displayed over the lower area including the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect is difficult to see. Here, the character display effect of "super heat" is a notice before reaching, and may be an effect of giving notice that the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into reach. In addition, the pattern of the variable display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing here is a character display of "super heat" which is a kind of big hit notice production of the special drawing shown in (e) of Fig. 117 (b). It is a change display pattern included in the change. In the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, the character display of "super heat" is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram step by step showing an example in which the common drawing effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 117 (b) is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 127 (a) is a non-electric support state, and "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of out-of-round decorative designs, is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the symbol variation display is not performed even in the common drawing display device 210, and the symbol of the common drawing decoration 3 of the previous result, which is the previous result, is displayed in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 127 (A), symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started. The symbol variation display is also started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the variation display of the decoration symbol in the common view is started in the common view effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a common drawing effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 117 (b) is performed.

  In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 127 (C), the word display of “latency” representing the advance notice of the 2R jackpot which is the latent definite change of the special drawing is made beyond the general drawing effect area 283.

  In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 127 (D), the word display of “probable” indicating the notice of the 2R big hit which is a sudden definite change of the special drawing is made beyond the general drawing effect area 283.

  In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 127 (E), the character display of "big hit" representing the 15R big hit notice of the special drawing is made beyond the public drawing effect area 283.

  In FIG. 127 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is ended, and the stop symbol is displayed for the second small hit symbol (special view H), and the special symbol display device 208 displays the special figure. "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" corresponding to H is stopped and displayed. Although the symbol variation display is continued in the common drawing display device 210, in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is performed before the end of the symbol variation display of the special drawing. The process is finished, and the character "hidden" is stopped and displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283.

  In this example, the regular drawing effect functions as a big hit notice of the special drawing, but the regular drawing effect of this example is also the effect executed in the common drawing effect area 283.

  Here, the general drawing effect which functions as a big hit notice of the special drawing is in the special drawing 1 holding display area 281 and the special drawing 2 holding display area 282. Therefore, if the first special view hold icon whose display mode has been changed to the pre-read preview mode is displayed in the special view 1 hold display area 281 or the special view 2 hold display area 282, the first special view hold icon is displayed. , Some or all are hidden by the public map effect. The big hit notice (especially the big hit notice of the special figure fluctuation game currently being executed) is the notice that the expectation to the big hit can be ahead of the advance notice (the big hit notice of future special figure change game), and the big hit notice Since it is possible to perform the popular drawing effect including so as to stand out more than the advance notice, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, the character display displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 may be in a mode that fits within the common drawing effect area 283. In addition, the start timing of the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is made so that the end timing of the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing coincides with or slightly before the end timing of the display of the symbol fluctuation of the special drawing. It may be delayed from the symbol variation display start timing of the display device 210.
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of other effects.

  FIGS. 128A and 128B show an example in which the jackpot notice effect is performed by the effect using the effect movable body.

  The pachinko machine in this example is a pachinko machine having the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. In the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A), the common drawing effect is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure is started. Then, after the regular drawing effect is started, a big hit advance effect for giving notice of becoming a big hit in the variable display is performed by the effect movable body 224 provided beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 128 (a) comprises an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating an upper arm and a forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. And a forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to the elbow position. The effect movable body 224 is an accessory capable of moving at least the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. In FIG. 128 (a), the forearm portion 224b pivoted upward covers the spread diagram effect area 283 in which the spread diagram effect is performed, and the spread diagram effect area 283 is hidden by the forearm 224b, Figure production is difficult to see. In addition, the operation of the effect movable body 224 may be accentuated in some cases, and the interest of the game is improved. Three special view 2 reserve icons 282 1-2823 are displayed in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A), but these special figure 2 reserve icons 2821 are displayed. A part or all of each of ~ 2823 is also hidden by the forearm 224b, and the special view 2 holding icons 2821-2823 are difficult to see. In addition, it is possible to use the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 largely to perform a big hit advance presentation effect by the effect movable body 224 and the effect image, and the amusement of the game is improved by the effect of the large scale.

  FIG. 128 (a) is a view showing the situation continuing from FIG. 128 (a), in which the forearm portion 224b is further pivoted upward, and from the front of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the common drawing effect is performed. The forearm 224b disappears. However, instead, an effect image (here, an image of three falling stars) related to the movement of the effect movable body 224 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the popular drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the effect image. Is difficult to see. Also, three special drawing 2 holding icons 282 1 to 2823 are displayed in the special drawing 2 holding display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A), but these special drawing 2 holding icons 2821 A part or all of each of ~ 2823 is also hidden by the forearm portion 224b or the effect image, and the special figure 2 retention icons 2821-2823 are difficult to see. The effect image may be an image displayed before, during or after the effect movable body 224 operates. Also, the effect movable body 224 does not necessarily have to be exposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  It should be noted that after the big hit notice is started by the effect movable body 224, the spread map effect is not executed until the big hit notice is finished. That is, in this example, the predetermined period in step S603 shown in FIG. 118 corresponds to the execution of the big hit advance by the effect movable body 224. By doing this, it may be possible to be noticed by a big hit advance notice by the effect movable body 224.

  In addition, the effect movable body 224 may not perform the operation to the front side (the player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the common drawing effect with only the effect image.

  51 (a) is an example in which the jackpot notice effect is performed by the effect using the tutorial.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (a), tutorial display is performed so as to overlap a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the common drawing effect is performed. In this tutorial display, an explanation is given on a predetermined display (here, the character C1 of the big hit advance notice of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 120 (A) and the like). The common drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the tutorial display image, and the common drawing effect is difficult to see.

  FIG. 128 (I) is an example in which a plurality of effects hide the common drawing effect and the hold icon. In this example, the plurality of effects are two effects, but three or more effects may be provided.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (I), variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing is performed, and the common drawing effect is performed in the common drawing effect area 283, and the first special drawing 1 reservation icon 2811 is It is displayed. Also, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit advance character C1 (first special effect) of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 120 (A) etc. and another new character C4 (second special effect) are displayed It is done. The other new character C4 may be, for example, a notice display of reach development, a notice display of a 15R special jackpot winning, a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the like. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (I), these characters C1 and C4 hide a part of each of the common drawing effect region 283, the reserved icon, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing, It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the hold icon and the variable display of the decoration symbol of the special drawing.
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be supplemented.

  An example in which symbol variation display (second symbol variation display) on a display device (for example, the decoration symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub control means, that is, variation display of the decoration symbol (for example, common drawing effect etc.) is difficult to view In addition to hiding with other effect displays (for example, a big hit notice display, game information display, etc.), other methods are included. For example, light emission etc. may be intense around the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (more remarkable if it is similar color), and it may be relatively difficult to visually recognize, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and other effect display have similar color, etc. Can be difficult to view even if they do not overlap. Moreover, the apparatus in which the variation display of a decorative symbol and another presentation are performed may be separate bodies. For example, main liquid crystal and auxiliary liquid crystal may be used.

  Further, in addition to the case where the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes difficult to be recognized by the other effect display, the other effect display may be constricted visually due to the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, a part of the advance notice may be hidden by the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol, and another effect with low reliability may be difficult to visually recognize by the variable display of the common pattern decorative symbol. If the expectation of the jackpot is low, it may be more interesting for the player to direct the electric chow release.

  In addition, it may be configured to change depending on the situation whether it is difficult to visually recognize other effects or to make the variable display of the decorative symbol difficult to visually recognize. A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to effects that a player can expect, and the other is difficult to view, or a configuration in which priority is given to an effect whose result is derived first, and the other is difficult to view. .

  Other effects include big hit notice, advance notice, reach effect (reach change), indication of gaming state such as latency, etc., but at least a part may be a configuration that makes it difficult to view the change display of the decorative symbol. . For example, although the operation itself of the character is not a configuration that makes the variable display of the decorative symbol difficult to visually recognize by the jackpot notice by the character operation, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol by the simultaneously generated effect image It is also good.

  Moreover, the structure which becomes difficult to visually recognize at least one part of the electric chew open alerting | presentation effect after the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol may be sufficient.

  Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be always performed when the power chew is released for a long time in a non-electric support state, but a matter possibility lottery may be performed and may or may not be performed.

In addition, another effect may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the variation display of the decorative symbol and the hold display (hold icon) at the same time.
In addition, it may be configured to perform variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of opening electric short.

  In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol may not be performed during the power support state, or the variation display of the decorative symbol may be performed during the power support state.

  Moreover, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not only related to the result of the assistance pass / fail judgment (the pass / fail judgment of the drawing), but in addition to the result of the assistance pass / fail judgment, the result of the judgment It may be a variable display in which a notice is mixed.

  In addition, as for the execution frequency of the variation display of the decorative symbol, in addition to comparing in the power support state and in the non power support state, it is the configuration that is influenced by the launch strength (for example, right hit and left hit) on the game You may

  During the big hit game, only the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the common view display device 210) controlled by the main control means may be performed, or in addition, the decoration symbol The variable display of may be performed. Further, during the big hit game, the variation display of the decorative symbol may not be performed, and only the electric chew open notification effect may be performed.

  In addition, it is the constitution of right hitting during the big hit game and the electric support state which is the advantageous state, but during the big hit game may be left hitting, and the combination is optional.

  In addition, although the special figure 2 priority change machine has been described so far, the special order 1 and the special figure 2 win alternately during the winning order change machine and the non-power support state, while the power support state is electric chew It may be a game console which is open and the winning of only Special Figure 2 is permitted. In particular, during power support, it will have the same effect as the priority changer. Moreover, it may be a simultaneous changer.

A so-called tutorial notice in which a big hit notice production is performed by a production using a tutorial may make the variable display of the decorative symbol difficult to visually recognize, or vice versa. For example, the tutorial notice for explaining the decorative symbol in the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is highlighted (in this case, the variable symbol of the decorative symbol becomes difficult to see), and then the decorative symbol related to the explanation is stopped. It is also possible to give an explanation.
Also, the advance notice may be made difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, among the plurality of other effects described using FIG. 128 (I), the first other effect may be configured to be concealed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol can not be seen at all by the player. In addition, the first other effect may hide the first area of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the second other effect may hide the second area. The variable display of the decorative symbol may be configured to simultaneously display a plurality of characters, characters, etc., and at least one of them may be hidden by another effect. In addition, other effects may be hidden.
Moreover, the structure which performs two or more change display of a decorative symbol simultaneously may be sufficient.

As described above, in the example described so far, when one effect hides the other effect, the other effect may hide the other effect even if it is not specifically refused . In addition, when one effect hides a part of the other effect, even if not particularly refused, one effect may hide all of the other effect.
In addition, the term “invisible” includes invisible.

  Furthermore, other effects such as a regular drawing effect and a big hit effect may be effects by sound, effects by light, or effects as shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and (i). It may be an effect by a movable body. In the case of sound effects, the sounds overlap, and one effect hides the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, the other effect becomes difficult to view.

  In the above description, at least the start region (e.g., electric power) in which the state can be changed between the entry easy state (e.g., the open state) and the entry difficult state (e.g., the closed state); For example, it is possible to execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the success / failure determination of a common drawing and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing). If the result of the second success or failure judgment result of the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) is the success or failure judgment of the big hit, the control status is changed from non-big hit control status to big hit control status Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can be transferred to at least the above, and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) that can at least execute effect display The start area is at least a state where the entry difficult state is the entry easy state when the result of the first pass / fail determination is a specific answer determination result (for example, per drawing). The first success or failure judgment means is more likely to derive the particular success or failure judgment result in the power support state than in the non-power support state, and the effect display means is The first effect is an effect (for example, a common drawing effect) including at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success or failure judgment, and the effect display means is A second effect (for example, a big hit advance effect) relating to the result of the second success / failure determination can be displayed at least, and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. , Less of the first stage In any case, it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a part (for example, FIG. 120 (A), FIG. 121 (F), etc.), and the first effect is in the non-electric support state rather than the electric support state. Is an effect that is easy to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 118), It explained about.

  In addition, it is provided with a winning means (or winning area) (for example, an attacker) that can change at least the state between the easy winning state and the hard winning state, and the winning means (or winning area) When the result is a big hit success / failure determination result, at least the state changeable from the hard-to-win prize state to the easy-to-Prize state may be possible.

  Further, the jackpot control state may be a state in which the winning area can be at least changed from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state.

  In addition, it may be an aspect provided with an entry area which can not be changed in state (for example, a first entry area, in other words, a fixed entry area, for example, a spread gate etc.).

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 1st symbol display means (for example, common drawing display apparatus 210) which can perform at least a 1st symbol change display may be sufficient. The first symbol display means may be capable of at least displaying a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the first yes / no determination after the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be such that the operation is suspended when the first suspension condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the first suspension condition is the game ball in the entry area It may be a requirement that has entered. More carefully, the establishment requirement of the first holding condition may be a requirement including at least the game ball having entered the entry area.

  In addition, the second symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) capable of executing at least the second symbol variation display may be provided. The second symbol display means may be capable of at least displaying a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the second success / failure determination after the second symbol variation display is performed. Further, the second symbol display means may be such that the operation is suspended when the second suspension condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second suspension condition is the start area (for example, It may be a requirement that the game ball has entered into the second entry area, in other words, the electric tulip which is a variable entry area). More carefully, the establishment requirement of the second holding condition may be a requirement that at least the game ball has entered the start area.

The aspect provided with the effect display means (for example, sub control means 400, 500) which can control at least the said effect display means may be sufficient.
The first effect may be an effect including at least a change effect and an open effect,

  The change effect is an effect to be executed during a period in which the first symbol change display is performed,

  The opening effect is an effect to be executed after the stop symbol corresponding to the specific (for example, hit) first judgment result is displayed, for example, a period during which the starting area is in the easy entry state. It may be an instruction to be executed in the included period.

Furthermore, the first effect may include a stop display effect executed during a period in which a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the specific first yes / no determination is displayed.
The second effect may be a jackpot notice effect or a preview notice effect.

  “The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means can display at least the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, a popular drawing effect area 283), The image display means can display at least a third effect in a period including at least a part of the non-execution period of the first effect, and the third effect may be the first effect as well. The second effect is also an effect different from the second effect (for example, a game information notification effect displaying the remaining number of power support conditions), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the third effect execution An effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the third effect (for example, FIG. 124 (ma)). I also explained about.

  In addition, the third effect may be a holding icon or display of the number of times of time saving or the number of consecutive units.

  In addition, “the third effect is an effect including at least one of a jackpot notice display (for example, appearance effects of characters C1 to C3) and a game information display (for example, character display“ in the middle of a definite change ”) A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  The jackpot notice display referred to here may be a display for giving a notice that the winning area is changed to the easy-to-win state, and includes a false display. In addition, the jackpot notice display may be a jackpot notice display in which the display is started after the second success or failure judgment is made, that is, the second symbol variation display is started, or the second It may be a pre-reading advance notice display in which display is started before judgment of a yes or no is performed, that is, before the above-mentioned second symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, the game information display referred to here is a display indicating the number of times of short time (the number of remaining times or the number of times of completion of the second symbol variation display in the power support state) It may be

  In addition, “the image display means can execute at least the big hit notice display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the non-electric support state (for example, FIG. 121 (a)). Etc.), the image display means is capable of executing at least the game information display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the power support state (eg, FIG. 123 (te), etc.) ), That the game stand characterized by. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns (for example, a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 117 (b)), and the plurality of effects The effect pattern of one type among the patterns includes at least an image relating to the result of the first success or failure determination (for example, a common figure decorative pattern) and an image of the big hit notice display (for example, a decorative image of "super heat") It is an effect pattern (for example, the fluctuation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 117 (b)) of the fluctuation display for sequentially displaying a plurality of images including the game board. I also explained about.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state; and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display. In the game console provided, the start area is changed from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state when the result of the first pass / fail judgment is a specific pass / fail judgment result (for example, per drawing). At least a state changeable, the effect display means can display at least a first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display related to the result of the first success or failure judgment. (For example, a regular drawing effect), and the effect display means can display at least a second effect (for example, a big hit advance effect) relating to the result of the second success or failure judgment, and the second effect Is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the first effect execution (for example, FIG. 120 (A) or FIG. 121). (E) etc.), Effect of the big hit are demonstrations likely to be performed toward the non-jackpot controlled state than the control state (e.g., step S603 shown in FIG. 118), the amusement machine, characterized in that. It explained about.

  Also, “the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 117 (b)), and the first effect is an effect of the plurality of effect patterns The first effect pattern among them is an effect pattern in which the non-big hit control state is easier to be executed than the big hit control state (for example, the effect pattern other than the electric Chu open notification effect: variation display effect) (FIG. 118) Step S604 and step S605) to show, a game stand characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect pattern is an effect pattern performed over a first period of time (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 117 (b)), and among the plurality of effect patterns, The second effect pattern (for example, the electric chow open notification effect pattern shown in (i) of FIG. 117 (b)) is an effect pattern performed over the second time, and the first time (for example, 15) A game console characterized in that the second) is longer than the second time (e.g., 5.8 seconds). I also explained about.

  "The starting region is an electric tulip, and the electric tulip includes at least a first opening pattern (for example, an electric tuw short opening pattern) and a second opening pattern (for example, an electric tulong opening pattern) The second opening pattern is an opening pattern that is more advantageous for the player than the first opening pattern, and the effect display means is an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening pattern. A game console characterized by at least being capable of displaying the first effect when the electric tulip is opened in the second opening pattern. I also explained about.

  The open pattern advantageous to the player as referred to herein is an open pattern in which the game ball easily enters the electric tulip, in other words, an open pattern capable of acquiring a large number of balls, for example, the open time is long. In the case of a large number of times of opening, or in the case of opening a plurality of times, the opening pattern is such that the total opening time is long or one opening time is long.

  "The effect display means can display at least the first effect in the second effect pattern during the big hit control state (step S605 shown in FIG. 118)," Game console. I also explained about.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state; and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display. In the game console provided, the start area is changed from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state when the result of the first pass / fail judgment is a specific pass / fail judgment result (for example, per drawing). At least a state changeable, the effect display means can display at least a first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display related to the result of the first success or failure judgment. (For example, a regular drawing effect), the effect display means can display at least the advance notice effect concerning the result of the second success or failure judgment, and the first effect is during execution of the advance notice effect A game console characterized in that it is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the previewed announcement effect in a part or all of the period (for example, FIG. 125 (D), etc.). It explained about.

Also, “the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 117 (b)), and the first effect is an effect of the plurality of effect patterns One of the effect patterns includes at least an image relating to the result of the first success or failure judgment (for example, a common figure decorative pattern) and an image of a big hit notice display (for example, a decoration image of "super heat") It is an effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 117 (b)) of a variation display for sequentially displaying images. I also explained about.
One kind of effect pattern said here may be a first effect pattern.

  In addition, “the symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success or failure determination after performing the symbol variation display, and the symbol display means At least a controllable symbol display control unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control unit suspends the operation of the symbol display unit when the suspension condition is established. The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means performs the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, a popular drawing effect area 283). At least displayable, and the image display means can display at least one hold icon (for example, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811) for one hold. The image display means can display at least the hold icon in the hold display area (for example, the special view 1 hold display area 281), and the pre-reading advance notice effect is a display of the hold icon. It is an effect (for example, an example shown in FIG. 125) of changing the mode and displaying the hold icon, and the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns. There is one kind of effect pattern among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect image (for example, the effect image in which the character of the lord is piece-signing) passes the predetermined display area and the hold display area A performance capable of encroaching in and making part or all of the reserved icon displayed in the reserved display area difficult to view by part or all of the effect image Pattern (e.g., FIG. 125 (pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in d)) is, the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  One kind of effect pattern said here may be a second effect pattern or may be the first effect pattern.

  Furthermore, although the present invention is limited to the hold icon here, the pre-read advance notice effect may be an effect that does not use the hold icon, and in this case, the image display means may perform the second display in the second predetermined display area. The preview advance notice effect may be displayed at least.

In addition, after displaying another start area different from the start area (for example, the first special view start port 230) and the symbol change display, at least the stop design corresponding to the result of the second pass / fail determination is displayed A possible symbol display means, one of the symbol display means being a first symbol display means (for example, the first special view display device 212) and one of the symbol display means The second symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) and the first symbol display means can be controlled at least as the two symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) And the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of the game ball, and the symbol display control means is capable of at least controlling the second symbol display means. The above symbol display The control means can at least execute control of the first hold (for example, hold of the special view 1) for holding the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. And the symbol display control means controls a second hold (for example, hold of the special figure 2) to hold the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. And the requirement for establishing the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the gaming ball has entered the separate starting area, and the condition for establishing the second holding condition is: It is a requirement including at least that the ball has entered the start area, and the symbol display control means controls the operation of the first symbol display means to start when the first reserve digestion condition is satisfied. At least viable and before The symbol display control means is at least capable of executing control to start the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserve digestion condition is established, and The establishment requirement is a requirement at least including that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first reserve digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended. The requirement for at least including the fact that the first reserve digest condition is established is a requirement at least including that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means is The image display means is an image display means, and the image display means is configured to display one first hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for a first hold icon in a first hold display area (for example, Fig. 1 Hold The image display means is configured to display at least one second holding icon (e.g., special view 2 holding icon 2821) for one second holding. The image display means is capable of displaying at least in the reserved display area (for example, the special view 2 reserved display area 282), and the image display unit is configured to display the first image in the predetermined display area (for example, the popular drawing effect area 283). The predetermined display area is an area positioned between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, and the first effect is a plurality of types. The effect pattern is one type of effect pattern selected from among the effect patterns, and one type of effect pattern among the plurality of effect patterns is an effect image (for example, the character of the lord is a piece size Effect image) is inserted into the hold display area of at least one of the first hold display area and the second hold display area, beyond the predetermined display area. It is an effect pattern (for example, a pattern of electric chow open notification effect shown in FIG. 125 (D)) which makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area, and the pre-read advance notice effect is the first hold It is an effect (for example, an example shown in FIG. 125) in which the display mode of the icon is changed to display the first reserved icon (the example shown in FIG. 125), and the prefetch notice effect changes the display mode of the second reserved icon. It is an effect that displays a second hold icon, and any one of the first hold icon and the second hold icon is difficult to view by the effect image (e.g. , The pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in FIG. 125 (d)), the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.
A game stand said here is a game stand of a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  Moreover, one kind of effect pattern said here may be a second effect pattern or may be the first effect pattern.

  Further, the predetermined display area referred to here may be an area sandwiched between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, or both hold displays when viewed from the predetermined display area. The regions may be regions provided at mutually offset positions. Further, the first hold display area and the second hold display area may be provided at an interval, and the predetermined display area may be provided at the interval.

  In addition, “the effect display means can display at least a third effect, and the third effect is different from the first effect or the advance notice effect (for example, for the variation) The third effect is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect during a part or all of the period during which the first effect is being executed. A game stand characterized by (for example, FIG. 120 (I), FIG. 121 (K), etc.). I also explained about.

  The third effect referred to here may be an effect (for example, a big hit advance effect) relating to the result of the second success or failure judgment, or an effect representing game information (for example, the number of time reductions, the number of consecutive units, etc.) It may be.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state, and effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 2) capable of at least effecting 4), and the starting area is at least in the entry easy state from the entry difficult state when the result of the first yes / no determination is a specific yes / no determination result. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the effect means can be changed at least, and the effect movable means (for example, the effect means among the effect means). The effect movable body 224) is capable of at least performing a rendering operation, the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a first effect, and the first effect is the first success or failure judgment The effect movable means is an effect (for example, a general drawing effect) including at least an effect display relating to the result of the second operation, and the operation of the second operation related to the result of the second And (A)) is executable, and the effect display means is a related effect display associated with the effect operation of the second effect in the effect movable means (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 128 (A)) Image display), and at least one of the rendering operation of the second rendering and the related rendering display is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first rendering. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect (for example, FIG. 128 (A) and (A)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned. It explained about.

That is, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect by the effect movable device and the related effect display by the effect display device, the effect device is part or all of the first effect being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect in a period.
The related effect display may be an effect image display.

  "The effect means starts the first effect by the effect display means first, and during the execution of the first effect, the effect operation of the second effect by the effect movable means and the action of the second effect" It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect by at least one of the related effect display by the effect display means, and the effect means first performs the second effect. Starting, during execution of the second effect, the first effect by the effect display means is not performed (for example, FIG. 128 (A) and (I)), Stand. I also explained about.

  That is, the first effect is started first, and during the execution of the first effect, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is of the first effect. It is possible to make at least a part difficult to see,

  The second effect is started first, and the first effect is not performed during the execution of the second effect.

  In addition, “the symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success or failure determination after performing the symbol variation display, and the symbol display means At least a controllable symbol display control unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control unit suspends the operation of the symbol display unit when the suspension condition is established. It is possible to at least execute control of (for example, the suspension of the special figure 2), the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means is one suspension icon (for one of the suspension) For example, at least the special figure 2 reserve icon 2821) can be displayed, and the image display means is a reserve display area for the reserve icon (for example, special figure 2 reserve display area 282) , And at least one of the rendering operation of the second rendering and the related rendering display can make at least a part of the hold display area also difficult to view ( For example, FIGS. 128 (a) and (b)), and a game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  “If the result of the second success or failure judgment is a specific second success or failure judgment result, control state transition means capable of at least transition from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state (for example, The big hit control state of the main control unit 300 is such that the pay area can be at least changed from the entry difficult state to the easy entry state, and the first effect is the big hit control It is an effect that the non-big hit control state is easier to be executed than the state (for example, step S603 shown in FIG. 118). I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first success / failure determination means is more likely to derive the specific success / failure determination result in the power support state than in the non-power support state, and the first effect is more than the power support state. The game console is characterized in that the non-power-supporting state is more likely to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 118). I also explained about.

  That is, the power support state may be a state in which gaming balls easily enter the start area, and the non-power support state may be a state in which gaming balls are less likely to enter the start area.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit After performing the symbol variation display with the game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state, at least the stop symbols corresponding to the second judgment result A game console comprising possible symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display The region is capable of at least performing a specific operation when the result of the first success or failure judgment is a specific success / failure determination result, and the specific operation is the entry from the entry difficult state. An operation including an operation of changing the state to an easy state (for example, an opening and closing operation of a pair of blade members, more specifically, an electric chow short opening operation and a electric tuw long opening operation), the effect display means A first effect can be displayed at least, and the first effect includes at least an effect to be performed while the start area performs the specific operation (for example, (see FIG. 117 (b)). And the effect display means can display at least a second effect, and the second effect is an effect display performed during execution of the symbol variation display (For example, the display of at least the characters C1 to C3), and the second effect is at least a portion of the first effect during a part or all of the first effect execution. It is an effect that can be made difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIG. 121 (e), etc.), and a game stand characterized by the above. It explained about.

  Here, the specific operation may be an operation in which the entry difficult state and the entry easy state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy entry state, or the start area It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect before changing the state from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state, or the start area is the entry easy state It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after changing the state to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, after performing the first symbol variation display (for example, the common figure variation display), the first symbol display means (for example, the common figure) capable of at least displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success or failure determination. A display device 210), and the effect display means is, as a first effect, effects (for example, shown in (a) to (f) of FIG. 117 (b)) performed during the first symbol variation display The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the effect during the change, and the effect display means is an effect (for example, confirmed) which is executed during the display of the stop symbol by the first symbol display means as the first effect. The effect display means can at least display an effect (for example, an effect during operation) to be performed while the start area performs the specific operation as the first effect. Even if possible There.

  That is, the first effect may be an effect including at least one of the effect during variation, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means (for example, the first symbol display means as another symbol start means other than the start region (for example, the first special view start port 230) and one of the symbol display means 1) a special symbol display device 212), a second symbol display device (for example, a second special image display device 214) as the symbol display device of one of the symbol display devices, and the first symbol display device At least the controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), the separate start area does not change the accessibility of the game ball, and the symbol display control means The second symbol display means is also at least controllable, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least the second hold control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the gaming ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second holding condition is that the gaming ball is the starting area The second effect is an effect to be performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display (for example, a big hit announcement effect for the variation) A game stand characterized by being. I also explained about.

  The second effect referred to herein may be an effect of variation display of a decorative symbol, which is performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display.

  In addition, "the first symbol display means can display at least the first stop symbol (for example, special figure F) corresponding to the result of the big hit success / failure determination after symbol variation display is performed. The second symbol display means can display at least a second stop symbol (e.g., special image A) corresponding to the result of the big hit acceptance determination after the symbol variation display is performed, When the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, it is advantageous for the player as the big hit control state. A game console characterized in that the jackpot control state is easily started (for example, FIG. 119 (d)). I also explained about.

  Here, the game control means, when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game State), and when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol, the game control means controls the state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit. The control state (for example, 15R special jackpot game state) may be at least transitionable, and the second jackpot control state may be a control state more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, the second symbol display means displayed the second stop symbol than after the first symbol display means displayed the first stop symbol in the pay area (for example, the attacker). The later one may be more likely to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening and closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation having a large number of opening times or an operation having a long opening time may be easily performed.

In addition, “the symbol display control means can at least execute control to start the operation of the first symbol display means when the first reserve digest condition is established, and the symbol display control is performed. The means is capable of at least executing control to start the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserve digest condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserve digest condition is The requirement that the operation of the second symbol display means is at least suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first reserve digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended. And the establishment requirement of the first reserve consumption condition is at least inclusion that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means is the second Judgment of The preview display effect (for example, the effect due to the change of the display mode of the hold icon) related to the result of at least can be displayed, and the effect display means is capable of at least executing continuous preview effect as the preview advance effect. The effect display means can continue at least the continuous advance notice effect during the interrupt symbol change display, and the interrupt symbol change display is performed while the second reserve digest condition is the continuous notification effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by having been established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 of the display mode of the advance notice) is under execution of the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect (for example, the electric Chu open notification effect) in a part or all of the period , FIG. 125 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.
A game stand said here is a game stand of a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

Further, the effect display means can display at least the first effect during execution of the previewed advance effect.
Fourth Embodiment

  Then, the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment has much in common with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and is the same as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment unless otherwise specified. In the following description, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as the symbols used so far. 129 to 144 are, in principle, used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment, the drawings are used. The codes shown in 129 to 144 are given priority. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram showing a success / failure determination table of the special view 1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of the special view 2. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the fourth embodiment, whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the winning probability of the big hit is about 1/320 in the special figure low probability state and about 1/32 in the special figure high probability state. Compared to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a pachinko machine of a spec that is easy to win a jackpot.
Also, in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is not in the special view 2 but only in the special view 1.

  The special drawing determination table is the same as that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 119 (d), and the table set selection table is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The timer number table is also the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  Moreover, the success or failure judgment of the special view may be to derive "big hit", "small hit" or "loss", or to derive "big hit" or "loss". Alternatively, the success or failure determination of the special view may be derived to a special design symbol.

  The preview notice is also executed in the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. Pre-reading advance notice pre-reads start information before starting symbol change of special figure, judges result of yes / no of special drawing based on the start information in advance, notifies symbol change result based on the start information concerned Prior to the start, based on the determination result in advance, it is predicted that the success or failure judgment result based on the start information becomes a big hit, or the special view A or the special view B, and the judgment result based on the start information Even in the case of a loss of appearance or even a special image I or a special image J, a notice as if the result of the judgment based on the start information is a big hit or a special image A or a special image B Also includes.

  FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 preliminary determination table used for predetermining the start information of the special figure 1 in advance, and FIG. 130 (b) is a special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 good or bad prior determination used when prefetching the prior | preceding information of and making prior determination.

The special drawing 1 pass / fail judgment table shown in FIG. 130 (a) is the same as the success / failure judgment table of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 129 (a), and the special drawing 2 pass / fail judgment shown in FIG. The table for use is the same as the table for acceptance determination of the special view 2 shown in FIG. 129 (b). Even if the prior determination is performed using the prior determination table shown in FIG. 130, in the special drawing related lottery process, the pass / fail determination is performed again using the acceptance determination table shown in FIG.
Moreover, in prior determination, it is performed to the prior determination of a special figure.
FIG. 130 (c) is a diagram showing a special-figure prior determination table.

  This special drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 130 (c) is also the same as the special drawing determination table (see FIG. 119 (d)) used in the special drawing related lottery process, but in the special drawing related drawing process, , A special figure determination process using a special figure determination table is performed.

  In advance determination, the advance determination of the special view may not be performed, and the change time of the special view may be determined in advance, and the advance notice may be made based on the determination result of the change time. Alternatively, instead of specifically determining in advance the fluctuation time of the special map, it is possible to predetermine the tendency of the fluctuation time, the tendency of fluctuation time, and the group of fluctuation time, and perform previewing notice based on the result of the prior judgment. May be

In addition, the sub control unit (400, 500) determines, for example, by performing random number lottery or the like whether or not to perform pre-reading advance notice or in what manner to perform pre-reading advance notice.
Subsequently, the determination of whether or not the drawing in the fourth embodiment is true will be described.

  FIG. 131A is a diagram showing a common drawing yes / no determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG.

Also in the common-committee propriety judgment processing in the present embodiment, the time-shortening flag is referred to, and the propriety judgment is performed based on whether the current control state is the power support state. The general drawing control state is a low probability state if the time reduction flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), and is a high probability state if the time reduction flag is on (in the power-supply state) . It is determined based on the common drawing win random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. The Atari probability of the general drawing in the fourth embodiment is about 10% in the non-electric support state (low probability state) and 100% in the electric support state (high probability state). In the power-on state, winning may be made only on the hit.
FIG. 131 (b) is a diagram showing a common drawing determination table.

  Also in the determination of the drawing, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the determination of the drawing is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. In the non-power-supply state, the common drawing determination is performed based on the common drawing determination random value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the fourth embodiment, in the case of the non-power-supply state, the spread diagram A is determined with a probability of 90%, and the spread diagram B is determined with a probability of 10%. The common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 131 (b) shows the open mode of the electric chow corresponding to the common drawing determination result. When the display of the drawing A is stopped on the drawing display device 210, the electric chow is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (electric chow short is open). On the other hand, when the normal view B is stopped and displayed on the normal view display device 210, the electric chew is opened for a maximum of 6 seconds (the open the electric tube long). In addition, electric chew will be closed at that time, when there is a predetermined number of balls (here 10 balls) before the predetermined opening time passes.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, if it is in the power support state, it is always determined to the common figure B. Therefore, the lottery based on the common drawing determination random number value is not performed. Even when the drawing B is stopped and displayed on the drawing display device 210 in the power-on state, the electric chow is opened for 6 seconds at maximum (electric tu-long open). Here, when the normal view B is stopped and displayed on the normal view display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the electric Chu is opened up to the first time (for example, 4 seconds) and the general view is displayed in the electric support state. If the display 210 is stopped and displayed on the device 210, the electric chew may be opened up to a second time (for example, 6 seconds).

  Further, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the common drawing is out, it becomes the common drawing C, and therefore the lottery based on the common drawing determination random value is not performed.

In the fourth embodiment, only in the power support state, the general-compliance judgment will be won by a hit, but even in the non-power-supply state, it may be won by a hit (or sure). In this case, in the non-power-supporting state, when the normal drawing A is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the electric charge is opened only for a maximum of 0.1 seconds.
FIG. 131 (c) is a diagram showing a common drawing timer table.

  As shown in the common drawing timer table of FIG. 131 (c), also in the fourth embodiment, regardless of the common drawing symbol, the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing is uniformly 20 seconds in the non-electric support state (generally It is a figure timer 1), and it is uniformly 1 second (common figure timer 2) uniformly in the power support state. As described above, since the symbol variation time of the non-power support state is longer than that of the power support state in the non-power support state, it is possible to perform long effects during the symbol variation display of the non-power support state. There are times when you can.

  A plurality of types of symbol fluctuation time of a common drawing in the non-power-supply state may be prepared, and the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing in the non-power-supply state may be determined by random number lottery from among them. In addition, a plurality of types (two or three or more types) of symbol variation time of a drawing can be prepared in the power support state, and a common drawing in the power support state is selected by random number lottery from among them. The symbol variation time of the figure may be determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation time may be prepared for each common drawing, and furthermore, the symbol variation time longer than the common drawing A may be selected more easily for the common drawing B. By doing this, it becomes easy to perform turning effects before stop-displaying the common drawing B. On the other hand, the symbol variation time shorter than the common figure A may be selected more easily for the common figure B. By doing this, it is possible to make the player more advantageous.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the predetermination of the common drawing is also executed based on the satisfaction of the start information acquisition condition of the common drawing. The establishment requirement of the start information acquisition condition of the common drawing referred to herein is a requirement established based on the game ball having passed the common drawing start opening 228. That is, in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that holds when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting port 228, and in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is the predetermined upper limit number, This is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball passes through the common drawing start port 228. The prior determination of the common drawing is the same process as the prior determination of the special drawing.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a diagram showing a common drawing in-advance prior determination table used when prefetching the start information of the common drawing and making a priori determination.

The common drawing preliminary decision table shown in FIG. 132 (a) is the same as the common drawing propriety check table shown in FIG. 131 (a). Even if the prior determination is performed using the prior determination table shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the common drawing related lottery process, the yes / no determination using the common drawing suitability determination table shown in FIG. 131 (a) is performed again. It will be.
In addition, in the prior determination, the prior determination of the common drawing is performed.
FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram showing a common drawing prior determination table.

  Although the common drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 132 (b) is the same as the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 131 (b), the common drawing determination lottery process uses the common drawing determination table again. The common map determination process is performed.

  Subsequently, a common drawing effect determination process executed by the first auxiliary control unit 400 in the fourth embodiment will be described using FIG. 133 (a).

  FIG. 133 (a) is a flow chart showing a flow of common drawing effect determination processing in the fourth embodiment.

  The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 133 (a) is also started when the first secondary control unit 400 receives a common drawing change start command from the main control unit 300. The common drawing fluctuation start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not it is the power support state), and the common drawing determination result.

  First, it is determined whether it is in the prohibited period of the regular drawing effect (step S611). The prohibited period referred to here is a period during power support. Note that this prohibited period may include at least one execution period of the specific effects described later. If the prohibition period (during power support) is in progress, this common drawing effect determination processing is ended, and the common drawing effect (first effect) is not performed. Since the game support state is a state in which the game ball is easy to win in the electric chow, there is a possibility that the expectation of the player does not improve so much even if the game drawing effect is performed. However, if during the power support, the regular drawing effect is not uniformly performed, but even during the power support, if the lottery with the predetermined probability is won, the common effect is executed. May be

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period (if it is not during the non-power support), it is determined whether the general drawing effect execution condition is satisfied (step S612). The establishment requirement of the common drawing effect execution condition is a requirement established by being elected to the common drawing B shown in FIG. 115 (c). It should be noted that when the common drawing B is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, power-on-long opening is executed, and this common drawing effect execution condition corresponds to a true common drawing effect execution condition. In addition, it is a requirement that holds true that the player is elected to the drawing A shown in FIG. 115 (c) and is elected for the effect executability lottery of the first probability (for example, 1/10). When the common drawing A is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the electric chow short release is executed, and this common drawing effect execution condition corresponds to the execution condition of false common drawing effect for the electric tuy long open. However, it corresponds to the execution condition of true popular drawing effect for the electric Chu open. Furthermore, it is a requirement that holds true even when the player wins the drawing C shown in FIG. 115 (c) and wins the second probability (for example, 1/100) effect execution possibility lottery. The first probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the second probability or may be a probability higher than the second probability. When the common drawing C is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the electric chow is not opened but remains closed, and the common drawing effect execution condition corresponds to a false common drawing effect execution condition. It should be noted that although here the common drawing effect execution condition is always satisfied if the common drawing B is won, even if it is satisfied that the third probability (for example, 1/2) of the effect execution availability lottery is won Good. The third probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the first probability, or may be a probability higher than the first probability. If the general drawing effect execution condition described above is not satisfied, this general drawing effect determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the general drawing effect execution condition is satisfied, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S613). The establishment requirement of the predetermined condition said here is the requirement established by the specific effect being executed. As specific effects, effects during the big hit game, effects with high expectation of the big hit during the symbol change of the special figure (for example, super reach, advance notice effect), forced effects that occur every predetermined time, right-handed or button pressed And the like, and effects such as those prompting the button depression of each of the plurality of buttons. The above-mentioned forced rendering is a rendering performed by moving a decorative symbol to a corner if the symbol of the special drawing is changing, and a rendering performed during the demonstration rendering if it is under demonstration. In addition, the effect of prompting the user to press the button may be, for example, an effect of informing the timing of the button pressing for each button, an effect of informing the button pressing acceptance period, or the remainder of the button pressing acceptance It may be an effect of notifying a period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first common drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S614), and the common drawing effect determination process ends, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. The second common drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S615), and the common drawing effect determination process ends. The general drawing effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 90A, and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the general drawing instruction. Based on the rendering command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled, and a common drawing effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing effect based on the first common drawing effect command is an effect performed over a relatively long time, and the common drawing effect based on the second common drawing effect command is performed over a relatively short time It is an effect. For example, the start time of the popular drawing effect based on the second common drawing effect command is later than the start time of the popular drawing effect based on the first common drawing effect command, and the effect time becomes short. That is, the presentation time becomes shorter in the case of starting the regular drawing effect during the specific effect execution than in the case of starting the regular drawing effect during the specific effect non-execution. By doing this, it is possible to make various effects and to enhance the interest of the game in some cases. In addition, when a specific effect (for example, a big hit advance notice) is being executed, the player can be made to draw the attention of the specific effect by shortening the effect time of the regular drawing effect, and the general drawing effect including the result display In some cases, it is easy for the player to recognize the stop display of the common pattern, and it may be possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, 0 second is also included in the short presentation time said here, and in the case of 0 second, a common drawing production is not performed. In the case of 0 seconds, the second common drawing effect command may not be transmitted, or the second common drawing effect command may be a cancel command. Furthermore, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first drawing-up effect command is not set uniformly, but a lottery is performed in step S614, and the second drawing-up is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). The figure rendering command may be set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment as well, the spread map effect is more easily performed in the non-power-supporting state than in the power-supporting state. In the non-electric support state, since the gaming ball is difficult to win in the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected to win the game balls in the electronic chew by executing the common drawing effect.

  FIG. 133 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the predetermined area advance announcement effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The predetermined area referred to here is a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208, and corresponds to, for example, a special-characteristic hold display area. Also in the fourth embodiment, the special view reservation display area is provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as the third embodiment described above. However, in the third embodiment, a general drawing effect area provided with a special drawing 1 and a special drawing 2 holding display area in which a common drawing effect is performed is referred to as a predetermined area. In the embodiment, the special view 1 reserve display area or the special view 2 reserve display area is referred to as a predetermined area. In addition, the predetermined area in the fourth embodiment is not limited to the special view reserve display area, and may be an area including a close area or an adjacent area to the area in which the common drawing effect is performed.

  The predetermined area advance notice effect determining process shown in FIG. 133 (b) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special view hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The notice effect referred to here corresponds to the jackpot notice effect of the special feature. The jackpot notice effect of the special view here is the advance notice notice effect based on the prior determination result described using FIG. In addition, even if the first sub control unit 400 receives any of the commands described above, such as a special symbol variation start command, a regular drawing reserve increase command, a regular drawing variation start command, a big hit effect start command, etc. You may do so. In these cases, the notice effect is not limited to the advance notice effect, but may be the notice effect on the stop symbol of the symbol change, or may be the notice effect of giving notice of development to reach. It may be an advance notice effect or the like for giving a notice of shifting to a definite change state or a power support state after the end of the big hit.

  In step S621, it is determined whether or not a prohibited period is in progress. The prohibition period in step S621 is a period in which a regular drawing effect is being performed. If it is during a prohibition period (during a general drawing effect), the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the advance notice effect is satisfied (step S 622). The establishment requirement of the advance notice execution condition is a requirement established by having won the notice execution possibility lottery. If this advance presentation effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if the condition for executing the advance notice effect is satisfied, the predetermined area notice effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S623), and the process proceeds to step S624. The predetermined area preview effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 90A, and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the predetermined area notification command. Based on the area advance notice command, the decoration symbol display device 208 is controlled, and a notice effect is displayed on a predetermined area of the decoration symbol display device 208.

  In step S624, another preliminary announcement effect lottery process is executed, and the predetermined area preliminary announcement effect determination process ends. The other notice effects correspond to the notice effects (including the advance notice) performed outside the predetermined area.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, description will be made using FIG. 134 and FIG.

  FIG. 134 is a time chart showing a flow of an example of the effect in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 135 is a view showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device etc. for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device shown in (A) to (G) of FIG. 135 corresponds to the period of (A) to (G) shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 134, time (t) passes from the left to the right in the figure.

  Under the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135, a common drawing display device 210, a first special view display device 212, and a second special view display device 214, all of which are driven and controlled by the main control unit 300, are shown. It is done. In the diagram used for the description in the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are opposite to those used for the description in the third embodiment, and the first special view The display device 212 is shown on the left side, and the second special view display device 214 is shown on the right side. Also, the common drawing display device 210 is shown on the far right. Furthermore, in the figure used for explanation in a 4th embodiment, the reservation lamp which lights only the number of the number of reservations is shown on each display. That is, four first special view holding lamps 218 are shown on the leftmost first special view display 212, and a second special display 214 on the right (middle) thereof is shown. Four figure reserve lamps 220 are shown, and four regular figure reserve lamps 216 are shown on the rightmost common figure display device 210. The main control unit 300 also controls lighting of these holding lamps. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of pending in the common drawing is also four, the same as the maximum number of pending in the special figure 1 and the maximum number of pending in the special figure 2. In addition, even if it is a common drawing, even if it is a special drawing, the maximum number of holdings may not be aligned, or may not be provided. In the fourth embodiment, as in the case of the third embodiment, only the horizontally oriented segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit, and the black portion is illuminated, as in the case of the symbol used in the third embodiment. Indicates the location of the segment.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 is driven and controlled by the sub control means (here, the second sub control unit 500). A special view 1 suspension display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special view 2 suspension display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a common drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the above-mentioned predetermined area is provided between the special view 1 reserve display area 281 and the special view 2 reserve display area 282. In each reserve display area, the older the reserve icon is displayed on the side of the common drawing effect area 283 (center side), this point is the same as the decorative symbol display device 208 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. Further, the default display mode of the special view 1 suspension icon is a black circle, and when performing pre-reading advance notice effect, the default display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the previewing effect is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the aged character. In addition, a second predetermined display mode (for example, a character different from old people) may be prepared, and may be used according to the reliability of the advance notice. For example, the preview advance notice effect may be performed by displaying the hold icon in the predetermined display mode when the reliability for winning the big hit is low, and in the second predetermined display mode when the reliability is high.

  Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135, on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a, the number display of the number of holdings and the fourth symbol are displayed in one vertical column. That is, at the top, a numeric display 284 representing the number of reservations of the special view 1 is provided, and below that, the fourth symbol 285 of the special view 1 is displayed. Beneath that, a numeric display 286 representing the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is provided, and a fourth symbol 287 of the special figure 2 is displayed below it. Beneath that, there is provided a numerical display 288 representing the number of reserved general drawings, and below that is the fourth symbol 289 of the general drawings. The fourth symbol is for displaying symbol variation, and in the first special view display device 212 at the left end shown in FIG. 135 (a), special symbol variation display is performed, and the other display device 214, 210 is down. The fourth pattern 285 of the special figure 1 is lit in gray, and the other fourth pattern 287, 289 is unlit. In addition, when the display devices 212, 214 and 210 stop and display the big hit symbol and the hit symbol, each fourth symbol 285, 287. 289 lights up in a predetermined color, and during the big hit game and the electric chow opening and closing operation Also, it may keep on lighting in a predetermined color.

  The state shown in FIG. 135 and FIG. 134A is the non-power-supply state, in which the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 and the general drawing is zero. Two reserve icons are displayed in the special view 1 reserve display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (A), and the first special figure 1 reserve icon 2811 representing the first reserve of the oldest winning combination. Is displayed in the display mode of the middle-aged character, and the preview advance notice effect is executed on the left side of the popular drawing effect area 283. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283. The default image 283a is an image displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 when the common drawing effect is not performed. Further, as shown in (a) of FIG. 134, the electric chew is not in operation, and the electric chew (a pair of blade members 232) is in a closed state. As described above, the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 135 (a) displays the symbol variation display of the special view, and this symbol variation display continues beyond the timing of FIG. 135 (g). Do.

  Here, since the player is in the non-power-supporting state, the player has made a left hit, and eventually, three game balls B pass continuously through the popular drawing start port 228 provided in the left area, The number of pendings increases to three. As shown in (A) of FIG. 134, the common drawing display device 210 starts the symbol variation display of the common drawing, and the common drawing effect is also started. The common drawing effect here is a common drawing effect (hereinafter referred to as a first common drawing effect) based on the first common drawing effect command set in step S614 in FIG. 133 (a). The symbol variation display of the common figure is performed for 20 seconds. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (i), the variable display (high speed fluctuation) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing here is performed for 20 seconds, with the variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 117 (b) (repeating the common drawing decoration 1 → common drawing decoration 2 → common drawing decoration 3) . Further, the number display 288 of the number of reservations of the common drawing shown in FIG. 135 (A) is 3, and the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (c) of FIG. 134, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the common drawing, and the confirmation display is performed. That is, the common view display device 210 displays the stop symbol of the common view C (see FIG. 115 (c)) for 0.6 seconds. The term "symbol variation display period" sometimes refers to a period from the start of symbol variation display to the end of finalized display. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (c), following the variation display of the decorative design of the common drawing, the common drawing decoration 3 which is the stop symbol aspect (see FIG. 115 (d)) of the common drawing decorative symbol is 0. It is displayed for 6 seconds. That is, the result display effect of the common drawing is performed. In addition, the first popular drawing effect here refers to the decided result of the common drawing in step S 612 in FIG. 133, performs variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and then performs the result display effect of the common drawing, relative The effect is over a long first time (20.6 seconds). Further, the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing shown in FIG. 135 (c) is turned off when the final display of the common drawing display device 210 is being displayed.

  When the finalized display on the common drawing display device 210 is completed, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), the common drawing display device 210 restarts the symbol variation display of the common drawing, but the common drawing effect is not executed here . That is, by the determination in step S612 shown in FIG. 133, it is determined that the general drawing effect execution condition is not met, so that the common drawing effect is not performed and the false general drawing effect is not performed. A default image 283a is displayed in the spread diagram effect area 283 shown in FIG. Further, the number display 288 of the number of reservations of the common drawing shown in FIG. 135 (D) is 2, and the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (E) of FIG. 134, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing, and a final display of 0.6 seconds is performed. The default image 283a is still displayed in the spread diagram effect area 283 shown in FIG. That is, the result display effect of the common drawing is not performed. In addition, the 4th pattern 289 of the common drawing shown to FIG. 135 (o) is light-extinguishing.

  When the finalized display on the common drawing display device 210 is completed, the common drawing display device 210 starts again the symbol variation display of the common drawing as shown in FIG. . The symbol variation display of the common drawing here is also performed for 20 seconds. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (f), variable display (high speed change) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is started. The popular drawing effect here is also the first popular drawing effect. Also, the number display 288 of the number of reservations of the common drawing shown in FIG. 135 (A) is 1, and the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing is also lit in gray.

  When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the symbol variation display of the common drawing, as shown in (f) of FIG. 134, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the common drawing, and it is determined for 0.6 seconds Display is done. The stop symbol of the common drawing B (see FIG. 115 (c)) is displayed on the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 135 (f), and the fluctuation display of the decorative drawing of the common drawing is shown in the common drawing effect area 283. Subsequently, a common drawing decoration 2 (see FIG. 115 (d)) corresponding to the common drawing B is displayed, and the result display effect of the common drawing is performed. In addition, as a popular drawing effect, a rendering image (here, the effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the popular drawing effect area 283. The effect image 283b enters the special view 1 suspension display area 281, and a part of the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 of the display mode of the pre-reading notice that is the display mode of the middle aged character is hidden by the effect image 283b. ing. As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view. Note that the entire first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 may be hidden by the effect image 283 b.

  Subsequently, as shown in (G) of FIG. 134, the electric tuong release is performed, and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (g), following to the result display effect of the common drawing with the effect image 283b, the electric Chu open notification effect is executed. In the electric cho open notification effect here, a decorative symbol is displayed in which the character of the lord with the balloon “in electric chi open” is in a peace sign. The balloon "in the open state of electric chow" indicates that the player can enter the game ball into the electric chow, and can grasp the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, the hand of the character extends beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, enters the special view 1 reserve display area 281, and the first special view 1 reserve icon 2811 (here, the prefetch warning in the part where the piece sign is made. Hiding part of the display mode hold icon). As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view. This electric Chu open notification effect can also be viewed as one of the result display effects of the common drawing. In addition, you may hide all the 1st special figure 1 reservation icons 2811 by electric Chu open notification production. In addition, a balloon "deep electric chiu" is extended beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and the balloon is in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282.

  In this way, the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 whose display mode has changed to the advance notice is dare to hide the effect image 283 b and the general drawing effect such as the electric thu open notification effect, thereby providing the player with the general drawing effect. There are cases where you can be interested in the trend of Further, the pre-reading notice is a notice of a future big hit, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation of opening the electric chow by making the current progressive type public presentation stand out.

  Here, the first popular drawing effect refers to the result of determining the common drawing in step S612 in FIG. 133, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is performed, and thereafter, the result display effect of the common drawing with the effect image 283b It will be the effect over the relatively long second time (25.6 seconds) which will be performed until the electric Chu open notification effect.

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 135, as shown at (f) in FIG. 134, when the electric power tuong release is completed, the electric power twi opening notification effect is also ended, and the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing is started However, the popular drawing effect is not executed.

  FIG. 136 is a time chart showing a flow following the example shown in FIG. 134, and FIG. 137 is a view showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device etc. for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device or the like shown in (S) to (S) of FIG. 136 corresponds to the period of (S) to (S) shown in FIG. Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 136, time (t) passes from the left to the right of the figure.

  The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being performed in FIG. 135 is finished, and after the stop display of the lost symbol, the first special display mode of the advance notice for previewing which is the display mode of the middle aged character shown in FIG. The suspension of the special view 1 represented by FIG. 1 suspension icon 2811 is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started. In accordance with the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the special drawing 1 is also started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is developed into a super reach. The predetermined condition shown in FIG. 136 is the predetermined condition in step S613 in FIG. 133, and is in the process of satisfying the predetermined condition during the production of a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (sa) shows a state of being developed into a super reach. Super reach itself is a kind of big hit notice, the production of the super reach also corresponds to the big hit notice production. In the super reach effect here, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the reach state moves to the left corner and is displayed small, and the maiden character C2 Will appear. In addition, when it develops into super reach, the hold icon disappears. Note that the display control of the hold icon is performed, and even in the case where the display icon can not be seen by the player, "disappear" or "extinguish" in this specification. This is also true for "hidden" and "hidden". However, the leftmost numerals 284, 286, 286 are not erased (visible). Moreover, each 4th pattern 285,287,289 is also displayed.

  Also in this case, since the player is in the non-power-supporting state, the player has made a left hit, and the three game balls B continuously pass through the common drawing start port 228 provided in the left area. As shown in (a), the common drawing display device 210 starts symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing, and the symbol fluctuation display of this common drawing is performed for 20 seconds. On the other hand, since the popular drawing effect has a predetermined condition established (during super reach), the effect based on the second common drawing effect command set in step S615 of FIG. 133 (a) (hereinafter referred to as the second Although the generic drawing effect is to be executed), at the start of the symbol variation display of the common drawing on the common drawing display device 210, the second common drawing effect is not yet started, and the common symbol shown in FIG. A default image 283 a is displayed in the diagram effect area 283. It should be noted that the general drawing effect area 283 may be erased with the background image which is one of the effects of super reach, and when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the default image 283a is not displayed until the general drawing effect is started. It is also good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 137 (sa), in the character C2 of the super reach, the foot portion hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the common drawing effect is not performed. As a result, the common drawing effect area 283 is difficult to view.

  As shown in (h) of FIG. 136, when the end of the symbol variation display of the common drawing in the common drawing display device 210 approaches (here from 1 second ago), the second common drawing effect is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 Is started. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 137 (ii), fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing here is also the variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 117 (b) (repeating the common drawing decoration 1 → common drawing decoration 2 → common drawing decoration 3) Because the time is short, the number of repetitions is reduced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137 (), when the spread diagram effect is started in the spread diagram effect area 283, the spread diagram effect area 283 hides the foot portion of the character C2 of the super reach this time . As a result, the character C2 is difficult to view. Note that the foot portion of the super reach character C2 may continue to hide a part of the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect area 283 may be the foot part of the super reach character C2. You may not hide it.

  Eventually, as shown in (S) of FIG. 136, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing, and a final display of 0.6 seconds is performed. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 137 (S), the common drawing decoration 2 is displayed for 0.6 seconds following the change display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing, and the result display effect of the common drawing is performed. . Further, as a popular drawing effect, here too, a rendering image (here, an effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the common drawing effect area 283. The super reach character C2 is hidden by the effect image 283b up to the part of the band. As a result, the super reach character C2 is more difficult to view. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In addition, the fluctuation display time (period length of (shi) of FIG. 136) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing in the second common drawing effect is the fixed display time (result display presentation time of the common drawing: period of (s) of FIG. 136) It may be the same as long), may be shorter or longer than the definite display time.

  Subsequently, as shown in (d) of FIG. 136, the electric tuong release is performed, and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 137 (d), following to the result display effect of the common drawing accompanied with the effect image 283b, the same effect as the electric Chu open notification effect shown in FIG. 135 is executed. In the character C2 of the super reach, the right torso portion is concealed by the balloon “in charge of electric chow open” in the electric chow open notification effect. As a result, the super reach character C2 is difficult to view. The electric Chu open notification effect here can also be viewed as one of the result display effects of the common drawing. In addition, you may hide all the characters C2 of a super reach by electric Chu open notification production.

  In addition, the second common drawing effect here refers to the common drawing determination result in step S 612 in FIG. 133 and performs short variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and then displays the common drawing result with the effect image 283 b The effect is performed, and then the electric chow open notification effect is performed, which is an effect for a relatively short third time (for example, 6.6 seconds).

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 137, as shown in FIG. 136 (so), when the electric power tuong open is completed, the electric electric cho open notification effect is also ended, and the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing is started However, the popular drawing effect is not executed.

  In addition, the start time of the second common drawing effect may be changed according to the start time of the symbol variation display of the special drawing, for example, a predetermined period including the start time of the second common drawing effect (for example, 5 seconds before and after) If there is a start of the symbol variation display of the special figure between), the start time of the second popular drawing effect may be controlled to coincide (simultaneously) with the start timing of the symbol variation display of the special figure , It may be controlled to delay from the start time of the symbol variation display of the special figure, or may be controlled to be advanced. Also, in the period of (d) of FIG. 136, an example is shown in which the electric chew continues to open, but in the period of (d) above, the opening and closing of the electric chew (pair of blade members 232a) is performed one or more times It may be performed, and at least a part of the effect display may be common or different between the opening and the opening and the closing and the closing. For example, it may be a peace sign during opening or opening, a goo's signature during closing or closing, or even if it is continued to be peace sign, it is a blue kimono during opening or opening. It may be a red kimono at the time of closing or during closing.

  FIG. 138 is a time chart showing a modified example of the second common drawing effect, and time (t) passes from the left to the right of the figure.

  In the variation shown in FIG. 138 (a), the second popular drawing effect is not performed during the change display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (period of (h)), and the definite display is started (start of period of (t)) ) The second popular drawing effect is started, and even while the electric Chu Long is open (period of (T)), the electric Chu open notification effect (also the result of the common drawing is displayed as a part of the second popular drawing) Perform a kind of production). That is, the second common drawing effect in this modification is configured as only the result display effect of the common drawing, and the working time is a relatively short fourth time (here, 5.6 seconds). In addition, in the case of the common drawing being detached (general drawing C), only the result display effect of the common drawing in the definite display is shown, but since it takes a very short time of 0.6 seconds, the common drawing is broken (general drawing In the case of FIG. C), the second popular drawing effect may not be performed.

  In the second common drawing effect in the modified example shown in FIG. 138 (b), the second during the fixed display (period of (n)) even during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (period of (d)). When the public figure effect is not performed and the electric Chu-long opening is started (start of the period of (N)), the second normal figure effect is started. The effect time of the second popular drawing effect in this modification is a relatively short fifth time (here, 5 seconds). In the case where the common drawing is removed (general drawing C), the second common drawing effect is not executed.

  In step S615 in FIG. 133, any of the second common drawing effect of the third time, the second common drawing effect of the fourth time, and the second common drawing effect of the fifth time. It may be determined by lottery whether the second popular drawing effect of time is to be executed. Moreover, you may prepare the thing of presentation time other than said 3rd time-the said 5th time as a 2nd common drawing effect.

  Moreover, all of the said 3rd time-the said 5th time are shorter than the symbol fluctuation time (here 20 second) of the common figure in a non-power support state. By doing this, it is possible to make various effects and to enhance the interest of the game in some cases. In addition, while it is possible to make the attention of the player pay attention to other effects during the symbol fluctuation display which does not do the common drawing effect, by the fact that the common drawing effect including the result indication is done May be easier to recognize, and may enhance the interest of the game.

  FIG. 139 is a time chart showing an example in which the predetermined condition is changed from the satisfied condition to the non-satisfied condition, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right of the figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (a), even if the state (for example, super reach execution) is not satisfied (for example, the super reach end) from when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol fluctuation display of the common figure starts It is an example which performs the second popular drawing effect decided at time. That is, the same second common drawing effect as the second common drawing effect shown in FIG. 136 is executed (period of (f) to (e)).

  The example shown in FIG. 139 (b) is an example in which the common drawing effect is started from the time when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this example, the predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the symbol variation display of the common drawing, so the second common drawing effect (the second common drawing effect shown in FIG. 136) is started from the beginning of the period of (v). The same as in the However, the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol of the common figure, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common figure is started from the middle of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common figure. Continue the variation display of the decoration pattern of the common figure in the period of (re), then perform the result display effect of the common figure with the effect image 283b (period of (b)), then the electric chow open notification effect Perform (period of (W)).

  In addition, you may add the variation display of the decoration figure of the common figure for the period of (ru), and the display control of the variation display of the decoration figure of the common figure starts from the beginning of the period of (ri), While the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display may not be displayed, and may be displayed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a common view prefetch notice. This generic drawing pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed when there is a common drawing hit in the holding of the common drawing, or in the holding of the common drawing, a hit symbol of a specific symbol (for example, the common drawing B ) May be executed, or may be executed when there is a loss in holding the common drawing and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won (false common drawing advance notice effect). In addition, even if there is a hit in the holding of the common drawing, even if there is a hit symbol of the specific symbol in the holding of the common drawing, it may not be executed unless the lottery with the predetermined probability is won.

  In the common drawing pre-reading advance notice effect shown in FIG. 140, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a rendering image (here, the effect image 283b) is displayed so as to surround the common drawing effect area 283. The effect image 283b shown in FIG. 140 also enters the special view 1 suspension display area 281, and a part of the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 is hidden by the effect image 283b. Further, a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle symbol display area 208b is also hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In this popular drawing pre-reading advance notice effect, when there is a plurality of pending general drawing reservations and when the last common drawing suspension is hit, a notice display is performed over the symbol variation display of a plurality of common drawings, and continuous It becomes a notice.

  In addition, you may start after receiving the common drawing reserve increase command (immediately after the common drawing reserve increase), but the above specific effect (for example, the big hit notice of the special figure or the super reach of the special figure) Etc.) may be started from the point when the specific effect is finished, or when the specific effect is started from the middle, the pre-production advance notice effect is hidden. May be

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit notice effect of the special view is performed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 141 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the common figure both stop symbol variation. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 and the map is zero. The state shown in FIG. 141 is a non-power-supply state.

  In FIG. 141 (b), the first special view display device 212 starts the symbol variation display of the special view, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special view decorative symbol. In addition, the common drawing display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first common drawing effect is executed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 117 (b) is a symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle.

  When the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started, if the number of reservations of the drawing is 0, the jackpot announcement effect of the drawing may be started in the drawing drawing effect area 283. The big hit advance notice effect of the special figure in this popular figure effect area 283 is the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display, or the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and the lottery of the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when a lottery with a second predetermined probability is won (false big hit advance presentation effect). In addition, it may be performed as advance notice of special view. When the big hit notice production of the special drawing is started in the common drawing effect area 283, the high speed fluctuation is first started in the common drawing effect area 283, and as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the common drawing effect area 283 before reach development. The decoration character pattern of "super heat" is displayed on stop. The decorative character pattern of "super heat" shown in FIG. 141 (c) is displayed beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811 is difficult to see. It should be noted that the decorative character pattern of "super heat" may be displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. Further, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, the decorative character pattern of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed instead of the decorative character pattern of "super heat".

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into reach effect. Even after development to reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the popular drawing effect area 283, but after the development of reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" should be erased The default image 283a may be displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283 as well.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example in which the advance notice rendering effect to the specific effect of the special drawing is performed in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The differences from the example shown in FIG. 141 will be mainly described, and items not particularly described are the same as the example shown in FIG.

  The specific effect referred to here is, for example, super reach effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing. In addition, the advance notice presentation to the special effect of the special figure can also be viewed as the big hit advance notice of the special figure.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 142, as in the example shown in FIG. 141, when the number of reserved general drawings is 0 when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started Then, high-speed fluctuation is started in the regular drawing effect area 283 (see FIG. 142 (b)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), after the normal reach occurs, the decorative character pattern of "super hot" is stopped and displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283 before the development of the super reach effect. The decorative character pattern of "super heat" shown in FIG. 142 (c) is also displayed beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811 is difficult to see.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into super reach effect. After the super reach production development, the decorative character pattern of "super heat" disappears, and the default image 283a is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. In addition, a part of the foot of the character C2 of the super reach is overlapped with a part of the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect area 283 is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit notice effect of the special view is performed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 141 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the common figure both stop symbol variation. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 and the map is zero. The state shown in FIG. 141 is a non-power-supply state.

  In FIG. 141 (b), the first special view display device 212 starts the symbol variation display of the special view, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special view decorative symbol. In addition, the common drawing display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first common drawing effect is executed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 117 (b) is a symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle.

  When the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started, if the number of reservations of the drawing is 0, the jackpot announcement effect of the drawing may be started in the drawing drawing effect area 283. The big hit advance notice effect of the special figure in this popular figure effect area 283 is the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display, or the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and the lottery of the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when a lottery with a second predetermined probability is won (false big hit advance presentation effect). In addition, it may be performed as advance notice of special view. When the big hit notice production of the special drawing is started in the common drawing effect area 283, the high speed fluctuation is first started in the common drawing effect area 283, and as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the common drawing effect area 283 before reach development. The decoration character pattern of "super heat" is displayed on stop. The decorative character pattern of "super heat" shown in FIG. 141 (c) is displayed beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811 is difficult to see. It should be noted that the decorative character pattern of "super heat" may be displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. Further, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, the decorative character pattern of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed instead of the decorative character pattern of "super heat".

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into reach effect. Even after development to reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the popular drawing effect area 283, but after the development of reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" should be erased The default image 283a may be displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283 as well.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example in which the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area of the reserve consumption effect.

  In the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (a), the electric thu open notification effect is performed, and the electric thu long open is performed. As a result, there are 4 balls in the electric chew.

  In FIG. 143 (b), four special view 2 reserve icons 282-1 to 2824 are displayed in the special view 2 reserve display area 282. A part of each of the four special figure 2 suspension icons 2821 to 2824 is hidden by the electric chow open notification effect and is difficult to be recognized.

  In FIG. 143 (c), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 which has been performed until now is ended. In addition, the electric Chu Long opening is completed, the electric Chu is closed, and the popular drawing effect is ended. However, in the spread map effect area 283 shown in FIG. 143 (c), a character of the lord is displayed. The pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in this example, when there is a reserve of special figure 2, a character of the mascot continues to be displayed in the popular drawing effect area 283. That is, in the regular drawing effect area 283, when the suspension of the special drawing 2 is completely absorbed, the character of the lord disappears, and the default image 283a shown in FIG. 142 (a) is displayed. If the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start port 228 before the suspension of the special figure 2 is lost, the character of the lord disappears in the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect is prioritized and executed. You may do so.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 143 (d), the second special view display device 214 starts the symbol variation display of the special view. The display manner of the character of the statue displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 may be changed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special view 2. For example, in the case of a display mode in which the default Tonosama character has a habit in both hands, but it is predicted that the big hit symbol will be stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display of digested suspension, the symbol variation display It changes to the display mode which raised the eyelids held in both hands with the start. In addition, you may change from the lord to another character. Further, the display in the common drawing effect area 283 may be changed each time the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started.

  In addition, when one production hides the other production as described above, even if it is not particularly refused, the other production may hide the one production on the contrary. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 137 (D), the electric whistle open notification effect hides a part of the character C2 of the super reach, but conversely, the character C2 of the super reach is one of the electric whistle open notification effect. It may be made to hide a part and to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect. Furthermore, when one effect hides the other effect, it may be concealed over the entire effect period of the other effect, or may be concealed only for a part of the entire effect period. In addition, when one effect hides a part of the other effect, even if not particularly refused, one effect may hide all of the other effect. In addition, the term “invisible” includes invisible.

  Furthermore, the other effects such as the common drawing effect described above and the jackpot effect may be effects by sound or effects by light, and are shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and (i). An effect by such an effect movable body may be used. In the case of sound effects, the sounds overlap, and one effect hides the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, the other effect becomes difficult to view.

  In the above description, “a start area (for example, electric power) which can at least change the state between the easy entry state (for example, the open state) and the entry difficult state (for example, the closed state) The symbol can be displayed at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the above-mentioned decision after performing the variation display of the symbol and the variation judgment of the symbol (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300). A game console comprising display means (for example, a common view display device 210) and effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing effects, wherein the starting area is the one for the judgment of acceptance or rejection. In the case where the result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common drawing), at least a specific operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) can be performed, and the specific operation is It is an operation including an operation of changing the state from the entry difficulty state to the entry easy state, the effect means is at least capable of executing a first effect (for example, a common drawing effect), and the first effect is And the start area includes at least an effect (for example, electric chow open notification effect) performed during execution of the specific operation, and the first effect is a first effect time (for example, a third effect time). It is an effect performed over a time (for example, 6.6 seconds), a fourth time (5.6 seconds), and a fifth time (for example, 5 seconds), and the first effect time is the effect of the symbol A game console characterized in that the time may be shorter than the variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). It explained about.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. Further, the effect means may be, for example, effect display means.

  Further, the specific operation may be an operation of alternately repeating the entry difficult state and the entry easy state one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy entry state, or the start area It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect before changing the state from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state, or the start area is the entry easy state It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after changing the state to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, “the acceptance determination means is more likely to derive the specific determination result in the power support state than in the non-power support state, and the first effect is the non-power support state in the non-power support state. A game stand characterized in that the power support state is more likely to be executed (step S611 shown in FIG. 133). I also explained about.

  In addition, “the symbol display means often performs the variable display of the symbol for a long time in the power support state than in the non-power support state (FIG. 131 (c)), Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect is an enterable notification effect (for example, a diagram showing that the game ball can enter the start area when the result of the success or failure judgment is a specific success or failure judgment result) A game console characterized by an effect including at least a balloon (in the form of "in the open state of electric chow") shown in 135 (g) and the like. I also explained about.

  In addition, the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the second success / failure determination (for example, the success / failure determination of the special drawing) and the result of the second success / failure determination A game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state when the result of the judgment is It is possible to execute at least a second effect (for example, a big hit advance effect (including a advance notice) of the special view) relating to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the second effect is the first effect It is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect during a part or all of the running period. I also explained about.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “a start area (for example, electric power) which can at least change the state between the easy entry state (for example, the open state) and the entry difficult state (for example, the closed state) After performing the variation display of the symbol and the variation judgment of the symbol (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), it is possible to at least display the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the determination. A game console provided with various symbol display means (e.g., common-mode display device 210) and effect means (e.g., decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effects, wherein the starting area is the above-mentioned pass / fail A specific operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) can be performed at least when the result of the determination is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common drawing), and the specific operation An operation including a state change from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state, wherein the effect means is at least capable of executing a first effect (for example, a common figure effect); The effect is an effect including at least one effect of an effect during fluctuation, an effect during decision, and an operation during operation, and the effect during fluctuation is an effect performed during the symbol fluctuation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 134). It is an effect in a period of (f), and the effect during determination is an effect (for example, an effect in a period of (f) shown in FIG. 134) executed while the stop symbol is displayed by the symbol display means The in-operation effect is an effect (for example, an effect in a period of (G) shown in FIG. 134) in which the start area performs the specific operation (for example, the effect in the first period) Different from the production At least a second effect (for example, a big hit notice effect (including advance notice) of a special drawing) can be performed, and the effect means at least performs the first effect during the second effect execution. It is possible to start (for example, FIG. 137 (C) to (C)), and the effect means is capable of at least starting the first effect even during the second effect non-execution. (For example, FIG. 135 (I) to (U)), than the effect time of the first effect started during the second effect non-execution (for example, first time (20.6 seconds)) A game stand characterized in that the presentation time (third time (for example, 6.6 seconds) of the first presentation) started during the second presentation is likely to be shorter. It explained about.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be effects by display, effects by sound, effects by light, effects by movable objects, etc. It may be Further, the effect means may be, for example, effect display means.

  The second effect may be an effect that is started every predetermined time, or an effect that is started during the large enough game state. In addition, it may be an effect that urges the player's operation such as a right-handed hit or a button pressed. Furthermore, it may be an effect that urges button pressing of each of the plurality of buttons. For example, it may be an effect of notifying the button pressing timing for each button, an effect of notifying the button pressing acceptance period, or an effect of alerting the button remaining acceptance period. Good.

  In addition, the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the second success / failure determination (for example, the success / failure determination of the special drawing) and the result of the second success / failure determination Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transitioning the control state from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state when it is the success or failure judgment result of Is an effect (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIG. 137) including at least an effect relating to the result of the second success or failure judgment. In addition, “If the result of the second success or failure judgment is a big hit success or failure judgment result, the second effect indicates that the result of the second success or failure judgment is a large hit success or failure judgment It is an effect including an effect (for example, super reach effect shown in FIG. 137) to be foretelled, and the second effect is the case where the result of the second success or failure judgment is not the result of the big hit judgment. It is an effect including an effect (a so-called false big hit advance effect) for giving a notice as if the result of the second success or failure judgment is the result of a big hit. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means (for example, the first symbol display means as another symbol start means other than the start region (for example, the first special view start port 230) and one of the symbol display means 1) a special symbol display device 212), a second symbol display device (for example, a second special image display device 214) as the symbol display device of one of the symbol display devices, and the first symbol display device At least the controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), the separate start area does not change the accessibility of the game ball, and the symbol display control means The second symbol display means is also at least controllable, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least the second hold control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the gaming ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second holding condition is that the gaming ball is the starting area The second effect is an effect to be performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display (for example, a big hit announcement effect for the variation) A game stand characterized by being. I also explained about.

  The second effect referred to herein may be an effect (for example, super reach effect) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol change display.

  In addition, "the first symbol display means can display at least the first stop symbol (for example, special figure F) corresponding to the result of the big hit success / failure determination after symbol variation display is performed. The second symbol display means can display at least a second stop symbol (e.g., special image A) corresponding to the result of the big hit acceptance determination after the symbol variation display is performed, When the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, it is advantageous for the player as the big hit control state. A game console characterized in that the jackpot control state is easily started (for example, FIG. 119 (d)). I also explained about.

  Here, the game control means, when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game State), and when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol, the game control means controls the state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit. The control state (for example, 15R special jackpot game state) may be at least transitionable, and the second jackpot control state may be a control state more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, the second symbol display means displayed the second stop symbol than after the first symbol display means displayed the first stop symbol in the pay area (for example, the attacker). The later one may be more likely to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening and closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation having a large number of opening times or an operation having a long opening time may be easily performed.

  In addition, “the symbol display control means can at least execute control to start the operation of the first symbol display means when the first reserve digest condition is established, and the symbol display control is performed. The means is capable of at least executing control to start the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserve digest condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserve digest condition is The requirement that the operation of the second symbol display means is at least suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first reserve digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended. And the establishment requirement of the first reserve consumption condition is at least inclusion that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means is the second Judgment of The preview display effect (for example, the effect due to the change of the display mode of the hold icon) related to the result of at least can be displayed, and the effect display means is capable of at least executing continuous preview effect as the preview advance effect. The effect display means can continue at least the continuous advance notice effect during the interrupt symbol change display, and the interrupt symbol change display is performed while the second reserve digest condition is the continuous notification effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by having been established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 of the display mode of the advance notice) is under execution of the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect (for example, the electric Chu open notification effect) in a part or all of the period , FIG. 125 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  A game stand said here is a game stand of a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the effect display means can display at least the first effect during execution of the previewed advance effect.

  In addition, “the second effect is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the first effect being executed. Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. FIG. 144 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 144, a predetermined number of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.
Fifth Embodiment

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 145 to FIG. 181 are basically used only in the description of the fifth embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment In this case, the codes shown in FIG. 145 to FIG. 181 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals as those in the first to fourth embodiments will be used for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 145 to 181. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.
<Type of symbol>

  First, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment are stopped and displayed using FIG. 145. The types of figures and figures will be described.

  The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the figure (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), five types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure E” are shown as stop symbol modes in special figure 1 in the symbol variation stop display, and white outlines in the figure are shown. The part of indicates the location of the segment to be extinguished, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be illuminated. In addition, in the figure (b), four types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure d" are shown as stop symbol modes in special figure 2 symbol variation stop display, and white in the figure The unmarked portion indicates the location of the extinguished segment, and the black portion indicates the location of the lit segment.

  As shown to the same figure (a), "special figure A" is 15 round (15R) special big hit symbols, and "special figure B" is 15R big hit symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. The state transitioning to the short time state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time-short state is referred to as a map-low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. "Special figure D" is a small hit symbol, and if the gaming state before winning the small hit is the special figure high probability figure high definite state, (after winning the small hit) special figure high probability figure high If the game state before winning the small hit is the state of special view low probability drawing high certainty, it is the special drawing low certainty high certain state (after the small hit winning). In addition, “special figure E” is a symbol of out-of-shape, and is a symbol that the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively small amount of profit.

  As shown in the same figure (b), “Special figure a” is a special character with 16R special jackpot, and “special figure b” is a special character with 8R special jackpot, both of which are special figure high probability spread figure high probability states. In addition, “special figure c” is an 8R big hit design, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure d” is an out-of-order symbol, and is a symbol that the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 145 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern".

  For example, in the case of notifying the special character A of 15R special big hit, the special character B of 15 R big hit, the special character b of 8R special big hit, or the special character c of 8R big hit, the symbol display area Stop the pattern combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") corresponding to 15R big hit or 8R big hit on 208a to 208c. indicate. When notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 16R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3") where the same odd decoration pattern is lined up is arranged And "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" etc.). Moreover, when notifying a small hit of "special figure D" or a sudden definite change of "special figure C", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination other than the above in symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" Stop display of 2-decoration 3 "or" decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 "or the like. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the release of the "special figure E" and the "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

FIG. 145 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Another Example of Display Regarding Operation of Operation Means by Display Means>

Next, another example will be described in which the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) performs a display regarding the operation of the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). In the following description, as another example, another example of the operation means image display for performing display regarding the operation of the operation means by the same processing as the operation means image display processing described in the first embodiment will be described.
<Example 20 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twentieth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f are displayed, for example, at the upper right end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is provided. This special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e displays the success or failure result of the special figure 1 variation game, and during the special figure 1 variation game (during the special figure 1 variation), it is round shaped as the fourth figure 217 of the special figure 1 Blink the figure of. The special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f is an area for displaying the success or failure result of the special figure 2 change game, and during the special figure 2 change game (during the change of the special figure 2) as the fourth figure 218 of the special figure 2 Blinking the triangle shape. In addition, although the case where a special figure 1 change game is performed is demonstrated to an example in 5th Embodiment as an example of a change game, even if it is a special figure 2 change game, it can implement similarly.

  A hold display area 700 is provided, for example, below the left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right end of the hold display area 700 is secured as a variation icon display area 702. Here, pending icons PI1 and PI2 are displayed, which indicate that there are two pending special views. In the following description, the case where one hold display area 700 is provided is shown as an example, but as shown in FIG. Good.

  At the timing shown in (b) of the figure, the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested, the reserve of Special Figure 1 fluctuation game decreases from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is started in the first Special Figure display device 212 In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 is started. In the variation icon display area 702, the digested hold is displayed as a variation icon CI, and in the hold display area 700, a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold of the special view 1 is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, after the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 (or the second special view display device 214) is started, the flashing display of the fourth symbol 217 and the decrease of the retention icons PI1 and PI2 The animation and the variation display of the decoration pattern are started in the order. In addition, the order of the start timing of the blinking display of the fourth symbol, the decrease animation (display) of the hold icon, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the above, and the display may be started in any order. The display start may be started, and the order of the display start timings is the same as in the following embodiments.

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) is the character display of the effect display 704 (For example, "Yoshimune is general Yatsushiro".) In the lower right of the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 during the change display of the decoration symbol. And an image corresponding to the notice effect for displaying the character image (princess). Here, although the effect display 704 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize part of the variation display of the decorative symbol, it is also possible to allow the player to visually recognize part of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure indicates a state in which the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, the image simulating the chance button is displayed on the front surface of the decorative symbol (the front surface of the layer (player side)) and the rear surface of the effect display 704.

  Further, a first for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in a first color (in this example, blue). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front surface of the decorative symbol and the rear surface of the effect display 704. Also, the character image (殿) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  This timing is the start time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. However, a portion of the first operation means image BG1 and the first operation means image BG1 are displayed by a portion of the effect display 704 (here, a character display of a balloon saying "Yoshimune is Yatsushiro.") At the timing of FIG. A portion of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, a portion including the right end portion) is hidden, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize (impossible to visually recognize).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is preferentially overlapped (that is, earlier in time and The first display is hidden by the second display (part of the effect display 704) displayed on the front as a layer, and not hidden by the second display (FIG. (J) The visibility of the first display is lower than that of. Here, the first display in the present embodiment refers to a display in which the display mode of the first display can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. Further, establishment of the change condition includes, for example, when the time from the display start of the first display has passed, or when the operation of the operation means determined in advance (one or more operations, long press, etc.) And say. Further, the change condition may be established once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, in the case where the change condition is, for example, a lapse of time every one second from the display start time of the first display and this is satisfied a plurality of times, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed every one second Aspects change. Specifically, as described later, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image in which the filled portion of the first color decreases (or increases) with time (for example, every second). Display Note that the second display may not be displayed temporally prior to the first display.

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) of the figure show a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the acceptance period) has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. (D)). ing. As described above, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a meter display, and the scale (filled portion) of the meter (also referred to as a gauge hereinafter) corresponds to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Display an image that gradually decreases. Then, even while the scale of the meter gradually decreases, the effect display 704 continues to be displayed, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In other words, the first display (the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is hidden by the second display (part of the effect display 704), so that the display is not hidden by the second display (the same figure (j)). Even in the state where the visibility is lower compared to, the change in the display mode of the first display (the first elapsed time notification image TG1) (the display in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases) is continued ing. In this example, the display mode and the display position of the effect display 704 do not change with the passage of time.

  Timings shown in (g) to (i) of the figure show a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further passed from (f) of the figure. At these timings, the meter's scale (filled portion) actually displays an image that gradually decreases (reduces), but the meter's scale is hidden behind the effect display 704, and the meter's scale decreases The display mode of the display is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). In other words, while the scale of the meter is hidden by the effect display 704, the decrease display of the scale continues.

  Note that the first display (here, the second display (here, the effect display 704 which is the advance notice) becomes non-display by overlapping (hidden in the effect display 704) and becomes invisible to the player (here) Then, if there is an image that the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases), the first display (that is, the non-displayed image) of the portion that becomes invisible can not be drawn actually You may control. By doing this, the control burden of the drawing process can be reduced. This is the same in all the embodiments of the present specification. Note that the first display of the portion that is invisible to the player (non-displayed) may be drawn.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 becomes non-displayed (immediately before) the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends (immediately before). As a result, before the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends, the whole of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 including the right end portion can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter is displayed by overlapping and displaying the second display (here, the effect display 704) in the area including the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The start position of the reduced display of the scale of) and the display mode of the reduced display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  As mentioned above, although an example in case a button operation is not performed during the reception period of operation of the chance button 136 was shown in the same figure (d)-(j), button operation was performed during the reception period of operation of the chance button 136 A display example of the case is shown below.

  The figure (g-1) is a display example at the time of operating the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (g). At this timing, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased based on the operation of the chance button 136, the effect display previously displayed (first An image 730 (an image corresponding to a second preview effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Different from the image corresponding to the preview effect 704 and corresponding to the preview effect is a decorative pattern It is displayed in the display area of the display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect has a reduced visibility for the player due to the effect display 704 (the image corresponding to the first preview effect) overlapping. (It is considered difficult for the player to see).

In this example, although a case in which it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the effect display 704 which is an image corresponding to the advance notice effect has been described as an example, other effect images or other images A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be made difficult to visually recognize by this, and the same applies to the following embodiments.
<Example 21 of image display of operation means>
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-first embodiment in time series.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (B) to (e) are the same as the explanation of the timings shown in (b) to (e) in FIG. 146, but in the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is a chance button The image corresponding to the first operation of 136 is an image, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image for displaying the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has passed further than the timing of (e) in FIG. At this timing, a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). On the other hand, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In this example, part of the effect display 704 (second operation) while decreasing the visibility of the image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases (while making it difficult for the player to see). An effect of prompting the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed by the means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow.

  Note that the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be displayed on part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). Further, the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow are not displayed when the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is ended, and the timing thereof is the first time of the chance button 136 It may be set to the same timing as the timing of the end of the operation acceptance period (the timing of the non-display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1), or may be the timing earlier than that. , May be after the timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is a period whose time is shorter than the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, but the time may be the same period. May be a long period of time.

  The timings shown in (g) to (j) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (g) to (j) of FIG.

  FIGS. 147 (b) to 147 (j) show an example in the case where the button operation is not performed during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, but in the case where the button operation is performed during the reception period of the operation A display example is shown below.

  The figure (g-1) is a display example at the time of performing the 2nd operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (g). At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display previously displayed ( An image 730 corresponding to the preliminary announcement effect different from the first preliminary announcement effect 704) (an image corresponding to the second preliminary announcement effect, and in this example, the character display "CHANNEL!") Are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect is considered as difficult to be recognized by the player by the effect display 704 (image corresponding to the first preview effect). In addition, part of the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, based on the fact that the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and it is a kind of the big hit notice effect of the special figure, "super hot! "" Is displayed.

  The figure (g-2) is another display example at the time of performing the 2nd operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (g). At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display previously displayed ( An image 730 corresponding to the preliminary announcement effect different from the first preliminary announcement effect 704) (an image corresponding to the second preliminary announcement effect, and in this example, the character display "CHANNEL!") Are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display (image corresponding to the first preview effect) 704. In this example, the display mode of the effect display 704 is not changed, and the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow is continued. In this case, the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow may prompt the third operation of the chance button 136, and the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed accordingly. In this case, it may be changed to the effect display 704 shown in FIG. Also, in practice, the third operation of the chance button 136 may not be accepted (restricted).

  FIG. 11 (g-3) is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a part of the effect display 704 is changed based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Specifically, based on the fact that the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and the text "super hot!" Is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues, and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is viewed by the player by a part of the effect display 704. It is difficult. In this case, an image in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases is displayed.

  The timing shown to the figure (f-1) is another display example at the time of performing the 1st operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (e). At this timing, based on the fact that the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display displayed earlier ( An image 730 corresponding to the preliminary announcement effect different from the first preliminary announcement effect 704) (an image corresponding to the second preliminary announcement effect, and in this example, the character display "CHANNEL!") Are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in (f-1), a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). There is.

In the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, each of the effect display (image corresponding to the first preview effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect is of the chance button 136. An image corresponding to the operation may be displayed, or one of the images may be displayed. In addition, when there is an operation of the chance button 136, this is not accepted, and both of the effect display (image corresponding to the first preview effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect are displayed. It does not matter if it is not changed.
<Example 22 of image display of operation means>

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-second embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is an image corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The second operation means image BG2 is an image corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136.
The timing shown in FIG. 146 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 146 (b).

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) has shown the state which the reception period of the 2nd operation of the chance button 136 started in the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol, and the lower right of the display area of the decoration symbol display 208 , Effect display 704 (for example, in the balloon, the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, the image of the character of "long press!", And the character image (princess) are displayed It is in the state of displaying an image corresponding to the advance notice effect). In this example, as a second operation of the chance button 136, a display prompting to press and hold the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure indicates a state in which the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, an image imitating a chance button is displayed on the front of the decorative symbol and on the rear of the effect display 704.

  Further, a first elapsed time notification for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image TG1 is displayed in a first color (in this example, blue). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front surface of the decorative symbol and the rear surface of the effect display 704. Also, the character image (殿) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  At this timing, at the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is actually filled in with the first color. A part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (a part of the effect display 704 (here, an image of a balloon displaying the second operation means image BG2) Here, the portion including the right end portion is in a hidden state, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (it is difficult for the player to see (not visible)).

  In the timing shown in (e) of the figure, the second operation (long) of the chance button 136 is performed in a state where a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. It shows the state where the pressing operation has been started. At this timing, an image is displayed in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases, and the effect display 704 continues to display even during that period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, in this example, in response to the start of the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136, the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, the display position of the effect display 704 does not change, but the display mode of the effect display 704 (here, the filling color of the second operation means image BG2) is changed from the first color (for example, white) to the second It is changed to a color (for example, red).

  The timing shown to the figure (f) is a state which the 2nd operation (operation of long press) is continuing. Is shown. At this timing, an image is displayed in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases, and the effect display 704 continues to display even during that period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the effect display 704 maintains the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color), and reports that the second operation (long press operation) is continuing. As described above, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained for a period during which the second operation (long press operation) continues, but the second operation (long press operation) continues. May return to the original first color. Further, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is the same as the display mode before (or immediately before) being interrupted even when the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation). When the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation), the original first color may be restored.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further passed from (f) of the figure. At these timings, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) actually displays an image in which the scale gradually decreases, but the scale (filled portion) of the meter is hidden behind the effect display 704. The display mode of the reduced display of the meter is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In this case, control may be performed so as not to actually draw an image in which the scale gradually decreases. By doing this, the control burden of the drawing process can be reduced. In addition, the effect display 704 maintains the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color), and reports that the second operation (long press operation) is continuing. Further, in the above case, control may be performed to draw an image in which the scale gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further passed from (f) of the figure. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 is erased based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, when the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds has elapsed), It displays the text "It's very hot!"

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state where the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In the present embodiment, even at the end of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (even after the end), the display of the effect display 704 continues, and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) Is considered difficult for the player to view.

  In the timing shown in (k) of the figure, the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the character image (display) are not displayed (erased), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed to the player. It is in a state of being visible. However, also in this case, the display of the effect display 704 is continued, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize part of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The figure (e-1) is another display example in the timing of the figure (e). At this timing, in conjunction with the start of the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136, the display mode (here, filled color) of the effect display 704 is from the first color (for example, white). The second color (for example, red) is changed, but the second operation of the chance button 136 is determined to be the first operation of the chance button 136 in control, and corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136 It shows a state in which the advance presentation has been started. That is, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the notice effect image 730 (here, the character of "chance") corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. . Also in this case, a part of the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  The figure (h-1) is another display example in the timing of the figure (h). At this timing, the character of "super heat!" Displayed based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, the long press (for example, about 3 seconds) has elapsed). At substantially the same timing as the display, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (here, characters of "chance" Display).

Note that if there is a further operation on the chance button 136 (third operation (long press, press of a period shorter than long press, etc.) at the timing shown in FIG. (I), the same diagram (e-1) Alternatively, the display shown in (h-1) may be performed, and when the operation of the chance button 136 (third operation) is further performed at the timing shown in (j) of FIG. The display shown in FIG. (E-1) or FIG. (H-1) may be performed.
<Example 23 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-third embodiment in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 146 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 146 (b).

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state where the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has been started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button), a first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a character image (donor) are displayed on the front of the decorative symbol. At this timing, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which a pre-reading advance notice effect to change the hold icon PI1 has been started during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. As an example, the pre-read advance notice effect of the present embodiment is to perform effect display (animation display) 704 by animation. In the animation display 704, for example, a star connected to a balloon from above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 executes display start animation to start display, descends toward the hold display area 700, and stars near the hold icon PI1. Is separated from the balloon, and the balloon icon PI1 is changed or not changed, and the balloon alone is raised again to perform the moving animation and the erasing animation to be erased.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state where a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter which is TG1 gradually decreases. In addition, the animation display 704 continues, displaying an image in which the balloons and the stars are falling.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further elapsed from the state of (e) in the same figure. An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases. In addition, the animation display 704 continues, and the balloons and the stars descend while overlapping the front surfaces of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. At this timing, part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by a part (star) of the animation display 704, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (to the player). It is considered difficult to see). In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part (balloon) of the animation display 704 and is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further elapsed from the state of (f) in the same figure. An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases. Also, the animation display 704 continues, and the front of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 while the stars and balloons move from right to left along the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Overlap. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by a part (star) of the animation display 704, which is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part (balloon) of the animation display 704 and is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the moving second display (here, the animation display 704). ing. In addition, the position (position where it becomes difficult for the player to see) of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) to be covered by the moving second display (the animation display 704 in this case) It changes with. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image which gradually decreases even in a period in which the animation display 704 partially covers and makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timings shown in (i) to (l) of the figure show a state in which the change display of the hold icon PI1 has succeeded by the animation display 704. That is, when the change display of the holding icon is successful, the balloon and the star approach the holding display area 700 ((i) in the same figure), the star leaves the balloon ((j) in the same drawing) And the star are combined, and the display icon changes with the display icon PI1 ′ displayed (the change display succeeds) and the balloon rises (the same figure (k)), the balloon from the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 Is erased (the same figure (l)), the animation display 704 is performed.

  FIGS. (I-1) to (j-1) are states after the timing shown in FIG. 6 (g), showing a state in which the change display of the hold icon has failed. That is, when the change display of the holding icon fails, even if the star and the balloon approach the holding display area 700, the star does not leave the balloon (the same figure (i-1)) and moves, for example, to the left Then, the animation display 704 which leaves the hold icon PI is executed.

  In this embodiment, the animation display performed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display performed when it fails fail are described as different animation displays, but the same animation display is performed, and as a result, hold The change display may be successful by changing only the display mode of the icon, or the change display may fail by changing only the display mode of the hold icon. Also, the execution time of the animation display performed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the execution time of the animation display performed when it fails may be the same period (length), for example, the period when it is successful. The period may be different, such as becoming longer.

The timing shown in (f-1) of the figure is a state after the timing shown in (e) of the figure, and shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 based on the operation of the chance button 136, an image 730 corresponding to the advance presentation effect (in this example, The character display “CHANNEL!” Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also in this case, a part of the image 730 (first display) corresponding to the advance notice effect is covered by the animation display 704 (second display), making it difficult for the player to visually recognize.
<Example 24 of image display of operation means>

  FIGS. 150 to 154 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the twenty-fourth embodiment in time series. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as a premise of the description of the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments, an example of image display of operation means in the case of performing normal operation means image display will be described.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and at the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 “Decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”, which is a combination of designs, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the pending display area 700, here, two pending icons PI1 and PI2 of the special drawing 1 are shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 6B, the suspension of Special Figure 1 is digested, and the suspension of Special Figure 1 fluctuation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and symbol variation display is performed in the first Special Display 212. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 is started. In the hold display area 700, the digested hold is displayed as a fluctuation icon CI in the variable icon display area 702, and a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state in which the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 has a first color ( In the example, it is displayed in blue below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image The TG 1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is that (for example, 6 seconds which is the reception period) elapses before the time (for example 6 seconds which is the reception period) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 In the state of (before) (after the timing of (d) of the figure), the state where operation of the chance button 136 was performed is shown. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 based on the operation of the chance button 136, an image 730 corresponding to the advance presentation effect (in this example, A character display of “CHANNEL!” And a character image (殿) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that this advance notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although the case where a notice production | presentation production is displayed is demonstrated to an example in this embodiment, another production | generation display may be sufficient.

  The timing shown in (f) and (g) in the figure is a state in which, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the effect corresponding to the result of the judgment of success or failure, the fluctuation time and the notice effect for winning is started. The figure (f) (g) has shown an example of the reach display in the change display of a decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in the figure (h) is a state of effect start state of super reach, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white back), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display (a reduced display of a decorative symbol) is displayed on the upper right side of the display area of. Further, the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that when the hold display area 700 and the hold icon PI1, the erase timing of the variation icon CI, the timing of becoming the white back, and the timing of the reduction display of the decorative symbol are sequentially executed, whichever may come first It may be performed in order. Also, at least a portion may be performed simultaneously.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure are, for example, a state in which execution of a sword strike reach presentation in which a sword aura character is confronted with a sword is started as a super reach effect. Here, after displaying the characters of the swordsman character and "VS swordsman" as an example (the same figure (i)), the confrontation scene of the character (tendon) and the swordsman character is displayed (the same figure (j)).

  In the timing shown in (k) of the figure, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is used to temporarily delete the confrontation scene between the character and the swordsman character. Image that imitates). In addition, a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2 has a first color In the example, it is displayed below the second operation means image BG2 in blue). This timing is a point in time immediately before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and all the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color There is. The fill color of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be a second color (for example, white) different from the first color. Furthermore, at this timing, for example, an image prompting the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!”) Is displayed above the second operation means image BG2. Furthermore, the first status notification image SG1 is displayed at, for example, the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first state notification image SG1 is a meter display, and refers to a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition is, for example, when the time from the display start time of the first display has elapsed, or when there is an operation of the predetermined operation means (one or more operations, long press, etc.) Say. Further, the change condition may be established once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, if it is assumed that the change condition is, for example, a lapse of time every one second from the start of display of the first state notification image SG1 and this is satisfied multiple times, the first state notification image SG1 is every one second The display mode changes to. Specifically, as described later, the first status notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases (or decreases) with time (for example, every second). In addition, when the first state notification image SG1 changes the display mode with the passage of time, the change of the display mode is stopped according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) during the change period of the display mode. It may be (or ended). For example, in the first status notification image SG1 of this embodiment, the scales (filled portions) of a plurality of stages (for example, 10 stages) gradually increase from the lowermost stage (perform the increase display of the scales) with the passage of time. It is a meter which reaches the upper stage, and is an image which terminates (or stops) the increase display of the scale when the chance button 136 is operated during the increase display of the scale. Here, with the elapse of time, the first status notification image SG1 is not filled in any stages as the initial status at the timing shown in FIG. 6K, or in the first color (such as white). Displayed in full fill.

  In the timing shown in (l) of the figure, the same display as (k) in the figure is performed, but the time has elapsed from the timing shown in (k) in the figure, and a state where the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started It shows.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure indicates that time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 is sequentially filled with the second color different from the first color in a stepwise manner from the lowermost stage, and the filled portion gradually increases. Display an image. At this time, the filling color (second color) of the first status notification image SG1 changes stepwise, but may be the same color.

  The timing shown in (n) of the figure indicates that the time has further elapsed from the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 gradually increases, and the image reaching the top is displayed.

  The timing shown in (o) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 138 is operated in a state where time has elapsed from the state of (n) in the figure. At this timing, the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 has reached the top is displayed, and the character of "spirit MAX" is displayed above the first status notification image SG1. In addition, after the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters "Stop pressing the button and stop the feeling meter!" Are deleted after the chance button 136 is operated ( Alternatively, on the front of these images, an image (in this example, characters “in the case of slaying!” And a character image (殿) in the example) corresponding to the notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter-) gradually decreases with time after reaching the top, and increases during the acceptance of the chance button 136. Repeat the display and decrease display. Then, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated, the change (increase or decrease) in the display mode of the scale is stopped, and different effects are performed depending on the position of the scale.

  That is, in the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o), the timing at which the scale reaches the top is expected in anticipation of an increase in the scale of the first status notification image SG1 in which the display mode changes with time (the scale increases). By operating the chance button 136 in, the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is stopped at the top, indicating that the advance notice effect (“hot” effect) advantageous to the player is being executed. .

  Note that the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by the effect lottery regardless of the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated. In this case, when the player operates the chance button 136, the scale stops at a predetermined position.

  Further, the upper limit of the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by the effect lottery. That is, the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time, but during the reception period of the chance button 136, the position (for example, the eighth row) determined in advance by the effect drawing is the upper limit, and does not reach the uppermost row. Good. In this case, the upper limit of the stop position of the scale may be determined at the timing when the player operates the chance button 136.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the operation means image display after FIG. 150 (o) in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 151 (p) is shown in FIG. 150 (j) in which the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, the first state display image SG1, and the image of the notice effect are erased. It shows the confrontation scene between the character (Toen) and the swordsman character after the timing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 151 (q) (r) shows the scene where the character (dono) has won the swordsman character, and in FIG. 151 (r) the symbol of the big hit (probable variation big hit) in the reduced display of the decorative symbol. The fluctuation variation display of the combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed.

  The timing shown in the figure (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in the figure (t) hits the symbol display areas 208a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208 After the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7") of the probability variation big hit is displayed fluctuatingly, the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the timing shown in the figure (w), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the characters of "probable variation big hit" for notifying the start of the big hit are displayed.

  In the above, in FIGS. 150 to 151, the display example in the case where the chance button 136 is operated in the reception period (after FIG. 150 (k)) of the second operation of the chance button 136 has been described.

  FIG. 152 shows a display example in the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed in the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 150 (k)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 152 (k) shows the same state as the timing shown in FIG. 150 (k).

  The timing shown in FIG. 152 (l) indicates that time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 gradually increases from the lowermost stage is displayed.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure indicates that the time has further elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 gradually increases, and the image reaching the top is displayed.

  In the timings shown in (n) and (o) in the figure, when time elapses from the state in (m) in the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display In addition, after the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) reaches the top, an image whose number decreases gradually is displayed.

  Further, in the timing shown in (p) of the figure, when time has elapsed from the state of (o) in the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 disappears, and the acceptance period of the chance button 136 Indicates an elapsed state. At this timing, the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) displays an image that increases again.

  At the timing shown in (q) of the figure, no operation is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, so the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white and the second operation means The image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first status notification image SG1 are deleted.

  In the timing shown in (r) of the figure, similarly to (p) in FIG. 151, a confrontation scene of the sword character and the character after the timing shown in (j) of FIG. 150 is displayed.

As described above, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the period from the start to the end of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ((k) to (p) in FIG. The scale of the image SG1 (meter-) repeatedly increases and decreases.
FIG. 153 shows another example of notice effects displayed at the timing of FIG. 150 (o).

  FIG. 153 (o-1) shows the way in which the first status notification image SG 1 reaches the uppermost stage (for example, the tenth stage) until the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG 1 reaches the uppermost stage This is an example of the notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the upper stage (for example, the eighth stage) is reached. In this case, an image 730 (in this example, a character display of "sneaking!" And a character image (ten) in this example) corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 153 (o-2) shows the preview effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the middle stage (for example, the fourth stage) is reached during rising or falling of the scale of the first status notification image SG1. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 (in this example, a character display of "cut-in!" And a character image (ten) in this example) corresponding to the notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 153 (o-3) shows the one when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the lower end (for example, the first step) is reached during rising or falling of the scale of the first status notification image SG1. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 (in this example, a character display of “weakly!” And a character image (ten) in this example) corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As described above, the advance notice effect may be made different depending on the size of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated. In this example, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is large, a notice effect with high degree of advantage for the player is displayed, and when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is small, the state for the player It displays a low-interest notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect may be performed regardless of the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  FIG. 154 is an example of displaying a shift in super reach effect, and is a diagram showing operation means image display after FIG. 150 (o) in time series.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 154 (p) and (q) are displaying a scene where the character (dono) lost the swordsman character as a confrontation scene between the temple and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 150 (j), In FIG. 154 (q), in the reduction display of the decorative symbol, the fluctuation variation display of the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7") of the deviation is performed.

  The timing shown in the same figure (r) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in the same figure (s) deviates from the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 The state in which the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is displayed in a fluctuating manner is shown. Note that in (s) of FIG. , Remaining icon PI1 indicating the remaining number of reservations, and the fluctuation icon CI of the fluctuation game is re-displayed.

  At the timing shown in the figure (t), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereby, since the said variable game is complete | finished, the round figure is displayed on the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e for preparation of the start of the next special figure 1 variable game.

The period shown in the figure (u) to the figure (w) shows the state from the figure (t) to the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation game. During this period, an erasure animation is executed to erase the fluctuation icon CI indicating the reserve that has been digested by the special figure 1 fluctuation game until the figure (t). That is, in this example, after the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in the figure (t), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon CI indicating the digested hold is executed.
<Example 25 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the twenty-fifth embodiment in chronological order. The timing shown in the figure (A) is a timing corresponding to the figure 150 (k), and the timing shown in the figure (D) is a timing corresponding to the figure 150 (l). That is, in the present embodiment, before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (between FIG. 150 (k) and FIG. 150 (l). Is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed in the period).

  The timing shown to the figure (B) has shown the state which is performing the presentation display 704 before the start of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of advance notice effects relating to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (tendon) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, at least a part of the first display (a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1, and the “button The part of the characters "Press and stop the feeling meter!" Has lower visibility than before the effect display 704 is displayed (the same figure (A)). As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the effect display 704 is covered, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and the “press the button to stop the feeling meter Some of the characters “!” Are considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 6C, the effect display 704 displayed in FIG. 6B becomes non-displayed (erased), and as shown in FIG. 6D, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. The display indicating the start of the reception period is continued.

  In addition, the display position of the effect display 704 in a present Example is a position which makes visual recognition difficult at least a part of 1st status alerting | reporting image SG1 (meter) not only what is shown to the figure (B). In this case, the vicinity of the top of the first state notification image SG1 may be covered, or the vicinity of the bottom of the first state notification image SG1 may be covered. In addition, the entire first state notification image SG1 may be covered.

  The same figure (B-1) to the same figure (B-4) are other display examples of the effect display 704 shown to the figure (B).

  As shown in FIG. 6 (B-1), the effect display 704 displays the first status notification image SG1 (meter-) and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the feeling meter!" Although it is difficult, the reduced display of the decorative symbol 708, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f may not be difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display 704 is the first state notification image SG1 and the front of the character "press the button and stop the feeling meter!", And the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special feature It is displayed on the rear surface side of FIG. 2 fourth symbol display area 208f.

  Further, as shown in (B-2) of the figure, the effect display 704 makes the first status notification image SG1, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 difficult to view. May be

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (B-3), the effect display 704 is an image in which it is difficult to visually recognize only a part of the first status notification image SG1 (here, a character having a placard of "super heat" (Image of) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in (B-4) of the figure, the effect display 704 moves so that the whole (or substantially all) of the first status notification image SG1 becomes difficult to visually recognize or become visible as time passes. An image may be displayed. In this example, the effect display 704 is an image in which the character “super heat” is displayed on a background image having substantially the same area as the entire first status notification image SG1. This is an animation in which a slide movement is made from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 (cut in) to slide left and right.
<Example 26 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-sixth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (period after FIG. 150 (l)) of the normal operation means image display described in the 24th embodiment. is there.

  The timing shown in the figure (A) is the timing corresponding to the figure 150 (l), and the timing shown in the figure (B) is the timing corresponding to the figure 150 (m).

  The timing shown to the figure (C) has shown the state which is performing the presentation display 704 at the timing corresponding to FIG. 150 (n). The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of advance notice effects relating to the change, and displays (cuts in) an image of a character in a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the feeling meter!" The visibility is reduced compared to before the display 704 is displayed ((A) and (B) in the same figure). On the other hand, in the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the visibility is not lowered (it becomes visible to the player), the chance An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (D) shows a state where time has further elapsed (the reception period has progressed) from the timing shown in the figure (C), and the effect display 704 is continued. Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is smaller than the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first state notification image SG1, a part of the first operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters "Stop pressing the button and stop the feeling meter!" A change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (a change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) continues to be visible to the player while being difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in (E) of the figure, the effect display 704 displayed in (C) and (D) of the figure becomes non-displayed (erased). FIGS. (F) and (G) are respectively the same as the states shown in FIGS. 152 (p) and (q).

  In this embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect display 704 during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, so the player operates the chance button 136 depending on the display position of the effect display 704. It is difficult to understand the timing of Since the player may refrain from the operation when the timing of the operation is unclear, the operation display of the chance button 136 of the player may be able to be derived by the effect display 704. For example, when it is unlikely that the player will have an advantageous result by operating the chance button 136 when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is at the lower position (if the feeling meter is not sufficiently accumulated), By hiding the lower part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) in the effect display 704, it may be difficult for the player to operate the chance button 136. By doing this, it may be possible to lead to an operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is in the upper row, it is difficult for the player to know the optimal timing while thinking that the chance button 136 is to be operated. There is a case.

In addition, also in the figure (C) (D) of a present Example, the example of a display of the effect display 704 shown to FIG. 155 (B-1)-(B-4) is applicable.
<Example 27 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 27 in chronological order. In the present embodiment, during super reach (period after FIG. 150 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the success or failure of the common drawing fluctuation display and the common drawing fluctuation display as the effect display 704. It is configured to display a notice effect based on the determination.

  Timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (C) are the timings corresponding to FIG. 150 (j), and a generic drawing fluctuation display is shown during super reach production (during displaying of a confrontation scene between a character and a swordsman character). Has been started, and the effect accompanying the said common view fluctuation display has been started. Specifically, the effect display 704 of this timing is, for example, the character (Chibi princess) in the common drawing variation display area 208s, the display start animation of the Chibi princess roulette (character (Chibi princess), the Chibi princess roulette display, and “「 The animation which displays the balloon of "electric chew open" is executed when it stops at (Figures (A) and (B)), and it is the effect that the decorative symbol variation display of the common drawing is started (the same figure (C)).

  FIGS. (D) to (G) show the same timing as in FIGS. 150 (k) to (m), and the explanation of the operation means image display is omitted, but it is displayed from (D) onwards. In the front of the first state notification image SG1, the effect display 704 (decorative symbol variation display of the common drawing) continues, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is the effect display It is considered that the player has difficulty in visual recognition by the user 704.

  (H) of the figure shows the same timing as that of FIG. 150 (n), and the explanation about the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect display 704 (generally shown in FIG. The stop display of the decorative symbol ((display per common drawing) is continued, and at least a part of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is regarded as difficult to be recognized by the player by the effect display 704 .

  FIGS. (I) and (J) show the same timing as in FIG. 150 (o) (p), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but effects are displayed on the front of the first status notification image SG1. The display 704 (a stop display of the decoration symbol ◎ of a common drawing and a display of a balloon of “in the electric chow open state”) continues. In particular, in the figure (I), at least a part of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  FIGS. (K) and (L) show the same timing as in FIGS. 150 (p) and (q), and the explanation about the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect display 704 (decorative symbol 普The stop display of continues (in the figure (K)), and by the end of the effect display 704, an erase animation of the princess Chibi roulette and the character (Chibi princess) is executed (figure (L)).

  The same figure (M) is in the state where the effect display 704 is finished, and shows the same timing as figure 150 (q).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while at least the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed (from the start of display of the first status notification image SG1 shown in FIGS. Until the display end time), at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 is considered to be low in visibility by the effect display 704 (regarded as difficult to be recognized by the player). On the other hand, even while the effect display 704 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continuously visible to the player ((D) in the figure). ~ (H)).

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and all game characters (during the reach effect) and the big hit etc. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (c) or FIG. 150 (d) or the like, the second display (effect display 704) can be performed to reduce the visibility of the first display.

  The timing shown to the same figure (H-1) is the state in which the production | presentation display 704 (The stop display of the decoration symbol * of the common drawing * (disappearance display of the common drawing)) is continued. Also, the timing shown in FIG. (I-1) is the state after (H-1) in the figure, and the deletion animation of Chibi princess roulette and the character (Chibi princess) is executed by the end of the effect display 704. Ru. As described above, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be different depending on whether the regular drawing fluctuation display is determined to be the success or failure judgment or not. In addition, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be made to be the same in the case where it corresponds to the propriety judgment of the common drawing fluctuation display and the case where it deviates to the judgment of the general drawing fluctuation display.

The execution (including the execution time) of the effect display 704 based on the propriety determination of the common drawing fluctuation display as described above is also applicable to the following embodiments.
<Example 28 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 28 in chronological order. In the present embodiment, during super reach (period after FIG. 150 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment, two types of effect display 704 (first effect display 7041 and second Is configured to perform the effect display 7042). The first effect display 7041 is, for example, a display of notice effects based on the regularity variation display of the twenty-seventh embodiment and the judgment of the regularity of the general pattern variation display, and the second effect display 7042 is, for example, the variation of the twenty-fifth embodiment It is a display of the notice effect about.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. 157 (A) to (K), but in the present embodiment, the notice based on the determination of success or failure of the common drawing fluctuation display The display of the effect (the first effect display 7041) is executed, and at the timing of FIG. 6D, the first effect display 7041 (the second display) is the first state notification image SG1 (the first display) By displaying on the front of the), at least a part of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown to the figure (E) has shown the state after the timing shown to the figure (D). At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues, and in addition to this, the display (the second effect display 7042) of the advance notice effect relating to the change is started. Then, at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042. Further, at least a part of the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 are displayed overlapping (superimposed). On the other hand, even in this state, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player. In addition, control which does not draw only a meter may be performed about the area | region currently displayed redundantly, control which does not draw only the 2nd presentation display 7092 may be performed, and control which does not draw both may be performed. Also, control may be performed to draw all.

  In this example, the first effect display 7041 is displayed in front of (in front of) the second effect display 7042, but the second effect display 7042 has priority over the first effect display 7041. It may be displayed (on the front). In addition, the first effect display 7041 may be displayed in time priority over the second effect display 7042, or the second effect display 7042 may be displayed in time priority over the first effect display 7041. Or they may be displayed simultaneously.

  The timing shown to the figure (F) has shown the state after the timing shown to the figure (E). At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues to lower the visibility of part of the first state notification image SG1, but the second effect display 7042 ends.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (E) of FIG. 150, and shows a state in which the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (H) to (O) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 150 (G) to (M), but at least during the period when the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed. In (the timings of (H) to (K) in the figure, it is assumed that the visibility is low due to the first effect display 7041 in which at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 is continuously displayed ( It is considered difficult for the player to see). On the other hand, even during the period when the first effect display 7041 is being executed, the change of the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player (see FIG. (H) to (J)).

In the present embodiment, although the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and all game characters (during the reach effect) and the big hit etc. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (c) or FIG. 150 (d) or the like, the second display (effect display 704) can be performed to reduce the visibility of the first display.
<Example 29 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 159 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 29 in chronological order. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, as a premise of the description of the thirtieth embodiment, an example of the operation means image display in the case of performing the normal operation means image display will be described. The present embodiment has a configuration in which the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated in response to the continuous hit of the chance button 136.

  Similarly to the timing shown in FIG. 150 (k), the timing shown in FIG. 150A shows, for example, a state before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second operation means image BG2, a second elapsed time notification image TG2 and a first status notification image SG1 are displayed, and above the second operation means image BG2 An image prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (e.g., a letter such as "Please store the feeling meter by pressing the button continuously!") Is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (B) shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has been started, and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the first While displaying the status notification image SG1 of the above, an image (for example, characters of "continuous hit!") Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is displayed above the second operation means image BG2.

  The timing shown in (C) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed (the reception period has progressed) from the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. The second elapsed time notification image TG2 displays an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is hit continuously, and the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is increased according to the number of hits (the feeling meter is accumulated). . That is, in this case, the change condition is one or more operations of the chance button 136, and the change condition is satisfied a plurality of times. Specifically, the first status notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases with an increase in the number of times the chance button 136 is continuously hit.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further elapsed from the timing of (C) in the same figure. An image is displayed in which the scale of the mark (filled portion) gradually decreases. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit continuously, and the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is increased from the timing of FIG. Indicates a state of accumulation.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state in which the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum (uppermost stage) within the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. . That is, while displaying the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 has reached the top, the character of "spirit MAX" is displayed above the first status notification image SG1, and the first status notification image SG1 is displayed. It is informed that the scale of the state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum (uppermost stage). In addition, after deleting the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters of "continuous hit" based on the first status notification image SG1 (meter) being accumulated to the maximum (or In the front of the image, an image 730 (in this example, the characters “Desperous!” And a character image (殿) in this example) corresponding to the notice effect are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (q) of FIG. In the same figure (F) and thereafter, the same "big hit" operation means image display as that in FIG. 151 (r) and the like is executed. In the present embodiment, the maximum position where the meters are accumulated may be determined in advance by lottery. That is, even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit repeatedly, the maximum value (for example, the eighth stage) determined by the lottery may not increase. In addition, even if the result of the pass / fail determination is “losing”, an effect of increasing to the maximum value (for example, the tenth stage) may be performed. In addition, even when the result of the pass / fail determination is "big hit", effects may be performed that do not increase to the maximum value (for example, the tenth stage) (for example, only increase to the eighth stage).

  The same figure (D ')-the same figure (G') are the example of a display in which the operation means image display of "the exfoliation" is performed in a present Example.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment is “dropout” and the effect of “dropout” is selected in the effect drawing, as shown in (D ′) and (E ′) in the figure, the second operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is received. Within the period (up to the end of the reception period), even if the chance button 136 is hit repeatedly, the first status notification image SG1 (meter) does not accumulate to the maximum (the scale does not change after it has accumulated halfway). indicate.

  At the timing shown in the figure (F '), the entire display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white back), and at the timing shown in the figure (G') Shows a scene in which the player lost the swordsman character.

From this point onward, the operation screen image display of “off” similar to that of FIG. 154 (q) or later is executed.
<Example 30 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 30 in chronological order. The figure shows a state corresponding to the timings shown in FIGS. 159 (A) to (C). That is, the present embodiment is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-ninth embodiment.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (C) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 159 (A) to (C). The figure (D) shows the state where time further passed from the figure (C), and with the increase in the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136, the state where the first status notification image SG1 is further increased It shows. Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases.

  The timing shown to the same figure (E) has shown the state which is performing the presentation display 704 during the reception period of operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of advance notice effects relating to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (tendon) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the feeling meter!" The visibility is reduced compared to before the display 704 is displayed (the same figure (A)). As described above, in the present embodiment, by being covered by the effect display 704, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and characters of "continuous hit!" Some are considered difficult for the player to view. On the other hand, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (the change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) continues the display so as to be visible to the player.

  The timing shown to the figure (F) has shown the state which is performing presentation display 704 during the reception period of operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 continuously. In this example, continuously hitting the chance button 136 even during the execution of the effect display 704 (even during a period in which a part of the first status notification image SG1 is difficult to be recognized by the effect display 704). Then, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is increased (the meter is accumulated) to display the image, and the change of the display mode of the meter (change of the increase display) is continued.

  Note that the effect display 704 that makes the first state notification image SG1 difficult to view (hides) may determine the position to be displayed based on the result of the determination of success or failure, or the operation of the chance button 136 ( It may be determined according to the number of times of continuous hitting or the like, or may be displayed when the scale reaches the top of the first status notification image SG1. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown to the same figure (G) has shown the state in which the effect display 704 was complete | finished during the reception period of operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is not displayed (erased), and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the first status notification image SG1 are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, the display of an image (for example, characters of “continuous hit!”) Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is continued above the second operation means image BG2.

Also in the present embodiment, each effect display 704 in FIG. 155 (Embodiment 25) to FIG. 158 (Embodiment 26) is applicable.
<Example 31 of image display of operation means>

  FIGS. 161 to 162 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the working example 31 in time series. In this embodiment, it is made difficult for the player to visually recognize the first status notification image SG1 with at least one of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 “Decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”, which is a combination of designs, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the pending display area 700, here, two pending icons PI1 and PI2 of the special drawing 1 are shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 6B, the suspension of Special Figure 1 is digested, and the suspension of Special Figure 1 fluctuation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and symbol variation display is performed in the first Special Display 212. Is started, and a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e blinks a circular figure.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, in the hold display area 700, a moving animation in which the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the digested hold is moved to the variable icon display area 702 has started.

  In the timing shown to the figure (d), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. Further, in the hold display area 700, the movement animation is completed, and the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed, and the change icon CI corresponding to the change game is displayed in the change icon display area 702.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure indicates that the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is in the state before the start, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, for example, to the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. State notification image SG (first state notification image SG1, second state notification image SG2, third state) in such a manner that the substantially entire surface of the display area is divided into a plurality of (here, three) in the vertical direction. The notification image SG3) is displayed. The status notification image SG in this example is also a meter whose scale increases from the lower level to the upper level with the passage of time (or the operating state of the chance button 136), etc., and here the whole is filled with the same color (for example, white). It is done. In addition, characters such as “Press and hold the button and decide the character!” Are displayed on the upper end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. At this timing, for example, the third state notification image SG3 on the right side is displayed on the rear surface of the special view fourth symbol display area 208e, the special view second symbol display area 208f, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol. , The fourth state notification image SG3 (first display) by the fourth pattern 217, 218 (round figure (flashing of the circle shape, triangle figure) and the reduced display 708 of the decoration pattern (both are the second display) The visibility of at least a part of) is reduced (the player is considered to be difficult to see).

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the operation of the long press) has started. For example, on the front of the second state notification image SG2 in the center, A notification display 706 prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed. The notification display 706 for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 in the present embodiment is, for example, the display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters “long press!”. Further, since it is at the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being completely filled.

  That is, at this timing, in the second status notification image SG2 (first display), the visibility of at least a part of the second status notification image SG2 is lowered by the notification display 706 (second display). (It is considered difficult for the player to see). In addition, the third status notification image SG3 (first display) continues to be at least a part of the third status notification image SG3 by the fourth symbol 217 and 218 and the reduced display of the decorative symbol (second display). The visibility is reduced (the player has made it difficult to see).

  The timings shown in (g) and (h) of the figure show a state in which the time (reception period) has progressed from the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification In each of the image SG2 and the third status notification image SG3, for example, an image in which the scale is sequentially increased from the lower side to the upper side is displayed. In this example, the scale is a divided image of a character (爺), a character (princess), and a character (殿). That is, in the first status notification image SG1, the character (爺), the second status notification image SG2 In the third state notification image SG3, the scale (divided image) of the character (SG) in the third state notification image SG3 is sequentially increased, and an image approaching the completed image is displayed. Also, in the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3, the speed at which the scale increases is different, and the speed at which the scale increases in the middle changes (for example, the same) Although the increase of the scale of the third status notification image SG3 is fast in FIG. 6G, the increase of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is fast in FIG. Not limited to this, at least one of the state notification images SG may be scaled at the same speed, or the speed may not be switched halfway. Further, with the progress of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure indicates that the acceptance period of the chance button 136 has further progressed, and the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3 are shown. In each of them, an image in which the scale gradually increases is displayed. Here, the scale of the second status notification image SG2 (character (princess)) is larger than the first status notification image SG1 (character (爺)) and the third status notification image SG3 (character (殿)). The upper row is reached, and the character (princess) approaches the completed image. Further, with the progress of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure further indicates the state at the end time of the reception period of the chance button 136. Here, in the first status notification image SG1 and the third status notification image SG3, the scale does not reach the uppermost end, and the completed images of the character (爺) and the character (殿) are not displayed, but the second state In the notification image SG2, the scale has reached the top, and the completed image of the character (princess) is displayed. In addition, with the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 has no filled portion of the first color, and an image filled with the entire second color (for example, white) is displayed It is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second status notification image SG2 (first display) is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 (second display). The change in the display mode of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (the change in which the filled portion decreases) can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol. In this example, the first state notification image SG1 (a part of the first display) does not overlap the second display at any timing, and is visible to the player. .

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure further shows the state after the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the notification display 706 (first operation means displayed on the front of the second state notification image SG2 The image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the display of the characters “long press!” Are erased, and the selection of the character (princess) is determined.

  The timings shown in the same figure (l) to the same figure (m) are in a state in which an effect indicating that the selection of the character (princess) is determined is being executed, and shown in the figures (n) to (o) The timing is a state in which the super reach effect by the determined character (princess) is performed.

  FIGS. 162 (p) and (q) show the state of the result of the yes or no judgment being released at the timing after FIG. 161 (o), and the symbols of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208 are shifted. The combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 6") is displayed in a fluctuating manner (the same figure (p)), and the stop display of the ornamental pattern is performed (the same figure (q)).

On the other hand, FIG. 162 (p ′) (q ′) shows that the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit at the timing after FIG. 161 (o), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208. The symbol combination of the big hit (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in a fluctuating manner (the same figure (p ')), and the stop display of the ornamental pattern is performed (the same figure (q')).
<Example 32 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 32 in time series. This embodiment has a configuration in which the scales of the meters of the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2 and the third status notification image SG3 are respectively increased similarly to the 32nd embodiment. There is.

  The timing shown in the figure (A) shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 161 (e), and shows the state before the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown to the figure (B) is the timing after the figure (A), and has shown the state in which the presentation display 704 is started before the start of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is displayed with priority (on the front) over the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3. In this example, the effect display 704 performs display (animation display) of group notice effect which is a kind of big hit notice effect of the special figure in the variation game, and the leading character is shown at the timing shown in FIG. (Hani) appears and executes moving animation moving from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the third status notification image SG3 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in (C) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (f) of FIG. 161, and shows a state where the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the operation of long press) has started. That is, on the front of the second state notification image SG2 at the center, a notification display 706 prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 (a first operation means image BG1, a first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a character of "long press!" Display). Also, the effect display 704 (an animation display of group notices) is continued, and a moving animation in which a plurality of characters (Hani) appear is executed following the leading character (Hani). Further, since it is at the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being completely filled. A part of the second status notification image SG2 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 and the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third status notification image SG3 is the effect display 704. The (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (g) of FIG. 161, and the notification display 706 continues on the front of the second status notification image SG2. In addition, the effect display 704 is also continued, and a large number of characters (Hani) appear one after another following the leading character (Hani) and execute moving animation from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Do. The effect display 704 is executed prior to (in front of) the notification display 706. That is, a part of the second status notification image SG2 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 displayed on the front, and the notification display 706 is displayed on the front to the player It is considered difficult to see. In addition, it is made difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first status notification image SG3 by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a portion of the third status notification image SG3 is the effect display 704 (character ( It is considered difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of Hani), the fourth symbol, and the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in the figure (E) is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 161 (h), and the notification display 706 continues on the front of the second status notification image SG2. Although the effect display 704 is also continued, the effect display 704 ends on the front of the third status notification image SG3 and the second status notification image SG2 because of the moving animation display. That is, a part of the third status notification image SG3 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of the fourth symbol and the decoration symbol, and a part of the second status notification image SG2 is displayed by the notification display 706 Although it is considered difficult for the player to visually recognize, the notification display 706 can be visually recognized by the player because the animation moving on the front surface is finished. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)).

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (i) of FIG. 161, and shows the state where the effect display 704 is finished.

In the present embodiment, the notification display 706 for reducing the visibility of the second status notification image SG2 (first display) is considered to be difficult for the player to view by the effect display 704 displayed on the front. In addition, the effect display 704 (animation display) has a period in which changes in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (changes in which the filled portion decreases) may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (FIG. There are also periods when it becomes visible (the same figure (C), (E), (F)). In this case, the effect display 704 is also an animation (image) that allows the player to visually recognize the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 over the entire reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Good.
<Example 33 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 33 in time series. In this embodiment, a tutorial display (tutorial preview) 710 is performed in place of the effect display 704 (group preview display) of the embodiment 32 (FIG. 163).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 161A and 161B are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 161E, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. There is also an image of a tutorial display 710 (here, an image of a balloon and a pattern in which the meter suddenly accumulates) at a timing before the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the long press operation). The display of the character "" is performed. The tutorial display 710 is displayed on the front of the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 to reduce their visibility.

  The timing shown in FIG. 161C is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 161F, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the notification display 706 displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2 by the tutorial display 710. It is assumed.

The timing shown in the figure (D) is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 161 (g), and shows a state where the tutorial display 710 is erased. The tutorial display 710 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706. Here, the tutorial display may indicate a display for explaining an effect (a notice, a character, or the like) performed on the gaming machine.
<Example 34 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 34 in time series. In the present embodiment, the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG is reduced by the prefetch suspension icon 712.

  Although the timings shown in FIGS. 161A and 161B are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 161E, the moving animation of the prefetch suspension icon 712 starts at the timing shown in FIG. It shows the state.

  Although the timings shown in FIGS. 161C and 161D are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 161F and 161G, the moving animation of the prefetch suspension icon 712 continues, and FIG. At the timing, the prefetch suspension icon 712 is displayed on the front of a part of the first status notification image SG1, and it is considered that the player can not visually recognize a part of the first status notification image SG1.

Although the timing shown in FIG. 161E is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 161H, the standby animation of the prefetch suspension icon 712 continues, and the prefetch suspension icon 712 causes the first status notification image to be displayed. It is considered that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize part of SG1. In the same figure (D) and the same figure (E), the area for the first status notification image SG1 in which the readiness declines (is hidden) by the readiness hold icon 712 because the readiness hold icon 712 moves during standby. Is changing. The pre-reading suspension icon 712 in the present embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.
<Example 35 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 35 in chronological order. In the present embodiment, the error display 714 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  Timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as the timings shown in (e) to (g) and (m) of FIG. 161, respectively. Here, as an example, a door open error is detected at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, and an error display 714 (for example, “error: door open!” Is displayed) is shown. . The error display 714 is displayed, for example, over the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3.

The error display 714 is continuously displayed, for example, as long as the state of the door open error is not released as shown in FIG. The error display 714 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.
<Example 36 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the thirty-sixth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the alert notification display 718 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) is a state in which the big hit end screen is displayed, and the timing shown in (b) is a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped before the game of the first variation after the definite variation big end is started. It shows the condition that has been

  The timing shown to the figure (c) is the state which is performing the alerting | reporting alerting | reporting display 718 on the front surface of the decorative symbol (here the symbol combination of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" which is stopped and displayed). It shows. The alert notification display 718 is, for example, configured to move and display a character string for alerting the band-like background image.

  The timing shown in (d) and (e) of the figure indicates that the suspension game has been reduced to one (the number of suspension is reduced from 4 to 3), and the variation game of the special diagram 1 has started. In addition, the alert notification display 718 continues. At these timings, a warning notification display 718 is superimposed on the strip-shaped background image, and the characters “Please note that the prepaid card has been removed” are moved and displayed.

  Although the number of reservations is different, the timing shown in (f) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. An alert notification display 718 is displayed on the front of the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2 and the third status notification image SG3, and the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 A part of the third state notification image SG3 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, a reduced display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the third state notification image SG3.

  Although the number of reservations differs in the timing shown to the figure (g), the same timing as the timing shown to FIG. 161 (f) is shown as operation means image display. A notification display 706 is displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is displayed on the front. A part of the second status notification image SG2 (eg, the characters "long press!") Is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is the player by the alert notification display 718. It is considered difficult to see The first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3 are considered to be difficult to view, as in the case of FIG.

  Timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure indicate the same state as the timings shown in (i) and (j) of FIG. A notification display 706 is displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is displayed on the front. A part of the second status notification image SG2 (eg, the characters "long press!") Is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is the player by the alert notification display 718. It is considered difficult to see The first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3 are considered to be difficult to view, as in the case of FIG.

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows a state in which the alert notification display 718 has been deleted, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2 becomes visible to the player. There is.

The alert notification display 718 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706. In addition, the alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment repeatedly displays the movement display of “please be careful to forget the prepaid card” a predetermined number of times (for example, display until the movement display makes two turns) Control is continued, but may be displayed for a fixed time (for example, 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation). Although the alert notification display 718 in the present embodiment is performed before the start of fluctuation of the special drawing, it may be performed after the start of fluctuation of the special drawing. In the alert notification display 718, the gaming state before the big hit start is the special figure low certainty state, and the gaming state after the big hit end is shifted to the special figure high certainty high certainty state (certain change state). Only when the special figure high probability figure low certainty state (time reduction state) to the special figure low certainty figure low certainty state (normal state) when transitioning (ie 1st change after time reduction end) It may only be done. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, it may be performed after the big hit end.
Example 37 of Image Display of Operation Means

  168 to 169 are diagrams showing image display of operation means of the embodiment 37 in time series. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as a premise of the description of the thirty-eighth to forty-first embodiments, an example of image display of operation means in the case of performing normal operation means image display will be described. In the present embodiment, a reach effect of causing the player to operate the chance button 136 once to a plurality of times is executed. For example, the state notification image (here, the first state notification) is generated by plural operations of the chance button 136 The scale of the meter of the image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2) is changed.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 150H and 150I, although the position of the reduced display of the decorative symbol is different.

  The timing shown in the figure (C) is a first state notification image SG1 which displays the confrontation scene between the character (殿) and the sword australia character, and at the same time, indicates with the meter the degree of damage of the character (殿And a state in which the second state notification image SG2 is displayed. In addition, the characters “YOSHIMUNE” and “KENGOU” are displayed above the first status notification image SG1 and above the second status notification image SG2.

  The timing shown to the figure (D) shows the state which has displayed the operation alerting | reporting display 720 which alert | reports the operation timing of the chance button 136, etc. FIG. Here, in order to notify the number of times of operation of the chance button 136, the operation notification display 720 displays the characters "Chance is three times!" On the belt-like background image.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state in which an operation notification display 720 is displayed to notify that the first operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to the attack of the character.

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure shows the state before the start of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 corresponding to the operation means image BG1 and the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure shows a state after the start of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. Image is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (H) shows a state in which the first operation of the chance button 136 (attack of the character) has been performed. While temporarily erasing the operation notification display 720, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the second status notification image SG2 displays an image with a reduced scale (filled portion), Informing the decrease of the damage of the character.

  The respective timings shown in (I) to (L) of the figure are operation means image display corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136. The second operation of the chance button 136 is an operation corresponding to the counterattack of the sword character, with the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 displayed, as in FIG. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

  The respective timings shown in (M) to (O) of the figure are states in which operation means image display corresponding to the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In the third operation of the chance button 136, the third operation means image BG3 and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 are displayed ((O) in the figure).

Each timing shown in FIGS. 169P to 169R shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. 168O. The third operation is performed during the reception period of the third operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. (P)), and the character (() thereby wins (FIG. (Q) (R)), and the reduction display is performed. The displayed decorative symbols stop and display symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7") that will be a big hit (the same figure (R)). In the present embodiment, it can be said that the operation notification display 720 is the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.
<Example 38 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 38 in time series. This embodiment makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 or the second status notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the 37th embodiment. It is a display example.

  The timing shown in the figure (C) is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C).

  The timing shown to the figure (D) has shown the state as which the presentation display 704 was displayed on the front of 1st status alerting | reporting image SG1 of the figure (C). The effect display 704 in this example is a mission achievement display, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first state notification image SG1 (a meter for displaying the damage of the character).

The timing shown in the figure (E) shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 168 (D), and the timing shown in the figure (F) shows a state in which the effect display 704 is erased.
<Example 39 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 39 in chronological order. This embodiment makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 or the second status notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the 37th embodiment. This is a display example, and the effect display 704 here is a hitting indication.

  The timing shown in the figure (C) is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C).

  The timing shown to the figure (D) has shown the state by which the effect display (strike method alerting | reporting display) 704 was displayed on the front surface of 1st status alerting | reporting image SG1 of the figure (C). Thereby, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (a meter for displaying the damage of the character (殿)) and a part of the second status notification image SG2 (a meter for displaying the damage of the character (殿)) It is considered difficult to be recognized by people.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (D) of FIG. 168, and the timing shown in (R) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (R) of FIG. It is a thing. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the reach effect is finished, the effect display (the strike notification display) 704 is continued. The effect display (strike indication display) 704 is a predetermined time from the last sensor detection (for example, detection of passage of the game ball by the sensor of the common view starting opening 228) by the game ball hit in the area on the right side of the board The display is terminated (the display is erased), for example, when.

Note that the beating notification display may be displayed when the player operates (turns) the steering wheel to a certain position (a position where the game ball is hit to the right area). In that case, the display may be ended when the player operates the steering wheel to a certain position (a position where the game ball is hit to the left area). In addition, not only the effect display but also notification by sound may be performed simultaneously with the effect display.
<Example 40 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 40 in time series. In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 or the second status notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment is lowered in visibility by the effect display 704 (game This is a display example that makes it difficult for the person to view. Although the display example in the case where the chance button 136 is operated three times has been described in the example 37, the present embodiment is a display example in the case where the chance button 136 is operated twice.

  The timing shown to the figure (G) has shown the same state as the timing shown to FIG. 168 (G).

  The timing shown to the figure (H) has shown the state in which the chance button 136 was operated during the reception period of the 1st operation of the chance button 136, and, thereby, the presentation display 704 was displayed. The effect display 704 is, for example, a notice effect, and is displayed (cut in) so that the image of the panda is inserted into the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 here. As a result, at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, the timing shown in (I) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 is displayed on the rear surface of the special view 1 symbol display area 208e, the special view 2 symbol display area 208f, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, whereby the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image All of the state notification images SG2 are considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown to the same figure (J) shows the state by which the presentation display 704 was erase | eliminated (it complete | finished). In this state, the character (panda) is added next to the character (殿), and the display above the first status notification image SG1 (representation display) is also from "YOSHIMUNE" (see (G) in the figure) from "YOSHIMUNE & PANDA". Has changed.

  The timing shown in the figure (K) shows a state before the start (direct) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and corresponds to the second operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The second operation means image BG2 to be displayed and a second elapsed time notification image TG2 corresponding to the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (L) shows the state after the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases Image is displayed.

The respective timings shown in FIGS. (M) to (O) show a state in which the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, and the operation means image display is shown in FIGS. 169 (Q) to (R). Since this is the same as the state of each timing, the description is omitted.
<Example 41 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the forty-first embodiment in time series. The present embodiment has a configuration for executing a rewind effect in addition to the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and the first status notification image is displayed by a part of the rewind effect display. It is an example of a display which makes the visibility of at least one part of SG1 or 2nd status alerting | reporting image SG2 fall (it makes a player hard to recognize visually).

  The respective timings shown in FIGS. (L) to (P) are in the same state as the respective timings shown in FIGS. 168 (L) to 168 (P).

  The timing shown in the figure (P) shows a state (state at the time of start of execution) in which the rewind effect is started to be executed based on, for example, the third operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, the pause mark and the characters "pause" are displayed as the effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the same image is displayed for a predetermined time, and the image is stopped. It looks like it's Even in this case, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the blinking of the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e are continued.

  The timing shown to the same figure (Q) has shown the state in execution of rewind production | presentation. At this timing, the rewind mark and the characters "rewind" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the effect display 704, and an image displayed at an earlier timing (image several frames earlier) It looks like it is displaying the rewind display. Here, the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 6O is redisplayed, and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 also displays an image that is entirely filled.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6R indicates a state in which the rewind effect is being performed, and the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In the timing (L) of the figure, the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 are displayed, and by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect, the entire first status notification image SG1 and A part of the second state notification image SG2 is hidden, and it is considered difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In each of the timings shown in (S) to (V) in the figure, a rewind effect is subsequently executed, and as shown in (S) and (T) in the figure, the second operation means image BG2 and the second progress It shows a state in which the time notification image TG2 is displayed. Note that although the meter (scale) of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is also displayed as being rewound in (S) and (T) in the same figure, it is actually outside the reception period of the chance button 136. Also in the period (S) to (V) of the same figure, the entire first state notification image SG1 and a part of the second state notification image SG2 are hidden by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect, and the game It is considered difficult to be recognized by people.

  The timing shown in (W) of the figure shows the state at the end of the rewind effect, and the image displayed at the timing of FIG. 168 (B) is re-displayed, and the effect display 704 of the rewind display is displayed. It is displayed. The timing shown in the figure (X) shows the state after the end of the rewind effect. After this, the operation means image display of FIG. 168 (B) and subsequent steps is executed again.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which an image several frames before is re-displayed as a rewind effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rewind movie (reverse playback movie) may be prepared and played back. Reproduction may be performed using a control movie which actually rewinds and reproduces a movie used in the operation means image display. During the rewinding effect, the operation means image and / or the elapsed time notification image may be hidden.

In the above embodiment, the effect display 704 may be changed to the notification display 706, or the notification display 706 may be changed to the effect display 704.
<Example 42 of image display of operation means>

  The outline and the other modification of the fifth embodiment will be described as a working example 42 with reference to FIGS. 174 to 181.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram for describing an outline of the fifth embodiment. The game console of the fifth embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) as shown in the figure, and the display means is a first display (for example, first Means for displaying at least the state notification image SG1). The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a display according to the operation timing, a display according to the number of consecutive strokes, etc.), and the first display corresponds to the operation of the operation means Accordingly, the display mode of the first display is at least changeable (for example, increase display or decrease display capable of increasing the scale of the meter is possible) display, and the first display indicates the second state (for example, the player In the case where the advance notice effect display 704 is executed (at a time when it is advantageous) (eg, the state where the advance notice effect display 704 is not executed), the visibility is at least It is the display which becomes low.

  FIG. 175 is a schematic diagram for explaining the first display in FIG. (A) to (h) of the figure are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In the first display, as shown in display A-0 ′ of FIG. 5C to display AN of FIG. 5F, the operation means is operated during a period such as an operation reception period. It is a display (effect display) in which a display mode changes. The display A-0 in FIG. 6 (b) shows an image etc. to be the first display, but shows a state in which the reception period of the operation has not started, and the display A in FIG. -N 'indicates a state in which the image or the like that was the first display is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, after the start of the reception period of the operation means (chance button 136) (the same figure (c)) to the end of the reception period (except the end time) (the same figure (f)). It is a period, and when the operation means is operated during this period, the display in which the display mode changes is taken as the first display.

  In addition, the operation of the operation means is a single operation, a plurality of operations, a continuous hit, a long press, a noncontact operation detected by a proximity sensor etc. and a flick operation detected by a touch sensor etc. . In addition, the period during which the operation means is operated is the time from display A to display until it is deleted (before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. The time until the end may be set as the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 6B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG. It is also good.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram for describing the outline of the fifth embodiment from another viewpoint. The game console of the fifth embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) as shown in the figure, and the display means is a first display (for example, first Means for displaying at least the elapsed time notification image TG1 and the first state notification image SG1). The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), and the first display is the establishment of a change condition (for example, the progress of the reception period of the operation for the chance button 136). Or, when there is a continuous hit of the chance button 136, the display mode of the first display is at least changeable (for example, the reduction display capable of reducing the scale of the meter can be displayed), and the first display is From the first state (e.g., a state in which the advance notice effect is not performed) in the second state (e.g., a state in which the advance notice effect that is advantageous to the player is performed) Is also a display at which the visibility is at least low, and the first display is a display that at least continues the change of the display mode of the first display when in the second state.

  FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram for explaining the first display in FIG. (A) to (h) of the figure are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes with the passage of time, as shown by display B-0 ′ in FIG. 5C to display BN in FIG. is there. The display b-0 in (b) in the figure shows a state in which the image or the like to be the first display is displayed, but the reception period of the operation has not started, and the display B in FIG. -N 'indicates a state in which the image or the like that was the first display is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, after the start of the reception period of the operation means (chance button 136) (the same figure (c)) to the end of the reception period (except the end time) (the same figure (f)). A display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time during this period is taken as a first display.

  In addition, the time is not limited to the period in which the operation means can be accepted, but the total time during which the operation means is actually operated (for example, the operation time when the chance button 136 is operated a plurality of times (including continuous hitting)) And the time during which the operation means is continuously operated (for example, long press). Also, the time from display B to display B may be taken as the time from the start of the reception period shown in (b) to the time after the end of the reception period shown in (g) in the figure). That is, the display before the start of the reception period shown in (b) in the figure and the display after the end of the reception period shown in (g) in the figure may be made as the first display.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram for describing the second display. (A) to (h) of the figure (A) are display examples of the operation means image display at a plurality of timings of the pachinko machine 100. In the figure, the second display is represented as display C, and the first display is represented as display A (see FIG. 175) or display B (see FIG. 176). Further, FIG. 7B is a view in which the display start timing of the second display (display C) is displayed as time elapses.

  In addition, the second display (display C) is, for example, effect display 704 (animation display, strike effect display, rewind effect display, tutorial display, pre-reading hold icon, error display, big hit finalized display, probability change state or time saving state And the like, the notification display 706, the fourth symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol.

  The display timing of the second display (display C) may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B) as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, it may be simultaneously with the start of the display of the first display or after the start of the display of the first display. After the display start of the first display is a period immediately after the display start of the first display or a period of, for example, about 10 seconds at the longest after the display start of the first display. Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, it may be before the start of the reception period of the operation of the operation means (FIGS. 175B and 177B). Moreover, as shown to the figure (d)-(f), it may be during the reception period of operation of the operation means (during the period when the display mode of 1st display is changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (g), it may be after the reception period of the operation of the operation means is completed (FIG. 175 (g), FIG. 177 (g)). Alternatively, as shown in (h) of the figure, it may be after (or immediately after) erasing the first display. Further, the start timing of the second display is not limited to the same timing at all times, and one or more timings of (a) to (h) in the same drawing may be combined.

  On the other hand, the deletion timing of the second display may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B) as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, it may be simultaneously with the start of the display of the first display or after the start of the display of the first display. After the display start of the first display is a period immediately after the display start of the first display or a period of, for example, about 10 seconds at the longest after the display start of the first display. Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, it may be before the start of the reception period of the operation of the operation means (FIGS. 175B and 177B). Moreover, as shown to the figure (d)-(f), it may be during the reception period of operation of the operation means (during the period when the display mode of 1st display is changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 17 (g), it may be after the reception period of the operation of the operation means is completed (FIG. 175 (g), FIG. 177 (g)). Alternatively, as shown in (h) of the figure, it may be after (or immediately after) erasing the first display. Further, the erasing timing of the second display is not limited to the same timing at all times, and one or more timings of (a) to (h) in FIG.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the second display. In the second display, the display mode and the display position may not change during the display period, or at least one of the display mode and the display position may change.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the second display (display C) hides the entire first display (display A or display B) (the first display is difficult for the player to see). It may be

  Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B) while the size (area) of the second display By changing (reducing), the area of the region hiding the first display may change (reduce).

  Further, as shown in (c) of the figure, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B) while the size (area) of the second display By changing (expanding), the area of the region hiding the first display may be changed (expanded).

  Further, as shown in (d) of the figure, in the second display (display C), the display position of the second display moves while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B). Thus, the position of the area for hiding the first display may change (move).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, the second display (display C) is a display position (or display of the second display) while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B). The direction of movement may change (move) the area of the area to hide the first display, the area to hide, or the position to hide depending on the shape of the second display.

  Further, as shown in (f) of the figure, the second display (display C) changes its shape, and while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), The change in the shape of the second display may change (move) the area of the area to hide the first display, the area to hide, or the position to hide.

  The second display may be composed of any one of the combinations of (a) to (f), and one or more or all of the combinations of (a) to (f) of the same. It may be configured. Also, for example, in the combination of two or more or all of the figures (a) to (f), the change in the figure (c) after the change in the left figure → the middle figure → the right figure. In addition, the left figure of the figure (b) → figure (a) → the constitution which changes with the middle figure of the figure (b) is also included (the figure (a) The same applies to (f) of FIG.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the first state and the second state in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, in the second state, the second display (display C) overlaps the first display (display A or display B). In the second state, the visibility of the first display is lower than in the second state.

  That is, as shown in the left figure of the figure (a), in the first state, only the first display (Display A or Display B) is displayed, and the second display (Display C) is not displayed. In the second state, as shown in the middle view of the figure (a), superimposed on (in front of) the first display (Display A or Display B), the second display (Display C) is transparent. It is in the state displayed at a rate of 0%. Alternatively, the second state may be superimposed on (on the front of) the first display (Display A or Display B) as shown in the right of FIG. The display is made with less than 100% (e.g., 50% transmittance).

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the same figure (b), the first state is superimposed on (in front of) only the first display (Display A or Display B), and the second display (Display C) is The state is displayed small (for example, smaller than the first display), and the second state is superimposed on the first display as shown in FIG. The display is larger than the left in FIG.

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the figure (c), the first state is superimposed on (on the front of) the first display (Display A or Display B) and the second display (Display C) is The second state is a state in which a large transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 80%) is displayed, and the second state is a first display (display A or display B) as shown in FIG. And the second display (display C) is displayed with a small transmittance (for example, 30% or 50% of transmittance).

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the figure (d), the first state is a state in which the first display (display A or display B) and the second display (display C) do not overlap. In the second state, the second display (display C) is displayed superimposed on (on the front of) the first display (display A or display B) as shown in FIG. It is in the state of In this case, the transmittance of the second display in the second state is 0% or more (including the case where there is only a frame and no filling), and is less than 100%.

  Moreover, as shown in the left figure of the figure (e), the first state is a state in which only the first display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the second state is the same as e) A second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure, and the second display is the first display This is the case of similar colors. Even when the second display is displayed on the rear side of the first display, in the case where these are similar colors, the first display has low visibility.

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the figure (f), the first state is a state in which the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B). The second display is not the same color as the first display, and the second state is the back surface of the first display (Display A or Display B) as shown in the right of the figure (f). The second display (display C) is displayed on the second display, and the second display has the same color as the first display.

  It is to be noted that only one of (the change of) the display mode of the second display shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f) or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 179 (a) to (f) can be shown in FIG. Only one of the first state and the second state shown in) to (f), or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (f) may be applied to each other.

  FIG. 181 shows the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, the third status notification image SG3, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, which are described as meters (gauges) in the above embodiment. It is a figure which shows other forms, such as 2nd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG2, and 3rd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG3.

  As shown in the figures (a) to (a ′ ′), the meter is not limited to an image consisting of one continuous region, but is composed of a plurality of images (ticks M) separated from each other, and the scale group MG 1 It may constitute two meters. In that case, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the divisions M may have the same shape, or as shown in FIG. 6B, the divisions M may have only the same shape. All the graduations M may have different shapes as shown in FIG. In the meter, the maximum number of graduations is simultaneously displayed as a graduation group MG, and the display mode (for example, the filling color etc.) of each graduation M sequentially changes (is filled) over time. The configuration may be such that each scale M is sequentially displayed as time passes (the number of scale M increases).

  The figure (b) is an example of the meter which the number of the graduations M increases. In this example, the scale M drops from above as time passes, and is accumulated in the meter. However, as shown in FIG. 180, due to the change in transmittance of each scale, the meter M May be filled in.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, the meter is not limited to a configuration in which the length and the area are stacked and increased (having a shape as a so-called meter or gauge), and may be increased from the inner side to the outer side. It is sufficient that the configuration of the entire meter can be visually recognized so as to expand, contract, or expand by the change.

Moreover, although the case where a meter increases was demonstrated to the example here, it is applicable similarly about the structure which a meter reduces.
In conventional gaming machines, it has been desired to further enhance the interest of games.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game console capable of improving the interest of a player, and to provide a game console according to the present invention. According to this, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  That is, as described above, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment includes display means (for example, decoration symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, chance button 136) The display unit is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, the first status notification image SG1), and the first display relates to the operation of the operation unit. The display (for example, the display according to the operated timing, the display according to the number of consecutive strokes, etc.), the first display indicates that the display mode of the first display is at least according to the operation of the operation means A changeable indication (e.g. a decreasing indication or an increasing indication of the scale of the meter), said first indication being in a second state (e.g. a state of execution of a "hot" effect) ,first State (e.g., "HOT" non-execution state of the effect) visibility than is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation means (chance button 136) (operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player, continuous hitting, etc.). In addition, as the visibility of the first display may be lowered, the line of sight of the player may be able to be concentrated on the display means. Also, in some cases, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight around the first display, and to urge the player to operate the operation means.
In addition, "the display regarding the operation of the operation means" may mean the following display (a) "a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means".

(B) "a display including a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is received"

(C) "a display including a display indicating that the effect to operate the operation means is performed (or performed)"

(D) Display of only one of the above (a) to (c), or a combination of two or more (two or all)

(E) It may be a display that does not include the display of one or two or more combinations (two or all) of the above ((a) to (c).

  In addition, “the visibility is at least lowered” may indicate that “at least a part or all of the first display is at least difficult to be viewed in the second state”. . Alternatively, it may indicate that "when in the second state, at least a part or all of the first display is at least invisible."

  Also, "in the case where the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state" means "at least a part or all of the first display. It may indicate that the visibility is at least low. Alternatively, it may indicate that "the visibility of at least part or all of two or more of the plurality of displays is lowered". The “two or more displays” may indicate “two or more displays including the first display”.

In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, effect display 704), and in the second state, at least a part of the second display is the first display. It may be in a state of overlapping at least a part of
According to such a configuration, the second display may be made noticeable.

  Note that “a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display” means the following state:

(A) It may indicate that "at least a part of the second display is displayed prior to at least a part of the first display"

(B) “at least a part of the second display is displayed on the front side (front side) than at least a part of the first display” (for example, “on the layer front side where the first display is displayed It may indicate "displayed on a layer" or "displayed before the first display in the same layer". Here, "the front side" may indicate "the side closer to the player".

(C) It may indicate that "at least a part of the second display is displayed overlapping (overlapping) with at least a part of the first display"

(D) A state of only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be indicated

(E) It may be a state which does not include the display of one or two or more combinations (two or all) of the above (a) to (c).

  In addition, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, the player may feel discomfort and be able to concentrate more on the game because the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display. is there.

Note that the state in which the second display is not displayed and the second display are displayed in the state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display. But includes any of the states in which the first display is not hidden. That is, "a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display" means the following state (a) "the second display is displayed on the display means It may indicate "not displayed"

(B) "a part of the second display may be displayed in a position not overlapping with a part or all of the first display"

(C) “a state in which all of the second display is displayed so as not to overlap with part or all of the first state” may be shown

(D) One or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may not be shown.

  Further, the first display is a display including at least a meter display (for example, the first state notification image SG1), and the meter display has at least a display mode of the meter display according to the operation of the operation means. It may be a changeable display.

  According to such a configuration, by lowering the visibility of the meter display, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the operating condition of the operating means and to prompt the operation of the operating means.

The game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the second display may be an effect display (for example, effect display 704).
According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the effect display noticeable.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image to be non-displayed, and the display means may not draw the image to be non-displayed.

  Such a configuration may reduce the processing load of drawing.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment is a game console provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, chance button 136) The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1, a first status notification image SG1), and the first display is the operation unit The display related to the operation of (for example, the reception period of the operation, the display regarding the state of the operation), the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the start of the reception period of the operation, the reception period of the operation The display mode of the first display is at least changeable display (for example, decrease display or increase display of the scale of the meter) when there is operation of the operation means, continuous hitting or long press of the operation means, etc. Previous When the first display is in the second state (for example, the execution state of the “hot” effect), the first display is more visible than the first state (eg, the non-execution state of the “hot” effect). The first display is a display for at least continuing the change of the display mode of the first display when in the second state. It is a stand.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display. Further, in some cases, it is possible to cause the player to not miss the fact that the line of sight is induced to a hot notice and the reception time of the operation of the operation means is short. In addition, as the visibility of the first display may be lowered, the line of sight of the player may be able to be concentrated on the display means. Also, in some cases, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight around the first display, and to urge the player to operate the operation means.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.), and the second state means at least a part of the second display. May be in a state of overlapping at least a part of the first display.
According to such a configuration, the second display may be made noticeable.

  In addition, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and concentrate more on the game because there is a state in which the second displays do not overlap.

  Further, the first display may be a display including at least meter display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the first state notification image SG1).

  According to such a configuration, by lowering the visibility of the meter display, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the changing state of the meter display and to prompt the operation of the operation means.

The second display may be an effect display (for example, the effect display 704, the notification display 706, and the like).
According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the effect display noticeable.

  Further, the game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display mode of the first display is a display mode which can be at least changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the requirement that the change condition is satisfied. The term may be a requirement including at least a lapse of a first time from the display of the first aspect.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the progress of the reception time of the operation incomprehensible and to urge the operation of the operation means more by lowering the visibility of the change of the change mode due to the passage of time.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image to be non-displayed, and the display means may not draw the image to be non-displayed.

  Such a configuration may reduce the processing load of drawing.

  In addition, the first region in the first display may be a region having lower visibility than the first state when in the second state.

In addition, the second region in the first display may be a region having higher visibility than the first region when in the second state.
Note that the above first and second areas may be the following areas:

(A) The first area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means. Here, the meter (display) refers to a display (for example, the first status notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) in which the scale is increased or decreased depending on the elapsed time or the change in the state.

(B) The first area may be an area that does not include part or all of the area in which the display mode changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

(C) The first area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a button image) or the whole of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means. Here, the button image means an operation means (an image imitating the chance button 136 (for example, the first operation means image BG1, etc.).

(D) The first area may be an area not including part or all of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means.

(E) The first region may have a combination of two or more of the above (a) to (d). For example, (a) and (c), (a) and (d), (b) and (c) can be combined.

(A ′) The second area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means.

(B ') The second area may be an area not including part or all of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means.

(C ') The second area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a button image) or the whole of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means

(D ') The second area may be an area not including part or all of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means

(E ') The second region may have a configuration in which two or more (or all) of the above (a') to (d ') are combined. For example, (a ') and (c'), (a ') and (d'), (b ') and (c') can be combined.

  The second display may be a display relating to a game. In addition, as an example of “display regarding game”, error display, operation request notification, alert display, effect display, notice display, original mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demonstration display, power on Display (power on, power on, etc.), etc. may be mentioned.

  Further, the display unit may not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) at least when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is finished.

  The display means may be means for not displaying a part of the first display when the operation of the operation means has been accepted. Here, the "part of the first display" may have the following configuration.

(A) It may be a display showing all or part of a button image (such as the first operation means image BG1)

(B) A display showing all or part of a meter display (such as the first status notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1)

(C) It may be a display showing all or part of a display prompting an operation (for example, character display etc.)

(D) It may be a combination of two or more or all of the above (a) to (c) (e) Only one of the above (a) to (c) It may be shown.

  Further, the display means may be means for not displaying the entire first display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed. Here, “the entire first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) A display indicating a meter display (such as the first status notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be used.

(B) A plurality of displays including a meter display (for example, a button image or a display prompting an operation (for example, character display)) may be shown.

  In addition, the display means is means for not displaying at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image or the like) at least when the second time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation means is started. May be

  Further, the display means may continuously display part or all of the first display when the acceptance of the operation means is finished.

  Further, the display means may be means for continuously displaying the meter display when the reception of the operation of the operation means is finished. The display means continues to display the meter display when the acceptance of the operation means is finished, and the meter display is performed when the deletion condition of the meter display is satisfied (for example, the end of the effect display). The display of may be terminated.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may be changeable from the first mode to the second mode. The first display aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the third aspect, and may be changeable from the third aspect to the second aspect. That is, the invention is not limited to the change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and may be one that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect via other plural aspects (third aspect). .

  Moreover, the following are mentioned as "effect display" in the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, effect display of notice display system (prefetching (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.) effect display, effect display of the variation (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.), non notice system (tutorial, demo, user mode, It is an effect indication of the hold indication, the fourth symbol, the indication about the big hit, the decoration symbol etc. Also, other notice effect indication, the indication indication about the big hit, the user mode indication, the demonstration display, the tutorial indication, the effect using the decoration symbol The display may be an effect display using a hold icon or the like.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the second display described using FIG. 180, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Moreover, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may be 0% (may not be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the second display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  In addition, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may change stepwise, and the “gradient change” means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may change continuously, and the “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. Change to a third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the first display described using FIG. 180, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  In addition, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may be 0% (may not be transmitted).

  In addition, the transmittance of at least a part of the first display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  In addition, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may change stepwise, and the “gradient change” means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may change continuously, and the “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. Change to a third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In the above embodiment, the first display (or the second display) may at least include a display imitating the operation means. Here, “the one that at least includes the display imitating the operation means” may indicate only the display imitating the operation means (for example, the first operation means image BG1 or the like). In addition, the term “display at least including a display imitating an operation means” refers to a display displayed in a period overlapping with a period in which a display imitating the operation means and a display imitating the operation means are displayed (for example, a first Both a meter (or a gauge) indicating a reception period of an operation such as the elapsed time notification image TG1 or the like, a display by characters such as “press a button!”, An effect, etc. may be shown.

  Also, the first display (or the second display) may at least include a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means. Here, "the notification at least including a notice prompting the operation of the operation means" is only a notice prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, a character such as "press a button!" Or a display by an image or animation for operating a button) May be indicated. In addition, a period overlapping a period in which a notification prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, a character such as "press a button!" Or an image or animation display for operating the button or the like) and a notification prompting the operation of the operation means are displayed May indicate both of the display (background image, effect, meter (gauge), etc.) displayed on the screen.

  The first display (or the second display) may be displayable when at least display control is performed. Here, "display control" may be executed at least when a condition including operation of the operation means is satisfied. Moreover, "display control" may be displayed when a command is transmitted from the second control means (the first sub control unit or the second sub control unit).

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example described as "display with high visibility" may be applied to "display with low visibility", and an example described as "display with low visibility" is " The present invention may be applied to “display with high visibility”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, "at least a part" means that it may be only a part or whole (all).

  Further, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can be combined with other embodiments for each configuration in each of the embodiments.

  In the fifth embodiment, the requirement that the change condition is satisfied is a requirement including at least the operation of the operation means. Here, the "operation of the operating means" may have the following configuration.

(A) "It may indicate that the operation means has been operated by the detection means (the sensor of the operation means)"

(B) It may indicate that "the command has been transmitted to the first (second) secondary control unit by the detection means"

(C) It may indicate that the first (second) secondary control unit has received the command transmitted by the detection means.

(D) Any one or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may be shown.

  Further, the change of the first display mode may have the following configuration. That is, it may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect by one operation of the operation means. Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect by having operated the operation means in multiple times. In addition, it may be changed from the first mode to the second mode depending on the total time during which the operating means is continuously operated (the operating means may release the hand one time). In addition, it may be changed from the first mode to the second mode depending on the time during which the operating means is operated continuously (it ends when the hand is released from the operating means).

  In the first display, the display mode of the first display may be at least changeable according to the operation of the operation means, and the first display may be changed only when the change condition of the display mode is satisfied. The display mode of one display may be changed, or the display mode of the first display may not be changed when the change condition of the display mode is not satisfied.

  The first display may include a portion that does not change the display mode of the first display according to the operation of the operation means.

  In addition, the first display or the second display indicates the start display or the end display of the benefit game (for example, AT), the remaining number display of the benefit game (for example, the remaining number display that is always displayed, A game in which a bonus game is performed by displaying one or more character displays such as 20G, for example, by adding the number of bonus games (for example, displaying the number of bonus games when the number of remaining games is reduced) It may be an effect indicating that the number has increased, or the like, or may be a pressing order notification etc. that notifies the pressing order of the stop button. Here, the AT indicates an AT (assist time) gaming state, and may be a period during which a notification (for example, pressing order notification) for assisting the operation of the player is executed.

  In addition, the display means may be configured by the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the display means may execute the first display only when the first display condition is satisfied, and the second display may be performed only when the second display condition is satisfied. The first display may be displayed, the second display may always be displayed, or the first display and the second display may be displayed. . In addition, the operation means may be configured by the chance button 136.

  Note that a plurality of display means may be provided. In that case, the first display means of the plurality of display means may be a special symbol display device, and the second display means may be a decorative symbol display device.

  The first display means may be a first decorative symbol display device, and the second display means may be a second decorative symbol display device. In that case, the first decorative symbol display device or the second decorative symbol display device may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208.

At least one or both of the first display means and the second display means may be provided on the movable means, and only one may be provided on the movable means.
The first display means may be provided on the front side of the second display means.

  Further, the first display means displays a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 etc.), and the second display means displays a second display (for example, effect display 704 etc.) In the present embodiment, the first display displayed on the first display means is overlapped by the second display displayed on the second display means and the visibility is lowered. Is applicable.

  In addition, it overlaps with (on the front surface of) a third display (for example, a background image or an effect display (including a second display)), and the first display (first operation means image BG1 and / or the first The first display is erased according to the operation of the chance button 136 when the third display is difficult for the player to visually recognize by displaying the elapsed time notification image TG1 etc. of 1). And the third display may be visible to the player.

  In addition, during display of the operation means image and the elapsed time notification image (during the reception period of the operation means), when the operation means is operated by the player, the elapsed time notification image is the same image as the reception period end time (remaining time It may be deleted after displaying 0 seconds). Alternatively, the operation means image may be deleted after the progress notification image is deleted first.

  In addition, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment is a game console provided with an operating means (for example, chance button 136) and a display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) The display means can display at least a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33, the elapsed time notification image in FIG. 44, or the remaining time notification image, etc.) The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, effects accompanying the common view fluctuating display of FIG. 32, a reserved icon PI3 of FIG. 33, etc.); Is the display related to the operation means, the first display is a display capable of at least changing the display mode according to the passage of time, and the change of the display mode in the first display is In the case of the second state, the change is such that the visibility is at least lower than that of the first state, and the second state means that at least a part of the second display is at least one of the first display. It is characterized in that it is in a state of being overlapped to a part.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which at least the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping with at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to focus on the game by causing the player to focus on the overlapping first display and second display. Further, there are cases where it is possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, in some cases, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display regarding the operation means whose display mode changes as time passes, and to further urge the player to operate the game means. In addition, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means and to concentrate on the game, and it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the first display is a display including at least a first image (for example, the first operation means image BG1 of FIG. 33), and the first display is a third image (for example, FIG. 33 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display including at least a second image (for example, the hold icon PI3 of FIG. 33), The third image is a display capable of at least changing the display mode according to the passage of time, and the second state is a state in which the second image overlaps the third image. It may be

  Such a configuration may allow the player to focus on the game by focusing on the overlapping second and third images. Further, there are cases where it is possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image related to the operating means whose display mode changes as time passes, and to further urge the player to operate the gaming means. In addition, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means and to concentrate on the game, and it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the second image may be an image that overlaps at least a part of the third image when in the second state.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes particularly as time passes, in comparison with the first image, and the player can play the game It may be possible to further prompt the operation of the means. In addition, it is possible to make the player carefully look at the display means from the difference in the visual aspect of the first image and the third image, to concentrate on the game, and to judge the necessity of the operation. It may be possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, the second display may be a display that overlaps only a part of the first display when in the second state.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be a display which is at least difficult to visually recognize in the second state.

  With such a configuration, the player is made to differ in the visual aspect of a part of the first display (overlapping area) and the other area (the non-overlapping area), and It may be possible to prompt the operation. In addition, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means from the difference in the first display visual mode, to concentrate on the game, and to judge the necessity of the operation, thereby improving the interest of the game. There are times when you can.

  Further, the display means may be means for not displaying at least the first display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is finished.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment can execute at least a plurality of types of displays and operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. Game console provided with various display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), at least one of the plurality of types of display being a first type of display (for example, the first of FIG. 30) Operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the display of the second type (for example, the fluctuation icon CI of FIG. 30), The first type of display is a display related to the operation means, and the first type of display is configured to be at least displayable when the operation of the operation means is received. The first type of display is a display including at least a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 of FIG. 30), and the first type of display is a second display (for example, A display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1) of FIG. 30, and the second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position toward the end position according to the passage of time. The display of the second type is a display including at least a third display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI of FIG. 30), and the display of the second type is an effect display, the third display Is displayed prior to the first display, and the third display is displayed prior to the second display, and the second display is displayed. Is the third display of the second display than the second display By being displayed preferentially, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than when the third display is not displayed, and the change of the display mode of the second display is more than that of the second display. The third display is displayed with priority, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the third display, and the first type of display is the second type of display. The display of the second type may be at least displayable on the display means prior to the display of the first type.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type of display and the second type of display.

  Further, the first display may include a display imitating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In the case where the second display (part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) notifies the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means by the decrease display from the start position, the second display start position is The third display (effect display) is displayed with priority over the display of the second display, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display than when the third display is not displayed. By making the change of the display mode toward the end position preferentially displayed by the third display over the second display, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult to visually recognize that the user is in the reception period of the operation of the operation means, and the player may be further urged to operate the game means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game. In addition, to make it difficult to visually recognize in the third display the display mode of the second display start position (at the start of receiving the operation) and the change in the display mode from the second display start position to the end position. In addition to being able to make the player look carefully at the display means and concentrating on the game, it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a big hit notice.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means in case of big hit advance notice, to concentrate on the game, and to judge the necessity of the operation, and to improve the interest of the game. There are times when you can.

  Further, the display unit may not display at least the display of the first type when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is finished.

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game console described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Supplementary Note 1)

A first entrance through which game balls can enter, start information deriving means for deriving start information based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquisition means The second entrance where the predetermined profit is generated based on the entrance of the game ball, the effect means which performs the predetermined effect according to the success or failure judgment result of the success or failure judgment means which performs the success or failure judgment based on And the effect means changes the predetermined effect based on the game ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined effect.
(Supplementary Note 2)

The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player based on the game ball entering the second entrance, wherein the effect means comprises the predetermined means A game console characterized by performing a specific effect affecting the predetermined effect based on the game ball entering the second entrance during the effect of.
(Supplementary Note 3)

It is a game stand according to appendix 1 or 2, wherein the effect means includes display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means is a game ball having entered the second entrance during the predetermined effect. A game console characterized by covering a part of a display effect based on the predetermined effect with a part of a display effect based on the specific effect based on the predetermined effect.
(Supplementary Note 4)

It is a game board according to any one of appendices 1 to 3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are the second entrance of the game ball having entered the first entrance. A game console characterized in that it is disposed at a position where it can enter the mouth.
(Supplementary Note 5)

The gaming machine according to Appendix 2, further comprising a winning device that is advantageous to a player based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the specific effect is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game console characterized in that it is an effect that suggests that.
(Supplementary Note 6)

A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when there is a fulfillment of a game value giving condition, a first approach area where the game value giving condition is not satisfied even if a game ball passes, and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value giving condition is established based on the entry of the ball, and a propriety determination means capable of executing a propriety determination when there is a formation of a propriety determination condition; At least including notification means capable of stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result after performing variable display of symbols, and image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and configured separately from the notification means In the gaming table provided with a rendering means and a rendering control means capable of controlling the rendering means, the acceptance determination condition includes at least the passage of the gaming ball to the first entry area. Yes, the effect The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol variation display for stopping display of a symbol corresponding to the result of the acceptance or rejection determination by the acceptance or rejection determination means after starting the variation display of the symbol. In the case of the second entering area, at least the game ball can be entered when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the effect control means generates a big hit It is possible to make the effect means execute at least a jackpot notice for notifying the player whether or not the jackpot is generated under at least one condition that the game ball enters the second entry area. The effect control means is configured to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol variation display while the symbol variation display is displayed by the image display means. The big hit notice can be made at least by the effect means, and at least a part of the symbol change display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize the symbol change display by the notification means. A game console characterized by being easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix 7)

It is a game stand according to appendix 6, and the effect control means is configured to make the big hit advance notice so that at least a part of the symbol becomes difficult to be visually recognized from the player while the symbol display is stopped by the image display means. It is possible to make the effect means perform at least, and the stop display of the symbol by the notification means is the player even if at least a part of the stop display of the symbol by the image display means is difficult to see from the player, It is an easy-to-see thing from, The game stand characterized by the above.
(Supplementary Note 8)

It is a game stand according to appendix 6 or 7, and when the game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the symbol variation display, the effect control means is the symbol It is possible to cause the effect means to at least produce effects in which the player does not make it difficult to view the variable display, and the big hit advance is a game characterized in that the effect does not make it difficult for the player to see the effects. Stand.
(Appendix 9)

It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 8, and the judgment result includes the first judgment result and the second judgment result, and the notification means is the judgment result. If the first judgment result is the first judgment result, the first symbol form can be stopped and displayed, and if the second judgment result shows the second judgment result, the first symbol form A game console characterized by being able to stop and display different second symbol modes.
(Supplementary Note 10)

  It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 6 to 9, and the effect means is at least one of a first position where the symbol variation display by the image display means is not covered from the front, and the symbol variation display. The movable body is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position covering the unit from the front, and the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position. A game console characterized in that the movable body can be made to give a big hit notice.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the gaming machines described in the other appendices and the gaming machines described in this specification.
(Supplementary Note 11)

  If the game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least a first entry area among a plurality of entry areas into which the game ball can enter and the plurality of entry areas, at least a hit / fail judgment can be made. When the gaming ball enters a second entry area different from the predetermined entry area among the plurality of entry areas, at least the auxiliary hit determination means capable of performing the auxiliary hit / nondetermination, and the variation of the symbol After performing the display, after performing the first notification means capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the above-mentioned assistance propriety determination and after performing the symbol variation display, A second notification means capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success or failure determination, a rendering means at least including the second notification means, and A game console comprising effect control means capable of controlling an exit means, and time shortening control means capable of controlling at least a short time state and a non-time short state in which the game ball easily enters at least the first entry area, The first entry area is a game ball after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific assistance propriety determination among the results of the qualification determination is stopped and displayed. Is capable of entering, and the effect control means is capable of causing the effect means to at least execute a predetermined effect relating to the result of the pass / fail determination and the second symbol variation display. The effect control means executes at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol change indication becomes difficult to visually recognize during the predetermined period of execution of the second symbol change indication. Let it go The first symbol variation display is easy to see even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-short time state rather than the short time state. A game stand characterized by being easy to be played.

The first approach area referred to here is, for example, electric chew, and the predetermined approach area is, for example, the second special view start port 232 (electric chew) and the first special view start port 230. The area is, for example, a common drawing start port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, a symbol fluctuation display of a common drawing performed by the common drawing display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, the second symbol variation The display is, for example, a decorative symbol variation display of a common drawing performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500.
(Supplementary Note 12)

  11. The game stand according to appendix 11, wherein said second notification means is an image display means, and said predetermined effect is executable at least by said image display means, said image display means Is at least a predetermined display area capable of executing the second symbol variation display, and the effect control means is configured to at least perform at least a non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the predetermined display area. A game console characterized in that it is possible to execute a display effect different from the second symbol variation display in a period including a part.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of at least causing the effect means to execute the predetermined effect so that at least a part of the different display effects is difficult to view.
(Supplementary Note 13)

  A game stand according to claim 12, wherein the different display effects executable in the predetermined display area include at least one of a big hit notice display and a game information display.

The big hit notice display referred to here includes so-called pre-reading notices. In addition, the game information display includes, for example, the number of times of time saving, the number of times of continuous play, the number of acquired game balls, the number of times of pseudo running, and the like.
(Supplementary Note 14)

The gaming table according to appendix 13, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice in the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time-shortened state, A game console characterized in that at least the game information display can be executed in the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time saving state.
(Supplementary Note 15)

  It is a game stand according to appendix 14, wherein a specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol relating to the result of the auxiliary hit determination and a symbol relating to the big hit notice. A game console characterized by being capable of executing the second symbol variation display.

  The predetermined period in the game stand described in Supplementary Notes 11 to 15 may be a period including at least a part of the second symbol variation display being executed. Further, the predetermined effect may include at least a big hit notice that can give notice of whether a big hit will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state. Further, in the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variation display of the special view 2 in the display different from the second symbol variation display may be made executable. Even during the execution of the second symbol variation display, even if the special figure 2 is interrupted and the different display is possible, the second symbol variation display can be executed with priority. Good. The notification during the power chew operation can be performed, and the notification during the power chew operation may differ depending on whether or not the second symbol variation display is performed. For example, the lamp control near the electric chow may be different with or without the second symbol variation display. Specifically, the second symbol variation display may make the notification flashy. The term “informing flashy” as used herein also includes that the rendering period is long. Further, the second symbol variation display may be capable of varying only the symbol relating to the result of the above-mentioned auxiliary success or failure determination. In addition, it is the game stand which does the right hitting and the left hitting, when the left hitting it is good to execute the 2nd design fluctuation indication. Furthermore, the game console may be a game console that performs a left strike in the non-power support state and a right strike in the power support state. In addition, the opening pattern of electric chew includes at least the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern, and the second opening pattern is more advantageous than the first opening pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be performed at least in the case of the second opening pattern.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the gaming machines described in the other appendices and the gaming machines described in this specification.
(Supplementary Note 16)

It has the electric chew, the success / failure judgment means (special figure), the auxiliary success / failure judgment means (general drawing), and the big hit game control means, and the main common drawing fluctuation display (first symbol fluctuation display) and the sub common drawing fluctuation display (The second symbol variation display) can be performed, the sub-popular variation is difficult to see by the second effect, the main-general variation is the sub-general variation A game table characterized in that even if it is difficult to visually recognize by the second effect, it is easy to visually recognize, and the sub-popularity fluctuation is more likely to be performed other than during a big hit game than during a big hit game.
(Supplementary Note 17)

A game stand according to appendix 16, characterized in that a specific sub-general-pattern fluctuation of the sub-general-pattern fluctuation is more likely to be performed outside the big-hit game than during the big-hit game. Game console.
(Appendix 18)

The gaming table according to appendix 17, wherein the sub-general fluctuation is executable in at least a first fluctuation time and a second fluctuation time, and the second fluctuation time is greater than the first fluctuation time. The game machine is characterized in that the fluctuation time of is longer, and the particular sub-general fluctuation is executable at a fluctuation time including at least the second fluctuation time.
(Appendix 19)

It is a game board according to any one of Appendixes 16 to 18, and the opening pattern of the electric chow includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, and the first opening The second opening pattern is more advantageous for the player than the opening pattern (for example, it is easier for the game ball to enter), and the sub-popular variation is at least opened by the electric opening in the second opening pattern. A game console characterized by being executable in case.
(Supplementary Note 20)

  It is a game board according to appendixes 18 or 19, and the sub-common-figure fluctuation is executable during the big hit game in a fluctuation time including at least the first fluctuation time. Stand.

  The specific sub-common-figure fluctuation in the gaming machine described in Supplementary Notes 16 to 20 may not be performed in the first fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-general fluctuation except the specific sub-common fluctuation may not be performed in the second fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-general drawing change performed in the first change time may be capable of executing an effect of notifying only the result of the auxiliary success or failure judgment. In addition, the sub-general fluctuation may not be performed during the big hit game. In addition, at least a part of the sub-common-figure variations may be able to execute symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the big hit game, only the open notification effect of the electric chew may be executable. In addition, the game console may perform right-handed and left-handed game, and a predetermined firing intensity (for example, right-handed game) may be more likely to execute the sub-common-figure fluctuation. Furthermore, it may be a game console that can be played with the predetermined firing strength (right strike) at least during a big hit game.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the gaming machines described in the other appendices and the gaming machines described in this specification.
(Supplementary Note 21)

The main common drawing includes a success / failure determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure determination unit (general drawing), a presentation unit capable of at least giving advance notice, and a presentation control unit capable of at least controlling the presentation unit. The game console is capable of performing variable display (first symbol fluctuation display) and sub-common-pattern fluctuation display (second symbol fluctuation display), wherein the effect control means is configured to receive the advance notice and the sub-general drawing. The variation display can be performed at least by the rendering means, and when the sub-general drawing fluctuation is performed during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice, the sub-general drawing fluctuation is at least one of the pre-reading advance notice. A game console characterized by making it difficult to visually identify the unit.
(Supplementary Note 22)

24. A game stand according to appendix 21, wherein at least a part of the sub-common-figure change is capable of executing symbol change display including a big hit notice.
(Supplementary Note 23)

  It is a game stand according to appendix 21 or 22, wherein the effect means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means can execute the sub-common-figure fluctuation and the advance notice, and the image The display means has a predetermined display area capable of executing the sub-common variation, and the image display means has a pre-read advance notice display region, and a predetermined sub-general variation of the sub-general variation is set. In the case where a figure fluctuation is performed, the sub-popularity change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, and enters the pre-reading advance notice display area, making at least a part of the pre-reading advance notice difficult to view Characterized by the game stand.

It is to be noted that the pre-reading notice is a pending change notice, the image display means has a pending display area, and if a predetermined sub-general change among the sub-general change is performed, the sub-general change is performed. It may be possible to display a figure fluctuation beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold prefetch notice.
(Supplementary Note 24)

It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 21 to 23, and the game stand is a special view 2 priority variable machine, and the hold display area of the special view 1 and the hold display area of the special view 2 And both reserve display areas are provided with a predetermined display area in between, and it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of both reserve display areas. A game table characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize only either one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the pre-reading notice of the special view 2.
(Appendix 25)

  It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 21 to 24, and it is possible to execute an effect such that at least a part of the sub-common-figure fluctuation becomes difficult to visually recognize. To play with.

  The sub-common variation in the game stand described in Supplementary Note 21 to Supplementary Note 25 is at least at least a part of the plurality of pending display areas (for example, the first pending display area with the oldest winning timing). Some may be difficult to view. Further, the first hold of the special view 1 and the special view 2 hold display area may be difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, other reservations such as the second suspension may be difficult to view. In addition, when the electric chow is opened during the non-electric support state and the special figure 2 cuts in, at least a part of the hold of the special figure 2 may be made difficult to be recognized by the electric thu opening notification effect. In addition, it is possible to make the reservation pre-reading notice of special figure 1 difficult (at least) in the non-power-supplying state, and while the power-supplying state is pending It may be possible to Moreover, it is a game stand of a winning a prize change, and it is possible to perform a reserve display of a special figure 1 and a reserve display of a special figure 2 in the specific reserve display area made difficult to be recognized by the sub common figure fluctuation. , The function may be able to be switched at each special figure fluctuation (during non power saving state). In addition, when the effect (for example, super reach etc.) is started during the decoration symbol change display of the special figure while the pre-reading suspension display and the sub common drawing change are being performed at the same time, the sub common change May be left as an aspect that hides the pre-reading hold display, or it may be an aspect where non-display of the sub-general drawing change and the pre-reading hold display is left, or the pre-reading hold display is left. The variation may be in a non-display mode.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix 26)

The main common drawing fluctuation display (first symbol fluctuation display (first symbol fluctuation display) is provided with a success / failure judgment unit (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure judgment unit (general drawing), a presentation unit, and a presentation control unit capable of at least controlling the presentation unit ) And a sub common drawing fluctuation display (second symbol fluctuation display), and it is possible to execute an effect such that at least a part of the sub common drawing fluctuation is difficult to see. The image display means and the effect movable means, wherein the effect movable means is at least operable as the effect, and the sub-popularity change is at least performed by the image display means In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect movable means, and at least one of the effect movable means operated as the effect and the image Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.
(Appendix 27)

It is a game stand according to appendix 26, and in the case where the sub-general drawing change is performed first, it is difficult to visually recognize the sub-general drawing change in the effect, and the effect is performed first. The game stand characterized by not performing the sub-general-use fluctuation using the image display means.
(Appendix 28)

It is a game stand according to appendixes 26 or 27, wherein the image display means has a hold display area, and the effect makes at least a part of the hold display area difficult to view. Characterized by the game stand.
(Supplementary Note 29)

A game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 28, wherein the sub-popularity fluctuation is more likely to be played during a non-big hit game than during a big hit game. Stand.
(Supplementary note 30)

  A game stand according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein the sub-general fluctuation is more likely to be performed in a non-power-sustaining state than in the power-sending state.

  The presentation on the game console described in Supplementary Notes 21 to 25 may include at least a big hit notice. Further, the effect movable means may be operable at least as a big hit notice. Furthermore, the effect movable means may be capable of at least an operation to the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Supplementary Note 31)

The main common drawing fluctuation display (first display) is provided with a power chew, a judging unit (special drawing), a subsidiary judging unit (general drawing), a presentation unit, and a presentation control unit capable of at least controlling the presentation unit. A second game variation display (a second game variation display), wherein the effect control means performs at least the effects on the presentation means and the second game variation. It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute the effect such that at least a part of the electric thu open notification effect after the sub-general drawing change becomes difficult to visually recognize, the electric thu open notification effect It is in the state where entering the electric Chu is allowed during execution, and making it difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect being executed by the effect in the special view fluctuation display based on entering the electric Chu. , Said May Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that.
(Supplementary Note 32)

It is a game stand according to appendix 31, and special figure 1 symbol variation display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 symbol variation display capable of at least executing symbol variation display of special figure 2 A game console characterized by having means, and making it difficult to visually recognize the electric chow open notification effect being executed by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2;
(Appendix 33)

It is a game stand of additional remarks 31 or 32, Comprising: The special figure 2 is easy to be provided with the big hit which is advantageous.
(Appendix 34)

  This gaming table is a special drawing 2 priority variable machine, and comprises a prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice of the special drawing 1, and at least executing the sub-general drawing fluctuation display during the prefetch notice execution of the special drawing 1 It is possible, even if the general drawing fluctuation is won, the electric chew is released, and even if the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation display of the special drawing 2 is interrupted, the prefetching notice is given, and the visual tuw opening notice effect is visually recognized by the preliminary display notice. A game table characterized by difficulty.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 priority change machine, it is good also as visual difficulty in the electric Chu open information production under execution by the production in the symbol change display of the special figure 2 according to the ball according to entering electric Chu. In addition, in the winning order change machine, the state of the special figure is less than a predetermined number (less or 0) and the state of symbol change display of the special figure is stopped, the electric Chu open notification effect under execution, It is good also as visual recognition in the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure according to entering the ball into the chew. In addition, it is possible to win special figure 89 almost alternately during non-electric support, and during the electric support state, in the game stand which can be continuously winning in special figure 2 by the electric Chu open through the common figure fluctuation, it is under execution. The electric chew-opening notification effect may be difficult to visually recognize by the effect in the symbol variation display of the special view 2 corresponding to the winning. By doing this, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the symbol variation display of the advantageous special drawing 2 may be continuously performed by the electric Chu open notification. In addition, it has a first jackpot (unfavorable jackpot) with a relatively short opening time of the attacker and a second jackpot (advantage jackpot) with a relatively long time. The second big hit may be more likely to appear than the first big hit, or the first big hit may not be present.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix 35)

  A first entry area in which the game ball can enter, a second entry area in which the game ball can enter, and a first entry possibility judgment that can be made if the first condition is satisfied. After the start of the variation display of the symbol and the second success or failure judgment means capable of executing the second success or failure judgment when the second condition is satisfied, the first success or failure judgment means A game console comprising notification means capable of executing symbol variation display for stopping display of a symbol corresponding to the first success / failure determination result, and effect means including at least display means capable of executing display, At least one of the establishment requirements of the first condition includes at least the entry of the game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the result of the first success or failure judgment. Entry time is limited if the A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the establishment requirements of the second condition at least includes the entry of the game ball into the second entry area, and the display The means can display at least the effect display when the third condition is satisfied, and the effect display includes at least the result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the display means can display the result display while the symbol stop display is being performed. The effect display is displayed over the effect time more than the first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display Feature Gaming table.

The first entry area is, for example, the common view starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, the electric chow, and the first pass / fail judgment is, for example, the pass / fail judgment of the common view (common drawing lottery), The second pass / fail determination is, for example, a pass / fail determination of a special figure (special figure lottery).
(Supplementary note 36)

35. A game console according to appendix 35, wherein the gaming state can be shifted to any of a plurality of states, the plurality of states including at least a first state, and the plurality of states are: The second state includes at least a second state, and the second state has a higher probability that the first judgment result is the specific judgment result than the first state, and the display A game console characterized in that the means is more likely to display the effect display during the first state than the second state.
(Appendix 37)

The gaming table according to appendix 36, wherein the symbol variation display is performed over any one of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times are at least a first display time. The plurality of display times include at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, and the first state is A game console characterized in that the display time is likely to be the second display time than the second state.
(Appendix 38)

It is a game stand according to any one of appendixes 35 to 37, and the result display is the second entry area when the first yes / no decision result is a specific yes / no decision result. A game table including at least an enterable indication indicating that the game ball can enter.
(Appendix 39)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 38, wherein the effect means is capable of at least executing a big hit notice for giving notice whether a big hit will occur, the big hit being It is generated under at least one condition that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the effect means is at least a part of the effect indication while the effect indication is displayed by the display means. It is possible to execute at least the big hit advance notice so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize from the player, and at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult to visually recognize from the player A game console characterized by being easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix 40)

  A first entry area in which the game ball can enter, a second entry area in which the game ball can enter, and a first entry possibility judgment that can be made if the first condition is satisfied. After the start of the variation display of the symbol and the second success or failure judgment means capable of executing the second success or failure judgment when the second condition is satisfied, the first success or failure judgment means A game console comprising notification means capable of executing symbol variation display for stopping display of a symbol corresponding to the first success / failure determination result, and effect means including at least display means capable of executing display, At least one of the establishment requirements of the first condition includes at least the entry of the game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the result of the first success or failure judgment. Entry time is limited if the A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the establishment requirements of the second condition at least includes the entry of the game ball into the second entry area, and the display The means can display at least the effect display when the third condition is satisfied, and the effect display includes at least the result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The rendering means is at least capable of executing a big hit notice to give notice whether or not a big hit will occur, and the big hit is generated under at least one condition that the game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect display started when the big hit advance is being executed is better than the effect display started when the big hit advance is not executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

Also here, the first entry area is, for example, a common drawing start port 228, the second entry area is, for example, electric power, and the first judgment of success is, for example, a judgment of common drawing (general drawing lottery The second success or failure judgment is, for example, a success or failure judgment on a special drawing (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix 41)

  It is a game stand according to appendix 40, and the effect means at least performs the big hit advance notice so that at least a part of the effect indication becomes difficult to be recognized from the player while the effect indication is displayed by the display means. It is possible to execute, and the variable display of the symbol by the notification means is easy for the player to visually recognize even during a period when at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A game stand characterized by

  Note that the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 35 to Supplementary Note 41 may be a gaming table where it is easy to select an open time for which the power time is shorter than that during power support during non-power support. That is, the accessible time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, and the first time In the second state, the accessible time may be more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing this, it may be possible to have an expectation that time other than the first time will be in the first state.

  In addition, the popular figure production may be easier to perform the electric tube long opening than the electric tube short opening. That is, the display means can easily perform the effect display when the second time is reached as compared with the case where the enterable time is the first time. In this case, it may be possible to have expectations for the second time.

  In addition, the time of the short common drawing effect may be longer than the time of the short common change display. That is, in the second state, the display time is likely to be the first display time than in the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. It may be. In addition, the entry possible indication may be displayed during the entry possible time.

  Further, the display means has at least a display area capable of performing display, the display area includes at least a first display area, and the display means is configured to perform the first effect display. It may be displayable in at least a part of the display area of

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing advance notice regarding the result of the second success or failure judgment in at least a part of the first display area (an example shown in FIG. 141). Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the advance notice may be common. For example, the relationship between the variable display pattern shown in (A) of FIG. 117 (b) and the variable display pattern shown in (D) can be mentioned.

  In addition, when the special figure production is performed when the special figure is not changed, the big hit notice (for example, "super heat") may not be stopped and displayed, or even when the special figure is generated when the special figure is not changed, The variable display may be displayed including a big hit notice (for example, "super heat").

  Furthermore, the regular drawing effect may be performed only during the non-electric support, or may be performed only during the non-big hit state.

  Further, the effect display includes at least a first display (for example, variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, may include a result display or an effect image display). The effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an enterable display). Here, the third display may have a display area larger than the first display, or may have a display area larger than the second display. The display area may be larger than the display.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix 42)

  Symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol fluctuation display; pending display means capable of performing display of a pending icon; first control means capable of at least performing display control of the symbol display means And second control means capable of performing at least display control of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variation display performs symbol variation display. The symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the judgment is displayed in a stopped state, and the first symbol display means of the symbol display means changes the symbol pattern when the first symbol fluctuation condition is satisfied. The second symbol display means of the symbol display means can at least perform the symbol change display when the second symbol change condition is satisfied. The first symbol variation condition at least includes that there is a ball entering the first starting region of the starting region, and the second symbol variation condition is the starting symbol. At least including the fact that the second starting area of the area has entered the ball, the suspension display means is a suspension icon corresponding to the symbol variation display in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to perform at least a first display regarding a certain digestion reserve icon, and the reserve display means is an undigested icon which is a reserve icon not corresponding to the symbol variation display in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to at least perform a second display on the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of at least display the undigested hold icon equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display means can at least display a plurality of undigested hold icons, and the first control means sends a command signal to the second control means in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. The second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal. The control means is capable of at least starting the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means at least includes a first display area. The hold display means includes at least a second display area, and the first display includes the digest reserve icon from the first display area to the second display area. A move (hereinafter referred to as the first move). And the second display area is configured to delete the display position of the undigested retention icon in the first display area. The hold display means moves the first hold icon as the hold icon when the first hold increase condition is satisfied. It is possible to at least increase display, and the hold display means can at least increase display the second hold icon as the hold icon when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first suspension increase condition at least includes the presence of a ball entry in the first start region, and the second suspension increase condition is an entry in the second start region. There is a ball In the case where the first pending icon is the undivided pending icon, the first pending icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display region of the first display region. In the case where the second reserve icon is the undivided reserve icon, the second reserve icon is displayed in a display area for the second symbol display means in the first display area, and The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area in which the deletion is performed for the first reserved icon is the second reserved icon The same as the display area where the deletion is performed, the first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, and the hold display means displays the effect by the undigested hold icon. It is possible to perform, the retention display means is also capable of performing effect display by the digestion retention icon, and at least all the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon is for completing the second movement at a second time, and the at least one digestion retention icon in the display area for the second symbol display means is the first movement at a first time. And the first time is a time different from the second time. In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fifth embodiments. For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is limited to the pachinko machine For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and corresponding reels are provided to individually stop the rotation of the reels. A stop button for causing the player to make a decision, lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winnings are made by drawing, reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the drawing result of the drawing means Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the means is a symbol combination predetermined corresponding to the internally winning combination, and the symbol If stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it is also suitable, such as a slot machine and a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.
Other Embodiments

Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in order to avoid the redundant description, the same reference numerals are given to the same contents as those of the other embodiments than the present embodiment in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 182 to 209 have priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 184) as an external structure. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Moreover, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 (see FIG. 184) is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 700 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (see FIG. 184) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 700 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full. In addition, since the chance button 700 is one of the characteristic parts of the present invention, it will be described in detail in the following <chance button>.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is not shown in the figure, where the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player to pivot the launcher (not shown) and the gaming ball is struck at the tip of the launcher. And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 183 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 182 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 can play a game by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the disabled person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 184 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it.

In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower bowl fullness A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 and a display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the common view display device 210 Drive control circuit 326 and display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the common view holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, the high certainty lamp 222, etc.) The drive circuit 330 is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as the blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and a detection unit 710 for detecting a detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700; A sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 or the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and reading image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 and using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 43 which generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208 Is connected to the (video display processor), the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

In addition, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, and a current position of the effect movable body 224. The game circuit lamp drive circuit for controlling the game board lamp 532 and the sensor circuit 518 which outputs the detection signal from the presentation movable body sensor 424 for detecting the detection mobile body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502 530, a game stand lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game stand lamp 542, a game board lamp drive circuit 530, and a game stand lamp drive circuit 540; And a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 186 (a) to (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. FIG. 186 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2.

  Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 186 (a), ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” are shown as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 186 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit design which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, each being a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here corresponds to the same thing as 2R time short no hit big hit. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 186 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit corresponding to 15R big hit in the symbol display area 208a-208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of notifying 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which the same three odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 To stop.

  In addition, the 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure E" hidden probability change, the 2R big hit, which is usually called "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", is "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when reporting 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R big hit called sudden shortness of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 184 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 186 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 186 (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 187 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 185. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 185, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, previous detection signal present, and present detection signal present) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding number of holding storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 of the random value generation circuit 318 Acquires the value from the register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and acquires the value from the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter, The processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When there is a winning on the second special view start opening 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter of the random number generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 Acquires a value from the value storage register, acquires the processed value (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1) as a special figure 2 win random number value and acquires a value from a special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter Then, the processed value (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 186 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 186 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation If the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, then the special drawing A shown in FIG. 186 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag is also off special figure F, the first small hit flag is on special figure G, the second small hit flag is on special figure H, the first off flag is on In the case of the special pattern I, when the second out flag is on, perform the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED which constitutes the second special symbol display device 214 so as to become each aspect of the special figure I , And setting that indicates that the special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the final display of any one symbol of the first out-of-pattern (special image J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and it is for solving this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 187 is performed. Return to

On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 700 has been pressed. Although the details will be described later, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected as a result of the determination, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to the pressing operation of the chance button 700, a chance If the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, processing such as preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed. In the present embodiment, while the detection of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, the drive control of the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is performed by the second sub control unit 500. The detection processing and drive control regarding the chance button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500)).

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, there is a control command (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. In this case, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 189 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, after performing movable body control processing, the process returns to step S703. Although the details will be described later, in this movable body control process, when a control command for the effect movable body 224 or a control command for the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received from the first sub control unit 400 Perform corresponding processing.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. 190 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.
<Movable body control processing>

  FIG. 191 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of movable body control processing (step S713) of the second sub control unit main processing, and FIG. 191 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of movable body interruption processing. is there.

  In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in (a) of the figure, the received command various process is performed based on the command received from the first sub control unit 400. As the received command various processing, for example, the effect movable body processing performed when the command related to the effect movable body 224 is received, the chance button movable body processing performed when the command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received, etc. It can be mentioned.

  More specifically, in the chance button movable body process, control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button drive storage area provided in the RAM 508, or control stored in the chance button drive storage area. Perform processing such as updating information to new information or discarding old information.

  Further, the second auxiliary control unit 500 executes the movable body interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5B at a predetermined cycle, triggered by the above-described timer interrupt. In step S1101 of the movable body interrupt processing, it is determined whether control information (excitation, torque, rotational direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-mentioned chance button drive storage area. When the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. Thereby, the movable part 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (the details will be described later).

  Further, it is determined whether or not control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output is stored in the effect movable body 224, and when the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is driven. It outputs to the circuit 516. Thus, the effect movable body 224 is driven.

  In step S1102, a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, and position information of the effect movable body 224 or the like is detected based on the detection signal. In the present embodiment, the detection processing of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 by the detection unit 710 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, but may be performed in step S1102.

In step S1103, output information update processing is performed. In this output information update process, a process of updating control information of the effect movable body 224 or control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is performed.
<Chance button>

  Next, the structure of the above-mentioned chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. FIG. 192 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700, and FIG. 192 (a) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, and FIG. 192 (b) is at the operation completed position. FIG. 7C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. Also, FIGS. (D) to (f) are diagrams showing only the lower case 704b and the rotation member 708b in the state of each of the same views (a) to (c).

  Also, FIG. 193 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 193 (b) is a movement of the chance button 700 from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) is an external appearance perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is in the operation completed position, in the operating state (in operation). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (a), the chance button 700 has a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage tray and a movable portion 704 (vertically movable relative to the fixed portion 702). 704a, 704b), a spring 706 which is compressed between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage plate to urge the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive for enabling the movable portion 704 to move up and down. It comprises the part 708 (708a, 708b) and the detection part 710 which can detect the position of the movable part 704. Although not shown, at the predetermined position of the chance button 700, the above-mentioned chance button lamp 138 is disposed.

  The fixing portion 702 is constituted by two rod-like fixed shafts 702a erected on the door 108 with a ball storage plate, and a disk-like fixing plate 702b fixed to the tip of the two fixed shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 192 (d), the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into insertion holes 704b1 formed in a lower case 704b described later, and guide the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

  The movable portion 704 has an opening at one side and a cylindrical upper case 704a, which is an operation surface 704a1 with which the other hand is in contact with the player's finger or hand, and the upper case 704a so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. It is comprised by the disk shaped lower case 704b fixed to case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 192 (d) to 192 (f), the lower case 704b has a central portion through which two insertion holes 704b1 to be inserted through the fixed shafts 702a and a rotation member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later. Insertion hole 704b2, an engagement piece 704b3 projecting toward the center direction of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as the base end, and detection projecting downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as the base end A piece 704 b 4 is formed.

  The drive unit 708 is configured of a drive source 708a configured by a motor, a solenoid, and the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A recessed groove 708b1 is formed in a straight line from one longitudinal direction to the other on a part of the outer edge of the rotation member 708b, and the lower case 704b is engaged with the lower end of the recessed groove 708b1. An engagement recess 708b2 engageable with the piece 704b3 is formed.

  In the rotating member 708b, as shown in FIG. 192 (d), the movable recess 704 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 706 by the engagement recess 708b2 engaging with the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. As shown in FIG. 192 (e), the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706 by releasing the engagement between the engagement recess 708b2 and the engagement piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. It is possible to rotate between a permitted position that permits the power to move upward.

  The detection unit 710 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is configured to be capable of advancing and retracting between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, as shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and (b), the first sub control unit 400 does not press the movable unit 704 downward (the chance button 700 is pressed). In the state where the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is not operated between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 710) and as shown in FIG. 192 (c) It is possible to determine whether it is pressed (the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704 b 4 of the lower case 704 b is entering between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the detecting unit 710).

  In the initial position shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 193 (a), the rotation member 708b is rotated from the permission position to the restriction position, and the upward movement of the movable portion 704 is restricted by the rotation member 708, It is possible to move only to In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, whereby the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. is there.

  In the operation completed position shown in FIGS. 192 (b) and 193 (c), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction of upward movement. It is moved upward by the biasing force, abuts against the fixed plate 702b, and movement in the upward direction is restricted again, and only downward movement is possible. Also in this operation completed position, as shown in FIG. 192 (c), when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

  The state shown in FIG. 192 (c) is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completed position shown in FIGS. 192 (b) and 193 (c). In this embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed close to the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to restrict the rotation member 708b from the permission position to the restriction position The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operating state shown in FIG. 193 (b), that is, the chance button 700, is from the initial position shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and 193 (a). In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), even if the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710 Are ignored (not to judge that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is valid).

  With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, such as when the player mistakenly presses the chance button 700 while the chance button 700 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 700 is configured to ignore the pressing operation of the chance button 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is activated. May be

If the chance button has been pressed before the operation of the chance button (if it has been pressed before receiving the detection), the pressing operation of the chance button may be ignored, or the chance button The pressing operation of may be enabled. Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, the chance button may be operated, or the chance button may not be operated. Further, in these cases, the chance button can be rendered acceptable, or the chance button can not be rendered.
<Operation reception effect production>

  Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described using FIGS. 194 and 195. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the operation state of the chance button 700, the acceptability of the detection result of the pressing operation on the chance button 700, and the executeability of the operation reception effect.

FIG. 195 (a) is an external perspective view of the periphery of the door 108 with a ball storage tray when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 195 (b) is a ball when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 6C is an external perspective view of the storage tray 108 with a door, and FIG. 7C is a view of the door 108 with a storage tray when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure). It is an external appearance perspective view. Further, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is at the initial position, and FIG. 7E is the case when the chance button 700 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 6F shows an example of the operation reception effect to be performed, and FIG. 6F shows an example of the operation reception effect to be performed when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, in the case of failure). FIG.
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the initial position shown in FIG. 195A (before the operation shown in FIG. 194), the detection unit 710 detects the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b. It becomes a detectable state (a state where reception of detection results is possible). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this initial position, the chance button effect according to the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect such as changing an image or characters displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the number of pressing times or pressing speed of the chance button 700, or pressing timing of the chance button 700 According to the above, effects such as changing images, characters, etc. can be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to these. That is, any effect may be used as long as at least one aspect (display (eg, animation, image, characters, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) changes in accordance with the pressing operation of the chance button 7000.

  Also, this partial aspect may be one or plural, for example, in the case of plural, a combination with the same category (display, sound, motion, color, etc.) (for example, LED 1 is The color may change from red to blue, LED2 may change from white to blue, etc.), and combinations with different categories (for example, display on liquid crystal (change from display A to display B), chance button It may be its own action (change from no action to rotational action) or the like.

  In addition, when stopping the chance button 700 at the initial position (before operation), the first sub control unit 400 turns on the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 195 (a). By making the chance button 700 emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), it is suggested to the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is possible, as shown in FIG. An operation reception effect that indicates to the player that pressing of the chance button 700 is possible using the symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and blue at the initial position The image display imitating the chance button 700 which has been illuminated and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed.

In this manner, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player is surely in the initial position. A pressing operation can be performed. The operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, effects using various lamps 418, effects using the speaker 120, movable objects (for example, the shielding device 246, effects) An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be any effect that suggests the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is possible.
<Operation receptionist production / in operation>

  The first sub control unit 400 detects when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 195A to the operation completed position shown in FIG. 194B (during the operation shown in FIG. 194). Even when the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the part 710, the detection result is ignored (the detection result is not accepted). Therefore, the first sub control unit 400 also does not execute the above-mentioned chance button effect. In addition, after receiving the detection result of the chance button 700 (after the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is once made effective), it is determined whether the chance button 700 is in operation or not. In this case, the chance button effect may not be performed.

In addition, when the first auxiliary control unit 400 moves the chance button 700 from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation), the first auxiliary control unit 400 does not turn on the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect It is configured as follows. As described above, if the chance button 700 is not lighted and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is invalid, and the disadvantage is caused by the erroneous operation. You will not suffer from
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

  When the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 195 (b) (after the operation shown in FIG. 194 is completed), the detection unit 710 detects the detection piece of the lower case 704b. It becomes a state where it is possible to detect 704 b 4 (a state where reception of detection results is possible). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this operation completion position, the above-mentioned chance button effect is performed.

  Further, when the chance button 700 is stopped at the operation completion position (after the operation completion), the first sub control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown, it is suggested to the player that pressing the chance button 700 is possible by lighting the chance button 700 in a predetermined color (for example, red), as shown in FIG. 195 (e). An operation reception effect that indicates to the player that pressing of the chance button 700 is possible using the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!” and the operation are completed The image display imitating the chance button 700 that emits red light at the position and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed.

In this manner, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the chance button is effective, and the player is assured at the operation completion position. Can be pressed.
<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>

  The first auxiliary control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710 even when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 195 (c). State (the state where reception of detection results is possible). Here, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 can not rise to the operation completion position. The case where the biasing force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable portion 704 can not rise to the operation completion position can be mentioned as an example.

  In addition, even when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 presses the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 195 (f). An operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect performed after the completion of the operation (effect shown in FIG. 195 (e)) is performed to suggest to the player that it is possible.

  As described above, even when the chance button 700 can receive the operation of the chance button 700 even when the chance button 700 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, the operation of the chance button 700 may occur even if the chance button 700 is broken. Can be accepted, so the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and to prompt the player's operation. it can.

  In this example, when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 does not emit light in a predetermined color, but for example, a color different from the initial position or the operation completion position The light may be emitted (for example, green), or may be emitted in the same color (for example, blue or red) before or after the operation.

  Also, in this example, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 is made to emit light in a predetermined color. However, for example, blinking may be performed in a predetermined color. The blinking pattern may be changed at each stop between positions. For example, the initial position repeatedly blinks in a first cycle (for example, 1 second), and the operation complete position repeats blinking in a second cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first cycle, and the initial position And the operation completion position is configured to repeat blinking in a third cycle (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first cycle.

  With such a configuration, the player can grasp that the pressing operation is possible in each state, and can also grasp that the states are different from each other. In some cases, it is possible to perform a pressing operation suitable for the state of.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is an operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation) operable by the player. Section 758, bet button 132, and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation sections), rendering means capable of at least performing rendering (for example, first sub control section 400), moved means (for example, upper case 704a) , 754), and the movement control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the base 754), wherein the operation means is the movement by the movement control means. When control is performed, the second position (e.g., the initial position shown in FIGS. 193 (a), 195 (a), 196 (a), 206 (a)) can be obtained. , 193 (c), FIG. 195 (c), FIG. 196 (b) and FIG. 206 (c) are moved to the operation completion position), and the effect means has performed the movement control. When the operation means moved to the second position is operated, at least a special effect can be performed, and the effect means is the operation means despite the fact that the movement control is performed. Even if the movement does not move to the second position, at least the special effect (for example, the effect when the button shown in FIG. 209 (c) is pressed) in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game console characterized by being executable.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation unit 758, bet) which can be operated by the player Buttons 132 and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units), rendering means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing effects, and moving means (for example, upper case 704a, base 754) Moving control means capable of moving at least the movement control means (for example, the second sub control unit 500), and the operation means performs the movement control by the movement control means. If the first position (eg, the initial position shown in FIGS. 193 (a), 195 (a), 196 (a), 206 (a)), the second position (eg, FIG. c) When it is moved to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 195 (c), FIG. 196 (b) and FIG. 206 (c), and the effect means is satisfied with the special effect execution condition (for example, bet) When the button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, a special effect (for example, an effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 209 (c)) And the special effect execution condition is satisfied when any one of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first condition of the plurality of conditions is satisfied. Is satisfied when the operation means moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, and a second condition of the plurality of conditions is the movement control Done Nevertheless, even if the operation means has not moved to the second position, the gaming table is characterized in that it holds in response to the operation of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation means even if the operation means can not move to the second position to move originally due to a failure of the operation means or the like. By enabling the effect according to, it is possible to suggest the player that the operation has been accepted and give the player a sense of security. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, operation accepting means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations that can receive at least an operation by a player) A surface of a part (including a non-button surface) may be provided, and the operation means may be provided in the operation reception means.

  Further, the special effect may not be performed even if the operation means is operated during execution of the movement control.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  In addition, even when the moved means is positioned at the first position, the effect means may be capable of at least executing the effect in response to the player operating the operation means. .

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period in which the operation can be detected, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation unit may be increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  The information processing apparatus further comprises informing means capable of at least informing informing the user to operate the operation means, the operation means being moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. Even if there is no case, the notification may be performed.

  Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a game console provided with operation means (for example, chance button 700) operable by the player, and the player is used for the operation means. A touchable operation unit (for example, the upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation unit is moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 193 (a)) to the second position (for example c) drive means (for example, drive unit 708) movable at least to the operation completion position), drive control means (for example, second sub-control unit 500) capable of drive control of the drive means, and the drive Rendering means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least performing rendering when the player operates the operation unit after the operation unit is moved to the second position by the unit; Provided the above The means is configured to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position after the drive unit has moved the operation unit to the second position. Even in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (c)), at least the effect can be executed in response to the player operating the operation means. (For example, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), when there is a pressing operation on the chance button 700 at the timing when it stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button corresponding to the pressing operation on the chance button 700 An effect is possible), and it is a game stand characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player operates the operation unit even when the operation unit can not move to the second position to move originally due to a failure of the operation unit or the like. By enabling the effect according to, it is possible to suggest the player that the operation has been accepted and give the player a sense of security. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the effect means is in the middle of control to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position (for example, during operation shown in FIG. 193 (b)) Alternatively, even if the player operates the operation means, the effect may not be executed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  In addition, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least the effect may be executable in response to the operation of the operation means by the player.

  With such a configuration, by increasing the period in which the operation can be detected, the opportunity for the player to operate the operation unit may be increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.

  The information processing apparatus further comprises informing means (for example, a chance button lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least informing informing the user to operate the operation means, the informing means said the operation unit at the second position. Even when not moved to the above, the notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 195 (f)) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to miss the opportunity to operate the operation means by notifying that the operation of the operation unit is possible even if the operation means is not moved to the position where the operation means originally moves. It can be prevented. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

  On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, the player can feel discomfort, and refrain from operating the operation means or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. In addition, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation unit 758, bet) which can be operated by the player Buttons 132 and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units), rendering means capable of at least executing effects (for example, the first sub control unit 400), and notification means capable of at least executing notification (for example, chance button) A lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a, the base 754) It is a game console provided, wherein the operation means is in a first position (eg, FIG. 193 (a), etc.) when the movement control is performed by the movement control means. 195 (a), 196 (a), 206 (a) to the second position (e.g., FIG. 193 (c), FIG. 195 (c), FIG. 196 (b), FIG. 206 (a). c) being moved to the operation completion position shown in c), the effect means is special when the operation means moved to the second position is operated by the movement control being performed. An effect (effect at the time of pressing a button shown in FIG. 209 (c)) can be performed at least, and the notification unit is the second position even though the movement control is performed. Even if the player does not move to the position (for example, when stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 195C), the player can operate the operation means. Can be notified at least (for example, FIG. 195 (f) It is possible to perform operation acceptance effect as shown), it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment, the operation means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, the first operation unit 756, the second operation unit 758, bet) which can be operated by the player Buttons 132 and pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units), rendering means capable of at least executing effects (for example, the first sub control unit 400), and notification means capable of at least executing notification (for example, chance button) A lamp 138, a decorative symbol display device 208), and a movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least executing movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a, the base 754) It is a game console provided, wherein the operation means is in a first position (eg, FIG. 193 (a), etc.) when the movement control is performed by the movement control means. 195 (a), 196 (a), 206 (a) to the second position (e.g., FIG. 193 (c), FIG. 195 (c), FIG. 196 (b), FIG. 206 (a). c) is moved to the operation completion position shown in c), and the effect means is a special effect (effect when the button shown in FIG. 209 (c) is pressed) when the special effect execution condition is satisfied. The special effect execution condition is satisfied when any of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, and one of the plurality of conditions is: This holds true when the operation means moved to the second position is operated by performing the movement control, and the notification means performs the operation despite the movement control being performed. Where the means did not move to said second position Even in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (c)), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means. (For example, it is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in FIG. 195 (f)), and the game stand is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the operation means can not move to the second position to move originally due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by performing notification to prompt the operation. In addition to being able to safely operate the operation unit, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notification means indicates that the operation means has moved to the second position when the operation means is moved to the second position by performing the movement control. (For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 195 (e)) is executed, and the notification means does not move the operation means to the second position although the movement control is performed. Even in this case, at least the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 195 (f)) as the notification indicating that the operation means has moved to the second position is configured to be executed It is also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the movement was supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with the case of operating to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the player is notified that "this variation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operation means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent situations that can not be done. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means as the notification means. The notification may be possible by at least one of the notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) which can be operated by the player and the operation means. Game console provided with various notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and the operation means is provided with an operation unit (for example, upper Drive the movable portion at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 193 (a)) to the second position (for example the operation completed position shown in FIG. 193 (c)) Means (for example, drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, second sub control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive means, and the operation means is moved to the second position by the drive means. And the presentation means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing the presentation when the operation means is operated by the player, and the notification means is the operation means In the case where the operation unit has not been moved to the second position after performing control to move the unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, in FIG. 195C) Even when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown), at least notification that the player can operate the operation means can be made (for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (f) It is possible to perform an operation reception effect), and it is a game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit can not move to the second position where it should be moved due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by performing notification to prompt the operation. In addition to being able to safely operate the operation unit, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the notification means is in the middle of control to move the operation part from the first position to the second position (for example, during operation shown in FIG. 193 (b)). In addition, the user may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means among the plurality of notification means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to perform at least an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation portion is not moved to the second position. May be

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by not performing the effect of accepting the operation, thereby making it possible to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. There is a case. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, the operation of the player by the operation unit may not be received (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to

  With such a configuration, the player may feel discomfort by not accepting the detection of the operation, and may be able to refrain from operating the operation means or handle the operation means carefully. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification means indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (e)). Same as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even if at least the operation reception effect shown) is performed and the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 195 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the movement was supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with the case of operating to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the player is notified that "this variation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operation means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent situations that can not be done. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, the player can feel discomfort, and refrain from operating the operation means or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. In addition, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.
<Modification of chance button>

  Next, a variation of the chance button will be described. FIG. 196 (a) is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 before the operation, and FIG. 196 (b) is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. FIG. 197 is a front view of the chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of the second operation unit 758.

  The chance button 750 has a substantially triangular prism-shaped base 754 whose side view is an isosceles triangle, a first operation portion 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. A second operation portion 758 provided on the orthogonal second surface, a first gear 754b fixed to the rotating shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and a second gear meshed with the first gear 754b It comprises gear 754c and drive source 754d which consists of a motor etc. which rotationally drives this 2nd gear 754c. The base 754 of the chance button 750 activates the drive source 754d to set the rotation axis 754a as an axis between the initial position shown in FIG. 196 (a) and the operation completed position shown in FIG. 196 (b). It is configured to be rotatable.

  The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor capable of detecting the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 or a sensor circuit. When the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 196 (a), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756, while the base 754 shows FIG. 196 (b). When it is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 5, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. That is, the player can operate the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is at the initial position shown in FIG. 196 (a). Even when the base 754 is at the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be validated.

  Further, the second operation unit 758 is provided with a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor capable of detecting a pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 or a sensor circuit. When the base 754 is at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 196 (b), the detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758, while the base 754 determines the detection result of FIG. When it is in the initial position shown in), the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can operate the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 196 (b). Even when the base 754 is in the initial position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be validated.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) which can be operated by the player and the operation means. Game console provided with various notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and the operation means is provided with an operation unit (for example, upper Drive the movable portion at least from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 193 (a)) to the second position (for example the operation completed position shown in FIG. 193 (c)) Means (for example, drive unit 708), drive control means (for example, second sub control unit 500) capable of controlling the drive of the drive means, and the operation means is moved to the second position by the drive means. And the presentation means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing the presentation when the operation means is operated by the player, and the notification means is the operation means In the case where the operation unit has not been moved to the second position after performing control to move the unit from the first position toward the second position (for example, in FIG. 195C) Even when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown), at least notification that the player can operate the operation means can be made (for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (f) It is possible to perform an operation reception effect), and it is a game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when the operation unit can not move to the second position where it should be moved due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by performing notification to prompt the operation. In addition to being able to safely operate the operation unit, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the notification means is in the middle of control to move the operation part from the first position to the second position (for example, during operation shown in FIG. 193 (b)). In addition, the user may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an operation while the operation means is operating, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent false detection of acceptance of the operation means due to vibration or the like.

  Further, the notification means is a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means among the plurality of notification means. Notification may be possible by at least one or more notification means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity by performing notification to prompt an operation. It should be noted that a plurality of notification means may at least notify that the player can operate the operation means, and the first notification means and the second notification means of the plurality of notification means play the operation means It may at least notify that the person can operate.

  Further, the effect means is configured not to perform at least an effect (for example, a chance button effect) according to the operation of the operation means when the operation portion is not moved to the second position. May be

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by not performing the effect of accepting the operation, thereby making it possible to refrain from operating the operation means or to handle the operation means carefully. There is a case. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  In addition, when the operation unit is not moved to the second position, the operation of the player by the operation unit may not be received (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to

  With such a configuration, the player may feel discomfort by not accepting the detection of the operation, and may be able to refrain from operating the operation means or handle the operation means carefully. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make it easy to notice a failure of the operation means.

  Further, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification means indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 195 (e)). Same as the notification that suggests that the operation unit has moved to the second position even if at least the operation reception effect shown) is performed and the operation unit has not been moved to the second position ( For example, at least the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 195 (f) may be performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the position where the movement was supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with the case of operating to the position to move originally. There is a case. For example, if the operation means indicates that "this variation can be expected" by driving, the player is notified that "this variation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operation means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent situations that can not be done. In addition, there is a case where the player can be made to operate with confidence by performing the same notification as in the case of moving to the second position.

On the other hand, when the notification means is configured to give a notification different from the case of moving to the second position, the player can feel discomfort, and refrain from operating the operation means or carefully operate the operation means. There are cases where it can be handled. In addition, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.
<Operation acceptance effect of chance button 750>

  Next, an operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described using FIG. 198. The same figure (a) is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position, and the figure (b) is a side of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the operation completed position. Sectional drawing, the figure (c) is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position (for example, in the case of failure).

Further, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is at the initial position, and FIG. 7E is the case when the chance button 750 is at the operation completion position. FIG. 11F is a view showing an example of the operation reception effect to be performed, and FIG. 11F is an example of the operation reception effect to be performed when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position FIG.
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  As described above, when the pachinko machine according to the modification is stopping the chance button 750 at the initial position shown in FIG. 198 (a), the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is validated. On the other hand, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is configured to be invalidated.

  Further, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, the first operation portion of the chance button 750 using the decorative symbol display device 208 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 198 (d) An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the 756 can be pressed (in this example, the character display “Press the chance button !!”, the image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and the downward direction Image display of the arrow).

  In this manner, if the operation reception effect is performed at the timing at which the first operation unit 756 can be operated, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. The player can reliably press the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

Note that the first operation unit 756 can be pressed by causing the first operation unit 756 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue) instead of (or in addition to) such operation reception effects. It may be suggested to the player that there is. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, effects using various lamps 418, effects using the speaker 120, movable objects (for example, the shielding device 246, effect An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.
<Operation receptionist production / in operation>

When the pachinko machine according to the modification is moving the chance button 750 from the initial position shown in FIG. 198 (a) to the operation completed position shown in FIG. 1 (b) (during operation), the first operation unit Both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 are configured to be invalidated. In addition, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

  When the pachinko machine according to the modification is stopping the chance button 750 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 198 (b), the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is validated while The detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is configured to be invalidated. As described above, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completed position to the initial position by disabling the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completed position, an object is placed between the chance button 750 and the main body. In addition, it may be possible to avoid the situation in which the player's hand is pinched, and it may be possible to improve the security.

  Further, when the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, the second operation of the chance button 750 is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 198 (e). Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the pressing operation of the section 758 is possible (in this example, a character display different from the case of the first operation unit 756: “Press the super-chance button !!”, The image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and the image display of the downward arrow) are performed. As described above, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the mode of the operation reception effect corresponding to each operation unit is made different, it is possible to avoid a pressing error or the like of the operation unit, In some cases, it is possible to prevent the decline. Note that the second operation unit 758 can be pressed by causing the second operation unit 758 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red) instead of (or in addition to) such operation reception effects. It may be suggested to the player that there is.

  The content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 198 (e). For example, the image display imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit) may not be displayed, and the downward arrow It is not necessary to display an image. Further, when the operation unit is made to emit light, the brightness of the operation unit may be lower than the brightness of the other part (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200), or higher than the brightness of the other part You may With such a configuration, the operation unit can be made more prominent than other portions, so it is easy for the player to easily recognize the position of the operation unit that can be operated, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced. is there.

  In addition, a display (for example, a meter or a time display) may be displayed as an operation reception effect, in which a period in which the operation reception is possible may be displayed. In this case, even if the operation reception remaining time of the operation means is displayed Good.

  Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be simultaneously detected. In this case, as the operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 may be detected. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that both pressing operations are possible (for example, the character display of “Press the chance button or the super-chance button !!”, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation It is preferable to perform the image display imitating the section 758 and the image display of the downward arrow). With such a configuration, variations of the operation by the player can be expanded, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

In addition, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect that suggests that any one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, “press the chance button !!”. Letter notation may be used. Further, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation reception notification may be performed.
<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>

  The pachinko machine according to the modification is configured to validate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the movement completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is caught by the main body etc. to move from the initial position to the movement completion position (or from the movement completion position The case where rotation to the initial position is not possible can be mentioned as an example.

  In addition, even when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the player can press the chance button 750 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 198 (f). An operation reception effect to suggest (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (effect shown in FIG. 198 (e)) to be performed after the operation is completed.

  As described above, even if the chance button 750 can be accepted even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, the operation of the chance button 750 is possible even when the chance button 750 is broken. Can be accepted, so the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and the player's operation is urged. it can.

  The operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 198 (e) shown in FIG. 198 (e)) performed when the operation is at the operation completed position and the operation reception effect (for example, performed when stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position) The operation reception effect shown in FIG. 198 (f) may be different. For example, while the operation reception effect performed when the operation completion position is performed uses a first type of notification means (for example, two types of liquid crystal display device and lamp), while it is between the initial position and the operation completion position A second type of notification means (for example, three types of a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and a speaker) different from the first type may be used for the operation reception effect performed when stopped.

  In addition, the same type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and the like) in both the operation reception effect performed when the operation completion position is performed and the operation reception effect performed when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. And the speaker), the aspect of some of the notification means may be made different. For example, in the operation reception effect performed in the operation completion position, the liquid crystal display device performs the first display (for example, character display and image display) and the operation performed in the case of stopping between the initial position and the operation completion position In the reception effect, the second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same mode of operation.

With such a configuration, it can be clearly notified whether the chance button 750 is at the predetermined position or at a position other than the predetermined position, and an operation according to the state of the chance button 750 may be urged.
<Example of slot machine>

  Next, an example of a slot machine will be described. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 199 includes a main body 101, and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored inside the center of the main body 101, and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted other than the reel. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  At the back of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is disposed. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a pay line 114 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, upper horizontal pay line, lower horizontal pay line, right Five lines of the down pay line and the upper right pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the bet number.

  The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 122 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-play which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Further, the bet button 132 also functions as a chance button for changing the mode of the effect by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button 132. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is insertion of the specified number of medals, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. is there. The stored sheet number indicator 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the number-of-payouts display 127 are seven segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 which have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificates is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout port 155 and a medal receptacle 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 160 is disposed on the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the top of the rendering device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image provided on the back side of the shutters 163 (effect image The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (the player's side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  FIG. 200 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box which is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the side surface plate 260 on the left side, the side surface plate 260 on the right side, the lower surface plate 264 and the back surface plate 242 and is open at the front. A main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is disposed inside the main body 101 at a position not overlapping the air vent 249 provided at the upper portion of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are disposed. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 in which the sub control board is stored is disposed. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out the medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower surface plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply 252 is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front of the power supply 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside into the slot machine 100 from direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as a main control unit 300 and sub control units 400 and 500 described later and each device. Do. Furthermore, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 or the like of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) is provided. There is.

  The medal auxiliary storage 240 is disposed on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is disposed behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting the power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected thereto extends to the outside through the power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via the hinge device 276, and an effect control board for controlling the effect device 160 and the effect device 160 is provided above the symbol display window 113. The upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medal passes when the medal selector 170 causes an illegal medal or the like to fall to the medal receiver 161, etc. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main effect according to a main control unit 300 for controlling the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery of winning combination, and stop of reels. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 generates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor or the like and transmission of driving pulses in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the dividing value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the dividing data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of interrupt is 256 × 47 × 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 is a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main control unit main processing described later).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from the various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, and medal insertion slot 141) at every interrupt time. Medal medal acceptance sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal medal payout sensor for medals dispensed from the medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

  When sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing, and stores it in the register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the passage of medals. Two start levers 135 sensors are provided inside the start lever 135 and detect start operations by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are provided on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are disposed on each of the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, and are inserted when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as insertion medals to the game Detect the operation. In addition, the bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132, and when the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as insertion medals to the game When the bet button 132 functions as a chance button, the pressing operation of the chance button is detected.

  The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a noncontact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are disposed at predetermined positions of the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes It becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180 Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 338 (prize line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insert lamp 129, game start available lamp 121, number of stored cards A drive circuit 328 is provided to drive the display 125, the game information display 126, and the number-of-payouts display 127).

  In addition, an information output circuit 334 (external concentrated terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first secondary control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 includes various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bed button lamp). (A lamp for causing the bet button 132 to emit light) or the like is connected.

  Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404. In addition, a sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

  In addition, a drive circuit 425 is provided in the first auxiliary control unit 400, and a drive unit 427 for vertically driving the bet button 132 is connected to the drive circuit 425. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in <bet button 132> below.

  The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second secondary control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 performs various controls of the rendering device 160 including display control of the rendering image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is configured of a plurality of control units, for example, a control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls drive devices for various effects. It is also good.

  The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initialization of the I / O 310, initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation allowance to the WDT 314 and initialization Set the value etc. In step S103, medal insertion / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not the medal has been inserted, and the pay line display lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of the medal. In addition, since the processing of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed when the player plays back in the previous game, insertion of the medals by the player becomes unnecessary. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 is operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a valid pay line is determined. In step S107, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination of any winning combination (including the operating combination) is made, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

  In step S113, rotation of all the reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received, and when any one of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop control in which any of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111 Stop based on data. When all the reels 110 to 112 stop, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, a winning determination is made. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that a bell prize is won. In step S119, if any winning combination with a payout is won, medals of the number corresponding to the winning combination are paid out according to the number of pay lines.

At step S121, a game state control process is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing relating to the transition of each gaming state of normal gaming, BB gaming, RB gaming, and internal winning gaming is performed, and the gaming state is transitioned by the establishment of the start condition and the termination condition. One game is completed by the above. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.
<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of the sensor circuit 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is divided for each of the various sensors 318. It stores in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when the information with the detection signal is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, preparation for transmitting a bet button acceptance command to the first sub control unit 400 is performed.

  In step S207, various game processing is performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (the various interrupt statuses are acquired based on the signals from the various sensors 318), and processing according to the status is performed (for example, the interrupt statuses of the acquired stop buttons 137 to 139) Stop button acceptance processing). In step S209, a timer update process is performed. The various timers are updated in each time unit.

  In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the present embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 11 To 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a start lever reception command, a bet button reception command, an effect command associated with the effect lottery process, a rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, a stop button 137 Stop button acceptance command accompanying acceptance of the operation of 139, stop position information command accompanying stop processing of reels 110 to 112, payout number command and payout end command accompanying medal payout processing, command indicating game state, etc.), bits 0 to 0 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) To have.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In step S213, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal discharge abnormality is monitored, and an error is detected. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker on which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, various processes for ending the timer interruption end process are performed. In this timer interruption end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the respective original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. On the other hand, in step S221, the power saving process such as initialization of the I / O port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption at the time of power return as return data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, a process of reading out effect data from the ROM 406 and the like, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction for various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction to the drive circuit 424 of the shutter 163 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, movable object control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, when there is an instruction to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 425.

  In step S317, information output processing is performed to make settings to transmit a control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S309. For example, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 among the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 204 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 204 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 204A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S315, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S601 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S601, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S609, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command at step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, processing such as reading out effect data from the ROM 506, and performing processing of updating effect data when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S609. For example, when an instruction for image control is included in the effect data read out in step S609, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 205 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 205 (c). The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 205A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Accordingly, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, a process of updating the effect random number is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 205 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S905, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S907, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S 909, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S 911. Otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S911, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Bet button 132>

  FIG. 206 (a) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 and its vicinity when the bet button 132 is at the initial position, and FIG. 206 (b) is a state where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation FIG. 7C is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG.

The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls the drive unit 427 to obtain the initial position shown in FIG. 206 (a). And the operation completion position shown in FIG. 206 (c).
<Bet button 132 / initial position>

In the initial position shown in FIG. 25 (a), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is in a state in which the upward movement is restricted by the rotating member (not shown) and can be moved only downward. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, the detection button (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, thereby pressing the bet button 132. Is detectable.
<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>

At the operation completion position shown in FIG. 206 (c), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is released from the restriction on the upward movement and is moved upward by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown) ), And the upward movement is restricted again, and only the downward movement is possible. Even in this operation completed position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, a detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, whereby the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation is detectable.
<Betting button 132 / during operation>

  During the state shown in FIG. 206 (b), that is, the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 206 (a) to the operation completed position shown in FIG. 206 (c), the bet button 132 is played To ignore the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor even if the detection button of the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the person and detected by the bet button 132 sensor (not to judge that the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is valid) Configured.

With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, for example, when the player mistakenly presses the bet button 132 while the bet button 132 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the depression operation of the bet button 132 is ignored during the operation of the bet button 132, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the depression operation of the bet button 132 is validated. May be
<When the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button>

  FIG. 207 (a) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the notification lamp 123, the replay lamp 122, the game medal insertable lamp 124, the game start enable lamp 121, and the game medal insert lamp 129, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game medal insertable lamp 124 is on, and the number of lights on the game medal insert lamp 129 is less than the prescribed number of medals (3 in this example) necessary for one game. The state is a state in which the player can start the game by inserting a predetermined number of medals, and the medal can be electronically inserted by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, and the first sub control unit 400 lights a bet button lamp (not shown) and turns the bet button 132 into a predetermined color (for example, yellow). The light is illuminated to indicate to the player that the acceptance of the depression operation of the bet button 132 is valid. Also, when the player has inserted a prescribed number of medals, as shown in FIG. 6B, the game start enable lamp 121 is turned on, and it is informed that the game start operation is possible. Ru.

In addition, the game medal insertable lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be stored electronically in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum stored number (for example, 50), and it is informed that the medal can not be inserted. . In addition, when a medal is inserted while the game medal insertable lamp 124 is turned off (when it is attempted to insert a medal exceeding the maximum storage number), the medal is forcibly discharged from the medal discharge port 155. Configured.
<When the bet button 132 can not be used>

  FIG. 207 (b) is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can not be used as a medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), the game medal input enable lamp 124 and the game start enable lamp 121 are on, and the number of lights on the game medal input lamp 129 is the same as the specified number (3 in this example). The player is in a state in which the player can start playing the game, and pressing the start lever 135 can start rotating the reels 110 to 112 (starting the game).

  In addition, when the game start possible lamp 121 is lit, the medal is not inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed because the specified number of medals are inserted (the detection result of the medal input button is not accepted) , And the bet button 132 can not be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that acceptance of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

Even if the game start enable lamp is on, it is possible to use the bet button 132 as a chance button. For example, while the replaying lamp 122 is on, medals can not be inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, an effect that urges the bet button 132 to be pressed as an effect between the game in which the replay role has won and the start of the next game (when the start lever 135 is depressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotation). May be performed. In this state, the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to indicate to the player that the reception of the depression operation of the bet button 132 is valid by lighting the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the bet button 132 to be depressed may be performed during a period other than the illustrated period.
<When the bet button 132 is used as a chance button>

  FIG. 207 (c) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 208 (a) is when the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation (B) is an external appearance perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completed position, and FIG. 208 (c) is an initial position of the bet button 132. And the operation completed position (for example, in the case of failure) is an appearance perspective view of the bet button 132.

FIG. 207 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 208 (d) is a diagram showing an example of the normal effect, FIG. 208 (e) shows an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position, and FIG. 208 (g) is between the initial position and the operation completion position of the bet button 132. It is the figure which showed an example of the operation reception presentation effect performed when it stops by (for example, when it fails).
<Operation reception effect / initial position>

  When the first sub control unit 400 stops the bet button 132 at the initial position shown in FIG. 207 (c), it is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing to start accepting the detection result of the bet button). Suggesting to the player that pressing the bet button 132 is effective by lighting the bet button lamp and causing the bet button 132 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), and the second sub-control unit As shown in FIG. 6D, an operation reception effect 500 (in this example, the character of the lord) informing the player that the depression operation of the bet button 132 is possible using the effect image display device 157, as shown in FIG. Makes an image display holding the signboard on which the bet button 132 is illuminated in blue.

  In this example, the bet buttons 132 emit light in different colors in order to allow the player to easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as the medal insertion button or can be used as the chance button. Light may be emitted in color. In this example, although the bet button 132 emits light in a predetermined color, for example, blinking may be performed in a predetermined color. In this case, when the bet button 132 is used as a medal insertion button The blinking pattern may be changed when the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, it blinks in a first cycle (for example, 1 second) repeatedly, and when used as a chance button, a second cycle (for example, 0. 0.) shorter than the first cycle. Configure to blink repeatedly in 5 seconds.

With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an operation error of the button or the like. is there. In addition, when the detection result of the bet button depression can be received, the bet button lamp may not be lighted, or the operation reception effect may not be performed, and the operation of the operation means (or operation unit) is urged. It is not necessary to perform the presentation.
<Operation receptionist production / in operation>

  During the operation of the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 208 (a), that is, from the initial position where the bet button 132 is shown in FIG. 207 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 moves from the initial position shown in FIG. When moving to a position, the bet button lamp is not turned on, and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, in the effect image display device 157, normal effects as shown in FIGS. 208 (d) and 209 (a) are executed. Here, as the normal effects, in the case of a pachinko machine, effects such as variation are produced, reach effects, jackpot effects, etc. are mentioned, and in the case of a slot machine, effects produced during BB, effects during reel rotation, freezed An effect etc. are mentioned.

The bet button lamp may be turned on during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. In addition, the bet button lamp lights up in the first color (for example, red) when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, and the bet button lamp is in the second color (for example, white) when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid. You may turn it on. In addition, the bet button lamp is lighted at the first brightness when the detection of the pressing operation is valid, and the bet button lamp is lighted at the second brightness lower than the first brightness when the detection of the pressing operation is invalid. May be
<Operation reception effect / operation completion position>

When the bet button 132 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 208 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 makes a bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 208 (b). By lighting up and making the bet button 132 emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red), it is suggested to the player that pressing operation of the bet button 132 is possible, as shown in FIG. 208 (e). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position) And the downward arrow image display).
<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>

  The first sub control unit 400 has a state in which the detection unit can detect the pressing operation of the bet button 132 even when the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 208 (c) is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable portion of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed portion and the movable portion can not rise to the operation completion position, the bet button One example is a case where the biasing force of the spring 132 is weakened and the movable part can not rise to the operation completion position.

  Also, even when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button, as shown in FIG. 208 (f). Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIGS. 208 (g) and 209 (b). Then, the same effect as the operation reception effect (effect shown in FIG. 208 (e)) performed after the completion of the operation is performed.

  As described above, even if the bet button 132 can be accepted even when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, the operation of the bet button 132 is possible even when the bet button 132 is broken. Can be accepted, so the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Furthermore, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and to prompt the player's operation. it can.

  FIG. 209C is an example of a special effect displayed when the operation of the bet button 132 is received. This effect is, of course, when the bet button 132 is at the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position, but also when the bet button 132 is at a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is displayed also when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position. In addition, even if the button is not pressed, it may be displayed after a certain period (for example, after the end of the period in which the button can be received), the effect after the button is pressed is not limited to the liquid crystal display, and the effect movable body To operate (the operation pattern may change), light emitting means such as an LED may light (the light emission pattern may change), and sounds such as BGM and sound effects may be heard from a sound output means such as a speaker. It is also good.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes operation means (for example, chance buttons 700 and 750, a first operation unit 756, a second operation unit 758, and a bet button 132 provided at positions where the player can operate. , And pressed surfaces of these buttons and operation units, display means capable of at least executing display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), and at least state control capable of changing the state of the operation means A game console comprising control means (for example, a second sub control unit 500), wherein the state of the operation means is a first projecting state when the state control by the state control means is performed. A second projecting state (for example, FIGS. 193 (c) and 195 (c) (for example, initial positions shown in FIGS. 193 (a), 195 (a), 196 (a), 206 (a)). ), Figure 196 ( 206 (c), and the operating means in the second projecting state is more projecting than the operating means in the first projecting state. The display means is capable of executing a first display for prompting the player to operate the operation means in the first projecting state, and the display means is in the second projecting state. It is possible to execute a second display for prompting the player to operate the operation means, and the first display can at least show that the operation means is in the first projecting state. The second indication is at least capable of indicating that the operating means is in the second projecting state, and the display means is operable to operate the second projecting state. When the means are operated, the third display is less Regardless of whether the operating means has changed to the second projecting state by the execution of the state control, the first display is not associated with the execution of the state control. The second display is configured to be displayed on the display unit, and the display unit changes the operation unit to the second projection state even though the state control is performed. Even if not, at least the third display (for example, effect at the time of pressing the button shown in FIG. 209 (c)) can be started in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player can perform the notification to prompt the operation even when the operation means does not change to the second projecting state that should originally change due to the failure of the operation means or the like. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with confidence, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing an operational opportunity. For this reason, it may be possible to prevent in advance the situation where the player's willingness to play decreases due to a failure of the operation means, etc., and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, when prompting the operation of the operating means in the normal state due to the first projecting state not changing to the second projecting state due to a failure or the like of the operating means, the first projecting state to the second projecting state In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that there is a possibility of a machine failure by notifying the user that the operation of the operation means in the special state is performed due to the state control being performed. In some cases, it can be suggested not to give the player excessive expectations.

The display means changes the operating means to the first projecting state (that does not project beyond the operating means in the second projecting state) despite the execution of the state control. Even if not, it may be possible to start at least the third display in response to the operation of the operation means.
Other Embodiments

Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in order to avoid the redundant description, the same reference numerals are given to the same contents as those of the other embodiments than the present embodiment in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS.
<High probability table for judgment of success / failure>

  FIG. 210 (a) is an example of a high probability table for pass / fail determination used for the pass / fail determination of the special view 1 (or the special view 2) when the special view probability is in the special view high probability state.

  The success / failure determination high probability table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this success / failure determination high probability table, the numerical value range of random numbers from 0 to 65535 and the success / failure results of the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2) are associated.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the high probability table for success / failure determination when the special drawing probability is in the special drawing high probability state, and based on the special drawing winning random value acquired at a predetermined timing. Whether to make figure fluctuation game winning (big hit), special figure changing game to be winning (small hit) or not winning (loss) "special figure of the pass / fail judgment (big figure determination of the special figure or small hit Make a judgment).

  For example, in the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the numerical range of 10001 to 11638, it is determined that the special figure variation game is won (big hit) and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating that a big hit will be set in the big hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as "set big hit flag ON"). In the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, when the acquired special figure win random number value is in the numerical range of 11639 to 11940, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating small hit is set in the small hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "set small hit flag ON").

On the other hand, in the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 10000 or 11941 to 65535, it is determined as the loss of special figure fluctuation game, Set the information that indicates losing in the big hit flag and small hit flag storage area mentioned above (Hereafter, it is called "set big hit flag off" to set lost information in the big hit flag storage area Setting the lost information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "set the small hit flag off"). It goes without saying that the numerical range of the random number value is not limited to the numerical range shown in this example (the same applies to the other tables described below).
<Low probability table for judgment of success or failure>

  FIG. 210 (b) is an example of a low probability table for adequacy determination used in the success / failure determination of the special view 1 (or special view 2) when the special view probability is in the special view low probability state.

  The success / failure determination low probability table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this success / failure determination low probability table, the numerical value range of random numbers from 0 to 65535 and the success / failure results of the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2) are associated.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for success / failure determination when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and based on the special figure winning random number value acquired at a predetermined timing. Whether to make figure fluctuation game winning (big hit), special figure changing game to be winning (small hit) or not winning (loss) "special figure of the pass / fail judgment (big figure determination of the special figure or small hit Make a judgment).

For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is the numerical range of 10001 to 10162, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit) and the big hit flag is turned on. Set to In addition, when the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value which is acquired is the numerical range of 10163-10464, it decides with the special figure fluctuation game winning (small hitting) and the small hitting flag Set to on. On the other hand, in the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure win random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 10000 or 10465 to 65535, it is determined as the loss of special figure fluctuation game, Set the big hit flag and small hit flag to off.
<Table for special drawing determination>

  FIG. 210 (c) is an example of a special drawing determination table for determining the stop symbol of special drawing 1 (or special drawing 2).

  The special drawing determination table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The special drawing determination table includes the results of the above-mentioned special drawing big hit judgment and small hit judgment (specific drawing yes / no judgment result), the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the above-mentioned FIG. 186 (a). The kind of stop symbol of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) explained using it is associated.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special drawing determination table, the above-described big hit determination result (big hit flag value), the small hit determination result (small hit flag value), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on the "special figure symbol lottery" to determine the type of special figure stop symbol. In addition, when the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as a symbol random number value, and when the small hit flag is on, the small hit symbol generated from the above-mentioned special figure winning random number value The random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are lost), the obtained lost symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value Do.

  For example, when the big hit flag is on (when the result of the determination is a big hit), select the special figure A when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100) and obtain it Special figure B is selected when the symbol random number value is 50 to 69 (that is, with a probability of 20/100), and when the symbol random number value obtained is 70 to 77 (that is, with a probability of 8/100) Special figure C is selected, special figure D is selected when the acquired pattern random number value is 78-83 (ie with probability of 6/100), and when acquired figure random number value is 84-91 (ie, , Special symbol E) is selected, and special symbol F is selected when the acquired symbol random number value is 92 to 99 (that is, with probability 8/100).

Also, if the small hit flag is on (if the judgment result is a small hit), select the special figure G when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100) The special figure H is selected when the acquired symbol random number value is 50 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 50/100). Also, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the result of the determination is a loss), when the acquired symbol random number value is 0 to 49 (that is, with a probability of 50/100) Special figure J is selected when the selected symbol random number value is 50 to 99 (that is, with a probability of 50/100).
<Special figure 1 fluctuation display time decision table>

  FIG. 211 (a) is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in the fluctuation time lottery of the special drawing prefetch process described later.

  The special view 1 variation display time determination table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 1 fluctuation display time decision table, with the kind of stop design of the above-mentioned special figure 1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, the numerical range of the random value of 0-65535, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 A mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a “variation pattern”) performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and a table number are associated with each other. In this example, since the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern have a one-to-one correspondence, another data table in which the fluctuation time is associated with the fluctuation pattern is provided in the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table. Only one of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern may be stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the variation time of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 1 variation display time determination table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 (Variation pattern) and "special figure 1 variation time lottery" which determines a table number are performed.

  For example, when the type of stop symbol in Special Figure 1 is Special Figure A or Special Figure B, 15000 ms as a variation time when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 1000 regardless of the presence or absence of power support. When the random number value is in the numerical range of 1001 to 20000, 45000 ms is used as the fluctuation time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 per normal reach. The table 1 is selected as the table number per reach A as the presentation mode, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 20001 to 65535, the variation time is 65000 ms, and the presentation mode with the decorative symbol display device 208 is the reach B The table 1 is selected as the table number. In addition, when the type of stop design of special figure 1 is special figure C-special figure H, it is 12000ms as fluctuation time, the production feature with decoration design display 208 regardless of the presence or absence of power support and the acquired random number value As the chance eyes all off, select table 2 as the table number respectively.

  In addition, when the type of stop symbol of special figure 1 is special figure I or special figure J, there is no power support, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 fluctuation game is 3, acquired random number value is 0-65000 In the case of the numerical range, 3000 ms as the fluctuation time, shortened loss as the presentation mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 3 as the table number are selected, and the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 65001 to 65400. The time is 10000 ms, normal reach loss is selected as the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 3 is selected as the table number, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 65401 to 65500, 40000 ms as the fluctuation time, decorative symbol display Select reach A loss as the presentation mode in the device 208, and select the table 3 as the table number. When the obtained random number is a number range of 65,501 to 65536, 60000ms as varying time, the decorative pattern display device 208 in the representation embodiment as Reach B loss, selects respectively the table 3 as the table number.

In addition, if the type of stop symbol of Special Figure 1 is Special Figure I or Special Figure J, there is no power support, and the number of pending special game 1 floating game is 0 to 2 or the special symbol 1 of stop symbol When the type is special figure I or special figure J, with power support, and the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games is 0 to 3, fluctuation occurs when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 50000. The time is 8000 ms, the loss is selected as the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 4 is selected as the table number, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 50001 to 60000, 10000 ms as the fluctuation time, the decorative symbol display device Normal reach loss as the effect mode in 208, Table 4 as the table number is selected, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 60001 to 65000, 4000 as the fluctuation time ms, reach A loss as the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 4 as the table number, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 65001 to 65536, 60000 ms as the fluctuation time, the decorative symbol display device The reach B loss is selected as the effect mode at 208, and the table 4 is selected as the table number.
<Special figure 2 fluctuation display time decision table>

  FIG. 211 (b) is an example of a special figure 2 variation display time determination table used to determine the variation time of the special figure 2 in the variation time lottery of the special figure look-ahead process to be described later.

  The special view 2 variation display time determination table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure 2 fluctuation display time decision table, with the kind of stop design of the above-mentioned special figure 2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the numerical range of the random value of 0-65535, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 The mode (variation pattern) of the effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 and the table number are associated with each other. In this example, since the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern have a one-to-one correspondence, another data table in which the fluctuation time is associated with the fluctuation pattern is provided in the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table. Only one of the fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern may be stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the variation time of the special figure 2 based on the special figure 2 variation display time determination table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 (Variation pattern) and "special figure 2 variation time lottery" which determines a table number are performed.

  For example, when the type of stop symbol in Special Figure 2 is Special Figure A or Special Figure B, 15000 ms as a variation time when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 1000 regardless of the presence or absence of power support. When the random number value is in the numerical range of 1001 to 20000, 45000 ms is used as the fluctuation time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208. The table 5 is selected as the table number for each reach A as the presentation mode, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 20001 to 65535, the variation time is 65000 ms, and the presentation B is the reach B as the presentation mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 The table 5 is selected as the table number. In addition, when the type of stop design of the special figure 2 is the special figure C-the special figure H, it is 12000ms as fluctuation time, regardless of the presence and absence of the electric support and the random number value which is acquired As the chance eyes all off, the table 6 is selected as the table number.

  In addition, if the type of stop symbol of Special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, with power support, and the number of reserved special figure 2 fluctuation games is 1 to 3, regardless of the acquired random number value As the variation time, 1500 ms as the variation time, the extremely shortened loss as the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 7 as the table number are respectively selected. In addition, if the type of stop symbol of Special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, with power support, and the number of reservations for special figure 2 fluctuation game is 0, it fluctuates regardless of the acquired random number value. As the time, 8000 ms, loss as the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 8 as the table number are respectively selected.

In addition, when the type of stop symbol of special figure 2 is special figure I or special figure J, there is no power support, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 fluctuation game is 0-3, the acquired random value is 0- When the numerical range is 50000, 8000 ms is selected as the variation time, the loss is selected as the presentation mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 9 is selected as the table number, and the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 50001 to 60000. 10000 ms as the fluctuation time, normal reach loss as the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table 9 as the table number are selected, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 60001 to 65000, 40000 ms as the fluctuation time, the decorative pattern Select reach A loss as the effect mode on the display unit 208, and select the table 9 as the table number. When the obtained random number is a number range of from 65001 to 65536, 60000ms as varying time, the decorative pattern display device 208 in the representation embodiment as Reach B loss, selects respectively the table 9 as the table number.
<Holding change notice lottery table>

  FIG. 212 (a) shows an example of a hold change notice lottery table used to determine the hold change mode in the "hold change change lottery process" of the start-up winning sub-side preview notice execution process described later. The figure (b) is a figure showing an example of a mode of change of retention.

  The pending change notice lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this pending change notice lottery table, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery), and the special figure 1 (or The mode of variation (variation pattern) performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the variation display of FIG. 2), the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the mode of suspension change are associated.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the hold change notice lottery table and a predetermined timing (for example, in the case of the special view 1, the timing when the ball wins the first special view start opening 230, the special view In the case of 2, "lottery processing of change on hold" is performed to determine the state of change on hold based on the random number value acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second special view start opening 232).

  For example, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) described above is 10000 ms, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach In the case of loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, select "No change", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, "pending A (爺)" select. In addition, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the above special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is 40000 ms, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach In the case of A loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 39, "no change" is selected, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 40 to 79, "pending A (爺)" Is selected, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 80 to 99, select "Pending B".

  In addition, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the above special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is 60000 ms, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach In the case of a loss of B, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 29, select "No change", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 30 to 79, select "pending A". When the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 80 to 95, "hold B" is selected, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 96 to 99, "movable body" is selected. Also, even when other fluctuation times (in the present embodiment, 15000 ms, 45000 ms, 65000 ms) are selected in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above, similar operations are performed according to the same table. Draw a lottery and determine the status of the pending change.

  In the hold change notice lottery table of this example, it is 60000 ms (the change pattern is reach B loss) that the change time is selected or 65000 ms (the change pattern is the reach) when selecting “movable” in the hold change lottery process. Since it is only in the case of B), it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is the reach B loss or the reach B per turn when the effect movable body 224 operates at the time of the holding change. In addition, to select “Hold B” in the lottery process of hold change, change time is 40000 ms (change pattern is reach A loss), change time is 60000 ms (change pattern is reach B loss), change time is 45000 ms (change Since the pattern is only for reach A) or the fluctuation time is 65000 ms (the fluctuation pattern is for reach B), the fluctuation pattern is displayed when the hold icon for hold B is displayed at the hold change. It is determined that it is a reach A loss, a reach B loss, a reach A, or a reach B.

  When “no change” is selected in the hold change lottery process, control is performed so as not to change the hold mode when moving, increasing, or changing the hold icon. For example, in the case of moving the hold icon of normal hold, the movement is performed in the normal hold mode, and in the case of moving the hold icon of hold A, the movement is performed in the mode of hold A.

  In addition, when either “pending A” or “pending B” is selected, control is performed to change the pending mode when moving, increasing, or changing the pending icon. For example, when “hold A” is selected when moving the hold icon for normal hold, control to move while changing the mode for normal hold to the mode for hold A, and movement for the mode for normal hold is completed. Immediately after this, control is performed to change the normal hold to the mode of hold A, etc. If the "hold B" is selected when moving the normal hold icon, change the mode of normal hold to the mode of hold B. Control such as moving while performing control such as changing the normal hold to the state of the hold B immediately after the movement of the normal hold mode is completed.

In addition, when “movable body” is selected, control is performed to operate the effect movable body 224 when moving, increasing, or changing the hold icon. For example, when “movable body” is selected when increasing the hold icon for hold A, control to rotate the forearm 224 b of the effect movable body 244 upward according to the increase for the hold icon for hold A, When the "movable body" is selected when moving the hold icon of hold B, control such as rotating the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 244 downward according to the movement of the hold icon of hold B is performed.
<Reach A time production character lottery table>

  FIG. 213 (a) is an example of a reach A at time effect character lottery table used to determine a character image to be used for effect in effect character lottery of effect lottery process 1 described later, and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the character image.

  The reach A at time effect character lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this reach A time effect character lottery table, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery), and the decorative symbol display device The mode (variation pattern) of the effect performed using 208, the numerical range of the random value of 0 to 99, and the type of the character image are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs a "effect character lottery" that determines a character image based on the reach A at time effect character lottery table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is 40000 ms, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach In the case of A loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 79, select "character A", and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 80 to 96, select "character B". When the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 97 to 99, select "character C". In addition, the variation time of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is 45000 ms, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 is reach In the case of A, if the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 29, select "Character A", and if the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 30 to 59, select "Character B." When the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 60 to 99, "Chara C" is selected.

  In this reach A at time production character lottery table, the probability of winning character A in the case of reach A loss rather than the probability of winning character A in the case of reach A (in this example 30/100) (this example Then, since the 80/100) is set high, it is likely that the character A will appear in the direction if the reach A loser is more than the reach A. In other words, when the character A appears in the effect, the possibility of the reach A loss is higher than the reach A. In addition, the winning probability (in this example, 40/100) in which the character C is won is set higher in the case of reach A than in the winning probability (in this example, 3/100) in which the character C is won in the case of reach A loss. Because it is, it is more likely that the character C will appear in the direction per reach A than the reach A loss. In other words, when the character C appears in the effect, the possibility of the reach A is higher than the reach A loss. Therefore, when the character C is made to appear in the effect, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

When "Chara A" is selected in this effect character lottery, a rendering using Character A (in this example, a character image of a wolf) is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and "Chara B" is selected. Performs an effect using the character B (in this example, a character image of Sabohani) in the decorative symbol display device 208, and when "Chara C" is selected, the character C (in this example) in the decorative symbol display device 208 , Panda character image) is used. In addition, when character A or character B is selected in the effect character lottery, a state lottery to be described next is performed.
<State lottery table>

  FIG. 213C is an example of a state lottery table used to determine the state in the state lottery of effect lottery process 1 described later.

  The state lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this state lottery table, the type of the character (selected character) selected in the above-mentioned effect character lottery, the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the type of the state of the chance button 700 are associated. . The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs “state lottery” which determines the state of the chance button 700 based on the state lottery table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing.

  For example, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above is reach A loss, and the character image determined in the subsequent effect character lottery is In the case of character A, referring to the line of "character A (loss)", when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 2, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 3 to 99, the first state is selected as the state. In addition, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above is reach A loss, and the character image determined in the subsequent effect character lottery is In the case of character B, referring to the line of "character B (loss)", when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 1, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 2 to 99, the first state is selected as the state.

  In addition, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above is per reach A, and the character image determined in the subsequent demonstration character lottery is In the case of character A, refer to the line of “character A (hit)”, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, select the second state as the state, and the acquired random number is When the numerical range is 20 to 99, the first state is selected as the state. In addition, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above is per reach B, and the character image determined in the subsequent demonstration character lottery is In the case of character B, referring to the line of “character B (hit)”, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, the second state is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is When the numerical range is 50 to 99, the first state is selected as the state.

In the state lottery table of this example, when the selected character is character A (hit) or character B (hit), the probability of selecting the first state (in this example, character A (hit) is 80/100, character B Probability of selecting the first state when the selected character is character A (loss) or character B (loss) (in this example, character A (loss) is 97/100) The character B (loss) is set higher than 98/100. That is, in the chance button 700, reach A loss is likely to be the first state more than reach A.
<Normal pattern>

  FIG. 214 (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. In the stop display mode of the common drawing of the second embodiment, there are three kinds of "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol 1, "common drawing B" which is a hit symbol 2, and "common drawing C" which is a lost symbol. There is.

  When the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, using the normal symbol display device 210, all the lighting of the seven segments and one central one are performed. Repeat the lighting of the segment and perform "variable display of common figures". In this example, the fluctuation display time of the common drawing is 20000 ms at the common drawing low probability and 1000 ms at the common drawing high probability.

And, when notifying the winning of the common drawing changing game after the change display time of the common drawing, the "general drawing A (per symbol 1)" or the "general drawing B (per symbol 2)" is stopped and displayed, In the case of reporting the loss of the figure fluctuation game, the "general drawing C (missing symbol)" is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 214 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.
<Decorative design for ordinary design>

  FIG. 214 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol for a normal symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of "normal decoration 1"-"normal decoration 3" as a decorative pattern for a normal pattern, and these decorative patterns for a normal pattern are "variation display of a common drawing decorative pattern" described later Used in

  When the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, seven effect patterns P1 shown in FIG. One presentation pattern is selected from ~ P7, and the display is switched according to the selected presentation pattern.

  Here, the effect pattern P1 is, as a variable display of a common drawing decorative pattern, “a common drawing decoration 1 → a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 3 → a common drawing decoration 1 → a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 3 → ... ( After that, it is an effect pattern in which the display is performed in the order of “repeatedly”. The effect pattern P2 is, as a variable display of a common drawing decorative pattern, “a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 3 → a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 3 → ... (hereinafter, repeated It is an effect pattern in which the display is performed in the order of “)”, the number of times of displaying the flat figure decoration 2 per unit time is more than the effect pattern P1, and the expectation degree of long opening of electric chew described later is improved. . The effect pattern P3 is a effect pattern that displays in the order of "general drawing decoration 2 → general drawing decoration 2 → general drawing decoration 2 ... ... (repeatedly from here on)" as the variable display of common drawing decorative symbols, By continuing to display the decoration 2, it is an effect pattern that notifies that the long release of the electric chew has been determined.

  The effect pattern P4 is a variable display of a common drawing decorative pattern, such as "a common drawing decoration 1 → a common drawing decoration 2 → a common drawing decoration 3 → a letter display of" heat "(hereinafter sometimes referred to as P4 (heat)) → a common drawing It is an effect pattern that displays in the order of figure decoration 1 → common figure decoration 2 → common figure decoration 3 → "Heat" character display → ... (repeatedly hereafter) ", and the character display of" heat "is displayed on the effect pattern P1 By adding, it is an effect pattern in which the expectation degree of the long opening of the electric chew is higher than that of the effect pattern P1. The effect pattern P5 is a variable display of a common figure decorative pattern, and a character display of a common drawing decoration 2 → "A" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as P5 (A)) → a common drawing decoration 2 → a character display of "B" (Hereafter, it may be referred to as P5 (B)) → ... (hereinafter, portions of character display are displayed in alphabetical order (C → D → ...)) "is an effect pattern for displaying in order.

  The effect pattern P6 is an effect pattern in which the electric seed chew open notification effect indicating that the long open of the electric chew has been decided is performed without displaying the ordinary decoration pattern. In the effect pattern P7, character display of "chance" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as P7 (chance)) → display of an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as P7 (button)) → It is an effect pattern which displays in order of "figure decoration 2".

  The variable display of these decorative symbols for ordinary symbols is performed simultaneously with the common drawing fluctuation display by the common drawing display device 210, but in the present embodiment, before the stop display of the common drawing by the common drawing display device 210 at the common drawing low probability. It is configured to do only for 5 seconds.

In addition, as shown in the same figure (c), when notifying of the winning of the "common figure A (per hit pattern 1)" after the variation display of the normal design decorative pattern, the common figure decoration shown in the same figure (b) When 1 is stopped and displayed and the notification of the winning of "P" B (per symbol 2) is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol for the normal symbol, the "P" diagram decoration 2 shown in FIG. In the case of notifying the winning of the "general drawing C (loss of design)" after the variable display of the decorative symbol for the normal symbol, the general drawing decoration 3 shown in the figure (b) is stopped and displayed. And, when it is elected “general drawing A (per symbol 1)”, control to open the electric chew (the second special drawing starting port 232) once in a period of 300 ms is performed, “general drawing B (per contact If the symbol 2) is won, the electric Chu (second special view starting port 232) is opened once for 300 ms, then closed for 500 ms, and opened once for 5000 ms. Perform control (long release of electric chew).
<General-purpose rendering system 1 execution availability lottery table>

  FIG. 215 (a) is a general drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table used to determine whether to give a notice of the general drawing effect system 1 in the sub-side notice execution process at the start of the common drawing fluctuation to be described later. It is an example.

  The regular drawing effect system 1 execution possibility lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the popular drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table, the type of the common drawing determined by the hit / not determined in the common drawing, the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the winning or non-winning are associated. . The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 starts the common drawing fluctuation at this common drawing low probability with this kind of common drawing effect system 1 execution possibility lottery table, the kind of common drawing, and a predetermined timing (in this embodiment At the same time, based on the acquired random number value, a "general drawing effect system 1 execution propriety lottery" is performed to determine whether to give notice of the general drawing effect system 1.

For example, in the case where the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing is the common drawing B (per symbol 2), it is determined to be winning regardless of the acquired random number value. In addition, when the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing is the common drawing C (lost symbol), when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, it is judged to be won, and the acquired random value is 10 to 99 When it is in the numerical range of, it is judged as non-winning.
<Putto production system 1 lottery table>

  FIG. 215 (b) is an example of a common drawing effect system 1 lottery table used to determine the effect pattern of the common drawing effect system 1 in the general drawing change start sub-side notice execution processing described later.

  The common drawing effect type 1 lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the popular drawing effect system 1 lottery table, the type of the common drawing determined by the hit / not determined of the common drawing, the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the effect pattern of the common drawing effect system 1 are associated ing. When the basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 wins the above-mentioned common drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery, the common drawing effect system 1 lottery table, the type of common drawing, and the predetermined timing In the embodiment, the “general drawing effect system 1 lottery” is performed to determine the effect pattern of the general drawing effect system 1 based on the random number values acquired at the time of the general drawing low probability).

  For example, in the case where the result of the success / failure determination of the common drawing is the common drawing B (per symbol 2), P1 is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, and the acquired random value When P is in the numerical range of 20 to 39, P2 is selected as the effect pattern, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 40 to 85, P3 is selected as the effect pattern, and the acquired random number is 86 to 90 When P4 is selected as the effect pattern when the numerical value range is 1, and P5 is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random number value is 91 to 94, the acquired random value is 95 to 98. Sometimes, P6 is selected as the effect pattern, and P7 is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random value is within the numerical range of 99.

In addition, when the result of the success / failure determination of the common drawing is the common drawing C (lost symbol), when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 94, P1 is selected as the effect pattern, and the acquired random value is P2 is selected as the effect pattern in the numerical range of 95 to 98, and P4 is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random number is 99, while P3, P5, P6 and P7 are selected as the effect pattern There is nothing to do. Therefore, when any one of P3, P5, P6, and P7 is selected as the effect pattern, the result of the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing is not the common drawing C (the lost design) but the common drawing B (the hit 2). Determine that there is. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation by performing the effect by any of the effect patterns P3, P5, P6, and P7.
<Puzzy effect system 2 execution availability lottery table>

  FIG. 215 (c) is an example of a common drawing effect system 2 execution availability lottery table used to determine whether to give notice of the common drawing effect system 2 in the effect drawing process 2 described later. In the present embodiment, the regular drawing effect system 2 changes in the same manner as the effect including the contents related to the release of the electric chew, and as a result, it is an effect capable of executing a notice about the special drawing change game.

  The regular drawing effect system 2 execution possibility lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this popular drawing effect system 2 execution possibility lottery table, with the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above , And a numerical range of random values of 0 to 99, and winning or non-winning is associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 starts the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 (or special drawing 2 in the present embodiment) at a predetermined timing with the common drawing effect system 2 execution possibility lottery table, the fluctuation pattern, and the predetermined timing. At the same time, based on the acquired random number value, a "general drawing effect system 2 execution propriety lottery" is performed to determine whether to give notice of the general drawing effect system 2.

  For example, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is reach A loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, It is determined that the player has won, and if the acquired random value is in the range of 20 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won. In addition, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is reach B loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, It is determined that the player has won, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 10 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won.

  Moreover, when the fluctuation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is per reach A, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 39, It is determined that the player has won, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 40 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won. When the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is per reach B, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, It is determined that the player has won, and when the acquired random number is in the range of 50 to 99, it is determined that the player has not won.

In the popular drawing effect system 2 execution availability lottery table of this example, the winning probability when the fluctuation pattern is per reach A or reach B (in this example, 40/100 per reach A and 50/100 per reach B) Is set higher than the probability of winning if the variation pattern is reach A loss or reach B loss (in this example, reach A loss is 20/100 and reach B loss is 10/100). That is, in the popular drawing effect system 2, per reach A and per reach B is easier to be executed than in reach A loss and reach B loss. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced by performing the effect of the common drawing effect system 2.
<Putto production system 2 lottery table>

  FIG. 215 (d) is an example of a common drawing effect system 2 lottery table used to determine the effect pattern of the common drawing effect system 2 in the effect drawing process 2 described later.

  The common drawing effect type 2 lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this popular drawing effect system 2 lottery table, “a production mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208” determined by the special drawing 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special drawing 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above, The numerical range of the random value of 0 to 99 and the effect pattern of the regular drawing effect system 2 are associated with each other. When the basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 wins the above-mentioned common drawing effect system 2 execution availability lottery, the common drawing effect system 2 lottery table, the variation pattern, and the predetermined timing (this embodiment) Then, based on the acquired random number value at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2), the “general drawing effect system 2 lottery” is performed to determine the effect pattern of the common drawing effect system 2.

  For example, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is reach A loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern, and P5 (A) is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random value is in the range of 20 to 89, and the acquired random value is in the range of 90 to 99 In addition, P7 (chance) is selected as an effect pattern. In addition, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is reach B loss, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern, and P5 (B) is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 10 to 59, and the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 60 to 99 Then, P7 (button) is selected as the effect pattern.

  Moreover, when the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) is per reach A, when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern, and P5 (A) is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random value is in the range of 50 to 89, and the acquired random value is in the range of 90 to 99 In addition, P7 (chance) is selected as an effect pattern. When the variation pattern determined by the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation time lottery (or special figure 2 variation time lottery) is per reach B, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, When P4 (heat) is selected as the effect pattern, and P5 (B) is selected as the effect pattern when the acquired random value is in the range of 50 to 69, and the acquired random value is in the range of 70 to 99 Then, P7 (button) is selected as the effect pattern.

In the popular drawing effect system 2 lottery table of this example, the probability of selecting P4 (heat) when the fluctuation pattern is per reach A or reach B (in this example, 50/100 per reach A, per reach B) The probability of selecting P4 (heat) when the variation pattern is reach A loss or reach B loss (in this example, reach A loss is 20/100, reach B loss is 10/100) It is set high. That is, P4 (heat) of popular drawing effect system 2 is more likely to be executed per reach A or reach B than reach A loss or reach B loss. Also, P5 (B), P7 (button) are not selected per reach A loss or reach A, and P5 (A), P7 (chance) are selected per reach B loss or reach B I have not.
<Special drawing prefetch processing>

  FIG. 216 and FIG. 217 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is configured to execute this special view prefetch process immediately before the special figure 2 status update process (step S225) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 188. ing.

  In step S2001 of the special view prefetching process, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not power assistance (during a high drawing probability state) is in progress, and if it is determined that power assistance is in progress, step S2002. If it is determined that power saving is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2002, the value of the prize ball number storage area in RAM 308 is referenced to determine whether or not there is a winning on second special view starting port 232, and if there is a winning, proceed to step S2003 and there is no prize. In the case of, the process ends.

  In step S2003, the special figure 2 start information (the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value value set) increased when the special figure 2 variation game reserve number is below a predetermined number (for example, 4) Before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 random number value storage area is prefetched.

  In addition, in step S2003, the special figure 2 start information read ahead, a high probability table (or low probability table for good or bad judgment) used for big hit judgment (or small hit judgment), and special characters used for special symbol lottery The figure determination table is used to determine in advance the stop symbol of the special figure 2 fluctuation game according to the start information prior to the success or failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229).

  As a result of prior determination, if the stop symbol of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, it advances to step S2004, decides big hit symbol (stores the pre-judgment result of big hit symbol), advances to step S2008, when it is not big hit The process proceeds to step S2005. As a result of prior determination of step S2005, when the stop symbol of special figure 2 fluctuation game is the small hitting, it advances to step S2006, after deciding the small hitting design (saving the prior decision result of the small hitting design), to the step S2008 If it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, after determining the lost symbol (saving the prior determination result of the lost symbol), the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, the special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery is performed using the stop symbol of the special figure 2 determined in advance and the above special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table, and the process is performed after the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is determined. finish. Further, in step S2008, preparation is made to transmit, to the first secondary control unit 400, a prefetch advance notice execution command including information on the fluctuation time of the special view 2. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In step S2009, the value of the prize ball number storage area in the RAM 308 is referenced to determine whether or not there is a winning on the first special view starting port 230. If there is a winning, the process proceeds to step S2010 and there is no prize. In the case of, the process ends. In step S2010, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is received prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area.

  In addition, in step S2010, when the number of reservations of special figure 1 fluctuation game is below the specified number (for example, 4), it is for the pass / fail judgment used for the special figure 1 start information read ahead and the big hit judgment (or small hit judgment). Using the high probability table (or the low probability table for success or failure determination) and the special drawing determination table used for the special pattern symbol lottery, the stop symbol of the special drawing 1 fluctuation game according to the starting information is the special drawing 1 related lottery It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231).

  As a result of prior determination, if the stop symbol of special figure 1 fluctuation game is big hit, it advances to step S2011, decides big hit symbol (stores the pre-judgment result of big hit symbol), advances to step S2015, when it is not big hit The process proceeds to step S2012. As a result of prior determination of step S2012, when the stop symbol of special figure 1 fluctuation game is the small hitting, it advances to step S2013, after deciding the small hitting design (saving the prior decision result of the small hitting design), to the step S2015 If it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, after the lost symbol is determined (the prior determination result of the lost symbol is stored), the process proceeds to step S2015.

In step S2015, the fluctuation time lottery of the special figure 1 is performed using the stop symbol of the special figure 1 determined in advance and the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table described above, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is determined. Finish. Further, in step S2015, preparation is made to transmit, to the first secondary control unit 400, a prefetch notice execution command including information on the fluctuation time of the special view 1. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233).
<Start side winning side sub side preview notice execution processing>

  FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the start-up winning sub-prediction notice execution process. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment monitors whether or not a prefetch notice execution command has been received from the main control unit 300 in the first secondary control unit main interrupt processing shown in FIG. 189, and the command is received. In this case, the start-up winning side sub-prediction notice execution process is executed.

  In step S2101 of start-up winning side sub-prediction notice execution processing, it is determined whether the pre-reading execution flag stored in the RAM 408 is on or off, and if it is off (if pre-reading notice is not performed), step S2102 If it is on (if prefetching notice is being executed), the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2102, information on the fluctuation time of the special view 1 (or special view 2) included in the prefetch notice execution command is referred to, and the fluctuation time is a predetermined fluctuation time (in the present embodiment, in FIG. 212 (a)). It is determined whether the variation time included in the pending change notice lottery table is 10000 ms, 40000 ms, 60000 ms, 15000 ms, 45000 ms, or 65000 ms. When it corresponds, it progresses to step S2103, and when it does not correspond, it progresses to step S2107.

  In step S2103, a lottery process of pending change is performed using the above-mentioned pending change notice lottery table, and in step S2104, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2105. If the lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2105, a predetermined number is set as the number of prefetch notice execution times stored in the RAM 408, and in the next step S2106, the flag under prefetching execution is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, after the preparation for transmitting the hold command to the second secondary control unit 500, the process ends. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the above-described information transmission process (step S321).
<Sub-notice execution process at start of fluctuation>

  FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the sub side preliminary announcement etc. execution process at the start of fluctuation. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment monitors whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 300 in the first secondary control unit main interrupt processing shown in FIG. 189 and receives the command. In this case, the sub side advance notice etc. execution process is executed at the start of the change.

  Here, the special view fluctuation start command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 at the start of fluctuation of the special view, and the value of the big hit flag, the small hit flag Values, special figure stop symbols, fluctuation time, information of fluctuation patterns, etc. are included. In the start processing of the sub side notice etc. at the start of fluctuation, such information included in the received special map fluctuation start command is stored in the RAM 408. The information included in the special view change start command is not limited to this example. For example, the change pattern is not transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 changes. The below-described determination performed using the pattern may be performed using the variation time.

  In step S2201 of the sub side advance notice etc. execution processing at the time of start of fluctuation, it is determined whether the above-described prefetching flag is on or off. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2202, the above-described number of prefetch notice execution times is decremented by one, and in the next step S2203, it is determined whether the number of prefetch notice execution times after subtraction is zero. As a result of the determination, if the number of prefetched preview executions is 0, the process proceeds to step S2204; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2205.

In step S2204, after setting the prefetching in-progress flag to off, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, after effect lottery process 1 (details will be described later) is performed, the process proceeds to step S2206, and in step S2206, effect lottery process 2 (details will be described later) is performed and then the process ends.
<Effect lottery process 1>

  FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 1 (step S2205) in the above-described execution process of the sub-side advance notice etc. at the start of fluctuation.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 408 is reach B (reach B loss or per reach B), and if it corresponds, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it does not correspond The process advances to step S2303. In step S 2302, the process is ended after preparation for transmitting a button effect command to be in the second state to the second sub control unit 500. As described above, when reach B loss or reach B is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the second state is always notified (details will be described later). For this reason, the second state notification functions as a notification that indicates that the reach B (reach B loss or reach B) has been determined.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is reach A (reach A loss or reach A), and if yes, the process proceeds to step S2304. If not, the process ends. In step S2304, the effect character lottery using the reach-A effect character lottery table described above is performed, and in the next step S2305, it is determined whether the result of the effect character lottery is character C (panda).

  As a result of the determination, if the character C (panda) is selected, the process proceeds to step S2306. If not, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2306, the process is ended after preparation for transmitting the button effect command to be in the second state is performed with respect to the second sub control unit 500. As described above, when the character C (panda) is selected in the effect character lottery, the notice of the first stop mode is always executed (details will be described later).

In step S2307, a state lottery using the above-described state lottery table is performed, and in the next step S2308, it is determined whether or not the state lottery has not been won. As a result of the determination, in the case of winning, the process proceeds to the above-described step S2306, and after preparation for transmitting a button effect command to be the second state to the second sub control unit 500, the process ends. On the other hand, if the player has not won the game, the process advances to step S2309 to prepare for transmitting a button effect command to be in the first state to the second sub control unit 500, and then the process ends.
<Effect lottery process 2>

  FIG. 221 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the effect lottery process 2 (step S2206) in the above-mentioned execution process of sub-side advance notice etc. at the start of fluctuation.

In step S2401, a regular drawing effect system 2 execution propriety lottery using the above-described regular drawing effect system 2 execution propriety lottery table is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. As a result of the determination, if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if the lottery is not won, the process ends. In step S2402, a general drawing effect system 2 lottery using the above-described common drawing effect system 2 lottery table is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, the process is ended after the second sub control unit 500 is prepared to transmit the lottery result of the popular drawing effect type 2 lottery in step S2402 (the effect pattern of the common expression effect system 2).
<Sub-part notice execution processing at the start of common map fluctuation>

  FIG. 221 (b) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the sub-side notice execution processing at the start of the general drawing change. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment monitors whether or not a general drawing change start command has been received from the main control unit 300 in the first secondary control unit main interrupt processing shown in FIG. 189, and receives the command. In this case, the sub-part notice execution processing at the start of the general drawing fluctuation is configured to be executed.

  Here, the common drawing fluctuation start command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 at the start of fluctuation of the common drawing, and the command includes information of the common drawing stop symbol etc. Be The general drawing change start sub-side notice execution processing is configured to store, in the RAM 408, the information contained in the received common drawing change start command.

In step S2501 of the sub-side notice execution processing at the start of the common drawing change, the common drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery using the above-mentioned common drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table is performed to determine whether or not the lottery has been won. Do. As a result of the determination, if the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if the lottery is not won, the process is ended. In step S2502, after performing a common drawing effect system 1 lottery using the above-described common drawing effect system 1 lottery table, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the process is ended after the second sub control unit 500 is prepared to transmit the lottery result of the popular drawing effect type 1 lottery in step S2502 (the effect pattern of the common expression effect system 1). Further, since the popular drawing effect system 1 is mainly an announcement for giving notice of the long opening of the electric chew, it is performed in the "general drawing fluctuation start sub side notification execution processing". On the other hand, since the regular drawing effect system 2 is a notice about the special drawing change game, it is performed in the "execution start process of the sub side notice at the start of change". In addition, it may be possible to execute any process with regard to the garbled effect (as a result, a pattern that does not release electric power and a pattern that does not have a result to be expected as an advance notice).
<Operation receptionist production (reach A loss)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223, an example of the operation reception effect when reach A loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special view will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach A loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series.

  In the following, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 1 variation game of the special figure variation game will be described, but the special figure 2 variation game may be applied instead of the special figure 1 variation game. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation game and the special figure 2 fluctuation game may be executed simultaneously, and in this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation game may be given priority over the special figure 2 fluctuation game over the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being performed and one special figure 1 variation game is being held. In this state, the main control unit 300 displays the variation of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown), and turns on one first special view holding lamp 218 (not shown) to perform special view. 1 Notice that the number of pending variable games is 1.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 to match the variable display of the special figure. By displaying a circular image representing a normal hold (a normal hold icon), as part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, Report that it is 1. Further, the second auxiliary control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position and accepts the pressing operation of the chance button 700 until the acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is permitted in FIG. 222 (h) described later. Prohibit

  FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special view start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game. In this state, the main control unit 300 continues the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown) and turns on two first special view holding lamps 218 (not shown). Figure 1 Notice that the number of pending variable game has increased from 1 to 2.

  Further, when the main control unit 300 detects a winning (entering) of the first special view starting opening 230, an award corresponding to the first special view starting opening 230 in the above-mentioned winning opening counter update process (step S215). 1 is added to the number-of-balls storage area, and the prefetch process of the special figure 1 is executed in steps S2010 to S2015 of the special figure prefetch process executed thereafter. Further, the main control unit 300 transmits, to the first sub-control unit 400, a prefetch notice execution command including information on the variation time of the special view 1. In this example, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is "special figure I", the variation time is "40000 ms", and the variation pattern is "reach A loss" as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-up winning side sub-prediction preview execution process in response to the reception of the prefetch notice execution command from the main control section 300, and the variation time of the special view 1 in step 2102 Is determined whether or not it is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the variation time of the special view 1 is 40000 ms, the lottery process of the pending change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed, but “no change” is selected as the pending mode as a result of the lottery process of the pending change I suppose.

  The first sub-control unit 400 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol and holds the normal hold icon (which is displayed on a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first hold). A new hold icon (normally corresponding to the second hold) of the normal hold is displayed next to the right of the icon to notify that the number of special game 1 change games held is two.

  FIG. 222 (c) shows a state in which the special view 1 variation game which was being displayed in a variable manner at the timing of FIG. 222 (a) is ended. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the stop display of the special drawing, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-corresponding to the special drawing I (the lost design) is "Display 2-decoration 3" is stopped.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a → the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c → the middle symbol display In the area 208b, the stop display is performed in the order of the decorative symbols during the variable display. For this reason, when displaying the decoration symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 3" in the stop display, the stop display is performed in the order of decoration 7 → decoration 3 → decoration 2.

  FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special view 1 using the first special view display device 212 (not shown), and then turns off one first special view holding lamp 218 (not shown), The special figure 1 fluctuation game reserve is digested by one, and it is informed that the number of reserve has decreased from 2 to 1. In addition, after the first special view reserve lamp 218 is turned off (after displaying the decrease in reserve), the variable display of the special view 1 may be started (the same applies to the subsequent embodiments).

  In addition, after the first sub control unit 400 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the start of the variation display of the special figure, the special figure 1 variation game is suspended by deleting one suspension icon of the normal suspension. Digest one and report that the number of reservations has decreased from 2 to 1. Note that the variation display of the decorative symbol may be started after deleting the hold icon of the normal hold (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  FIG. 222 (e) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game based on the first hold is finished. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view 1 using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the stop display of the special figure 1, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decorative 4 corresponding to the special image I (the missing symbol)" -Display of "decoration 5-decoration 0" is stopped. In addition, when displaying the decoration pattern combination "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 0" in a stop display, stop display is performed in the order of decoration 4 → decoration 0 → decoration 5.

  FIG. 222 (f) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is started based on the second hold. In this state, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special view 1 using the first special view display device 212 (not shown) and turns off one first special view holding lamp 218 (not shown), The special figure 1 fluctuation game reserve is digested by one, and it is informed that the number of reserve has decreased from 1 to 0. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the start of the variable display of the special figure 1, and erases the hold icon of the normal hold, thereby the special figure 1 change game Take one hold and signal that the number of holds has decreased from one to zero.

  FIG. 222 (g) shows a state in which reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, the right symbol is displayed after the "symbol 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" corresponding to the special drawing I (loss symbol). In the area 208 c, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIG. 222 (h) shows a state in which the operation reception effect is started using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the "decoration 7" stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device. By displaying them side by side in the upper right corner of the display area 208, it is continuously informed that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 prompts the player to press the chance button 700 by displaying characters such as “select with a button” in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second sub control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position, and permits the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  FIGS. 222 (i) and 222 (j) show a state in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the first auxiliary control unit 400 displays the image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby pressing the chance button 700. While prompting the player, the images of all the characters (in this example, character A (A), character B (sabohani), character C (panda)) which may be selected in the effect character lottery to be described later are displayed. . Further, the second auxiliary control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position, and permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Also, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). Note that the chance button 700 need not be illuminated.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect character lottery using the reach-A effect character lottery table described above in step S2304 of the above-mentioned effect lottery process 1 triggered by the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. However, in this example, it is assumed that the character A (爺) is selected. In the effect character lottery of this embodiment, as shown in the reach A at time effect character lottery table of FIG. 213 (a) above, when the fluctuation pattern is reach A loss, character A (with a probability of 80/100) If the fluctuation pattern is per reach A while selecting 選 択), it is configured to select character A (確 率) with a probability of 30/100, and in the case of reach A loss rather than per reach A Is easy to select the character A (爺).

  FIG. 223 (k) is a state in which the character selected by the effect character lottery in the operation reception effect is highlighted and displayed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the type of character (in this example, character A (in this example) for notifying the type of character (in this example, character A (in this example)) selected by the character effect described above. Perform the effect of lighting up the surroundings.

  FIG. 223 (l) shows a state in which an operation reception effect is performed after the effect character lottery. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 urges the player to press the chance button 700 by displaying characters such as "Pickly press!" In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , Display the character A (爺) selected in the effect character lottery. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 performs state lottery using the above-described state lottery table and selects a state, but in this example, it is assumed that the first state (chance button 700 at the initial position) is selected. Do. In the state lottery of this embodiment, as shown in the state lottery table of FIG. 213 (c), when the selected character is character A (loss), the second state is selected with a probability of 3/100. The first state is selected with a probability of 97/100, and the first state is easier to select than the second state.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a button effect command to be in the first state to the second sub-control unit 500 in response to the selection of the first state by the state lottery. The second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 in the initial position in a light-emitting state since the chance button 700 is already at the position (initial position) where the operation in the first state is possible.

  FIGS. 223 (m) and (n) show a state in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position, and permits reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Also, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby the chance button 700. In addition to prompting the pressing operation of, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. The operation reception effect is not limited to this example, and for example, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter may not be performed (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  FIG. 223 (o) shows an effect performed when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of pressing the chance button 700 has passed or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) An example of In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs stop display of the decorative symbol that was being displayed in a variable display in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special view I (lost symbol) In accordance with "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 223 (p) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game based on the second hold is ended. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the stop display of the special drawing, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-corresponding to the special drawing I (the lost design) is Display of decoration 6-decoration 7 is stopped.
<Operation receptionist production (per reach A)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, an example of the operation reception effect when reach A is selected as the variation pattern of the special view will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach A is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. In the following, only the configuration different from the above-described operation reception effect (reach A loss) will be described.

  FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which a ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game. When the main control unit 300 detects a winning (entering) of the first special view start opening 230, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 in the above-mentioned winning opening counter update process (step S215) In the storage area, 1 is added, and in the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special drawing prefetching process to be executed thereafter, the prefetching process of the special drawing 1 is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is "special figure A", the variation time is "45000 ms", and the variation pattern is "per reach A" as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-up winning side sub-prediction preview execution process in response to the reception of the prefetch notice execution command from the main control section 300, and the variation time of the special view 1 in step 2102 Is determined whether or not it is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the variation time of the special view 1 is 45000 ms, the lottery process of the pending change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed, but here, as a result of the lottery process of the pending change, "Hold B" is selected. I suppose.

  The first sub-control unit 400 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol and holds the normal hold icon (which is displayed on a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first hold). By displaying a new hold icon (character image of the character) of Hold B next to the right of the icon), the number of pending special game 1 variation games is 2 and corresponds to the second hold It reports that the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation game is “per reach A”. About subsequent FIG. 224 (c)-(f), it is the same as that of said FIG. 222 (c)-(f).

  FIG. 224 (g) is a state in which the effect of reach is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, the right symbol is displayed after the "symbol 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" corresponding to the special image A (big hit symbol). In the area 208 c, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. About next FIG. 224 (h), it is the same as that of above-mentioned FIG. 222 (h).

  FIGS. 224 (i) and (j) show a state in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, triggered by the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700, the first subsidiary control unit 400 uses the reach character effect lottery table described above in step S2304 of the above-mentioned effect lottery process 1 to create the effect character lottery In this example, it is assumed that the character C (panda) is selected. In the effect character lottery of the present embodiment, as shown in the reach A at time effect character lottery table of FIG. 213 (a) above, when the fluctuation pattern is per reach A, character C (with a probability of 40/100) While the panda) is selected, if the fluctuation pattern is reach A loss, character C (panda) is selected with a probability of 3/100, and the reach per reach A rather than reach A loss But character C (panda) is easy to be selected.

  FIG. 225 (k) is a state in which the character selected by the effect character lottery in the operation reception effect is emphasized and displayed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 generates an alert (in this example, the character C (panda) for notifying the type of the character selected in the character effect (in this example, the character C (panda)). Perform the effect of lighting up the surroundings.

  FIG. 225 (l) shows a state in which the operation reception effect after the effect character lottery is being performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs character display such as "Hot it up!" In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby enhancing the player's sense of expectation and by the effect character lottery. Display the selected character C (panda). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the above-mentioned state lottery table, and selects a state, but in the present example, if character C is selected in the effect character lottery, the second sub-control is always performed Is configured to select the state (chance button 700 at the operation completion position).

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a button effect command to be in the second state to the second sub control unit 500 in response to the selection of the second state by the state lottery. Since the chance button 700 is at the initial position, the second sub-control unit 500 moves the chance button 700 to a position where the operation in the second state is possible (operation completion position).

  FIGS. 225 (m) and (n) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the operation completion position, and permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Also, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 displays the image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby the chance button 700. In addition to prompting the pressing operation of, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed.

  FIG. 225 (o) is an effect performed when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of pressing the chance button 700 has passed or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) An example of In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs stop display of the decorative symbol that was being displayed in a variable display in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special view A (big hit symbol) According to "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "decorative 7" is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating the result of success or failure of special figure 1 fluctuation game (in this example , "Congratulations" is displayed.

FIG. 225 (p) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game based on the second hold is ended. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the stop display of the special figure, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-corresponding to the special image A (big hit symbol)""Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped.
<Operation receptionist production (reach A, chance button failure)>

  FIG. 226 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 fails during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 226 (l), as in the case of FIG. 225 (l), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completed position (a position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 can not be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure such as a drive mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 226 (m) to (n), the second secondary control unit 500 permits the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. By lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 displays the image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby the chance button 700. In addition to prompting the pressing operation of, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed.

In addition, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed, or the first sub-control unit 400 has been pressed the predetermined number of times (for example, once) In the middle of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the decorative symbol combination “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” corresponding to the special figure A (big hit symbol) as shown in FIG. 226 (o). While displaying the decoration 7 "in a stopped state, a display (in this example, a character display such as" Congratulations ") indicating the success or failure result of the special figure 1 variation game is performed.
<Operation receptionist production (per reach B)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228, an example of the operation reception effect when reach B is selected as the variation pattern of the special view will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series. In the following, only the configuration different from the above-described operation reception effect (reach A loss) will be described.

  FIG. 227 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special view start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game. When the main control unit 300 detects a winning (entering) of the first special view start opening 230, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 in the above-mentioned winning opening counter update process (step S215) In the storage area, 1 is added, and in the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special drawing prefetching process to be executed thereafter, the prefetching process of the special drawing 1 is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is "special figure A", the variation time is "65000 ms", and the variation pattern is "per reach B" as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-up winning side sub-prediction preview execution process in response to the reception of the prefetch notice execution command from the main control section 300, and the variation time of the special view 1 in step 2102 Is determined whether or not it is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the fluctuation time of the special view 1 is 65000 ms, the lottery process of the hold change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed, but here, it is assumed that the “movable body” is selected as a result of the hold process of the hold change. . In this case, the first sub control unit 400 transmits, to the second sub control unit 500, a movable body operation command for operating the effect movable body 224.

  In the hold change notice lottery table shown in FIG. 212 (a), the change time is 60000 ms (the change pattern is reach B loss), or the change time is to select "movable" in the hold change lottery process. Is 65000 ms (the variation pattern is per reach B), the variation pattern may be reach B lose or reach B per turn when the effect movable body 224 is activated at the time of holding change. Determine.

  The first sub-control unit 400 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol and holds the normal hold icon (which is displayed on a part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first hold). A new hold icon (normally corresponding to the second hold) of the normal hold is displayed next to the right of the icon to notify that the number of special game 1 change games held is two.

  FIG. 227 (d) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is started based on the first hold. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 rotates the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 up and down based on the movable-body operation command received from the first sub-control unit 400, to achieve reach B (reach Give a notice that B loss or reach B per) has been decided. Thereafter, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is pivoted up and down also during the execution of the variable display and effect of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 227 (g) shows a state in which variable display of a decorative symbol for a normal symbol is performed. In this state, the main control unit 300 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing using the normal symbol display device 210 (not shown), and transmits a common drawing fluctuation start command to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the common drawing change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 uses the common drawing effect system 1 execution availability lottery table in the above-mentioned common drawing change start sub side notice execution processing. The common drawing effect system 1 execution possibility lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the common drawing effect system 1 lottery using the above-mentioned common drawing effect system 1 lottery table is further performed.

  In this example, the stop symbol of the common drawing is the common drawing B (per symbol 2), and the common drawing effect system 1 execution propriety lottery is won, P7 ("P7 (chance) as a presentation pattern by the common drawing effect system 1 lottery → It is assumed that an effect pattern to be displayed in the order of “P7 (button) → ordinary drawing decoration 2” is selected. The first sub control unit 400 performs display in the order of P7 (chance) → P7 (button) → common figure decoration 2 in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the selected effect pattern 7. In the common drawing effect system 1 lottery table shown in FIG. 215 (b), P7 is selected as the effect pattern only when the success / failure determination result of the common drawing is a common drawing B (per symbol 2). From the execution of the effect pattern P7, it is determined that the pass / fail determination result of the common drawing is the common drawing B (per symbol 2).

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 performs the popular drawing effect system 2 execution propriety lottery using the common drawing effect system 2 executable possibility lottery table in the above-mentioned effect lottery process 2, and when the lottery is won, , Perform a common drawing effect system 2 lottery using the above-described common drawing effect system 2 lottery table. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is per reach B, and the common drawing effect type 2 execution possibility lottery is won, and P7 (button) is selected as the effect pattern by the common drawing effect type 2 lottery.

  The first sub control unit 400 displays P7 (button) in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the selected P7 (button). Thereafter, the display of P7 (button) is continued in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 even during the variable display of the decorative symbol and the effect. In the common drawing effect type 2 lottery table shown in FIG. 215 (d), P7 (button) is selected as the effect pattern only when the special drawing fluctuation pattern is reach B loss or reach B From the above, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern is the reach B loss or the reach B hit by execution of the effect pattern P7 (button).

  FIG. 227 (j) shows a state in which reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, the right symbol is displayed after the "symbol 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" corresponding to the special image A (big hit symbol). In the area 208 c, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIGS. 228 (k) and (l) show the state in which the operation reception effect is started using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the "decoration 7" stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device. By displaying them side by side in the upper right corner of the display area 208, it is continuously informed that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 presses the chance button 700 by displaying characters such as “One shot chance!” And “Press the button and tear the clothes!” In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Prompt the player for the operation.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 performs state lottery using the above-described state lottery table, and selects a state, but in this example, reach B (reach B lose, reach B per reach B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern. In this case, the second state (operation of pressing the chance button 700 at the operation completion position) is always selected. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a button effect command to be in the second state to the second sub control unit 500 in response to the selection of the second state by the state lottery. Since the chance button 700 is at the initial position, the second sub-control unit 500 moves the chance button 700 to a position where the operation in the second state is possible (operation completion position).

  FIGS. 228 (m) and (n) are states in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, the second sub-control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the operation completion position, and permits acceptance of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Also, by lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also recognizes the button image By overlapping the character image on the button image and displaying characters such as “press!” Above the character image so as not to disturb the button image (in a mode in which at least a part of the button image can be viewed). The pressing operation of the chance button 700 is prompted.

  FIG. 228 (o) shows an effect performed when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of pressing the chance button 700 has passed or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) An example of In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 performs stop display of the decorative symbol that was being displayed in a variable display in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the special view A (big hit symbol) In accordance with "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 228 (p) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game based on the second hold is ended. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the stop display of the special figure, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-corresponding to the special image A (big hit symbol)" "Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped.

According to this example, even if the operation means does not enter the second state due to a failure or the like, the first preliminary notice (FIGS. 227 (h) to (j) and FIGS. 228 (k) to 228 (m) Since it is possible to notify the player of the actual state in advance by the button image shown in), it may be possible to avoid a situation where a disadvantage is given to the player due to a failure or the like. In addition, the conventional operation means is configured to give the player an expectation depending on the type of state only during the effective period of the operation, but according to the present invention, the first notice prior to the effective period of the operation Thus, the player may have a sense of expectation, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced more than in the past.
<Operation receptionist production (reach B, chance button failure)>

  FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of effects when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 breaks down during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (l), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completed position (the position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state) as in FIG. 228 (l). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 can not be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure such as a drive mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 229 (m) to (n), the second secondary control unit 500 permits the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. By lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 displays an image (a button image) imitating the chance button 700 in the second state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and prevents the button image from being viewed. The chance button is displayed by superimposing the character image on the button image and displaying characters such as “press!” Above the character image so that at least a part of the button image is visible. Prompt the user to press 700.

In addition, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed, or the first sub-control unit 400 has been pressed the predetermined number of times (for example, once) In the middle of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" corresponding to the special figure A (big hit symbol) as shown in FIG. 229 (o). Stop display of decoration 7 ".
<Modification of operation reception effects (per reach B)>

  Next, a variation of the above-described operation reception effect (per reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. FIGS. 230 and 231 are diagrams showing a modification of the operation reception effect (per reach B) in time series.

  In this example, a rectangular variation icon display area 208 e is provided in part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation icon display area 208e is a display area for displaying a holding icon corresponding to the special view fluctuation game during fluctuation display (during digestion) for a predetermined period, and is held after moving to the fluctuation icon display area 208e. An icon may be called a fluctuation icon.

  FIG. 230 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being performed and one special figure 1 variation game is being held. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the fluctuation icon CI corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game being executed (during digestion) in the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and the hold icon corresponding to the first hold (Normal hold) PI1 is displayed on the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 230 (b) shows a state in which a ball enters the first special view start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game. When the main control unit 300 detects a winning (entering) of the first special view start opening 230, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first special view start opening 230 in the above-mentioned winning opening counter update process (step S215) In the storage area, 1 is added, and in the steps S2010 to S2015 of the special drawing prefetching process to be executed thereafter, the prefetching process of the special drawing 1 is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 is "special figure A", the variation time is "65000 ms", and the variation pattern is "per reach B" as a result of the prefetching process of the special figure 1.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes the above-mentioned start-up winning side sub-prediction preview execution process in response to the reception of the prefetch notice execution command from the main control section 300, and the variation time of the special view 1 in step 2102 Is determined whether or not it is a predetermined fluctuation time. In this example, since the variation time of the special figure 1 is 65000 ms, the lottery process of the pending change in the subsequent step S2103 is performed, but here, the pending icon suggests the determination of reach B as a result of the pending process lottery process. It is assumed that PI2 (an image with the letter "B") is selected.

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 continues the variation display of the decorative symbol, and additionally displays one suspension icon PI2 on the right of the suspension icon PI1 corresponding to the first suspension. In FIG. 1 the number of reservations of the fluctuation game is 2, and it is informed that the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation game corresponding to the second suspension is “per reach B”.

  FIG. 230 (d) shows a state in which the special view 1 variation game has been started based on the first hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the change display of the decorative symbol according to the start of the change display of the special view, and then moves the hold icon PI1 to the change icon display area 208e and changes it to the change icon CI. By moving the hold icon PI2 to the left side, the special figure 1 variable game hold is reduced by one, and it is informed that the hold number has decreased from 2 to 1.

  FIG. 230 (f) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game has been started based on the second hold. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the change display of the decorative symbol according to the start of the change display of the special view, and then moves the hold icon PI2 to the change icon display area 208e and changes it to the change icon CI. In this way, the special figure 1 variation game is suspended by one, and it is informed that the number of reservations has decreased from one to zero.

  FIGS. 230 (g) and 230 (h) show a state in which the first operation reception effect is performed. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 prompts the player to press the chance button 700 by displaying characters such as "PUSH" in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second sub control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position, and permits the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  FIG. 230 (i) shows a state in which the operation reception effect is continued. In this state, triggered by the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700, the first subsidiary control unit 400 uses the reach character effect lottery table described above in step S2304 of the above-mentioned effect lottery process 1 to create the effect character lottery In this example, it is assumed that the character A (爺) is selected. Next, the first sub control unit 400 performs an effect using the character A (爺) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 230 (j) shows a state in which reach effect is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, the right symbol is displayed after the "symbol 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" corresponding to the special image A (big hit symbol). In the area 208 c, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. Further, the first sub control unit 400 deletes the fluctuation icon CI displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208 e.

  FIGS. 231 (k) to 231 (p) are diagrams showing an example of effects when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 breaks down during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 231 (m), as in the case of FIG. 228 (m), let's move the chance button 700 from the initial position to the operation completed position (a position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state). However, here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 can not be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure of the drive mechanism or the like, and remains at the initial position.

  In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, as shown in FIGS. 231 (m) to (n), the second secondary control unit 500 permits the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. By lighting the chance button lamp 138 inside the chance button 700, it is suggested that the acceptance of the pressing operation is permitted by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also recognizes the button image By overlapping the character image on the button image and displaying characters such as “press!” Above the character image so as not to disturb the button image (in a mode in which at least a part of the button image can be viewed). The pressing operation of the chance button 700 is prompted.

  In addition, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed, or the first sub-control unit 400 has been pressed the predetermined number of times (for example, once) As shown in FIG. 231 (o), according to the decorative symbol combination “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” corresponding to the special figure A (big hit symbol), in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Stop display of decoration 7 ".

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) provided at least at the position where the player can operate, and the effect means capable of at least performing the first effect. (For example, the effect control performed by the first sub control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208), the first notice (for example, the effect that the character C is selected in FIG. 225 (l), the effect movable body in FIG. A game console comprising at least notice means (for example, notice control and a decoration symbol display device 208 performed by the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing an effect in which 224 is operated; It is at least possible to be in one kind of state state, and at least one of the plurality of types of state is a first state (e.g., the chance button 700 in the initial position) And at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (e.g., the chance button 700 at the operation completion position in which the state protrudes beyond the initial position), and the first state is It is a state different from the second state at least, and when the first condition is met, the effect means is operated when the operation means is operated. The effect of notifying the success or failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game shown in) can be performed at least, and the establishment of the first condition is performed by the player during the second period (for example, FIG. 228 (m) It is a condition that may be established by the operation of the operation means during the operation reception period of the chance button 700) shown in (n) to (n), and the operation means is in the second state in the second period. At least to be And the notifying means is configured to receive the first notice (eg, a period shown in FIG. 227 (h) to (j) and FIG. 228 (k) to FIG. 228 (m)). The display of an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 is at least feasible, and the first period is a period including at least a period prior to the second period, and the first The advance notice is at least capable of notifying that the operation means can be in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, there may be cases where it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the notifying means. Also, even if the operation means does not enter the second state due to a failure etc., it is possible to notify the player of the actual state in advance by the first notice, so the game is caused due to the failure etc. In some cases, it is possible to avoid situations that would cause In addition, the conventional operation means is configured to give the player an expectation depending on the type of state only during the effective period of the operation, but according to the present invention, the first notice prior to the effective period of the operation Thus, the player may have a sense of expectation, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced more than in the past.

  In addition, the first advance notice only needs to at least notify that the operation means can be in the second state, and the state of the operation means actually becomes the second state (change If the condition of the operation means becomes the second state when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery is won), or the state of the operation means is the second state However, the case where the second state can not be achieved due to a failure or the like is included. Further, even when the first advance notice is not executed, the state of the operation means may be the second state.

  Further, the notice means is capable of at least executing a second notice in the second period, and the second notice indicates that at least the state of the operation means may be in the second state. A notice that can be grasped (for example, display of an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 228 (m) to (n)) may be used.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the second state is to be reached as the second advance notice even in the second period which is the operation effective period, so it is possible to convey the operation of the operation means to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player's will to decline the game.

  The second notice may be a series of notices as an extension of the first notice. For example, the first notice and the second notice may be included in a series of effects composed of a plurality of effects. The notice of may be included.

  The first symbol display means (for example, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display is provided. The notice (for example, the display of an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 227 (h) to (j) and FIG. 228 (k) to FIG. 228 (m) An image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 at the operation completion position, which is at least executable during execution of the symbol variation display of the second notice (for example, shown in FIG. 228 (m) to (n)) Is at least executable during execution of the first symbol variation display, and the notice means is capable of at least continuing the first notice until the second notice is performed. Is It may be.

  With such a configuration, the relationship between the first notice and the second state by the notice means may be easy to understand in order to continue the first notice until the second notice is executed.

  The first advance notice may be canceled immediately after the second advance notice is executed, or may be continued after the second advance notice is executed. In addition, the stop timing of the first notice includes after the end of the first effect, after the end of the first effect, after the stop of the first symbol variation display, after the end of the jackpot game, etc. .

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a third period (for example, an operation reception period shown in FIGS. 230 (g) to (h)), the effect means performs a third effect (for example, FIG. i) at least the effect using character A (爺) is feasible, the third period is under execution of the first symbol variation display, and the third period is A period before the first period (for example, the operation reception period shown in FIGS. 231 (m) to (n)), and the notification means is the third period (the third effect) Between the first period (the first effect) and another effect which requires the operation of the operation means during the following "fourth period" is not executed. At least the first prior notice can be continued until a period including at least a portion of four periods It may be.

  With such a configuration, since the first notice can be continued until a period in which another effect is not performed, it may be possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner in which effect the second state is reached.

  In addition, after continuing the first advance notice to a period including at least a part of the fourth period, at least another advance notice capable of notifying that the state of the operation means can be the second state is given. May be

  In addition, symbol display means (for example, the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208) which can at least execute the first symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. , The middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c), the symbol display means at least the second symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 227 (d)-(e)) The second symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that can be performed at least before the first symbol variation display, and the first notice (for example, the effect movable body 224 The effect of rotating the forearm portion 224 b up and down can be at least started during execution of the second symbol variation display, and the second notice (for example, as shown in FIGS. 228 (m) to (n)). Show, operation complete The display of an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the position) is at least executable during execution of the first symbol variation display, and the notifying means executes the second symbol variation display The first notice started during may be at least able to continue over the first symbol variation display.

  With such a configuration, the first notice is made to function as advance notice (predicting or clarifying the judgment result of special drawing fluctuation game or popular drawing fluctuation game, prior to the start of fluctuation of the game). In some cases, the second notice can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, the pre-reading advance notice may be continuously performed over the plurality of times of the symbol variation display, or may be intermittently performed during the plurality of times of the symbol variation display. Moreover, it may be displayed temporarily during one time of the said symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the effect means can at least execute the first effect according to one effect pattern among a plurality of effect patterns, and at least one of the effect patterns is It is a first effect pattern, and at least one of the plurality of effect patterns is a second effect pattern, and the operation according to the effect according to the first effect pattern is the second operation pattern. The operation means by at least executing the first notice indicating that the first effect pattern is to be reached. It may at least be able to predict that the second state can be the second state.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to suggest the second state by the first effect, it may be easy to understand the relationship with the second state by the annunciation means.

  Note that the effect pattern includes the first sub-control unit 400 or the first sub-control unit 400 based on the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 211A and 211B) determined by the main control unit 300 or the fluctuation pattern. The effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 215 (b), (d)) and the like determined by the second auxiliary control unit 500 is included.

  In addition, the control means (for example, the second multiple control unit 500) capable of at least controlling the state of the operation means is provided, and the control means is capable of performing at least first control, and the first control The control means includes at least control for bringing the operating means into the second state, and the effect means is the second operating means despite the fact that the control means performs the first control. Even in the case of a state other than the state, at least the first effect may be executable.

With such a configuration, the first effect can be executed even when the operation means does not change to the second state to be originally changed due to a failure of the operation means or the like. Can prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.
Other Embodiments

Next, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in order to avoid the redundant description, the same reference numerals are given to the same contents as those of the other embodiments than the present embodiment in the drawings, and the description thereof is omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS.
<Step-up notice lottery table>

  FIG. 232 (a) is an example of a step-up notice lottery table used to determine a notice effect mode in a step-up notice lottery of a notice lottery process (step-up) described later.

  The step-up notice lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this step-up notice lottery table, an effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above, and a disturbance of 0 to 99 The numerical value range of the numerical value and the advance presentation effect mode are associated with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 determines a notice effect mode based on the step-up notice lottery table and a random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of execution of the step-up notice lottery). Make a step-up notice lottery.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach loss, the line of normal reach loss is referred to, and "1-2" is selected as the advance effect mode regardless of the acquired random number value. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is reach A loss, refer to the line of reach A loss, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 59, select “1-2” as the notice effect mode, When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 60 to 79, "1-2-3" is selected as the announcement effect mode, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 80 to 89, "1-2-3-4" is selected, and "4" is selected as the advance presentation effect mode when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99. Other fluctuation patterns (reach B loss, per normal reach, per reach A, per reach B) are as shown in the figure.

  Here, the notice effect mode “1-2” is two steps (two steps) in the order of notice effect of step 1 → notice effect of step 2 before giving a predetermined notice (for example, notice of reach condition). It is for performing an advance presentation. In addition, the notice effect mode “1-2-3” is in the order of notice effect of step 1 → notice effect of step 2 → notice effect of step 3 before giving a predetermined notice (for example, notice of reach condition). The three-step (three-step) advance presentation is performed.

In addition, the notice effect mode “1-2-3-4” is the notice effect of step 1 → the notice effect of step 2 → the notice effect of step 3 → before giving a predetermined notice (for example, a notice of reach). The four-step (four-step) notice effect is performed in the order of the notice effect of step 4. On the other hand, the notice effect mode “4” is to perform the notice effect of step 4 suddenly without performing the notice effect of steps 1 to 3 before giving a predetermined notice (for example, the notice of the reach state).
<State lottery table>

  FIG. 232 (b) is an example of a state lottery table used to determine the state in the state lottery of the preliminary lottery process (step-up) to be described later.

  The state lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In this state lottery table, the notice effect mode selected in the above-described step-up notice lottery, the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the kind of state are associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 performs “state lottery” which determines the state based on the state lottery table and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of state lottery execution).

  For example, if the notice effect mode selected in the above-described step-up notice lottery is "4" (hereinafter, the mode of the notice effect of "4" may be referred to as "first effect"), 4 (4) When the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 89 with reference to the line of the first effect, vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state, and the acquired random value is 90 to 99 In the numerical range of, select the "normal mode" (first state) as the state. That is, in the case where the preview effect mode is "4 (first effect)", vibration + rotation (second state) is more easily selected than in the normal mode (first state).

  Further, the notice effect mode selected in the above-described step-up notice lottery is other than "4", that is, any of "1-2", "1-2-3", and "1-2-3-4" In the case of (hereinafter, the mode of the notice effect of any of "1-2", "1-2-3", and "1-2-3-4" may be referred to as "second effect") , The vibration + rotation (second state) is selected and acquired as the state when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 19 with reference to the line other than 4 (second effect) When the random value is in the numerical range of 20 to 99, the normal mode (first state) is selected as the state. That is, when the advance notice effect mode is "other than 4 (second effect)", the normal mode (first state) is more easily selected than the vibration + rotation (second state).

  Here, the state selected by the state lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure (a) is a disassembled perspective view of the chance button unit 750, and the figure (b) is a figure showing an example of the 1st-3rd state.

  The chance button unit 750 may vibrate a button case 750a made of a transparent member that can be pressed by the player, a rotating decoration member 750b rotatably disposed inside the button case 750a, and a button case 750a. And a chance button 760 having a possible vibrator 750c.

  The second sub control unit 500 refers to the notice command received from the first sub control unit 400, and controls the chance button 760 according to the information of the state included in the notice command. In the present embodiment, when the state information is "vibration + rotation (second state)", as schematically shown in the upper part of FIG. , And operates the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760 to vibrate the button case 750a. On the other hand, when the state information is “normal mode (first state)”, as schematically shown in the middle part of FIG. 7B, the rotating decoration member 750b and the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760 Stop both

Further, in the present embodiment, when changing from the “normal mode (first state)” to “vibration + rotation (second state)”, the rotation decoration member 750 b of the chance button 760 can not rotate due to a failure or the like. As shown schematically in the lower part of the figure (b), the state in which only vibration by the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760 is possible is referred to as a state different from the first state and the second state. It may be called "the third state" in the sense. The state in which the vibration of the chance button 760 by the vibrator 750 c is disabled due to a failure or the like, and only the rotation of the rotating decoration member 750 b of the chance button 760 is enabled is different from the first state and the second state. You may call it a "3rd state" in the meaning of a state.
<Reach B big hit time lottery table>

  FIG. 232 (c) is an example of the reach B big hit state lottery table used to determine the state in the state lottery of the advance notice lottery process (reach B sub) described later.

  The reach B jackpot state lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the reach B big hit state lottery table, numerical value ranges of random numbers from 0 to 99 and types of states are associated. When the above variation pattern is the reach B big hit, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 is based on the state lottery table and random numbers acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of state lottery execution). Perform "reach B big hit time state lottery" to determine the state.

For example, when the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern is the reach B big hit, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, the vibration + rotation (second state) is selected as the state, and the acquired random number value When is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, the normal mode (first state) is selected as the state. That is, in this example, when the fluctuation pattern is the reach B big hit, vibration + rotation (second state) is more easily selected than in the normal mode (first state).
<Effect lottery table>

  FIG. 232 (d) is an example of a presentation lottery table used to determine a presentation mode in a presentation lottery of a notice lottery processing (reach B sub) described later.

  The effect lottery table is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the effect lottery table, the state selected in the reach B big hit state lottery described above, the numerical range of random numbers from 0 to 99, and the type of effect are associated. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs the "effect lottery" which determines the effect mode based on the effect lottery table and the random value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of performing the effect lottery). .

  For example, when the second state is selected in the reach B big hit state lottery described above, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 89, the direct hit (first effect) is selected as the effect mode When the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 90 to 99, a hit after resurrection hit (second effect) is selected as the effect mode. That is, in this example, when the state is vibration + rotation (second state), the direct hit (first effect) is more likely to be selected than the resurrection loss hit (second effect).

In addition, when the first state is selected in the reach B big hit state lottery described above, when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 0 to 49, the hit mode (first effect) is selected as the effect mode. Then, when the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 50 to 99, a hit and resurrection hit (second effect) is selected as the effect mode. That is, in the present example, when the state is the normal mode (first state), the direct hit (first effect) and the hit back revival hit (second effect) are selected with substantially the same probability.
<Preliminary lottery process (step up)>

  FIG. 234 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the advance lottery process (step-up). The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment monitors whether or not a prefetch notice execution command has been received from the main control unit 300 in the first secondary control unit main interrupt processing shown in FIG. 189 and receives the command. In this case, the notice lottery process (step-up) is performed.

  In step S3001, the information on the variation pattern of the special view 1 (or special view 2) included in the prefetch advance notice execution command is referred to, and the variation pattern is a predetermined variation pattern (in the present embodiment, the step of FIG. 234 (a)). It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern included in the up notice lottery table is normal reach loss, reach A loss, reach B loss, per normal reach, per reach A, per reach B). If it does, the process proceeds to step S3002. If it does not, the process ends.

In step S3002, a step-up run lottery using the above-described step-up notice lottery table is performed, and in the next step S3003, a state lottery using the above-described state lottery table is performed. In step S3004, preparation is made to transmit a notice command including the information of the state selected in step S3003 to the second sub control unit 500. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the above-described information transmission process (step S321).
<Preliminary lottery process (reach B sub)>

  FIG. 233 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the advance lottery process (reach B sub). The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment monitors whether or not a prefetch notice execution command has been received from the main control unit 300 in the first secondary control unit main interrupt processing shown in FIG. 189 and receives the command. In this case, the notice lottery process (reach B sub) is performed.

  In step S3101, the fluctuation pattern is the information on the fluctuation pattern and the value of the big hit flag included in the prefetch advance notice execution command, and the fluctuation pattern is per reach B, and the big hit flag is on. It is determined whether or not. If it does, the process proceeds to step S3102. If it does not, the process ends.

In step S3102, the state lottery using the reach B big hit state lottery table described above is performed, and in the next step S3103, the effect lottery using the above-described effect lottery table is performed. In step S3104, preparation for transmitting a notice command including information on the state selected in step S3102 to the second auxiliary control unit 500 is performed. The command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the above-described information transmission process (step S321).
<Operation reception production and step-up notice production (normal reach loss)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235, an example of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect when normal reach loss is selected as the variation pattern of the special view 1 will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when normal reach loss is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a time series.

  FIGS. 235 (c) and (d) are states in which the operation reception effect is performed during the variable display of the special view 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this state, the first sub control unit 400 displays an image (button image) imitating a button on which the character of "push" is applied at the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the player is prompted to press the chance button 760. In this example, an image different from the appearance of the actual chance button 760 is displayed as the button image, but an image imitating the appearance of the actual chance button 760 may be displayed. Good.

  Further, in the above-described preliminary lottery process (step-up), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the step-up preliminary lottery (step S3002) using the step-up preliminary lottery table and selects the preliminary presentation effect mode. Then, it is assumed that the variation pattern of the special view 1 variation game during the variation display is normal reach loss, and “1-2” is selected as the advance presentation effect mode. In the step-up notice lottery table shown in FIG. 232 (a), when the variation pattern is normal reach loss, “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode with a probability of 100%.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3003) using the above-described state lottery table to select the state of the chance button 760, but in this example, the notice effect mode is the second effect It is assumed that the “normal mode (first state)” is selected as the state. In the state lottery table shown in FIG. 232 (b), when the notice effect mode is "other than 4 (second effect)", the normal mode (first mode) is used rather than vibration + rotation (second state). State is easier to select.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits, to the second sub-control unit 500, a notice command to be in the normal mode (first state) in response to the selection of the normal mode (first state) by the state lottery. Do. Since the second sub control unit 500 already has the chance button 760 in the normal mode (first state), the second sub control unit 500 holds the state of the chance button 760 and permits the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 760.

  FIGS. 235 (e) and (f) show a state in which the step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of the special view 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this state, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 has passed, or the first secondary control unit 400 presses the chance button 700 a predetermined number of times (for example, once). If it does, step-up notice effect starts. In this example, since “1-2” is selected as the announcement effect mode, before the reach effect shown in FIG. 235 (g), the announcement effect of step 1 shown in FIG. 235 (e) (in this example, Two steps (two steps) are displayed by displaying an image including a number 1 and then displaying the notice effect of step 2 shown in FIG. 235 (f) (in this example, an image including a number two). Make a notice of

  FIG. 235 (g) is a state in which the effect of reach is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" corresponding to the loss, "decorative 7" is stopped and displayed on the left design display area 208a, and then "decoration 7" is displayed on the right design display area 208c. "Stop" display. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

FIG. 235 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game corresponding to the second hold is finished. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" corresponding to the loss.
<Operation reception production and step-up notice production (per reach B)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, an example of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect when reach B is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special view 1 will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach B is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 in a time series.

  FIGS. 236 (j) to 236 (l) are states in which the operation reception effect is performed during the variable display of the special view 1 corresponding to the first hold. In this state, the first sub control unit 400 displays an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 760 at the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 to play the pressing operation of the chance button 760 Encourage people to

  Further, in the above-described preliminary lottery process (step-up), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the step-up preliminary lottery (step S3002) using the step-up preliminary lottery table and selects the preliminary presentation effect mode. Then, it is assumed that the variation pattern of the special view 1 variation game in the variation display is per reach B and the big hit flag is on (reach B big hit), and "4" is selected as the advance notice effect mode.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3003) using the above-mentioned state lottery table to select the state of the chance button 760, but in this example, the first presentation effect mode is the first effect It is assumed that "vibration + rotation (second state)" is selected as the state. In the state lottery table shown in FIG. 232 (b), when the notice effect mode is “4 (first effect)”, vibration + rotation (second state) is performed more than the normal mode (first state). State) is easier to select.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 becomes vibration + rotation (second state) with respect to the second sub-control unit 500 in response to selection of vibration + rotation (second state) by state lottery Send a notice command. Since the second sub-control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to vibration plus rotation (second state) since the chance button 760 is in the normal mode (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 Allow the reception.

  236 (m), (n) are states where the step-up notice effect is being performed while the variable display of the special view 1 corresponding to the first hold is displayed. In this state, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 has passed, or the first secondary control unit 400 presses the chance button 700 a predetermined number of times (for example, once). If it does, step-up notice effect starts. In this example, since "4" is selected as the notice effect mode, the notice effect of step 4 shown in FIGS. 236 (m) and (n) (this example before the reach effect shown in FIG. 236 (o) Then, by displaying the image including the numeral 4), the notice effect of step 4 is performed without performing the notice effect of steps 1 to 3.

  In this example, even after the chance button 760 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (l), the chance button 760 is held in vibration plus rotation (second state) until the step-up notice is finished. There is. Further, in this example, since one-step notice effect mode “4” having a smaller number of steps than the two-step notice effect mode “1-2” is selected, steps in FIGS. 236 (m) and (n) By performing the advance notice of No. 4 twice, the time until the reach effect of FIG. 236 (o) is made the same as in the case of the “1-2” step up notice.

  FIG. 236 (o) is a state in which the effect of reach is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" corresponding to the big hit, "decorative 7" is stopped and displayed on the left design display area 208a, and then "decoration 7" is displayed on the right design display area 208c. "Stop" display. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to the normal mode (first state).

  FIGS. 236 (p) to 237 (s) show a state in which the second operation reception effect is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 237 (r), the first sub-control unit 400 displays the image imitating the appearance of the chance button 760 in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "press!" By performing the character display, the player is urged to press the chance button 760.

  Further, in the above-mentioned preliminary lottery process (reach B sub), the first sub control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3102) using the reach B big hit time state lottery table to select a state, but in the present embodiment, Suppose that "vibration + rotation (second state)" is selected as the state. In the reach B big hit state table shown in FIG. 232 (c), when the fluctuation pattern is the reach B big hit, vibration + rotation (second state) is more than the normal mode (first state). It is easy to be selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery (step S3103) using the above-mentioned effect lottery table, and selects the effect mode, but in this example, the state selected in the state lottery is “vibration + Since it is "rotation (second state)", it is assumed that a direct hit (first effect) having a higher probability of winning than a hit (second effect) is selected. In the effect drawing table shown in FIG. 232, when the state is vibration + rotation (second state), the direct hit (first effect) is performed rather than the hit and returned after hit (second effect) Is easy to select.

  In this example, the winning probability of the direct hit (first effect) in the effect lottery is set higher than the winning probability of the second return after a loss, but, conversely, the second hit The winning probability of the second effect) is set higher than the winning probability of the direct impact (first effect), and the resurgence hit (second effect) is carried out after the loss than the direct impact (first effect). You may comprise so that it may become easy.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 becomes vibration + rotation (second state) with respect to the second sub-control unit 500 in response to selection of vibration + rotation (second state) by state lottery Send a notice command. Since the second sub-control unit 500 changes the chance button 760 to vibration plus rotation (second state) since the chance button 760 is in the normal mode (first state), the second sub-control unit 500 Allow the reception.

  When it is intended to change the chance button 760 from the normal mode (first state) to vibration plus rotation (second state) at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (r), the rotating decoration member of the chance button 760 Even in the case where the 750b is not able to rotate due to failure or the like, and only the vibration by the vibrator 750c of the chance button 760 becomes possible (third state), the chance button 760 is vibrated + rotated in this embodiment. An operation reception effect similar to that in the case of changing to (second state) is performed, and reception of the chance button 760 is permitted (see the dotted frame in FIG. 237).

  In addition, when it is attempted to change the chance button 760 from the normal mode (first state) to vibration plus rotation (second state) at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (r), the rotating decoration member of the chance button 760 Even in the case where both the 750 b and the vibrator 750 c become non-rotatable due to failure or the like and remain in the normal state (first state), in the present embodiment, the chance button 760 is vibrated and rotated (second While performing the same operation reception effect as in the case of changing to the state), the reception of the chance button 760 is permitted (see the dotted frame in FIG. 237).

  FIGS. 237 (t) and (u) are the states which are performing a direct hit (1st presentation) before the final display of the special figure 1. FIG. When the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of pressing operation of the chance button 760 has passed, or when the chance button 700 is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), the first sub control unit 400 The rendering is started before the finalized display of the special view 1.

  In this example, since “direct hit (first effect)” is selected as the effect mode, the first effect shown in FIGS. 237 (t) and (u) is displayed before the finalized display shown in FIG. 237 (v). (In this example, it is an indication (in this example, character display such as "I hit", "Congratulations" or image display of decoration 7) indicating that the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit Note that, in this example, since a direct hit (first effect) whose effect time is shorter than the effect (second effect) after revival after loss is selected, as shown in FIG. 237 (t), (u) By performing the direct hit effect twice in, the time adjustment to the finalized display in FIG. 237 (v) is performed.

  FIG. 237 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game corresponding to the first hold is finished. In this state, the main control unit 300 stops the variation display of the special view using the first special view display device 212 (not shown). In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the stop display of the special figure 1, but in this example, the decorative symbol combination "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7 corresponding to the big hit" "Stop" is displayed.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 237 (s) to (v), and a diagram showing an example of effects in a time series when a hit and resurrection hit (second effect) is selected by effect lottery It is.

  As described above, in the preliminary lottery process (reach B sub), the first sub control unit 400 performs state lottery (step S3102) using the reach B big hit time state lottery table, and selects a state in this example. It is assumed that “normal mode (first state)” is selected as the state. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the effect lottery (step S3103) using the above-mentioned effect lottery table, and selects the effect mode, but in this example, it is a hit after the loss (second effect). Suppose it is selected.

  FIGS. 238 (t) and (u) show a state in which the second effect is performed before the finalized display of the special view 1. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 selects “post-return-to-back hit (second presentation)” as the presentation mode, so as shown in FIG. 238 (FIG. 238 (v)). t) a second effect shown in (u) (in this example, a false effect that falsely suggests that the success or failure of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss (in this example, a character such as After displaying or displaying the image of the decoration 6, a true effect (in this example, a character display such as "What is it?", Which indicates that the special game 1 variation game is determined to be a hit or not) Image display).

According to the present embodiment, it can be expected that the first effect (effect indicating the success or failure judgment result of the special view 1 fluctuation game) is performed in the second state (vibration + rotation), and the player's game In some cases, you can be motivated.
<Modification 1 of operation reception effects and step-up notice effects>

  FIG. 239 is a view showing a first modification of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect shown in FIGS. 235 to 237, and FIGS. 239 (a) to (h) are FIGS. It corresponds to

  FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d) are states in which the operation reception effect is performed during the variable display of the special view 1 corresponding to the second hold. In this modification, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image imitating a button to which the character of "push" is applied at the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, thereby providing a chance. By urging the player to press the button 760, and gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the press operation on the chance button 760, the press operation on the chance button 760 Report the effective time of

  Further, FIGS. 239 (e) and (f) show a state in which the step-up notice effect is being performed during the variable display of the special view 1 corresponding to the second hold. In the present modification, even when the chance button 760 is not pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), the first sub-control unit 400 receives an acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760. When it passes, it starts a step-up notice effect. Further, in the present modification, since “1-2” is selected as the notice effect mode, before the reach effect shown in FIG. 239 (g), the notice effect (this is shown in FIG. 239 (e) In the example, an image including the numeral 1 is displayed, and then, the preview effect of step 2 shown in FIG. 239 (f) (an image including the numeral 2 in this example) is displayed to display two steps (in this example). Perform 2 stage notices.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 239 (e '), instead of displaying the advance notice effect of step 1, variable display of a decorative symbol may be performed. Further, the contents of this modification may be applied to the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 236 and the step-up notice effect (per reach B).
<Modification 2 of operation reception effect & step up notice effect>

  FIG. 240 is a view showing a second modification of the operation reception effect and the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 235 to FIG. 237, and FIG. 240 (o) to (v) are FIG. v) compatible.

  FIGS. 240 (p) to (s) are states in which the operation reception effect is being performed. In the present modification, the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 760 at the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing shown in FIG. By prompting the player to press the chance button 760 by displaying the characters “press!”, The remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced according to the remaining time of the valid period of the press operation of the chance button 760. By performing the staging effect, the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 760 is notified.

  Further, FIGS. 240 (t) and 240 (u) show a state in which a hit and resurrection hit (second effect) is performed before the finalized display of the special view 1. FIG. In the present modification, even when the chance button 760 is not pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), the first sub-control unit 400 receives an acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 760. When it passes, the second effect (in this example, a false effect that falsely suggests that the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss (in this example, the character display such as After doing the image display of decoration 6, it is a true effect (in this example, it is a character display such as "What's it?", And an image display of decoration 7 to indicate that the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1 variation game is a hit) )I do.

  In the present modification, an example is given in which, after the lapse of the effective period of the pressing operation on the chance button 760, a recovery hit (second effect) is performed, but the pressing operation on the chance button 760 is effective. It may be configured to forcibly perform a direct hit (first effect) when the period has elapsed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the operation means (for example, the chance button 760) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and the effect means capable of at least executing plural types of effects. For example, a game console provided with effect control and a decorative symbol display device 208) performed by the first sub control unit 400, wherein the operation means can at least be in a plurality of types of states, At least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (eg, the chance button 760 in the normal mode), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (eg, Vibration + rotation chance button 760), the first state is at least a state different from the second state, and at least one of the plurality of effects is a first state Out (for example, a first effect shown in FIG. 237 (t) (a true effect that indicates that the special game variation game is determined to be a hit or not) is at least one of the plurality of types of effects , A second effect (for example, a second effect shown in FIG. 238 (t) (a fake effect that falsely suggests that the special game variation game is a loss decision), the first effect is The effect is at least different from the second effect, and the effect means can at least perform the first effect when the first condition is satisfied, and the effect means is The first effect is at least executable when the first condition is established, and the first condition is that the operating means is operated by the player in the first period. The first effect is the condition that may be established. Wherein said operating means in a period when the a second state, said a second at least performed easily effect than demonstration, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  The gaming machine according to the third embodiment may be able to provide a gaming machine characterized by the relationship between the effect means and the operation means. In addition, in the second state, it can be expected that the first effect is performed, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Further, operation means (for example, chance button 760) provided at a position where the player can operate, and effect means (for example, effect control or decoration performed by the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least executing the first effect A game display provided with a symbol display device 208), wherein the operation means is capable of at least carrying out a plurality of types of states, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first A state (e.g., a chance button 760 in the normal mode), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (e.g., a vibration + rotation chance button 760), the first state Is at least a state different from the second state, and the first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the operation means is operated in the first period (for example, FIG. 237 (t)). The first effect (a true effect that indicates that the success or failure determination of the special figure fluctuation game is a hit), the first effect is that the state of the operation means in the first period is the second When it is in the state of, it may be an effect that is easier to be executed than at least other effects.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the relationship between the effect means and the operation means. In addition, in the second state, it can be expected that the first effect is performed, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  Further, the first effect is an effect that may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the first period, and the second effect is the first period. The effect may be executed even if the operation means is not operated.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the relationship between the effect means and the operation means. In addition, in the second state, it can be expected that the first effect is performed, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  The operation means is at least capable of taking at least the second state in relation to the first effect, and the operation means is at least capable of taking the second effect in relation to the second effect. It may be at least possible to take the second state.

  In addition, the first effect includes at least an effect for deriving a first result (for example, a hit of a judgment result of special game variation game), and the second effect is the first result. The first effect is at least recognizable to derive the first result in a second period, and the second effect is a third effect, The first result may be derived at least in a period of time, and the second period may start at least earlier than the third period.

  With such a configuration, the second state may be able to derive the first result earlier in relation to the player's operation, and the player is made to operate the operation means positively. There are times when you can.

  In addition, the aspect (for example, display, sound, light, movement) of the first result by the first effect and the aspect of the second result by the second effect may be different, or the same. It may be something. Further, in the first effect and the second effect, the player may be able to recognize the first result at the same timing even if the effects are different. For example, if the first effect is a rare effect or the like, the second effect (the second state) may be added more value than the first effect (the first state), There are cases where the operating means can be operated positively.

  In addition, the second effect can at least recognize that the second result (for example, the loss of the special game fluctuation game success or failure judgment result) is derived (may be derived) in the fourth period. The fourth period is a period at least partially overlapping with the second period, and the third period is a period starting at least after the fourth period, The second effect is at least recognizable to be changed from the second result to the first result in the third period, and the second result is the first result. The result may be at least a different result.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to quickly recognize the first result, which is the final result, in the first state. There is.

  In addition, the first result and the second result are not limited to those notified by the combination display of the decorative symbols, for example, may be notified by the presence or absence of the movement of the movable body, or by the battle outcome You may alert | report. In this case, even in a state where no symbol combination is derived, the player may be able to easily recognize that there is a possibility of the first result or the second result depending on the game nature or the effect. In addition, the first result and the second result are not only related to the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game, the result of the notice for going to the intense heat reach, the result of the pre-reading notice, the result of the common drawing effect, the mission achievement and setting The present invention is applicable to various effects such as registration (change the effect according to the level, and imparting a sense of superiority).

  Further, the display device according to the present invention is provided with decorative symbol display means capable of at least performing variable display of decorative symbols, and the first result is a stop mode in which the stop mode of the decorative symbol can recognize a big hit, and the second result is The stop mode of the decorative symbol may be a stop mode in which a lost can be recognized.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to quickly recognize that a big hit will be made according to the operation of the operation means, and the operation of the operation means may be closely related to the big hit. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In addition, even when the operation means is operated to make the first effect executable, the effect means performs the first effect when the operation means is not operated. Alternatively, at least the second effect may be executable.

  With such a configuration, when the operating means is operated, since the player may be able to quickly recognize the big hit by the first effect, the operating means may be able to be operated positively. In addition, the said presentation means may continue and perform said 1st presentation, when operation of the said operation means is not performed.

  In addition, the control means (for example, the second multiple control unit 500) capable of at least controlling the state of the operation means is provided, and the control means is capable of performing at least first control, and the first control The control means at least includes control to bring the state into the second state, and the effect means is the second state in which the operation means is in spite of the first control performed by the control means. Even in the case of a state other than the above, at least the first effect may be executable.

  With such a configuration, the first effect can be executed even when the operation means does not change to the second state to be originally changed due to a failure of the operation means or the like. Can prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the states other than the second state, in addition to the first state (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 233 (b)), the first state and the second state (for example, FIG. 233) Only the vibration shown in (b) (for example, the vibration shown in FIG. 233 (b), only the rotation not shown, and the configuration of the first state and the second state) different from the vibration + rotation shown in (b) There are multiple differences, and one of them is inoperable due to failure etc.).

  Further, the operation means can at least be brought into the first state in the second period, and the effect means is configured to perform the second state when the operation means is operated in the second period. The second effect may be at least a different effect from the first effect (for example, an effect for suggesting a hit).

  With such a configuration, since the relationship between the second notice and the first effect is maintained, the player is not mistaken for the effect or the like.

  In addition, when the said operation means of a said 1st state is operated, the said presentation means can perform at least said 1st presentation and said 2nd presentation, The said presentation of a said 2nd state is possible When the operation means is operated, at least the first effect and the second effect may be executable.

  Further, the first state may be a normal state (for example, operation means at an initial position). The second state may be an aspect in which at least a first aspect (for example, height, vibration, hardening, rotation, wind, etc.) is added to the first state.

Further, the operation means may be easier to take in the first state than in the second state in the first effect, and the operation means may be in the first effect. The second state may be easier to take than the first state.
Fourth Embodiment

Next, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. In addition, about the same structure as the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on the said Embodiment 1, while attaching the same code | symbol in drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, only configurations different from the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described.
<Let's hit and other lottery tables>

  FIG. 241 shows an example of the consecutive hit number etc. lottery table used to determine the state of the chance button 700 and the consecutive hit number.

  The lottery table for the number of consecutive hits is one of data tables stored in advance in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. In the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits, the effect mode (variation pattern) on the decorative symbol display device 208 determined by the special figure 1 fluctuation time lottery (or special figure 2 fluctuation time lottery) described above, and 0 to 99 randomness The numerical value range is associated with the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub control unit 400 selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of consecutive hits based on the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits and the random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of executing the state lottery). Make a "state lottery" to decide.

  For example, when the variation pattern is reach C lose, refer to the line of reach C lose, and when the acquired random number is 0, select the "second state (one operation)" as the state and the number of consecutive hits. When the acquired random number value is in the range of 1 to 5 and when the second state (3 times operation) is selected as the state and the number of consecutive hits, the acquired random number is in the range of 6 to 19 Select the “second operation (five or more 1/10 lottery)” as the status and the number of consecutive hits, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 20 to 99, “first” as the status and the number of consecutive hits Select the operation (1 to 5 lotterys from 5 times).

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is per reach C, the line per reach C is referred to, and when the acquired random value is in the numerical range of 0 to 79, “second state (one Operation) is selected, and when the acquired random number is in the numerical range of 80 to 89, “second state (three times operation)” is selected as the state and the number of consecutive hits, and the acquired random number is 90 to 93 If the second operation (5 or more 1/10 lottery) is selected as the state and the number of consecutive hits in the numerical range of and the acquired random number is 94, the first Select "State (1 time operation)" and select "1st state (3 times operation)" as the state and the number of consecutive hits when the acquired random value is within the numerical range of 95 to 96, and acquired random value When the value is in the range of 97 to 99, the condition and the number of consecutive Selecting one of the operation (5 times since 1/10 lottery) ".

  In the consecutive hit number etc. lottery table of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is reach C loss, the winning probability in the second state is 20/100 and the winning probability in the first state is 80/100. When the variation pattern is per reach C, the winning probability in the second state is 94/100, and the winning probability in the first state is 6/100. That is, when the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game is a hit, while the second state is more easily won than the first state, the second judgment is a second case when the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss The first state is easier to win than the state.

In addition, when the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game is a hit, the second state is easier to win than the first state, but among the second state, it is particularly easy to win the "one-time operation" (winning The probability is 80%). In addition, when the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss, the first state is easier to win than the second state, but the first state (one operation) or the first state (three times operation) Will not win, and will win only "1/10 lottery" after 5 times. That is, when the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game is a hit, the success / failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game is configured so that the number of times of continuous hitting is smaller than in the case of the loss.
<Operation receptionist production (reach C lost)>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242, an example of the operation reception effect will be described when reach C losing is selected as the variation pattern of the special view. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach C losing is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series.

  FIG. 242 (c) shows a state in which a reach is produced using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, after displaying "decoration 7" in the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" corresponding to the lost symbol, "decoration" in the right symbol display area 208c. Stop display of 7 ". In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIGS. 242 (d) to 242 (h) are states in which an operation reception effect indicating that it is a reception period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 displays a character such as "Torn clothes by continuous hitting!" At the timing shown in (d) in the figure, and then at the timing shown in (e) to (h) in the figure, the decorative symbol By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) at the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the display device 208 and displaying a character of “double hit !!” The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 in the state of (initial position) (a continuous hit of the first state (initial position) chance button 700). At the same time, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified, thereby notifying the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  Further, at the start of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the lottery table such as the number of times of continuous hitting, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of times of continuous hitting. It is assumed that the “first state (five or more 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of times of consecutive hits. In the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits shown in FIG. 241, when the variation pattern is reach C loss, the first state (five or more 1/10 lotterys) is the easiest to win.

  Subsequently, with the first sub-control unit 400 selecting the first state (five times or more after 1/10 lottery) by state lottery, information of the first state is sent to the second sub-control unit 500. Send a notice command including. The second sub control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state) because the chance button 700 is already at the initial position (first state).

FIG. 242 (i) is a state in which rendering is performed before the finalized display of the special view 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (j). When the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 passes during the period of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the predetermined number of times (in this example, the state) If the press operation is performed only 5 times selected in the lottery, and the 1/10 winning probability lottery is not won, the effect (in this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation game success or failure determination is a loss After performing the suggested effect (in this example, a character display such as "To that extent" and an image display of decoration 6), the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed Do.
<Operation receptionist production (per reach C)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 243 to 244, an example of the operation reception effect when reach C is selected as the variation pattern of the special view will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed an example of the production | presentation when reach C is selected as a fluctuation pattern of a special figure in a time series.

  FIG. 243 (c) shows a state in which the same variation display of the normal symbol decorative symbol as in FIG. 227 (g) is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 selects P7 (chance) → P7 in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the effect pattern 7 selected in the general-purpose effect system 1 lottery using the general-purpose game effect system 1 lottery table. The display is performed in the order of (button) → general decoration 2. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs P7 (button in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to P7 (button) selected in the regular drawing effect system 2 lottery using the common drawing effect system 2 lottery table. Display of). After that, P7 (button) is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 even during the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in the same figure (e) and the effect shown in the figure (g). However, in the present example, the display of P7 (button) is configured to be temporarily erased during the reach effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 243 (f) shows a state in which a reach is produced using the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 stops the decorative symbol in the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol in the variable display in the right symbol display area 208c. In the example, after displaying "decoration 7" in the left symbol display area 208a as a part of the decorative symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit design, "decoration in the right symbol display area 208c Stop display of 7 ". In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the character of "reach" in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the combination of decorative symbols is in the reach state.

  FIGS. 243 (g) to 243 (i) are states in which an operation reception effect indicating that it is a reception period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 displays a character such as "Torn clothes by continuous hit!" At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (g), and then at the timings shown in FIG. 6 (h) to FIG. By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position), the character of “continuous hitting” is given at the center of the middle symbol display area 208 b of the display device 208. The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position) (continuously hit the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position)). At the same time, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified, thereby notifying the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  Further, at the start of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the lottery table such as the number of times of continuous hitting, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of times of continuous hitting. It is assumed that the “second state (one-time operation)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of consecutive hits. In the lottery table such as the number of consecutive hits shown in FIG. 241, when the fluctuation pattern is per reach C, the second state (one-time operation) is most likely to be won.

  Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 selects the second state (one-time operation) by state lottery, a notice command including information on the second state is sent to the second sub-control unit 500. Send Since the second sub control unit 500 has the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state), the operation of the chance button 700 from the initial position (first state) is completed as shown in FIG. 243 (h). Move to the position (second state).

FIGS. 244 (j) to (l) are states in which effects are performed before the finalized display of the special view 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. When the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 passes during the period of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the predetermined number of times (in this example, the state) An effect (in this example, a character indication such as "I hit" in this example) indicates that the effect (in this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation game success or failure determination is a hit) when the pressing operation is performed only once After the image display of the decoration 7 is performed, the decoration symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit design is stopped and displayed, and the second sub-control unit 500 is the first sub-control unit. The forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is pivoted up and down as shown in (j) and (k) of FIG.
<Modification 1 of operation reception effects (per reach C)>

  FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a first modification of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIG. 243 to FIG. 244, and FIG. 245 (f) to (m) are FIG. Corresponds to m).

  FIGS. 245 (h) and 245 (i) are diagrams showing an example of the effect when the drive mechanism of the chance button 700 breaks down during the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700. At the timing shown in FIG. 245 (h), the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completed position (the position where the chance button 700 can be operated in the second state) as in FIG. 243 (h). Here, an example is shown in which the chance button 700 can not be raised to the operation completion position due to a failure such as a drive mechanism.

In the present embodiment, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timings shown in FIGS. 245 (h) to (i). In the second state (operation completion position), an image display imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position) is given with the characters “continuous hit” in the center. The player is urged to continuously perform the pressing operation on the chance button 700 (to continuously hit the chance button 700 in the second state (operation completion position)). At the same time, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified, thereby notifying the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.
<Modification 2 of operation reception effect production (per reach C)>

  246 is a diagram showing a second modification of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIG. 243 to FIG. 244, and FIG. 246 (f) to (m) is a diagram of FIG. Corresponds to m).

  FIGS. 246 (g) to (i ') show a state in which an operation reception effect indicating that it is a reception period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. After the first sub-control unit 400 performs character display such as "break clothes by repeated hitting!" At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (g), decoration is performed at the timings shown in FIG. 6 (h) to (i '). By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the symbol display device 208 and displaying the characters “double hit !!” The player is urged to continuously perform a pressing operation on the chance button 700 in one state (initial position) (a continuous hit on the first state (initial position) chance button 700). At the same time, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified, thereby notifying the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  Further, at the start of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the lottery table such as the number of times of continuous hitting, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of times of continuous hitting. It is assumed that the “first state (five or more 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of times of consecutive hits. The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the second sub-control unit 500 of a notice including the information of the first state in response to the selection of the first state (five times after 1/10 lottery) by the state lottery Send a command The second sub control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state) because the chance button 700 is already at the initial position (first state).

FIGS. 246 (j) to (l) are states in which effects are performed before the finalized display of the special view 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. When the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 passes during the period of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the predetermined number of times (in this example, the state) When the press operation is performed only 5 times selected in the lottery and the 1/10 winning probability lottery is not won, the effect (in this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation game success or failure determination is a hit After performing the suggested effect (in this example, character display such as "I hit" and image display of decoration 7), the decoration symbol combination "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" corresponding to hit symbols is stopped and displayed Do.
<Modification 3 of operation reception effect production (per reach C)>

  FIG. 247 is a view showing a third modification of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIG. 243 to FIG. 244, and FIG. 247 (f) to (m) are FIG. Corresponds to m).

  FIGS. 246 (g) to 246 (j ') show a state in which an operation reception effect indicating that it is a reception period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is performed. After the first sub-control unit 400 performs character display such as "break clothes by continuous hitting!" At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (g), decoration is performed at the timings shown in FIG. 6 (h) to (j '). By displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) in the center of the middle symbol display area 208b of the symbol display device 208 and displaying the characters “double hit !!” The player is urged to continuously perform a pressing operation on the chance button 700 in one state (initial position) (a continuous hit on the first state (initial position) chance button 700). At the same time, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified, thereby notifying the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  Further, at the start of the operation reception effect, the first sub-control unit 400 performs state lottery using the lottery table such as the number of times of continuous hitting, and selects the state of the chance button 700 and the number of times of continuous hitting. It is assumed that the “first state (five or more 1/10 lottery)” is selected as the state of the button 700 and the number of times of consecutive hits. The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the second sub-control unit 500 of a notice including the information of the first state in response to the selection of the first state (five times after 1/10 lottery) by the state lottery Send a command The second sub control unit 500 holds the chance button 700 at the initial position (first state) because the chance button 700 is already at the initial position (first state).

  FIGS. 246 (j) to (l) are states in which effects are performed before the finalized display of the special view 1 performed at the timing shown in FIG. In the present modification, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has passed during the period of the operation reception effect, or the chance button 700 has a predetermined number of times In this example, when the pressing operation is performed only 5 times selected in the state lottery, and the 1/10 winning probability lottery is not won, the effect (in this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation game success / failure determination is After making a false effect that falsely suggests that it is a loss (in this example, it is a character display such as “I see that degree” or an image display of decoration 6), the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit After performing a true effect (in this example, a character display such as "What is it?" Or an image display of the decoration 7) that suggests that, the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the hit pattern "deterior 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "Stop" display.

According to this example, the second state (one operation of the operation completion position) is easier to operate than the first state (five times of the initial position), and the first effect (special figure 1) In some cases, it may be possible to easily perform an effect that indicates the result of the determination of the success or failure of the fluctuation game. Moreover, while fulfilling the function (such as an increase in the degree of expectation) as the advance notice in the second state, there may be a case where the derivation of the result is not bothersome.
<Modification 4 of operation reception effects (per reach C)>

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a fourth modification of the operation reception effect (per reach C) shown in FIG. 243 to FIG. 244, and FIG. 248 (f) to (m) is a diagram of FIG. Corresponds to m).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 248 (h), the chance button 700 is moved from the operation completion position to the initial position, but here, an example in which the chance button 700 can not be raised to the initial position due to a failure such as a drive mechanism is shown. It shows.

  In the present modification, even when a failure occurs in the chance button 700, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timings shown in (h) to (j ') of FIG. The chance button in the first state (initial position) is displayed by displaying an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 700 in the first state (initial position) in the center of the screen and displaying the characters The player is urged to continuously perform a pressing operation on 700 (a first state (initial position) chance button 700 is continuously hit). At the same time, the effect of gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter according to the remaining time of the effective period of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is notified, thereby notifying the effective time of the pressing operation of the chance button 700.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the fourth embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) provided at least at the position where the player can operate, and the effect means (the first effect can be performed at least) For example, a game console provided with effect control and a decorative symbol display device 208) performed by the first sub control unit 400, wherein the operation means can at least be in a plurality of types of states, At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (e.g., the chance button 700 in the initial position), and at least one of the plurality of states is a second state (e.g., the second state). The chance button 700) in the operation complete position where the first state is at least a state different from the second state; (For example, as shown in FIGS. 243 (j) to (l), the effect indicating that the special game variation game success or failure determination is a hit), when the first condition is established (for example, chance button 700 is 1 It is an effect that can be performed at least when pressed once, and it is indicated that the first effect (for example, shown in FIGS. 246 (j) to (l), it is a hit determination of special figure variation game The effect to be performed is at least an effect that is executable when the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 700 is operated five times and the winning probability of 1/10 is not won). The first condition is a condition that may be established by the player operating the operation means in the second state, and the second condition is a condition in which the player is the first condition. By operating the operating means in the state A condition that may be, the first condition, the a met is likely to occur than the second condition, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the operation means. Moreover, in the second state, the first effect may be easily performed by an operation easier than the first state. Moreover, while fulfilling the function (such as an increase in the degree of expectation) as the advance notice in the second state, there may be a case where the derivation of the result is not bothersome.

  Further, the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied by operating the operating means a first number of times (for example, once), and the second condition is a condition that the second operating means is the second operating condition. The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied by performing the operation a number of times (for example, 5 times), and the first number may be a number smaller than the second number.

  With such a configuration, the second state can give the player a sense of expectation, but on the other hand, it may not be suitable for many operations, so changing the first state and the number will There is a case that the person does not feel the troublesomeness of the operation.

  Note that the first number is zero and the second number may be one. For example, in the second state, the first effect is performed at a certain timing even if the player does not perform a button operation. On the other hand, in the case of the first state, if the first effect is not performed unless the button is operated, it may be possible to add value to the second state.

  Further, in the effect pattern which can execute the first effect, the operation means is at least capable of becoming any one of the first state and the second state. It may be.

  With such a configuration, depending on the state of the operation means, it may be possible to give expectation to the first effect.

  Further, the first effect is an effect capable of at least suggesting the result of the pass / fail judgment, and the first condition is satisfied at least by operating the operation means for the first number of times in a first period. The second condition is a condition that may at least be satisfied by operating the operation means for the second number of times during the first period, and the first effect is Even when the first condition is not satisfied (for example, when the acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 has not been performed without the chance button 700 being pressed the first number of times). It is possible to execute at least the effect after the end of the first period, and the first effect is a case where the second condition is not satisfied (for example, the chance button 700 is pressed a second number of times) Acceptance period of depressed chance buttons 700 without (e.g., 5 seconds) is the presentation of the may be capable of at least performed after the first period ends even if) past.

  With such a configuration, the result of the success or failure judgment is an effect that the player pays most attention to, and the player can surely show the player regardless of the operation of the operation means (whether the condition is established or not). it can.

  Note that the first effect is an effect capable of at least suggesting a first result as a result of the success or failure determination, and the first result is a result of the result of the success or failure determination being a big hit, and the first effect One of the effects can indicate the first result with a plurality of types of patterns, at least one of the plurality of types of patterns is a first pattern, and at least one of the plurality of types of patterns One is a second pattern, and the first pattern is capable of performing only an effect capable of suggesting the first result when the first condition is satisfied. One pattern is capable of performing only effects that can suggest the first result when the second condition is satisfied, and the second pattern is that the first condition is satisfied. If the second result can be suggested It is possible to execute an effect capable of suggesting the first result after performing the step b., And an effect capable of suggesting the second result when the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an effect capable of suggesting the first result after performing the step b., And the second result is a result in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a loss. If one condition is not satisfied, it may be easy to select the second pattern as the execution of the first effect.

  In addition, the operation means is likely to take the first state when the first effect is executed in the first pattern, and the operation means is configured to perform the first effect as the first effect. The second state may be easily taken when it is executed in the second pattern.

  Further, the first effect is at least a notice, and the first condition is a condition which may at least be satisfied by operating the operation means for the first number of times in a second period, The second condition is a condition that may at least be satisfied by operating the operation means for the second number of times during the second period, and the first effect is satisfied by the first condition. If not, it is at least not executed, and the first effect may at least not be executed if the second condition is not established.

  The notice is different from the indication indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment, and is not necessarily something to be indicated to the player. Therefore, by giving a notice only when the condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation means, the operation of the operation means may be effectively prompted.

  Further, the effect means is at least capable of executing a second effect, and the second effect is at least an effect that can be executed when a third condition is satisfied, and the second effect is The fourth condition is an effect that can be performed at least when the condition is satisfied, and the third condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least when the player operates the operation means in the first state. The fourth condition is a condition that may at least be established by the player operating the operation means in the second state, and the third condition Condition that may at least be satisfied by continuing the operation of the operating means for a third period, and the fourth condition is the operating means (in the second state) Continue the operation for the fourth period A condition that when at least satisfied by the third period may be the same as the fourth period.

  With such a configuration, the period of the operation of the operation means is made the same, and another effect is provided which makes the establishment difficulty of the condition substantially the same regardless of the state. There may be cases where it can be provided as a function of only (the difference in the degree of expectation), and variations of the function due to the difference in the state can be achieved.

  Further, the first condition is a condition which may at least be satisfied by continuing the operation of the operation means (which is the first state) over the first period, and the second condition Is a condition that may at least be established by continuing the operation of the operating means (which is in the second state) over a second period, the first period being the second period It may be shorter.

  Moreover, after selecting either the said 1st presentation or the said 2nd presentation at the same timing, you may be a structure which determines a state. With such a configuration, it may be possible to have variations in the effects using the operation means at the same timing.

  In addition, the configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the effect means and the notification means according to the present invention A movable body, an operation means itself and the like can be applied. Therefore, the effect by the effect means and the notification by the notification means are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device, the light emission by the lamp, etc. For example, the sound by the speaker, the movement or vibration by the movable body, the light emission or blinking of the operation means itself May be. Further, the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and may be any operation means operable by the player.

  Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the error state of the operation means is present. The number of notification means may be one, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means does not operate up to the position where it originally moves. Further, the number of notification means may be one, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Here, the “different notification mode” may be any of the case where the notification is not performed, the case where the notification is performed, and the case where the notification is not performed.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of informing means, and at least one or all of the plurality of informing means may perform notification to prompt an operation. Further, there may be a plurality of informing means, and different informing modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating up to the position where it originally moves. Here, the “different notification mode” may include a case where a predetermined notification means does not perform notification among the plurality of notification means, and may include a case where all of the plurality of notification means do not perform notification. Further, the operation means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever or the like.

  In addition, even if there is a plurality of effects as a result of accepting an operation in one informing means, even if at least one of the plurality of effects is not performed when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves Good. In addition, the effect of receiving the operation may be performed by the plurality of notification means, and at least one notification means among the plurality of notification means when the operation means is not operating up to the second position where it originally moves You may choose not to perform the In addition, one effect may be obtained as a result of accepting an operation in one informing means. Moreover, the thing which does not perform the presentation of the result of having received operation may be contained in several alerting | reporting means.

  Further, although an example is shown in which the control unit performs detection of the operation unit and the effect based on the detection result, the same control unit may perform detection based on the operation unit and the effect based on the detection result. In addition, even in the case where the detection of the operation means and the effect based on the detection result are performed by different control units, the operation means is operated when the operation portion is positioned at the first position or the second position. The operation detection result is transmitted to the other control unit, and the other control unit is configured to receive the detection result, and when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection is performed. Although the result is transmitted to another control unit, the other control unit may be configured not to receive the detection result.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is positioned at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit. While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation unit is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is set to the first control unit. Or although it transmits to a 2nd control part, it may constitute so that the said 1st control part or the 2nd control part concerned may not receive a detection result. In addition, when the operation unit is operated when the operation unit is positioned at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is positioned at the second position. When the operating means is operated during operation or during operation, the detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit.

  In addition, the transmission destination of the operation detection result before, during, or after the operation of the operation unit may be the first control unit. In addition, even when the operation is performed during the operation of the operation means, the operation detection result may be acceptable in another control unit. Moreover, when the operation means before operation is operated, the detection result of the operation is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, and when the operation means is operated during and after the operation, the second control unit The detection result of the operation may be transmitted to the first control unit. Also, before operation, during operation may be transmitted to the second control unit, and after operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

  In addition, when the operation means does not operate to the second position to move originally, the notification means will play the second position that should originally move if the notification to suggest the second position to move originally is played. In some cases, it may be possible to notify the player, and not to disadvantage the player as compared to the case where the player moves to the second position to move originally. In addition, when the operation means does not operate up to the second position where it originally moves, if the notification means gives a notification that does not suggest the second position where it originally moves, confusion of the player due to a mismatch between the operation state and the notification mode You may be able to prevent Further, in this case, the notification not suggesting the second position to move originally may notify the position of the operation means before the operation, and the notification not suggesting the second position to move originally will be the operation before the operation A position different from that after the operation may be notified.

  In addition, the operation unit may include a plurality of operation units (for example, the first operation unit and the second operation unit). For example, before the operation of the operation unit, the detection result of the operation of the first operation unit Acceptable, before the operation of the operation means, the detection result of the operation of the second operation part is not accepted, and when the operation means is operated to the second position which originally moves, at least the operation of the second operation part The detection result may be configured to be accepted.

  Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If not accepted, notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, since the originally operable second operation unit can be operated, the same operation can be performed as in the case where the operation means is moved to the originally moved second position. It can sometimes prevent you from being penalized. In this case, notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable.

  Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation unit does not operate up to the second position to move originally, the operation detection result can be received when the first operation unit is operated. In this case, the notification unit may notify that the second operation unit is operable, and may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate since it is sufficient to operate the first operation unit or the second operation unit. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable. The notification means may notify only that the second operation unit is operable.

  In addition, when the detection result of the second operation unit is not received when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is received even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification unit may be configured to notify that the second operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation of the operation unit may be suppressed, and failure of the operation means may be prevented. In this case, notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable.

  In addition, when the operation means does not operate up to the second position to move originally, when the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted, the operation detection result is accepted when the first operation unit is operated The notification means may notify that the second operation unit is operable, while the notification means may not notify that the first operation unit is operable. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by differentiating the operation portion that can be operated when the operation means is not operating to the position where it should originally move. In this case, the notification means may not notify that the second operation unit is operable, or the notification means may notify that the first operation unit is operable. The notification means may notify only that the second operation unit is operable.

  The operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. Further, the rendering means is special in response to the operation of the operation means being operated when the operation means is not moved to the second position despite the movement control being performed. At least the effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the operation means moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, (1) detection means (for example, detection unit 710, detection piece 704b4, chance) provided in the operation means The pressing operation of the operation means may be detected by the detection unit of the button 750 and the detection unit of the bet button 132. (2) Provided on the operation means after the time required for the movement control has elapsed It may be that the pressing operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means (for example, the detection portion 710, the detection piece 704b4, the detection portion of the chance button 750, the detection portion of the bet button 132).

  Also, the time required for movement control may be the time taken to move from the first position to the second position, and drive means (for example, drive units 708 (708a, 708b) provided in the operation means may be used. ), The drive source 754d, the drive unit 427) may be operated to rotate the rotating member from the restricted position to the permitted position, and in the case where the movable unit is driven up and down, the movable unit May be the time to move to the movement completion position.

  In addition, even though the movement control is performed, the operation means does not move to the second position, and (1) the operation is performed by a physical factor such as a failure of the drive means or a press by the player. It may be the case where the means can not move, or (2) the case where constant driving by the driving means can not be performed even if the time required for the movement control has elapsed. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operation means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

  In addition, movement control may be performed to detect that the operation means has moved to the second position. In this case, it can be understood that the operation means can not move to the second position by not being detected, so that effects may be performed according to the detection result, and variations of the effects may be able to be increased.

  In addition, it may be detected that movement control can not move the operation means to the second position. In this case, it can be known that movement of the operation means to the second position is completed by not being detected, so that effects may be performed according to the detection result, and variations of the effects may be able to be increased. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated even while the movement control is being performed.

  The movement control is performed over a first movement period, and the first movement period is a period consisting of a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement Even when control is being performed, it may be configured to be performed when the operation means is operated during the third period. In addition, the special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being performed and the operation means is operated during the second period.

  For example, when movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of the first period), no special effect is performed even if the operation means is operated 0.5 seconds after the start (an example of the second period), A special effect may be performed if the operation means is operated for 0.5 seconds (an example of the third period) from 0.5 seconds after the start to the end. Of course, when movement control is started and ended in one second (an example of a movement control period), special effects may be performed if the operation means is operated in this one second.

  In addition, with regard to the operation means moved to the second position, the movement control may move the operation means to the first position when the operation reception period ends in a state where the pressing operation is not performed. In addition, with regard to the operation unit moved to the second position, when the operation reception period ends in a state where the pressing operation is not performed, the operation position may not be returned from the second position to the first position.

  In addition, regarding the operation means moved to the second position, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position by movement control during the operation reception period, and the operation moved to the second position With regard to the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation reception period. The operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position by a physical factor during the operation reception period by the operation means moved to the second position.

  When a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the first operation means of the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the second operation of the plurality of operation means When the means does not move, and the notification means urges pressing of the first operation means (in the case of (A) below), although the movement control is performed, the first means When the operating means has not moved to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. In addition, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  In the case of the above (A), even if the movement control is performed, when the first operation means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operation means is detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. In the case of the above (A), even if the movement control is performed, when the first operation means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  In the case of the above (A), even if the movement control is performed, when the first operation means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operation means is not detected. May be Also, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. In addition, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected.

  In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected. In the case of (A), when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operation means may be detected. Further, when the second operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the first operation means may not be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the second operation means may not be detected.

  When a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the third operation means and the fourth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means The third operation means is in the second position despite the fact that the notification for urging the operation of the third operation means is performed (in the case of (B) below) and the movement control is performed If it has not moved, the pressing operation of the first operation means may be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Also, in the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. Also, in the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  Also, in the case of (B) above, when the third operation means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the pressing operation of the third operation means is not detected. May be Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, a pressing operation of the third operation means may be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, a pressing operation of the third operation means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected. In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may be detected.

  In the case of (B), when the third operation means is moved to the second position by movement control, the pressing operation of the third operation means may not be detected. Also, the pressing operation of the fourth operation means may not be detected.

  When a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means among the plurality of operation means can be moved to the second position by movement control, and the notification means , And a notification prompting the operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is performed (in the case of (C) below), the pressing operation of the fifth operation means and the sixth operation means is detected. If the detection of the fifth operation means is faster than the sixth operation means (sixth detection> the same applies to the case of the fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operation means is not accepted. The detection result of the sixth operation means may be accepted after the detection process of the fifth operation means is completed, or may be accepted when the pressing operation of the sixth operation means is detected. Good.

  Further, in the case of (C), when the detection of the fifth operation means and the detection of the sixth operation means are almost simultaneous, the detection may be received at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, after receiving the detection of the fifth (sixth) operation means, the sixth (fifth) operation means may be detected, or the fifth (sixth) operation means If the detection is received, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operation means may not be performed. In addition, when almost simultaneous, one may be received with priority. For example, among the pressed operation means, the detection of the operation means for producing an effect advantageous to the player may be prioritized, or the predetermined operation means may be preferentially detected.

  In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be moved to the first position by movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may be detected. In the case of (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operation means is detected, the sixth operation means may be left at the second position. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may not be detected, and the pressing operation of the sixth operation means may be detected.

  In the cases of (B) and (C) above, movement control causes the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means to be in the second position after the operation acceptance period is over. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of movement may be substantially simultaneous with the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one moving first, during operation or end of operation The other may be moved later.

  When the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation reception is completed, the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) ) May be stopped at the second position as it is. In addition, when the third (fifth) operation means and the fourth (sixth) operation means are in the second position after the operation reception period ends, the third (fifth) operation means and the fifth operation means are obtained by movement control. Only one of the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position.

  Further, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the fifth through the movement control The fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of movement may be substantially simultaneous with the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, either one moving first, during operation or end of operation The other may be moved later.

  Further, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation reception period, the third (fifth) operating means and the fifth through the movement control Only one of the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position.

  The operation reception period indicates a period for receiving the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means. For example, when the operation reception period is 6 seconds, the detection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is received for 6 seconds after the start of the operation reception, but the detection result of the operation means is not received after 6 seconds.

  In addition, special effects can be performed when the operating means at the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by movement control, or the operating means moved to the third position by movement control are pressed It may be made to be. The third position may be a position different from the first position and the second position.

  Further, the first notice and the second notice (including the advance notice) are not limited to the display of the image imitating the operation means, for example, the sound by the speaker, the light by the lamp, the movement by the movable body, the hold It includes icons, fluctuating icons, and character displays. Further, the second period is not limited to the period after reaching, and may be the period before reaching, for example, the reach announcement may be performed in the second period.

  Further, in the case where the operation means includes light emitting means for emitting light, the first state is a state in which the light emitting means is not operated and light is not emitted, and the second state is The light emitting means may be operated to emit light.

  In addition, the first effect and the second effect are not limited to the effects by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 224, and effects such as sound effects by a speaker or effects by a lamp may be performed at the same time. One, several, or all of the above may be used.

Further, the operation means is not limited to the chance buttons 700 and 760, and includes, for example, the bet buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the like of the slot machine 100 described above.
<Other Embodiments (Temporary Pause)

  Hereinafter, a game console according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 249 to FIG. In addition, in order to avoid the overlapping description, about the same content as other embodiment, suppose that the same code | symbol is attached | subjected in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 249 to 262 have priority.

Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with an operating means and a display means, and is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of display, and the plurality of types of display Is at least a first display, the first display is a display relating to the operation means, and the display means can display at least the first display in a first period of time The means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second period when the display condition is satisfied, and the second period is the first period. The game console is characterized in that the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated.
<Basic concept>

First, the basic concept of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured to have operation means and display means. The operation means is a means that can be operated at least by the player, and, for example, the above-mentioned chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball emission handle 134, etc. may be mentioned as an example. Further, the display means is a means capable of at least performing display, and for example, the above-mentioned decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps, various LEDs and the like can be mentioned as an example.
<Basic concept / display>

  Next, the display by the display means according to the present embodiment will be described. The display according to the present embodiment includes the display of the operation means image representing the operation means, the display of the elapsed time notice image for notifying (explicit or suggesting) the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and the operation means Display of an effective time notification image for notifying (explicit or suggesting) an effective time in which an operation can be accepted, display of a display mode change image whose display mode can be changed according to the operation of the operation means, and the operation means At least the display of the operation promoting image for prompting the operation, the animation display according to the operation by the operation means, the animation display regarding the operation means, and the animation display unrelated to the operation by the operation means are included. The display according to the present embodiment is configured by one, a plurality, or all of the plurality of displays, and, for example, the display of the operation means image and the display of the operation promotion image in the plurality of displays, The display etc. which were expressed by one figure are also included.

  In addition, in a game console capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, in the first effect of the plurality of types of effects, one of the displays according to the present embodiment is displayed, and among the effects of the plurality of types, In the second effect, a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment may be displayed. In addition, in a game console capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, in the first effect of the plurality of types of effects, a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment are displayed, and the first of the plurality of types of effects The second effect may be configured to display a plurality of the displays according to the present embodiment.

Here, the operation means image refers to characters, numbers, figures, etc. representing the operation means, for example, a character “chance button” representing the name of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) or The figure which imitated the appearance etc. is mentioned as an example. In addition, the elapsed time notification image is characters, numbers, figures, etc. for reporting the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, for example, characters indicating the elapsed time (for example, characters “3 seconds have passed”) Or, a meter display that indicates the elapsed time by a scale may be mentioned as an example. In addition, the effective time notification image is characters, numbers, figures, etc. for notifying of the effective time in which the operation means can accept an operation. For example, characters indicating the effective time (for example, “remaining 3 seconds”) And a meter display that represents the effective time by a scale.
<Basic Concept / Display Mode of Display>

  Next, the display mode of the display according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG. FIG. 249 and FIG. 250 are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the display according to another embodiment (the effective time is temporarily stopped). In the same figure, the image indicated by reference numeral BG is an operation means image, the image indicated by reference numeral TG is a notice image of effective time, the image indicated by reference numeral CG is a display mode change image, and reference numeral PG is , Is an operation promotion image.

  FIGS. 249 (a) to (b) show, in chronological order, an example in which the first display of the displays according to the present embodiment overlaps the second display due to a change in the display mode. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (a), the operation means image BG, the valid time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG are sequentially shifted from the top to the bottom with predetermined intervals in this order. By displaying in an empty state, display control is performed so that the display of the operation means image BG, the valid time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG do not overlap with each other. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (b) after the elapse of a predetermined time, part of the display of the effective time notification image TG is obtained by moving the display of the display mode change image CG and the operation promotion image PG upward. The display control is performed so as to overlap a part of the display of the display mode change image CG.

  The operation means image BG, the effective time notification image TG, the display mode change image CG, and the operation promotion image PG may be configured by different image data (still image data or moving image data), or one moving image. You may comprise by one part of several image data contained in image data.

  By such display control, in the present example, at least a portion of the first display (in the present example, the display of the display mode change image CG) of the displays according to the present embodiment is the second display (the present example) Then, since at least a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG is overlapped (overshadowed), a part of the second display (in this example, the display of the effective time notification image TG) is the first display In this example, the display mode change image CG is displayed as invisible (or difficult to view compared to the case without the first display) from the front. In this example, a part of the display of the display mode change image CG overlaps the part of the display of the effective time notification image TG (shows a part of the display of the effective time notification image TG). Alternatively, a part of the display of an image other than the display mode change image CG may overlap with a part of the display of an image other than the effective time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (b), display control is performed so that the operation means image BG and the display mode change image CG, and the operation means image BG and the operation promotion image PG do not overlap each other. By such display control, at least a portion of the first display (in the present example, the display mode change image CG and the operation promotion image PG) of the displays according to the present embodiment is the second display (this display) In the example, since it does not overlap with at least a part of the display of the operation means image BG, all of the second display (in this example, the display of the operation means image BG) is visible from the front. In this example, the example in which the operation means image BG does not overlap with the display of another image is shown, but an image other than the operation means BG does not overlap with the display of one or more other images You may configure it.

  Further, in FIG. 249 (c) to (e), at least a part of the first display of the displays according to the present embodiment overlaps with at least a part of the second display due to the change of the display mode. An example of non-overlapping is shown in time series. In this example, the same display as the display shown in FIG. 249 (b) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (c), but at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed By erasing the display of the change image CG, all of the valid time notification image TG can be viewed from the front. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (e) after the elapse of a predetermined time, the same display as the display shown in FIG. 249 (c) is performed again, and thereafter, the display shown in FIG. Repeat the display shown in).

  Thus, at least a part of the first display (in the present example, the display of the display mode change image CG) of the displays according to the present embodiment is the second display (in the present example, the effective time notification image TG Control of the display (for example, displaying or erasing the second display) so as to overlap or not overlap at least a part of the display of the first display with the second display At timings that do not overlap, the second display may be visible from the front, and the rendering effect may be enhanced.

  Further, FIGS. 249 (f) to (h) start the second display at the second timing after the first display of the displays according to the present embodiment is started at the first timing. An example in which only the second display is erased at the third timing is shown in time series. Specifically, the first display (in this example, the display of the operation means image BG) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (f), and at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (g) after a predetermined time has elapsed. , The second display (in the present example, the display of the effective time notification image TG), and further, at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (h) after the elapse of the predetermined time, the second display (in the present example, the effective Only the display of the time notification image TG is deleted. If such display control is performed, the display time of the first display and the second display can be appropriately adjusted depending on the display content, and in some cases, it may be possible to perform display that is easier to understand than in the past.

  Further, FIG. 249 (i) to FIG. 249 (m) are diagrams showing specific examples of the display according to the present embodiment in time series. The figure imitating the appearance of the button in the same figure shows an example of the operation means image BG, and the characters "* (the part with a numeral is in the part of *) body destruction" shows an example of the display mode change image CG, The letters “PUSH !!” and “bumps !!” and the downward arrow graphic show an example of the operation promotion image PG, and the graphic of the meter and “the remaining * seconds (numbers are in the part of *)” The characters indicate an example of the valid time notification image TG.

  In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (i), after the graphic of the meter of the effective time notification image TG is displayed immediately below the operation means image BG (approximately in the center of the display area), a diagram after a predetermined time has elapsed. After the timing shown in 249 (j), the characters “remaining * seconds (numbers enter the part of *)” of the valid time notification image TG are displayed on the upper right (upper right corner of the display area) of the operation means image BG By doing this, the display mode of the effective time notification image TG is changed, and the display position of the effective time notification image TG is also changed. As described above, when the display mode and the display position of the display according to the present embodiment are changed, the player's attention can be drawn to the display in which the display mode and the display position are changed. You may be able to increase

  Moreover, FIG. 250 (a)-the same figure (c), and FIG. 250 (d)-the same figure (f) respectively show the first display and the second display in the display according to the present embodiment. In addition, after controlling the display such that the third display overlaps the second display, the example in which the first display and the second display are erased is shown in time series.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 250 (a) to 250 (c), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (valid time) at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (a) FIG. 250 after the elapse of the first time after the display of the notification image TG) and the control of the display such that the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) overlaps the second display; At the timing shown in (b), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are erased. Therefore, in this example, at the timings shown in FIGS. 250 (b) and 250 (c), the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) displays the first display (display of the operation means image BG), The visibility of the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) is not disturbed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250 (d) to FIG. 250 (f), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (effective time notification image TG) at the timing shown in FIG. After the display control is performed so that the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) overlaps the second display, the second time elapses longer than the first time. The first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) are erased at timing shown in FIG. 250 (f) later. Therefore, in the present example, at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (e), a part of the second display (effective time notification image TG) is viewed from the front by the third display (display of the display mode change image CG). It becomes impossible (or, as compared with the case where there is no third indication, it is difficult to see).

  Also, FIGS. 250 (g) and (h) and FIGS. 250 (i) and (j) respectively indicate the first display and the second display of the displays according to the present embodiment. The example which performs three displays is shown in time series. Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (g) and (h), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (effective time notification image) at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (g) After the display of the TG, the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (the effective time notification image TG) at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (h) after the third time has elapsed. The display is erased. Therefore, at the same timing, the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) causes the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) to be viewed. Sex is not inhibited.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 250 (i) and (j), the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) at the timing shown in FIG. ), And the first display (display of the operation means image BG) and the second display (effective time) also at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (j) after the elapse of the fourth time which is longer than the third time. The display of the notification image TG is continued. Therefore, at the same timing, a part of the second display (display of the effective time notification image TG) can not be viewed from the front by the third display (display of the display mode change image CG) (or the third display Compared to the case where there is no
<Display control in button effect>

  Next, display control in the button effect according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, “button effect” according to the present embodiment is, for example, as shown in FIG. 251 (b), displaying a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 as the display of the operation means image BG described above. As a display of the above-mentioned effective time notification image TG, display of a figure of a meter which represents the remaining time of the effective time which can receive the operation of the chance button 136 by a scale is performed as a display of the above-mentioned operation promotion image PG, It is an effect of displaying the characters "PUSH" and performing the first display as the above-described display mode change image CG. The button effect is not limited to this example, and may be configured by one or more of the plurality of displays.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is constituted by the control unit shown in FIG. 135. Specifically, the main control unit 300 performing control processing of the entire game and the processing generated by the main control unit 300 It has a first sub control unit 400 that performs control processing relating to effects based on information, and a second sub control unit 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400. There is. In the following description, the first sub control unit 400 may be referred to as a “sub control unit”, and control by the first sub control unit 400 may be referred to as “sub control”. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 may be referred to as a “liquid crystal control unit”, and the control by the second sub control unit 500 may be referred to as a “liquid crystal control”.

Further, “operation” shown in the following drawings indicates the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), and the thick thick line indicates that the operation has been performed. In addition, “effective time” shown in the drawing indicates the remaining time (seconds) of the effective time of the chance button 136 by numbers. Further, “active state” shown in the drawing indicates whether the operation of the chance button 136 is active (operation acceptable state) or invalid state (operation unacceptable state), and the underline is invalid. State, the overline indicates a valid state. Also, “liquid crystal control” and “sub control” shown in the drawings are as described above, and arrows shown in the drawings indicate transmission or reception of various commands.
<Display control / no operation in button effects>

  FIG. 251 (a) shows an example of the button effect when there is no operation of the chance button 136 during the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series.

  At the timing shown by T1 in FIG. 251 (a), the sub-control unit switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state, and the valid time of the chance button 136 (5 seconds in this example, and so on) The countdown (counting) of has started. Further, the sub control unit transmits a button effect start command instructing the start of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit, and the liquid crystal control unit having received the button effect start command starts the button effect. The button effect start command includes time information indicating the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 at the time of command transmission, and image data of an image to be displayed in the button effect (in this example, the operation means image BG , An effective time notification image TG, and image data of the operation promotion image PG).

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the button effect start command displays the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) as the button effect and the remaining time notification image TG (the remaining time of the remaining time of the chance button 136). The display of a meter representing time with a scale and the operation prompting image PG (display of characters “PUSH”) are performed. Also, after the LCD controller starts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136, every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) One display to reduce.

  In addition, the sub control unit continues counting down the effective time of the chance button 136, and ends the button effect for the liquid crystal control unit at the timing shown by T2 in FIG. 251 (a) when the effective time becomes 0. The button effect end command to indicate is sent. The liquid crystal control unit that has received this button effect end command erases the display of the operation promotion image PG first, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, erases the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG. , Button production has ended.

The sub control unit transmits a button acceptance command notifying that the operation of the chance button 136 has been received to the liquid crystal control unit when the chance button 136 is operated during the effective time of the chance button 136. However, in this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the effective time of the chance button 136, the sub control unit does not transmit a button acceptance command.
<Example of button effect of display control / single operation in button effect>

  FIG. 251 (b) shows an example of button effects on a game console which can receive an operation of the chance button 136 only once during the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted only once during the effective time of the chance button 136, and when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, the display mode change image CG is displayed. ing.

  The sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 of FIG. 251 (b), and the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 has reached a predetermined number (one in this example). The valid time of the button 136 is initialized to 0, and a button acceptance command including time information of valid time 0 seconds is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of the effective time of 0 seconds erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG, and As the display, the first display is displayed, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect is ended by deleting the first display.

  Although the sub control unit is configured to transmit a button acceptance command to the liquid crystal control unit when the chance button 136 is operated during the effective time of the chance button 136, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. When there is an event, the button reception command is sent unconditionally (regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is active), and the liquid crystal control unit It may be determined whether or not there is any, and the corresponding display may be performed only during the effective period.

In the following, the game console is capable of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 multiple times during the effective time of the chance button 136, and is capable of displaying the display mode change image CG each time the operation of the chance button 136 is received. explain. In the button effect, the sub control unit mainly manages the effective time of the chance button 136 and the liquid crystal control unit mainly manages the effective time of the chance button 136.
<When the display control / sub-control unit in the button effect manages the effective time>

  When the sub control unit manages the effective time, counting (subtraction, addition, etc.) of the effective time counter used for managing the effective time in the first secondary control unit main processing (approximately 33 ms cycle timer interrupt processing) I do. The counting of the valid time counter may be performed each time the first sub control unit main process is executed once, or may be performed each time the first sub control unit main process is executed a plurality of times. Also, the process of temporarily stopping the effective time of the operation means may be realized by not counting the effective time counter (by skipping the counting process), the counting of the effective time counter continues, and the effective time counter It may be realized by not performing the process of determining whether or not the predetermined number is reached.

  In addition, when the effective time of the operation means is temporarily stopped, the count of the effective time release counter used for canceling the suspension of the effective time in the first secondary control unit main process (timer interrupt process of about 33 ms cycle) Subtraction, addition, and the like may be performed.

  <Example 1 of button effect when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 251 (c) shows, in chronological order, button presentation example 1 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3, but since the operation of the chance button 136 can be received multiple times during the effective time of the chance button 136, the chance button While continuing the countdown of the effective time of 136, the button acceptance command including the time information of the effective time of 3 seconds is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds continues without erasing the display of the operation promoting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. The display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the first display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the liquid crystal control unit continues the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 even while displaying and erasing the first display, and the effective time is reduced every predetermined time (one second). The display of reducing the scale of the notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is continued.

  In addition, the sub control unit transmits a button effect end command to the liquid crystal control unit at the timing indicated by T4 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control unit having received the button effect end command First, the display of the operation promotion image PG is erased, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG are erased to end the button effect.

  <Example of button effect 2 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 252 (a) shows a button effect example 2 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, every time the sub-control unit receives an operation of the chance button 136, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is suspended to hold the current effective time, and the liquid crystal control unit A button acceptance command including time information of 136 effective times and pause information for suspending the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is transmitted, and a button including time information of the effective times and information of the pause The liquid crystal control unit having received the reception command temporarily suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136.

  In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 to count down the effective time, and the information on the effective time after the countdown to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit transmits a button acceptance command including pause release information for resuming the countdown of the valid time and receives the button acceptance command including the pause release information, the valid time of the chance button 136 Resume the countdown.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 252 (a), the sub control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and stops the current valid time (3 seconds). ), And transmits to the liquid crystal control unit a button acceptance command including time information of 3 seconds of effective time and information of pause for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 .

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of 3 seconds and the pause information continues without erasing the display of the operation promoting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. , And displays the first display (display of the display mode change image CG) so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but temporarily counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 Since the display has been interrupted, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is not performed. As a result, the period in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) indicates 3 seconds is longer than the example shown in FIG. 251 (c).

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts counting down the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 to count down the valid time (3 seconds → 2 seconds), and causes the liquid crystal control unit to count down. A button reception command including information of valid time (2 seconds) and information of pause release for resuming the countdown of valid time is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of the effective time 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and the effective time notification image is displayed each time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second). Continue to reduce the scale of TG (the figure of the meter) by one. In addition, the sub control unit transmits a command instructing the end of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit at timing indicated by T4 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control receives this command. The unit first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, erases the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG, thereby ending the button effect.

  <Example of button effect 3 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 252 (b) shows a button effect example 3 in the case of the sub control unit managing the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the sub-control unit resumes the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown at T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. 252A and counts down the effective time (3 seconds → 2 seconds). While performing, the button reception command including the information of the effective time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the pause release to restart the countdown of the effective time is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the command including the time information of the effective time 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and the effective time notification image TG (the effective time is decreased by a predetermined time (1 second)). The display of reducing the scale of the figure of the meter by one is continued. In addition, the sub control unit transmits a command instructing the end of the button effect to the liquid crystal control unit at timing indicated by T6 when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the liquid crystal control receives this command. The unit first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, erases the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG, thereby ending the button effect.

  In this example, since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is resumed at the timing shown at T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. 252 (a), the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) is 3 The period indicating seconds is longer than the example shown in FIG. 252 (a).

  <Example 4 of button effect when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 252C shows a button effect example 4 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, every time the sub control unit receives an operation on the chance button 136, the countdown is temporarily stopped after counting down the effective time of the chance button 136, and the liquid crystal control unit pauses the effective time after the countdown. And a pause information for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and a button acceptance command is transmitted.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2 and counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 (3 seconds.fwdarw.2 seconds). The button acceptance command including the time information of the effective time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the temporary stop for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 to the liquid crystal control unit Send

  The liquid crystal control unit that has received the button acceptance command including the time information of 2 seconds and the pause information continues without erasing the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the expiration time notification image TG. , And the first display (display of the display mode change image CG) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the time information of the effective time 2 seconds is received The display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is performed.

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit restarts counting down the valid time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T7 to count down the valid time, and sends the liquid crystal control unit a countdown valid time (1 second). A button acceptance command including information and information on pause release for restarting the countdown of the valid time is transmitted.

  In this example, the liquid crystal control unit pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 until receiving the button acceptance command from the sub control unit, and executes the countdown of the effective time before the pause. The period in which the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) indicates 2 seconds is longer than the example shown in FIG. 251 (c).

  <Example 5 of button effect when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 253A shows, in chronological order, button presentation example 5 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the sub-control unit resumes the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown at T3 earlier than T5 shown in FIG. 252 (b) and counts down the effective time (3 seconds.fwdarw.2 seconds). While performing, the button reception command including the information of the effective time (2 seconds) after the countdown and the information of the pause release to restart the countdown of the effective time is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the command including the time information of the effective time 2 seconds is executing the button effect corresponding to the effective time 3 seconds, so the button effect corresponding to the effective time 3 seconds is completed until the end continuing. Then, after the button effect corresponding to the effective time 3 seconds is completed to the end, the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is resumed, and the effective time notification image TG (meter The figure of (1) is continued to be reduced by one.

  In this example, since the timing of the countdown of the effective time in the sub control unit is not the timing of the countdown of the effective time in the liquid crystal control unit, the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to 1 second of the effective time. Even if there is, the effective time in the sub control unit may be 0 seconds, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be in an invalid state. For this reason, even when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second, the display according to the operation may not be performed.

  <Example of button effect 6 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 253 (b) shows a button effect example 6 in the case where the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, when the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, the sub-control unit does not temporarily stop the count-down of the effective time of the chance button 136. In this example, the button reception command including the information of 3 seconds is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of 3 seconds of effective time and the information of pause, continues without erasing the display of the operation promoting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG. , And displays the first display (display of the display mode change image CG) so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but temporarily counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 Because the display was interrupted, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is not performed.

  In addition, the sub control unit transmits a button acceptance command including information on the effective time after the countdown (1 second in this example) to the liquid crystal control unit at a timing indicated by T4, and the liquid crystal control receives the command The section adjusts the effective time of the chance button 136 based on the information of the effective time included in the command, and performs a button effect corresponding to 1 second of the effective time. The sub control unit does not transmit a button acceptance command including information on the effective time to the liquid crystal control unit at the same timing, and the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 by itself. It may be configured.

  <Example 7 of button effect when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 254 (a) shows an example button effect 7 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, every time the sub-control unit receives an operation on the chance button 136, it suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 and holds the current effective time, and disables the acceptance of the chance button 136 , And transmits to the liquid crystal control unit a button acceptance command including time information of the effective time of the chance button 136 and information of pause for temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of the effective time and the information of the pause temporarily suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136.

  Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub control unit restarts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136 to count down the effective time, and enables reception of the chance button 136 and enables the liquid crystal to A button acceptance command including information on effective time after countdown and information on pause release to restart countdown on effective time is transmitted to the control unit, and a button acceptance command including information on this pause release is The received liquid crystal control unit resumes the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 254 (a), the sub-control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, suspends the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136, and stops the current valid time (3 seconds). ) And temporarily stop the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 for the liquid crystal control unit, while keeping the acceptance of the chance button 136 in an invalid state. Send a button acceptance command including information.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of 3 seconds and the pause information continues without erasing the display of the operation promoting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG. , And displays the first display (display of the display mode change image CG) so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but temporarily counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 Since the display has been interrupted, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is not performed.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the acceptance of the chance button 136 is disabled, the detection of the chance button 136 may be ignored, and the detection of the chance button 136 is performed. Alternatively, the button reception command may not be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit. Also, the sub control unit detects the chance button 136 and transmits a button acceptance command to the liquid crystal control unit, but the liquid crystal control unit may be configured not to execute processing corresponding to the button acceptance command. Good.

  Subsequently, the sub-control unit resumes the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T3 on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the predetermined time has elapsed after acceptance of the chance button 136). The countdown of the effective time and the acceptance of the chance button 136 are enabled, and the information of the effective time (2 seconds in this example) after the countdown and the countdown of the effective time are made to the liquid crystal control unit. The button acceptance command including the information of the pause release to be resumed is transmitted.

  The liquid crystal control unit having received the command including the time information of the effective time 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and the effective time notification image TG (the effective time is decreased by a predetermined time (1 second)). Continue to reduce the scale of the figure of the meter by one.

  In this example, the acceptance of the chance button 136 is inactivated during the period from T2 to T3, but the illumination of the chance button lamp 138 may be continued during the period, or over the period. The chance button lamp 138 may be turned off. Further, when turning off the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG in the button effect may be erased, or these displays may be continued. Good.

  <Example of button effect 8 when display control / sub-control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 254 (b) shows an example button effect 8 when the sub control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, even when the sub control unit receives an operation on the chance button 136, the time for the effective time of the chance button 136 to the liquid crystal control unit without temporarily stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 Send a button acceptance command containing information.

  The sub control unit accepts the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T2, but continues without stopping the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 without suspending the effective time (3 seconds for the liquid crystal control unit). Send a button acceptance command including time information of).

The liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command including the time information of the valid time of 3 seconds continues without erasing the display of the operation promoting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG, and the second display While displaying (display of the display mode change image CG) so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) is reduced by one. The display is done.
<When the display control in the button effect / liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time>

  Next, the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time will be described. When the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time, counting (subtraction, addition, etc.) of the effective time counter used for managing the effective time in the second sub control unit main process (approximately 33 ms cycle timer interrupt process) I do. The counting of the valid time counter may be performed each time the second sub control unit main process is executed once, or may be performed each time the second sub control unit main process is executed a plurality of times. Also, the process of temporarily stopping the effective time of the operation means may be realized by not counting the effective time counter (by skipping the counting process), the counting of the effective time counter continues, and the effective time counter It may be realized by not performing the process of determining whether or not the predetermined number is reached.

  In addition, when the effective time of the operation means is temporarily stopped, the count of the effective time release counter used for canceling the suspension of the effective time in the second secondary control unit main process (timer interrupt process of about 33 ms cycle) ( Subtraction, addition, and the like may be performed.

  <Example of button effect 1 when display control / liquid crystal control unit manages effective time in button effect>

  FIG. 255 (a) shows a button effect example 1 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. At the timing indicated by T1 in FIG. 255 (a), the liquid crystal control unit starts the button effect and starts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit transmits, to the sub control unit, a button valid command instructing to switch the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state. The sub control unit that has received the button valid command switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the invalid state to the valid state, and starts processing for lighting the chance button lamp 138 and the like. The button valid command at least includes time information indicating the valid time of the chance button 136 (in the present example, information indicating 5 seconds).

  In this example, the liquid crystal control unit displays a display of the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the chance button 136) as a button effect, and a meter for indicating the remaining time of the valid time of the chance button 136 (the chance time of the chance button 136). And the operation prompting image PG (display of characters "PUSH"). Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit starts counting down the effective time of the chance button 136 (5 seconds in this example), and then, every time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), the effective time notification image TG ( Make a display that reduces the scale of the meter figure by one.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit invalidates the operation of the chance button 136 from the valid state to the sub control unit at the timing shown by T2 in FIG. 255 (a) when the valid time of the chance button 136 becomes 0. While transmitting the button invalid command instructing switching to the state, the display of the operation promotion image PG is first erased, and the display of the operation means image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG are erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. The button effect is finished. In addition, the sub control unit that has received the button invalid command switches the operation of the chance button 136 from the valid state to the invalid state.

  If the effective time of the operation means is managed by the liquid crystal control unit as in this example, the control burden on the sub control unit can be reduced, and stable game control may be realized in some cases.

  <Example of button effect 2 when display control / liquid crystal control unit manages effective time in button effect>

  FIG. 255 (b) shows a button effect example 2 in the case of the liquid crystal control unit managing the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted only once during the effective time of the chance button 136, and when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, the display according to the operation (display of the display mode change image CG Is configured to do).

  The sub control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 of FIG. 255 (b), and transmits a button acceptance command to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit having received this button acceptance command initializes the effective time of the chance button 136 to 0 since the number of times of operating the chance button 136 has reached a predetermined number (one in this example). A command notifying that the button reception command has been received is transmitted to the sub control unit. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command erases the display of the operation prompting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG and, at the same time, displays the first display as the display mode change image CG. The effect is ended by displaying and deleting the first display after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  <Example of button effect 3 when display control / liquid crystal control unit manages effective time in button effect>

  FIG. 255C shows a button effect example 3 in the case of the liquid crystal control unit managing the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the sub-control unit receives the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing indicated by T3 in FIG. 255C, and transmits a button acceptance command to the liquid crystal control unit. The liquid crystal control unit that has received this button acceptance command continues to count down the effective time of the chance button 136 since it can receive the operation of the chance button 136 multiple times during the effective time of the chance button 136 and also performs sub control A response command notifying that the button reception command has been received is sent to the unit.

  In addition, the liquid crystal control unit having received the button acceptance command continues without erasing the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG, and continues the first display (display mode change image CG Is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation promotion image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and the first display is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit continues the countdown of the effective time (5 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 even while displaying and erasing the first display, and the effective time is a predetermined time (this example). Then, every time it decreases by one second, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is continued.

  <Example 4 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 256 (a) shows a button effect example 4 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the liquid crystal control unit suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 every time it receives a button acceptance command from the sub control unit and holds the current effective time, and Sends a pause command including time information of the effective time of the chance button 136 and pause information for suspending the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 to the section, and the time information of this effective time The sub-control unit that has received the pause command including the pause information temporarily suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136. In addition, the sub control unit may turn off the chance button lamp 138 on condition that the temporary stop command is received.

  Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 to count down the effective time, and the information of the effective time after the countdown to the sub control unit. The sub control unit that has sent the pause release command including the pause release information to resume the countdown of the effective time and received the pause release command including the pause release information is the chance button 136 Resume the countdown of effective time. Further, the sub control unit may turn on the chance button lamp 138 when the chance button lamp 138 is turned off on condition that the pause cancel command is received.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (a), the liquid crystal control unit pauses the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 on condition that the button reception command is received from the sub control unit at the timing shown in T2. A temporary hold that holds the current valid time (3 seconds) and includes, for the sub control unit, time information of valid time 3 seconds and pause information for temporarily stopping the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 Send a stop command.

  The sub-control unit that has received the pause command including the time information of 3 seconds of valid time and the information of pause, suspends the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and holds the current valid time (3 seconds) , Chance button lamp 138 is off.

  The liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing the display, and performs the first display (display of the display mode change image CG). Although a part of the image PG and a part of the operation means image BG are displayed so as to overlap, since the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily interrupted, the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) There is no indication to reduce one.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T3 to count down the effective time, and the subcontrol unit performs the countdown effective time (2 in this example). A pause release command including information on the second) and information on pause release for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted. The sub control unit having received the pause cancel command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 and turns on the chance button lamp 138.

  The liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and each time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), one tick mark of the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) Continue to reduce the display. Further, the liquid crystal control unit first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG at the timing shown by T4 in FIG. 256 (a) when the effective time of the chance button 136 becomes 0, and the operation is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The button effect is ended by deleting the display of the measure image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG.

  <Example 5 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 256 (b) shows a button effect example 5 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown at T5 later than T3 shown in FIG. On the other hand, a pause release command including information on the valid time (2 seconds in this example) after the countdown and information on pause release for restarting the countdown on the valid time is transmitted. The sub control unit having received the pause cancel command including the time information of the effective time of 2 seconds restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 and turns on the chance button lamp 138.

  The liquid crystal control unit restarts the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136, and each time the effective time decreases by a predetermined time (1 second in this example), one tick mark of the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) Continue to reduce the display. Further, the liquid crystal control unit first erases the display of the operation promotion image PG at the timing shown by T6 in FIG. 256 (b) when the effective time of the chance button 136 has become 0, and operates after a predetermined time has elapsed. The button effect is ended by deleting the display of the measure image BG and the display of the effective time notification image TG.

  <Example of button effect 6 when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 256 (c) shows a button effect example 6 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the liquid crystal control unit counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 every time the liquid crystal control unit receives a button acceptance command from the sub control unit, and then temporarily stops the countdown. It is configured to send a pause command including time information of the effective time after the countdown and information of pause to pause the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (c), the liquid crystal control unit receives a button acceptance command from the sub control unit at the timing shown in T2, and counts down the effective time of the chance button 136 (3 seconds in this example). Pauses the countdown temporarily, and also includes, to the sub control unit, time information of 2 seconds of effective time after the countdown and information of pause to suspend the countdown of effective time of the chance button 136 Send a command

  The sub control unit that has received the pause command including the time information of 2 seconds of valid time and the information of pause, pauses the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 and holds the current valid time (3 seconds) , Chance button lamp 138 is off.

  The liquid crystal control unit continues the display of the operation promotion image PG, the operation means image BG, and the effective time notification image TG without erasing the display, and performs the first display (display of the display mode change image CG). Displayed so as to overlap a part of the image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, and reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter) by 1 since the time information of the effective time 2 seconds was received It is carried out.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control unit resumes the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in T7 to count down the effective time, and the subcontrol unit performs the countdown effective time (1 in this example). A pause release command including information on the second) and information on pause release for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted. Since the liquid crystal control unit suspends the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 until receiving the button reception command, and executes the countdown of the effective time before the temporary stop, the effective time notification image The period in which the scale of TG (the figure of the meter) represents 2 seconds is longer than the example shown in FIGS. 256 (a) and (b). The subsequent display control is the same as the example shown in FIG. 256 (b).

  <Example 7 of button effect when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 257 (a) shows a button effect example 7 when the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In this example, the liquid crystal control unit resumes the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 at the timing shown at T3 earlier than T5 shown in FIG. On the other hand, a pause command including information on the valid time (2 seconds in this example) after the countdown and information on pause release for resuming the countdown of the valid time is transmitted.

  However, in this example, since the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to the valid time of 3 seconds, after the button effect is finished, the countdown of the valid time of the chance button 136 is resumed, and the valid time is valid. Every time the predetermined time (one second in this example) decreases, the display of reducing the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one is continued.

  In this example, since the timing of the countdown of the effective time in the sub control unit is not the timing of the countdown of the effective time in the liquid crystal control unit, the liquid crystal control unit is executing the button effect corresponding to 1 second of the effective time. Even if there is, the effective time in the sub control unit may be 0 seconds, and the operation of the chance button 136 may be in an invalid state. For this reason, even when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during execution of the button effect corresponding to the effective time of 1 second, the display according to the operation may not be performed.

  <Example of button effect 8 when display control / liquid crystal control unit in button effect manages effective time>

  FIG. 257 (b) shows a button effect example 8 in the case where the liquid crystal control unit manages the effective time of the chance button 136 in time series. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the sub control unit is configured not to temporarily stop the countdown of the effective time of the chance button 136 when receiving a temporary stop command from the liquid crystal control unit. In addition, the liquid crystal control unit that has transmitted the pause command continues the display of the operation prompting image PG, the operation means image BG, and the valid time notification image TG without erasing the first display (display mode change image CG Is displayed so as to overlap a part of the operation prompting image PG and a part of the operation means image BG, but the counting-down of the effective time of the chance button 136 is temporarily interrupted. The display of reducing the scale of the figure of the meter by 1 is not performed.

Further, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a button reception command including information of the effective time (1 second in this example) to the sub control unit at a timing shown by T4 in FIG. 257 (b), and receives the command. The sub-control unit adjusts the effective time of the chance button 136 based on the information of the effective time included in the command.
<Specific example 1 of button effect>

  Next, a specific example of the button effect will be described. FIG. 258 (a-1) to (a-6) are diagrams showing a specific example 1 of the button effect in time series. Note that each display in the drawing is a part of the display of the button effect made up of a moving image, and the time intervals of the displays do not necessarily coincide (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In the first specific example, a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (a-1) as the display of the operation means image BG, and the display of the effective time notification image TG is performed at the timing shown in FIG. By displaying the figure of the meter that represents the remaining time of the effective time that can receive the operation with a scale and displaying the character "PUSH !!" as the display of the operation promotion image PG, the button effect is started ing.

  Also, in the periods shown in FIGS. 258 (a-1) to (a-5), the effective time of the chance button 136 is counted down, and the effective time of the chance button 136 is decreased by a predetermined time (1 second in this example). The button effect is continued by performing display to reduce the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by one each time.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (a-6), since the effective time of the chance button 136 has become 0, the display of the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), effective time notification image The display of the TG (graphic of the meter) and the display of the operation promotion image PG (characters of “PUSH !!”) are all erased, and the button effect is ended.
<Specific examples 2 to 4 of button effects>

  258 (b-1) to (b-6) are diagrams showing Example 2 of the button effect in time series, and FIGS. 258 (c-1) to (c-6) are examples of the button effect FIG. 259 (a-1) to (a-6) are diagrams showing Example 3 in chronological order, and FIGS. 259 (a-1) to (a-6) are diagrams showing practical example 4 of button effect in chronological order. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, the description of the same content as that of the specific example 1 is omitted (the same applies to the following specific examples).

  In the second specific example shown in FIGS. 258 (b-1) to (b-6), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (b-1). -3) The cut-in display is performed in the period shown to-3-(b-4). In this cut-in display, the display of the operation means image BG (the figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the display of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter), and the characters of the operation promotion image PG ("PUSH !!" Since the moving image is displayed so as to cover all the display of), the player can not visually recognize the button effect during the cut-in display period (in the present example, in the middle of the button effect). In the case where the cut-in display is configured of a semitransparent image or the like, the display of the operation means image BG, the display of the effective time notification image TG, and the display of the operation promotion image PG can be viewed by the player. As compared with the case where the display is not covered by the cut-in display, the visual recognition becomes difficult.

  Further, in the specific example 3 shown in FIGS. 258 (c-1) to (c-3), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. The cut-in display is performed in the periods shown in (c-1) to (c-2). In this cut-in display, the display of the operation means image BG (the figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the display of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter), and the characters of the operation promotion image PG ("PUSH !!" Since the moving image is displayed so as to cover all of the display of), the player can not visually recognize the button effect during the cut-in display period (in this example, the beginning of the button effect).

  Further, in the fourth specific example shown in FIGS. 259 (a-1) to (a-5), the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. The cut-in display is performed in a period shown in a-3) to (a-4) (a period longer than a period shown in FIG. 258 (b-3) to (b-4) of specific example 2). In this cut-in display, the display of the operation means image BG (the figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the display of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter), and the characters of the operation promotion image PG ("PUSH !!" Since the moving image is displayed so as to cover all of the display of), the player is in the period of the cut-in display (in the present example, during the button effect and during a longer period than the specific example 2) Can not see the button effect.

  The cut-in display is not limited to the examples shown in the specific examples 2 to 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the display of the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) And the operation prompting image PG (the characters “PUSH !!”) may be covered, but a moving image may be displayed that does not cover the display of the effective time notifying image TG (the figure of the meter). With such a configuration, the player can confirm the effective time of the operation means while enjoying the cut-in display.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 259 (c-1) and (c-2), the operation means image BG (a figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136) in a display area not overlapping with the moving image of the cut-in display. , The display of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter), and the display of the operation prompting image PG (characters of "PUSH !!") may all be moved. With such a configuration, the player can grasp the information on the operation means by the button effect while enjoying the cut-in display.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 259 (d), cut-in display may be performed using all the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208, or as shown in FIG. 259 (e), the effective time As the notification image TG, a display mode in which the effective time is displayed in characters may be applied instead of the graphic of the meter. Further, the effective time may be displayed as characters in the display area (visible to the player) which is not obscured by the cut-in display.
<Specific example 5 of button effect>

  FIGS. 260A-1 to 260A-6 are diagrams showing a fifth example of button effects in time series. In the fifth example, a plurality of button effects are performed corresponding to a plurality of operation means, and in the button effect corresponding to the specific operation means, the effective time is counted down, and the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) In the button effect corresponding to the other operation means, the countdown of the effective time is paused and the display of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) is not reduced while the reduction display is being performed. Control the

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (a), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first button effect corresponding to the first operation means is started. In the central display area, the second button effect corresponding to the second operation means is started, and in the display area on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third button effect corresponding to the third operation means is started doing.

  In each of the first to third button effects, a graphic imitating the appearance of each operation means is displayed as the display of the operation means images BG1 to 3 and the display of the effective time notification images TG1 to 3 is performed. The figure of the meter which displays the remaining time of the effective time which receives operation of the operation means with a scale is displayed, and the display of the character "PUSH !!" is performed as a display of the operation promotion images PG1 to PG3.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (b), the first to third button effects perform countdown of the effective time (8 seconds → 6 seconds), and tick marks of effective time notification images TG1 to 3 (figure of meter) In the first button effect, during the period up to FIG. 260 (c), the countdown of the effective time (6 seconds → 0 seconds) is continued, and the informing image TG1 (effective time) is displayed. While the display of reducing the scale of the meter figure) is continued every second, in the second and third button effects, the countdown of the effective time is paused, and the effective time notification images TG2, TG3 (figures of the meter) Control the display so as not to reduce the scale of).

  Also, during the period shown in FIG. 260 (d) to FIG. 260 (f), with the state in which the countdown of the effective time in the second and third button effects is temporarily stopped, the timing shown in FIG. The first button effect is finished, and at the timing shown in (e) of the figure, the cut-in display is performed in a state in which the graduations of the effective time notification images TG2 and TG3 (figures of the meter) are visible. At the timing shown in), the cut-in display is finished, and the countdown of the effective time of each operation means is resumed in the second and third button effects.

  Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (g), the second and third button effects perform countdown of the effective time (6 seconds → 4 seconds), and tick marks of effective time notification images TG2 and TG3 (figure of meter) In the second button effect, the countdown of the effective time (4 seconds → 0 seconds) is continued during the period up to FIG. 260 (h). In the third button effect, the countdown of the effective time is paused and the scale of the effective time notification image TG3 (figure of the meter) is reduced while the display of reducing the scale of the meter figure) is continued every second. Control the display so as not to.

  Also, during the period shown in FIG. 260 (i) to FIG. 260 (m), while the state in which the countdown of the effective time in the third button effect is paused is maintained, the second shown in FIG. At the timing shown in the figure (j), the cut-in display is performed in a state where the scale of the effective time notification image TG3 (figure of the meter) can be visually recognized, and the timing shown in the figure (k). While the cut-in display is ended, the countdown of the effective time of the operation means is resumed in the third button effect, and the third button effect is ended at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (n).

  In addition, the display of the period which has stopped the countdown of effective time is not limited to the example shown in the specific example 5, For example, as shown to FIG. 261 (a-1)-(a-2), operation Display mode of the display of the means image BG (figure imitating the appearance of the chance button 136), the display of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter), and the display of the operation promotion image PG (characters of "PUSH !!" Color, brightness, color tone, etc.) may be changed. Further, even when the display mode is changed, the chance button 136 may be kept on, or the chance button 136 may be turned off according to the change of the display mode. Further, the lighting color of the chance button 136 may be changed according to the change of the display mode, or the lighting mode of the chance button 136 may be changed such as blinking by repeating lighting and extinguishing.

Further, in accordance with the change of the display mode, the acceptance of the operation means may be changed from the valid state to the invalid state, or the valid state may be maintained. Also, as shown in FIGS. 261 (b-1) to (b-5), in the state where the countdown of the effective time is temporarily stopped in the button effect (the graduation of the effective time notification image TG (figure of the meter remains) In the state), the button effect may be ended.
<Specific example 6 of button effect>

  FIG. 262 is a diagram illustrating a specific example 6 of the button effect in chronological order. In this specific example 6, when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when a big hit is won), a specific character (for example, a character appearing in an effect to be executed during a big hit game) is selected from a plurality of characters. In a possible game stand, while the animation for selecting a character is being executed, the countdown of the effective time of the operation means is paused and the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) is not reduced. Control the display.

  Note that, while the animation for selecting a character is being executed, the counting down of the effective time of the operation means is not paused, and is paused while the animation is not being executed. It is also good. In addition, the countdown of the effective time of the operation means may be paused during at least a part of the period during which the animation for selecting a character is being performed.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (a), a character select effect for causing the player to select a character is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (c), a button effect is started during the character select effect doing. In the button effect of this example, a graphic imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as the display of the operation means image BG, and the remaining time of the effective time to receive the operation of the chance button 136 as the display of the informing image TG. Is displayed, and the characters “PUSH !!” and “Press the button to select a character!” Are displayed as the display of the operation promotion image PG.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (d), in the button effect, the countdown of the effective time (from 8 seconds to 6 seconds) is performed and display is performed to reduce the scale of the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter) by two. During the execution of the animation in which the player switches the selectable character from the character C1 to the character C2 on the basis of having received the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. (During the period of (f) to (i) of the figure, in the button effect, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled and the countdown of the effective time is paused, and the effective time notification image TG (figure of meter Control the display so as not to reduce the scale of).

  Also, during the period between (i) and (j) in the figure, the animation for switching the character selectable by the player from the character C1 of the lord to the character C2 of the wolf is ended, and in the button effect, the chance button The operation 136 is activated to count down the effective time (from 6 seconds to 4 seconds), and display is made to reduce the scale of the effective time notification image TG (the figure of the meter) by two. In this example, although the effect of selecting a character has been described, for example, the effect may be temporarily suspended also in an effect of selecting a song or sound effect to be output during a big hit game, In the effect, the effective time may be suspended only for the effect for selecting the character without temporarily stopping the effective time.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball emission handle 134, etc.) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps , A variety of LEDs, etc., and displays a plurality of types of display (for example, display of operation means image, display of notification image of elapsed time, display of display display mode change image of notification image of effective time, operation) It is a means capable of displaying at least a display of a promotion image, an animation display according to an operation by the operation means, an animation display regarding the operation means, etc., and at least one of the plurality of types of display , The meter display, which is one of the display of the effective time notification image, and the first display is a display related to the operation means, Is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first period (for example, a period for displaying a meter indicating that the effective time is 4 seconds in FIG. 252 (a)); Is at least the first display in a second period (for example, a period for displaying a meter indicating that the effective time is 3 seconds in FIG. 252 (a)) when the display condition is satisfied. The second period is a period longer than the first period, and the display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated. , It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the display period of the first display can have variations, and there may be cases where it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the display means.

  Note that the “display unit” according to the present embodiment is “a unit that necessarily displays the first display in the first period (or the second period) when the display condition is satisfied”. It may be "means for displaying at least the first display unconditionally in the first period (or the second period)." Further, the “display condition” according to the present embodiment is a condition that may be satisfied when a second condition other than the case where the operation means is operated is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed). May be Further, the “first period” and the “second period” according to the present embodiment are all included in a predetermined period, a part of a predetermined period, and a plurality of periods included in the predetermined period. The period may be a combined period.

  Further, the first display may be a display including at least a meter display. The first display may be a meter display. Moreover, the said meter display may be a display which can change at least a display mode according to progress of time.

Further, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a second display, and the second display may be an effect display. The display means may be means capable of at least starting display of the second display when the display condition is satisfied. Note that the "display means" according to the present embodiment may be "means for always displaying the second display when the display condition is satisfied", or "the second display unconditionally". At least means for displaying may be used.
<Other Embodiments (Normal Button and Deca Button)>

  Hereinafter, a game console according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in order to avoid the overlapping description, about the same content as other embodiment, suppose that the same code | symbol is attached | subjected in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS.

Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with operation means and display means, and the display means displays at least the first display in the first display area. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display area, and the display means is capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area The first display is a display related to the operation means, the second display is a display related to the operation means, and at least a part of a display area of the first display area (hereinafter referred to as The “fourth display area” is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the third display area, and the display area of at least a part of the second display area (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display area”). The display area of the third display A display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the area, the second display area being a display area larger than the first display area, and the fifth display area being the fourth display It is a game console characterized by being a display area larger than the area.
<Basic concept / Normal button and Deca button>

  First, the basic concept of the game console according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 263 is a view for explaining the basic concept of a game console according to another embodiment (normal button and big button).

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the operation means and the display means, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 262, and can perform the same display as the gaming machine. It is. In the game console according to the present embodiment, the display of the operation means image BGs of the first size as shown in FIG. 263 (a) as the display of the operation means image BG described above, and FIG. 263 (b) While it is possible to display the operation means image BGb of the second size larger than the first size as shown in FIG. 26 and as the display of the effective time notification image TG described above, as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the effective time notification image TGs of the third size and the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size larger than the third size as shown in FIG. 263 (b). .

  In the present embodiment, a display including at least one of the display of the operation means image BGs of the first size and the display of the effective time notification image TGs of the third size shown in FIG. It may be referred to as a "normal button" and includes at least one of the display of the second size operation means image BGb and the display of the fourth size effective time notification image TGb shown in FIG. 263 (b). The display may be referred to as a "deca button".

  Also, the normal button may be a display including at least one of the display of the operation means image BGs of the first size and the display of the valid time notification image TGs of the third size, as shown in FIG. 263 (a). As shown, it may include other display OG (for example, a decorative symbol, an image of other effects, etc.). Similarly, the deca-button may be a display including at least one of the display of the second size operation means image BGb and the display of the fourth size effective time notification image TGb, as shown in FIG. 263 (b As shown in), it may include other display OG (for example, a decorative symbol, an image of other effects, etc.).

  In addition, the shortest distance L1 between the first size operation means image BGs and the second size effective time notification image TGs in the normal button, the third size operation means image BGb in the deca button, and the fourth Although the shortest distance L2 with the effective time notification image TGb of the size is not particularly limited, the display of the deca button is longer than the display of the normal button by making the shortest distance L2 longer than the shortest distance L1. This has the effect of making the display OG easy to see and the effect of being able to clarify the difference from the normal button.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 263 (a) and (b), the size of the first region Es of the other display OG covered by the operation means image BGs of the normal button and the valid time notification image TGs is The size of the second area Eb covered with the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGb is different, and in this example, the first area Es is larger than the second area Eb.

  Further, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 263 (c), the shortest distance between the third size operation means image BGb and the fourth size effective time notification image TGb in the Deca button is shown in FIG. 263 (b). The shortest distance L3 may be shorter than the shortest distance L2 shown, or, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 263 (c), at least a portion of the third size operation means image BGb and the fourth At least a part of the effective time notification image TGb may be superimposed. The same can be said for the normal button as for the large button.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (c), the size of the first region Es of the other display OG covered by the operation button image BGs of the normal button and the valid time notification image TGs is the operation button image BGb of the deca button. And the size of the second area Eb covered by the effective time notification image TGb, and in this example, the second area Eb is larger than the first area Es.
<Basic Concept / Display Mode of Display>

  Next, the display mode of the display according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 263 (d) and (e). In FIGS. 263 (d) and 26 (e), the movable body indicated by reference numeral AG is included in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and, for example, the effect movable body 224 described using FIG. In addition to the shutter 1024 and the movable body 1026 described with reference to FIG. 131, the one corresponding to an image or the one corresponding to a panel corresponds to the image.

  The movable body AG does not cover all the normal buttons and the big buttons, so that the first position (the position shown in FIG. 263 (d)) makes all the normal buttons and the big buttons visible. By covering at least a part, at least a part of the normal button or the decal button is shown in a second position (FIG. 26E) which makes it invisible (or less visible than when not covered with a movable body). It is movable between the position) and

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 263 (e), when the movable body AG moves from the first position to the second position, the operation means image BGs of the first size and the second size in the normal button are Since at least a portion of the effective time notification image TGs of the second image is covered by the movable body AG, a part of the operation means image BGs of the first size and a part of the effective time notification image TGs of the second size are not visible (Or, it becomes difficult to view compared to the case where it is not covered by the movable body). As shown in the figure, the portion of the movable body AG which covers the operation means image BGs may be translucent so that the operation means image BGs may be visible.

  Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 263 (e), when the movable body AG moves from the first position to the second position, the operation means image BGb of the third size and the fourth one in the deca button are Since at least a part of the effective time notification image TGb of the size is covered by the movable body AG, a part of the operation means image BGb of the third size and a part of the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size are visible It becomes impossible (or, it is more difficult to view compared to the state not covered by the movable body). As shown in the drawing, the portion of the movable body AG which covers the operation means image BGb may be translucent so that the operation means image BGsb may be visible.

Further, as described above, the first size operation means image BGs of the normal button, the second size effective time notification image TGs, and the third size operation means image BGb of the deca-button and the fourth size The effective time informing images TGb of different sizes are different from each other in size, and the shortest distance L1 between the operation means image BGs of the first size and the effective time informing image TGs of the second size in the normal button, The shortest distances L2 between the operation means image BGb of the third size and the effective time notification image TGb of the fourth size are different from each other. For this reason, even when the normal button and the decabutton are covered with the same movable body AG, the size and shape of the area in which the movable body AG is not visible (or visually difficult compared to the state not covered by the movable body) , Are different in normal button and deca button.
<Specific example of normal button and big button>

  Next, specific examples of the normal button and the big button will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a view showing a specific example of the normal button, and FIG. 264 (b) is a view showing a specific example of the big button.

  The normal button shown in FIG. 264 (a) is an operation means image BGs of the first size (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136, a character “PUSH !!”, and a downward arrow It is comprised by the combination of the display of the combination of the figure) and the effective time alerting | reporting image TGs (this example of the figure of a meter) of the 3rd magnitude | size.

  On the other hand, the deca-button shown in FIG. 264 (b) is an operation-means image BGb of a second size larger than the operation-means image BGs of the normal button (in this example, an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136; !! ”and the display of the downward arrow, and the effective time informing image TGb of the fourth size larger than the effective time informing image TGs of the normal button (in the present example, the figure of the meter) It consists of a combination of Further, the shortest distance (gap) between the operation means image BGb and the valid time notification image TGb is longer than the shortest distance (gap) between the operation means image BGs and the valid time notification image TGs shown in FIG. 274 (a). Large).

  As apparent from (a) and (b) in the figure, the size of the display area covered by the Deca button is larger than the size of the display area covered by the normal button. By changing to the display, it is possible to cover the display which is not usually covered by the button with the large button.

  The display mode of the deca-button is not limited to the example shown in (b) of the figure, and for example, as shown in (c) of the 图, the deca-button is larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button It may be configured by a combination of the display of the operation means image BGb of the second size and the display of the effective time notification image TGs of the normal button. Further, as shown in (d) of the figure, it is composed of a combination of the display of the operation means image BGb of the second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button and the display of the notice time TGs of the normal button. In addition, at least a part of the two displays may overlap.

  Further, as shown in (e) of the figure, the Deca button is configured to display only the operation means image BGb of the second size larger than the operation means image BGs of the normal button (without displaying the effective time notification image TGb). You may Further, as shown in (f) of the figure, the display of the operation means image BGb having a second size larger than that of the normal button operation means image BGs and the effective time notification image TGs for the normal button is larger than that of the normal button. The fourth size may be configured by a combination of display of effective time notification images TGb ′ different in display mode from the effective time notification image TGs of the normal button.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 265 (a-1), in the normal button, at least a part of the display of the operation means image BGs and at least a part of the display of the effective time notification image TGs are displayed in an overlapping manner. As shown in a-2), with the Deca button, the display of the operation means image BGb and the display of the effective time notification image TGs may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. With such a configuration, when the display is switched from one of the normal button and the large button to the other, the normal button and the large button may be easily distinguished.

  Further, when the maximum width of the chance button 136 is L3, as shown in FIG. 265 (b-1), the maximum width of the operation means image BGs of the normal button is L1 shorter than the maximum width L3 of the chance button 136. (L1 <L3), and as shown in FIG. 265 (b-2), the maximum width of the operation means image BGb of the decal button may be L4 (L4> L3) longer than the maximum width L3 of the chance button 136. With such a configuration, when the display is switched from one of the normal button and the large button to the other, the normal button and the large button may be easily distinguished. Further, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), when displaying a plurality of normal buttons in the button effect, the maximum width of each normal button is shown by the operation means image of the normal button shown in FIG. 265 (b-1). The maximum width L5 may be smaller than the maximum width L1 of BGs (L5 <L1).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), in addition to the decal button configured by the display of the operation means image BGb and the effective time notification image TGs, the maximum width substantially the same as the hold icon PI showing the hold of the special figure fluctuation game A normal button composed only of the operation means image BGs ′ having L6 may be displayed. Further, the overall size of the deca-button or the normal button is not particularly limited either, and for example, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), the deca-button may be displayed using the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device As shown in FIG. 266 (c), a mini button smaller than the normal button shown in FIG. 266 (a) may be displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device.

  In addition, another image may be added to the normal button or the deca button. For example, when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the button is continuously hit), the effect image EG is displayed as shown in FIG. The added normal button may be displayed, or, as shown in FIG. 266 (e), the decal button to which the effect image EG is added may be displayed.

  When the normal button is covered by the movable body AG described above, as shown in FIG. 267 (a-1), when the entire normal button is covered and the same movable body AG is used to cover the decabutton, FIG. As shown to (a-2), you may comprise so that a part of Deca button may be covered. Further, the display positions of the normal button and the deca-button are not particularly limited, and for example, as shown in FIG. 267 (b), the display area of the entire deca-button and the display area of the entire normal button may overlap. The display area of the entire Deca button may be configured to include all the display areas of the normal button. Further, although not shown, the display area of the whole of the large button and the display area of the whole of the normal button may not be overlapped.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 267 (c-1) to (c-3), after the normal button is displayed, the cut-in display is performed to cover the entire normal button, and when the cut-in display is finished, A big button may be displayed instead of the button. If such display control is performed, unexpected display can be performed, and the player's willingness to play may be maintained.

  Also, although not shown, although a plurality of normal buttons can be displayed at one time, only one large button may be displayed at a time, and the normal buttons are usually long pressed, continuous hitting, etc. There are many types, and the Deca button may perform display control so that the types of animation are reduced. In addition, the display control may be performed such that the rate of hiding (or the rate of hiding) by another image is higher than that of the normal button.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball emission handle 134, etc.) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps , And the like, and the display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a normal button) in the first display area, and the display means is , Means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, Deca button) in a second display area, and the display means is for displaying a third display (for example, background display, effect display, decoration) in a third display area It is a means capable of displaying at least a symbol (in particular, a decorative symbol at the center, etc.), the first display is a display relating to the operation means, and the second display is a display relating to the operation means And at least a part of the display area of the first display area (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display area") is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the third display area, At least a part of the display area of the second display area (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth display area”) is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the third display area. The display area is a display area larger than the first display area, and the fifth display area is a display area larger than the fourth display area.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the display area in the display means can be made different by the first display, the second display, and the third display, and the game stand characterized by the display means May be able to provide.

  Note that the “display unit” according to the present embodiment is “when the display condition is established, the first display (or the second display area, the third display area) Or, it may be a means for displaying the second display, the third display) without fail, or in the first display area (or the second display area, the third display area) unconditionally. It may be means for displaying the first display (or the second display, the third display) without fail.

  In addition, a plurality of types of displays (for example, display of operation means image, display of elapsed time notification image, display of display time change image of effective time notification image, display of operation promotion image, animation display according to operation by operation means A means capable of displaying at least an animation display, a background display, an effect display, a decoration pattern (in particular, a center decoration pattern), etc., regarding the operation means, and at least one of the plurality of types of In the display, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the second display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the third display.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least starting display of the first display while the third display is displayed, or the first display may be performed while the third display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the first display unconditionally. Further, the display unit may be a unit capable of at least starting display of the third display while the first display is displayed, or the display unit may display the third display while the first display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the third display unconditionally.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least starting display of the second display while the third display is displayed, or the second display may be performed while the third display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the second display unconditionally. Further, the display unit may be a unit capable of at least starting display of the third display while the second display is displayed, or the display unit may display the third display while the second display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the third display unconditionally.

  In addition, in the second state, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state. The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display. Further, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap at least a part of the third display.

In addition, in the fourth state, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the third state. The fourth state may be a state in which at least a portion of the second display overlaps at least a portion of the third display. The third state may be a state in which at least a portion of the second display does not overlap at least a portion of the third display. Further, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that of the second state in the fourth state. The first display may be a display including at least a meter display, and the first display may be a meter display.
<Other embodiments (effect to hide various displays)>

  Hereinafter, a game console according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270. In addition, in order to avoid the overlapping description, about the same content as other embodiment, suppose that the same code | symbol is attached | subjected in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIGS. 268 to 270 have priority.

Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with operation means and display means, and the display means displays at least the first display in the first display area. The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display area, and the display means is capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area Means, the first display is a display relating to the operation means, the second display is an effect display, the third display is a symbol display, and the second display area At least a part of the display area is a display area overlapping with at least a part of the display area of the first display area, and at least a part of the display area of the third display area is the display area of the first display area. It is a display area that overlaps with at least a part of the display area It is the amusement machine according to claim.
<Basic Display / Various Display Performed by Decorative Pattern Display Device 208>

  First, the basic concept of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the operation means and the display means, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 262, and can perform the same display as the gaming machine. It is.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment hides (covers) at least a part of various displays performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 with a button effect, so that at least a part of the various displays can not be viewed (or button effect). Display control to make it difficult to view compared to the case where it is not covered with Here, the various displays performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 include, for example, the above-mentioned variable display or stop display of the decorative symbol, the display of the hold icon, the display of the variable icon, the display of the fourth symbol, and the like.
<Example 1 of button effect for hiding various displays>

  Next, a specific example of the button effect for hiding various displays will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of the button effect hiding various displays in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (a), variation display of three decorative symbols is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, at the timing shown in the next FIG. 268 (b), temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol on the left side is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and at the timing shown in the following FIG. By performing temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol on the right side in the display area 208b, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to reach (decorative 3- (during variation)-decorative 3) is displayed. In addition, in the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol of this example, in order to perform the display to move the decorative symbol slightly up and down, when the decorative symbol moves upward, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the decorative symbol. When the fourth display area of the areas becomes invisible and the decorative symbol moves downward, the fifth display area (fourth of the display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed by the decorative symbol. A display area different from the display area is not visible.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (d), after displaying the effect image to which the character of “continue” is applied in the middle symbol display area 208 b, at the timing shown in FIGS. 268 (e) to (f), By hiding (covering) at least part of the display of the effect image (first display area) with at least part of the display of the button effect (second display area), at least part of the display of the effect image ( Display control is performed to make the first display area invisible (or not visible as compared with the case where the display is not covered by the button effect). In addition, you may perform the movement animation which moves the effect image to which the character of "continuation" was given to the stop display position from the upper part (or lower part) of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (g), the button effect is ended, and the character of “x 2” is displayed in the display area at the upper right of the middle symbol display area 208b to continue the variation display of the decorative pattern. At the timing shown in the next FIG. 268 (h), it is suggested that the variation display of three decoration symbols is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208. In addition, you may perform the movement animation which moves the character display of "x2" to the stop display position from the upper part (or lower part) of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (i), after the effect image to which the characters "continue" are applied is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, then at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (j), By hiding (covering) at least part of the display (first display area) with at least part of the display of the button effect (second display area), at least part of the display of the effect image (first display) Display control is performed to make the region invisible (or difficult to see as compared to the case where the region is not covered by the button effect).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (k), after the temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol in the center is performed in the middle symbol display area 208 b, the timing shown in FIGS. 268 (l) to (m) Then, at least one of the displays of the decorative symbol is hidden by covering (covering) at least a part of the display of the decorative symbol (the third display area) with at least a part of the display of the button effect (the second display area). Display control is performed to make a part (third display area) invisible (or difficult to recognize as compared to the case where the button effect is not covered).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (n), the button effect is ended, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect image to which the character of “continue” is applied is displayed. By displaying the character 2 ", it is suggested that the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued.
<Specific example 2 of button effect to hide various displays>

  FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating a specific example 2 of the button effect hiding various displays in time series. In addition, since the display of FIG. 269 (a)-the same figure (h) is the same as the display of FIG. 268 (a)-the same figure (h), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 269 (i), the effect of super reach (SP reach) is performed, and at the timing shown in the next FIG. 269 (j), temporary stop display of the decorative symbol at the center in the middle symbol display area 208 b At the timing shown in FIG. 269 (k) to FIG. 2 (l) after performing the variable display), at least a part of the display of the decorative symbol is hidden (covered) by the button effect to display the decorative symbol. Display control is performed to make at least a part of the display invisible (or difficult to view compared to the case where the display is not covered by the button effect).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (m), while stopping the button effect, temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit (decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3) was performed. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (n), the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols (decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3) corresponding to the big hit is performed.

In addition, although the example which displays the figure of a meter as a button effect at the timing shown to FIG. 269 (k)-the same figure (l) was shown, as shown in FIG. 269 (k '), a meter is displayed as a button effect. The display may be controlled so as not to display the figure of. In addition, at the timings shown in FIG. 269 (k) to FIG. 1 (l), the button effect configured with the above-mentioned big button may be executed.
<Specific example 3 of button effect to hide various displays>

  FIG. 270 is a diagram illustrating the specific example 3 of the button effect hiding various displays in time series. This example shows an example of a button effect in the case of performing an effect of displaying a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a big hit after performing a false effect corresponding to normal reach loss.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 270 (a), as a false effect corresponding to a normal reach loss, the left symbol display area 208a stops displaying the decorative symbol (decorative A) to which the letter A is applied, and the middle symbol display region 208b In the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (decorative C) on which the letter C is displayed is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (b), at least a part of the display of the decorative symbols A, B and C is hidden (covered) by the button effect to display the decorative symbols A, B and C. Display control has been started to make at least a part of the display invisible (or difficult to view compared to the case where the button effect is not covered).

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (d), the decorative symbol A hidden by the button effect is displayed as a character of the statue, with the acceptance of the operation of the operation means corresponding to the button effect hiding the decorative symbol A. After changing to the image, at the timing shown in the next FIG. 270 (e), by ending the button effect in the left symbol display area 208a, the character image of the statue that was hidden by the button effect is displayed in the left symbol display area It is in a visible state at 208a.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (f), the decorative symbol B hidden by the button effect is displayed on the occasion of having received the operation of the operation means corresponding to the button effect hiding the decorative symbol B. After changing to the image, at the timing shown in the next FIG. 270 (g), by ending the button effect in the middle symbol display area 208b, the character image of the statue that was hidden by the button effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area It is in a visible state at 208 b.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (h), the decorative symbol C hidden by the button effect is displayed as a character of the statue, when the operation of the operation means corresponding to the button effect hiding the decorative symbol C is accepted. After changing to the image, at the timing shown in the next FIG. 270 (i), the button effect in the right symbol display area 208c is ended, and the character image of the statue that was hidden by the button effect is displayed in the right symbol display area. It is in a visible state at 208 c.

  In this example, the upper half of the decorative symbols A, B, and C is hidden by a button effect, or the face of the statue is displayed as a character image of the object, and most of the face is concealed by a button effect. However, as shown in FIGS. 270 (k) and (l), the entire body of the statue may be displayed as a character image of the statue, and the part excluding the face may be hidden by the button effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the character image is the character image of the statue even if a part of the character image is hidden by the button effect, so that a special benefit can be obtained. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it may be. In addition, a part of the character image of the character and a part of numbers (for example, the number of holdings and the number of rounds) indicating information on the game may be hidden by the button effect.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball emission handle 134, etc.) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps , And the like, and the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area, and the display means is a second display area Means capable of displaying at least the second display, the display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the third display area, and the first display relates to the display related to the operating means (For example, the display of the operation means image, the display of the elapsed time notification image, the display of the display time change image of the effective time notification image, the display of the operation promotion image, the animation display according to the operation by the operation means The second display is an effect display, and the third display is a symbol display (for example, a decorative symbol etc.), and at least one of the second display areas. The display area of the unit is a display area overlapping with the display area of at least a part of the first display area, and the display area of at least a part of the third display area is at least one of the first display areas. It is a game area characterized by being a display area overlapping with a display area of the unit.

  According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the display area in the display means can be differentiated by the display regarding the operation means, the effect display, and the symbol display, and the game stand having the feature in the display means is provided. There are times when you can.

  In addition, a plurality of types of displays (for example, display of operation means image, display of elapsed time notification image, display of display time change image of effective time notification image, display of operation promotion image, animation display according to operation by operation means A means capable of displaying at least an animation display, a background display, an effect display, a decoration pattern (in particular, a center decoration pattern), etc., regarding the operation means, and at least one of the plurality of types of In the display, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the second display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display may be the third display.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least starting display of the first display while the third display is displayed, or the first display may be performed while the third display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the first display unconditionally. Further, the display unit may be a unit capable of at least starting display of the third display while the first display is displayed, or the display unit may display the third display while the first display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the third display unconditionally.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of at least starting display of the second display while the third display is displayed, or the second display may be performed while the third display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the second display unconditionally. Further, the display unit may be a unit capable of at least starting display of the third display while the second display is displayed, or the display unit may display the third display while the second display is displayed. It may be a means that can always start display, or it can be a means that can at least start display of the third display unconditionally.

  In addition, in the second state, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state. The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display overlaps at least a part of the third display. Further, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the first display does not overlap at least a part of the third display.

In addition, in the fourth state, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the third state. The fourth state may be a state in which at least a portion of the second display overlaps at least a portion of the third display. The third state may be a state in which at least a portion of the second display does not overlap at least a portion of the third display. Further, the third display may be a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that of the second state in the fourth state. The first display may be a display including at least a meter display, and the first display may be a meter display.
<Other Embodiments (Button Effect While Setting Auto Button Function)>

  Hereinafter, a game console according to another embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, in order to avoid the overlapping description, about the same content as other embodiment, suppose that the same code | symbol is attached | subjected in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, reference numerals in the drawings referred to in the present embodiment are in principle used only for describing the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are used in the drawings referred to in the other embodiments, In the description of the present embodiment, the reference numerals used in FIG.

Although the details will be described later, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with operation means and display means, and the display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of display, At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, the first display is a display regarding the operation means, and the display means is the first display in a first mode. Means for displaying at least the display means, means for displaying at least the first display in the second mode, and the first mode is that the operating means is operated automatically. The game mode is characterized in that the second mode is a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
<Basic concept / Auto button function>

  First, the basic concept of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the operation means and the display means, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 262, and can perform the same display as the gaming machine. It is. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has an auto button function. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs the same processing as when the operation of the operating means is received, triggered by a predetermined condition, even when the player does not operate the operating means.

  FIG. 271 (a-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation of the operation means is performed in the state where the auto button function is not activated (disabled). In this example, the display of the effect is switched in the order of display A → display B → display C → display A → ... every time the operation by the operation means is received, and the sound of the effect is sound A → sound B → It is configured to switch in the order of voice C → voice A →... Here, AB1 to AB3 indicate animations executed when switching the display from display A to display B, BC1 to BC3 indicate animations executed when switching the display from display B to display C, and CA1 to CA3. Shows an animation to be executed when switching the display from display C to display A. In this example, the timing of switching the sound of the effect is delayed compared to the timing of switching the display of the effect so that the player does not feel uncomfortable when switching the effect.

  In this example, when the first operation by the operation means is received, the presentation of the presentation is switched in the order of display A → animation AB 1 → animation AB 2 → animation AB 3 → display B, and then the voice of the presentation is voice A Is switched to audio B. In addition, when the second operation by the operation means is received, display of the effect is switched in the order of display B → animation BC 1 → animation BC 2 → animation BC 3 → display C, then the sound of the effect is from the sound B to the sound B Switch to C. In addition, when the third operation by the operation means is received, after the display of the effect is switched in the order of display C → animation CA 1 → animation CA 2 → animation CA 3 → display A, the sound of the effect is voice C to voice It has switched to A.

  FIG. 271 (a-2) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the auto button function is operating (when it is effective). In this example, even when the player does not operate the operation means, the display of the effect is displayed A → display B → display C → display A →... Whenever the predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied. While switching in order, the sound of the effect is configured to be switched in the order of voice A → voice B → voice C → voice A →... In this example, the auto button function is not activated (disabled) even when the auto button function is activated (when activated) so that the player does not feel discomfort when switching effects. Similarly, the change timing of the sound of the effect is dared to be delayed as compared with the change timing of the display of the effect.

  In this example, the display is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the effect (when the effect time reaches a predetermined time), and the effect of A (display A, audio A) When the presentation time reaches a predetermined time, the presentation of the presentation is switched in the order of display A → animation AB 1 → animation AB 2 → animation AB 3 → display B, and then the voice of presentation is changed from voice A to voice B It is switching. Also, when the effect time of effect B (display B, sound B) reaches a predetermined time, after the display of effect is switched in the order of display B → animation BC 1 → animation BC 2 → animation BC 3 → display C The voice of the effect is switched from the voice B to the voice C. Also, when the effect time of effect C (display C, audio C) reaches a predetermined time, after the display of effect is switched in the order of display C → animation CA 1 → animation CA 2 → animation CAC 3 → display A The voice of the effect is switched from the voice C to the voice A.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271 (a-1), the switching timing of the effect is determined by the operation timing of the operating means by the player. Therefore, for example, in the case where the effect A is an effect capable of selecting the character A and the effect C is an effect capable of selecting the character C, when the player wishes to select the character C, the player operates the operation means Is performed twice to switch the effect from the effect A to the effect C, and there is a risk that it takes time to switch from the effect A to the effect C.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 271 (b-1), since the switching timing of the effect is determined by the control of the game stand, when the player wants to select the character C in the above example, the player operates the The effect can be switched from the effect A to the effect C without performing the operation of the means, and switching of the effect A to the effect C may be smoothly performed in some cases as compared with the state where the auto button function is not activated.

  FIG. 271 (b-1) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation means is operated in the middle of the animation in the example shown in FIG. 271 (a-1). In this example, when the first operation by the operation means is received, the effect display is switched in the order of display A → animation AB 1 → animation AB 2 and then the second operation is accepted immediately after the execution of animation AB 2 Therefore, after execution of animation AB2, without performing animation AB3 and display B (by skipping animation AB3 and display B), the display of the effects is switched in the order of animation BC1 → anime BC2 → animation BC → display C. ing.

271 (b-2) is a time chart showing an example of the flow of effects when a predetermined condition of the auto button function is established in the middle of the animation in the example shown in FIG. 271 (a-2). It is. In this example, when the presentation time of presentation A (display A, sound A) reaches a predetermined time, the presentation of the presentation is switched in the order of display A → animation AB 1 → animation AB 2 and then animation AB 2 Since a predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied immediately after the execution, after the execution of the animation AB2, without performing the animation AB3 and the display B (by skipping the animation AB3 and the display B), the display of the effect is shown It is switched in the order of BC2 → anime BC → display C.
<Example 1 of button effect when the auto button function is activated>

  Next, a specific example of the auto button function will be described. FIG. 272 (a-1) to FIG. 272 (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of the button effect in the state where the auto button function is not activated in time series. Periods shown in FIGS. 272 (a-1) to (a-2) are states before the start of the button effect, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is turned off.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 272 (a-3), the button effect is started triggered by the start of the special figure variation game in FIG. (A-2), and at the same time, the chance button 136 (of the chance button lamp 138 ) In the first color (red in this example). In the button effects executed in FIGS. 272 (a-3) to (a-4), the color of the operation means image BG is set to the same color as the first color (red) that is the lighting color of the chance button 136. doing.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (a-5), the chance button 136 is turned off at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (a-4) immediately before, and the button effect is turned off. Have finished. In addition, at this timing, while the effect which suggests that operation by the chance button 136 was performed is performed, the chance button 136 is light-extinguished. Note that instead of turning off the chance button 136, the chance button 136 may be lit in a color (for example, orange) different from the first color (red) described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (a-6), the special effect is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (a-4) when the operation by the chance button 136 is received.

  Further, FIG. 272 (b-1) to FIG. 272 (b-6) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 1 of the button effect in a state where the auto button function is activated. Periods shown in FIGS. 272 (b-1) to (a-6) are states in which the auto button function is activated, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is different from the first color. It is lit in the second color (in this example, blue).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 272 (b-3), the button effect is started triggered by the start of the special figure changing game in FIG. (B-2). In the button effects executed in FIGS. 272 (b-3) to (b-4), the color of the operation means image BG is different from the second color (blue) which is the lighting color of the chance button 136 It is set to one color (red).

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (b-5), the predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (b-4) immediately before (in this example, the predetermined time in the button effect is reached The button effect is ended with the opportunity of the special drawing). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (b-6), the special effect is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (b-4) triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition in the auto button function.
<Specific example 2 of the button effect when the auto button function is activated>

  FIG. 273 (a-1) to FIG. 27 (a-6) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 2 of the button effect in a state where the auto button function is activated. In addition, since the display shown to FIG. 273 (a-1)-the figure (a-3) is the same as the display shown to said FIG. 272 (b-1)-(b-3), the description is abbreviate | omitted .

In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 273 (a-4) in which the auto button function is activated and the button effect is being executed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 273 (a-5), the button effect is triggered when the operation of the chance button 136 is received during the operation of the auto button function at the timing shown in FIG. 273 (a-4) immediately before. At the same time, the auto button function is switched from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the chance button 136 is turned off.
<Specific example 3 of button effect when the auto button function is activated>

  FIG. 273 (b-1) to FIG. 27 (b-6) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 3 of the button effect in a state where the auto button function is activated. In addition, since the display shown to FIG. 273 (b-1)-the same figure (b-3) is the same as the display shown to said FIG. 272 (a-1)-(a-3), the description is abbreviate | omitted .

In this example, at the timing shown in FIG. 273 (b-5), the button effect is ended in response to the detection of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 273 (a-4) immediately before When the operation by 136 is continued for a predetermined time (when the chance button 136 is pressed for a long time), the auto button function is switched from the inactive state to the activated state and the chance button 136 is turned to the second color Lights in (blue).
<Specific example 4 of button effect when the auto button function is activated>

  FIGS. 274 (a-1) to (a-7) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 4 of the button effect in a state where the auto button function is activated. At the timing shown in FIG. 274 (a-1) of the present example, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition in the auto button function (in this example, the number of reserved special game variations is increased from 3 to 4), Button production has started. In this button effect, after the operation means image BG is displayed above the increased hold icon PI4, the display mode of the hold icon PI4 is displayed from the normal hold icon (in this example, an image of a white circle), the hold Is changed to a notice holding icon (in this example, a character image of a character) indicating the result of determination of the success or failure of the special map variation game corresponding to.

In this example, if the player activates the auto button function, the display mode of the hold icon can be changed without operating the operation means. It may be possible to grasp in advance the success or failure judgment result of the special figure variation game, and it may be possible to increase the player's willingness to play.
<Specific example 5 of button effect when the auto button function is activated>

  FIGS. 274 (b-1) to (b-7) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, a specific example 5 of the button effect in a state where the auto button function is activated. At the timing shown in FIG. 274 (b-1) of this example, the button effect is triggered by the fact that the predetermined condition in the auto button function is satisfied (in this example, that the predetermined time in the button effect is reached). Since it has started, but it is just before the change stop of special figure change game, it is constituted so that the display mode of reservation icon PI4 may not be changed.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 274 (b-3), with the predetermined condition in the auto button function being satisfied (in this example, the number of reservations for special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3), it is suspended. The display mode of the icon PI4 is changed from a normal hold icon (in the present example, an image of a white circle) to a notice holding icon (in the present example, a character image of a lord).
<Other Example of Auto Button Function>

  Next, another example of the auto button function will be described. FIG. 275 is a diagram for describing another example of the auto button function.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (a-1), in the game console in which the left button 136a and the right button 136b are disposed on both sides of the chance button 136 corresponding to the auto button function, the chance button 136 and the left button When the three buttons 136a and the right button 136b are simultaneously pressed (when they are simultaneously pressed), the auto button function is set to ON (activated) as shown in FIG. 275 (a-2). As shown in (a-3), when the left button 136a (or the right button 136b) other than the chance button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 275 (a-4), the auto button function is turned off (not yet Operation) may be set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), during the operation of the auto button function, a display indicating that the auto button function is in operation is displayed on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, “auto Character display of "during setting of button" may be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), a display effect is provided to urge the operation by the operation means regardless of the operation of the auto button function, or to prompt the operation by the operation means (in this example, "!" May be displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 275 (d-1) to (d-3), when the auto button function is set to ON (actuated), the button corresponding to the operation means during the operation of the auto button function. As shown in FIG. 275 (d-3), the effect to be executed when the operation of the operation means is received may be displayed without executing the effect at all. In addition, the start timing of the effect is not particularly limited. For example, the effect may be started when the effective time of the operation means is halved, or the effect is shown when the effective time of the operation means is 0 seconds. May start.

Moreover, since the auto button function of this example differs from the above-mentioned auto button function in that no button effect is performed at all, the auto button function of this example is referred to as a second auto button function, and the second auto button function When activated, the chance button 136 may be illuminated in a third color (e.g., yellow) different from that of the automatic button function described above.
<Character select function>

  Next, the character select function will be described. FIG. 276 and FIG. 277 are diagrams for explaining the character select function.

  When starting a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of a big hit game, an effect of a bonus game), the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can select a character to be appeared in the predetermined effect from among a plurality of characters. It has a character select function. However, in this character selection function, since it is possible to select the character only when the operation by the operation means is received, the selection of the character is automatically (operation means even while the above-mentioned auto button function is in operation) Is configured not to be performed).

  The state shown in FIG. 276 (a) is a state in which the character selection effect is started in the state where the auto button function is on (activated). In this state, since the character selection effect is started, a display prompting an operation by the operation means (in this example, a character display of "select button to select character!") Is performed. Normally, during the operation of the auto button function, character selection is automatically performed without the operation by the operation means, but in this example, the character selection is automatically performed even while the auto button function is operating. It is configured not to perform (without operation by the operation means). For this reason, the character (in this example, the character in this example) to be displayed first is not automatically selected (without operation by the operation means) by the auto button function.

  FIG. 276 (b) shows a state in which the operation by the left button 136a is received. In this example, when the operation by the operation means is received during the character selection effect, the auto button function is changed to non-operation, so the auto button function is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 276 (c). And the chance button 136 is turned off.

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 276 (c) to (f), characters selectable in the character selection effect are selected based on the fact that the operation by the left button 136a is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. An animation is performed to change the character of Tono from the character of Tono.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 277, the character select function is selected in the period shown in FIGS. 277 (b) to (c) based on the reception of the operation by the left button 136a at the timing shown in FIG. Based on the fact that an animation is executed to change a possible character from a character of your own to a character of another character, and the operation by the left button 136a is accepted again at the timing shown in FIG. In the periods shown in FIGS. 277 (d) to (g), an animation is executed in which characters selectable in the character selection function are changed from an amber character to a princess character.

  That is, in this example, based on the acceptance of the character selection operation, after starting the animation for changing the selectable character in the character selection function from the first character to the second character, before the animation is completed When the character selection operation is accepted again, the animation for changing the selectable character from the first character to the second character is canceled (canceled), and the selectable character is changed to the third character. It is composed of

  In addition, in the game stand which performs the vibration effect which vibrates the operation means when the operation by the operation means is received, the vibration effect may not be executed when the auto button function is activated. With such a configuration, it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the player is given a sense of discomfort by performing vibration presentation in a situation where the operation means does not require an operation.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball emission handle 134, etc.) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps , And various LEDs and the like, and the display means is a display of a plurality of types of display (for example, display of an operation means image, display of an elapsed time notification image, change of display display mode of effective time notification image Means capable of displaying at least an image display, an operation promotion image display, an animation display according to the operation by the operation means, an animation display relating to the operation means, a background display, an effect display, a decorative pattern (in particular, a central decorative pattern) And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and the first display is a display relating to the operation means. The display means at least performs at least the first display (e.g., display of the operation means image, display of the display display mode change image of the effective time notification image, display of the operation promotion image or all) in the first mode. The display means is a means capable of displaying, and the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in the second mode, and the first mode does not mean that the operation means is automatically operated. A mode (for example, a state in which the auto button function is off), and a mode in which the operation means is automatically operated (for example, a state in which the auto button function is on). It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the first display can be displayed even in the mode in which the operating means is operated automatically, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the display means There is a case.

  The first display may be a display including at least a display for prompting the player to operate the operation means, and the first display is a display for prompting the player to operate the operation means. It may be. Further, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a second display, and the second display may be an effect display.

  Further, the display means may be means for starting display of at least the second display when the display condition is satisfied, and the display means may be the display condition when the display condition is satisfied. It may be a means capable of at least starting display of the second display.

  Further, the display condition may be a condition which may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the first mode. Further, the display condition may be a condition which may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated in the second mode. Further, the display condition may be a condition which may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the second mode. Further, the operation means may be means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “ball”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110 The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player The ball emission handle 134 which launches the guided game ball into the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the cha which changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 278) by the operation of the player. With respect to a card unit (CR unit) and a setting operation unit 137 which can make various settings and the like by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), the chance button lamp 138 for emitting light A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 280) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 279 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 278 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 281). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 280 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol starting opening 228, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232 (opened state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (opened state) etc. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the variable winning opening 234, the game of falling on the left path by the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nail 238 and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of balls is relatively easy, and entry of gaming balls falling on the right path is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, a fourth symbol display area 208e, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays a fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 280, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 280, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one in total) is provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both of the special symbols may be provided. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number (for example, four) of common drawing fluctuation games are displayed. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation game is specified It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and variable The winning openings 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The general drawing start port 228 and the general drawing start port 229 are devices, which are called gates and through chuckers, for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the present embodiment In the embodiment, one common drawing start port 228 is disposed on the left side path of the game board 200, and one common drawing start port 229 is disposed on the right side path. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start port 228 or the general drawing start port 229 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 or the drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 start opening 232 has a pair of wing members 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wing members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and win a common drawing fluctuation game, and a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right route. There is only one in the house. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 respectively include openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. For example, when the special figure display device wins the special figure variation game and the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing) Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning any winning opening or start opening, or just out of passing the common drawing start opening 228, 229 The mouth 240 is reached.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230.

  The effect movable body 224 in this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is vertically movable in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208 e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized regardless of the open / close state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 281) for adjusting the volume to be set, the operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the signal to the basic circuit 402 and the signal stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, second sub-control unit 500, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 282 (a) to 282 (d). The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 282 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1, and FIG. 282 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 282 (a), seven types of special views of “special view A” to “special view G” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 1. In FIG. 282 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends The state is shifted to the drawing high probability state (see FIGS. 288 (a) and (b)). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state) It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG. 282 (b), four types of special views “special view a” to “special view d” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 282 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc.). When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "and the like.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decor 2-Decor 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 282 (c).

  FIG. 282 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 and the drawing start port 229, the drawing display device 210 displays all the seven segments and the central one. Repeat the lighting of the segment of the "general display of the fluctuation display". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 282 (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 283. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 , 229 is determined to have been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 are awarded, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start openings 228 and 229, and variable winning openings 234 and 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  If the common drawing start port 228 or the common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generating random number counter The random number value is acquired as a winning random number value, and the common-mode random number value is acquired from the random number counter for general-purpose random number value generation provided in the RAM 308, and stored in the general-purpose random number storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random number values is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common-diagram A or a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 282 (d)) and a detached symbol (a common-diagram C shown in FIG. Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, Based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308, etc., a table for adjudication determination stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 286 (c) shown in FIG. 286 (c) stored in ROM 306 based on the common drawing random number value in the acquired common drawing start information and the determined success or failure determination result. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on The special figure a shown in FIG. 282 (b), the 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on when the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 status update process starting at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability change flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G, the setting area of the RAM 308 Special figure 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1) using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 287 (a) to (d) described later) stored in Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table (FIG. 288 (a), FIG. 288 (a), which is stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired Determination of the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 2 is performed using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 289 (a)). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 283 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 285 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 285 (b) to (d)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 285 (b) to (d) illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 285 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 285 (b), the special view 1 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 285 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure G" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 285 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 285 (c), the special view 2 pre-fetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the reserve number of the special view 2 variation game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 285 (c), “special figure d” (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 285 (c), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none."

  FIG. 285 (d) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit in power support. As shown in FIG. 285 (d), in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is determined in advance, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result of the pass / fail and the change timer number (change time) are determined in advance. The information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 286 to 289 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 286 (a) and 286 (b) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when making a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 286 (a) and 286 (b) is composed of the items of “general drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 286 (a) is a success / failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 286 (a), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 286 (b) is a success / failure determination table for common drawing, which is used when the drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 286 (b), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is approximately 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 286 (a), the hit probability is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG. 286 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for common use. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 286 (c), the distribution rate of each symbol in the case where the success or failure determination result of the common drawing fluctuation game is a hit is 50% for the common drawing A and 50% for the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 286 (c), the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 286 (c), the opening operation of the special figure 2 start opening (electric chow) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  287 (a) to 287 (d) show examples of the table for determining whether or not the special drawing 2 is related to the lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to (d) is configured by each item of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 287 (a) is a success or failure determination table for special image 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 287 (a), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 287 (b) is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 287 (b), when this success or failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this success or failure determination table with the success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 287 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of small hit is the same.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 287 (c) is a success or failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 287 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of small hit is zero.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 287 (d) is a success or failure determination table for Special Figure 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 287 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is zero. When this success or failure judgment table is compared with the success or failure judgment table shown in FIG. 287 (c), the probability of the big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 288 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for the special view 1. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 288 (a), the distribution rate of each big hit symbol in the case that the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the special figure A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG. 288 (b) shows an example of the big hit time operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 288 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 289 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for Special Figure 2. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 289 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 289 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. 289 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or the special view c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 288 and FIG. 289, Special Figure 2 has a high probability that time reduction is given compared with Special Figure 1, and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 290 and FIG. 291. FIG. 290 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing performed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 290 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric power long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 290 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 290 (c) is a flow chart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 290 (d) is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S413) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 291 (a) shows the flow of electric power long open effect processing executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first auxiliary control unit 400. FIG. 291 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  The electric chulong opening effect processing shown in FIG. 291 (a) starts the symbol fluctuation start of the common figure from the main control unit 300 in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 in FIG. 290 (a). (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit with reference to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing disengaging flag.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S817, the process proceeds to step S817, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B", and sets it as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric chulong opening effect shown in FIG. 291, when the electric chulong opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the electric chulong opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG. 291 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect. FIG. 291 (b) shows the display effect performed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which "decoration 0" to "decoration 9" sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 291 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 292A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 292 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 292B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 292C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, effects and the like of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 305. FIG. 293A shows the flow of the button effect control process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub control unit 400. In the button effect control process, first, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the button effect flag in-progress flag is on (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period in which the operation of the player's chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is validated (within the operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state It judges and transfers to the process of step S1203, when the value of a button effect flag is "0", it judges that a button effect flag is an OFF state, and transfers to the process of step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether the button reception flag is in the on state. The button reception flag is turned on when each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the button acceptance flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button acceptance flag is “1”, the button acceptance flag is in the on state. If it is determined that the button reception flag is “0”, it is determined that the button reception flag is off, and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first secondary control unit 400 executes button reception control processing. In the button reception execution process, control is performed to execute an effect to be performed based on an operation of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the operation valid period, when each button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a predetermined order, or when the operation valid period ends, the button effect end condition is To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209, and if the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the button rendering in-progress flag. Since the first sub control unit 400 determines that the operation effective period has ended in step S1207, the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 is overwritten with “0”, and the button effect flag under execution flag Turn off.

  On the other hand, in step S1211 when it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect executing flag is off, it is determined whether the button effect executing condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is satisfied when the player has won the execution of the effect to be the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 in the predetermined lottery process. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect executing flag is turned on. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the effect of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is effective and the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the button effect is executed. The button effect executing flag indicating that is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail using FIG. 293 (b).

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like is performed to determine the presence or absence of the effect with the operation effective period. After completing the other button effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control process, and returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

  FIG. 293 (b) shows the flow of the auto button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, first, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, the auto button mode is set. It is determined that the in-setting flag is in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1303. If the value of the in-auto button mode in-progress flag is "1", it is determined that the in-auto button mode in-progress flag is on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting condition is satisfied when the auto button mode setting is called in a user mode (menu) which can be called by the player while the special figure variation game is not being executed. In addition, the auto button mode setting condition may be established when a predetermined lottery is won, or when the number of big hits since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number. In addition, the automatic button mode setting condition may be forcibly established when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the automatic button mode as the automatic button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, auto button mode setting is performed. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of modes 1 to 4 can be set by the operation of the player. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the auto button mode is set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on an auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the auto button mode setting flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and shifts to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, in the next step S1309 when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect in-progress flag is off, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied when the player cancels the auto button mode. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is not satisfied, the auto button mode setting process is ended. Then, the process shifts to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311 following step S1309, the flag during the setting of the auto button mode is turned off. Since the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 turns off an auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “0” in the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the auto button mode under-setting flag is turned off, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and shifts to other button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 294 shows a flow of processing of chance button control processing (S411) of the main processing in the first secondary control unit 400. In the chance button control process, first, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the button reception flag (step S1401). As described above, each time the chance button control process is executed, the button acceptance flag is once turned off. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “0” in the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, turns off the button reception flag, and shifts to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the button effect flag in-progress flag is on. The button effect flag is turned on within a period in which the operation of the player's chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is validated (within the operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state It judges and shifts to processing of Step S1405, when value of a button production flag is "0", it judges that a button production flag is OFF state, and ends chance button control processing.

  In step S1405, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting flag is in the on state. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, the first sub control unit 400 performs the auto button mode. It is determined that the in-setting flag is in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value in the in-auto button mode setting flag is "0", it is determined that the in-automatic button mode in-progress flag is off Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated.

  In step S1409 following step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether to accept a button operation. If it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 receives a button operation, the process proceeds to step S1413. If it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 does not receive a button operation, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  On the other hand, in step S1411 when it is determined in step S1405 that the auto button mode setting flag is off, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 is operated when the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is on, and the setting operation unit 137 is operated when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is on to decide. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1413, and if it is determined that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated finish.

  In step S1413, the button reception flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is operated automatically or manually, the first sub control unit 400 turns on a button acceptance flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the button acceptance flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  FIG. 295 shows various settings of the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners and there is no settable condition. Therefore, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for middle-class players and can be set by players who have reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 3 is for advanced users, and can be set by a player who has reached level 100 in Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is for all players, but can not be set unless a predetermined opening date is reached.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation valid period the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of "sex" in the figure, "loosely" is set in mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period. Further, in mode 2, "impossible" is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated in the early stage of the operation valid period. Further, in the mode 3, the "mood shop" is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation effective period. Further, in mode 4, the player can be arbitrarily set to any one of “slow”, “sick” or “feeling”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of times of operation per unit time of the chance button 136 is set to "low speed" in mode 1, "medium speed" in mode 2, and "high speed" in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player performs a continuous hit without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player performs a continuous hit only when the player keeps pressing the chance button 136. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set any one of "low speed", "medium speed" and "high speed".

  In addition, in the effect (for example, princess dance SP reach described later) in which the operation timing of the chance button 136 is adjusted, the operation timing is set to “GOOD” of the allowable range in mode 1 and the operation timing is slightly deviated in mode 2 “GREAT Mode 3 is set to "PERFECT" in which the operation timing is perfectly matched. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “GOOD”, “GREAT” or “PERFECT”.

  In addition, in the setting of the “back button” that does not perform operation promotion leaving for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 1 during the operation valid period, In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate.

  In addition, when the holding icon indicating the number of holdings of the special figure variation game is displayed as a pattern imitating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation valid period is displayed. In mode 1, chance button 136 is automatically operated, in mode 2, chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and in mode 3, chance button 136 is not automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate. When the chance button 136 is operated while the "button hold" is displayed, the display mode of the "button hold" hold icon is changed.

  In addition, the cross key (command input of the cross key) for operating the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be operated automatically in mode 1, and is set to be operated automatically in mode 2. , Mode 3 is set not to be operated automatically. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate.

  In addition, mode 1 is set to "indecision" in which the option is not decided immediately, and mode 2 is set to "immediately in prompt decision" in which the option is immediately decided in the selected effect for making the player draw an object etc. Is set to "default" where the choice is determined as the initial choice. In the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of "indecision", "immediate decision and decision", and "default".

  In addition, it is possible that the player's chance button 136 and the button operation of the setting operation unit 137 being set to each mode are effectively accepted in mode 1, accepted in mode 2 and not accepted in mode 3 It has become. In the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the player can effectively receive the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137.

  In addition, as described in the “remarks” column in the figure, mode 1 is an auto button setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during non-execution (non-playing) of special figure variation game, or special figure The on / off setting is possible by the cross key command input during the variable game (during game). In mode 2, when the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is actually operated by the player in the auto button mode on state, the auto button mode is switched to the off state. Mode 3 is designed to be continuously hit at a speed that can not be achieved when the hit button 136 is physically operated (directly by the player). In addition, an effect is provided that appears only when the operation timing is "PERFECT".

  FIG. 296 shows the method of setting the mode 1 in the auto button mode in chronological order. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 296 (a) shows the display content of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the demonstration effect which is performed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", which is the nearest stop symbol, is displayed. In addition, in the effect display area 208d, “Call menu with chance button” is displayed, and by operating the chance button 136, it is informed that the menu screen is called (displayed).

  FIG. 296 (b) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect, and the menu screen at the time of login of Daitomo (when password is not entered) is displayed. The player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operates the chance button 136 to decide on the selected item. In addition, a tutorial display composed of a whistle character displayed in the effect display area 208 d and a balloon message “Determine selecting an item” is displayed. The menu of this example is provided with “member registration”, “password input”, “QR code (registered trademark) issuance”, “data clear”, “volume and light amount adjustment”, and “auto button mode”. "QR code (registered trademark) issued" and "data clear" are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 296, “QR code (registered trademark) issue” and “data clear” are displayed darker than the other menus (indicated by hatching in the figure with upward hatching in the figure) and can not be selected because login to Daitomo is not possible. It is shown to be.

  FIG. 296 (c) shows a state in which "auto button mode" is selected on the menu screen. At the time shown in 19 (c), the cursor e1 is located in "mode 1" and "mode 1" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the explanation of the mode being selected is made by the tutorial display including the princess character and the balloon message "mode 1 is recommended for beginners". Also, mode 2 and mode 3 are modes that can be selected only while logging in to Daitomo, and the open date of "mode 4" has not arrived. Therefore, "mode 2", "mode 3" and "mode 4" are not selectable. Also, when "return" is selected and determined, the menu screen shown in FIG. 296 (b) is returned.

  FIG. 296 (d) shows the state determined to be mode 1. The item “mode 1” is displayed to light up (indicated by a dotted frame in the drawing), and the princess balloon message “decide on mode 1!” Is displayed. In addition, "mode 1" is displayed on the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode under setting is displayed.

  FIG. 296 (e) shows a state in which mode 1 is selected and the menu screen is returned. When "end" of the menu item is selected, a brow character and a balloon message "I will do my best!" Are displayed, and the demonstration effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 296 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 296 (e), the display of “mode 1” at the lower left may be hidden by a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, “end” of the menu item). As shown in FIG. 296 (f), the display of "mode 1" at the lower left may hide a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, a frame of "menu call by chance button").

  FIG. 297 shows the method of setting the mode 4 in the auto button mode in chronological order. FIG. 297 (a) shows a state in which “enter password” is selected and determined on the menu screen shown in FIG. 296 (b). The player operates the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password and can log in to the Daitomo.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows a state where the password has been successfully input. After “a password input has been accepted” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d, a menu screen shown in FIG. 297 (c) is displayed. Since login to Daitomo, the menu item "QR code (registered trademark) issuance" and "data clear" can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display is displayed, which is composed of a broom character and a balloon message "Select an item and decide". Further, "Level: 250" is displayed on the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the player who has logged in is shown. Since the title corresponding to each level is provided and the title of level 250 is a general, it is displayed as "title: general" below "level: 250".

  In this state, when the player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the "auto button" of the menu item and operates the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 297 (d), the auto button mode setting is performed. The screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is located in "mode 4", and "mode 4" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the explanation of the mode being selected is made by the tutorial display configured by the princess character and the balloon message "mode 4 can customize all functions". In addition, since the user is logging in to Daitomo and the Daitomo level is 250, "Mode 2" and "Mode 3" can be selected. Further, since the opening date of "mode 4" has arrived, "mode 4" is also selectable.

  FIG. 297 (e) shows the state after the mode 4 is selected and determined. The player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select a function to be set, and operates the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to set each function. The selection item of each function selected by the player is displayed brighter (indicated by dot hatching in the drawing) than the item of non-selection. When “decision” shown below the effect display area 208 d is selected and determined, setting (customization) of mode 4 is finished, and when “cancel” is selected and determined, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. It is supposed to go back to

  FIG. 297 (f) shows a state in which “decision” is selected and determined, and setting of mode 4 of the auto button is completed. In the lower left of the effect display area 208d, "mode 4" is displayed, and the mode being set is displayed. Also, instead of the “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be notified individually.

Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described (Example 1)

  FIG. 298 shows an example of effect display in the example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 298 and each drawing described later, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a downward thick arrow. In FIG. 298 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 holding lamp 218, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 holding lamp 220 and the special view 2 display 214 Are shown differently to the illustration of FIG. Fig. 298 and each figure to be described later show the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 1 display 212 at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the special figure 2 display on the right Device 214 is shown. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. Further, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214 indicates that the variable display of the special view 1 or the special view 2 is performed. Also, illustration of the fourth symbol is omitted. The left side of FIG. 298 shows the decorative symbol display device 208 etc., and the left side shows the chance button 136 seen from the player.

  FIG. 298 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 298 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  FIG. 298 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the present embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. Therefore, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation effective period. As shown in FIG. 298 (c), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 298 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed in the up position. Is executed. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 298 (c) and 298 (d).

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects (Example 2)

  FIG. 299 shows an example of effect display in a second example of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 299 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 299 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 299 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promptings of the character string "PUSH!" May not be displayed.

  FIG. 299 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 295, “sex” in mode 3 is “feeling store”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period as in the case of “loosely”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 299 (d) shows a state in which a cut-in effect has been executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 299 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed in an up state. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 298 (d)) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. Also, different cut-in effects may be performed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting state of the auto button mode. In particular, as long as the auto button mode is not set, there may be an aspect or the like which is not displayed, or vice versa.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not by the player) in the auto button mode within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, while the chance button 136 is lit during the operation valid period, the meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed. However, when the auto button mode is not set, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed while the chance button 136 is lit, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or either It is not necessary to execute both (Example 3)

  FIG. 300 shows an example of effect display in the third example of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 300 (a) shows a state in which super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 300 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 300 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promptings of the character string "PUSH!" May not be displayed.

  FIG. 300C shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 295, the “sex part” in mode 3 is the “feeling store”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the early stage of the operation effective period as in the case of the “sticky”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 300 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is performed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 300 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 298 (d)) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not by the player) in the auto button mode within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects (Example 4)

  FIG. 301 shows a chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate, and is configured to be depressible. Also, the chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the rotating light. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is disposed.

  FIGS. 301 (a) to 301 (d) show an example where the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 301 (a) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 is not started, and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700 a is turned off without being rotated.

  FIG. 301 (b) shows a state where the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (the operation valid period has been started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without being rotated.

  FIG. 301 (c) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 700. FIG. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 301 (c) and 301 (d), the lamp 700a turns on while rotating. As described above, when the chance button 700 is operated, an effect of turning on the lamp 700 a while rotating is started. However, if the player holds the hand on the chance button 700 after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by hand.

  FIGS. 301 (e) to 301 (g) show an example in which the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 301 (e) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 is not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700 a is turned off without being rotated.

  FIG. 301 (f) shows a state where the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 is started (the operation valid period is started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without being rotated.

  FIG. 301 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while being rotated. As described above, at the time of setting the auto button mode, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button, the lamp 700a is turned on and turned on based on the automatic operation. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the player 700 from lowering the visibility of the lamp 700a.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a case (for example, the lamp 700a) is moved by operating the chance button 700 while sacrificing visibility depending on whether or not the auto button mode is set. The player can select the case of securing the visibility of the character while sacrificing the operation of 700 (Example 5).

  FIG. 302 shows an example of the effect according to the fifth example of the present embodiment in time series. Drawing 302 (a) shows the state where super reach production is performed during execution of a special figure 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a shooting reach is performed in which the f1 defeats the Echigo f3 with a beam.

  In the shooting reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is emitted from the sword of the f1 number of times the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. In order to notify of this, at the start of shooting reach, a string of "shooting reach ~ defeat Echigoya with a button hit ~" is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 1" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 302 (b) shows a state where shooting reach has been started. The effective period of operation of the chance button 136 starts with the start of shooting reach, and in the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and "PUSH!" A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating an operation effective period is displayed below the image, and operation promotion notification is performed.

  The continuous hitting speed in mode 1 of the auto button mode is "low speed" as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 302 (b) and 302 (c), since the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, the number of beams emitted from the sword of the temple f1 is reduced.

  FIG. 302 (d) shows a state where the player has started to hit the chance button 136 by himself. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is also validated. For this reason, more beams are emitted from the sword of the lord f1 than when the chance button 136 is operated automatically.

  FIG. 303 is a timing chart showing the state of the chance button sensor 426, the result of the auto button processing determination (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button acceptance flag at the time of effect execution shown in FIG. FIG. 303 shows the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the auto button determination processing result (determination in step S1409 from step S1407), and the on / off state of the button reception flag in order from the top. The horizontal axis in FIG. 303 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The auto button determination processing result is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button acceptance flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode.

  Time t1 in FIG. 303 is the time shown in FIG. 302 (b). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at time t1.

  Time t2 in FIG. 303 is the time shown in FIG. 302 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t2 is automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at time t2. In addition, the operation of the chance button 136 at time t3 to t4 is also automatic operation in the automatic button mode. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is performed at equal intervals. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be performed randomly or may be performed in a pattern with a different cycle.

  An operation of the chance button 136 by the player is started from time t5. Therefore, at times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on, and the button acceptance flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only one of the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is effective, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, it may be determined that both are valid. For example, even when the chance button 136 pressed at time t6 is maintained as it is, the result of the automatic button processing determination result at time t7 and time t10 may be ON, or conversely, the chance button 136 If it is maintained in the ON state, the button reception flag may be turned OFF without being turned ON even when the automatic button processing determination result is ON.

  At time t8, the player operates the chance button 136. At time t9, the player operates the chance button 136. Further, time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 302 (d).

  Although the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, the button reception flag is not turned on at time t10. Therefore, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalidated. In this manner, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be invalidated for a predetermined period after the player operates the chance button 136. After that, the chance button 136 is operated by the player at time t11.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is validated. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to cope with the player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136 . In addition to the operation performed automatically, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture continuous hit effects and the like (for example, shooting reach) by operating the chance button 136 manually.

Here, the configuration may be such that the result of the automatic button processing determination processing is turned ON at the same time as the reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the player presses the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 simultaneously with the start of the period even when waiting for the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Therefore, the chance button It takes time from the start of the reception period of 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In that respect, when the auto button mode is set, the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost simultaneously with the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, so it may be possible to see the effect faster Example 6

  FIG. 304 shows an example of effect display in a sixth example of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 304 (a) to 304 (d) show an example in which the auto button mode is activated. FIG. 304 (a) shows a state in which super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 304 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 304 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 295, the “sex part” in mode 3 is the “feeling man”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation effective period.

  FIG. 304 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is performed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the automatic button mode. As shown in FIG. 304 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed in an up state. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 298 (d)) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period.

  FIGS. 304 (e) to 304 (h) show an example in which the auto button mode does not operate. FIG. 304 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is executed. Further, since mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, "mode 3" is displayed on the upper left of the effect display area 208d. The position of the display showing that the auto button mode is being set is at the lower left when executing the super reach effect, and the position of the display showing that the auto button mode is being set is not active at the non effect of the super reach effect It has become. Thus, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set may be changed depending on the state.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left area is a variation icon display area a. In the variation icon display area a, one variation icon can be displayed, and it is possible to give notice of the success or failure of the variation with a predetermined reliability (notice of the variation) by the display mode of the variation icon. In the variation icon display area a, a variation icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  In addition, a horizontally long area adjacent to the right side of the variation icon display area a, which is a lower part of the effect display area 208d, is a special view reserve display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special view hold display area c, one or more hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure reserve display area c, it is possible to notify the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation game by the number of reserve icons, and notify the propriety of the reserve with predetermined reliability by the display mode of each reserve icon (prefetching It is possible to give notice. Further, in the special view reserve display area c of the present example, a reserve icon indicating the hold of reserve orders 1 to 4 is displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the number of reservations for the current special drawing 1 variation game is two, as shown in FIG. 304 (e), the two special icons b1 and b2 have white circles (default) in the special drawing suspension display area c. It is displayed in the form.

  FIG. 304 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special view 1 start port 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the number of reservations for the special view 1 change game is increased by one. . A reserve icon b3 is newly displayed in the special view reserve display area c.

  The hold icon b3 is a button hold displayed in a display mode of a pattern imitating the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a prefetch notice. While the button hold is displayed, the operation period of the chance button 136 is valid. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. In addition, when multiple buttons are displayed while the auto button mode (except mode 3) is set, only the display mode of the previously displayed buttons is displayed when the auto button mode is activated. Alternatively, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. Moreover, in that case, the display modes of both button hold may not be changed, and the display modes of both button hold may be changed simultaneously. Also, these controls may be different or the same in the setting of the auto button mode and the other states. In addition, the display mode after the change may be different between the change of the display mode by the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the actual pressing of the chance button 136, or even the same. Good. In addition, there may be an aspect or the like that is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, but as shown in FIG. 295, mode 3 does not perform an automatic operation at the time of the button hold display, and the operation by the player is not valid. Therefore, when mode 3 is set, the display mode of the button hold does not change.

  FIG. 304 (g) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game has been started which has been indicated by the hold icon b3. The button hold pending icon b3 is a variation icon a2 with the display mode unchanged. The fluctuation icon a2 gradually moves toward the fluctuation icon display area a.

  FIG. 304 (h) shows a state where the fluctuation icon a2 has moved to the fluctuation icon display area a. The display mode of the fluctuation icon a2 changes after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area a is completed. For example, the change icon a2 changes to a display mode of a pattern drawn as “heat” in a circle of red (indicated by cross hatching in the figure), and a notice display of a special figure 1 change game being executed ( It has become a notice of the change).

As shown in FIGS. 304 (a) to 304 (d) of this embodiment, the automatic button mode may be activated during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may be automatically operated. As shown in FIGS. 304 (e) to 304 (h), the automatic button mode may not operate during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 is not automatically operated. When cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may be activated, or when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode May operate. Further, when cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode does not have to be activated, or when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, The auto button mode may not operate (Example 7)

  FIG. 305 shows an example of effect display in a seventh example of the present embodiment in time series. The left side of FIG. 305 shows the decorative symbol display device 208 etc., and the right side shows the chance button 136 viewed from the player.

  FIG. 305 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of this embodiment, a princess dance super reach is performed where the princess dances.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the effect of operating the chance button 136 in a timely manner is executed. In order to notify of this, at the start of the princess dance super reach, a character string of "hime princess SP reach ~ press flowing buttons with good timing! ~" Is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 305 (b) shows a state in which the princess dance super reach has been started. The activation period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the princess dance super reach. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 lights up.

  Further, in the effect display area 208d, the image of the princess, the chance button image g, and the aiming frame h are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from the top toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically at timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 305 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, the chance button 136 is movable by drive means such as a motor or a solenoid. At the timing when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, it is retracted as if the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may be operated to protrude upward. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is provided with a driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed by operating the driving means according to the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the drive means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the auto button mode being set to ON. For example, the chance button 136 can be pressed by applying a force from the inside to the outside from the inside of the chance button 136 to fix the chance button 136 so as not to move or retracting the chance button 136 and fixing the chance button 136 in the retracted state. You may lose it.

  Thus, when automatically operating the chance button 136 in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is operated as if it were actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the player operates the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is automatically operated by the operation of the auto button mode. By turning off the chance button lamp 138 based on the operation, it may be possible to make the player illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, in order to make the player illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated. The appearance of the chance button 136 should be common. In this case, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the lighting condition of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, presence / absence of issuance, light emission color, brightness) At least one element among a plurality of elements such as the posture and the state of movement may be made common.

  FIG. 305 (d) shows the state after the chance button 136 has been operated automatically. As shown in FIG. 295, in mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing when all become “PERFECT”. For this reason, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, an effect image including the character string "PERFECT" is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played without operating the chance button 136 even for the player who feels that the operation of the chance button 136 is troublesome. May be shown to

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 278 to 305. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:

  Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136 and 700, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effect, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP At least one of the reach effects), and at least one of the executable effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), wherein at least one of the plurality of effects is One of the effects (for example, cut-in effect, change in button hold), and at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold), the effect The means is capable of executing at least the first effect (for example, cut-in effect (see FIG. 298)) when the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is established, the effect means can at least execute the second effect (for example, the change of the button hold in mode 3), and the first effect is The second effect is at least a different effect, and the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player, and the second condition is the condition It is characterized in that the condition may be established when the player does not operate the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to show the same effect as in the case of operating the operating means without operating the operating means even to the player who feels that the operation of the operating means is troublesome. There is a case. In addition, by providing an effect that can be viewed by not operating the operation means, there may be a new way of enjoying the game that the operation means is not operated intentionally.

(2) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention is a game console provided with effect mode control means capable of at least switching control of a plurality of effect modes, wherein at least one of the plurality of effect modes is A first effect mode (for example, non-setting of an auto button button mode), and at least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode (for example, an auto button button mode); The effect of is not performed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the effect of the second effect is not performed when the effect mode is the first effect mode The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated, and the second effect mode is the operation hand There amusement machine which automatically, is that the effect mode in which it has been operated, characterized in that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a player who does not want to operate the operation means does not operate the operation means by providing the effect to be performed only in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. In some cases there is no loss. Conversely, a player who does not want to operate the operation means may gain by not operating the operation means.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100, the effect means can at least execute an operation promotion notification (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136, a meter image), and the effect means is the effect mode Is the first effect mode, at least the operation promotion notification can be executed, and the effect means, when the effect mode is the second effect mode, the operation promotion notification It is at least executable, and the operation promotion notification is a notification to urge the player to operate the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even if the effect mode in which the operation on the operation means is automatically performed, the operation is promoted by executing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the operation means to automate the operation. It may be possible to rescue a player who is feeling backwards. In addition, it may be difficult to understand that the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode) is set by another player. In addition, since control can be made common in a plurality of effect modes, the control load can be reduced and the process of design work can be reduced.

(4) In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, a cut-in effect), and the effect means satisfies the third condition , The third effect is at least executable, the third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect, and the third condition is the operation means. It is a condition that may be established when operated by a player.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the third effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the first effect is the effect mode Is an effect to be executed when the second effect mode is the second effect mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, a game in which the player suddenly wants to operate the operation means by accepting the operation of the operation means by the player even in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. It can cope with the Moreover, in addition to the operation performed automatically, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture continuous hit effects etc. by operating the operation means manually.

(6) It is the above-mentioned game stand, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible. For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 306 "corresponding to a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 307 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  In conventional gaming machines, there was an effect that would not be executed unless the player operated the operation means. Also, in the conventional gaming machine, depending on conditions such as time-up of the operation effective period of the operation means, even when the player does not operate the operation means, the same effect as when the operation means is operated may be executed. there were. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect to be executed based on the operation of the operation means is likely to be monotonous, and the predetermined effect is executed at the determined timing, so the player is started. There is a problem that it is easy to predict the contents of the presentation and it is easy to get bored with the presentation.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment makes various effects to be performed based on the operation of the operation means, and randomizes the timing of effect execution, thereby providing effects to be started by the player. This makes it difficult to predict the contents of the game, and can be used to create timeless effects.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows (Appendix 1)

A game console comprising: operation means provided at a position where a player can operate, and at least one of a plurality of effects, at least one of the effect means capable of performing, among the plurality of effects Is at least a first effect, at least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, and the effect means, when the first condition is satisfied, The first effect is at least executable, and the effect means is at least capable of executing the second effect when the second condition is satisfied, and the first effect is The second effect is at least a different effect, and the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player, and the second condition is , The operation means is not operated by the player When the a condition which may be satisfied, amusement machine, characterized in that (Note 2)

It is a game stand according to appendix 1, and the game stand provided with effect mode control means capable of at least switching control of a plurality of effect modes, wherein at least one of the plurality of effect modes is The first effect mode is one, at least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode, and the first effect is performed when the effect mode is the first effect mode. The second effect is an effect that is not performed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the operation means automatically performs the first effect mode. It is an effect mode which is not to be operated, and the second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated. Appendix 3

In the game stand according to appendix 2, the effect means can at least execute an operation promotion notification, and the effect means is the operation when the effect mode is the first effect mode. At least the promotion notification can be executed, and the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification when the effect mode is the second effect mode, and the operation promotion notification is , A notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means, game console characterized by (claim 4)

It is a game stand according to appendix 2 or 3, wherein at least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect, and the effect means is when there is a fulfillment of the third condition. The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect, and the third condition is that the operation means is operated by the player Is a condition that may hold in the case of playing a game (claim 5)

It is a game stand according to appendix 4, and the third effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode, and the first effect is the effect mode Game console characterized by being an effect to be executed when the second effect mode is the second effect mode (Appendix 6)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  <Other Embodiments (Embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display)>

  Next, another embodiment (an embodiment in which at least a part of an elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold icon) according to another embodiment of the present invention (for example, ball games such as flippers and ball games such as ball games and slot machines) Will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 308 to 313 are basically used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment Priority is given to the symbols shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 308 to FIG. 313, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as the above embodiment. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  In the present embodiment, another example will be described in which the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) performs display regarding the operation of the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). In the following description, as another example, another example of the operation means image display for performing display regarding the operation of the operation means by the same processing as the operation means image display processing described in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an outline of operation means image display of the present embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 While displaying the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for displaying the hold pattern, for example, the hold display on the lower end portion in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold display is, for example, a hold icon PI. In addition, the hold icon PI in the present embodiment indicates a default hold display (here, a normal hold icon PI_D (for example, a circular icon)) indicating normal (default) hold, and a pre-reading hold display (pre-reading advance notice effect) And a pre-read holding icon PI_P (for example, an icon of the character "Hani") which is a kind of icon. The operation means image display according to the present embodiment covers at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and this display example will be described in detail below.
<Example A-1 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 309 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment A-1 in time series. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, a reserved display area 700 is provided, for example, near the center lower end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold display area 700, a hold icon PI is displayed. In the example shown in (a) of the figure, normal reserve icons PI_D1 and PI_D2 indicating that there are two reservations of special views (for example, special view 1), and suspension of prefetch notice of special views (for example, special view 1) A read ahead holding icon PI_P indicating that there is one is displayed. In the following description, although the case of displaying the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 will be described as an example, the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 may be displayed, or the arrangement of Special diagrams 1 and 2 may be displayed. The numbers may be displayed respectively.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state by which the decoration symbol was stopped and displayed on the left symbol display area 208a, the inside symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  As for the timing shown in the same figure (b), one reserve of special figure 1 is digested and fluctuation game of special figure 1 is started, decoration is done in left design display area 208a, inside design display area 208b and right design display area 208c. The symbol shows the state in which the variable display has been started. At this timing, the move animation of the hold icon is executed. As a result, the hold icon PI_D1 in which the hold icon PI_D2 in (a) of the figure is moved to the position next to the left and the pre-read hold icon PI_P which is moved from the position shown in FIG. .

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) is the 1st operation means image corresponding to operation of the chance button 136 triggered by arrival of the start timing of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136 while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed near the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in front of the decorative symbol). In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image in which the scale of the meter is filled is displayed below the first operation means image BG1 and behind the prefetch holding icon PI_P in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by at least a part of the prefetch holding icon PI_P moved by the moving animation of the holding icon (a part of the holding icon PI is the first By overlapping the elapsed time notification image TG1, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state in which the player can not or can not visually recognize. Note that, in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered only by the prefetch suspension icon PI_P, and is not covered by the normal suspension icon PI_D1.

  The timing shown in the figure (d) shows a state where the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is performed. In this example, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 indicates the display of an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Say. Also in this case, at least a portion (of reduced display) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P, so that at least a portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (scale of the meter) is It is considered as invisible or difficult to view.

  By doing this, it is possible to make a variety of effects possible and to make it easy for the player to pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure indicates a state immediately before the end of the reception period when the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 disappears. Also in this case, at least a portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the pre-reading suspension icon PI_P, so that at least a portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is rendered invisible or difficult to recognize. There is. At this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 disappears, and the reduction display of the scale of the meter (first elapsed time notification image TG1) is indicated by the prefetch holding icon PI_P. It will not be covered.

  In the timing shown in (f) in the figure, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed between the timing shown in (d) in the figure and the timing shown in (e) in the figure (during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). Show the situation.

  By operating the chance button 136, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed small (for example, the reduced display of the decorative symbol) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size, for example. The notice image TG1 is erased, and the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the character display “Hold after 2 rotations!” And the character image (殿) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 An effect to be displayed in the area is executed.

  In the hold display area 700, the normal hold icon PI_D1 and the prefetch holding icon PI_P are continuously displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (g) is the state after the figure (e) or the figure (f), and the notice effect ends, and again in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 The state (for example, the state which rushes into a special reach) where the change display of the decoration design was started is shown. In the hold display area 700, the normal hold icon PI_D1 and the prefetch holding icon PI_P are continuously displayed. In the same figure (c)-the same figure (g), pre-reading reservation icon PI_P has executed waiting animation.

In this example, the prefetch holding icon PI_P covers the vicinity of the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the end of the reception period of the operation means), but the prefetch holding icon PI_P is the first. It covers the vicinity of the right end of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the start time of the reception period of the operation means) and the vicinity of the center of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (near the middle time of the reception period of the operation means) The same is true for the following embodiments.
<Example A-2 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 310 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the embodiment A-2. In any of the embodiments of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 310 and the drawings up to FIG. 313, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 and in front of the decorative symbol. A state in which the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed is shown.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state by which several pending | holding icon PI is displayed on the pending | holding display area 700, and any one pending | holding icon PI covers the 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG1. More specifically, three normal suspension icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch suspension icon PI_P are displayed, and only the prefetch suspension icon PI_P is a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (e.g. (The right end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 showing the start time point) (only the prefetch holding icon PI_P overlaps with a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the first elapsed time notification image A part of the TG 1 shows a state in which the player can not or can not visually recognize.

  In the timing shown in (a-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) of the figure, that is, notification of the first elapsed time It shows a state where the reduction display of the image TG1 is being performed. At this timing, three normal suspension icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch suspension icon PI_P are displayed, and only the prefetch suspension icon PI_P is, for example, the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (that is, reception of the operation means Although the cover of the start of the period is covered, the reduced display (scale (filled portion) of the meter) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not covered by the prefetch suspension icon PI_P (and the normal suspension icons PI_D1 to PI_D3). In this example, the fourth (right end) hold icon PI indicates the prefetch hold icon PI_P, but the first to third hold icon PI (normally held icon PI_D1 to PI_D3 hold icon) It may be a pre-read holding icon PI_P. When the hold icon at the position of the normal hold icon PI_D1 is the prefetch hold icon PI_P, the end point of the reception period of the operation means (the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and the normal hold icon When the pending icon at the position of PI_D2 or PI_D3 is the prefetch pending icon PI_P, the point in the middle of the reception period of the operation means (the middle part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch pending icon PI_P, but other than that In the period of (1), the reduced display (scale (filled portion) of the meter) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P.

  That is, in this example, a part of the reduced display (scale (filled portion) of the meter) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch suspension icon PI_P, but as time passes (in other periods) The reduced display of the elapsed time notification image TG1 of 1 is not covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P, and can be visually recognized by the player.

  By doing this, it is possible to make a variety of effects possible and to make it easy for the player to pay attention to (the reduced display of) the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  Further, in the timing shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of prefetch holding icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3 and PI_P4 cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, that is, all the holding icons PI have a first progress. It shows a state of overlapping with the time notification image TG1. In this example, the right end portion (start time of reception period of operation means) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the prefetch holding icon PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, PI_P4, the middle portion (operation Both the middle point of the accepting period of the means and the left end (the end point of the accepting period of the operation means) are neither visible nor difficult for the player.

  In the timing shown in (b-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (b) of FIG. It shows a state where the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. In this case, the plurality of prefetch hold icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3 and PI_P4 all overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is performed. It overlaps with this. Thereby, the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times in the case where it is covered by the plurality of suspension icons PI and in the case where it is not covered. The reduction display can be made easy to draw attention several times.

  Note that at least one of the plurality of prefetch hold icons PI_P1 to PI_P4 may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1).

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates that the plurality of suspension icons PI are the normal suspension icons PI_D1 to PI_D4, and none of them (all the suspension icons PI) cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ing. In this case, the right end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle time of the reception period of the operation means) Any of the end points of the reception period of the operation means is visible to the player.

  In the timing shown in (c-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (c) of the same, and the first elapsed time notifying image It shows a state where the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. Also in this case, since the plurality of suspension icons PI do not cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is always visible to the player.

In this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 has been described as being displayed at a position overlapping only the prefetch holding icon PI_P. However, depending on the gaming state (effect), only the prefetch holding icon PI_P of this embodiment is displayed. Only one of the overlapping position, the position overlapping the normal holding icon PI_D shown in the embodiment A-3 described later, and the position not overlapping any of the holding icon PI shown in the embodiment A-4 described later Or, only two may be selected, or any two may be switched by the effect, or three may be switched by the effect.
<Example A-3 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 311 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of the embodiment A-3, wherein the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlaps with any of the hold icon PI (normally hold icon PI_D and prefetch hold icon PI_P). It is an example displayed at the position.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure shows a state in which all of the three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch hold icon PI_P cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In this case, the right end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle time of the reception period of the operation means) In any of the end points of the reception period of the operation means, the player can not or can not visually recognize.

  In the timing shown in (a-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) of the same, and the first elapsed time notifying image It shows a state where the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. All the reserved icons PI overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and also overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 when the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed. As a result, the reduced display (filled portion) of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times when covered and not covered by the plurality of holding icons PI, and the player is notified of the first elapsed time The image TG1 (the reduced display of the image TG1) can be easily noticed several times.

  Further, the timing shown in FIG. 7B indicates that a plurality of suspension icons PI (in this case, four prefetch suspension icons PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, PI_P4) cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. ing. In this example, the right end portion (start time of reception period of operation means) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the prefetch holding icon PI_P1, PI_P2, PI_P3, PI_P4, the middle portion (operation Both the middle point of the accepting period of the means and the left end (the end point of the accepting period of the operation means) are neither visible nor difficult for the player. In addition to this, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part of the hold icon PI, making it invisible or difficult for the player.

  In the timing shown in (b-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (b) of FIG. It shows a state where the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. All the reserved icons PI overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and also overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 when the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed. Thereby, the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is repeated a plurality of times in the case where it is covered by the plurality of suspension icons PI and in the case where it is not covered. The reduction display can be made easy to draw attention several times.

  Further, in the timing shown in (c) of the figure, the plurality of suspension icons PI are normal suspension icons PI_D1 to PI_D4, and all show a state in which a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered. In this case, the right end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle time of the reception period of the operation means) In any of the end points of the reception period of the operation means, the player can not or can not visually recognize.

In the timing shown in (c-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (c) of the same, and the first elapsed time notifying image It shows a state where the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. Also in this case, the plurality of suspension icons PI cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the plurality of suspension icons PI and is not covered Is repeated several times.
<Example A-4 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 312 is a view showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment A-4, wherein the first elapsed time notification image TG1 does not overlap with any of the hold icon PI (normal hold icon PI_D and prefetch holding icon PI_P) It is an example displayed at the position.

  In the timing shown in (a) of the figure, none of the three normal hold icons PI_D1 to PI_D3 and one prefetch hold icon PI_P cover the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is The status is displayed at a position not overlapping the hold icon PI. In this case, the right end portion of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the start time of the reception period of the operation means), the middle portion (the middle time of the reception period of the operation means) Any of the end points of the reception period of the operation means is visible to the player.

  In the timing shown in (a-1) of the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notifying image TG1 gradually decreases from the timing shown in (a) of the same, and the first elapsed time notifying image It shows a state where the decrease display of TG1 is being executed. Since all the reserved icons PI do not overlap the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is always visible to the player.

  In the case of (b) and (b-1) in the figure, in the case of (a) and (a-1) in the figure, all pending icons PI are prefetch pending icons PI_P (PI_P1 to PI_P4). Other than that is the same as (a) in the figure and (a-1) in the figure, so the detailed description will be omitted.

In the same figure (c) and the same figure (c-1), all the pending icons PI in the same figure (a) and the same figure (a-1) are the normal pending icons PI_D (PI_D1 to PI_D4). This example is the same as the figures (a) and (a-1) except for the example, so the detailed description will be omitted.
<Example A-5 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 313 is a diagram showing an operation means image display of Example A-5, wherein the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a kind of suspension display and is a fluctuation display corresponding to the special view fluctuation game (this example Is a display example overlapping with the fluctuation icon CI).

  In this case, for example, the left end portion of the reserve display area 700 is secured as the fluctuation icon display area 702, and the fluctuation icon CI indicating the fluctuation is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 702. The fluctuation icon CI covers a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, the left end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 indicating the end time of the reception period). Although illustration is omitted, in this example, in the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 not covered by the fluctuation icon CI, when the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is executed, the decrease The display (filled portion) becomes visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, another hold icon PI (the prefetch hold icon PI_P or the normal hold icon PI_D) also shows a case where a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered, but only the change icon CI is the first A part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 may be covered, and the prefetch holding icon PI_P or the normal holding icon PI_D may not cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  <Other Embodiments (Embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered by a suspension display for performing animation)>

  Next, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (embodiment in which at least a part of elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display performing animation). A description will be given in detail of the spinning drum). Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 314 to 317 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 314 to FIG. 317 use the same reference numerals as the same constituent elements as the above embodiment. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  In the present embodiment, another example of the operation means image display for performing the display regarding the operation of the operation means will be described.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing an outline of operation means image display according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 While displaying the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for displaying the hold icon PI, for example, at the lower end portion in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The type of the hold icon PI is the same as that of the above embodiment. The operation means image display of the present embodiment covers at least a portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 with at least a portion of the hold icon PI, and the animation of the hold icon PI causes the first elapsed time notification image TG1 to be covered. The displayed area changes, and this display example will be described in detail below.
<Example B-1 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 315 is a diagram chronologically showing an operation means image display of the example B-1. The figure (a) is an example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the figure (b) and the figure (c) are an example of animation display of reservation icon PI.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, a reserved display area 700 is provided, for example, near the center lower end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold display area 700 is an area in which the hold icon PI is displayed as in the embodiment immediately above, and the left end is secured as the variable icon display area 702.

  In this example, three normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3 and a prefetch hold icon PI_P are displayed in the hold display area 700, and a change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Then, the prefetch suspension icon PI_P is executing an animation (increase animation of suspension icon) to be executed when the suspension is increased and a new suspension icon is displayed.

  That is, at the timing shown in the upper part of FIG. 6A, the character “Hani”, which is the prefetch holding icon PI_P, appears from the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the vicinity of the head is displayed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the fluctuation icon CI at the left end, but an area other than the left end Is not covered with any of the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3, and the prefetch hold icon PI_P, and is visible to the player.

  In the timing shown in the middle drawing of FIG. 6A, the character "Hani" moves further upward and the vicinity of the upper body is displayed. At this timing, a portion in the vicinity of the right end of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered with the prefetch holding icon PI_P (overlap ), Or invisible to the player. Further, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues to overlap with the fluctuation icon CI, and does not overlap with the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, and PI_D3 near the central portion.

  At the timing shown in the lower part of FIG. 6A, the character "Hani" moves further upward and the whole body is displayed. At this timing, the area in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered (overlapped) with the prefetch holding icon PI_P has changed from the case in the middle diagram of FIG. Area is increasing). Further, the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues to overlap with the fluctuation icon CI, and does not overlap with the normal hold icons PI_D1, PI_D2, and PI_D3 near the central portion.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, part of the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the increase animation of the reserved icon whose display mode changes as time passes (pending icon PI) By partially overlapping the first elapsed time notification image TG1, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is made invisible or difficult to be recognized by the player. By doing this, it is possible to make a variety of effects possible and to make it easy for the player to pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  Note that FIG. 6A shows the case where all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter) is filled, but the first elapsed time notification image TG1 starts to be displayed in a reduced manner. Then, the reduced display (filled portion) may be covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P as time passes, or may not be covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P and may be visible to the player. In addition, even when the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time) is executed by executing the increase animation of the prefetch holding icon PI_P. The area covered with the decrease display of the notification image TG1 changes with time. Specifically, in the example of the figure (a), the lower one of the figure (a) is the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time) than the middle figure of the figure (a) The area in which the notification image TG1 is reduced and displayed is covered by the pre-reading suspension icon PI_P is increased. This is the same in each example of this embodiment.

  By doing this, it is possible to make it easy for the player to pay attention to (the reduction display of) the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) shows a case in which the area covered by the prefetch suspension icon PI_P increases, but the prefetch suspension icon The area covered by PI_P may increase or may change so as to repeatedly decrease and increase.

  The figure (b) is a figure which shows an example of the increase animation of the prefetch holding | maintenance icon PI_P of the figure (a). In this example, the character "Hani", which is the pre-read holding icon PI_P, appears from below the decorative symbol display device 208, gradually moves upward, displays the entire after displaying the effect image on the background, and displays the effect image. It shows the case of executing an increase animation that erases and displays the entire prefetch suspension icon PI_P.

  The figure (c) is a figure which shows an example of the increase animation of normal reservation icon PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3). When the hold of the normal hold icon PI_D also increases, an increase animation of the hold icon whose display mode is changed may be executed. In this example, a circular normal hold icon PI appears from below the decorative symbol display unit 208, displays the effect image on the background after being displayed in full, and executes an increase animation of the hold icon to return to the original circular image. ing. In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image) is displayed by a part of the normal suspension icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal suspension icon PI_D (for example, at the timing of displaying the effect image). The reduced display of TG1 may be covered, in which case the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the normal hold icon PI_D changes It is good also as things.

Alternatively, when displaying the fluctuation icon CI, an increase animation of the fluctuation icon CI may be executed, whereby the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the decrease display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed. The area covered by the fluctuation icon CI may be changed.
<Example B-2 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 316 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means of the embodiment B-2 in time series. The figure (a) is an example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the figure (b) and the figure (c) are an example of animation display of reservation icon PI.

  In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the standby animation of the prefetch holding icon PI_P, and the prefetching is performed with the passage of time. The area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the reserved icon PI_P changes.

  That is, in the figure (a), the waiting animation of the prefetch holding icon PI_P is executed in the upper, middle, and lower figures, and in any case, the prefetch holding icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap. However, part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P displayed in different display modes depending on the respective timings. In addition, the covered area is changing. Other than this, since it is the same as Example B-1, the explanation is omitted.

  The figure (b) is a figure which shows an example of the waiting animation of pre-reading reservation icon PI_P of the figure (a). In this example, the character “Hani”, which is the prefetch suspension icon PI_P, rotates while walking, and executes an animation that changes from being substantially front facing to being facing back (repeating this). In the example shown in (a) of the figure, the display modes from the first to the third from the left of the character "Hani" in (b) of the figure are displayed. The area overlapping with TG1 is different.

  The figure (c) is a figure which shows an example of the increase animation of normal reservation icon PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3). Also in the present embodiment, the normal hold icon PI_D may execute an increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases, and in this example, the circular normal hold icon PI is gradually deformed to become a vertically-long oval again An animation of increasing the pending icon is executed to return to the original circular image (repeat this). In addition, it is also possible that the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by a part of the normal suspension icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal suspension icon PI_D. In that case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the normal hold icon PI_D may be changed.

Alternatively, when displaying the fluctuation icon CI, the standby animation of the fluctuation icon CI may be executed, whereby the first elapsed time notification image TG1 covered by the fluctuation icon CI (or the first elapsed time notification image The area of TG1 reduced display) may be changed.
<Example B-3 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 317 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means of the embodiment B-3 in time series. The figure (a) is an example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the figure (b) and the figure (c) are an example of animation display of reservation icon PI.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the moving animation of the prefetch holding icon PI_P, and the prefetching is performed with the passage of time. The area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the reserved icon PI_P changes.

  That is, the timing shown in the upper part of the figure (a) is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon CI of the variation and three normal suspension icons PI_D (PI_D1, PI_D2, PI_D3), 1 Two pre-read pending icons PI_P are displayed.

  The timing shown in the middle of the figure (a) shows a state in which one hold is digested and the next variation game (variation display of the decoration symbol) is started. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed in front of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and the fluctuation icon CI displayed in the upper view of FIG. Move down to the lower part of the fluctuation icon display area 702, execute a decrease (erasing) animation, and the digested first normal hold icon PI_D1 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 702, and the second normal hold icon PI_D2 The third normal hold icon PI_D3 and the prefetch hold icon PI_P execute a moving animation (digestion animation) in which one moves to the left.

  A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the moving animation of the prefetch suspension icon PI_P.

  The timing shown in the lower part of the figure (a) shows a state in which the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon CI indicating the change is displayed in the change icon display area 702, and 2 in the hold display area 700. Two normal hold icons PI_D1 and PI_D2 and a read ahead hold icon PI_P are displayed (each of which is executing a wait animation).

  A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P of a display mode different from that in the middle view of FIG. The covered area is changing.

  The figure (b) is a figure which shows an example of the moving animation of the prefetch holding | maintenance icon PI_P of the figure (a). In this example, the character “Hani”, which is the pre-read holding icon PI_P, rotates while walking, and executes an animation that changes from being substantially frontal to being substantially horizontal (it is repeated).

  The figure (c) is a figure which shows an example of the movement (digestion) animation of normal reserve icon PI_D. In this example, the normal hold icon PI_D changes (deletes) the normal hold icon corresponding to the digested hold into a variable icon when the hold is digested, as shown in FIG. Execute move animation to move the display position of other pending icons. In this example, the circular normal holding icon PI is gradually deformed into a vertically-long oval, and a moving animation is performed to move the display position while returning to the original circular image (repeating this process).

  Incidentally, it is also possible that the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by a part of the normal suspension icon PI_D during the increase animation of the normal suspension icon PI_D. In that case, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the normal hold icon PI_D may be changed.

  Alternatively, the waiting animation of the fluctuation icon CI may be executed at the timing of the upper part of FIG. 6A, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image covered by the waiting animation) The area of TG1 reduced display) may be changed.

  Alternatively, the area of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) covered by the reduction (erasing) animation of the fluctuation icon CI at the timing of the middle drawing of FIG. May change.

  <Other Embodiments (Embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display, and the hold display changes the display position due to a change in the number of holds)>

  Next, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine according to another embodiment of the present invention (embodiment in which at least a part of the elapsed time notification display is covered with a hold display and the hold display changes the display position due to a change in hold number) Etc.) will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 318 to FIG. 320 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 318 to 320 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 318 to FIG. 320, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as the above embodiment. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  The present embodiment describes another example of the operation means image display for performing display regarding the operation of the operation means.

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing an outline of operation means image display of the present embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 near the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 While displaying the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for displaying the hold icon PI, for example, at the lower end portion in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation means image display of the present embodiment covers at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 with at least a part of the hold icon PI, and changes the display number of the hold icon PI (the display number of the hold icon PI The area over which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered changes depending on increase or decrease), and this display example will be described in detail below.
<Example C-1 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 319 is a diagram in which the operation means image display of the embodiment C-1 is shown in time series, and here, the case of the priority variable machine of the special view 2 is shown as an example.

  In the timing shown in (a) of the figure, three normal suspension icons PI_D11, PI_D12 and PI_D13 of the special diagram 1 and the prefetch suspension icon PI_P are displayed in the suspension display area 700, and the fluctuation icon CI is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 702. It is done. Then, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is covered by the fluctuation icon CI at the left end, and in the vicinity of the right end, the prefetch holding icon PI_P It is covered and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize or make invisible. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the central portion, the icons are not covered by the normal hold icons PI_D11, PI_D12, PI_D13, and are visible to the player.

  If one game ball wins in the second special view starting port 232 (electric chew) as shown in the same figure (b) after the timing shown in the same figure (a), the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is one. To increase.

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) has shown the state as which normal reservation icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2 was displayed on the number display area 700 of pending | holdings, when the number of reservations of special figure 2 increases one.

  This embodiment is the priority variable machine of Special Figure 2, and when the special order 2 (preferential side) hold increases, the first hold to be digested next becomes the special order 2 hold, At the left end of the hold display area 700 (next to the right of the variation icon display area 702), the normal hold icon PI_D21 of the special view 2 (priority side) is displayed. Along with this, a special animation icon PI_D11, PI_D12, PI_D13 of the special view 1 (non-priority side) and a preliminary reading suspension icon PI_P are executed with a save animation that is saved on the right side in this example.

  As a result, the prefetch holding icon PI_P moves one hold icon to the right more than in the case (a) of the figure, overlaps with the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the prefetch holding icon PI_P The area in which the elapsed time notification image TG1 overlaps with one changes. That is, in the figure (a), the entire width of the prefetch holding icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but in the figure (c), approximately 1 of the entire width of the prefetch holding icon PI_P. The area / 2 overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the area in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI (the two overlap) changes due to the increase of the hold icon PI (here, the area decreases). .

  Further, the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visible to the player in FIG. (A), but is invisible to the player or hard to recognize in FIG. (C). .

  The same figure (d)-(f) has shown the timing which is similar to the timing which is shown in the same figure (a)-(c), but 2 game balls in 2nd special figure starting opening 232 (electric chew) Is a display example in the case of winning. The timing shown in FIG. 6D is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  If two game balls win in the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) as shown in the figure (e) after the timing shown in the figure (d), the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is two. To increase.

  The timing shown to the figure (f) has shown the state as which normal reserve icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2, and PI_D22 were displayed.

  When the reserve of special figure 2 (the priority side) increases and the normal reserve icons PI_D21 and PI_D22 of the special figure 2 (the priority side) are displayed at the left end of the reserve display area 700 (next to the right of the variation icon display area 702), In the special figure 1 (non-priority side) normal saving icons PI_D11, PI_D12, PI_D13 and the prefetching pending icon PI_P, a save animation is performed in which the save animation on the right side is executed in this example.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P moves to the right by two reserve icons more than in the case of FIG. 6D, and the area in which the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1 changes. . That is, although the entire width of the prefetch holding icon PI_P overlaps with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in FIG. 7D, the prefetch holding icon PI_P is the first elapsed time in FIG. The notification image TG1 does not overlap, and there is no region where the two overlap (the area where the two overlap is reduced).

  Further, although the vicinity of the right end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 has become invisible or difficult to be recognized by the player in FIG. (D), it becomes visible to the player in FIG. (F). There is.

  By doing this, it is possible to make a variety of effects possible and to make it easy for the player to pay attention to the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  Note that FIG. 6 illustrates the case where all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale of the meter) is filled, but when the first elapsed time notification image TG1 starts to decrease, The reduction display (filled portion) may be covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P as time passes, or may not be covered by the prefetch holding icon PI_P and may be visible to the player. Also, even when the reduced display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the pre-reading suspension icon PI_P, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed by increasing or decreasing the number of displayed suspension icons PI. The area covered with the reduced display of the elapsed time notification image TG1 changes. This is the same in each example of this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the case of displaying the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the reserve icon of the special view 2 in one reserve display area 700 has been described as an example, but the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the reserve of the special view 2 The icons may be displayed in separate hold display areas.
<Example C-2 of displaying an operation means image>

  FIG. 320 is a diagram in which the operation means image display of the embodiment C-2 is shown in time series, and here also shows the case of the priority variable machine of the special figure 2 as an example.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6A, only the prefetch holding icon PI_P of the special view 1 is displayed in the hold display area 700, and the change icon CI is displayed in the change icon display area 702. Then, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is not covered by the fluctuation icon CI and the prefetch suspension icon PI_P, and all of them are used by the player. It is visible.

  When one gaming ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) as shown in FIG. 6 (b) after the timing shown in FIG. 6 (a), the special figure 2 (priority side) is suspended. The number increases by one.

  In the timing shown in (c) of the figure, when the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is increased by one, the normal suspension icon PI_D21 of Special Figure 2 is displayed at the left end of the number of reservations display area 700. In this example, the pre-reading suspension icon PI_P on the priority side indicates a state in which a saving animation for saving on the right side has been executed.

  As a result, the prefetch holding icon PI_P moves to the right by one holding icon more than in the case of FIG. 6A, and overlaps with the vicinity of the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. That is, the area in which the prefetch suspension icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1 changes (here, increases).

  Further, although the vicinity of the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is visible to the player in FIG. (A), it becomes invisible or difficult to be viewed by the player in FIG. (C). There is.

  As described above, the area in which the holding icon PI and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may be increased as the number of holdings increases.

  (D) in the figure shows the timing after the timing shown in (c) in the figure, and the fluctuation icon CI, the two normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 of the special figure 1, and the prefetch holding icon PI_P of the special figure 1 Shows a state where and are displayed. In this state, the fluctuation icon CI and the two normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 do not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image TG1, but the prefetch holding icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1. There is.

  When one gaming ball wins the second special figure starting port 232 (electric chew) as shown in FIG. 6 (e) after the timing shown in FIG. 6 (d), the number of reservations in special figure 2 is one. To increase.

  The timing shown to the figure (f) has shown the state in which the normal hold icon PI_D21 of the special figure 2 was displayed.

  When the reserve of special figure 2 (the priority side) increases and the normal reserve icon PI_D21 of special figure 2 (the priority side) is displayed at the left end of the reserve display area 700 (next to the right of the variation icon display area 702) In this example, a save animation for saving the normal hold icons PI_D11 and PI_D12 of 1 (non-priority side) and the prefetch holding icon PI_P to the right side is executed.

  As a result, the prefetch hold icon PI_P moves to the right by two reserve icons more than in the case of FIG. 6D, and the area in which the prefetch hold icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1 changes. . That is, although the prefetch holding icon PI_P overlaps the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in FIG. 6D, the prefetch holding icon PI_P is the first elapsed notification image TG1 in FIG. And there is no overlapping area between the two (there is a reduction in the overlapping area between the two).

  In this way, after the area where the hold icon PI and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap increases with the increase of the hold number (the same figure (a) to (c)), As the number of reservations further increases, the area in which the reservation icon PI and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may be reduced ((d) to (f) in the figure).

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (d), the suspension of Special Figure 1 is reduced by two and the prefetch suspension icon PI_P is displayed on the right of the fluctuation icon CI as shown in FIG. 320 (a). In addition, the area where the prefetch holding icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may be reduced as the number of holdings decreases. In addition, the area where the prefetch holding icon PI_P and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 overlap may be increased as the number of holdings decreases.

  As explained above, the gaming table of the present invention (for example, pachinko machine 100) includes display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208 and first sub control unit 400) and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting) And the display unit is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display unit is It is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, the hold icon PI), the first display is a display related to the operation means, and the second display is a display related to hold, The first display is a first state (eg, the first display) when the second state is the second state (eg, a state in which the second display overlaps the first display). And the display of There is not a state) is a display visibility is at least lower than it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a display. In addition, various effects can be made, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be achieved, and the visibility of the first display may be enhanced.

  Further, the first display may be a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first display as well as enabling various effects.

  Further, the gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display means may be means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player's interest can be enhanced and the player can be made to pay attention to the first display.

  In addition, the gaming table of the present invention (for example, pachinko machine 100) includes display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first sub-control unit 400) and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation portion 137). And the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is a second display. (For example, a means capable of displaying at least the hold icon PI), the first display is a display regarding the operation means, and the second display is a display regarding hold, the second The display is a display capable of animation display, and the first display is a second state (eg, a state in which the second display overlaps the first display), One state (eg , Visibility than state) in which the second display do not overlap the first display is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a display. In addition, various effects can be made, and the player may be able to focus on the first display. Also, there are cases where it is possible to change the visibility of the first display by the animation of the second display and make the player pay attention to the first display.

  The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be achieved, and the visibility of the first display may be enhanced.

  Further, the first display may be a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first display as well as enabling various effects.

  The display means may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and may be means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player's interest can be enhanced and the player can be made to pay attention to the first display.

  In addition, the gaming table of the present invention (for example, pachinko machine 100) includes display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first sub-control unit 400) and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation portion 137). And the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the display means is a second display. (For example, a means capable of displaying at least the hold icon PI), the first display is a display regarding the operation means, and the second display is a display regarding hold, the second The display is a display capable of moving the display position when there is a change in the number of reservations, and the first display indicates a second state (for example, a second display on the first display). Is overlapping When the display status is at least lower than the first state (for example, the second display does not overlap the first display). .

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to realize a game console characterized by a display. In addition, various effects can be made, and the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to change the visibility of the first display by moving the display position of the second display, and make the player pay attention to the first display.

  The second state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player may be able to focus on the first display.

  The first state may be a state in which the second display does not overlap with the first display.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be achieved, and the visibility of the first display may be enhanced.

  Further, the first display may be a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first display as well as enabling various effects.

  The display means may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and may be means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.

  According to such a configuration, a variety of effects can be made, and the player's interest can be enhanced and the player can be made to pay attention to the first display.

  As described above, in the examples of the three embodiments immediately above, the respective configurations in the example can be combined with other examples. Also, in the three embodiments immediately above, the hold indication includes a default hold indication (eg, a normal hold icon) and a prefetch hold indication (eg, a read hold icon).

  In addition, the suspension display includes a variable display (for example, a change icon) corresponding to the special figure change game.

  Further, “a display whose visibility is at least lower than that in the first state” indicates “a display in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display”. It is a thing.

  In addition, a part of the prefetch hold display is a display that overlaps a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the third case, and the default hold display is the first elapsed time in the third case. The display may not overlap with the notification image, and the third case may be a case where the display means can simultaneously display the default hold display and the prefetch hold display.

  In addition to the first elapsed time notification image, the second, third,... Elapsed time notification images may be displayed as the first display, and the second display may be displayed on each of these. It may overlap.

  Moreover, the default hold display may be a display that does not overlap the first elapsed time notification image, or may be a display that overlaps.

  In addition, the display position of the first elapsed time notification image may be any of two or more positions, and a part of the hold display is a part of the first elapsed time notification image in the fourth case. In the fifth case, the hold display is a display not overlapping the first elapsed time notification image, and in the fourth case, the display position of the first elapsed time notification image Is the first position, and the fifth case may be the case where the display position of the first elapsed time notification image is the second position.

  In addition, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part including the start position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part including the end position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, a part of the hold display may be a display that overlaps a part including the position between the start position and the end position of the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, a part of the hold display may be a display overlapping with a part of the first operation means image.

  In addition, the display means can display the hold animation by the hold display, and the display means is a part of the hold display at the first time of the hold animation than at the second time of the hold animation. A region overlapping with a part of the first elapsed time notification image may be large.

  Also, at least one of the hold animations may be a standby animation. Also, at least one of the hold animations may be an increase animation. Also, at least one of the hold animations may be a decrease animation. Also, at least one of the hold animations may be a movement animation.

  Also, the second display may be a display that may not display an animation. Further, the second display may be a display that performs at least one of a standby animation, an increase animation, a decrease animation, and a movement animation, and does not perform at least one other than the one. In addition, the second display may be a display that does not perform standby animation but performs increase animation.

  In addition, in the holding animation period, the overlapping area may increase over time, or the overlapping area may decrease over time.

  Also, any one or more of the standby animation, the increase animation, the reduction animation, and the movement animation may overlap, or any one or more may not overlap.

  Further, in the case of the first hold number, the display means has a size of an area where a part of the hold display overlaps with a part of the first elapsed time notification image than in the case of the second hold number. It may be large.

  Further, the first number of reservations may be smaller or larger than the second number of reservations.

  Further, the display unit may be capable of executing display according to the change in the number of holdings in the display period of the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the display unit may be capable of executing display according to the increase in suspension of the special view 2 in the display period of the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the size of the overlapping area may be different in the case where the reserve of special figure 2 increases by 1 and when it increases by 2 or more.

  Also, it may overlap only a specific display during pending animation (increase animation, wait animation, change animation, move animation, decrease animation).

  In addition, pending animation (increase animation, wait animation, change animation, movement animation, decrease animation) is composed of two or more displays, and at least one of the displays is overlapped. It is also good.

  In addition, only one or more of the multiple displays (pending animation), only one or more than the last, any one or more except the first, any one or more except the last, one or more only one or more except the first and the last It may be

  In addition, a button icon may be displayed as a hold icon. Further, the button icon may display the first elapsed time notification image together.

  Also, another hold icon may overlap the first elapsed time notification image of the button icon.

  In addition, the moving animation from when the hold is 1 to when the hold is 0 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the moving animation from when the hold is 2 to when the hold is 1 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the moving animation from when the hold is 3 to when the hold is 2 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the moving animation from when hold is 4 to when hold is 3 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the moving animation from when the hold is 5 to when the hold is 4 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  Further, the increase animation from the case where the hold is 1 to the case where the hold is 2 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the moving animation from when the hold is 2 to when the hold is 3 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the moving animation from when the hold is 3 to when the hold is 4 may or may not overlap with the first elapsed time notification image.

In addition, the moving animation from when hold is 4 to when hold is 5 may or may not overlap the first elapsed time notification image.
In addition, the first elapsed time notification image may display a plurality of two or more.

  Further, the display means is not limited to the reduction display of the first elapsed time notification image (display of the image in which the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases (decreases)), and the increase display of the first elapsed time notification image ( The meter (filled portion) may gradually display more (larger) images.

  Further, the hold icon may or may not overlap at least one of the first elapsed time notification image and the second elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image may overlap with the hold icon, and the second elapsed time notification image may not overlap with the hold icon.

  Alternatively, the first hold icon may overlap with the first elapsed time notification image, and the second hold icon may overlap with the second elapsed time notification image.

  In addition, the plurality of suspension icons can simultaneously display moving animations, and there may be suspension icons that do not overlap with the suspension icon overlapping the first elapsed time notification image before and after the movement animation.

  Alternatively, the hold icon may be displayed so as to overlap after the first elapsed time notification image is displayed, or the first elapsed time notification image may be overlapped after the hold icon is displayed. You may display it.

Further, the hold animation may or may not overlap at least one of the start position, the end position, and the middle position of the first elapsed time notification image.
Also, the hold animation may be performed simultaneously for two or more holds.

  In addition, when two or more game balls are winning at the start opening substantially simultaneously, the hold increase animation may be displayed simultaneously for a plurality of hold icons, or even if only the hold increase animation is displayed for the game balls winning later. Good.

  Further, the second display may be a display that may not change the display position when there is a change in the number of reservations. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the special view 2 increases while the second display of the special view 2 is being displayed, the second display of the special view 2 during display may not change the display position.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) has at least a plurality of types of displays and operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. It is a game console provided with at least the display means (for example, decoration symbol display device 208, the 1st sub control part 400) which can be performed, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the first type. And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, and the first type of display is a display relating to the operation means, the first type of The display is configured to be displayable when the operation of the operation means is received, and the display of the first type is a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation Means image BG And the second type of display is a display including at least a second display (for example, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the second type of display. Is a display capable of changing the mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time, and the second type of display is a third display (for example, as shown in FIG. 30). The second type of display is an effect display, and the third display is displayed preferentially to the first display. And the third display is displayed prior to the second display, and the third display is prioritized over the second display, thereby the second display is displayed. The start position of the display is not displayed; One type of display is displayed at a position partially overlapping with the second type of display, and the second type of display is the display means prior to the first type of display It is a game console characterized by being able to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game. In addition, it may be difficult to notice the reception period and it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the gaming means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game. In addition, it may be possible to prevent a decline in the game intention due to the player missing out on the effect display (the second type display (the change icon CI)) displayed earlier. In addition, the third display (variation icon) than the first display (part of the first operation means image BG1 (image imitating the chance button) and the second display (part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) It is difficult for the player to visually recognize that it is a reception period of the operation of the operation means by preferentially displaying a part of the CI), and in particular, the second display start position (when the reception of the operation starts) is played In order to make the player invisible, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means, to concentrate on the game, to judge the necessity of the operation, and to improve the interest of the game. is there.

  The display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type of display and the second type of display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means.

  In addition, the gaming table of the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) includes operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. It is a game console provided with at least the display means (for example, decoration symbol display device 208, the 1st sub control part 400) which can be performed, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the first type. And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, and the first type of display is a display relating to the operation means, the first type of The display is configured to be at least displayable when the operation of the operation means is received, and the first type of display is a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1, the second Operation of The first type of display is a display including at least a second image (for example, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2). The second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time, and the second type of display is a third display (for example, 30 is a display including at least a part of the fluctuation icon CI, the second type of display is an effect display, and the third display is displayed with priority over the first display. The third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the start position of the second display is the second display rather than the second display. The third display is displayed preferentially, It is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the case where the display of the second display is not displayed, and the change of the display mode of the second display is displayed with the third display prior to the second display. Thus, the first type of display is displayed at a position partially overlapping the second type of display, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the third display. The display of the second type is at least capable of being displayed on the display means prior to the display of the first type.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In the case where the second display (part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) notifies the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means by the decrease display from the start position, the second display start position is The third display (effect display) is displayed with priority over the display of the second display, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display than when the third display is not displayed. By making the change of the display mode toward the end position preferentially displayed by the third display over the second display, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult to visually recognize that the user is in the reception period of the operation of the operation means, and the player may be further urged to operate the game means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game. In addition, to make it difficult to visually recognize in the third display the display mode of the second display start position (at the start of receiving the operation) and the change in the display mode from the second display start position to the end position. In addition to being able to make the player look carefully at the display means and concentrating on the game, it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type of display and the second type of display.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means.

  Further, the first display may include a display imitating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a big hit notice.

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. Further, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  Further, the display unit may be configured not to display at least the display of the first type when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is finished.

With such a configuration, if the first display is not displayed when the reception period is over, confusion and false recognition of the player that the reception period is continuing may be prevented. is there. In addition, if the first display is continued after the end of the reception period (if the determination of the necessity of the operation is continued), there is no option for the player not to operate the operation means. Although there is a risk of lowering, there are cases where it is possible to increase the player's choice in the game by hiding the first display.
Sixth Embodiment

  Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine or an enclosed game machine) according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the drawings. . Since pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as, for example, pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16 in the first embodiment, the description of its constituent elements I omit it. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 321 to 365 are basically used only for the description of the sixth embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, this embodiment can be used. In the description of FIG. 321, the reference numerals shown in FIG.

  First, among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the subsequent embodiments, configurations that are used substantially in common will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 321 (a) and 321 (g). In FIG. 321 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, a special view 1 display 212, a special view 2 display 214 and a general view display 210, a special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, a special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, and a common view reserve lamp 216 are schematically shown. Special drawing 1 display 212, special drawing 2 display 214, general drawing display 210, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, and common drawing holding lamp 216 are shown below decorative symbol display 208 The special view 2 display 214 is shown on the right of the special view 1 display 212, and the general view display 210 is shown on the right of the special view 2 display 214. The special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special view 2 display 214, and the common view hold lamp 216 is of the common view display 210. It is shown on the upper side. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the generic view display device 210, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, and the generic view reserve lamp 216 are shown in white. , The lit part is shown in black. In addition, since the reservation of the common drawing in the present embodiment can be stored up to four, four LEDs of the common drawing reservation lamp 216 are provided.

  In FIG. 321 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c are assigned to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 for performing variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined effect is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower right corner, as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for common use figure, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2 It is. While the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation, an image representing "o" is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area t1 as the special figure 1 fourth symbol. While the special figure 2 variation game is not in operation, an image representing "△" is displayed in the fourth figure display area t2 for the special figure 2 as the special figure 2 fourth symbol. While the regular game variation game is not in operation, an image representing "3" is displayed in the regular game fourth symbol display area t3 as the common figure fourth symbol. A white background image is displayed in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 as the fourth symbol during the special figure variation game or the common figure variation game.

  An area surrounded by a square frame in the lower center of the effect display area 208d is a change icon display area C capable of displaying a change icon. The fluctuation icon is an icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area C when the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area C, notification of success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game can be made with a predetermined reliability (the fluctuation advance notice). Note that the frame-shaped image on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area C). , May be always displayed, or may not always be displayed.

  Adjacent to the variation icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, a special-figure 1 reserved icon display area A of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 reserve icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of reservations are displayed. In addition, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is notified or not can be notified (predictive notice) with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserve icon. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the least reliable display mode. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special drawing 1 holding icons can be displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area A. The plurality of special view 1 hold icons are displayed in order from right to left in the special view 1 hold icon display area as the hold order becomes lower. In this example, only the special view 1 suspension icon display area is displayed, but the special view 2 suspension icon display area may be displayed together as a matter of course. In that case, for example, a special-figure 2 reserved icon display area B having a vertically-long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 reserve icon display area B is not displayed when there is no reserve for the special figure 2 and is displayed only when the reserve for the special figure 2 is accumulated, but it may be always displayed Good.

  Further, the state in which all the segments are shown in white in the special view 1 display device 212 indicates that the special view 1 variation display is being performed (see FIG. 321 (b)). The same applies to the special view 2 display device 214 and the common view display device 210. Moreover, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow (see FIG. 321 (f)).

  FIG. 321 (g) shows a state in which a button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means. The display of the button effect includes the display on the chance button 136 as the first type of display. There is a button display as the first display of the display regarding the chance button 136. The button display includes an operation request image in a display form imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “button image”) and a button operation acceptance valid period (hereinafter referred to as “operation valid period”) At least one of an effective period image indicating the rest of the item (a) and a display prompting other button operations is included. In addition, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice of advance notice executed in conjunction with the button display as a second display. The display of the button effect is performed by either still image display or animation display, or a combination of them.

The special figure fluctuation game shown in each example of the present embodiment is executed by the same control operation as that described in the first embodiment. In the example of the present embodiment, the effects to be performed in the special figure variation game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises (Example 1).

  The special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIGS. 321-325. First, an example of the flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes a big hit will be described using FIG. 321 and FIG. 322. FIG. 321 (a)-FIG. 322 (h) have shown the special figure fluctuation game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 321 (a) shows a state in which the floating game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is not in operation, and the floating-up fluctuation game is also not in operation. The special figure 1 display device 212 has stopped and displayed the "special figure F" of the removal symbol. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays the "special figure d" of the removal symbol in a stop state. The common-diagram display device 210 stops and displays the "generally-used drawing B" of the removal symbol. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stop and display the fourth symbol indicating that the game is not in operation. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, and it is informed that the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game immediately before was disapproval There is.

  Special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 reports that there are two holdings of special drawing 1. In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, it is notified that the special figure 2 is not held. It is reported that the common drawing holding lamp 216 does not hold the common drawing.

  In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, two special figure 1 reserve icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  FIGS. 321 (b) to (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. The start order of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, in this example, one LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display, and further the fourth symbol display for the special figure 1 The fourth symbol in the area t1 starts the variable display (see FIG. 321 (b)), and then the special animation 1 suspension icon reduction animation display is executed (see FIG. 321 (c) to (e)) and then The variation display of the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 321 (f)). Note that the order of the start points of these operations may be reversed.

  In the display of the reduction animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon, the special figure 1 reserve icon being displayed starts moving simultaneously in the right direction (refer to FIG. 321 (c)), and the special figure 1 with the first retention order. While the reserve icon a1 enters the variation icon display area C beyond the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, the remaining reserve icons are moved to the position one position to the right of the original position, and the hold order is raised by one. Stop (see FIGS. 321 (c) to (e)). The icon image entering the variation icon display area C is referred to as a variation icon.

  FIG. 321 (g) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character image is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarter areas. The button display in which the and the effective period image are displayed is executed. The valid period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. The player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 321 (g), but at this stage, since the button operation can not be received, the chance button Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 321 (h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 321 (g) starts. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the pressing operation is accepted when the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 321 (i) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image has become somewhat short in the right direction since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little.

  FIG. 321 (j) exemplifies a display of a button effect which is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the pressing is received. The button image and the validity period image are erased, and the image of the character string "chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be notice notification of the result of the special figure change game. In addition, it may be an advance notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by the display of the character string image.

  FIG. 321 (k) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the variable display of the decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c becomes visible.

  In FIG. 321 (l), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a state where the reach effect has been started.

  FIG. 321 (m) shows a state in which the image display of the reach effect is gradually changed to the entire white display by the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area to reduce and display the decorative symbol variation. The special figure 1 pending icon display area A, the special figure 1 pending icon, the variation icon display area C, and the variation icon are hidden during the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 321 (m) to FIG. 322 (h).

  Fig. 321 (n) to Fig. 322 (a) show a state in which SP reach effect with a scene where two warriors fight is being executed. Figure 322 (b) ~ (d) is a continuation of the SP reach effect, and it is the effect that one samurai won is made, and it is notified that the possibility of the judgment result of the change being a hit is high. doing. Moreover, in FIG. 322 (d), the state in which the combination of a decoration symbol is temporarily stopped by "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display area 208a-208c currently displayed by reduction is shown.

  FIG. 322 (e) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to the entire white display by the fade-out process. Although the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 322 (f), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position at the center of the image display area, and "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. It shows the state.

  FIG. 322 (g) shows a state in which the "special view A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special view 1 display device 212. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 of the image display area, the fourth figure showing that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" indicating stop as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 322 (h) shows a state in which the character string image of "probable variation big hit" is displayed on almost the entire surface of the image display area and it is notified that the 15R special jackpot has been won.

  322 (f ')-(h'), when the reach effect of "decoration 6" is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c in the same state as FIG. 321 (l), In place of the effects shown in FIGS. 322 (f) to 322 (h), the effects when the 15R jackpot is won are illustrated. FIG. 322 (f ') continues from FIG. 322 (e). In FIG. 322 (f '), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position at the center of the image display area, and "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is temporarily stopped as a combination of decorative symbols. Show the condition.

  FIG. 322 (g ') has shown the state as which "special figure B" of a big hit design is carrying out the stop display on the special figure 1 display apparatus 212. FIG. In the image display area, a fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the fourth figure display region t1 for special figure 1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" showing stop as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 322 (h ') shows a state in which the character string image of "big hit" is displayed on almost the entire surface of the image display area and it is notified that the 15R big hit has been won.

  FIGS. 323 (a) and (b) illustrate the continuation of another SP reach effect continuing from FIG. 322 (a), and an effect in which one samurai loses is performed, and the judgment of the variation is made. It warns that the result is likely to be lost. The special figure 1 pending icon display area A and the special figure 1 pending icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 323 (a) to (c). Moreover, in FIG. 323 (b), the state in which the combination of a decoration symbol is temporarily stopped by "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" in the symbol display area 208a-208c currently displayed by reduction is shown.

  FIG. 323 (c) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect gradually changes to the entire white display by the fade-out process. Although the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 323 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position at the center of the image display area, and "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative designs. It shows the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, the special figure 1 reserve icon, the change icon display area C, and the change icon is resumed, and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. Ru.

  FIG. 323 (e) shows a state in which the "special figure F" of the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, a fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the fourth figure display region t1 for special figure 1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" indicating stoppage as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIGS. 323 (f) to (h) show the display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon. In this example, the display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the special figure fluctuation game. The display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon may be performed at another timing. FIG. 323 (f) shows a state where the fluctuation icon starts moving downward from the fluctuation icon display area C, and the lower third of the circular outline of the fluctuation icon disappears out of the image display area. There is. FIG. 323 (g) shows a state where the fluctuation icon moves further downward and the fluctuation icon disappears out of the image display area to such an extent that the upper part of the circular outline can be slightly recognized. FIG. 323 (h) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon completely disappears from the fluctuation icon display area C and the display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is finished.

  Next, a series of display of button operation animation (hereinafter may be referred to as “button operation animation”) performed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as display means using FIGS. 324 and 325. An example of the flow of the button effect and the SP reach effect will be described. FIG. 324 (a)-FIG. 325 (e) have shown the special figure fluctuation game in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a chance button 136 as an operation means is illustrated. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening and urged upward, and sinks downward when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position It has become. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 324 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach presentation continuing from FIG. 321 (n). In FIG. 324 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 321 (o) is executed. In FIG. 324 (b), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 322 (a) is executed. In the image by SP reach effect in FIG. 324 (b), the image display area is divided up and down by the horizontal border substantially at the center, the character image of one samurai is displayed in the upper display area, and in the lower display area. The character image of the other samurai is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 324 (b), no button is displayed immediately before the start of the button operation animation, and the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 is in the extinguished state.

  324 (c) to 325 (d) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 324 (b). FIG. 324 (c) shows a state in which a button image and an effective period image are displayed simultaneously by fade-in processing on the front surface, with an image by SP reach effect as a background image. The button image and the valid period image may not be displayed at the same time, and one image may be displayed before the other image. Note that the chance button 136 may be in the light emitting state even outside the reception valid period of the button operation. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode during button operation and / or non-operation during the reception valid period.

  FIG. 324 (d) shows a button display in which the button image and the valid period image are displayed below the button image and the character image of “long press” is displayed above the button image in the button effect. The button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is accommodated in the circular opening and protrudes upward by a predetermined distance. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened, for example, in the right direction. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge (meter) image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. . The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0 (zero). The image of the button display relating to these button effects has a transmittance of 0 (zero), and is set to a display priority higher than the display priority of the background image in which the SP reach effect is being executed. For this reason, the image behind the image of the button display related to the button effect is hidden and can not be viewed. The player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 324 (d), but at this stage, since the button operation can not be received, the chance button can not be received. Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in the non-emission state (shown in white in the figure).

  FIG. 324 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 324 (d) starts. As the first button mode of the chance button 136, the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the figure). In the button display relating to the button effect, the display mode is changed such that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the button button outside the chance button pressed surface is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, after the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes, the display mode of the display of the button image changes, but it may be simultaneous, or the change of the display mode of the button image is The change of the light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be later.

  FIG. 324 (f) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image has become somewhat short in the right direction since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little. The player places his hand so as to cover the pressed surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136, and the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is the second button mode, and only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface when not pressed. Is changing from the state of the first button mode that was emitting light to the state (shown in black in the figure) in which the entire button emits light.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed, the button operation animation changes the display mode of the button image and also changes the display mode of the background image by the SP reach effect. However, immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed, only the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes, and the display of the button operation animation does not change immediately. In (f) of FIG. 324, the display mode is maintained in which only the portion corresponding to the outer periphery of the chance button pressed surface of the button image is in the light emitting state. In addition, the display mode of the background image by the SP reach effect has not changed either. In this example, after the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed, the display mode of the button image of the button operation animation and the background image is changed. The timing of the change of the light emission mode of the chance button 136 and the change of the display mode of the button image and the background image of the button operation animation may be simultaneous, and the display of the change of the display mode of the button image and the background image of the button operation animation There may be a change in the light emission mode of the chance button 136 after the start.

  In FIG. 324 (g) to FIG. 325 (d), the player keeps pressing the chance button 136 according to the request of the "long press" operation (operation to keep pressing the chance button 136 continuously) in the button effect The example of a button operation animation in a state is shown. The button image in FIG. 324 (g) is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light from a display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressed surface emits light, and the emission brightness gradually increases. ing. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is slightly depressed in the circular opening. In addition, the acceptance effective period of the button operation has further passed, and the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the background image by the SP reach effect in FIG. 324 (g), the horizontal boundary gradually moves downward and the upper display area gradually expands, while the lower display area gradually decreases It is displayed in the display mode which it keeps going.

  The button image by the display of the button operation animation in FIG. 324 (h) to FIG. 325 (a) is displayed in a display mode in which the light emission luminance of the entire button is the highest (shown in black in the drawing) . Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed into the circular opening. In addition, with the elapse of the button operation acceptance effective period, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the background image of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation in FIG. 324 (h) to FIG. 325 (a), the horizontal boundary gradually moves downward and the upper display area is further expanded downward. On the other hand, the lower display area is displayed in a display mode in which the display area decreases further downward. The chance button 136 keeps the whole button emitting light. In FIG. 325 (a), although the reception effective period of the button operation remains, the upper display area of the SP reach effect is completely expanded downward, and the lower display area disappears. There is.

  Thus, the button display as the first display in the button operation animation is a button image of a display mode in which the button as the first image as shown in FIG. 324 (f) is not pressed down; The button image of the display mode in which the button as the second image is slightly depressed and the color of the button is changed as shown in FIG. 324 and the button as the third image as shown in FIG. The button image is depressed and the color of the button is further changed, and changes from the first image to the third image through the second image when there is a long press on the chance button 136 It is displayed in the display mode.

  In this example, the button image in the button operation animation is changed after pressing the chance button 136, and the background image of the SP reach effect is displayed to change, but the button image and the background image are simultaneously displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. A change may start. Also, immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed, the change of the button image or the background image may be started.

  In FIG. 325 (b), when the chance button 136 is held down for a predetermined time, the button operation animation shifts to the next effect even during the acceptance valid period. In this case, the display of the button operation animation causes the bar-like portion of the valid period image to disappear and the same display as at the end of the acceptance valid period is displayed to notify that it is to shift to the next effect. The chance button 136, which the player keeps pressing, is in the non-emission state.

  FIG. 325C shows a state in which the button display relating to the button effect is hidden after the button operation animation has ended after the acceptance valid period of the button operation has ended. The button display relating to the button effect may be hidden at the same time as the end of the reception valid period. Also, the button image and the valid period image may be erased at the same time, or one image may be erased before the other image.

  FIG. 325 (d) is a second display of the button effect at the end of the button operation animation display on the condition that a series of button images are displayed, and the upper display area of the SP reach effect is completely downward. Display the magnified image. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 325 (e) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (c), and thereafter, through the display shown in FIG. 322 (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or 322 (f ') to The same effect as that shown in (h ') is executed.

  As described above, the button display as the first display regarding the chance button 136 according to the present embodiment is, for example, a button of a display mode in which the button is not pressed when the chance button 136 is pressed (first case) From the image (first image) through the button image (second image) of the display mode in which the button is slightly depressed and the color of the button is changed, the button is completely depressed and the button color is further changed (third image The display of the first change that changes to the Also, the chance button 136 is, for example, a button mode of a second change that changes from one light emission mode (first mode) to another light emission mode (second mode) when the chance button 136 is pressed. Is feasible. According to the present embodiment, since the display related to the chance button 136 displays the animation of the button effect when the chance button 136 is pressed, the player can easily recognize that the chance button 136 is pressed. There are times when you can. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the mode (e.g., the light emitting mode) of the chance button 136 is changed, so it may be possible to prompt the pressing of the chance button 136.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display a button display related to the chance button 136 during the operation valid period (first period) in which the pressing of the chance button 136 can be received. By doing this, since the button display is displayed during the pressing reception period of the chance button 136, it may be possible to prompt the pressing of the chance button 136.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the button display is performed but the chance button 136 is not pressed (in the third case), a display including a button image of a display mode in which the button is not pressed can be displayed is there. According to the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is not pressed during display of the button display, a button image of a display mode in which the button is not pressed is displayed, so that pressing of the end 136 of the chance can be prompted. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect display (second display) displayed after the chance button 136 is pressed, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the button is completely pressed and the color of the button is further changed Is displayed after the displayed button image (third image). By doing this, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is possible to display the effect display that is displayed after the pressing, so it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the chance button 136 has been pressed. Example 2)

  A special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIGS. 326 (a) to 326 (d), the button operation is performed when the player stops pressing the chance button 136 in the middle although the "long press" operation is requested by the button effect. The example of a display of animation is shown. FIG. 326 (a) shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 324 (i). The player keeps pressing the chance button 136, and the background image of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation gradually moves the horizontal boundary downward, and the upper display area expands downward, On the other hand, the lower display area is displayed in a display mode in which the display area decreases downward.

  FIG. 326 (b) shows a state immediately after the player releases the chance button 136 and stops pressing the button. When the player releases the button, first, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes from the state in which the entire button emits light to the state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light. On the other hand, the button image of the button operation animation maintains the same state as when the button is pressed, the entire button is displayed at the highest brightness, and the chance button is displayed in the display mode completely pressed into the circular opening. . The background image of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation is stationary while maintaining the same display state as in FIG. 326 (a).

  FIG. 326 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 maintains a light emission mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light but the emission brightness gradually decreases. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is slightly pushed up from within the circular opening. In addition, the acceptance effective period of the button operation has further passed, and the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode. The background image of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation is stationary while maintaining the same display state as in FIG. 326 (a).

  FIG. 326 (d) shows a state in which the chance button 136 maintains a light emission mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed such that only the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is illuminated. In addition, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed up from within the circular opening. In addition, the acceptance effective period of the button operation has further passed, and the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion is further shortened in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode. The background image of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation is stationary while maintaining the same display state as in FIG. 326 (a).

The background image is stopped on the display of the button operation animation in the case where the player stops pressing the chance button 136 in the middle despite the request for the “long press” operation as described above. In addition, the button display is made to move in the opposite direction to the movement shown in FIGS. 324 (f) to (h). That is, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is stopped, the button image is displayed in a display mode that changes from the third image to the first image through the second image. By doing this, it may be possible to prompt the player to resume pressing the chance button 136 for a long time. In the case of the button operation animation, if the pressing of the chance button 136 is stopped halfway, an animation may be performed which performs an operation different from the operation of FIGS. 324 (f) to (h), but the animation is not performed. (That is, it may be changed from the third image to the first image without passing through the second image) (Example 3)

  The animation example at the time of the button image used by the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment appearing in an image display area is demonstrated using FIG. 327. In FIG. 327 (a), the small effect image is displayed first in the image display area, the effect image is gradually enlarged, and then the button image is displayed in the center of the front of the effect image, and the effective period is below it. It shows a state in which an image is displayed. After that, the effect image disappears, and the button effect of the button image and the effective period image is started. As described above, an animation may be performed in which an image different from the button image (for example, an effect image) is displayed first and then the button image is displayed. The effective period image may be displayed after the effect image disappears.

  FIG. 327 (b) is the same as the example of the first embodiment, and shows a state in which the button image and the valid period image are simultaneously displayed in the fade-in process.

  In FIG. 327 (c), first, the right side of the button image appears with a predetermined transmittance from the center of the left end of the image display area indicated by the dashed rectangle, and from the center of the right end of the image display area. The left side portion of the button image shows a state where it appears with a predetermined transmittance. Next, the left button image moves to the right in the horizontal direction, and the button image on the right moves to the left in the horizontal direction, so that both overlap almost at the center of the screen, and finally they become one button image. Stop. Then, the reduction rate of the button image becomes zero, and then the valid period image is displayed below the button image. The predetermined transmittance of the button image may be 0%, may be other than 0%, may be more than 0% and less than 100%, or may be 100%. The valid period images may be displayed under the left and right button images, respectively.

The animation for deleting these button images and valid period images may be a rewind effect in which the animation at the time of appearance is reversed. In addition, an erasure animation different from the animation at the time of appearance may be performed. In addition, when the button is erased, the animation may not be displayed but may be erased (fourth embodiment).

  An animation example of a button image used in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 shows an example of animation of button display when the chance button 136 is pressed and held for a long time.

  FIG. 328 (a) shows an animation similar to that of the example of the first embodiment. First, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which only the portion corresponding to the outer periphery of the chance button pressed surface is in the light emission state. In addition, the reception valid period of the button operation has slightly passed, and the bar-like portion of the display of the valid period image is slightly shortened in the right direction.

  Next, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button emits light from a display mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the chance button pressed surface emits light, and the emission brightness gradually increases. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is gradually pushed down into the circular opening. The acceptance effective period of the button operation has further elapsed, and the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction.

  Next, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the emission brightness of the entire button is the maximum. In addition, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is completely pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction.

  In the animation shown in FIG. 328 (b), the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is gradually pushed into the circular opening as the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes. It is the same as shown in a). On the other hand, in the animation shown in FIG. 328 (b), the display mode is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the surface on which the chance button is pressed emits light even if the reception valid period of the button operation has elapsed. Furthermore, a character image of "push" is displayed in the center of the pressed surface in a display mode in which the brightness is gradually increased.

  The animation shown in FIG. 328 (c) has the same display mode as the display mode of the button image shown in FIG. 328 (a), and the size of the button image gradually decreases with the passage of the reception valid period of the button operation. It has a feature in the display mode to be The display of the button image becomes smaller in size as the bar-like portion of the valid period image becomes shorter, and the length of the bar-like portion becomes zero and disappears in the state where the operation valid period is lost. Thereafter, the valid period image also disappears. The display of the effective period image may be reduced together with the decrease in the display of the button image.

  The animation shown in FIG. 328 (d) has the same display mode as the display mode of the button image shown in FIG. 328 (a), and the size of the button image gradually increases as the acceptance period of the button operation passes. It has a feature in the display mode to be The display of the button image increases in size as the bar-like portion of the effective period image shortens, and the display of the effective period image is enlarged together with the increase in the display of the button image. When the operation valid period is lost, the button image and the valid period image disappear. Note that only the button image may be enlarged, and the valid period image may be displayed in a display mode that is not enlarged.

  FIG. 328 (d ′) is an auxiliary display when the valid period image is enlarged together with the enlargement of the button image and protrudes from the image display area in addition to the display mode of the button display similar to FIG. 328 (d). It is characterized in that the valid period image is further displayed. The auxiliary effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining period of the operation effective period is notified while maintaining a fixed size in the image display area. The auxiliary effective period image may be displayed even when the main effective period image becomes difficult to see (for example, reduction, operation of movable means, light emission by decoration means such as a light guide plate, etc.).

  FIG. 328 (d ′ ′) illustrates a character image (“two more seconds” in this example) showing the remaining time of the reception valid period of the button operation as the auxiliary valid period image shown in FIG. 328 (d ′) It has a feature in the point which displays).

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fourth embodiments described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 321 to 328. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Operation means (e.g., chance button 136);
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136),

  The first display of the first type of display (for example, a button display including a button image imitating the chance button 136) is a first image (for example, a button image of a display mode in which the button is not pressed) (Eg, FIG. 324 (f)).

  The first display is a display including at least a second image (for example, a button image of a display mode in which the button is slightly depressed and the color of the button is changed (for example, FIG. 324 (g)). ,

The first display is a display including at least a third image (for example, a button image in which the button is completely depressed and the color of the button is further changed (for example, FIG. 324 (h)),
The first indication is an indication including at least a first change in a first case,

  The first change is to change from the first image to the third image via the second image,

The first case is a case where the operation of the operation means (for example, depression of the chance button 136) is performed.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display related to the operation means performs the animation display when the operation is performed, it is possible to realize the game console having the characteristics of the display. In addition, there are cases where the player can easily recognize that the operation means is being operated.

  The first display may be a display composed of only the first image, the second image, and the third image. Alternatively, the first display may be a display configured of a plurality of images including the first image, the second image, and the third image.

  Furthermore, “change from the first image to the third image through the second image” means an animation that changes continuously in the order of the first image, the second image, and the third image. May be shown. In addition, one (for example, fourth image) or a plurality of images (for example, fourth image, fifth image ...) may be included between the first image and the second image, which is included It does not have to be done. Also, one (eg, fourth image) or multiple images (eg, fourth image, fifth image ...) may be included between the second image and the third image. It does not have to be done.

Further, "when there is an operation of the operation means" may be when the operation means is operated or when the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means. The operation of the operation means may be detected by the detection means, and the detected information may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400). The sub-control means may receive information (command) indicating that the means has been operated. Note that “in the first display, the display including at least the first change in the first case” means, “in the first display, the display in which the first change can be performed at least in the first case. (2) the above-described pachinko machine 100,

  At least a part of the operation means is a means that can at least execute the first aspect (for example, the button aspect that emits light (FIG. 324 (e))

  At least a part of the operation means is a means that can at least execute the second aspect (for example, the button aspect that emits light different from the first aspect (FIG. 324 (f)),

  At least a part of the operating means is a means capable of at least performing the second change in the first case,

The second change is at least change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when the operation means is operated, the mode (e.g., the light emission mode) of the operation means may be changed, so that the operation of the operation means may be promoted.

Here, the first aspect may be the first light emission aspect. In addition, the second aspect may be the second light emission aspect. The light emission mode may indicate a light emission pattern (for example, change of color of the light emission means, change of light emission means to be lit, etc.) of the light emission means (for example, LED etc.) provided in the operation means. Also, the first aspect may be the first display aspect. The second aspect may be the second display aspect. For example, in the display by the display means or the display by the lighting of the light emitting means, "PUSH" is displayed on the display means when the light emitting means is red, and "heat" is displayed on the display means when the light emitting means is blue. It may be In addition, the first aspect may be the first shape. Also, the second aspect may be the second shape. For example, the operating means may be a "pop-out button" and a "normal button" (3) the above-described pachinko machine 100,

In the second case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display,
The second case is the case of being in the period of the first period,

The first period is a period in which at least an operation of the operation means can be received (for example, an operation effective period).
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first display is displayed at least during the reception period of the operation means, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

Note that the first display may be displayed before (or immediately before) the start of the first period. In addition, the first display may be displayed after (or immediately after) the end of the first period (4) the above-described pachinko machine 100,

  In the third case, the display means is at least a means capable of displaying a display including the first image (eg, a button image of a display mode in which the button is not depressed (eg, FIG. 324 (f))). Yes,

The third case is a case where the first display is displayed on the display means,
The third case is a case where the operation means is not operated.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when the operation means is not operated during the display of the first display, the display including the first image is displayed, so that the operation of the operation means can be prompted. There is.

  The “display including the first image” may be a display (for example, a still image) including only the first image, or one or more displays including the first image It may be a display (animation) configured by The third case may be "a case where the first display is displayed on the display means and there is no operation of the operation means". Note that "when the first display is displayed on the display means" may be "through the period in which the first display is displayed on the display means", "the case where the first display is displayed on the display means". "When the first display is displayed on the display means"

Also, "when there is no operation of the operating means" may be the case where the operating means is not operated, or the case where the operation of the operating means is not detected by the detecting means. The operation may be performed when the operation of the operation unit is detected by the detection unit and the detected is not transmitted to the sub control unit as information (command). The sub-control means may not receive the information (command) indicating that there has been an operation of. Note that the second image may not be displayed at least when there is no operation of the operation means. In addition, when there is no operation of the operation means, the third image may not be displayed at least (5) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, effect display (FIG. 325 (d)) displayed after pressing the chance button 136) of the first type of display,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the first case;

The second display is a display displayed after the third image is displayed.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display means can display at least the second display when the operation means is operated, so that the player can easily recognize that the operation means is operated. There are times when you can. The second display may be a display different from the first display, and the second display may be a display included in the first display.

  The first image and the third image may be images imitating an aspect of the operation means. The first image is an image imitating the first aspect of the operation means. The third image is an image that simulates the second aspect of the operation means. The first change is a change that simulates the second change. By doing this, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the display means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The first change may be an animation display including the first image, the second image, and the third image.

  In addition, the operating means can perform at least the first aspect when there is no operation of the operating means. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the player is not operating.

  The second display may be a display displayed after at least a part of the first display is at least erased. The second display may be a display corresponding to the operation of the operation means.

Further, the operation means can execute the third aspect when it is out of the period of the reception period of the operation means. The third aspect may be the third light emission aspect. The third light emission mode may include one having a different luminance or a different light emission color, or the light emitting means being turned off. In addition, the third aspect may be the third display aspect or the third shape (6) the pachinko machine 100 described above,

The display means is a display of a second type (for example, a display not using the operation means in the fluctuation or pre-reading advance notice display, a hold icon, a fluctuation icon, a fourth symbol, a decoration symbol, strike notification, an error display, a mission system Display, display related to customization in the user mode, display of gaming methods, option menu, etc.).
Example 5 (Example 5)

  An example of the flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by the display of button operation animation performed in the special view variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 329 (a) to 330 (b) and FIGS. 331 (a) to 332 (h) sequentially show the special figure variation game in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a chance button 136 as an operation means is illustrated. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening and urged upward, and sinks downward when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position It has become. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 329 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach presentation continuing from FIG. 321 (n). In FIG. 329 (a), a display in which two warriors are fighting is performed as the SP reach effect identical to that in FIG. 321 (o).

  FIGS. 329 (b) to 330 (a) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying button operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 329 (a). In FIG. 329 (b), the button operation animation is started, and an image of a character string “long press to accumulate power!” Is displayed as a button display prompting the button operation. In SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai is holding a sword is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 329 (b), since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has not yet started, the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 is in the extinguished state.

  In FIG. 329 (c), the button image is displayed while the character string image is switched from “long press to accumulate force!” To an image of a character string “Yoo” as a button display prompting the button operation. The effective period image is displayed at the lower part thereof.

  In FIG. 329 (d), the character string image is switched from “Yo-Ii” to an image of a character string “long press” as button display prompting button operation. In addition, the display mode is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressed surface of the button image is in the light emitting state. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 329 (d), at this stage, the player has not yet received the button operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the operation valid period has not started. Even when the button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in the non-emission state.

  FIG. 329 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 329 (b) starts. As the first button mode, the chance button 136 emits light in the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed after the display mode of the button image is changed, but these may be simultaneous, and the change of the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is earlier The change of the display mode of the button image may be later.

  In FIG. 329 (f), the player places his hand so as to cover the pressed surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136, and the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is the second button mode when not pressed. The state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light is changed to the state in which the entire button emits light.

  FIGS. 329 (f) to (j) show states in which the player keeps pressing the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the “long press” operation in the button effect. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIGS. 329 (f) to (j), an image in which small flames generated at both feet of the samurai gradually grow and become large flames behind the samurai is displayed. In FIG. 329 (f), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 329 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai grow to the back of the samurai and become large. In FIG. 329 (h)-(j), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to a size that wraps the entire body of the warrior behind the warrior.

  FIG. 329 (i) shows the state immediately before the end of the reception valid period of the button operation. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the bar-like portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period is ended.

  FIG. 329 (j) shows a state in which the chance button 136 which the player keeps pressing is in the non-emission state.

  FIG. 330A shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect of the display mode in which the face of the warrior is greatly expanded is performed as a second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 330 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 322 (b) to (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or FIG. The same effects as those shown in f ') to (h') are executed.

  FIG. 331 (a) shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 329 (e), and a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has passed since the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 329 (b) starts. It indicates the button operation acceptance permission state that has elapsed. As the first button mode, the chance button 136 emits light in the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface. In the button display relating to the button effect, the display mode is changed such that a portion corresponding to the periphery of the button button outside of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 331 (b) shows a state in which the player starts a continuous hit so as to clasp the hand and strike the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 331 (b), the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 331 (c) shows a state immediately after releasing the gripped hand from the pressing surface of the chance button 136 for the continuous hit. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 331 (c), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 331 (d) shows a state in which the hand which has been squeezed for the continuous hit is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the inside of the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 331 (d), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has occurred at both feet of the samurai has disappeared and has disappeared. The flame image may be erased after the player's hand is released from the chance button 136, that is, the flame image may be erased after the detection means no longer detects the button operation. You may

  FIG. 331 (e) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and taps the pressing surface of the chance button 136. FIG. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 331 (e) is the same effect as that shown in FIG. 331 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the warrior.

  FIG. 332 (a) shows a state immediately after releasing the gripped hand from the pressing surface of the chance button 136 for the continuous hit. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 332 (a), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 332 (b) shows a state in which the hand which has been squeezed for continuous hitting is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the inside of the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 332 (b), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has occurred at both feet of the samurai has disappeared and has disappeared.

  FIG. 332 (c) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and taps the pressing surface of the chance button 136. FIG. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 332 (c) is the same effect as that shown in FIG. 331 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the warrior.

  As the player continues to hit the button continuously, the states shown in FIGS. 332 (a) to (c) are repeated. FIG. 332 (d) shows a state in which the player's hand has hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136 when the remainder of the operation effective period is reduced.

  The SP reach effect in FIG. 332 (d) is the same effect as that shown in FIG. 331 (b), and the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the warrior.

  FIG. 332 (e) shows the state immediately after the end of the button operation acceptance valid period. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the bar-like portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period has ended. The button image is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 332 (e), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 332 (f) shows a state in which the chance button 136 hit by the player is changed to the non-emission state. The effective period image of the button operation animation maintains the display of the notification that the effective period of operation has ended. The button image is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 332 (f), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 332 (g) is a second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation, which is the same as the one shown in FIG. 330 (a), but of the cut-in effect of the display mode in which the warrior's face is greatly expanded. It shows that the display has been executed. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 332 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 322 (b) to (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or FIG. The same effects as those shown in f ') to (h') are executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the chance button 136 can perform long press (first operation) and continuous hitting (second operation), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays button display prompting long press ( The first display and the cut-in display (the second display) can be displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button display prompting long press and the long press of the chance button 136 is performed. A cut-in indication can be displayed, a button indication prompting a long press is displayed, and the same cut-in indication can be displayed even when the chance button 136 is continuously hit. According to the present embodiment, even in the case of continuous hitting which is an operation different from the long press, the same display as the display of the result of long press is performed. Sometimes you can improve your motivation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a button prompting long-pressing of the chance button 136 while the operation is valid (in the third case) in which the pressing of the chance button 136 can be received. By doing this, since the button display prompting the long press is displayed at least during the reception valid period of the pressing of the chance button 136, it may be possible to prompt the pressing of the chance button 136.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a display (third display) regarding continuous hitting of the chance button 136. By doing this, it may be possible to prompt the pressing of the chance button 136.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the button display (first display) prompting long press (first operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed and the chance button 136 is not pressed, the cut-in display (No. The second display does not appear. By doing this, since the cut-in display is not displayed when the chance button 136 is not pressed, if pressing the chance button 136 can be prompted by displaying the cut-in when the button is operated. There is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the long press (first operation) and the continuous hit (second operation) of the chance button 136 are different operations, even when the continuous hit different from the long press is the same as the result of the long press Since the display is performed, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display. In addition, since the display when the button operation is performed is the same even if the long press is performed and the continuous hit is performed, the operating desire can be improved even for the player who is not used to the operation of the chance button 136 There is a case.

If the pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected at the timing of FIG. 332 (e), the cut-in display may not be displayed. Alternatively, the cut-in display may be performed when it is within a predetermined time (for example, within a period in which the display mode of the flame is displayed) from the pressing of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 332 (e). In the case where the display period of the flame is not displayed (for example, a period in which the display mode of the flame is not displayed), the cut-in display may not be performed (Example 6).

  An example of a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by display of button operation animation performed in the special view variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 333 (a) to FIG. 334 (c), the special figure change game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a chance button 136 as an operation means is illustrated. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening and urged upward, and sinks downward when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position It has become. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 333 (a) shows the same state as the state shown in FIG. 329 (e), and a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after the display of the button effect shown in FIG. 329 (b) starts. It indicates the button operation acceptance permission state that has elapsed. As the first button mode, the chance button 136 emits light in the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface. In the button display relating to the button effect, the display mode is changed such that a portion corresponding to the periphery of the button button outside of the chance button pressing surface is in the light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 333 (b) shows a state in which the player starts a continuous hit so as to clasp the hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 333 (b), the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 333 (c) shows a state immediately after releasing the gripped hand from the pressing surface of the chance button 136 for the continuous hit. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 333 (c), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 333 (d) shows a state in which the hand which has been squeezed for continuous hitting is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the inside of the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 333 (d), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained. Thus, in this example, the image of the flame that grows in response to the button operation is maintained in the state before the player's hand left after leaving the chance button 136.

  FIG. 333 (e) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and taps the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 333 (e), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai grow to the waist of the samurai and become large.

  FIG. 333 (f) shows the state immediately after releasing the gripped hand from the pressing surface of the chance button 136 for the continuous hit. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 333 (f), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 333 (g) shows a state in which the hand which has been squeezed for continuous hitting is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the inside of the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 333 (g), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained.

  FIG. 333 (h) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and taps the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 333 (h), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai has grown further to the chest of the samurai and becomes larger.

  As the player continues to hit the button continuously, the SP reach effect displays an image in a display mode in which the flame gradually grows large behind the samurai. FIG. 333 (i) shows a state where the player's hand has hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136 when the remainder of the operation effective period is reduced. In the SP reach production in FIG. 333 (i), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to a position higher than the head of the warrior behind the warrior. The display mode of the flame shown in FIG. 333 (i) is the maximum size of the flame image. The size of the flame image is maximized when either the long press time reaches 6 seconds or the number of consecutive hits reaches 20, whichever is satisfied.

  FIG. 333 (j) shows the state immediately after the end of the button operation acceptance valid period. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the bar-like portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period has ended. The button image is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 333 (j), the display mode grown to a position higher than the head of the warrior behind the warrior is maintained, and the flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 334 (a) shows a state in which the chance button 136 hit by the player is changed to the non-emission state. The effective period image of the button operation animation maintains the display of the notification that the effective period of operation has ended. The button image is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 334 (a), the display mode grown to a position higher than the head of the warrior behind the warrior is maintained, and the flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 334 (b) is a second display of the button effect at the end of the display of the button operation animation, which is the same as that shown in FIG. 330 (a), but of the cut-in effect of the display mode in which the warrior's face is greatly expanded. It shows that the display has been executed. The second display functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 334 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIGS. 322 (b) to (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or FIG. The same effects as those shown in f ') to (h') are executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the chance button 136 can perform long press (first operation) and continuous hitting (second operation), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays button display prompting long press ( The first display and the cut-in display (the second display) can be displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button display prompting long press and the long press of the chance button 136 is performed. A cut-in indication can be displayed, a button indication prompting a long press is displayed, and the same cut-in indication can be displayed even when the chance button 136 is continuously hit. According to the present embodiment, even in the case of continuous hitting which is an operation different from the long press, the same display as the display of the result of long press is performed. Sometimes you can improve your motivation.

  Note that the image of the flame may be changed in accordance with the long press time or the number of times of continuous hitting. In addition, when the long pressed time or the number of consecutive hits does not reach the predetermined time or the maximum number, the display is performed in the finally changing display mode (for example, the maximum size of the flame image) determined in advance by the effect drawing It may not be done. In addition, even if the long-pressed time or the number of consecutive hits does not reach the predetermined time or the maximum number, the display form which is finally changed by the effect lottery after the end of the reception period of the operation means (for example, It may be displayed at the maximum size of the image of the flame).

If pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected at the timing of FIG. 333 (j), the cut-in display may not be displayed or may be displayed.
The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes an operating means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 332), and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 or 332). , And one of the plurality of displays is a fifth display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 264 (a)), and one of the plurality of displays is one of the plurality of displays. The display is a sixth display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 264 (d)), and the fifth display is an image representing the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first image". For example, FIG. 264 is a display including the operation means image BGs shown in FIG. 264 (a), and the sixth display is an image representing the appearance of the operation means other than the first image (hereinafter referred to as “second For example, the operation means image BGb shown in FIG. The sixth display is a display including an image of a meter (hereinafter, referred to as “third image”, for example, effective time notification image TGs shown in FIG. 264 (d)), The display size of the second image is larger than the display size of the second image, and in the sixth display, a part of the second image is overlapped by the third image Ri display der, the fifth display, the a third display including an image of the meter of the same display size as the image, it is the amusement machine according to claim.
According to the gaming table of the present embodiment, the first image ( image showing the appearance of the operation means) is displayed as a second image (image showing the appearance of the operation means) having a larger display size than the first image. The display size of the third image (image of the meter ) displayed together with the second image (image showing the appearance of the operation means) is changed without changing the display size . In order to overlap two images (an image showing the appearance of the operation means), the player may be able to focus attention on the second and third images, and it may be possible to reliably provide information on the operation means. .
It should be noted that, before Symbol fifth of the display, the display to prompt the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as. "Third display") is a display including, the sixth display prompts the operation of the operation means It is a display including a display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”), and the fifth display may be displayed in a state of accepting an operation of the operation means, a state of accepting the operation of the operation means In the above, the sixth display may be displayed, and the fifth display and the sixth display may be displayed alternatively. Further, the sixth display may be a display in which a part of the second image is overlapped by the fourth display. The fifth display may be a display in which a portion of the first image is not overlapped by the third display. Further, the third image may be an image (hereinafter, referred to as “effective time notification image”) for notifying an effective time in which the operation unit can accept an operation. Further, the above-mentioned “the sixth display is a display in which a part of the second image is overlapped by the third image” means “the sixth display is the second display. A portion of the image may be displayed as the effective time notification image. Further, one of the plurality of displays is a first display, one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a first display. The display is included in the effect (for example, the effect display in the button continuous hitting operation effect, the operation sound output), and the second display is the second effect (for example, the effect display in the normal button operation effect, the effect sound (The sound effect output) is a display included in the (sound effect) output, the first effect and the second effect are different effects, and the first effect is started after the operation of the operation means is performed. The time from the operation of the operation means to the start of the second effect may be longer than the time until time. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first button effect, the first effect is started, and when the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second effect is started The first button effect and the second button effect may be different button effects.

  An example of the flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by the display of button operation animation performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. As for FIG. 335 (a)-(e), the special figure change game is shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a chance button 136 as an operation means is illustrated. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening and urged upward, and sinks downward when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position It has become. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 335 (a) shows a state in which the player starts a continuous hit so as to clasp the hand and hit the pressing surface of the chance button 136. FIG. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 335 (a), the display is performed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai.

  FIG. 335 (b) shows a state in which the hand which has been squeezed for continuous hitting is separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the inside of the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 335 (b), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame generated at both feet of the samurai is maintained. Thus, in this example, the image of the flame that grows in response to the button operation is maintained in the state before the player's hand left after leaving the chance button 136.

  FIG. 335 (c) shows a state in which the player clasps his hand and taps the pressing surface of the chance button 136. FIG. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to a state in which the entire button emits light from the state of the first button mode in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when the button is not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect in FIG. 335 (c), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flames generated at both feet of the samurai grow up to the waist of the samurai and become large.

  FIG. 335 (d) shows a state immediately after releasing the gripped hand from the pressing surface of the chance button 136 for the continuous hit. As a first button mode, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed from the state of the second button mode in which the entire button emits light to a state in which only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The button image of the button operation animation is maintained in the display mode in which the entire button emits light and is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach production in FIG. 335 (d), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the warrior is maintained.

  FIG. 335 (e) shows a state in which the hand which has been squeezed for continuous hitting is still separated from the pressing surface of the chance button 136. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 is maintained such that only the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface emits light when not pressed. The display mode of the button image of the button operation animation is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressing outside of the chance button is in the light emitting state. Further, the display mode in which the button is pushed into the circular opening is changed to the display mode in which the button is pushed up from the inside of the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. In place of the character image of "long press", the character string image of "continuous hit" is displayed. In this embodiment, when the number of button operations detected within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) reaches a prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times), the character string of "long press" is displayed instead of "continuous hit". In some cases, it is possible to realize a game that matches the player's preference and improve the interest of the game. In addition, the display changed from the character string of "long press" does not need to be "continuous hitting", and a display corresponding to other operations including continuous hitting (for example, "press a button!" Or "while accepting button operation" ! ") Etc. may be displayed.

In the SP reach production in FIG. 335 (e), the display is performed in a display mode in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the samurai is maintained (Example 8).

  A specific example of the flow of the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation performed in the special view variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 336 to 338.

  FIG. 336 (a) has shown the timing chart (the 1) regarding pressing-down of the chance button 136, and display of button operation animation. The upper part shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has not been detected, and level ON indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation in time series. The level "still image" indicates that the image is stationary, and the level "moving image" indicates that the image changes with the passage of time. A period (i) is a period from when the chance button 136 changes from the non-depressed state to the depressed state (single-shot down) and a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time occurs due to, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In period (i), the image of the button operation animation is in a stationary state. In the period (ii) following the period (i), after the chance button 136 is pressed from the non-depressed state and a predetermined delay time elapses, the chance button 136 is non-depressed again and the predetermined time passes Period until A period (iii) subsequent to the period (ii) is a period from when the chance button 136 changes from the non-depressed state to the depressed state and a predetermined delay time elapses. The period (iv) following the period (iii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is pressed again and a predetermined delay time elapses to when the predetermined time elapses.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation in each period of FIG. 336 (a). As shown in (i), in the button operation animation of period (i), a still image of a samurai holding a sword is displayed. As shown in (ii), in the button operation animation of period (ii), a flame is generated at both feet of the warrior, and a moving image in which the flame grows up to the waist of the warrior and is enlarged is displayed. As shown in (iii), in the button operation animation in period (iii), a still image of a samurai whose flames from both feet have disappeared is displayed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is in a non-depressed state and a certain period of time elapses, the animation of the flame is hidden. As shown in (iv), in the button operation animation in period (iv), a moving image in which the flame that has grown to the waist of the warrior further grows above the samurai's head is displayed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed again, a moving image following the moving image that was being executed in the period (ii) immediately before the period (iii) is displayed. In the button operation animation of period (iv) as shown in (iv ') as a modified example, a flame occurs at both feet of the samurai, and the flame grows up to the waist of the samurai and increases in period (ii) The video may be displayed again.

  FIG. 337 (a) shows a timing chart (part 2) related to pressing of the chance button 136 and display of button operation animation. The upper part shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has not been detected, and level ON indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation in time series. The level "still image" indicates that the image is stationary, and the level "moving image" indicates that the image changes with the passage of time. The period (1) is a period from when the chance button 136 changes from the non-depressed state to the depressed state (single-shot down) and a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time occurs due to, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In period (1), the image of the button operation animation is in a stationary state. In period (2) following period (1), the chance button 136 changes from the non-pressed state to the pressed state again after the predetermined delay time elapses from the non-pressed state to the pressed state. It is a period until delay time passes. In the period (3) following the period (2), the chance button 136 changes from the non-depressed state to the depressed state again and then the predetermined delay time elapses. Period until

  FIG. 337 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation in each period of FIG. 337 (a). As shown in (1), in the button operation animation of period (1), a still image of a samurai holding a sword is displayed. As shown in (2), in the button operation animation of period (2), a flame is generated at both feet of the warrior, and a moving image in which the flame grows and grows up to the waist of the warrior is displayed. As shown in (3), in the button operation animation in period (3), a moving image in which the flame grown up to the waist of the warrior further grows above the warrior's head is displayed. As described above, continuous display similar to that in the long press may be performed.

  FIG. 338 (a) shows a timing chart (part 3) related to pressing of the chance button 136 and display of button operation animation. The upper part shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has not been detected, and level ON indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected.

  The lower part shows the movement of the image in the SP reach effect by the display of the button operation animation in time series. The level "still image" indicates that the image is stationary, and the level "moving image" indicates that the image changes with the passage of time. A period (i) is a period from when the chance button 136 changes from the non-depressed state to the depressed state (single-shot down) and a predetermined delay time elapses. The delay time occurs due to, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In period (i), the image of the button operation animation is in a stationary state. A period (ii) following the period (i) is a period until the chance button 136 again becomes in the non-depressed state after the chance button 136 has been pressed from the non-depressed state and a predetermined delay time has elapsed. A period (iii) following the period (ii) is a period from when the chance button 136 is in the non-depressed state again to in the pressed state again and a predetermined delay time elapses. The period (iv) following the period (iii) is a period until the predetermined time elapses after the chance button 136 is pressed again and the predetermined delay time elapses.

  FIG. 338 (b) shows the display of the button operation animation of each period of FIG. 338 (a).

As shown in (i), in the button operation animation of period (i), a still image of a samurai holding a sword is displayed. As shown in (ii), in the button operation animation of period (ii), a moving image in which a flame is generated is displayed at both feet of the warrior. As shown in (iii), in the button operation animation in period (iii), a still image of the samurai in a state in which fires are generated from both feet is displayed. In this example, when a certain animation is performed, the still image state is entered until the next button operation. As shown in (iv), in the button operation animation in period (iv), a moving image in which a flame generated at both feet of the samurai grows up to the waist of the samurai and becomes large is displayed.

  The level "still image" may be in a state where no button operation animation is performed. In addition, although a button operation animation is not executed, a standby animation (an animation waiting for a button being operated) may be executed, and a still image is displayed. It may be.

  Note that the level "moving image" may be in a state in which a button operation animation is being performed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth to eighth embodiments described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 329 to 338. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Operation means (e.g., chance button 136);
A game console equipped with

  The operation means is a means capable of at least performing a first operation (for example, long press of the chance button 136),

The operation means is a means capable of at least performing a second operation (e.g., continuous hitting of the chance button 136),
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;

  The first type of display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136),

  The first display of the first type of display (for example, a button display prompting a long press (FIG. 329 (e)) is a display related to the first operation,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, cut-in display (FIG. 330 (a), FIG. 332 (g)) of the first type of display,

  In the first case, the display means can display at least a part of the second display.

In the second case, the display means can display at least a part of the second display.
The first case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The first case is the case where the first operation is performed,
The second case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The second case is a case where the second operation is performed.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even when the second operation different from the first operation is performed, the same display as the result of the first operation is performed. realizable. In addition, even if the first operation or the second operation is performed, the display when the operation is performed is the same, so the operation will be improved even for the player who is not familiar with the operation of the operation means. There are times when you can.

  Note that "at least a part of the second display" may be all of the first display or may be only a part of the first display. In addition, "when the first operation is performed" may be a case where the player performs the first operation with the operation unit, or the first operation is detected by the detection unit. It may be a case, or the first operation may be detected by the detection means, and the detected result may be transmitted as information (command) to the sub control means, or the first It may be the case where the sub control means receives information (command) indicating that the operation has been performed.

Further, "when the second operation is performed" may be a case where the player performs the second operation with the operation means, or the second operation is detected by the detection means. It may be a case, or the second operation may be detected by the detection means, and may be transmitted to the sub control means as information (command) that the detection is performed. It may be the case where the sub control means receives information (command) indicating that the operation has been performed. Note that "the first display is displayed" may be "when the first display is displayed" or "through the period in which the first display is displayed" It may be "during the period in which the first display is displayed". The “first case” may be “a case where a first display is displayed and a first operation is performed”. Note that "the second case" may be "when the first display is displayed and the second operation is performed" (2) the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, and

  In the third case, the display means can display at least the first display;

The third case is a case in which the operation of the operation means can at least be accepted (for example, an operation valid period).
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first display is displayed at least during a period when the operation acceptance of the operation means is valid, the operation of the operation means may be able to be prompted (3) The above pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display;
The third display is a display related to the second operation,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the third display is a display related to the second operation, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operating means (4) the pachinko machine 100 described above,
In the fourth case, the display means is means for not displaying the second display,
The fourth case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The fourth case is a case where the operation means is not operated.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated, the second display is displayed when the operation means is operated. It may be possible to prompt the operation. The “third case” may be “when the first display is displayed and there is no operation of the operation means” (5) the pachinko machine 100 And
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even when the second operation different from the first operation is performed, the same display as the result of the first operation is performed. realizable. In addition, even if the first operation or the second operation is performed, the display when the operation is performed is the same, so the operation will be improved even for the player who is not familiar with the operation of the operation means. (6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 may be able to

The display means is a display of a second type (for example, a display not using the operation means in the fluctuation or pre-reading advance notice display, a hold icon, a fluctuation icon, a fourth symbol, a decoration symbol, strike notification, an error display, a mission system Display, display related to customization in the user mode, display of gaming methods, option menu, etc.).
(Example 9)

  An effect to be performed in the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 339 to 341. In FIG. 339 (a) to FIG. 340 (h), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a chance button 136 as an operation means is illustrated. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening and urged upward, and sinks downward when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position It has become. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 339 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach presentation continuing from FIG. 321 (n). In FIG. 339 (a), a display in which two warriors are fighting is performed as the SP reach effect identical to FIG. 321 (o).

  FIGS. 339 (b) to 340 (g) show a flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by displaying a button operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 321 (a). In FIG. 339 (b), the button operation animation is started, and as a button display prompting the button operation, an image of a character string “long press to accumulate force!” Is displayed. In SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai is holding a sword is displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 339 (b), the light emission means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 (for example, the chance button 136) has not been started since the acceptance valid period of the button operation (button operation acceptance period, operation valid period) has not started yet. The button lamp 138) is off.

  In FIG. 339 (c), as a button display prompting the button operation, the character string image is switched from “long press to accumulate force!” To an image of a character string “Yoo” and a button image is displayed, An effective period image is displayed at the lower part thereof.

  In FIG. 339 (d), the character string image is switched from “Yo-Ii” to an image of a character string “long press” as button display prompting button operation. In addition, the display mode is changed as if the portion corresponding to the periphery of the chance button pressed surface of the button image is in the light emitting state. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 339 (d), the button operation acceptance period is not yet started at which the countdown of the operation valid period has not started yet (button operation acceptance is not possible In this state, even if the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. Also, the chance button 136 is in the non-emission state.

  FIG. 339 (e) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 339 (b) starts. The outer periphery of the pressing surface of the chance button 136 is in a light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes after the display mode of the button image changes, but these changes may be simultaneous, or the change of the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is first. , May change later in the display mode of the button image.

  In FIG. 339 (f), the player places his hand so as to cover the pressed surface of the chance button 136 and presses the chance button 136, and the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is the outer peripheral portion of the pressed surface when not pressed. Is changing from the state where only the light was emitted to the state where the entire button emits light.

  Further, FIGS. 339 (f) and (g) show a state in which the player keeps pressing the chance button 136 in accordance with the request for the “long press” operation in the button effect. The button image of the button operation animation is displayed in a display mode in which the entire button is illuminated. In addition, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button 136 is pushed into the circular opening. As the acceptance valid period of the button operation passes, the valid period image is displayed in a display mode in which the bar-like portion gradually shortens in the right direction. The "long press" character string image is displayed in a stationary display mode.

  In the SP reach effect between FIGS. 339 (f) and 339 (g), an image in which small flames generated at both feet of the samurai gradually grow and become large flames behind the samurai is displayed. In FIG. 339 (f), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 339 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to a size that wraps the entire body of the warrior behind the warrior.

  Further, FIG. 339 (g) shows a state immediately before the end of the reception valid period of the button operation. In the display of the button operation animation, the length of the bar-like portion of the effective period image is set to 0 (zero) to notify that the operation effective period is ended.

  FIG. 339 (h) shows a state where the operation effective period has ended. Also, the chance button 136 is in the non-emission state (the chance button lamp 138 is in the non-emission state).

  In FIG. 339 (i), the display mode is changed as if the part corresponding to the periphery of the button button outside the screen of the chance button is turned off. Also, the button image is displayed in a display mode in which the chance button is slightly pushed up from within the circular opening. In this example, the display mode of the button image changes after the chance button 136 changes to the unlit state, but these may be simultaneously, or the change of the unlit state of the chance button 136 is first, the button The change of the display mode of the image may be later.

  In FIG. 339 (j), an effect of recovering the meter (gauge) of the valid period image is executed. The bar-like portion of the predetermined color of the valid period image is displayed so as to gradually become longer, for example, in the left direction. In addition, an image of a character string "release force" is displayed above the button image of the effect display area 208d, which suggests that the effect of releasing the force accumulated by long press is started. As such, by performing an animation in which the bar-like portion of the meter is elongated, an effect of recovering the meter is performed. As a result, the player may easily recognize that the button operation acceptance period starts again. At the time shown in FIG. 339 (j), it is outside the button operation reception period.

  FIG. 340 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 339 (j). In FIG. 340 (a), an effect of recovering the meter (gauge) of the valid period image is executed. At the time shown in FIG. 340 (a), it is out of the button operation reception period.

  In FIG. 340 (b), the effect of recovering the meter of the valid period image is ended. The bar-shaped portion of the predetermined color of the valid period image has the same length as the rectangular frame. In addition, at the time shown in FIG. 340 (b), it is outside the button operation reception period.

  In FIG. 340 (c), the character string image displayed in the effect display area 208d is switched from “release the force” to “one strike”. This suggests that the effect of releasing the stored force is executed by pressing the chance button 136 only once in the button operation reception period to be started later. In addition, the display mode is changed such that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the pressed surface of the chance button 136 of the button image is in the light emitting state. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 340 (c), since the countdown of the operation valid period is not yet started but it is outside the button operation acceptance period, the pressing operation is not accepted even if the chance button 136 is depressed. The chance button 136 is in the non-emission state.

  In FIG. 340 (d) to FIG. 340 (f), the button operation acceptance period is started. The bar-like portion of the predetermined color of the valid period image is displayed so as to be gradually shortened, for example, in the right direction, and the remaining period of the operation valid period is notified. In addition, an image of a character string "One shot" is displayed above the button image in the effect display area 208d, and one press of the chance button 136 is requested. Further, the outer periphery of the pressing surface of the chance button 136 is in a light emitting state. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. In this example, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 changes after the display mode of the button image changes, but these changes may be simultaneous, or the change of the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is first. , May change later in the display mode of the button image.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 only once in the button operation acceptance period, an image of the face of the samurai who has stored the force shown in FIG. 340 (g) is displayed. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed only once in the button operation receiving period in which one press of the chance button 136 is requested, the button operation receiving period ends regardless of the remaining period. Therefore, the button image and the valid period image displayed in the effect display area 208d are erased. Also, the chance button 136 has changed to the unlit state. The deletion of the button image and the valid period image and the change of the chance button 136 to the unlit state may be simultaneous, or either one may precede.

  In FIG. 340 (h), an animation in which the samurai who has accumulated the force wins is displayed in the effect display area 208d. As a result, it is notified that the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation game is high, or that it is hit on a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the button operation reception period started from FIG. 339 (e) and the button operation reception period started from FIG. 340 (d) have the same length. The length of the button operation acceptance period of degrees may be different. In this case, the length of the operation effective period image may be changed during the recovery effect of the meter, or the reduction speed of the meter (the reduction speed of the bar-shaped portion of the predetermined color) may be made different. In addition, when pressing-down of the chance button 136 is not detected in the period of FIG. 339 (e)-(g), the recovery presentation of the meter of the effective period image performed by FIG. 339 (j)-FIG. Instead of the execution, different effects (for example, effects after FIG. 322 (a)) may be performed. Further, even when pressing of the chance button 136 is not detected in the period of FIGS. 339 (e) to (g), the same effect as when the button operation is detected may be performed.

  FIG. 341 shows a timing chart regarding display regarding the chance button operation reception period, the chance button operation reception period, and the operation reception period in the button effect shown in FIG. 339 and FIG. The upper row shows the activation or non-activation of the chance button operation acceptance in time series. The level "valid" indicates a button operation reception period, and the level "invalid" indicates a button operation reception period outside. The middle row shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has not been detected, and level ON indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected. The lower part shows the presence or absence of the display regarding the operation reception period in time series. The level "display" is a state in which the display regarding the operation reception period is being performed, and the level "non-display" is the state in which the display regarding the operation reception period is not being performed.

  The period (1) corresponds to the period of FIG. 339 (c) to FIG. 339 (f). In period (1), first, display of the operation reception period is started. In the present embodiment, the display regarding the operation acceptance period corresponds to the display of the effective period image and the button image shown in FIG. 339 (c). The display regarding the operation valid period may be only display of the valid period image or only display of the button image. Moreover, in period (1), the chance button operation reception period is started after the start of the display regarding the operation reception period. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display regarding the operation reception period is started before the start of the operation reception period. In addition, after the start of the operation reception period of period (1), the player starts pressing the chance button 136 for a long time.

  The period (2) following the period (1) corresponds to the periods of FIG. 339 (e) to FIG. 339 (h). The period (2) ends at the end of the chance button operation reception period. In the period (2), since the long press of the chance button 136 is continued, the detection signal of the chance button sensor is at level ON, and the display regarding the operation reception period is continuously displayed.

  The period (3) subsequent to the period (2) corresponds to the periods of FIGS. 339 (i) to 340 (c). Period (3) is outside the button operation reception period. In period (3), the detection signal of the chance button sensor is at level OFF after a predetermined delay time from the end of the button operation acceptance period. The delay time occurs due to, for example, a time lag from sensor detection to command reception. In addition, in the period (3), an effect that the meter of the effective period image is restored is executed. Therefore, the display regarding the reception period is continuously displayed.

  The period (4) following the period (3) corresponds to the period of FIG. 340 (d) to FIG. 340 (g). The period (4) is started simultaneously with the start of the button operation reception period. In the second half of period (4), the player presses the chance button 136 only once (FIG. 340 (g)). Thus, the button operation acceptance period ends after a predetermined delay time, and the display regarding the operation acceptance period is erased. In FIG. 341, the setting length of the button operation reception period started in the period (4) is indicated by an alternate long and short dash line.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 339 to 341. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Operation means (e.g., chance button 136);
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;

  The display of the first type is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display related to the chance button 136, a display related to an operation reception period),

  In the first case, the display means may be a first display of the first type of display (for example, a display of an effective period image (display in FIG. 339 (c)), a + button image, It is a means that can at least display a button image),

  The first case is a case where it is the first period (for example, the period of FIG. 339 (c) to FIG. 340 (g), the period (1) to (4) of FIG. 341),

  The first period is a period including a second period (for example, the period (3) in FIG. 339 (i) to FIG. 340 (c) and FIG. 341).

  The second period is a period when at least the operation of the operation means is not received (for example, a period other than a button operation reception period (a period outside a button operation reception period)).

The first period is a period including at least a period in which an operation of the operation means can be received (for example, a button operation reception period).
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display regarding the operation is continuously displayed even during the period when the operation of the operation means is not received, it is possible to realize the game console having the characteristics of the display. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase variations of effects related to the operation means and to increase the operation desire of the operation means.

Note that “including the second period” may indicate that a part of the period included in the first period is the second period. Further, "at least the operation of the operation means can be accepted" may be a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, or when it is detected that the operation means has been operated, the sub control means ( For example, it may indicate a period in which the information (command) indicating that the operation has been transmitted to the first sub control unit 400) is valid. Further, "not at least accepting the operation of the operating means" may be a period during which the operation of the operating means is invalidated, or when it is detected that the operating means has been operated, the sub-control means The information (command) indicating that the operation has been transmitted may indicate a period during which the operation is invalid. (2) The above-described pachinko machine 100,

The first display is a display related to the reception period of the operation means (for example, display of an effective period image (gauge image, meter image, time display image))
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first display is the display regarding the reception period, the player can visually recognize the display regarding the reception period of the operation means and can enhance the operation motivation of the operation means There is a case. The first display includes a meter image indicating a reception period, time display (for example, display of an effective period image), and the like. (3) The above-described pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, display of a button image) of the first type of display in the first case.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the second display can be displayed in the first case, the player is made to pay attention to the display by making a plurality of displays regarding the operation means, thereby enhancing the operation motivation of the operation means. There are times when you can. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase variations of effects related to the operation means. As the second display, for example, there is a display imitating an operation means. The first type of display may be three or more displays including the first display and / or the second display (4) the above-described pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a third period,
The first period is a period including at least a fourth period,

  The third period is a period before the second period starts (for example, a period of FIG. 339 (e) to FIG. 339 (h), a period (2) of FIG. 341),

  The fourth period is a period after the end of the second period (for example, a period of FIG. 340 (d) to FIG. 340 (g), a period (4) of FIG. 341),

  The third period is a period in which an operation of the operation means can be received at least (for example, a button operation reception period),

The fourth period is a period in which an operation of the operation means can be received at least (for example, a button operation reception period).
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first period includes a plurality of periods for receiving the operation, the player may feel discomfort and may be made to pay attention to the first display (5) The above pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a fifth period,

The fifth period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means is not received (for example, a period outside a button operation reception period, a period of FIG. 339 (c)).
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first period includes a plurality of periods in which the operation is not received, the player may feel discomfort and may be made to pay attention to the first display.

  Also, the second period may be a period that starts simultaneously with the start of the first period. For example, the button image may be displayed before the operation reception period starts. Alternatively, the second period may be a period which starts during the period of the first period. For example, it may be a display of an acceptance period for two consecutive different operations.

  Also, the second period may be a period that is ended during the period of the first period. Alternatively, the second period may be a period ending simultaneously with the end of the first period. For example, the button image may be displayed even after the end of the operation reception period.

  Further, the first period may be a period including a third period. Further, the third period may be a period in which at least the operation of the operation means can be received. The third period may be a period beginning during the period of the first period. Also, the second period may be a period started after (or immediately after) the end of the third period.

  Further, the first period may be a period including a fourth period. The fourth period may be a period in which at least the operation of the operation means can be received. The fourth period may be a period starting during the period of the first period. The second period may be a period that ends before (or just before) the fourth period starts.

Further, the display means may display a display regarding the first operation when the third period is started. Further, the display means may display a display regarding the second operation when the fourth period is started. The first operation and the second operation may be different operations. For example, the first reception period may be a display of the character string "long press on", and the second reception period may be different from the operation required as the display of the character string "one shot!".
Also, the first operation and the second operation may be the same operation.

The first display may be an image imitating the operation means. In addition, the second display may be an image regarding a reception period of the operation means. The first display may be started simultaneously with the second display. Also, the first display may be displayed before the second display. Also, the first display may be displayed later than the second display. In addition, the first display may be erased simultaneously with the second display. Also, the first display may be erased prior to the second display. In addition, the first display may be erased later than the second display (6).

The display means is a display of a second type (for example, a display not using the operation means in the fluctuation or pre-reading advance notice display, a hold icon, a fluctuation icon, a fourth symbol, a decoration symbol, strike notification, an error display, a mission system Display, display related to customization in the user mode, display of gaming methods, option menu, etc.).
Example 10 (Embodiment 10)

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 342 to 349. FIG. FIG. 342 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a display device m700 with a touch panel on a door 108 with a ball storage tray. The display device with touch panel m700 is disposed on the right side of the chance button 136 in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is installed on the island facility. The display device with touch panel m700 has a horizontally long rectangular surface area. For example, a liquid crystal display device is used for the display device with touch panel m700. In the present embodiment, the display device with touch panel m 700 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The display device with touch panel m700 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  A touch panel m700a having substantially the same size and shape as the display area is disposed on the display screen of the display device with touch panel m700. The touch panel m 700 a is configured such that the player can touch with a finger or the like or perform a slide operation (drag).

  Next, an effect (part 1) performed in the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. FIG. In FIG. 343 (a) to FIG. 344 (c), the special figure change game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a display device with touch panel m700 as an operation means is illustrated. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 343 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach presentation continuing from FIG. 321 (n). In FIG. 343 (a), a display in which two warriors are fighting is performed as the SP reach effect identical to that in FIG. 321 (o). Further, the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “CR Yoshimune”) is displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel as a default display.

  FIGS. 343 (b) to (j) show a flow of a series of effects and SP reach effects by the display of touch operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effects shown in FIG. 321 (a). In FIG. 343 (b), the touch operation animation for prompting the touch operation on the touch panel m 700a is started, and the character "Slide your finger!" As a display for prompting the operation on the touch panel m 700a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "touch operation"). The image of the column is displayed. In SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai is holding a sword is displayed. Further, in the display device with touch panel m700, an image of a character string "Slide with finger!" And an image of an arrow indicating a slide direction are displayed. The touch panel m 700 a may not be operated as indicated by the arrow image.

  The display switching timing from FIG. 343 (a) to FIG. 343 (b) may be first for the decorative symbol display device 208 and later for the display device with touch panel m700, and the display device with touch panel m700 is first for the decorative symbol display device 208 may be after or may be simultaneous. In the state illustrated in FIG. 343 (b), the reception valid period of the touch operation (touch valid period) has not yet started.

  In FIG. 343 (c), as a display prompting a touch operation, the character string image is switched from “Slide your finger!” To an image of a character string “Yoo”, and the effect display area 208 d is a display device m700 with a touch panel. An image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "panel image") imitating the image is displayed, and the effective period image is displayed below it. The valid period image of the present embodiment is an image showing a touch operation valid period.

  In FIG. 343 (d), the character string image is switched from “Yo-Ii” to an image of a character string “slide” as a display prompting a touch operation. In addition, on the display device with touch panel m700, images of character strings of "5 seconds later" and "slide" are displayed. The image of the character string “after 5 seconds” is an image for counting down the valid period of the touch operation. By watching the image shown in FIG. 343 (d), the player knows that the effect accompanied by the operation on the touch panel m700a is started, but at this stage, the touch operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the touch operation effective period has not started yet Since the touch panel m700 is touched outside, the touch operation can not be accepted because the touch operation is not performed.

  FIG. 343 (e) shows a state in which the touch operation reception effective period has been started when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 343 (b) is started. When the touch operation reception period starts, as shown in FIGS. 343 (e) to (j), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating a slide direction and an image resembling a hand are displayed from left to right An animation of a slide operation of a panel image is displayed, and an operation method of the touch panel m 700 a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “slide”, and the image of the arrow displayed on the display device with touch panel m700 are operation request display of touch operation on the touch panel m700a.

  In this example, the touch operation valid period is displayed by the valid period image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string image of “5 seconds later” displayed on the display device with touch panel m700. The touch operation effective period may be displayed on only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the display device with touch panel m700. Moreover, the touch operation effective period may be displayed as an image other than a gauge or a number.

  In (f) of FIG. 343, an animation is displayed in which the image simulating the hand in the effect display area 208d slides the panel image from the left to the right during the touch operation effective period. The valid period of touch operation is 4 seconds later.

  In FIGS. 343 (g) to (i), in accordance with the operation request display, the player slides the touch panel m700a with the right index finger. As a result, the small flames that occur at the feet of the warrior gradually grow and an image that becomes a large flame behind the warrior is displayed. In FIG. 343 (g), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. In FIG. 343 (h), the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to about half the height of the samurai, and in FIG. 343 (i), the flame wraps the entire body of the samurai behind the samurai. The image is displayed in the display mode grown to the size. The animation in which the image of the flame is greatly grown is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m 700 a.

  In FIG. 343 (j), the player has finished the slide operation on the touch panel m700. On the display device with touch panel m700, an image of a character string "Good!" Is displayed as a display corresponding to the slide operation. The image of the character string "Good!" May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, or an image indicating that the touch panel m700 has been operated as requested. . Moreover, in FIG. 343 (j), the touch operation effective period is complete | finished.

  FIG. 344 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 343 (j). The panel image in the effect display area 208d, the valid period image, the image simulating a hand, and the image of the arrow indicating the slide direction are erased. In addition, a display mode that has grown to a position higher than the head of the warrior behind the warrior is maintained and a flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 344 (b) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect of the display mode in which the face of the warrior is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change. After the end of the cut-in effect, the display device with touch panel m700 switches the display of the character string image of "Good!" To the model name of the pachinko machine 100.

  FIG. 344 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 322 (b) to (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or FIG. The same effects as those shown in f ') to (h') are executed.

  Next, an effect (part 2) performed in the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. FIG. In FIG. 345 (a) to FIG. 346 (b), the special figure fluctuation game is shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a touch-panel-equipped display device m700 as a first operation means and a chance button 136 as a second operation means are shown below the same. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 345 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 343 (e). In FIG. 345 (a), the touch operation effective period is started. In addition, the button operation valid period is also started along with the start of the touch operation valid period. In FIG. 345 (b), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating a slide direction and an animation in which an image simulating a hand slides a panel image from left to right is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m700a Is reported.

  In FIG. 345 (c) to FIG. 345 (e), the player does not follow the display of the operation request for the touch operation, and the player presses and holds the chance button 136 for a long time. Since it is in the touch operation effective period but in the button operation effective period, the depression is accepted, and a small flame image is displayed at the foot of the warrior in the effect display area 208d. However, since the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m 700a) indicated by the operation request display is operated, the flame image does not become large. Further, in FIG. 345 (d), similarly to FIG. 343 (i), an image of a character string "Good!" Is displayed on the display device with touch panel m700. The display on the display device with touch panel m700 may be different from the case where the touch panel m700a is operated according to the operation request display (in the case shown in FIG. 343 (j)) (for example, operation request such as "Bad" or "Miss" A display may be displayed indicating that the touch panel m 700 a has not been operated as it is. Moreover, in FIG. 345 (d), the touch operation effective period is complete | finished.

  FIG. 345 (e) shows the state after the end of the touch operation effective period. The panel image in the effect display area 208d, the effective period image, and the image resembling a hand are erased. Further, an image of a flame is displayed at the foot of the warrior, and part of the effect (effect including the image of the flame shown in FIG. 344 (a)) when the touch panel m 700a is operated is performed.

  FIG. 346 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 345 (e). The effect display area 208 d shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect of the display mode in which the face of the warrior is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change. After the end of the cut-in effect, the display device with touch panel m700 switches the display of the character string image of "Good!" To the model name of the pachinko machine 100. If the touch panel m 700 a is not operated as the operation request, the cut-in effect may not be displayed.

  FIG. 346 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 322 (b) to (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or FIG. The same effects as those shown in f ') to (h') are executed.

  Next, an effect (part 3) performed in the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 and 348. FIG. 347 (a)-Figure 348 (i), special figure fluctuation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a display device with touch panel m700 as an operation means is illustrated. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 347 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach presentation continuing from FIG. 321 (n). In FIG. 347 (a), a display in which two warriors are fighting is performed as the SP reach effect identical to FIG. 321 (o). Further, the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “CR Yoshimune”) is displayed on the display device m700 with a touch panel as a default display.

  FIGS. 347 (b) to 348 (f) show a flow of a series of effects and SP reach effects by display of touch operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 321 (a). In FIG. 347 (b), the touch operation animation for prompting the touch operation on the touch panel m700a is started, and "Touch the touch panel for 6 seconds!" As a display for prompting the operation on the touch panel m700a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "touch operation"). The image of the character string is displayed. In SP reach production, a character image in which one samurai is holding a sword is displayed. Further, on the display device with touch panel m700, an image of a character string “touch with finger for 6 seconds!” And an image of a zigzag arrow indicating a slide direction are displayed. The touch panel m 700 a may not be operated as indicated by the arrow image.

  347 (a) to 347 (b) may be displayed first on the decorative symbol display device 208 and later on the display device m700 with a touch panel, or the display device m700 with a touch panel may be a decorative symbol first The display device 208 may be performed later or simultaneously. In the state illustrated in FIG. 347 (b), the reception valid period of the touch operation (touch valid period) is not yet started.

  In FIG. 347 (c), as a display prompting a touch operation, the character string image is switched from “touch the touch panel for 6 seconds” to an image of a character string “Yoo” and a display device with a touch panel in the effect display area 208d. An image resembling m700 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "panel image") is displayed, and an effective period image is displayed below it. The valid period image of the present embodiment is an image showing a touch operation valid period.

  In FIG. 347 (d), the character string image is switched from “Yo” to an image of a character string “touch” as a display prompting a touch operation. In addition, an image of a character string “six more seconds” is displayed on the display device with touch panel m700. The image of the character string is an image for counting down the valid period of the touch operation. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 347 (d), the player knows that the effect accompanied by the operation on the touch panel m 700a has been started, but at this stage the touch operation acceptance period in which the countdown of the touch operation effective period has not yet started. Since the touch panel m700 is touched outside, the touch operation can not be accepted because the touch operation is not performed.

  FIG. 347 (e) shows a state in which the touch operation reception valid period has been started when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 347 (b) is started. When the touch operation reception period is started, as shown in FIG. 347 (e) to FIG. 348 (f), in the effect display area 208d, an image that simulates a hand slides the panel image in a zigzag from left to right. The animation of the mode to be displayed is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m 700 a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “touch!”, And the image of the arrow displayed on the display device with touch panel m700 are operation request display of touch operation on the touch panel m700a.

  In this example, the touch operation valid period is displayed by the valid period image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string image of “six seconds” displayed on the display device with touch panel m700. The touch operation effective period may be displayed on only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the display device with touch panel m700. Moreover, the touch operation effective period may be displayed as an image other than a gauge or a number.

  FIG. 348 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 347 (e). In FIGS. 348 (a) to (f), in the effect display area 208d, an image of an arrow indicating the slide operation direction and an image simulating a hand in the effect display area 208d during the touch operation effective period are zigzag from left to right. An animation of an aspect of sliding a panel image is displayed. The effective period of touch operation is 5 seconds later.

  In FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (f), the player slides the touch panel m 700a in a zigzag manner with the index finger in accordance with the operation request display. As a result, the small flames that occur at the feet of the warrior gradually grow and an image that becomes a large flame behind the warrior is displayed. In FIG. 348 (b), the image is displayed in a display mode in which a small flame is generated at both feet of the samurai. As shown in Fig. 348 (c)-(e), the image of the flame is gradually enlarged, and in Fig. 348 (f), the flame is grown to a size that wraps the entire body of the samurai behind the warrior. The image is displayed in a manner. The animation in which the image of the flame is greatly grown is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m 700 a.

  In FIG. 348 (f), the touch operation effective period has ended. FIG. 348 (g) shows the state after the touch operation valid period has ended. A panel image in the effect display area 208d, an effective period image, an image resembling a hand, and an image of an arrow indicating a slide operation direction are erased. Further, since the slide operation is performed on the touch panel-equipped display device m700, an image of a character string “GREAT!” Is displayed as a display according to the operation. The image of the character string "GREAT!" May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, or an image indicating that the touch panel m700 has been operated as requested. . In addition, a display mode that has grown to a position higher than the head of the warrior behind the warrior is maintained and a flame image is displayed.

  FIG. 348 (h) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in effect of the display mode in which the warrior's face is greatly expanded is executed. The display of the cut-in effect functions as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 348 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 322 (a), and thereafter, after the display shown in FIG. 322 (b) to (e), FIG. 322 (f) to (h) or FIG. The same effects as those shown in f ') to (h') are executed.

  Next, an effect (part 3) performed in the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 349 (a) to (j), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a touch-panel-equipped display device m700 as a first operation means and a chance button 136 as a second operation means are shown below the same. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 349 (a) shows a state in which the touch operation acceptance valid period has been started. When the touch operation reception period starts, as shown in FIGS. 349 (a) to (i), the effect display area 208d is an image in which an image imitating a hand slides the panel image in a zigzag from left to right. The animation of is displayed, and the operation method of the touch panel m 700 a is notified. The animation, the character string image of “touch!”, And the image of the arrow displayed on the display device with touch panel m700 are operation request display of touch operation on the touch panel m700a. Further, since the operation effective period of this example is 6 seconds, an image of a character string "another 6 seconds" is displayed on the display device with touch panel m700. In addition to the touch operation valid period, the button operation valid period is also started.

  In FIG. 349 (c), the player does not follow the display of the operation request of the touch operation, and the player presses the chance button 136 only once. While the touch operation is in effect, it is also a button operation acceptance period, and the depression is accepted, and a small flame image is displayed at the foot of the warrior in the effect display area 208d.

  In FIG. 349 (d), after the player stops pressing the chance button 136, in FIG. 349 (e), the player presses the chance button 136 again only once. However, since the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m 700a) indicated by the operation request display is operated, the image of the flame does not increase from the state shown in FIG. 349 (c). Note that, based on the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 349 (e), an animation in which the image of the flame is enlarged may be displayed.

  In FIG. 349 (f), after the player stops pressing the chance button 136, in FIGS. 349 (g) to (i), the player starts the slide operation of the touch panel m 700a according to the operation request display. Since the correct operation according to the operation request has been performed, the animation that the flame becomes larger is resumed, and as shown in FIGS. 349 (g) to (i), the image of the flame gradually becomes larger, as shown in FIG. 349 (i) Then, the image is displayed in a display mode in which the flame has grown to a size that wraps the entire body of the warrior behind the warrior. The animation in which the image of the flame is greatly grown is an animation corresponding to the operation of the touch panel m 700 a.

  In FIG. 349 (i), the touch operation effective period has ended. FIG. 349 (j) shows the state after the touch operation effective period has ended. A panel image in the effect display area 208d, an effective period image, an image resembling a hand, and an image of an arrow indicating a slide operation direction are erased. Further, since the slide operation is performed on the touch panel-equipped display device m700, an image of a character string “GREAT!” Is displayed as a display according to the operation. The image of the character string "GREAT!" May be an image displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 change game, or an image indicating that the touch panel m700a has been operated as requested. . In addition, the display mode that is grown behind the warrior to a position higher than the head of the warrior is maintained and the flame image is displayed. Thereafter, the display mode in which the warrior's face is greatly expanded as shown in FIG. The display of the cut-in effect is executed.

  As described above, in this example, when the operation means (chance button 136) different from the operation means (touch panel m 700a) for prompting the operation display is operated, the animation in which the image of the flame becomes large is discontinued and the growth of the flame When the operation means whose operation request display urges the operation is operated after that, the animation in which the image of the flame becomes larger is resumed (FIGS. 349 (g) to (g)). i)). The operation means (touch panel m 700a) for prompting the operation is operated to display an animation in which the flame image is enlarged, and then the operation request different from the operation means for prompting the operation (chance button 136) When the) is operated, the animation of the flame image may be stopped and the flame growth may be stopped.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 342 to 349. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

A plurality of operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and the touch panel m700a of the display device with touch panel m700);
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;

  The display of the first type is a display related to the first operation means (for example, the touch panel m700a) of the plurality of operation means,

In the first case, the display means can display at least a first display (for example, a display of a panel image imitating the touch panel m 700 a) of the first type of display,
The first case is the case of the first period,

  The first period is a period (for example, a touch operation effective period) in which at least an operation of the first operation unit (for example, an operation of the touch panel m 700 a) can be received.

  The first period is a period (for example, a button operation reception period) in which an operation of a second operation means (for example, the chance button 136) among the plurality of operation means can be received at least.

  In the second case, the display means displays a second display of the first type of display (for example, display of an image of a flame behind a samurai (Fig. 343 (g) to (j) A means capable of at least displaying the image of

In the third case, the display means displays a third display of the first type of display (for example, display of an image of a flame behind a samurai (FIG. 345 (c), (d) A means capable of at least displaying the image of
The third display is a display including at least a part of the second display,

  The second case is a case in which there is at least an operation of the first operating means in the first case,

The third case is a case where at least the operation of the second operation means is performed in the first case.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, at least a part of the second display is displayed when the operation means different from the operation request is operated, so that a game console characterized by the display can be realized. In addition, the third display may be displayed even if the second operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, which may improve the player's willingness to operate. Also, in some cases, it is possible to select the operation means that the player wants to operate, and to improve the interest of the game. The first display may be a display imitating the operation means. Further, the second display or the third display may be a display (display of an operation result) according to the operation of the operation means. In addition, "the display regarding a 1st operation means" may be a display (or image) which imitated a 1st operation means, or the display (or image) of the name of a 1st operation means It may be The “first period” is a “period in which at least the operation of the first operating means can be received and in which the operation of the second operating means of the plurality of operating means can be received at least”. (2) The above-described pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a second type of display;

The second type of display is a display (for example, a button image) related to the second operation means.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second type of display can be displayed, it may be possible to improve the operation desire.

In addition, "the display regarding a 2nd operation means" may be a display (or image) which imitated a 2nd operation means, and the display (or image) of the name of a 2nd operation means (3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a fourth display (for example, a display of an effective period image) of the first type of display in the first case;

The fourth display is a display regarding a period in which the operation of the first operation means can be received at least.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the reception period is displayed in the first case, the period in which at least the operation of the first operation means can be received is displayed, and the player is notified of the first operation means (4) The above-described pachinko machine 100 may be able to prompt the operation of

  In the fourth case, the display means is means for not displaying at least the second display,

In the fifth case, the display means is a means at least not displaying the third display,
The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the first operation means,
The fifth case is a case where the second operation means is not operated.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the second display and the third display are not displayed when there is no operation, and therefore, the operation desire may be able to be improved.

  In the above description, “when there is an operation of the operating means” may be when the operating means is operated or when the operation of the operating means is detected by the detection means. It is also possible that the operation of the operation means is detected by the detection means and that the detection is transmitted as information (command) to the sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400). The sub-control means may receive information (command) indicating that the operation means has been operated.

In the above, “when there is no operation of the operating means” may be when the operating means is not operated, or when the operation of the operating means is not detected by the detecting means. The operation may be performed, or the operation of the operation unit may be detected by the detection unit, and the detection may not be transmitted to the sub control unit as information (command). The sub-control means may not receive the information (command) that the operation means has been operated. Note that the second image may not be displayed at least when there is no operation of the operation means. In addition, when there is no operation of the operation means, the third image may not be displayed at least (5) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,

The first display is a display including at least a display (for example, a panel image) imitating the first operation means.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first display includes the display imitating the first operation means, it may be possible to prompt the operation of the first operation means.

  The second display may be an animation display. The third display may be an animation display. In addition, the third display may be an animation in which the middle of the animation display of the second display is performed.

  Next, a general operation method of the touch panel will be described. The operation method described below is an operation method that can be operated on the touch panel m 700 a of the present embodiment.

  "Tap" refers to an operation of tapping the touch panel with a finger (corresponding to clicking on a PC). It may be used as a rendering operation equivalent to pressing the rendering button (for example, the chance button 136) in a pachinko machine or slot machine.

  "Double tap" means operating the touch panel twice (corresponding to double click on a PC). In addition, in a pachinko machine or slot machine, the double tap may be used as a rendering operation equivalent to continuous hitting production by continuously operating one or more times.

  "Touch" refers to the action of touching the touch panel. When touching for a longer time than the operation time with "tap", it is called "touch". Note that pachinko machines and slot machines may be used for long press operations and the like. It may be regarded as an operation equivalent to “long tap”, “touch and hold”, and “long press” described later, and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.

"Drag" refers to an operation of moving a finger while holding the touch panel (corresponding to drag of a PC). In a pachinko machine or slot machine, even the “flick” or “swipe” operation described later may be regarded as an operation equivalent to “drag”, and the same effect may be performed based on these operations.
"Flick" refers to the action of lightly wiping the touch panel with a finger.
"Swipe" refers to an operation of sliding a finger while touching the touch panel.

  The "long tap", "touch and hold" and "long press" are operations for holding the touch panel pressed. Note that, in a pachinko machine or slot machine, it may be used as an effect corresponding to a long press operation of an effect button.

  "Multi-tap" is a generic term for operations with a plurality of fingers, and includes the following operation examples.

  "Rotation" means an operation of turning one finger around the other finger. In addition, in Pachinko machines and slot machines (especially in Pachinko machines), "rotation" while operating the steering wheel may be less versatile because operability is difficult. When the player is likely to stop the shooting operation, such as during SP reach, the game may be performed in association with the effect.

  "Pinch" is a generic term for pinching operations with two fingers, and there are mainly the following two operations.

  “Pinch out” and “pinch open” mean an operation when the touch panel is pressed with two fingers and the area between them is expanded and enlarged. In a pachinko machine or slot machine, an effect display may be performed in an area hidden by the operation of “pinch out” in the area hidden by the effect display or the like.

  "Pinch in" and "pinch close" mean an operation when shrinking and shrinking between the two fingers while pressing with two fingers. In a pachinko machine or slot machine, an effect display may be performed to hide the area displayed by the effect display or the like by the operation of “pinch in”.

  “Pinch-in using four or five fingers” is used when returning to the home screen on a tablet terminal etc. However, in a flip machine or slot machine, for example, switching of a plurality of presentation modes is described above. Even in the configuration that can be switched in an order determined by any operation (for example, double tap), it is used for effects such as returning to a predetermined effect mode by “pinch in using four or five fingers”. Good.

  "Swipe vertically or horizontally using four or five fingers" is used for multi-taskbar display and application switching on tablet devices etc. For flip machines and slot machines, for example, a big hit history Alternatively, it may be used for switching display relating to the implementation of the information display screen such as the winning ball and the like, and switching display relating to the implementation of the mode setting screen for the individual setting such as Daitomo.

  For example, "tracing" may be configured to shift to a game explanation display or an effect explanation display when tracing as displayed on the display means.

  "Shake" has a canceling function by shaking (vibrating) the device body, but especially in pachinko machines, cheating that changes the flow of gaming balls (a vibration sensor provided in the pachinko machine responds) There is a risk of misidentification. However, for example, the game ball is not fired, and the demo display screen or the original mode setting screen is being displayed, or the like, which is used for canceling the contents input only under one or more conditions. It is also good. Also in this operation, operability may be improved by combination with another operation. For example, while providing the function of canceling only one by the above-mentioned operation (for example, "pinch-in"), it may be configured to cancel all by "shake".

  Note that the touch panel may be one that can sense the pressing force on the touch panel screen, and the displayed image may be different when the touch panel is strongly pressed and when it is weakly pressed. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated instead of the touch panel, for example, the same effect as when the touch panel is pressed weakly may be given, or the same effect as when the touch button is strongly pressed may be performed. It may be displayed.

When the first display is displayed on the display unit and the first operation unit and the second operation unit are simultaneously operated, it is determined that the first operation unit has been operated, The second display may be displayed, or it may be determined that the second operation means has been operated, and the third display may be displayed. The first operation means and the second operation may be displayed. It may be determined that both of the means have been operated and the second display may be displayed, and it is determined that both the first operating means and the second operating means have been operated, and the third display is displayed. It is determined that both the first operating means and the second operating means are operated, and a fourth display different from both the second display and the third display is displayed. If it is determined that both the first operating means and the second operating means have been operated, nothing is displayed. May be the odd, it is determined that no operation of both the first operating means and the second operating means, anything may be prevented from being displayed (Example 11)

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 350 shows a chance button 136 provided for the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 350 (a) is an external perspective view of the chance button 136, and FIG. 350 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the chance button 136. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 350 (a), the chance button 136 has a button cover m800 and a button m802. The button cover m800 is formed of, for example, a transparent resin material, and has a hollow cylindrical shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b), the button m802 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed of, for example, a resin material. The button m 802 is housed in the button cover m 800 such that the bottom and the side of the button m 802 face the bottom and the side of the button cover m 800 respectively. Further, the button cover m800 and the button m802 protrude upward, and the player can depress the button m802 to operate the chance button 136 by pressing the button cover m800.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), a plurality of (for example, 3) LEDs m 804 are arranged in the button m 802. The LED m 804 is used as a light source of the chance button 138. In addition, a detection piece m806 is provided on the lower bottom surface of the button m802. A sensor m 808 is disposed opposite to the detection piece m 806. For example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor m 808. When the button cover m800 is pressed and the button m802 is pressed, the sensor m808 detects the detection piece m806. Thereby, the first secondary control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136.

  Further, a cylindrical protrusion extending vertically downward is formed at the center of the lower bottom surface of the button m802. A compression coil spring m810 is fitted into the projection. When the button cover m800 is depressed and the button m802 is depressed, the compression coil spring is contracted. When pressing of the button cover m800 is stopped, the compressed compression coil spring m802 returns to the original state, and the button m802 and the button cover m800 project upward. The chance button 136 is accommodated in the circular opening and urged upward, and sinks downward when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position It has become. As a result, the button cover m800 and the button m802 are urged upward, and sink when pressed down, but when the pressing force ceases to act, the urging force projects upward and stops at a predetermined position ing.

  The chance button 136 also has a motor m812. The button cover m800 is driven (rotated) by a motor m812 via a gear. As a result, the button cover m800 is rotatable, for example, in the counterclockwise direction, with the vertical direction as the rotation axis. The motor m 812 is controlled by, for example, the first sub control unit 400. When the button cover m800 is pressed, the motor m812 also moves downward with the pressing.

  Next, the effects performed in the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In FIG. 351 (a) to (j), the special figure variation game is shown in time series in this order. Further, on the right side of each drawing, a chance button 136 as an operation means is illustrated. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 351 (a) illustrates the continuation of the SP reach presentation continuing from FIG. 321 (n). In FIG. 351 (a), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 321 (o) is executed. In FIG. 351 (b), the same SP reach effect as in FIG. 322 (a) is executed. In the image by SP reach effect in FIG. 351 (b), the image display area is divided up and down by the horizontal border substantially at the center, the character image of one samurai is displayed in the upper display area, and in the lower display area. The character image of the other samurai is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 351 (b), the button display is not performed immediately before the start of the button operation animation, and the light emitting means (LED) provided on the chance button 136 is in the extinguished state.

  FIGS. 351 (c) to (j) show the flow of a series of button effects and SP reach effects by the display of button operation animation performed subsequently to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 351 (b). FIG. 351 (c) shows a state in the middle of displaying a button image and an effective period image simultaneously in the fade-in process on the front surface, with an image by SP reach effect as a background image. In the present embodiment, the button image has a display mode imitating the button m802. The button image and the valid period image may not be displayed at the same time, and one image may be displayed before the other image. Note that the chance button 136 may be in the light emitting state even outside the reception valid period of the button operation. The light emission mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode during button operation and / or non-operation during the reception valid period.

  In FIG. 351 (d), in the button effect, the valid period image is displayed below the button image and the button image. The player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 351 (d), but at this stage the button operation acceptance period countdown has not been started yet, so the player has no chance to accept button operation. Even when the button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted. The chance button 136 is in the non-emission state (shown in white in the figure).

  In FIG. 351 (e), an animation in which the button image rotates, for example, around the left is displayed. In addition, a character string image "press" is displayed above the button image. In the chance button 136, the outer peripheral portion of the button m802 is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the figure). In the button display relating to the button effect, the display mode is changed such that the portion corresponding to the periphery of the button button outside the chance button pressed surface is in a light emitting state (shown in gray in the drawing). At this stage, since the button operation acceptance period can not be started because the countdown of the button operation acceptance period has not started, the pressing operation can not be accepted even if the chance button 136 is depressed. In this example, the chance button 136 emits light after the animation in which the button image rotates is started, but these may be simultaneous, or the change to the light emitting state of the chance button 136 is first, the button image The start of the rotation animation may be after. Note that the rotation animation of the button image may be an animation that is rotating faster than the rotation of the button cover m800.

  In FIG. 351 (f), the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 has started to rotate leftward (in the figure, the rotation direction of the button cover m800 is indicated by the arrow). The button m802 in the button cover m800 does not rotate. In addition, at this stage, a button operation acceptance period has started. In this example, after the animation that the button image rotates is started, the rotation of the button cover m800 is started, but the start of these may be simultaneous, or the rotation start of the button cover m800 is first, The rotation animation of the button image may be started after the start.

  FIG. 351 (g) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has passed a little and the bar-like portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened rightward.

  In FIG. 351 (h), the button operation acceptance period has further elapsed, and the player presses the chance button 136. Based on this pressing, the light emission mode of the chance button 136 is changed to the mode in which the entire button m 802 emits light. On the other hand, the rotation animation of the button image is continued, and the rotation operation of the button cover m 800 is continued.

  FIG. 351 (i) shows a state in which the button operation reception period has ended. In FIG. 351 (i), the rotation operation of the button cover m 800 ends, and the chance button 136 changes to the unlit state. The rotation animation of the button image ends after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the operation valid period.

  In FIG. 351 (j), after the end of the operation effective period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and the face-up image of one warrior is displayed. The image of the face up of the samurai is displayed as a notice of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  FIG. 352 is a table comparing rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The operation means is, for example, a chance button 136, and the rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image. In addition to the animation, the rotating means may be an operating means different from the chance button 136 or a movable means for rotating.

  FIG. 352 shows the state of the operation means and the rotation means at time t0 to t8. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. In FIG. 352, "time (s)" (seconds), "operation means", "operation means (plan view)", "rotation means" and "rotation means (plan view)" are shown from the top. The column of “operation means” shows a perspective view of the chance button 136, and the column of “operation means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. In the chance button 136, the button cover m802 is rotating. The column of "rotating means" shows a perspective view of the rotating means, and the column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 352, in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means, markers of black dots are illustrated on the circumferences of the operation means and the rotation means. The position of the marker at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degrees, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared.

  At time t1, the operation means is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. At time t2, the operation means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise. At time t3, the operation means is rotated 135 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operation means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise. Thus, the operating means rotates half a turn at t4 seconds, and the rotating means rotates one turn at t4 seconds. At time t8. The operating means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotating means is rotated 720 degrees counterclockwise. Between time t0 and time t8, the operation means rotates once, and the rotation means rotates twice.

  In this example, the rotational speed of the rotating means is faster than the rotational speed of the operating means. The rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means may be the same, and the rotational speed of the operation means may be faster than that of the rotation means of the rotation means.

  FIGS. 353 (a)-(c) are the tables which compared the rotational speed of the operation means of the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of a present Example, and a rotation means. In FIG. 353 (a), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 of this example is given the word "PUSH". The rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image imitating a button m 802 to which the characters “PUSH” are attached, or a movable means attached to “PUSH”.

  FIG. 353 (a) shows the states of the operation means and the rotation means at times t0 to t8. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. In FIG. 353 (a), "time (s)" (seconds), "operation means (plan view)", and "rotation means (plan view)" are shown from the top. The column of “operation means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 353 (a), in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means, markers of black dots are illustrated on the circumferences of the operation means and the rotation means. The position of the marker at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degrees, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared. In FIG. 353 (a), the rotational speed of the operation means is the same as the rotational speed of the operation means shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 353 (a), the rotational speed of the rotation means is the same as the rotational speed of the rotation means shown in FIG.

  In this example, the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 which is the operation means is rotated, and the character "PUSH" attached to the button cover m800 is also rotated. In addition, the letters "PUSH" attached to the rotating means are also rotating.

  In FIG. 353 (b), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the button m802 of the chance button 136 of this example is attached with the word "PUSH". The rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image imitating a button m 802 to which the characters “PUSH” are attached, or a movable means attached to “PUSH”.

  FIG. 353 (b) shows the state of the operation means and the rotation means at time t0 to t8. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. FIG. 353 (b) shows “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means (plan view)”, and “rotation means (plan view)” from above. The column of “operation means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 353 (b), in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means, markers of black dots are illustrated on the circumferences of the operation means and the rotation means. The position of the marker at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degrees, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared. In FIG. 353 (b), the rotational speed of the operation means is the same as the rotational speed of the operation means shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 353 (b), the rotational speed of the rotation means is the same as the rotational speed of the rotation means shown in FIG.

  In this example, since the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 which is the operation means is rotating, the character "PUSH" attached to the button m802 is not rotating. On the other hand, the letters "PUSH" attached to the rotating means are rotating. Thus, the characters "PUSH" of the operation means are not rotated, but the characters "PUSH" of the rotation means are not rotated. Note that the characters “PUSH” of the operation means may be rotated, and the characters “PUSH” of the rotation means may not be rotated.

  In FIG. 353 (c), the operation means is, for example, the chance button 136, and the button m802 of the chance button 136 of this example is attached with the word "PUSH". The rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of an image imitating a three-leaflet, or a movable means with three-leaf love.

  FIG. 353 (c) shows the state of the operation means and the rotation means at time t0 to t8. The intervals between times t0 to t8 are equal. The states of the operating means and the rotating means at times t5 to t7 are omitted. In FIG. 353 (c), "time (s)" (seconds), "operation means (plan view)", and "rotation means (plan view)" are shown from the top. The column of “operation means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 353 (c), markers of black dots are illustrated on the circumferences of the operation means and the rotation means in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means. The position of the marker at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degrees, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared. In FIG. 353 (b), the rotational speed of the operation means is the same as the rotational speed of the operation means shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 353 (b), the rotational speed of the rotation means is the same as the rotational speed of the rotation means shown in FIG.

  In this example, since the button cover m800 of the chance button 136 which is the operation means is rotating, the character "PUSH" attached to the button m802 is not rotating. Moreover, the rotation means of this example is not an image or the like imitating the operation means. Thus, the operating means and the rotating means may not have a common form, shape or aspect.

  FIG. 354 is a diagram for explaining an example in which the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means change. The upper part of FIG. 354 (a) shows a state in which the rotating means is rotating. The rotation means in FIG. 354 (a) is a rotation animation of a button image. In FIG. 354 (a), the display area of a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is shown by a dotted line. At the bottom of the button image, an effective period image is displayed. Also, the operation means of this example is the chance button 136.

  FIG. 354 (a) shows passage of time from left to right. The left end of FIG. 354 (a) shows the rotation operation of the rotation means and the operation means at the start of the button operation reception period. The center and the right end of FIG. 354 (a) show a state in which the rotational speeds of the rotation means and the operation means are increased during the button operation acceptance period. The rotation speeds of the rotation means and the operation means increase with the passage of time. In this example, the rotational speeds of the rotating means and the operating means are always the same. When the rotation speed changes, the rotation speed of the operation means may change after the rotation speed of the rotation means changes, or the change of the rotation speed may be simultaneous, or the rotation speed of the operation means After changing, the rotational speed of the operating means may change. Also, the rotational speeds of the rotating means and the operating means may change gradually or may change at once. Also, the rotational speed may be increased or decreased.

  FIG. 354 (b) is a table comparing rotational speeds when the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means change. The operation means is, for example, a chance button 136, and the rotation means is, for example, a rotation animation of a button image. In addition to the animation, the rotating means may be an operating means different from the chance button 136 or a movable means for rotating.

  FIG. 354 (b) shows the state of the operation means and the rotation means at time t0 to t5. The intervals between times t0 to t5 are equal. FIG. 354 (b) shows “time (s)” (seconds), “operation means”, “operation means (plan view)”, “rotation means” and “rotation means (plan view)” from above. The column of “operation means” shows a perspective view of the chance button 136, and the column of “operation means (plan view)” shows a plan view of the chance button 136. At the chance button 136, the button cover m800 is rotating. The column of "rotating means" shows a perspective view of the rotating means, and the column of "rotating means (plan view)" shows a plan view of the rotating means.

  In FIG. 354 (b), in order to compare the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means, markers of black dots are illustrated on the circumferences of the operation means and the rotation means. The position of the marker at time t0 is set to a rotation angle of 0 degrees, and the rotation speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are compared.

  At time t1, the operation means is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. At time t2, the operation means is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise. At time t3, the rotational speeds of the operation means and the rotation means are increased. At time t3, the operation means is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operation means is rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 540 degrees counterclockwise. At time t4, the operation means is rotated 360 degrees counterclockwise, and the rotation means is rotated 720 degrees counterclockwise.

  From time t0 to time t2, the rotational speed of the operation means is 45 degrees / t1, and the rotational speed of the rotation means is 90 degrees / t1. At time t3, the rotational speed increases, and from time t3 to time t5, the rotational speed of the operation means is 90 degrees / t1, and the rotational speed of the rotation means is 180 degrees / t1. In this example, the rotational speeds of the operating means and the rotating means are doubled from t3.

  In the present embodiment, the operation means and the rotation means rotate in one direction (left rotation), but may be configured to be capable of reverse rotation (right rotation). Further, when control is performed to rotate in the opposite direction to the specific direction while the operation means is rotated in the specific direction, the rotation means may also rotate in the opposite direction. In that case, the operation means may start reverse rotation earlier than the rotation means, or the operation means and the rotation means may start reverse rotation simultaneously, and the rotation means is more than the operation means The reverse rotation may be started first.

  In addition, when control is performed to rotate in the opposite direction to the specific direction while the operation means is rotating in the specific direction, temporary stop or speed reduction may be performed at the switching timing. In that case, the rotation means may perform the same operation as the operation means, or may perform reverse rotation without performing the operation of the switching timing.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 350 to 354. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Operation means (e.g., chance button 136);
Rotation means (for example, a button image displayed on the display means);
A game console equipped with
The operation means is means capable of at least performing the first operation,
The rotating means is means capable of at least performing the second operation,

  The first operation is an operation in which at least a part of the operation means is rotated in a first mode,

The second operation is an operation in which at least a part of the rotation means rotates in a second mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the rotational speed of the operation means and the rotational speed of the rotation means are different, it is possible to realize a game console having features of the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the effects and improve the interest of the game. Here, as the rotation means, an operation means different from the chance button 136, a movable means that rotates, an image (including an image imitating the operation means) and the like are included. Note that "at least a part of the operating means rotates at the first speed" may indicate that only a part of the operating means rotates at the first speed, and all of the operating means It may be shown to rotate at one speed. Also, "at least a part of the rotating means rotates at the second speed" may indicate that only a part of the rotating means rotates at the second speed, and all of the rotating means It may be shown to rotate at two speeds. The "first aspect" may be the first speed. The "second mode" may be a second speed (2) the above-described pachinko machine 100,

  In the first case, the first part in the operation means is a part that goes around in a first time (for example, t0 to t8 seconds shown in FIG. 352),

  The second part of the rotation means is a part that makes a round in a second time (for example, t0 to t4 seconds shown in FIG. 352) in the second case,

  The first case is a case where the operation means is rotated in the first mode,

The second case is a case where the rotating means is rotated in the second mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the time for one turn may be different, so variations of the presentation may be increased and the interest of the game may be improved (3) the pachinko machine 100 described above,
Display means (eg, decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;
The display of the first type is a display relating to the operation means,

  In the third case, the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display of the first type of display;

The third case is a case where at least the first operation is performed by the operation means,
The rotating means is the first display.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display means is provided and the rotation means is the image displayed on the display means, the operation means may be able to pay attention to the operation means and improve the operation motivation (4) The pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display displayed at least in an operation reception period (for example, a button operation reception period),

The operation accepting period is a period in which at least an operation of the operation means can be accepted.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the first display is a display that is displayed at least during the reception period of the operation means, so the operation means may be able to focus attention on the operation means (5 ) The above pachinko machine 100,
The operation means is a button (e.g., a chance button 136),
The first display is a display including at least a button image,

The button image is an image imitating at least a part of the button (for example, the button m802).
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the first display is an image imitating at least a part of the button, so the button may be focused on, and the operation motivation may be improved.

  Further, as a comparison between the rotation means and the operation means, (1) regarding the rotation start timing, the operation means may start rotation earlier than the rotation means. In addition, the operation means may start rotation simultaneously with the rotation means. Alternatively, the operating means may start to rotate after the rotating means. In addition, when a rotation means is display, rotation start timing can be read as display start timing.

  Further, as a comparison between the rotation means and the operation means, (2) the rotation end timing may end the rotation of the operation means earlier than the rotation means. In addition, the operation means may end the rotation simultaneously with the rotation means. Alternatively, the operation means may finish rotating later than the rotation means. When the rotation means is display, the rotation end timing can be read as the timing at which the display is erased.

  Also, with respect to (3) rotational speed, the first speed may be faster than the second speed. Also, the first velocity may be the same velocity as the second velocity. Alternatively, the first velocity may be slower than the second velocity.

  Also, the rotating means may be movable means. Also, the rotating means may be a second operating means. The operation means may be a first operation means.

  Moreover, regarding the operation means and the image, the operation means may be configured of a first means (cover) and a second means (operation unit). The cover may be configured to cover at least a portion of the operation unit, where at least a portion may be only a portion, and indicates that the player can cover the entire operable surface. May be Also, only the first means (cover) may rotate. In addition, the first display may include a display at least imitating the second means.

  Also, the first display may be a display that does not include a display imitating the first means. Moreover, the display (for example, the light emission aspect, the PUSH display, etc.) displayed on the second means may be included in the first display. In that case, the display imitating the display displayed on the second means may be rotating or may not be rotating. For example, in the case of being rotated, it can be falsely displayed that the image is rotating but not rotating but it is not rotating, and when it is not rotating, only part of the player is not rotating. In some cases can give a sense of incongruity.

  Further, with regard to the display when the rotational speed of the operating means is increased, the operating means may be means capable of rotating at the third speed. Also, the rotating means may be means capable of rotating at a fourth speed. The operating means may change from the first speed to the third speed (hereinafter referred to as "first change"), and the rotation means changes from the second speed to the fourth speed (hereinafter referred to as "second Change)).

  Also, the first change may be a change that precedes the second change. Also, the first change may be a change that is performed simultaneously with the second change. Also, the first change may be a change that is performed after the second change. Also, the third velocity / fourth velocity may be a velocity faster than the first velocity / second velocity. Also, the third speed / fourth speed may be slower than the first speed / second speed. Also, the third speed / fourth speed may be the same speed as the first speed / second speed. Also, the third speed / fourth speed may be in the same rotational direction as the first speed / second speed. Also, the third speed / fourth speed may be in a rotational direction (reverse rotation) different from the first speed / second speed. The operating means may be means for gradually changing from the first speed to the third speed. In addition, the operating means may be means for changing at once from the first speed to the third speed. Also, the rotating means may be means for gradually changing from the second speed to the fourth speed. Also, the rotating means may be means for gradually changing from the second speed to the fourth speed.

  In addition, regarding the big button display and the reduction button display, in the third case, the display means may be means capable of displaying the second display of the first type of display. Also, the second display may be a display in which the first display is enlarged or reduced. Also, the second display may be rotated and displayed at a fifth speed.

  Also, the fifth speed in the second display may be the same speed as the second speed in the first display. Also, the fifth speed in the second display may be slower than or faster than the second speed in the first display. Moreover, you may perform the display which a rotational speed changes. Further, the timing at which the rotational speed changes may be the same for the first display and the second display, or one display may change earlier than the other display. In addition, the amount of change in rotational speed may be the same for the first display and the second display, or may be the amount of change such that one display becomes faster / slower than the other display.

  The operation is performed when the condition for executing the first operation is satisfied (for example, transmission of a command from the second sub control unit 500, reception of a command from the second sub control unit 500, etc.), and the operation If the means does not rotate (due to failure or the like), the rotating means may perform the second operation or may not perform the second operation, and is different from the second operation (For example, vibration operation etc.) may be performed.

  The operation is performed when the condition for executing the first operation is satisfied (for example, transmission of a command from the second sub control unit 500, reception of a command from the second sub control unit 500, etc.), and the operation If the means does not rotate (due to failure or the like), the first display in which the second operation is performed may be displayed, and the first display in which the second operation is performed may be displayed. It may not be displayed, and may be displayed different from the first display (for example, a display such as “the button is broken”).

  The first display may be a display including a display for performing a second operation. Also, the first display may be a display capable of at least performing the second operation. Here, the “display for performing the second operation” may be an animation for performing the second operation.

The display imitating the first operation means may be a display including a second operation. Here, the “display including the second operation” may be an animation for performing the second operation (Example 12)

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game console capable of setting an original mode. In the original mode, in the gaming machine where the original mode can be set, history information of the result of the game played in the state where the original mode is set is stored in the gaming machine. In the game console, various benefits (for example, effects with a low appearance rate, execution of effects indicating information related to game benefits, etc.) are given according to the history information. When ending the game in which the original mode is set, individual setting information, which is information of a player individual, including history information stored in the game stand is input to the server. Every time the game in which the original mode is set is ended, individual setting information including new history information in which the history of the game is reflected is issued from the gaming machine. When the player inputs individual setting information including new history information to the server, the individual setting information stored on the server side is updated. By inputting the individual setting information stored in the server to the gaming machine when playing the next game, a benefit according to the history information included in the input individual setting information is given also in the next game. The individual setting information is included in an encrypted password of a predetermined number of digits, and exchanged between the game console, the player (external device apparatus), and the server. The individual setting information also includes a model code that specifies the model of the game stand, and the game machine stores a corresponding model code. In the specification where history information can be commonly used even among different models, the corresponding model code is multiple, and in the specification where history information can be used only between the same models, the corresponding model code is one. .

  FIG. 355 (a) is a screen transition diagram of the original mode displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the original mode is set. When the chance button 136 is operated after the demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the initial screen of the option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Here, the demonstration screen is a customer waiting screen, and is executed as one of demonstration effects. The demonstration effect is an effect that is executed when the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display ends. To explain in more detail, the demonstration effect is not limited to merely performing simulated variation of symbol variation display, but, for example, a predetermined character or the like for displaying the title of the game platform is displayed to describe the feature of the game platform. Effects to be performed, lamp effects accompanying these effects, voice effects, etc. correspond. A demonstration flag is prepared in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and when the demonstration flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 displays a demonstration screen (demo screen) on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The demonstration effect ends at a predetermined timing. For example, the process ends when there is a new winning on the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start port 232. At the end of the demonstration, the demonstration flag is set to off.

  On the initial screen of the option menu, a "user menu (display of game-related information for a player)" and "custom machine customization" are prepared. In the initial screen of the option menu, model information display, big hit history display, sound adjustment, and brightness adjustment may be prepared as selectable menus.

  As shown in the transition diagram of FIG. 355 (a), the confirmation (OK) button or the chance button 136 of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed in a state where the “user menu” is selected (hereinafter, “determination operation” And may shift to the user menu screen. Details of the user menu screen will be described later.

  In addition, in a state where “custom machine customization” is selected, when the decision operation is performed by pressing the decision button or the chance button 136, the screen shifts to the real machine customization screen.

  In the user menu or actual machine customization, when a decision operation is performed after predetermined settings are made, an option menu is displayed again. When the cancel (C) button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the option menu is displayed, the screen returns to the demo screen.

  With the initial screen of the option menu, the user menu screen, the actual machine customization screen, etc. displayed (including during operation of selection operation etc.), the game ball is in the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start port 232 When the symbol variation start condition is satisfied (when the variation display of the symbol is started), these screen displays are canceled and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 355 (b) is a screen transition diagram of the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of user mode setting. The user menu is provided with "member registration", "password input", "two-dimensional code issuance", "personal data clear" and "end" as selectable menus.

  When the determination operation is performed in a state in which "member registration" is selected, the screen shifts to a "two-dimensional code display (for member registration)" screen. The screen displays a two-dimensional code which needs to be read at the time of member registration. When the decision operation is performed during display of the screen, the “password input screen” is shifted, and when the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds), the cancel button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed If it is, go to "Option menu". In the "password input screen", a password obtained by reading a two-dimensional code can be input.

  In addition, when "decision input" is selected in the user menu and the determination operation is performed, the screen shifts to a "password input screen". When the password is input and the determination operation is performed, the “authentication success message” is displayed if the password is correct, and the “authentication failure message” is displayed if the password is not correct. When the "authentication failure message" is displayed, it is possible to select another password input or end of the user menu. When the password input again is selected, the screen shifts to the "password input screen", and when the user menu end is selected, the screen shifts to the "option menu". When the setting operation unit 137 or the chance button 136 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) while the “password input screen” is displayed, the “option menu” is displayed when the cancel button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. Transition to

  In addition, when the determination operation is performed during selection of “issue two-dimensional code” in the user menu, “issuance confirmation message for confirming whether the two-dimensional code may be issued if the player is logged in to the user mode” Is displayed, and when the user mode is not logged in, a "password unentered message" is displayed. A "two-dimensional code (for game end)" screen is displayed, which displays a two-dimensional code when the decision operation is performed while the "issue confirmation message" is displayed, and an "end confirmation message" is displayed when the decision operation is further performed. When the determination operation is performed by "No", "two-dimensional code display (for game end)" is displayed again, and when the determination operation is performed by "Yes", the operation shifts to the "option menu". In addition, when it is determined and displayed while displaying the "password unentered message", it shifts to the "option menu".

  In addition, when the determination operation is performed during the selection of “Clear personal data” in the user menu, the “delete confirmation message” confirms whether or not the player may confirm the deletion of the personal data when logged in to the user mode. Is displayed, and when the user mode is not logged in, a "password unentered message" is displayed. An “erase confirmation message” is displayed, and when the determination operation is performed with “Yes”, an “erase complete message” is displayed, and then, shift to “option menu”. "Erase confirmation message" is displayed, and if it is determined that "No" is selected, the screen shifts to "User menu". In addition, when it is determined and displayed while displaying the "password unentered message", it shifts to the "option menu".

  In addition, when the determination operation is performed while the user menu "end" is selected, the mode shifts to the "option menu".

  Next, a demonstration screen will be described using FIG. FIG. 356 shows the screen transition of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series.

  FIG. 356 (a) has shown the state after the special figure 1 change game is complete | finished. The special figure F (disappeared symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed on the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the special figure d (disappeared symbol) which is the result of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, it is the result of the latest common figure fluctuation game The common figure B (disappeared symbol) is stopped and displayed. Moreover, since the reserve of special figure 1 is 0, all the lamps of special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 are extinguished, and since the reserve number of special figure 2 is 0, all the lamps of special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are extinguished Since the number of reservations of the common drawing is 0, all the lamps of the common drawing holding lamp 216 are turned off. Further, the special figure 1 suspension icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 suspension icon display area A, and the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area C.

  FIGS. 356 (b) to (d) show a state where a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from FIG. 356 (a). If the game ball does not enter the special view 1 start opening 230 or the special view 2 start opening 232 for a predetermined time, and the special view change game is not started, the display shifts to the demonstration screen and the lower center of the effect display area 208 d A horizontal rectangular display area is provided, and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 136 and an image of a character string "display menu" are displayed in the display area. As a result, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is informed that the screen changes to the initial screen of the option menu. Further, in FIG. 356 (d), when the second time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without starting the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display of the special figure or the common figure is stopped and displayed, FIG. 356 (a The background image in the effect display area 208d illustrated in (a) to (c) (in the present example, an image in which two characters face each other in the sitting area) disappears, and only the display area remains. In FIG. 356 (b) and later, the special figure 1 pending icon display area A and the variable icon display area C may be hidden. The background image in the effect display area 208d illustrated in FIGS. 356 (a) to 356 (c) may be a background image displayed during the symbol variation display.

  If the chance button 136 is not pressed for a predetermined time in the states shown in FIGS. 356 (b) to 356 (d), the demonstration effects shown in FIGS. 356 (e) and (f) are started. When the demonstration effect is started, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and as shown in FIG. 356 (e), an image of the logo mark of the maker of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (f), an animation for demonstration effect is displayed. In addition, during the demonstration effect, a horizontally long rectangular display area is provided at the lower center of the effect display area 208d, and an image simulating the chance button 136 and an image of a character string "display menu" are displayed in the display area. Keep being done. When the chance button 136 is pressed during demonstration, the demonstration is stopped and the screen is shifted to the initial screen of the option menu.

  When the animation for demonstration effect ends, the screen moves to a screen shown in FIG. 356 (g). The state shown in FIG. 356 (g) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 356 (b). In this state, if each button of the setting operation unit 137 and the chance button 136 are not pressed for a predetermined time, and the special figure change game is not started, the demonstration effect shown in FIGS. 356 (e) and (f) starts again Be done.

  Next, screen transition of the user menu will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 357 (a) to 357 (g) show screen transitions of the user menu in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 357, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated.

  FIG. 357 (a) shows the initial screen of the option menu displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the option menu of this example, a user MENU and real machine customization are provided. In the effect display area 208d, an image of a character string "MENU" is displayed at the upper center, and an image of a character string "user MENU" is displayed in a rectangular frame at the lower portion thereof. The image of the character string "custom machine customization" is displayed in the frame. In the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the setting operation unit 137 is displayed. In the image, a portion corresponding to the up, down, left, and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 is displayed in a predetermined color, and an image of a character string “selection” is displayed on the right. Each menu can be selected by pressing the up, down, left, and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137. Further, on the right side of the image, an image imitating the setting operation unit 137 whose portion corresponding to the confirm (OK) button is a predetermined color and an image imitating the chance button 136 are displayed side by side. By pressing the enter button or the chance button 136, the selected menu is determined. In the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating a cancel (C) button of the setting operation unit 137 and an image of a character string "CLOSE" are displayed. When the cancel button is pressed while the image simulating the cancel button is displayed, the menu screen is closed and the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 356 (a).

  In the initial screen of the option menu, when the “user MENU” is selected and the determination operation is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 357 (b). The user menu relates to game-related information for the player, and in the initial screen shown in FIG. 357 (b), “member registration” “password input” “two-dimensional code issue” “personal data clear” and A selection window m 2081 with the display of “end” is prepared, and a message window m 2082 is prepared on the right side. When the “user MENU” is selected and the determination operation is performed, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to the original mode.

  In FIG. 357 (b), “membership registration” in the selection window m 2081 on the left side is selected. In the message window m2082 on the right side, an image of a character string recommending member registration (in this example, "Please register for first time users") is displayed.

  When the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where "member registration" is selected, the display screen for member registration shown in FIG. 357 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the member registration screen, a two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration is displayed, and a password input screen is displayed. In addition, an image of a character string "Please read a two-dimensional code with a mobile phone and obtain a password from a mobile site." Is displayed in a rectangular frame at the bottom of the effect display area 208d, and a mobile phone terminal The two-dimensional code mQ1 is read by the like, and it is informed that the password can be acquired from the mobile site. Since the password input can be selected even on the initial screen of the user menu, the screen may return to the initial screen of the user menu.

  Although the two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration shown in FIG. 357 (c) includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the server side, the individual identification information (ID) and the like described later is included. Information is not included and can be reissued. The two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration is for acquiring a password.

  In order to set the original mode, it is first necessary to register as a member. The player reads the two-dimensional code mQ1 for member registration using a mobile phone terminal or a smart phone having a camera function and a bar code reader function, and acquires the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile phone terminal. The server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) is information based on an individual identification number unique to a mobile phone terminal or a smartphone, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When a password is issued from the server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone.

  Also, a player who has already registered as a member and wants to set the original mode must enter a password. The password can be acquired by accessing a password issuance page of the server from a mobile phone terminal or a smartphone. When the server acquires personal identification information of the accessing person, the server issues a password including personal identification information (ID) and history information stored in association with the personal identification information, and the mobile phone terminal or smartphone The password is displayed on the display screen of.

  The password is encrypted with a predetermined number of digits, and is, for example, “GI ¥ LS”. The amount of information that can be included in the password depends on the number of digits of the password x the number of input character types. The password may include only personal identification information for identifying the player, and the gaming machine may store the history information in association with the personal identification information, but the server may store the history information. By storing the game, it is possible to play the game in the original mode under the same conditions even when the game machine is moved.

  FIG. 357 (d) shows a password input screen displayed when “password input” is selected and determined from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the "Enter password" in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 357 (b) is selected, and the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed, a password entry screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Ru.

  On the password input screen, while looking at the display screen of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone to which the password has been sent, operate the up, down, left, and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move it to the desired character position, and confirm button or chance button 136 By pressing, the input character is determined. When the five-character password input is completed, the up, down, left, and right buttons are operated to move the cursor to the “decision” position, and the enter password is entered by pressing the enter button or chance button 136. It is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

  The password is input to the terminal 100, which decrypts the encrypted password to obtain history information. Here, if the history information can not be acquired or does not correspond to the model code included in the history information, it is informed that the password could not be recognized, and the screen returns to the password input screen. If the player has made a mistake in password input several times (for example, three times), the user may return to the option menu without displaying the password input screen. Furthermore, when a password has been input incorrectly several times, the password may not be input for a predetermined period (for example, one game) or for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

  On the other hand, when the history information can be acquired, notification that the password has been successfully recognized ("Authentication success message" shown in FIG. 357 (e)) is notified, and the setting of the original mode is completed. . In this embodiment, the setting of the original mode can not be performed unless the correct password is input. When the original mode is set, a history including the result of the game after the setting is temporarily stored in the pachinko machine 100. In addition, it becomes possible to enjoy the game reflecting the history information included in the password. For example, it is possible to enjoy the continuation of the game represented by the history information included in the password, or to receive a benefit according to the history information. If the password is successfully recognized, the screen returns to the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 357 (a). Thus, the message differs between when the password authentication succeeds and when it fails.

  FIG. 357 (f) shows a two-dimensional bar code issuance screen displayed when “two-dimensional code issuance” is selected and determined from the user menu displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When “issue two-dimensional barcode” in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 357 (b) is selected, and the enter button or chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a two-dimensional bar. The code issue screen is displayed.

  While the two-dimensional code mQ2 generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed on the two-dimensional code issuance screen, an image of a character string recommending access to the server (“Read the two-dimensional code with a mobile phone to play a game on a mobile site Please save the record.) Is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code mQ2 is prepared on the assumption that the player has made a selection when ending the game in the state of setting the original mode. Hereinafter, the two-dimensional code mQ2 shown in FIG. 357 (f) may be referred to as a two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game.

  The two-dimensional code mentioned here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and changes the size on the display in units of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 cells to 177 × 177 cells. Can. QR Code (registered trademark) is known as a representative of two-dimensional codes. The two-dimensional code is an image consisting of a predetermined pattern that can not be identified by the player. The two-dimensional code may be replaced by a URL itself, a one-dimensional bar code, an encrypted character string or a color code. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases, and can not be remembered or recorded by human beings, so that the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.

  In this embodiment, the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is the personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, and the mission achievement status and the benefit (for example, the accumulated value of the original mode points etc.) to be given to the player. It contains information to represent. In addition, the number of winnings in the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, the total number of revolutions of the reel in the slot machine, the number of bonus (big hit) times, the number of small winnings (small hit) times, information for shop identification, It may include information specific to the game console, the movable state, the number of errors, and the like. Information representing the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the accumulated value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, and the like correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game includes the URL of the update acceptance page prepared in the server.

  When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code mQ2 for game termination using the camera function of the mobile phone terminal or smartphone, the bar code reader function is activated. The personal identification information included in the two-dimensional code mQ2 for game termination on “http: //www.~/jp” representing the address of the update acceptance page prepared in the server on the display screen of the mobile phone terminal The URL to which an argument representing ID) and history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the bar code reader function from the read two-dimensional code mQ2 for game termination, it is stored in the server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument part The history information is updated to the history information included in the argument part.

  In addition, on the server side, a customization page may be prepared to receive customization of presentation contents (for example, appearance characters).

  In the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 357 (f), the cursor mC is in the state of being set to the end button, and by pressing the enter button or the chance button 136 in this state, the decoration symbol display device 208 is displayed. A confirmation message is displayed whether the display of the two-dimensional code mQ2 for game termination may be ended. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the two-dimensional code mQ2 for game termination is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code mQ2 is erased from the pachinko machine 100. In this confirmation message, the item “Yes” and the item “No” are prepared, and when the cursor is placed on the item “Yes”, the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 357 (a). Return to the initial screen of the option menu shown. On the other hand, when the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where the cursor is placed on the item of "No", the screen returns to the two-dimensional code issuance screen shown in FIG. 357 (f).

  When the two-dimensional code issuance screen is ended (returning to the initial screen of the option menu), the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game may not be issued again, or may be issued again.

  FIG. 357 (g) is a diagram showing how deletion of personal data is selected from the user menu. While the user menu shown in FIG. 357 (b) is displayed, the cursor mC is operated by the up, down, left, and right buttons, and in the selection window 2081 on the left, “clear personal data” is selected. In addition, the message window 2082 on the right side indicates that the current game information (including personal information, history information, and the like) is to be deleted from the pachinko machine 100.

  When the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where "personal data clear" is selected, the personal symbol clear screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 357 (b) is a figure which shows the personal data clear screen displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. In the state where "Clear personal data" in the selection window m2081 shown in FIG. 357 (b) is selected, when the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays a personal data clear screen. Is displayed.

  On the personal data clear screen, a confirmation message ("Do you want to delete game information") confirmation message whether or not the current game information (including personal information and history information etc.) may be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 Is displayed. This confirmation message is also displayed when the password is entered. On the other hand, when the password has not been input, a message notifying that the password has not been input is displayed, and the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 357 (a) is displayed.

  In the confirmation message shown in FIG. 357 (b), the “Yes” button and the “No” button are prepared, and in the state where the cursor is placed on the “Yes” button (state of FIG. 357 (g)) When the chance button 136 is pressed, an erasure complete message is displayed, and then the screen returns to the initial screen of the option menu shown in FIG. 357 (a). On the other hand, when the enter button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where the cursor is placed on the "No" button, the screen returns to the initial screen of the user menu shown in FIG. 357 (a). In this embodiment, when the two-dimensional code mQ2 for ending the game is issued, the game information is automatically erased, but by preparing a personal data clear screen which can be forcibly erased, the player who has not been registered as a member. In some cases, the player who has registered as a member can be able to obtain accurate information.

  When the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed in a state where the end of the user menu is displayed, a demo screen may be displayed.

  Whether the option menu or the user menu has been described above, the symbol menu may be canceled during the display or operation of various screens, and the option menu or user menu (various screen displays or operations) may be canceled. The symbol variation display is started. For example, the symbol variation display is not performed, and after firing the last ball in the game area 124, the option menu or the user menu is displayed, and the last ball is the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start If you get a prize in the mouth 232 or if the game ball that was accidentally clogged or caught in the game nail 238 starts to flow with some beat, and you get a prize in the special view 1 start opening 230 or the special view start opening 232 Conceivable. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not performed for a certain period, the option menu and the user menu can be displayed, so the game is started while the option menu and the user menu are displayed. Also in the case where the symbol is displayed, the symbol variation display can be started.

  Next, setting of actual-machine customization will be described using FIG. 358. In each of FIGS. 358, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 358 (a) shows the initial screen of the option menu displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the password is input by inputting the password of the user menu, and the login to the user mode is completed. Further, a predetermined BGM is output (not shown) from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 358 (b), the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed from the state shown in FIG. 358 (a), the actual machine customization is selected, and the decision operation is performed by pressing the enter button or chance button 136. A decision sound is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 358 (c) shows a screen of actual machine customization. In the effect display area 208 d, character string images of “button operation sound”, “decorative pattern”, and “chance button” indicating customization items that can be customized are displayed in order from the top. In the actual machine customization of this example, it is possible to set an operation sound (button operation sound) at the time of operating the chance button 136, a display mode of a decorative symbol, and a mode of display regarding the chance button 136 (for example, button image and valid period image). It is supposed to be. Note that other effects (for example, background display, BGM during symbol variation display, effect mode, etc.) may also be configured to be customizable. In FIG. 358 (c), the button operation sound, the display mode of the decorative symbol, and the display mode regarding the chance button 136 are all set as default. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, all the customization items are set as default at the time of power on or at the time of user mode non-login.

  In FIG. 358 (e), only the button operation sound can be set, and the display mode of the decorative symbol and the operation mode of the chance button can not be set. Therefore, in the effect display area 208d, the character string image of "default" of the "button operation sound" and the setting state of the button operation sound is displayed in black, and the character string image of "decorative design" and "chance button" The “default” character string image indicating these setting modes is displayed in gray. The customizable item increases when the game level indicating the game achievement degree exceeds a predetermined value.

  In FIG. 358 (f), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 358 (e), and the button operation sound is selected as the cat's cry. The speaker 120 outputs a voice "Nya ~" which is a cat button operation sound. As described above, the button operation sound can be selected by pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137.

  In FIG. 358 (g), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 358 (f), and the button operation sound is selected as the dog's bark. The speaker 120 outputs a voice "one" which is a button operation sound of a dog.

  In FIG. 358 (h), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 358 (g), and the button operation sound is selected as the default. The speaker 120 outputs a sound "ton" which is a default button operation sound.

  In FIG. 358 (i), the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed only once from FIG. 358 (h), and the button operation sound is selected as the cat's cry. The speaker 120 outputs a cat button operation sound "Nya ~".

  In FIG. 358 (j), the button operation sound is fixed to the cat's cry. When the confirmation button or the chance button 136 is pressed while selecting the "cat" of the button operation sound, the button operation sound of the "cat" is determined. From the speaker 120 The voice of the cat's cry "Nya ~", which is the final note, is output.

  When the cancel button is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 358 (j), the initial screen of the original menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 358 (k), and when the cancel button is pressed again, the original menu is closed. Then, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 358 (l). At the time of the original mode setting, an image indicating the game level of the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string "Lv. 51" indicating a game level, and a gauge image indicating an original mode point (experience value) up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  Next, effects in the original mode non-setting (password not entered (user mode not logged in)) state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 359 (a) to FIG. 360 (i), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. Also, a speaker 120 is schematically illustrated on the right side of each figure. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 359 (a) has shown the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is performed. The state shown in FIG. 359 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 321 (f). In addition, while the special figure fluctuation game is under execution, the BGM for during fluctuation is output from the speaker 120. In FIGS. 359 to 361, the schematic diagrams in which the BGM during variation is output from the speaker 120 are omitted, and the schematic diagrams in which the button operation sound is output from the speaker 120 are illustrated.

  FIG. 359 (b) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character image is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarter areas. The button display in which the and the effective period image are displayed is executed. The valid period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. The player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 359 (b), but at this stage, since the button operation can not be received, the chance button Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 359 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 359 (b) starts. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the pressing operation is accepted when the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 359 (d) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has passed a little and the bar-like portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened rightward.

  FIG. 359 (e) exemplifies a display of a button effect performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the pressing is received. The button image and the validity period image are erased, and the image of the character string "chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be notice notification of the result of the special figure change game. In addition, it may be an advance notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by the display of the character string image. Further, a sound of "ton" which is a default button operation sound is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 359 (f) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the variation display of the decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c becomes visible.

  In FIG. 359 (g), "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in a swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a state where the reach effect has been started.

  In FIG. 359 (h), the button image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the valid period image is displayed below the button image. In FIG. 359 (h), the button operation acceptance period has started. Thus, the player can know that the button operation acceptance period has started.

  FIG. 359 (i) shows a state in which the button operation acceptance period has passed a little and the bar-like portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened rightward.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 359 (j), the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the text of "super hot!" The image is displayed. The image of this character string is displayed as a notice of the change. Further, from the speaker 120, a voice "Sharran" of the button operation sound is output. The button operation sound of "Sharan" is a default button operation sound during reach production. Thus, the default button operation sound may differ depending on the effect being performed. In this example, the default button operation sound at the time of reach effect non-execution is "ton", and the default button operation sound at the time of reach effect execution is "sharran". The default button operation sound may always be the same regardless of the effect being executed.

  FIG. 360 (a) shows the state continuing from FIG. 359 (j). In FIG. 360 (a), the image display of the reach effect is gradually changed to the entire white display due to the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area to reduce and display the decorative symbol variation. The special figure 1 pending icon display area A, the special figure 1 pending icon, the variation icon display area C, and the variation icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 360 (a) to (j).

  FIGS. 360 (b) to (i) show a state in which SP reach production with a scene where two warriors fight is being performed. In FIG. 360 (e), the button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image.

  FIG. 360 (g) shows a state where the button operation acceptance period has passed a little and the bar-like portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the button operation acceptance period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and a cut-in effect is shown in which the image of the face of one samurai's face shown in FIG. Is executed. Further, a sound of “key” which is a button operation sound during the SP reach effect is output from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 360 (i) is a continuation of the SP reach effect, and it is an indication that the effect that one warrior has won is made, and it is notified that there is a high possibility that the change judgment result will be a hit.

  Next, the effects in the original mode setting (password input (user mode login)) state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 361 (a)-(h), special figure change game is shown in time series in this order. Also, a speaker 120 is schematically illustrated on the right side of each figure. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 361 (a) has shown the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is performed. The state shown in FIG. 361 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 321 (f). In addition, while the special figure fluctuation game is under execution, the BGM for during fluctuation is output from the speaker 120. In addition, at the time of the original mode setting, an image indicating the game level of the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string "Lv. 51" indicating a game level, and a gauge image indicating an original mode point (experience value) up to the next level are displayed below the image.

  FIG. 361 (b) shows a state where the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character image is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarter areas. The button display in which the and the effective period image are displayed is executed. The valid period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 361 (b), since the button operation can not be received at this stage, the chance button can not be received. Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 361 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 361 (b) starts. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the pressing operation is accepted when the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 361 (d) exemplifies a display of a button effect which is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the pressing is received. The button image and the validity period image are erased, and the image of the character string "chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be notice notification of the result of the special figure change game. In addition, it may be an advance notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by the display of the character string image. Further, in this example, the button operation sound is set to the cat's cry in the customization of the actual device. For this reason, a voice "Nya ~" which is a button operation sound of a cat's cry is output from the speaker 120.

  Thereafter, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 359 (f) and (g) is executed, and in FIG. 361 (e), the button image is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image. It is displayed. In FIG. 361 (h), the button operation reception period is started. Thus, the player can know that the button operation acceptance period has started.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 361 (f), the button image and the effective period image are erased, and the text of "super heat!" The image is displayed. The image of this character string is displayed as a notice of the change. Further, from the speaker 120, a voice "Nya ~" of the cat's crying voice, which is the button operation sound being set, is output.

  361 (g), (h) show a state in which SP reach production with a scene where two warriors fight is being performed. In FIG. 361 (g), the button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed during the button operation acceptance period, the button image and the effective period image are deleted, and a cut-in effect is shown in which the image of the face of one samurai's face shown in FIG. Is executed. Further, a sound of “key” which is a button operation sound during the SP reach effect is output from the speaker 120. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the button operation sound is set to something other than the default by the customization of the actual device, the button operation sound during the SP reach effect execution is a voice of "key".

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the button operation sound ("Nya ~" in this example) set in the customization of the actual machine is output at the time of non-execution of SP reach effect during variation display of the decorative symbol. Is a default button operation sound for SP reach (in this example, "key") is output. On the contrary, the operation sound in the SP reach effect may be selectable by the actual machine customization, and the default button operation sound may be output when the SP reach non-execution is performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, during the big hit game, the button operation sound set in the actual machine customization may be output, and the default operation sound may be output. In addition, when the button operation sound set in the actual machine customization is output depending on the gaming state (during a definite change, a short time, a normal state, a power support, a non power support, a big hit game, a demonstration effect, etc.) It may not be done.

  The operation sound of the chance button 136 in the option menu may not be customized or may be customized.

  In the case where both the chance button 136 and the other operation means (touch panel, confirmation button, etc.) are enabled, the customized chance button 136 is operated when the operation of the other operation means is performed instead of the chance button 136. The same operation sound as the operation sound of may be output, or the same operation sound as the operation sound of the default chance button 136 may be output, and the operation sound for other operation means is output. You may Thus, the operation sound of the chance button 136 and the operation sound of the other operation means may be the same regardless of the presence or absence of customization. Also, they may be different.

  FIG. 362 shows a timing chart regarding detection of a chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) and button operation sound output. The upper part of FIG. 362 (a), (b) shows the state of the detection signal of the chance button sensor (chance button detection sensor 426) in time series. The level OFF of the detection signal of the chance button sensor indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has not been detected, and level ON indicates that pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected. The middle row shows the presence or absence of output of the default button operation sound (ton) in time series. The level "output" is a state in which the button operation sound of "ton" is output, and the level "non-output" is a state in which the button operation sound of "ton" is output. The lower part shows the output presence / absence of the button operation sound (nya ~) of the cat's cry in time series. The level "output" is a state in which the button operation sound of "Nya ~" is output, and the level "non-output" is a state in which the button operation sound of "Nya ~" is output.

  As shown in FIG. 362 (a), the button operation sound is output after a predetermined delay time since the chance button sensor detection has become ON level. When the default button operation sound is selected in the case where the button operation sound is not set or in the customization of the actual device, the button operation sound of “ton” is output. In addition, when the button operation sound of cat's singing voice is set in the actual machine customization, the button operation sound of "Nya ~" is output. Moreover, the button operation sound of "Ton" is shorter than the button operation sound of "Nya ~".

  FIG. 362 (b) shows a timing chart when the chance button 136 is hit continuously. In this example, the chance button 136 is hit six times in a row. When the default button operation sound is selected in the button operation sound unset or in the customization of the actual device, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the part "n" of the button operation sound is output, the "n" Is canceled, and the first "to" of the button operation sound is output based on the pressing. In FIG. 362 (b), a part of "n" of the button operation sound is canceled five times. The canceled "n" part is indicated by a double-headed arrow. When the chance button 136 is continuously hit as shown in FIG. 362 (b), a button operation sound "Tototototototon" is output from the speaker 120.

  In addition, when the button operation sound of cat's crying is set in the customization of the real machine, if the chance button 136 is pressed before a part of the button operation sound is output, it is The sound is canceled, and the first "ni" of the button operation sound is output based on the press. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the next “ya ~” of the “ni” is output, the “ya ~” is canceled and the first “ni” of the button operation sound is output. Thus, the button operation sound "Nya ~" based on the second pressing of the chance button 136, which is output by canceling the button operation sound "A ~" based on the first pressing of the chance button 136, is the third one. Based on the pressing of the chance button 136, the part of "ゃ" is cancelled. As described above, in this example, the button operation sound to be canceled and output is further cancelled. In FIG. 362 (b), a part of "ya ~" of the button operation sound is canceled five times. The canceled "Ya ~" part is indicated by a double-headed arrow. As shown in FIG. 362 (b), when the chance button 136 is continuously hit, the speaker 120 outputs a button operation sound of "ni ni ni ni ~".

  Next, effects in the original mode non-setting (password not entered (user mode not logged in)) state of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 363 (a) to (f), the special figure variation game is shown in chronological order in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 363 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 363 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 321 (f).

  FIG. 363 (b) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character image is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarter areas. The button display in which the and the effective period image are displayed is executed. The valid period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 363 (b), since the button operation can not be received at this stage, the chance button can not be received. Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 363 (c) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 363 (b) is started. The button operation acceptance period has slightly passed, and the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image is slightly shortened in the right direction.

  FIG. 363 (d) exemplifies the display of a button effect which is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the pressing is received. The button image and the validity period image are erased, and the image of the character string "chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be notice notification of the result of the special figure change game. In addition, it may be an advance notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by the display of the character string image.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 359 (f) to 360 (c) are executed, and then the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (e) and (f) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 363 (e) and (f) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 360 (e) and (f).

  In this example, the display mode related to the chance button 136 is not set in the actual machine customization, and is the default mode. The button image and the valid period image shown in FIGS. 363 (b), (c) and (f) are in the default display mode.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect when the display mode regarding the chance button 136 is set to “panda” in the customization of the actual mode at the time of setting the original mode will be described using FIG. FIG. 364 (a) shows a display screen of actual machine customization. "Panda" is selected as a display mode regarding the chance button.

  In FIG. 364 (b) to (g), the special figure fluctuation game is shown in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 364 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. The state shown in FIG. 364 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 321 (f). In addition, at the time of the original mode setting, an image indicating the game level of the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, an image of a character string “Lv. 51” indicating the game level and a gauge image indicating points to the next level are displayed below the image.

  FIG. 364 (b) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character image is displayed in the left quarter area within the button effect area, and the chance button is displayed in the remaining third area. An image about 136 is displayed. When set to “panda”, a character image of a panda having a chan button 136 is displayed as an image related to the chance button 136. A number "6" is displayed on the belly of the panda, and the remaining time of the button operation reception period is displayed. Thus, in the actual machine customization, it is possible to customize the effect display.

  The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. By looking at the image shown in FIG. 364 (c), the player knows that the button effect has been started. At this stage, the countdown of the operation effective period is started, and since it is a button operation acceptance period, when the chance button 136 is depressed, the depression operation is accepted.

  In FIG. 364 (d), the remaining time of the button operation acceptance period is 5 seconds, and the numeral "5" is displayed on the panda's stomach.

  FIG. 364 (e) exemplifies a display of a button effect which is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the pressing is received. The character image of the panda is erased, and the image of the character string "chance is !!" is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be notice notification of the result of the special figure change game. In addition, it may be an advance notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by the display of the character string image. If pressing of the chance button 136 is detected during the operation effective period, the character image of the panda is displayed after setting the number displayed on the panda's belly to "0", and then "chance is !!" The image of the character string may be displayed, or only the number displayed on the belly of the panda may be deleted and then the image of the character string of “CHANNEL !!” may be displayed. It's a chance after deleting all the characters and all the numbers! ! The image of the character string "" may be displayed.

  Note that the countdown of the operation effective period may end at 0, and after the number is “1”, nothing may be displayed on the belly of the panda.

  Thereafter, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 359 (f) to FIG. 360 (c) is executed, and in FIG. 364 (f), the image display area is divided up and down by the horizontal border around the center to display the upper stage In the area, the character image of one samurai is displayed, and in the lower display area, the character image of the other samurai is displayed.

  In FIG. 364 (g), the button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the effective period image is displayed below the button image. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the display mode related to the chance button 136 is set other than the default (in the present example, “panda”), the chance during the SP reach effect is As a display regarding the button 136, as shown in FIG. 44 (g), a button image and a validity period image of the default display mode are displayed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 355 to 364 (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment,
Rendering means (e.g., decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);
Operation means (e.g., chance button 136);
A game console equipped with
The rendering means is a means capable of at least performing a first type of rendering,

  The first type of effect is an effect on the operation means (for example, an effect on display of a chance button 136 or an effect on button operation sound),

The first type of effect is an effect including a plurality of selection effects (eg, customizable button operation sounds, customizable chance button images),
The plurality of selection effects are effects that are at least selectable by the player,

  The effect means is one of the effects (hereinafter, "first effect (for example, button operation sound is" "among the plurality of selected effects (for example, real machine customization (see FIG. 358)) selected at least by the player. Means that can at least execute the sound effect to be "~" and the display related to the chance button 136 of the display mode of the "panda" (see FIG. 364 (c))),

  The effect means is one of the effects of the first type (hereinafter referred to as a “second effect (for example, a sound effect in which the button operation sound is“ key ”) (see FIG. 362), a default button image And the effective period image (see FIG. 364 (g)))),

  In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of at least performing the first effect,

  In the second case, the effect means is means capable of at least performing the second effect,

  The first case is a case where it is a first period (for example, a period in which effects other than SP reach are given),

The second case is a case where it is a second period (for example, a period in which SP reach effect is being performed),
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when the operation means is operated, the first effect selected by the player is performed in the first period, and the second effect is performed in the second period. , A game console characterized by display can be realized. In addition, the variation of the effect may be increased to improve the interest of the game.

The first type of effect may include an operation sound and a display regarding an operation. In addition, "at least the first effect can be performed" may indicate that only the first effect can be performed, or one or more effects including the first effect can be performed May be indicated. In addition, “at least the second effect can be performed” may indicate that only the second effect can be performed, or one or more effects including the second effect can be performed. May be indicated. Note that “a plurality of selected effects” may indicate “a plurality of effects that can be selected by the player”, and “a plurality of selected effects (for example, customizable button operation sounds (by the player) It may indicate that one effect (for example, a cat) is selectable from default, cat, dog)) (2) The above-described pachinko machine 100,

The effect means is means for not performing at least the first effect in the second case.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first effect is not performed in the second period, the effect may be sharpened, and the player may not be bored.

Here, “do not execute at least the first effect” may indicate that only the first effect is not performed, or one or more effects including the first effect are not performed (for example, It may indicate that sound is not output or not displayed. (3) The above-described pachinko machine 100,

  In the third case, the effect means is means for not performing at least the first effect,

  In the fourth case, the effect means is means for not performing at least the second effect,

  The third case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the first period,

The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the second period,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the effect may not be executed when the operation means is not operated, and therefore, the operation of the operation means may be prompted (4) the pachinko machine 100,
The first period is a period including at least a third period,
The second period is a period including at least a fourth period,

  The third period is a period in which an operation of the operation means can be received at least (for example, a button operation reception period).

The fourth period is a period in which an operation of the operation means can be received at least (for example, a button operation reception period).
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the first period and the second period include the reception period, the variation of the effect may be increased to improve the interest of the game (5 ) The above pachinko machine 100,
A second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) is provided,
The presentation means is a first presentation means (for example, the speaker 120),
The second rendering means is a means capable of at least performing a second type of rendering,

The second type of effect is an effect on the operation means (for example, a display effect on the chance button 136 (a display effect on a button image or an effective period image)).
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted by providing the second effect means and performing effects relating to the operation means with a plurality of effect means. In addition, the variation of the effect may be increased to improve the interest of the game. The second rendering means may be a means capable of executing only the second type of rendering. Further, the second effect means may be means capable of executing one or more types of effects including the second type of effect.

  Also, the rendering means (first rendering means) is a sound output means (for example, the speaker 120). The first type of effect is sound that is output when the operation means is operated.

  The second effect means is display means. The second type of effect is a display related to the operation means (for example, a display imitating the operation means, a display according to the operation of the operation means, a display The figure of the panda's stomach (see FIG. 364 (c)) and the like.

In addition, regarding customization in the original mode, when the password is input, the information contained in the password (game information, game level The player can select an effect corresponding to the game level goes up), information on what has been done on the Internet, etc. (Example 13)

  A specific example of button display by the button operation animation performed in the special view variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 365 (a) to 365 (g) show another effect image when, for example, a button image is displayed on the upper side of the image display area and a valid period image is displayed on the lower side as the button display of the button operation animation. It shows a state in which at least a part of the display of the button image or the validity period image is hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (a), the display of the button image or the display of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. Further, as shown in FIG. 365 (b), before the start of the reception valid period of the button operation, the display of the button image or the valid period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. Further, as shown in FIG. 365 (c), the display of the button image or the validity period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image at the start timing of the reception validity period of the button operation. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 365 (d), the display of a button image or an effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image during the effective period for accepting a button operation. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 365 (e), the display of the button image or the valid period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image during the button depression animation (during the second image display). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 365 (f), the display of the button image or the valid period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image during the button press animation (during the display of the third image). Further, as shown in FIG. 365 (g), the display of the button image or the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image after the end timing of the reception effective period of the button operation or after the end.

  In (h) to (i) of FIG. 365, when an animation notifying the panel image and the operation method and an effective period image are displayed as the touch operation request display on the touch panel, the panel image is displayed as another effect image. An animation for informing the operation method and a state in which a part of the valid period image is hidden are shown. As described above, not only the button image and the like but also the display for prompting the operation of the operation means operable by the player (for example, the display of the operation request of the touch panel) may be hidden by another effect image. In addition, an animation (informing animation of a touch operation method) in which the finger moves in another effect image may be hidden.

FIGS. 365 (k) to (m) show a state in which a part of the button image as the rotation means is hidden by another effect image. In addition, the valid period image displayed below the button image is also hidden. Thus, the display indicating that the button is operating (rotation, vibration, etc.) may be hidden by another effect display. In addition, the rotation speed of the button image is as shown in FIG. 365 (k), (l), (m)
The order of

  As shown in FIGS. 365 (n) to (p), the display of the button image or the display of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. In the case where the valid period image is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame shape and the rod-like portion is gradually shortened, for example, to the right as the period elapses, the start position of the left end of the rod-like portion of the valid period image is It may be hidden at least in the display (see Fig. 365 (n)), and the middle part (the middle part of the effective period, the part near the start position, the part near the end position) The end position of the right end of the rod-like portion of the effective period image may be hidden by the display of another effect image (FIG. 365 (p)). reference). Also, both the valid period image and the button image may be hidden by another effect image display, and only one of the valid period image and the button image may be hidden by another effect image display. May be Also, the animation display of the effective period image or the button image may be hidden by the display of another effect image. Also, in the case of the valid period image, an animation that changes with time (such as an animation that reduces the valid period image) or an animation that changes according to button operation (when the button is operated, the length of the bar portion of the valid period image becomes longer Some or all of the animation etc.) may be hidden by the display of another effect image. In the case of a button image, an animation prompting the button operation (such as an animation that changes from the non-lighting state of the LED to a lit state), an animation while the button is operated (such as an animation that the button is recessed) A part or all of the animation of may be hidden by the display of another effect image.

  If no operation is detected from the operation means (chance button 136, touch panel m 700a, confirmation button, etc.), effect display according to the operation (cut-in effect, image 730 corresponding to advance effect, flame image, etc.) May not be displayed, and may be displayed after the end of the effective period even if an operation is not detected.

  Even when the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the button operation animation is not performed, and the image of the button before the operation (for example, the first image) and the image of the button after the operation according to the operation of the button (For example, the third image) may be switched.

  Although the chance button 136 is described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the chance button but can be applied to other operation means (trigger type operation means, jog stick type operation means, touch panel type operation means, etc.) It is.

  In addition, at least a part or all of effect display (cut-in effect, image 730 corresponding to advance effect, image of flame, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means (for example, chance button 136) is another effect display (for example, Notice display (pre-reading notice, notice of the change concerned), error notice (informing notice such as ball omission notice or magnet detection error), icon (hold icon, fluctuation icon), hitting manner notice (right-hand notice, left-hand notice), etc. ) May be overlapped.

  The operation effective period of the operation means is not limited to the meter, and may be notified by a number or an image other than a number.

  In addition, the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a display of the second type (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the variation or pre-reading advance notice display, the hold icon, the variation icon, the fourth symbol, the decoration symbol) It may be a means capable of displaying at least a strike information, an error display, a display of a mission system, a display related to customization in a user mode, a display of a game method, an option menu, and the like. Here, the second type of display may be a type of display different from the first type of presentation.

In addition, the game stand (for example, pachinko machine 100) is a third type of effect (for example, a display that does not use the operation means in the change or the advance notice display, the hold icon, the change icon, the fourth symbol, the decoration symbol, the strike) Notification, error display, display of mission system, display of customization in user mode, display of game method, effect of display system such as option menu, effect operation by effect moving means, effect by decoration means (for example, lamp), etc. ) May be possible. Here, the third type of effect may be an effect different from both of the first type of effect and the second type of effect.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  The above embodiment relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine) or an enclosed type game machine. In conventional gaming machines, various displays are performed by display means. However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in display. An object of the above-described embodiment is to provide a game console characterized by a display. According to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by display.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machines, there have been gaming machines equipped with operation means. However, however, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in the operating means. An object of the above-mentioned embodiment is to provide a game console characterized by an operation means. According to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the operation means.

  In addition, the embodiments described above and the embodiments described thereafter are also applicable to an enclosed type game machine which cyclically uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. The pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a sphere is enclosed and the enclosed sphere is circulated in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, and The payout may be made by credit.

It is possible to combine the matters described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.
The gaming machine of the above embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.

(Appendix A1)
Operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
The first display of the first type of display is a display including at least a first image,
The first display is a display including at least a second image,
The first display is a display including at least a third image,
The first indication is an indication including at least a first change in a first case,
The first change is to change from the first image to the third image via the second image,
The first case is a case where the operation means is operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A1,
At least a part of the operation means is a means capable of at least performing the first aspect,
At least a part of the operation means is a means capable of at least performing the second aspect,
At least a part of the operating means is a means capable of at least performing the second change in the first case,
The second change is at least change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A1 or A2, wherein
In the second case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display,
The second case is the case of being in the period of the first period,
The first period is at least a period in which the operation of the operation means can be received.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A4)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein
In the third case, the display means can display at least a display including the first image;
The third case is a case where the first display is displayed on the display means,
The third case is a case where the operation means is not operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display;
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display in the first case;
The second display is a display displayed after the third image is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A5, wherein
The display means is means capable of at least displaying a second type of display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B1)
Means of presentation,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The rendering means is a means capable of at least performing a first type of rendering,
The first type of effect is an effect on the operation means,
The first type of effect is an effect including a plurality of selection effects,
The plurality of selection effects are effects that are at least selectable by the player,
The effect means is means capable of at least executing one effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”) of the plurality of selected effects at least selected by the player,
The effect means is a means capable of executing one effect (hereinafter referred to as “second effect”) of the first type of effect,
In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of at least performing the first effect,
In the second case, the effect means is means capable of at least performing the second effect,
The first case is the case of the first period,
The second case is a case of a second period,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note B1,
The effect means is means for not performing at least the first effect in the second case.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B3)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note B1 or B2,
In the third case, the effect means is means for not performing at least the first effect,
In the fourth case, the effect means is means for not performing at least the second effect,
The third case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the first period,
The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the operation means in the second period,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein
The first period is a period including at least a third period,
The second period is a period including at least a fourth period,
The third period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means can be received,
The fourth period is a period in which at least an operation of the operation means can be received.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B4, wherein
Equipped with a second presentation means,
The presentation means is a first presentation means,
The second rendering means is a means capable of at least performing a second type of rendering,
The second type of effect is an effect on the operation means,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C1)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The operating means is a means capable of at least performing a first operation,
The operation means is a means capable of at least performing a second operation,
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;
The first type of display is a display on the operation means,
The first display of the first type of display is a display relating to the first operation,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display;
In the first case, the display means can display at least a part of the second display.
In the second case, the display means can display at least a part of the second display.
The first case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The first case is the case where the first operation is performed,
The second case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The second case is a case where the second operation is performed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C2)
The game console described in Appendix C1,
In the third case, the display means can display at least the first display;
The third case is a period in which at least an operation of the operation means can be received.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C3)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note C1 or C2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display of the first type of display;
The third display is a display related to the second operation,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C3, wherein
In the fourth case, the display means is means for not displaying the second display,
The fourth case is a case where the first display is displayed,
The fourth case is a case where the operation means is not operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C4, wherein
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C5, wherein
The display means is means capable of at least displaying a second type of display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D1)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
In the first case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display of the first type of display;
The first case is the case of the first period,
The first period is a period including a second period,
The second period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means is not received,
The first period is a period including at least a period in which the operation of the operation means can be received.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1,
The first display is a display regarding a reception period of the operation means,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note D1 or D2, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display of the first type of display in the first case.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein
The first period is a period including at least a third period,
The first period is a period including at least a fourth period,
The third period is a period before the second period is started,
The fourth period is a period after the end of the second period,
The third period is a period in which at least operation of the operation means can be received,
The fourth period is a period in which at least an operation of the operation means can be received.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, wherein
The first period is a period including at least a fifth period,
The fifth period is a period in which at least the operation of the operation means is not received.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D5, wherein
The display means is means capable of at least displaying a second type of display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E1)
Multiple operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;
The display of the first type is a display relating to the first operation means of the plurality of operation means,
In the first case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display of the first type of display;
The first case is the case of the first period,
The first period is a period in which at least the operation of the first operation means can be received,
The first period is a period in which at least an operation of a second operation means of the plurality of operation means can be received,
In the second case, the display means can display at least a second display of the first type of display;
In the third case, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display of the first type of display;
The third display is a display including at least a part of the second display,
The second case is a case in which there is at least an operation of the first operating means in the first case,
The third case is a case where at least the operation of the second operation means is performed in the first case.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1,
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a second type of display;
The display of the second type is a display relating to the second operation means,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note E1 or E2, and
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a fourth display of the first type of displays in the first case;
The fourth display is a display regarding a period in which the operation of the first operation means can be received at least.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein
In the fourth case, the display means is means for not displaying at least the second display,
In the fifth case, the display means is a means at least not displaying the third display,
The fourth case is a case where there is no operation of the first operation means,
The fifth case is a case where the second operation means is not operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, wherein
The first display is a display including at least a display imitating the first operation means,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F1)
Operation means,
Rotating means,
A game console equipped with
The operation means is means capable of at least performing the first operation,
The rotating means is means capable of at least performing the second operation,
The first operation is an operation in which at least a part of the operation means is rotated in a first mode,
The second operation is an operation in which at least a part of the rotation means rotates in a second mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F1,
In the first case, the first part in the operation means is a part that goes around in the first time,
The second part of the rotation means is a part that makes a round in a second time in the second case,
The first case is a case where the operation means is rotated in the first mode,
The second case is a case where the rotating means is rotated in the second mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F3)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F1 or F2,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a first type of display;
The display of the first type is a display relating to the operation means,
In the third case, the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display of the first type of display;
The third case is a case where at least the first operation is performed by the operation means,
The rotating means is the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F4)
It is a game console described in Appendix F3,
The first display is a display that is displayed at least during an operation reception period,
The operation accepting period is a period in which at least an operation of the operation means can be accepted.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F5)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note F3 or F4,
The operation means is a button,
The first display is a display including at least a button image,
The button image is an image imitating at least a part of the button,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 3 to 5,
The display means is means capable of at least displaying a second type of display.
Game console characterized by the above [seventh embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail using the drawings. In addition, the codes shown in FIGS. 366 to 410 are basically used only for the description of the seventh embodiment, and even if overlapping codes are shown in other drawings, this embodiment can be applied. In the description of Fig. 36, the reference numerals shown in Figs. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 367 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 366 viewed from the rear side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 368 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. The outer rail 202 extends from the top to the right of the rendering device 206 so that the game ball can fly to the right playing area 124 of the gaming board 200 through the space between the top of the rendering device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 holds the first lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206 as a decoration member as a path through which the released game balls flow down, and the decoration member as a path through which the shot game balls flow down And a second down flow path on the right side. In the following, hitting the gaming ball on the first lower route may be referred to as "left hitting", and hitting the game ball on the second flowing route may be referred to as "right hitting".

  In the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary symbol A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 are provided. Also, the rendering device 206 operates the panel lamp 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure change games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure change games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening around the rendering device 206. There are 234.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entering the general winning openings 226 (the general winning opening 226 is winning). When it is determined that the dispensing device 152 is driven, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "prize balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rental balls" There is) and.

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as the award balls to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 start opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the common view start opening 228. In addition, it can also be said that the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is arrange | positioned in the electric chow. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 has the feather component 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and the ball can not enter during closing of the feather component 232a, and it is elected for common drawing fluctuation game, common drawing display device 210 When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Since the general drawing start port 228 and the special drawing 2 start port 232 below it are within the second flow-down path on the right side across the rendering device 206, they proceed to the first-class lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206 The game ball does not pass through the general drawing start opening 228 or enter the special drawing 2 start opening 232. In addition, since the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is in the first class lower route on the left side across the rendering device 206, the gaming ball advanced to the second down flow path on the right side across the rendering device 206 is the special figure 1 There is no possibility of entering the starting opening 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed between the special view 1 start opening 230 and the special view 2 start opening 232 below the game board 200. . The variable winning opening 234 has a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. A ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed. The door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  A plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in a substantially straight line at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball in a region from the special figure 1 start opening 230 to the left end of the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, during a big hit, the player strikes the right (how to hit the game ball to the right play area 124 of the game board 200 through the space between the upper part of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202), The game ball does not win in the variable winning opening 234 unless the ball is allowed to fly.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening You get a prize in (Special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or reach out opening 240 without passing through any winning opening or start opening, or only by passing through the general drawing start opening 228 Do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp device 242 and stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the rendering device 206, and four floral patterns are vertically arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball of the board lamp 224. The panel lamps 224b are arranged in line with each other, and the panel lamps 224a consisting of a plurality of (in this example, ten) circular lamps arranged along the outer rails 202 on which game balls can be rolled on the right side of the panel are arranged.

  The board surface lamp 224a is configured to perform lighting and blinking in a predetermined right-handed notification lighting pattern when performing notification to prompt right-handed driving. Using the lighting pattern for right-handed notification, for example, the light emission luminance of 10 circular lamps is sequentially changed downward from above to perform right-handed notification, or two or three adjacent circular lights are grouped together By making the light emission luminance of the lamp group different from the luminance of the remaining circular lamp groups and performing gradation control such that the group of circular lamp groups sequentially move from the upper side to the lower side, the light follows the right-handed direction It is possible to give a right-handed notice to make the driver visually recognize to flow down.

  Further, the board lamp 224a can be lighted or blinked in a predetermined reading notice notification lighting pattern when giving notice of the reading notice. For example, if the odd numbered and the even numbered of the 10 circular lamps are lit alternately in the normal effect, in the pre-reading advance notice, all 10 circular lamps are lit and so on. A lighting pattern different from the normal effect or the right-handed notification can be used.

  The board surface lamp 224b is configured to perform lighting and blinking in a predetermined right-handed notification lighting pattern when performing notification to prompt right-handed driving. If the lighting pattern for right-handed notification is used, for example, the light emission luminances of the four petal-like lamps are sequentially changed downward from above to give a right-handed notification, and the petals flow down along the right-handed direction It is possible to give a right-hand notice to make

  Further, the board lamp 224b can be lighted or blinked in a predetermined reading notice notification lighting pattern when giving notice of the reading notice. For example, if the lighting mode is such that the odd number and the even number of the four petal lamps are alternately lit in the normal effect, in the pre-reading advance notice, the petal lamps for the number of reservations are sequentially lit from the bottom While notifying, it is possible to use a soot lighting pattern to be lit with a specific light emission color for the petal-like lamp corresponding to the hold related to the pre-reading notification.

  In addition, the board surface lamp 224 is configured to be able to execute a predetermined normal lighting effect when right-handed notification, pre-reading advance notice, etc. are not performed.

  Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board lamp 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center part of the stage 244 is to the special figure 1 start opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  At the lower right of the game board 200, a status notification lamp 222 is provided. The status notification lamp 222 is composed of four lamps (for example, LEDs) aligned in a straight line in the horizontal direction. The respective lamps of the status notification lamp 222 function as a right-handed lamp, a big hit middle lamp, a non-electric support lamp, and a power support lamp in this order from the left. The right-turn lamp lights up when the player should hit the right and turns off otherwise. During the big hit the lamp is lit during the big hit game and is otherwise turned off. The non-electric support lamp lights up during the non-electric support state and turns off otherwise. The power supply lamp lights up during the power supply state and turns off otherwise.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit 318 (this circuit is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the open sensor and the bottom plate full sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Symbol display devices, such as a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, status notification lamp 222, etc. To control various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. Drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Output 100 game information (for example, gaming state).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. The pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600, and may be different from the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. It may be configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands bi-directionally.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 further includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the panel lamp 224). A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, A sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404, etc. Read out the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates a display image by use to display an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. Is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, a ROM 506 storing data for displaying an image, and the like, and control for the game board lamp 532. Between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game stand frame lamp 542, between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 And a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 370 (a) to 370 (c). The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 370 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time in this embodiment) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in this embodiment) elapses, the special view 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, and after this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" is started, the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 370 (a), ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 370 (a), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game started after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the power support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). The power support state will be described in detail later, but the state transitioning to the power support state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the power-sap state is referred to as a map-low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols whose degree of advantage to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R. “Special figure E” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit design which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special drawing E" and the "special drawing F" are both 2R and are in a state not to shift to the power support state. The "special drawing E" and the "special drawing F" are both 2R and are in a state not to shift to the power support state. Note that when the special view E or the special view F is stopped and displayed in the special view variation game in the special view high probability regular drawing high probability state, the power support state is maintained. Further, when the special view E or the special view F is stopped and displayed in the special view variation game in the special view low probability regular drawing high probability state, the power support 100 times is granted again.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, each being a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here corresponds to the same thing as a 2R electric support none big hit. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, which is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss in the pass / fail judgment, and thereafter, based on the result of the pass / fail judgment It is configured to determine which one of “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing J” is to be stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 display device 212 or 214 after the symbol variation display. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped after the symbol variation display, thereby determining the number of rounds of big hit games and the profit status after the big hit games The presence or absence of the power supply condition is automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery separately from the determination of the stop symbol, for example. Further, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the big hit game, for example, when the stop symbol is determined, but determines the profit status after the big hit game by lottery, the stop symbol, the number of rounds and the number of rounds The profit state may be appropriately associated and configured.

  FIG. 370 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And when notifying 15R special big hit of "special figure A" or 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1- Stop display of decoration 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "etc. In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7 -Display the decoration 7 "etc.) stop.

  In addition, the 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure E" hidden probability change, the 2R big hit, which is usually called "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", is "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when reporting 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R big hit called sudden shortness of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 370 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 370 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the above-described gate sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 370 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 371, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 371 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If the voltage is less than 9 V (in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a game clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is on (indicating that an operation has been made), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 369. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined to be a big hit by the success or failure judgment whether it is a big hit or not, a random value for special figure determination for hit is used for lottery to determine the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game. A random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining a winning special figure (hereinafter, referred to as "a random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to a random number counter for determining a special figure for winning". Update). Further, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a common drawing win random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number used for judging success or failure of common drawing fluctuation game (hereinafter, "corresponding to common drawing win random number counter Update the initial value generation random number counter. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a random value for determining special hit for special occasions is 0 to 99, the value is stored from the random value counter storage area for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for special occasions determination The acquired value is added with 1 and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the common drawing winning random number counter is similarly updated. It should be noted that the random number counter for the winning special purpose drawing determination random number counter and the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the common drawing winning random number counter are also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). Periodically (in this embodiment, once in about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 369, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal) If there is a match with the information indicating that there is an entry into the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, or the passing of the common drawing starting opening 228 It is determined that there is. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205 and in step S209 following it, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process of step S207, the random number counter for initial value generation and the random number counter corresponding to the general drawing win random number counter, respectively, are updated in step S115. In the basic random number update process of step S209, the random number counter for special-purpose drawing determination and the common-drawing winning random number counter used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a random value for determining a special figure for hit is 0 to 99, a random number counter for determining a special figure for hit provided in the RAM 308 to generate a random value for determining special figure for hit. Is acquired, and 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter for on-the-day special drawing determination. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining the special feature for hit. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter for special-purpose special chart determination goes around, the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special-purpose special chart determination random number counter Acquire the value of and set it to the random number counter for special figure determination for hit. For example, a value is acquired from the random number counter for use for special drawing determination that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special case determination special number determination random number counter. The initial value set at this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for winning use special figure determination next turns one round while setting it in the figure determination random number counter. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for winning special-purpose chart determination has made one turn next, an initial value for determining that the common-diagram random number counter has made one turn A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The random number counter for special drawing determination for hit may be separately provided with a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 2 or the same. The following counters may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure fluctuation time determination random number counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game is updated. In addition, the common drawing fluctuation time determination random number counter for generating the common drawing fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation game is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start opening 228 and variable winning combination opening 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When a special figure 1 start opening 230 has a prize, and the corresponding special figure 1 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserve number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The random determination value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230 of the (hard random number circuit) 318 is provided in the RAM 308 A random number for hitting special-image determination is obtained from the random number counter for winning-time special-figure determination and stored in the order of acquisition in the special-figure 1 random-number storage area. A combination of a random number for hit determination and a random value for hitting special drawing determination in the special figure 1 random number storage area (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1 set of random values” or “special figure 1 start information” Is stored as many as the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases, the data of the set of special figure 1 random number values with the highest priority (first and most stored) is At the same time, the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value set is processed so as to increase by one each time it is erased. In addition, every time the number of the Special Figure 1 suspension increases, the data of the new Special Figure 1 random number value pair is in the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value pair with the lowest retention order (last). Will be written.

  When there is a prize in special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full (in this example, it will be full with reserve number 4), random number value generation circuit The random number value for hit determination generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232 of 318 is acquired, and the special feature for hit time provided in the RAM 308 A random number for hitting special-purpose chart determination is acquired from the figure-determining random number counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special-figure 2 random number storage area. A combination of a random number for hit determination and a random value for hitting special drawing determination in the special figure 2 random number storage area (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 set of random values” or “special figure 2 start information” Is stored as many as the special figure 2 pending number stored in the special figure 2 pending number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random number value pair of the highest retention order is erased and the remaining special figure 2 random number values It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set is advanced by one. Also, every time the number of special drawing 2 reservations increases, data of a new special drawing 2 random number value pair is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 2 random number value pair of the lowest holding order.

  When the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding number of storage areas provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generation random number counter is obtained as a common drawing selection random number value Store in the common map random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common-diagram A shown in FIG. 370 (c) and the dislocated symbol (a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 370 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off as described later. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area The hit determination is performed, and if it is determined that the player wins, the flag for the map drawing provided in the RAM 308 is set to on. In the case of failure to win, the flag per common drawing is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, a special drawing prefetch process is performed. In the special view prefetching process, when there is a prize in the special view 1 start port 230 or the special view 2 start port 232, the start information relating to the suspension increased by the prize is prefetched, and the success or failure result of the special view fluctuation game according to the suspension It decides beforehand beforehand the stop design and the fluctuation time and the like which are based on the special design related lottery processing before the decision of success or failure. The flow of the special view prefetching process will be described in detail later using FIGS. 391 and 392.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special view 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing of the special figure 2 change start, the special figure 2 value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 reserve number stored in the special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 Restore in the pending count storage area. At the same time, turning on / off of the special view 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 in FIG. 368 are LED numbers 1-4 sequentially from left to right in the figure, for example, red LEDs for the special figure 2 number of reservations are arranged in red from the smaller LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is lit and Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation If the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 370 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. Probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag is also off special figure F, the first small hit flag is on special figure G, the second small hit flag is on special figure H, the first off flag is on In the case of the special figure I, when the second out flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure J modes. In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), a 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure D) ), Hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure I ), And the second out-of-place symbol (special figure J), one of the symbols is displayed. Thereafter, in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of times of power assistance stored in the number of times of power assistance (details will be described later) stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of power assistance and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0 If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid for driving the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of times of power support (for example, 100 times) is set in the number of times of power support stored in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. Turn on the short time flag provided in. If the common drawing probability change flag is set to OFF, the number of power support times is not set in the power support frequency storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Here, the power support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. At this time, when the short flag is set to on, the drawing is in a high probability state (general drawing probability change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. A game state by these common drawing definite change, common drawing change short, electric Chu open spread is put together, and it is called electric support (starting hole prize support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this. Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is larger than 0, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. The notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 It is carried out prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the starting port 230 in FIG.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S 229), the special figure 2 random number value set is acquired from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, and acquired Refer to the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 375 (a) or FIG. 375 (b) for the hit determination random number value in the special figure 2 random number value set, and make a big hit or a small hit. Make a decision on whether or not to lose. Next, when the determination result of the success or failure is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 compares the acquired special figure 2 random number value storage area with the random number value for determining the special occasion special figure shown in FIG. 376 (b). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 2 is determined with reference to the table for determination in FIG. Although the details will be described later, when the result of determination is disapproval, a random value for determination of dislocated symbol is separately obtained, and the reference is made with reference to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. Determine the pattern.

  After extracting the set of the special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the storage of the set of the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and Subtract 1 from the number of reservations. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random number values is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second start information storage means) provided in the RAM 308 with the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area. The above-described determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

  The special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is also similar to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) except that the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. I omit it.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Further, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the special figure related In the case of the symbol change stop command, it includes the values of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. in the case of the symbol change stop command. In the case of the command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, or the like is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning in special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in variable prize opening 234, etc. including.

  In addition, in the pre-reading result information command, information of pre-reading result (predetermined stop symbol and fluctuation time information) stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the command data and the number of stop symbols that are pre-read are held And pending number information indicating whether it corresponds to. The information on the prefetch result in the prefetch result information command and the information on the number of reservations may be only an increase or may include information on the results on prefetch for all the reservations and information on the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the special figure fluctuation time selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are pending etc Set the information indicating. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc pending Set the information indicating. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 371 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button.

  In step S313 following step S311, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 following step S313, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321 following step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 373 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S321 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, update processing of other effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise transfer end division Wait for incoming signal to be input. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  The process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709 following step S707, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step S711 following step S709, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 following step S711, when there is an instruction from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. 374 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, the special figure change game and the like in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 375 to 408. FIG. First, a table for judging whether to apply or not used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 375 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIGS. 375 (a) and 375 (b) are the special view 2 or the special view 1 related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process in the special process 2 or the special view 1 An example of a success / failure determination table to be used is shown. FIG. 375 (a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 375 (b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability.

  In the qualification table shown in Fig. 375 (a) and 375 (b), the items in the first column from the left are the "special figure probability", the second column is the "random number range", and the third column is the item It consists of The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 375 (a) represents that the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into four values of numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 11638, numbers 11639 to 11940, and numbers 11941 to 65535. In the third column, "Eligibility result" is assigned "High probability" and "Displacement" corresponding to numerical values 0 to 10000, numerical values 11941 to 65535, and "big hit" corresponding to numerical values 10001 to 11638, "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numbers 11639-11940.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 375 (b) represents that the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0 to 10000, values of 10001 to 10162, values of 10163 to 10464, and values of 10465 to 65535. In the third column, “Eligibility result” is assigned “Lost” corresponding to “Low probability” and numerical values 0 to 10000, numerical values 10465 to 65535, and “big hit” allocated to numerical values 10001 to 10162, "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numbers 10163 to 10464.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used to determine whether to acquire the result of the variable game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 as a winning (hit) or a non-winning (not playing). With reference to the randomness determination table, the randomness value is judged to be acceptable. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the success or failure judgment is the special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 375 (b) is read out from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 376 shows a special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol to be stopped and displayed after symbol variation ends. FIG. 376 (a) shows a special view 1 determination table, and FIG. 376 (b) shows a special view 2 determination table. The special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 376 (a) and the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 376 (b) are from the left column of “success or failure judgment result”, “range of symbol random number”, and “stop symbol” It consists of items. The "pass / fail judgment results" in the left column are classified into "big hit", "small hit" and "deterioration". "Big hit" shows the case where it is judged as "big hit" as a result of adequacy judgment using the table for judging special characters suitability shown in FIG. 375 (a) or FIG. 375 (b). As a result of the propriety determination using the determination table, it shows the case where it is determined as "small hit", and the "disapproval" shows the case where it is determined as "disapproval" as a result of the propriety determination using the special drawing suitability determination table It shows.

  The item “range of symbol random numbers” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 376 (a) indicates the numerical value range of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for determining special figure 1 for winning or the symbol for random determination There is. "Range of symbol random numbers" corresponds to the item "big hit" in the left column "yes or no judgment result", the numerical value 0 to 49, the numerical value 50 to 69, the numerical value 70 to 77, the numerical value 78 to 83, the numerical value 84 to 91 and It is divided into six numbers 92 to 99, and it is divided into two numbers 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to "small hits", and numbers 0 to 49 and numbers corresponding to "out". It is divided into two of 50-99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 376 (a) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. "Stop symbol" corresponds to "big hit" and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numbers 0 to 49, "special figure A", to the numbers 50 to 69, "special figure B", to the numbers 70 to 77 Stop the "special figure F" corresponding to the "special figure D" corresponding to the numerical value 78 to 83, the "special figure E" corresponding to the numerical value 84 to 91, and the numerical value 92 to 99 The symbol modes are respectively assigned. In addition, "stop design" is "small hit" and the range of design random number corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, "stopper pattern form of the" special figure H "corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the "stop symbol" is "off" and the symbol random number range corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, the special symbol I corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, and the special symbol J corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, respectively. It is assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the special figure 1 display device 212 to the special figure A to the special figure 1 when the result of the success or failure judgment based on entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for the winning case which one of the stop symbol aspects of F ′ ′ is to be displayed in a stopped manner.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the special figure G display 212 and the special figure H to the special figure 1 display device 212 when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is a small hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for the winning case which stop symbol aspect is to be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, basic circuit 302 of main control section 300, when the decision result based on the winning a prize figure in special figure 1 starting opening 230 is disapproval, either stop figure of special figure I and special figure J in special figure 1 display 212 It is determined with reference to the special drawing 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for losing symbol determination whether the aspect is to be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the random value for determining the off symbol is obtained from the random number counter for determining off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stopping symbol for off.

  The item “range of symbol random numbers” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 376 (b) indicates the numerical value range of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for determining special figure 2 for winning or the symbol for random determination There is. "The range of symbol random numbers" is divided into two numbers of 0 to 65 and 66 to 99 corresponding to the item "big hit" in the left column "pass / fail judgment result", and corresponds to "small hit", It is divided into two of the numbers 0 to 49 and the numbers 50 to 99, and is divided into two of the numbers 0 to 49 and 50 to 99, corresponding to "outside".

  The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 376 (b) represents the stop symbol in the special figure 2 variation game. The "stop symbol" is assigned a "big hit" and the symbol pattern range of "special figure B" corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 65 corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 65, and the special figure B corresponding to the numerical value 66 to 99, respectively. ing. In addition, "stop design" is "small hit" and the range of design random number corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, "stopper pattern form of the" special figure H "corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the "stop symbol" is "off" and the symbol random number range corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, the special symbol I corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, and the special symbol J corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, respectively. It is assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines that the special view 2 display device 214 displays “special view A” and “special view” when the determination result based on entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for winning, which stop symbol aspect of B "is to be displayed for stop. In addition, as shown in Fig. 376 (b), the random number value in the "range of symbol random numbers" when the "decision result" is "big hit", the "stop symbol" is "special figure A" or "special figure It is distributed to "B" only. Therefore, in the special figure 2 variation game, the stop symbol when the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is determined to either "special figure A" or "special figure B", and "special figure C" ~ "special figure "F" is not selected. Therefore, the big hit game of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is advantageously set to the player in comparison with the big hit game of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  In addition, when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is a small hit, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays "special figure G" and "special figure H" on the special figure 2 display device 214. It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for the winning case which stop symbol aspect is to be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, basic circuit 302 of main control section 300, when the decision result based on winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232 is disapproval, either stop figure of special figure I and special figure J in special figure 2 display 214 It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for losing symbol determination whether it makes the stop display of the mode display. It should be noted that the random value for determining the off symbol is obtained from the random number counter for determining off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stopping symbol for off.

  FIG. 377 shows an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table for determining fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation display in the special drawing 1 fluctuation game. The special view 1 variation display time determination table is used in the special view 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 377 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 377, the special figure 1 variation display time determination table is "stop symbol", "table", "random number selection range", "variation time", and "effect mode with decorative symbol display device" from the left column. It consists of 5 items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left row is the stop symbol determined using the special figure 1 determination table in FIG. 376 (a), and “special figure A · special figure B (common with or without electric support)”, "Special figure C ~ Special figure H (common with or without power support)", "Special figure I · Special figure J (without voltage support: Hold 3)", and "Special figure I · Special figure J (without power support: Hold) It is divided into four of 0-2 or electric support existence: hold 0-3). If the "stop symbol" is "special figure A · special figure B", whether the gaming state at the time of the variable time determination is the power support state (whether the power support or not) and the number of special figures 1 fluctuation game pending Instead, table "1" is selected. Further, when the “stop symbol” is “special figure C to special figure H”, the table “2” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of reserved special figures 1 variation games.

  When "stop symbol" is "special figure I · special figure J", table "3" or table "4" is selected according to the presence / absence of power support at the time of fluctuation time determination and the number of pending special game 1 fluctuation games. It is supposed to be If there is no power support and the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is three, the table "3" is selected as the stop symbol and there is no power support and there is no power support and the corresponding hold is not. When the number is 0 to 2, or when there is power support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table "4" is selected.

  The “random number selection range” on the right of the “table” in the drawing indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time. For example, the random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired simultaneously with acquisition of the start information of special drawing 1, is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read out from the predetermined storage area when special drawing 1 fluctuation display time is determined. It has become. In the table “1”, “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table "2", the "random number selection range" is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of 0 to 65000, 6501 to 65400, 65401 to 65500, and 65501 to 65535. In the table "4", the "random number selection range" is divided into four values of 0 to 50000, 50001 to 60000, 60001 to 65000, and 65001 to 65535.

  The "variation time" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The "variation time" is the table "1" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 1001 to 20000, and "65000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 20001 to 65535. Are respectively assigned. Further, “1 2000 ms” is allocated to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “2” and the random number selection range corresponding to the whole numerical value 0 to 65535. "Variation time" corresponds to the table "3" and "3000 ms" corresponding to the random number selection range of 0 to 65000, "10000 ms" corresponding to the numeric values 65001 to 65400, and corresponding to the numeric values 65401 to 65500 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 65501 to 65535, respectively. Furthermore, “variation time” corresponds to the table “4” and “8000 ms” corresponding to the random number selection range of the numbers 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numbers 50001 to 60000, corresponding to the numbers 60001 to 65000 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 6500 to 65535, respectively.

  The "Demonstrate mode with the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "variation time" in the figure is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "variation time". Shows an effect mode to be executed. "The effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device" corresponds to "per normal reach" and "45000 ms" for "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure A · special figure B" and fluctuation time "1500 ms". Thus, "per reach B" is allocated corresponding to "per reach A" and fluctuation time "65000 ms". Further, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "all chances stop" is assigned corresponding to "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure C to special figure H" and fluctuation time "12000 ms". In addition, in "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is "special figure I · special figure J" and "shortening out" corresponding to fluctuation time "3000 ms", fluctuation time "8000 ms" Correspondingly, "Attach", "Normal reach out" corresponding to fluctuation time "10000 ms", "Leach A out" corresponding to fluctuation time "40000 ms", "Leach B out" corresponding to fluctuation time "60000 ms" Are each assigned.

  FIG. 378 shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The special view 2 variation display time determination table is used in the special view 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 378 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 378, the special figure 2 variation display time determination table is "stop symbol", "table", "random number selection range", "variation time", and "effect mode with decorative symbol display device" from the left column. It consists of 5 items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is the stop symbol determined using the special figure 2 determination table in FIG. 376 (b), and “special figure A · special figure B (common with or without electric support)”, "Special figure G · Special figure H (common with or without charge support)", "Special figure I · Special figure J (with charge support: Withholding 1 to 3)", "Special figure I with special view J (with charge support): It is divided into five of "pending 0)", and "special figure I · special figure J (without power support: pending 0-3)". The table "5" corresponds to the "special figure A · special figure B" of the "stop symbol", and the table "6" corresponds to the "special figure G · special figure H". When the "stop symbol" is "special figure A · special figure B", the table "5" is selected regardless of the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of reserved special figures 2 variation games. Also, when the "stop symbol" is "special figure G · special figure H", the table "6" is selected regardless of the presence or absence of power support at the time of determination of the fluctuation time and the number of reserved special game 2 fluctuation games. .

  If the "stop symbol" is "special figure I · special figure J", any of the tables "7" to "9" according to the presence or absence of power support at the time of the fluctuation time determination and the number of pending special game 2 fluctuation games. Is to be selected. If the special symbol I or the special image J is decided as the stop symbol, and there is a power support and the number of reserved special game 2 variable games is 1 to 3, the table "7" is selected, there is a power support When the number of reservations is 0, the table "8" is selected, and when there is no power support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table "9" is selected.

  The “random number selection range” on the right of the “table” in the drawing indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time. For example, the random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired simultaneously with acquisition of the start information of special drawing 2, is stored in a predetermined storage area of RAM 308, and read out from the predetermined storage area when special drawing 2 fluctuation display time is determined. It has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In each of the tables "6" to "8", the "random number selection range" is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table "9", the "random number selection range" is divided into four values of 0 to 50000, 50001 to 60000, 60001 to 65000, and 65001 to 65535.

  The "variation time" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The "variation time" is the table "5" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numbers 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numbers 1001 to 20000, "65000 ms corresponding to the numbers 20001 to 65535. Are respectively assigned. In addition, “1 2000 ms” is allocated to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “6” and the random number selection range corresponding to the whole numerical value 0 to 65535. In addition, “1500 ms” is allocated to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “7” and the random number selection range corresponding to the whole numerical value 0 to 65535. In addition, “8000 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “8” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values from 0 to 65535. Furthermore, “variation time” corresponds to the table “9” and “8000 ms” corresponding to the random number selection range from the numerical value 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical value 50001 to 60000, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 6500 to 65535, respectively.

  The "Demonstrate mode with the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "fluctuating time" in the figure is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 2 fluctuating game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "fluctuating time". Shows an effect mode to be executed. “The effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “Stop A” corresponding to “Special figure A / Special figure B” and “per normal reach” corresponding to fluctuation time 15000 ms, “reach A corresponding to fluctuation time 45000 ms” “Per reach B” is allocated corresponding to the fluctuation time of 65000 ms. In addition, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop all chances" is assigned to "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure G · special figure H" and fluctuation time 12000 ms. In the special figure 2 change game of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the stop symbols of "special figure C" to "special figure F" are not selected, "special figure G" or "special figure G" Only when any of the special figure H is selected, "all chances stop" is selected as the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device". For this reason, when the effect is executed in the effect mode of "all chance eyes stop", a small hit is determined. In addition, as for "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" corresponds to "special figure I · special figure J" and corresponds to fluctuation time of 1500 ms, "super shortening out of phase", corresponding to fluctuation time of 8000 ms "Launch", "Normal reach slip" corresponding to fluctuation time 10000 ms, "Leach A slip" corresponding to fluctuation time 40000 ms, and "Leach B slip" corresponding to fluctuation time 60000 ms.

  Next, when making a lottery whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display image (details will be described later) displayed in the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 hold display areas 208d1 and 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The hold change lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 379 shows a pending change lottery table (predictive notice: starting opening prize winning time) to be referred to in the pending change lottery in which whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display image is drawn. The hold change lottery table is used in step S1205 in the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of acquisition of start information described later. The hold change lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 379 is divided into five from the left row into “variation time”, “representation mode on the decoration symbol display device”, “no change”, “hold A” and “hold B” There is. The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378, and the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "variation time" in the drawing indicates the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure fluctuation game. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378 and the effect mode in the “decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  “No change” on the right of the “Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device” in the figure is the default display without changing the display mode of the hold display image shown as “normal hold” in FIG. 380 (a) described later. It shows that the suspension of the special feature variation game is displayed with (the circle suspension display filled in a predetermined color) as it is, and the “pending A” on the right of that is shown in FIG. 380 (b) described later. In the display mode of the character image of "bad merchant Echigoya" shown as "pending A", it is shown that prefetch notice of special figure change game is executed, and "pending B" on the right is the figure 380 (c) described later. In the display mode of the character image of "Yoshimune" shown as "Hold B", it is shown that the advance notice of the special figure change game is executed. "No change", "hold A" and "hold B" are respectively divided by the numerical range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the hold change random number value corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire the random number value for holding change lottery from the random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numbers "0" to "89" are assigned to "no change", the numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to "pending A", and no value is assigned to "pending B" . When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", the numbers 0 to 39 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 40 to 79 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 80 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numbers 0 to 29 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 30 to 79 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 80 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. If the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numbers "0" to "69" are assigned to "no change", the numbers 70 to 95 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 96 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numbers 0 to 29 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 30 to 69 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 70 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 20 to 49 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 50 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. In the tables shown in FIG. 379 and subsequent figures, “-” is displayed in places where numerical values are not assigned.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting a degree of reliability which is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific result of judgment of yes or no (for example, a hit) in the pre-reading advance notice effect by holding change. . Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the advance notice effect by the hold change is the probability of winning or falling, the probability that a predetermined reach effect is selected, the probability that a predetermined holding mode is selected, etc. It is determined based on In this embodiment, "Pending A" and "Pending B" are compared with "No change" so that "Pending A" and "Pending B" are more reliable than "No change". If the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 379 is per-reach reach (“per normal reach”, “per reach A” and “per reach B”), the out-of-reach reach effect (“normal reach out”), “reach A out of range” And "reach B is off" is set to be less. Furthermore, in order to make "Pending B" more reliable than "Pending A", "Pending B" is different from "Pending A", and the distribution of random numbers is a hit effect per hit ("Normal reach In the case of “per reach A” and “per reach B”, it is set to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”) There is.

  Since the reliability of "hold B" is set higher than the reliability of "hold A", the pachinko machine 100 performs the "hold B" rather than the execution of the "hold A" is a big hit The player can be expected to win the "Pending A" and "Pending B" are designed to be able to indicate the highs and lows of expectations for winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 380 shows an example of the display mode of the suspension display of the special figure change game. The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, three display modes as a hold display of the special figure change game. FIG. 380 (a) shows the display mode of the suspension display image when “no change” is selected in the suspension change advance lottery (when the player is not elected in the suspension change lottery). As shown in FIG. 380 (a), the display mode of the suspension display image in "no change" is, for example, a display mode representing a circular pattern filled in with a predetermined color. The display mode of the hold display image shown in FIG. 380 (a) is a display mode in the default display when the display mode of the hold display of the special figure fluctuation game is not changed. Therefore, the hold display image when the hold change lottery is not executed is also the display mode shown in FIG. 380 (a). The pending display mode of "no change" corresponds to the normal display mode. FIG. 380 (b) shows the display mode of the suspension display image when the “hold A” is won in the suspension change advance lottery. As shown in FIG. 380 (b), the hold display image in the case where the "hold A" is won is a display mode representing the character of "the vicious merchant Echigoya". FIG. 380 (c) shows the display mode of the suspension display image when the “banking B” is won in the suspension change advance lottery. As shown in FIG. 380 (c), the hold display image in the case of winning the "hold B" is a display mode representing the character "Yoshimune". The display mode of "pending A" or "pending B" corresponds to a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 381, a board lamp prefetch lottery table will be described, which is referred to when drawing whether to change the lighting mode of the board lamps 224a and 224b and execute the pre-reading notification effect. FIG. 381 shows a board lamp look-ahead lottery table (pre-notice notice: starting opening prize winning time) to be referred to in the case of a board lamp look-ahead lottery for drawing whether or not to change the lighting mode of the board lamp 224a. The board lamp look-ahead lottery table is used in step S1207 in the first sub-control section pre-read notice execution process at the time of acquisition of start information described later. The board lamp look-ahead lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400.

  From the left column, the board surface lamp pre-selection lottery table shown in FIG. 381 is “variation time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “no change”, “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)” and It is divided into six of "Fast Flashing (Red)". The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378, and the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "variation time" in the drawing indicates the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure fluctuation game. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378 and the effect mode in the “decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "No change" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that the board lamp 224a is the default lighting (predetermined lighting and blinking mode determined in advance) in the normal performance, "Lighting (blue)" next to the right turns on all 10 circular lamps of the board lamp 224a in blue to indicate that the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and "flashing (blue)" next to the right Indicates that at least a part of the board lamp 224a blinks in blue to execute the advance notice announcement effect, and “High-speed blink (red)” next to the right makes at least a part of the board lamp 224a in red It blinks to indicate that the pre-reading notice effect is to be executed. "No change", "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" and "fast blink (red)" correspond to "variation time" and are random numbers to be compared with the random values for the board lamp pre-reading lottery It is divided into ranges (0 to 99). The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain, for example, a board lamp look-ahead lottery random number value from a board lamp look-ahead lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When the lighting mode of the board lamp 224a is "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" or "high speed flashing (red)", the board lamp 224b is also synchronized with it. Execute preview advance notice effect. Four petals of the lamp are arranged on the board lamp 224b, and the number of petals of the lamp is the same as the number of reservations for the special view 1 or the special view 2 according to the advance notice. For example, the lamps are lighted in order from the bottom, and the flower-patterned lamp corresponding to the hold according to the advance notice is lighted in a different color from the other lamps.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numbers 0 to 99 are assigned to "no change", and the values for "light (blue)", "flashing (blue)" and "fast blink (red)" Not assigned When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", the value 0 to 39 is assigned to "no change", the value 40 to 89 is assigned to "light (blue)", and the value 90 is "flashing (blue)". .About.98 are assigned, and the value "99" is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to "no change", the numerical value 30 to 95 is assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the numerical value 96 for "flashing (blue)" .About.98 are assigned, and the value "99" is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the value 0 to 96 is assigned to "no change", the value 97 is assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the value 98 is assigned to "flashing (blue)" And the value "99" is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to "no change", the numerical value 30 to 69 is assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the value 70 for "flashing (blue)" .About.84 are assigned, and "fast blink (red)" is assigned a numerical value 85-99. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 20 to 49 are assigned to "light (blue)", and the number 50 is "flash (blue) .About.69 are assigned, and the numerical value 70 to 99 is assigned to "fast blink (red)".

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the preview advance notice effect by the board lamps 224a and 224b. It has become. Although the detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the advance notice effect by the board lamps 224a and 224b is the probability of hitting or falling, the probability that a predetermined reach effect is selected, the predetermined holding mode is selected. It is determined based on the probability of In the present embodiment, “lighting (blue)”, “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)” and “fast blink (red)” have higher reliability than “no change”. "Blinking (blue)" and "high-speed blinking (red)" are compared with "no change", and the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 381 is a hit effect per hit ("per normal reach", "per reach A" and "reach") In the case of “per B”, it is set so as to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach effects (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”). Furthermore, "fast blink (red)" is a random number compared to "flash (blue)" so that "fast blink (red)" is more reliable than "flash (blue)". The distribution is set to be less in the case of reach effect of hitting, and in the case of reach effect of outlying in many cases. In addition, "flashing (blue)" is different from "lighting (blue)", so that "flashing (blue)" has higher reliability than "lighting (blue)", the distribution of random numbers is In the case of hit reach production, it is set to be less in the case of outlying reach production.

  The reliability of "flashing (blue)" is higher than the reliability of "lighting (blue)", and the reliability of "fast blink (red)" is higher than the reliability of "flashing (blue)" Because the pachinko machine 100 is set to be high, it is better to execute "flashing (blue)" than to execute "lighting (blue)" rather than executing "flashing (blue)". It is possible to make the player expect that the player who executes “(red)” wins the big hit. "Lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" and "fast blinking (red)" are designed to indicate the level of expectation of winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  382 to 390 show an example of a regular notice lottery table or the like used in step S1311 in the first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the start of the special figure change game described later. The "normal notice" of the normal notice lottery means the notice of the judgment result of the special figure fluctuation game starting from now. The normal notice lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. The normal notice lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute a normal notice effect for giving notice of the success or failure judgment result of the special drawing fluctuation game to be started from now. Also, the normal advance notice effect based on the normal advance notice lottery table is to be executed before and after the reach formation. The normal notice lottery table is used commonly to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  The normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 382 is used for notice effects before reaching, and from the left row, "variation time", "effect mode with the decoration symbol display device", "buttonless system", and "button system" It is divided into four. The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378, and the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378 and the effect mode in the “decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  The "No button system" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" shows the advance notice without the effect using the chance button 136 etc. as the operation means, and the "button on the right" “System” indicates that the advance notice including the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 etc. is executed. “No button system” and “button system” are respectively divided by the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired first random number value for regular announcement execution determination, corresponding to “variation time” 6 Divided into three. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire a first random number value for normal advance notice determination from the first random number value counter for normal notice execution decision provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When "variation time" is "10000 ms", numbers 0 to 99 are assigned to "No button system" and numbers are assigned to "Button system" as a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the notice execution judgment random number value It is not done. When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical value 90 to 99 is assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 94 are assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 98 is assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical value 99 is assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numbers 0 to 49 are assigned to the "buttonless system" and the values 50 to 99 are assigned to the "buttonless system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical values 30 to 99 are assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach advance notice effect by the “buttonless system” and the “buttoned system”. It can be suggested. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect by the “without a button system” and the “with a button system” has a probability of winning or falling, a probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, It is determined based on the probability that a predetermined button effect is selected. In the present embodiment, “button-with type” is a random number shown in FIG. 382 compared with “button-with type” so that “button-with type” has higher reliability than “button without type”. When the distribution is per reach reach production ("per normal reach", "per reach A" and "per reach B"), the far out reach production ("normal reach out", "reach A out", and "reach B out") It is set to be less in the case of.

  Since the reliability of the "with button" is set higher than the reliability of the "without button", the pachinko machine 100 executes the "with button" rather than executing the "without button". It is possible for the player to expect the player to win the big hit. "Button-less type" and "Button-type type" can indicate high or low expectation of winning a jackpot, that is, an expected degree.

  The normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 383 is used when a system without effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 383, “variation time”, “rendering mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C (from the left column) It is divided into six of "). The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378, and the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378 and the effect mode in the “decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "None" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that normal advance presentation is not performed, and the "character A" on the right is "A" shown in Fig. 385 (a) described later. The character preview of the character image of "Panda" shown as "Character A" indicates that the special preview effect of the special figure variation game is to be executed, and the "Chara B" on the right of "Para" is shown in Fig. 385 (b) described later. In the display mode of the character image of "Sabo Hani" shown as "Character B", it is shown that the special advance notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed, and "Character C (to be sure)" next to it is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of “Hime” shown as “Chara C”, it is shown that the normal advance notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game is executed. "None", "Chara A", "Chara B", and "Chara C (to be sure)" correspond to "variation time", and are random numbers to be compared with the second random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained Each is divided by the range (0 to 99), and is divided into six corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain a second random number value for normal notice execution determination from, for example, a second random number value counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 84 is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the second random number value for regular announcement execution determination, and the numerical value 85 to 96 is assigned, the numbers 97 to 99 are assigned to the "character B", and the numbers are not assigned to the "character C (to be sure)". If the "variation time" is "40000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 89 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 90 to 99 is "numerical B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 94 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 95 to 99 is "numerical B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 96 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 97 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 98 is allocated to "character B" as the numerical value range. , A value 99 is assigned to the "character C (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical value 0 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 1 to 49 is allocated to "character A", and the value 50 to 97 is allocated to "character B". The numbers 98 to 99 are assigned to the "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 4 are assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical values 5 to 39 are allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to "character B" 94 is assigned, and the numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to "character C (to be sure)".

  As shown in FIG. 383, the display mode of "character C (for sure)" when "the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device" is "normal reach off", "reach A off", or "reach B off". Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character C (for sure)" is displayed in the notice effect before reaching, the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes a hit determination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can suggest a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach notice effect of “buttonless system”. It has become. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara B” have higher reliability than “None”. As compared with “None,” the character C (most likely) is more likely to fall off when the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 383 is per reach effect (“per normal reach, per reach A” and “per reach B”). It is set so that it will decrease in the case of the reach production of ("normal reach out", "reach A out", and "reach B out"). Furthermore, "Chara B" is more likely to be distributed by random numbers compared to "Chara A" so that "Chara B" has higher reliability than "Chara A". It is set to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach effects. In addition, in order for "Chara C (to be sure)" to have higher reliability than "Chara B", "Chara C (to be sure)" is more likely to have random numbers distributed than "Chara B". In the case of reach production, it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach production.

  Since the reliability of "Chara B" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara A", pachinko machine 100 is more likely to perform "Chara B" than the execution of "Chara A". The player can be expected to win the In addition, since the reliability of "Chara C (to be sure)" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara B", the pachinko machine 100 executes "Chara C (T The player can be made to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the "Chara A", "Chara B", or "Chara C (to be sure)" can also indicate high or low expectation of winning a big hit, that is, an expected degree.

  The normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 384 is used when a system with effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 384, “variation time”, “rendering mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C (from C), from left column It is divided into six of "). The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378, and the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378 and the effect mode in the “decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "None" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that normal advance presentation is not performed, and the "character A" on the right is "A" shown in Fig. 385 (a) described later. The character preview of the character image of "Panda" shown as "Character A" indicates that the special preview effect of the special figure variation game is to be executed, and the "Chara B" on the right of "Para" is shown in Fig. 385 (b) described later. In the display mode of the character image of "Sabo Hani" shown as "Character B", it is shown that the special advance notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed, and "Character C (to be sure)" next to it is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of “Hime” shown as “Chara C”, it is shown that the normal advance notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game is executed. "None", "Chara A", "Chara B", and "Chara C (to be sure)" correspond to "variation time", and are random numbers to be compared with the second random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained Each is divided by the range (0 to 99), and is divided into six corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain a third random number value for normal notice execution determination from, for example, a third random number value counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the third random number for normal notice execution determination, and the numerical value 90 to "character A" 94 is assigned, the numerical value 95 to 99 is assigned to "character B", and the numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". If the "variation time" is "40000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "None" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 69 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 70 to 99 is "character B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 69 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 70 to 99 is "numerical B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 49 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 50 to 89 is "character B". It is allocated and the numerical value 90-99 is allocated to the "character C (this confirmation)." When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical value 0 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 1 to 39 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to 89 is allocated to "character B". It is allocated and the numerical value 90-99 is allocated to the "character C (this confirmation)." When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 4 are assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical values 5 to 39 are allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to "character B" 89 are assigned, and numerals 90 to 99 are assigned to "character C (for sure)".

  As shown in FIG. 384, the display mode of "character C (for sure)" in the case that "the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device" is "normal reach off", "reach A off", or "reach B off". Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character C (for sure)" is displayed in the notice effect before reaching, the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes a hit determination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can suggest a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach advance notice effect of the “button system”. It has become. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara B” have higher reliability than “None”. As compared with “None,” the character C (most likely) is more likely to fall off when the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 384 is per reach effect (“per normal reach, per reach A” and “per reach B”). It is set so that it will decrease in the case of the reach production of ("normal reach out", "reach A out", and "reach B out"). Furthermore, "Chara B" is more likely to be distributed by random numbers compared to "Chara A" so that "Chara B" has higher reliability than "Chara A". It is set to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach effects. In addition, in order for "Chara C (to be sure)" to have higher reliability than "Chara B", "Chara C (to be sure)" is more likely to have random numbers distributed than "Chara B". In the case of reach production, it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach production.

  Since the reliability of "Chara B" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara A", pachinko machine 100 is more likely to perform "Chara B" than the execution of "Chara A". The player can be expected to win the In addition, since the reliability of "Chara C (to be sure)" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara B", the pachinko machine 100 executes "Chara C (T The player can be made to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the "Chara A", "Chara B", or "Chara C (to be sure)" can also indicate high or low expectation of winning a big hit, that is, an expected degree.

  FIG. 385 shows an example of a character image used in the regular advance effect before reaching. FIG. 385 (a) shows a character image representing "panda" displayed at the time of the regular announcement effect of "character A", and FIG. 385 (b) is shown at the time of the advance announcement effect of "character B". A character image representing "Sabohani" (a character having a cactus and a lotus flower motif) is shown, and in FIG. It is shown. These character images are displayed, for example, in the effect display area 208d in an area overlapping with any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of normal advance notice effect execution.

  In the normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 386, a system with effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 382, and further, based on the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. It is used when either "B" or "character C (to be sure)" is selected. The normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 386 is divided into four from the left row, “display mode / button mode”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C”. “Display mode / button mode” indicates a combination of the display mode and the button mode shown in FIGS. 387 and 388. Here, the display mode and the button mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388.

  FIG. 387 shows a display mode of an image imitating the chance button 136, which can be displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 387 (a), the chance button image imitating the chance button 136 in the normal state in which the display mode is "normal" and does not vibrate or rotate is arranged at the center, and the character "PUSH" is displayed above it. A row is arranged, and an effective period image showing an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is arranged at the lower part thereof. The effective period image in this example has a horizontally long frame shape, and initially shows the entire period of the effective period in a rod shape of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and the rod portion of the predetermined color It will be displayed so as to become shorter gradually. FIG. 387 (b) is a display mode in which the display mode is "vibration" and the central chance button image is visually recognized as vibrating. The other display modes are the same as “normal”. FIG. 387 (c) is a display mode in which the display mode is "vibration + rotation" and the central chance button image is viewed as if it is rotating while vibrating. The other display modes are the same as “normal”. In FIG. 387 (d), the display mode is "vibration + rotation", and the chance button image and the valid period image are displayed larger than those in the image of FIG. 387 (c). In addition, the character string "PUSH" and the validity period image may not be displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 387 (d) is hereinafter also referred to as "deca-button display".

  FIG. 388 shows the operation mode (button mode) of the chance button 136. FIG. 388 (a) shows the chance button 136 in the normal state in which the button mode is “normal” and vibration or rotation is not performed. FIG. 388 (b) shows a state in which the button mode is "vibration" and the chance button 136 is vibrating. As shown in FIG. 388 (c), the button mode is "vibration + rotation", and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting light within the chance button 136 is rotated and the chance button 136 is rotated while the chance button 136 is vibrating. Make it visible. It is an aspect.

  Referring back to FIG. 386, “display mode / button mode” displays the display mode of the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the image. Shows a combination of the actual chance button 136 and the button mode of the button. In “normal / normal”, the operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “normal”. . In the "normal / vibration", the operation request image for prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the "normal" display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration". . In “normal / vibration + rotation”, the operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration + rotation”. It has become. In "Vibration / Normal", an operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "Vibration", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "Normal" . In "vibration / vibration", an operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "vibration", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration". . In "vibration + rotation / vibration", an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "vibration + rotation", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration". It has become. In "deca button display / vibration + rotation", an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "deca button display", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration + It is "rotation".

  "Character A" on the right of the "Display mode / Button mode" in the figure is the display acquired when "Chara A" is selected in the lottery result performed using the advance lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 384. The numerical value range (0-99) of the random number compared with the random value for aspect / button aspect determination is shown. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain a display mode / button mode determination random number value from, for example, a display mode / button mode determination random number value counter provided in the RAM 408.

  In the case of "character A", numbers 0 to 89 are assigned to "normal / normal" as a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / random number for button mode determination, and "normal / vibration", "normal / vibration" Values are not assigned to + rotation and vibration / normal, numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to vibration / vibration, and vibration / rotation / vibration and deca-button display / vibration + rotation No numerical value is assigned to.

  "Chara B" on the right of "Chara A" in the figure is the display mode / button acquired when "Chara B" is selected in the lottery result performed using the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 384. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the aspect determination random value is shown.

  In the case of "character B", numbers 0 to 49 are assigned to "normal / normal" and numbers 50 to 54 to "normal / oscillation" as a numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / random number for button mode determination. Is assigned, “normal / vibration + rotation” is assigned the numbers 55 to 59, “vibration / normal” is assigned the values 60 to 64, and “vibration / vibration” is assigned the values 65 to 89, “ The numerical values 90 to 94 are assigned to the vibration + rotation / vibration, and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to the “decabutton display / vibration + rotation”.

  "Chara C" on the right of "Chara B" in the figure is the display mode / button acquired when "Chara C" is selected in the lottery result performed using the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the aspect determination random value is shown.

  In the case of "character C", no numerical value is assigned to "normal / normal" as a numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the display mode / random number value for button mode determination, and the numerical value 0 to 19 in "normal / vibration" Is assigned, “normal / vibration + rotation” is assigned the numbers 20 to 39, “vibration / normal” is assigned the values 40 to 59, and “vibration / vibration” is assigned the number, “ Numerical values 60 to 79 are assigned to vibration + rotation / vibration, and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “deca-button display / vibration + rotation”.

  As shown in FIG. 386, in the case of "character A", "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is not selected. On the other hand, in the case of "character C", only "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" are selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when effects of "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" are executed in the notice effect before reaching, the special figure fluctuation There is a high possibility that the result of the game will be hit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can suggest a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach advance notice effect of the “button system”. It has become. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is more reliable than “display mode / button mode” of “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. “Display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is a random number shown in FIG. 386 in comparison with “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” so that the degree is higher. In the case of the distribution of "character C", it is set so as to decrease in the case of "character A".

  The reliability of "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is better than the reliability of "display mode / button mode" of "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" Since it is set high, the pachinko machine 100 performs “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” than performing “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. It is possible for the player to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation request image can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the same display mode as the button mode of the chance button 136. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a plurality of types of display effects as display effects related to the chance button 136 being operated, and one of the plurality of types of display effects is the first For example, "Chara A" display of a system with effect button as a display effect, and one of a plurality of display effects is "Chara C" display of a system with a display button, for example, as a second display effect The first operation in which the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display effect of "Chara C" is executed than the display effect of "Chara A", and the display mode is the same as the button mode of the chance button 136 A second operation request image (for example, “normal / vibration”, “vibration /”, which is a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 than the request image (for example, “normal / normal”, “vibration / vibration”) Through ", Those of" normal / vibration + rotation ", etc.), display effect of" character C "is so easy to be carried out.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it may be possible to function as a notice of whether or not the second display effect with high reliability of the big hit is performed. As a result, the operation request image itself may be able to function as a notice.

  The normal notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 389 is used for the after-reach notice lottery for the after-reach notice effect (cut-in notice) performed after the reach effect in the special figure fluctuation game is started. In the normal notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 389, from the left column, "variation time", "representation mode on the decoration symbol display device", It is divided into six of "). The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378, and the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 377 or 378 and the effect mode in the “decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "None" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that the after-reach advance notice effect (which can also be regarded as part of the normal advance notice effect) is not executed. "Character D" indicates that the after-reach notice effect of special figure variation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "爺" shown as "Chara D" in FIG. 390 (a) described later, and the next to the right “Chara E” indicates that the after-reach notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of “Boxer” shown as “Chara E” in FIG. "Chara F (for sure)" indicates that the special character of the "bancho" character image shown as "Chara F" in FIG. ing. “None”, “Chara D”, “Chara E”, and “Chara F (for sure)” correspond to “variation time”, and the numerical range of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired after-reach notice execution random number value They are each classified by (0 to 99), and are divided into six corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain, for example, the after-reach notice execution determination random number value from the after-reach notice execution determination random number value counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", "None", "Chara D", "Chara E", "Chara F (for sure)" as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the after-reach notice execution judgment random value. No value is assigned to any of. That is, when the "variation time" is "10000 ms", since there is no time scale for inserting the cut-in notice, the after-reach notice effect is not performed. When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 89 is allocated to "character D", and the numerical value 90 to 99 is allocated to "character E". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character F (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 94 is allocated to "character D", and the numerical value 95 to 99 is specified for "character E". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character F (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", "None", "Chara D", "Chara E", "Chara F (for sure)" as a numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the after-reach notice execution judgment random value. No value is assigned to any of. That is, when the "variation time" is "15000 ms", since there is no time scale for inserting the cut-in notice, the after-reach notice effect is not executed. If the "variation time" is "45000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "None" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 39 is allocated to "character D", and the numerical value 40 to 94 is assigned to "character E". The numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to the "character F (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to "character D", and the numerical value 30 to 94 is assigned to "character E". The numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to the "character F (for sure)".

  As shown in FIG. 389, the display mode of "character F (for sure)" is displayed when "effect mode in the decorative symbol display device" is "normal reach out", "reach A out", or "reach B out". Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "Chara F (for sure)" is displayed in the notice effect after reaching, the success / failure determination result of the special view fluctuation game is per reach A or reach B It will be determined.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the after-reach advance notice effect. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the after-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “Chara D”, “Chara E”, and “Chara E”, and “Chara E”, and “Chara E” and “Chara F” are higher than “None”. Compared with “None,” the character F (for sure) has many out-of-reach reach effects (“per reach A” and “per reach B”) when the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 389 is per reach effect (“per reach A” and “per reach B”). In the case of “reach A off” and “reach B off”, it is set to be less. Furthermore, in order for "Chara E" to have higher reliability than "Chara D", "Chara E" is more likely to be hit by random distribution compared to "Chara D". In the case of "hit" and "reach B", it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach effects ("reach A" and "reach B"). In addition, as for "Chara F (to be sure)" is higher in reliability than "Chara E", "Chara F (to be sure)" is more likely to be distributed by random numbers than "Chara E". In the case of reach production ("per reach A" and "per reach B"), it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach production ("reach A off" and "reach B off").

  Since the reliability of "Chara E" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara D", the pachinko machine 100 executes "Chara E" rather than executing "Chara D" as a big hit The player can be expected to win the In addition, since the reliability of "Chara F (for sure)" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara E", the pachinko machine 100 does not execute "Chara E". The player can be made to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the "Chara D", "Chara E", or "Chara F (to be sure)" can also indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 390 shows an example of a character image used in the regular announcement effect after reaching. FIG. 390 (a) shows a character image representing “爺” displayed at the time of normal advance notice at the time of reach effect of “Chara D”, and at the time of reach effect of “Chara E” in FIG. 390 (b) A character image representing a "boxer" displayed at the time of the normal advance presentation effect of the character is shown, and a character showing a "bancho" displayed at the time of the normal advance presentation effect at the time of the reach effect of "Chara F" is shown in FIG. An image is shown. These character images are displayed, for example, in the effect display area 208d in an area overlapping with any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of executing the advance notice effect after reaching in the normal advance effect.

  Next, the special-figure prefetching process will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 are flowcharts showing the flow of the special drawing prefetch process (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 391, in the special view prefetch process, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the power support mode (step S1000). In step S1000, for example, main control unit 300 determines whether or not the time saving flag is in the on state, and if it is determined that power saving is in the on state, processing proceeds to step S1001 and the time saving flag is in the off state If it is determined that power is not being supplied, the process proceeds to step S1101.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is configured to make a left strike as you do. For this reason, the winning of the special figure 1 start port 230 at the time of power support and the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232 at the time of non power saving are irregular. It is excluded from the target of processing.

  In step S1001 following step S1000, it is determined whether there is a winning on the special figure 2 start port 232 or not. The determination as to whether or not the prize has been made is, for example, the number of special figure 2 reservations stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area, and the number of special figure 2 prefetches stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area described later. Compare and do. For example, the main control unit 300 compares the special view 2 reserve count and the special view 2 look-ahead count, and when the special view 2 reserve count is greater than the special view 2 reserve count, the special view 2 start opening 232 has a prize. The process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, when the special drawing 2 reservation number is equal to the special drawing 2 pre-reading number, the main control unit 300 determines that there is no winning at the special drawing 2 start opening 232, and performs processing of steps S1003 to S1013 described later The special drawing prefetching process is ended without.

  In step S1003 following step S1001, the start information related to the suspension increased by the winning is pre-readed, and it is determined in advance whether the special figure 2 fluctuation game related to the suspension is appropriate or not, and it is determined whether the result is a big hit or not. . For example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the success or failure result by the preliminary determination is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1005, and when it is determined that the success or failure result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1005 following step S1003, a jackpot symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 376 (b) for the random number value for special figure determination for hit which is pre-read symbol to display stop after the special figure 2 change game The stop symbol) is determined in advance, and the process moves to step S1013.

  On the other hand, if the preliminary determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether the true or false result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the success or failure result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if determined that the success or failure result is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1011.

  If the pre-decision result is a small hit, a small hit symbol is determined in step S1009. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 376 (b) for the random number value for special figure determination for hit when pre-reading, and stops the stop symbol after the special figure 2 fluctuation game in advance. It determines and transfers to step S1013.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure result determined in advance in step S1007 is not a small hit but an off, the process proceeds to step S1011, and an off symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 prefetches the out-of-lot symbol determination random number value stored in the RAM 308, and refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 376 (b) for the random number value. The stop symbol after the game is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013 following step S1005, S1009, or S1011, a lottery of fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is performed based on the stop symbol determined in advance in these steps. For example, the main control unit 300 determines the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game using the stop symbol, the special figure variation time determination random number value, and the special figure 2 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. The special view prefetching process is ended.

  Further, in step S1013, for example, the main control unit 300 determines the success / failure result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game related to the suspension for which special figure 2 prefetch processing is executed and the special figure fluctuation time previously determined in step S1013 as the special figure 2 prefetch result. Is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of FIG. The main control unit 300 stores the stop symbol of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing fluctuation time which are determined beforehand as the special drawing 2 pre-reading result, in the first vacant area of the special drawing 2 pre-reading result storage part There is. In the present embodiment, the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special view 2 prefetch results.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit as the special figure 2 pre-reading number is provided. The main control unit 300 writes information of the new special view 2 prefetch result in the next order of the information of the special view 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank (last) every time the number of special view 2 prefetch is increased. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is performed for the increase of the hold, but the special view pre-reading process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  In step S1000, for example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the time saving flag is in the off state and not in the power support state, the process proceeds to step S1101 shown in FIG. The processing performed in steps S1101 to S1113 shown in FIG. 392 is the same as the processing in which “special figure 2” in the contents of steps S1001 to S1013 described with reference to FIG. 391 is replaced with “special figure 1”. The description is omitted. Further, the special-figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 is executed when the number of pending storages of the special-figure fluctuation game to be subjected to the process is within the upper limit range.

  391 and 392 are executed by referring to the pass / fail determination table and the special view determination table used in the pass / fail determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetch process.

  Next, the first sub-control unit prefetching notice execution process when the game ball enters the special view 1 or 2 start opening 230, 232 and the start information is acquired will be described using FIG. FIG. 393 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the time of start information acquisition performed in, for example, the effect control processing (step S309) shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first secondary control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 to obtain first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the time of acquisition of start information and the start of the special feature change game described later. The first sub-control unit pre-read notice execution process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 393, in the first secondary control unit look-ahead notice execution process at the time of start winning (when start information is acquired), it is first determined whether or not the advance notice notification effect is being executed at present (step S1201). . The first sub control unit 400 reads out the value of the flag under pre-reading execution stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value indicates the on state, the pre-reading advance notice notification effect is under execution. Then, the process proceeds to step S1215. If the value indicates the off state, it is determined that the prefetch notice notification effect is not being executed, and the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the change time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233) of the main control unit 300 is a predetermined change time. to decide. The predetermined fluctuation time of the present embodiment is six of 10000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms and 65000 ms. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command is a predetermined fluctuation time, the process proceeds to step S1205, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not a predetermined fluctuation time, It transfers to step S1215, without performing.

  In step S1205, the lottery process 1 of holding change is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the random number value for holding change lottery from the random number counter for holding change lottery provided, for example, in the RAM 408, and uses the holding change lottery table shown in FIG. Obtain a lottery result of either “A” or “pending B”.

  More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the change time selection table shown in FIG. 379 read from the ROM 406 and the change time lottery table shown in FIG. 379 and the RAM 408, which are included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300. The lottery process 1 of the pending change is executed using the pending change lottery random number value acquired from the pending change lottery random number counter. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the holding change in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, the lottery process 2 of the pending change is executed. For example, the first sub control unit 400 obtains a random number value for the panel lamp prefetch lottery from the panel lamp random number counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the panel lamp prefetch lottery table shown in FIG. , "Lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)", or "fast blinking (red)" to obtain a lottery result.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 adds the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the board lamp pre-reading lottery table shown in FIG. 381 read from the ROM 406, and the RAM 408. The lottery process 2 of the holding change is executed using the board surface lamp look-ahead lottery random number value acquired from the provided board surface lamp look-ahead lottery random number counter. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the holding change in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1209 following step S1207, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is other than "no change", that is, at least one of the lottery process 1 of the hold change or the lottery process 2 of the hold change. The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the holding change stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the drawing result is either "pending A" or "pending B". And determine that the lottery was won. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the pending change stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the lottery result is “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue) It is determined that the lottery has been won if it is either "or" high speed flashing (red) ". If at least one of the lottery process of holding change or the lottery process of holding change 2 selects the lottery result, the process proceeds to step S1211, and both the lottery results of the lottery process 1 of holding change and the lottery process 2 of holding change “No change”, that is, in the case of non-winning, the processing proceeds to step S1215 without executing steps S1211 and S1213 described later.

  In step S1211 subsequent to step S1209, the number of executions of the pre-reading advance notice is set. The number of executions of the advance notice before notification is set on the basis of the number of to-be-held special views. When the first secondary control unit 400 is won in the lottery process 1 or 2 for holding change, the first subsidiary control unit 400 acquires the number-of-holdings information included in the prefetch result information command sent from the main control unit 300 and provides it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 It stores in the pre-reading advance notice execution frequency storage section. If the special view type included in the prefetch result information command is the special view 2, the same number as the number of pending in the special view 2 included in the command is stored in the prefetch notice execution frequency storage unit and included in the prefetch result information command When the special drawing type to be executed is the special drawing 1, the same number as the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 included in the command is stored in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit. For example, the lottery process 1 and 2 (steps S1205 and S1207) of the hold change is executed for the second hold of the special drawing 1 (the special view type of the prefetch result information command is "1" and the hold number information is "2") In this case, the first secondary control unit 400 sets “2” as the prefetch notice execution count in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit of the RAM 408. In addition, the lottery process 1 and 2 (Steps S1205 and S1207) of the hold change is executed for the third hold of the special view 2 (the special view type of the prefetch result information command is "2" and the hold number information is "3") In this case, the first secondary control unit 400 sets “3” in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit of the RAM 408 as the prefetch notice execution count. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the hold display image as many as the number of prefetch notice execution times based on the winning contents of the hold change lottery.

  In step S1213 subsequent to step S1211, the first secondary control unit 400 sets the prefetching in progress flag stored in the RAM 408 to the on state, to indicate that the prefetch notice notification effect is being executed. The first sub-control unit 400 sets, for example, “1” as a value of the flag to a predetermined value in order to set the flag in advance of pre-reading advance notice in progress indicating that whether pre-reading advance notice is being executed. Store in the area. As a result, the pre-reading advance notice is set during execution. When the first preliminary control notification is not in execution of the preliminary announcement notice, the first secondary control unit 400 stores “0” as a value of the flag in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and turns the preliminary announcement execution flag off. Set to state. If the first preliminary control unit 400 sets the pre-reading advance notice executing flag to the on state, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1215 following step S1213, the output process of the hold command based on the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the hold change is executed. When the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the holding change is not winning, the first sub control unit 400 decorates the holding command including the information for setting the holding display image according to the winning start information as the default display of "no change". It is output to the symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information is ended. As a result, the suspension display image according to the display mode of the circular suspension display filled in a predetermined color is displayed at a predetermined location of the special view 1 and the special view 2 suspension display region 208d1 and d2 of the effect display region 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of holding change is winning, the first sub-control unit 400 holds "Holding A" or "Holding" based on the holding change lottery result on the holding display image according to the winning start information. The suspension command including information on the suspension display mode corresponding to any one of “B” and the number of suspension information is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control prefetching notice execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information is ended. . Thereby, the special display 1 and the special drawing of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the holding display image according to the display mode of either "Hold A" of "bad merchant Echigoya" or "Hold B" of "Yoshimune" [2] Displayed in a predetermined place of the hold display area 208d1 and d2.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 executes the output processing of the hold command based on the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the hold change. When the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the holding change is not selected, a holding command including information to make the lighting state of the board lamps 224a and 224b the default state of "no change" is outputted to the board lamps 224a and 224b The first secondary control unit prefetching notice execution processing at the time of information acquisition is ended. As a result, the panel lamps 224a and 224b emit light in the default display mode.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the holding change is a win, the first sub-control unit 400 "lights (blue)", "flickers (blue)", or "rapidly blinks" the lighting state of the board lamp 224a. (Red) ”is output to the panel lamp 224a, and a predetermined lighting mode corresponding to the suspension command of the panel lamp 224a is specified and output to the panel lamp 224b to obtain start information The first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process ends. As a result, the board lamp 224a lights in the lighting mode of "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" or "high speed flashing (red)", and the board lamp 224b emits light in a predetermined lighting mode in synchronization therewith. .

  According to the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins both the lottery process 1 (step S1205) for the hold change and the lottery process 2 (step S1207) for the hold change, the special view in the main control unit 300 Notification of the information on the number of reservations can be made at three locations including one of the one suspension lamp 218 and the special view 2 suspension lamp 220. By doing this, since it is possible to notify three or more places to one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be able to be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information.

  In this embodiment, the lottery process 1 of the pending change in step S1205 and the lottery process 2 of the pending change in step S1207 are performed independently of each other, but for example, the lottery was won in the lottery process 1 of the pending change It is also possible to execute the lottery process 2 of the hold change only in the case of the hold change. Further, the lottery process 2 of the pending change may be executed first, and the lottery process 1 of the pending change may be executed only when the lottery is won in the lottery process 2.

  Next, first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the start of the special figure variation game will be described using FIG. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of first sub-control unit prefetching notice execution processing at the start of the special view fluctuation game performed in, for example, the effect control processing (step S309) shown in FIG. This processing is executed once for one special figure changing game.

  As shown in FIG. 394, in the first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the start of the special figure change game, it is first judged whether the prefetch notice in progress flag is in the on state (step S1301). For example, the first secondary control unit 400 reads out the value of the flag under execution of pre-reading notice stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value is “1”, the flag under execution of pre-reading notice is in the on state The process proceeds to step S1303. If the value is “0”, it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice in progress flag is off, and step S1301 to step S1309 which will be described later are not executed. Migrate to

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, either “hold A” or “hold B” is won in the hold change lottery process 1 in step S1205, or “light (blue)”, “on” in the hold change lottery process 2 in step S1207. When the player wins "flashing (blue)" or "high speed flashing (red)" (Yes in step S1209), the number of prefetch notice execution times is set (step S1211), and the prefetching in-progress flag is set to on ( Step S1213).

  In step S1303, the first secondary control unit 400 reduces the number of prefetch notice execution times by “1”. For example, the first sub control unit 400 reads the value of the number of prefetch execution times stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, subtracts “1” from the read value, and proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, it is determined whether or not the number of prefetch notice execution times decremented by “1” in step S1303 is “0”. For example, when the first secondary control unit 400 stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of prefetch notice execution times in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and determines that the number of prefetch notice execution times after subtraction is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1307 If it is determined that the number of pre-read advance notice execution times after subtraction is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1307 following step S1305, output processing of a change command according to the type of notice is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for which the on-hold display mode is normally on hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. As a result, the panel lamps 224a and 224b perform lighting display in a normal display mode that is neither "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)", or "fast blinking (red)".

  In step S1309 following step S1307, a flag is set to the OFF state during pre-reading advance notice execution. For example, the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets the flag in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0” in order to indicate that the prefetch notice notification has been finished by setting the prefetch notice in progress flag to the OFF state and indicating that the prefetch notice notification has ended. Is stored, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, a lottery process for normal notice is executed, and the first sub control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  Next, the normal notice lottery process in step S1311 of the first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game shown in FIG. 394 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In step S1401, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233) of the main control unit 300 has a predetermined time. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation time. The predetermined fluctuation time of the present embodiment is six of 10000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms and 65000 ms. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command is the predetermined fluctuation time, the process proceeds to step S1403, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not the predetermined fluctuation time, the normal advance lottery process is ended. .

  In step S1403, the notice lottery 1 is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires the random number value for holding change lottery from the random number counter for holding change lottery provided, for example, in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. Get one of the lottery results for "with buttons".

  More specifically, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided in the random selection table 1 shown in FIG. 382 read from the ROM 406 and the RAM 408, and the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300. The notice lottery 1 process is executed using the first random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained from the first random number value counter for normal notice execution determination. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 1 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1405 following step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether the lottery result of the advance lottery 1 process is "type with button", and if it is determined not to be "type with button", the process proceeds to step S1407. If it is determined that the system is in the "button system", the process proceeds to step S1409.

  If it is determined that the type is not "type with button" and the process proceeds to step S1407, the notice lottery 2 is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires the second random number value for normal advance notice determination from the second random number value counter for normal notice execution determination, for example, provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The lottery result of any one of "none", "character A", "character B", or "character C (for sure)" is obtained.

  More specifically, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided in the random selection table 2 shown in FIG. 383 read from the ROM 406 and the RAM 408, and the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300. The advance notice lottery 2 process is executed using the normal random number for executing the preliminary judgment 2nd random number value acquired from the second random number value counter for normal forecoming performance judgment. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 2 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  If it is determined that it is a "button present system" and the process proceeds to step S1409, the notice lottery 3 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the third random number for normal advance notice determination from the third random number counter for normal notice execution decision, for example, provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The lottery result of any one of "none", "character A", "character B", or "character C (for sure)" is obtained.

  More specifically, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided in the random selection table 3 shown in FIG. An advance notice lottery 3 process is executed using the third random number for regular announcement execution judgment acquired from the third random number value counter for regular announcement execution judgment. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 3 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1411 following step S1409, the notice lottery 4 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the fourth random number value for normal advance notice determination from the fourth random number value counter for normal notice execution decision, for example, provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. "Normal / Normal", "Normal / Vibration", "Normal / Vibration + Rotation", "Vibration / Normal", "Vibration / Vibration", "Vibration + Rotation / Vibration", or "Deca Button Display / Vibration + Rotation" Get any lottery result.

  More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the result of the notice lottery 3, the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 386 read from the ROM 406, and the fourth random number value counter for the regular notice execution judgment provided in the RAM 408. The notice lottery 4 process is executed using the fourth random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained from the above. Further, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 4 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  When the advance notice lottery 2 process in step S1407 or the advance notice lottery 4 process in step S1411 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1413. In step S1413, it is determined whether the variation time of the special figure variation game is equal to the variation time including the normal reach effect (in this example, "10000 ms" and "15000 ms"). This judgment does not give a notice after reach when normal reach effect is executed, since normal reach effect can not execute cut-in notice after start of reach effect because the effect execution time is shorter than other reach effects. To handle. Therefore, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game is a fluctuation time including normal reach effect, the normal notice lottery processing is ended, and when it is judged that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game is not a fluctuation time including normal reach effect The processing moves to step S1415 where processing is performed.

  In step S1415, the notice lottery 5 is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires a display mode / button mode determination random number value from, for example, a display mode / button mode determination random number counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. , “Chara D”, “Chara E”, or “Chara F (to be sure)” lottery results are obtained.

  More specifically, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided in the random selection table 5 shown in FIG. 389 read from the ROM 406 and the RAM 408, and the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300. The notice lottery 5 processing is executed using the after-reach notice execution determination random number value acquired from the after-reach notice execution determination random number value counter. In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance lottery 5 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. After the processing in step S1415 is executed, the normal notice lottery processing is ended.

  Next, the game effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be more specifically described with reference to FIGS. 396 to 408. In each of FIGS. 396 to 408, the decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 and the board lamps 224 (224a and 224b) are shown, FIG. 1 shows a display 212, a special view 2 display 214, a special view 1 reserve lamp 218 and a special view 2 reserve lamp 220. First, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 396 to 398. FIG. FIGS. 396 (a) to 398 (c) show, in this order, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  In FIG. 396 (a), the "special figure I" of the first out-of-space symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214. Further, three LEDs are turned on in the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, which indicates that there are three reservations in the special figure 1. The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off, indicating that no special figure 2 is reserved. "Decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special-pattern variation game is out. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at the present time is a non-power support state which is not a power support state, and is a special figure low probability state.

  A special view 1 reservation display area 208d1 is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special view 1 reserve display area 208d1 notifies the player of the number of special figure 1 random number value pairs stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area as the special figure 1 reserve number (special figure 1 start information reserve number) It is possible. Since three special figure 1 fluctuation games are reserved at the time shown in FIG. 396 (a), the suspension display image corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game reserved for the first one in the special figure 1 suspension display area 208d1. a1 is displayed, the hold display image a2 corresponding to the second drawing of the special drawing 1 floating game is displayed, and the third holding display image a3 corresponding to the special drawing 1 floating game is displayed. It is notified that three special figure 1 fluctuation games are suspended. The hold display images a1 to a3 are all the display modes of normal hold shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  In the lower right of the effect display area 208d, a special figure 2 reserve display area 208d2 is provided to display a reserve related to the special figure 2 change game. The special view reserve display area 208d2 has the same function as that of the special view 1 reserve display area 208d1 except for displaying the special view 2 change game reserve, so detailed description will be omitted. In the present example, the special view 2 change game is not held, so no hold display image is displayed in the special view 2 hold display area 208 d 2.

  The board surface lamps 224a and 224b are normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure from the end of the special figure variation game as shown in FIG. 396 (a) to the start of the next special figure variation game. Lighting or blinking is performed. In this example, the normal effect with the board surface lamp 224a is executed in a lighting mode in which the odd-numbered and the even-numbered ones of the ten circular lamps blink alternately. Further, the normal effect with the board surface lamp 224b is performed in a lighting mode in which the upper two and lower two groups of the four petal shaped lamps are alternately blinked.

  As shown in FIG. 396 (a), it is shown in FIG. 396 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 396 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of determination of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the variation time of special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212, turns on the LED lighting of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes the result of the success / failure determination and the special view change time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In Fig. 396 (b) and the subsequent figures, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display device 212, 214 in the special figure variation game is the center horizontal line of the seven segments shown in the special figure 1 display device 212 of Fig. 396 (b). Indicates that special symbol pattern variation is being performed with a black bar and other white displays.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is off (No in step S1301), and shifts to the normal notice lottery processing (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal advance notice effect is not to be executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 396 (b), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information that the number of reserved special views 1 decreases by 1, as shown in FIG. 396 (b), the pending display image a3 is erased and two are displayed. The hold display image a1, a2 of the normal hold display mode of the normal hold.

  As shown in FIG. 396 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view variation game (for example, after 8000 ms time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display), the special view 1 display device 212 is “Special figure I” is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off. Is notified.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIGS. 396 (b) to (c), the panel lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 396 (c), shown in FIG. 396 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208 b, 208 c As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 396 (d), the same process as the process executed prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 396 (b) described above is executed.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the first set of special figure 1 random number values and executes the yes / no decision regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation game, for example, the good or bad decision result is removed (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure The variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212, turns on the LED lighting of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes the result of the success / failure determination and the special view change time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is off (No in step S1301), and shifts to the normal notice lottery processing (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal advance notice effect is not to be executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 396 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information that the number of reserved special views 1 decreases by 1, as shown in FIG. Only the hold display image a1 of the hold display mode of normal hold is displayed.

  When one gaming ball wins the special view 1 start port 230 during the special view 1 change game, the following process is executed during the execution of the special view change game. The main control unit 300 turns on two of the four LEDs of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 in the special view 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Indicates that there are two pending. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special view prefetching process shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 for the derived special view 1 start information. The main control unit 300 first determines that the current gaming state is not in the power support mode (No in step S1000), and then determines that it is a winning on the special view 1 start port 230 (Yes in step S1101). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it refers to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 375 (b) and determines that the preliminary determination result is out (No in step S1103, No in step S1107), FIG. Refer to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a) and determine the stop symbol as, for example, “special figure I” (step S1111), and refer to the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined as, for example, 40000 ms (step S1113), and the special drawing prefetch process is ended. The command (pre-read command) including the information of the preliminary determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the preliminary determination results executes the first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information shown in FIG. For example, the first secondary control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-progress flag is in the off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 40000 ms, and thus corresponds to a predetermined variation time. It judges (step S1203), executes lottery processing 1 of suspension change with reference to the suspension change lottery table shown in FIG. 379, and determines that “retention A” is won (step S1205), the board lamp shown in FIG. 381 With reference to the pre-reading lottery table, the lottery process 2 of the pending change is executed and it is determined that "no change" is selected (step S1207). Furthermore, since "pending A" is won, one lottery is selected. It is determined that the player has won (step S1209), and "2" is set as the number of prefetch notice execution times (step S1211), and the prefetch in progress flag is set to the on state. (Step S1213), and outputs the read-ahead notice command including a display mode of the hold display image a2 decorative pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 396 (e), the hold display image a2 is a hold display area 208d1 with a character image representing "the evil merchant, Echigoya" in the display mode corresponding to "hold A" shown in FIG. 380 (b). Is displayed on. In addition, since "no change" is selected in the lottery process 2 of the hold change, the panel lamps 224a and 224b are shown in FIG. 396 (b) to (c) while FIG. 396 (e) to FIG. 398 (c) are shown. As in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in), lighting, blinking and the like are executed by normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 396 (f) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view 1 variation game, "special view I" is stopped and displayed on the special view 1 display device 212 and the left middle right symbol display area 208a , 208b, and 208c, "decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  As shown in FIG. 396 (f), the display of FIG. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 397 (a), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of judgment of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the fluctuation time of special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 10000ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212 and transmits a command including the information on the result of determination of success or failure and the special view change time to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, main controller 300 turns on one of four LEDs of special view 1 suspension lamp 218 in the special view 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Indicates that 1 has been suspended.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 2), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the current prefetch advance notice execution number (= 1) is 0 or not, and it is determined that the prefetch advance notice execution frequency is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal advance lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 floating game is 10000 ms, and thus determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time, and executes the advance lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 executes a notice lottery 1 process of selecting the presence / absence of use of the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In this example, "no button system" is selected. In the case of a non-button system (No in step S1405), the first sub control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 2 process (step S1407). In step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 383 and executes a lottery for notice before reaching. In the present example, "none" is selected. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that it is the normal reach fluctuation time (No in step S1413) since the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation game is 10000 ms (No in step S1413). 5 The normal notice lottery process is ended without executing the process.

  With the above processing, in the special figure 1 variable game, reach effect of normal reach is executed, and neither pre-reach advance notice effect nor post-reach notice effect prior to the normal reach effect is performed.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 397 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of special drawing 1 reservations is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. 397 (a), the holding display image a2 is erased and the holding A The hold display image a1 is displayed.

  FIG. 397 (b) shows a state in which reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 change game. The reach type in this example is normal reach, and "decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 397 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view variation game (for example, after 10000 ms has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display), the special view 1 display device 212 "I" is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is released. It is informed.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in FIGS. 397 (a) to (c), the board lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 397 (c), it is shown in FIG. 3 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 397 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of judgment of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 40000ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game on the special view 1 display device 212 and turns off all the LEDs of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes a command including judgment result and special view change time information. Are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching execution flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 1), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the number of prefetch advance notice execution times (= 0) at the current time is 0 or not, and it is determined that the number of prefetch notice execution times is 0 (Yes in step S1305). Output processing of change command according to the type of notice. Run. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for which the on-hold display mode is normally on hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Furthermore, the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets the flag in advance of preview advance notice to the off state (step S1309), and shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal advance notice lottery process, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 change game is 40000 ms, and thus determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time, and executes the advance notice lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 executes a notice lottery 1 process of selecting the presence / absence of use of the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the present example, a "with button" system is selected. In the case of a system with a button (Yes at step S1405), the first sub control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 3 process (step S1409). In step S1409, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 384 and executes a lottery for notice before the reach. In the present example, "character A" is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 386 and executes a lottery regarding the button mode and display mode of the chance button 136 in advance notice before reaching. In this example, “normal / normal” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special view 1 variation game is 40000 ms, and therefore determines that it is not the normal reach but the variation time of reach A (Yes in step S1413). The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 389 and executes a lottery for notice after reaching. In the present example, "character D" is selected.

  By the above processing, in the special figure 1 fluctuation game, reach production of reach A is executed, and prior to the reach A production, a notice presentation before reach of “system with button” is performed. Here, with regard to the presentation of “the system with a button”, the presentation of “normal / normal” in “display mode / button mode” is performed for the chance button 136, and the presentation by “character A” is subsequently performed. Also, following the reach A effect, a notice effect after reach by "Chara D" is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 397 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reserved special views 1 is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. The hold display image is not displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  FIG. 397 (e) schematically shows the chance button 136 at the lower right of the figure in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 397 (d). FIG. 397 (e) shows a state in which an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 as the pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG. 388 (a), and the display mode of the operation request image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 Is also “normal” shown in FIG. 387 (a).

  FIG. 397 (f) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 and "Chara A" of the pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player schematically shows a state where the finger of the player is placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 398 (a) shows a state in which reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The reach type in this example is reach A, "decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 398 (b) shows a state in which "Chara D" is displayed as the after-reach advance notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 398 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 variation game was started (after 40000 ms have passed since the symbol variation display was started), the special figure 1 display device 212 The special figure I is stopped and displayed, and "decorative 8-decorative 7-decorative 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is an off Is notified.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in FIGS. 398 (a) to (c), the panel lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 399 to 400. FIG. FIGS. 399 (a) to 400 (f) show, in this order, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 399 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being performed. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at the present time is a non-power support state which is not a power support state, and is a special figure low probability state.

  In FIG. 399 (a), the special view 1 display device 212 starts variable display, and the special view 2 display device 214 stops and displays the first special symbol “special view I”. In addition, one LED is turned on in the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, which indicates that there is one reserve of the special view 1. The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off, indicating that no special figure 2 is reserved. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game, processing similar to the process executed prior to the start of the special view 1 change game described in the first embodiment is executed.

  The main control unit 300 acquires the set of the first special figure 1 random number values and executes the determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. For example, this success or failure determination result is out (for example, the stop symbol is "special figure I"), the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212 and transmits a command including the information on the result of determination of success or failure and the special view change time to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is off (No in step S1301), and shifts to the normal notice lottery processing (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal advance notice effect is not to be executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  In addition, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information of the special drawing 1 hold count, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), a hold display image of a hold display mode of one normal hold Display a1.

  When one gaming ball wins the special view 1 start port 230 during the special view 1 change game, the following process is executed during the execution of the special view change game. The main control unit 300 turns on two of the four LEDs of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 in the special view 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Indicates that there are two pending. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special view prefetching process shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 for the derived special view 1 start information. The main control unit 300 first determines that the current gaming state is not in the power support mode (No in step S1000), and then determines that it is a winning on the special view 1 start port 230 (Yes in step S1101). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it refers to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 375 (b) and determines that the prior determination result is a hit (No in step S1103 and No in step S1107), FIG. Refer to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a) and determine the stop symbol as, for example, "special figure A" (step S1111), and refer to the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined as, for example, 45000 ms (step S1113), and the special view prefetching process is ended. The command (pre-read command) including the information of the preliminary determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command including the information on the preliminary determination results executes the first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information shown in FIG. For example, the first secondary control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-progress flag is in the off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special view 1 variation game is 45000 ms, which corresponds to a predetermined variation time. It judges (step S1203), executes lottery processing 1 of suspension change with reference to the suspension change lottery table shown in FIG. 379, and determines that it is elected as “retention B” (step S1205), the board lamp shown in FIG. The lottery process 2 of holding change is executed with reference to the pre-reading lottery table, and it is determined that "lighting (blue)" is selected (step S1207), and "hold B" and "lighting (blue)" are won. Therefore, it is determined that any lottery has been won (step S1209), and "2" is set as the number of prefetch notice execution times (step S1211), and prefetching is executed. Flag the ON state (step S1213), the look-ahead warning command including a display mode of the display mode and the board lamp 224 of the hold display image a2 and outputs the decoration pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 399 (b), the hold display image a2 is displayed in the hold display area 208d1 with a character image representing "Yoshimune" of the display mode corresponding to "hold B" shown in FIG. 380 (b). Be done. In addition, since “lighting (blue)” is selected in the lottery process 2 of the holding change, the board lamp 224a is displayed during two consecutive special figure fluctuation games shown in FIG. 399 (b) to FIG. 399 (e). All the ten circular lamps corresponding to "lighting (blue)" are lighted in blue, and pre-reading notice effect is performed. In addition, in synchronization with the pre-reading advance notice effect of the board surface lamp 224a, the board surface lamp 224b sequentially turns on the two petal-like lamps for the number of pending objects from the lower side to notify the number of pending items, and The second petal shaped lamp is turned on with a specific luminescent color to give the player a sense of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 399 (c) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure 1 change game, the special figure 1 display device 212 displays "special figure I" in a stop state and the left middle right symbol display area 208a , 208 b and 208 c, “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special view 1 fluctuation game is out.

  As shown in FIG. 399 (c), shown in FIG. 399 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 399 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of determination of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the variation time of special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game on the special view 1 display device 212, turns on the LED of the special view 1 hold lamp 218 to one, and further determines the result of the success / failure determination and the special view change time. The command to be included is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 2), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the current prefetch advance notice execution number (= 1) is 0 or not, and it is determined that the prefetch advance notice execution frequency is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 8000 ms, and thus determines that it does not correspond to the predetermined fluctuation time, and ends the normal notice lottery process.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 399 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reserved special views 1 is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. 399 (d), the pending display image a2 is erased and the pending B is The hold display image a1 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 399 (e), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view 1 change game, as shown in FIG. 399 (e), for example, “ "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed, and "decorative 0-decorative 7-decorative 6" is halted and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game concerned is an off Is notified.

  During the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in FIGS. 399 (b) to (e), the preview lamp is executed by lighting control according to the rendering procedure of “lighting (blue)”. In synchronization with the lighting control of the board lamp 224a, in the board lamp 224b, the number of petal pattern lamps that are equal to the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 are lit, and the petal pattern lamp showing suspension for preliminary notice Light.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 as notification means capable of notifying the information of the number of reservations as game information regarding the game are provided, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit With the control of 400, with respect to the information of the number of reservations, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the display mode in the special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the board lamp 224b. Notification of the number of reservations can be performed at three locations. According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places for one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information. Note that the notification means may be a single effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, as a plurality of effect means that can at least execute effects relating to the game, for example, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board surface lamps 224a, 224b, and decorative symbol display device 208 are provided. As a rendering means, for example, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp 224, and the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 can be used to notify of the information on the number of reservations at three or more locations. As described above, notification may be made noticeable by notifying using a plurality of effect means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control means capable of executing at least a main control unit timer interrupt process, which is control processing relating to a game, and the special control, for example, sent from the main control unit 300 A first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control means capable of executing at least a first sub-control main process which is a control process related to a game upon receiving a command and a pre-reading result information command is provided. Then, the special view 1 holding lamp 218 as at least one of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main control unit 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 controlled by the main control unit 300 and having high reliability of the information of the number of holdings is used for one of the plurality of effect means.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 reserve of the decorative symbol display device 208 among the notification of the number of reservations to be executed at the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 Notification of the number of reservations by at least two by turning on the display area 208d1 and the board surface lamp 224b is performed, for example, including at least the same period such as a period from increase of the number of reservations to decrease of the number of reservations. According to the present embodiment, the interest of the game may be improved by executing at least two notice effects during the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of effect means is the decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute notification of the number of holdings as at least one notification. According to this embodiment, it may be possible to execute notification at a portion where the player is most likely to look at.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game information is a start hold display indicating the number of holds of the symbol variation display. A plurality of effect means are provided with a special figure 1 hold lamp 218 as a hold display means indicating the number of hold times and board lamps 224a and 224b as lamp notification means, and notification by start hold display is a hold display means At least three of the display means and the lamp notification means can be implemented.

  According to the present embodiment, the symbol variation display is an important effect of informing the player whether or not the jackpot advantageous to the player is given, and the number of pending of the important effect is notified to the player in a plurality of places so as to be easy to understand There is a possibility.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least one notification of the notification by the start suspension display can be functioned as a prefetch notice. According to this embodiment, there may be a case where reliable notification can be performed while raising the expectation to the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 399 (e), shown in FIG. 399 (f) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208 b, 208 c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 399 (f), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of success or failure determination is hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure A”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game on the special view 1 display device 212 and turns off all the LEDs of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes a command including judgment result and special view change time information. Are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching execution flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 1), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the number of prefetch advance notice execution times (= 0) at the current time is 0 or not, and it is determined that the number of prefetch notice execution times is 0 (Yes in step S1305). Output processing of change command according to the type of notice. Run. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for which the on-hold display mode is normally on hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Furthermore, the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets the flag in advance of preview advance notice to the off state (step S1309), and shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 change game is 45000 ms, and thus determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time, and executes the notice lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 executes a notice lottery 1 process of selecting the presence / absence of use of the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the present example, a "with button" system is selected. In the case of a system with a button (Yes at step S1405), the first sub control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 3 process (step S1409). In step S1409, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 384 and executes a lottery for notice before the reach. In the present example, "character B" is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 386 and executes a lottery regarding the button mode and display mode of the chance button 136 in advance notice before reaching. In this example, “vibration + rotation / vibration” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special view 1 variation game is 45000 ms, and thus determines that it is not the normal reach but the variation time of reach A (Yes in step S1413). The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 389 and executes a lottery for notice after reaching. In the present example, "character F" is selected.

  By the above processing, in the special figure 1 fluctuation game, reach production of reach A is executed, and prior to the reach A production, a notice presentation before reach of “system with button” is performed. Here, the effect of “system with button” is the effect of “display mode / button mode” being “vibration + rotation / vibration” for the chance button 136, and the effect by “character B” is subsequently performed. Also, following the reach A effect, a notice effect after reach by "Chara F" is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 399 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. 399 (f), the reservation display image a1 is erased and the special drawing is performed. The hold display image is not displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  A diagram 400 (a) schematically shows a chance button 136 at the lower right of the diagram in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 399 (f). FIG. 400 (a) shows a state in which an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 as the pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed is “vibration” shown in FIG. 388 (b), and the display mode of the operation request image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 Is “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 387 (c).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 including the chance button 136 as the operation means and the image display means, for example, the decorative symbol display device The effect means includes an effect button (chance button 136) as an operation means operable by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 requests an operation request image for requesting a press operation of the chance button 136. The image of the chance button 136 can be displayed, and the operation request image includes an image of the shape of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 can be identified, and the operation request image is a display of the operation request image A display mode (in the present example, “shake”) different from the button mode (in the present example, “vibration”) of the chance button 136 in + Can be displayed in rotation ").

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation request image display different from the appearance is performed on the rendering means, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there are cases where it can be made to pay attention to the rendering means. In addition, the operation request image may be able to function as a notice or a notice. Further, even when the image display is simplified, it may be possible to convey necessary information to the player.

  FIG. 400 (b) shows a state in which the display effect by the “character B” of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed in the effect display area 208d in relation to the player pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG. 400 (c) shows a state in which reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 change game. The reach type in this example is reach A, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 400 (d) shows a state in which "Chara F" is displayed as the after-reach notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 400 (e), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 change game was started (after 45000 ms have elapsed since the start of the symbol change display), the special view 1 display device 212 "Special 7 A" is stopped and displayed, and "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208 b, 208 c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit Is notified.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 399 (f) to FIG. 400 (e), the board lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked by the normal lighting control according to the predetermined rendering procedure. .

  FIG. 400 (f) shows a state where an effect of notifying that the jackpot has been won is performed. A big hit effect is started in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit effect in which all the lamps are lit at the maximum brightness is performed on the panel lamp 224a and the panel lamp 224b.

  Next, the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 401 (a)-FIG. 401 (e) have shown the big hit start production in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example in time series in this order. FIGS. 401 (a) to 401 (e) schematically show the status notification lamp 222 in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 396 and the like. FIGS. 401 (a) to 401 (d) show an example of a big hit start effect to be performed before the 1R (first round) of the big hit game is started by winning the big hit as a result of the special figure fluctuation game . Although illustration is omitted, prior to the start of this jackpot start effect, processing for a right-handed command is executed.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, it controls the drive circuit 330 after the special figure fluctuation game ends, and among the state notification lamps 222, the right-handed lamp and the big hit medium lamp Lights up, and turns off the non-electric support lamp and the electric support lamp. Next, the information on the status notification lamp 222 is included in the big hit start command and the command is sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the command from the main control unit 300 performs an image simulating the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first sub control unit main processing. And an image showing that the player's hand is turning the ball firing handle 134 to the right, an arrow indicating that the gaming ball should fly to the right, and a character string of “right strike”. Control processing of

  Further, in the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the light emission luminances of the ten circular lamps of the panel lamp 224a from the top to the bottom. For example, the emission brightness of the first and second top circular lamps is made higher than that of the remaining circular lamps, and then the emission brightness of the third to fifth circular lamps is higher than that of the remaining circular lamps. Make the luminous intensity of the sixth to eighth circular lamps higher than that of the remaining circular lamps, then increase the luminous brightness of the ninth and tenth circular lamps to that of the remaining circular lamps. Control is made to be higher than the luminance. In addition, in the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the light emission luminances of the four petal-like lamps of the board surface lamp 224b from the top to the bottom.

  When the above processing is completed, the gradation control is performed so that a group of circular lamps are sequentially moved from the upper side to the lower side by the board surface lamp 224a during the big hit start effect shown in FIGS. 401 (a) to (d). To make a right-handed notification that the light is viewed as flowing down along the right-handed direction. In addition, a right-handed notification is provided by the board lamp 224b so that the petals may flow and fall along the right-handed direction. Further, notification of a right-handed instruction is also performed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, under the control of the main control unit 300, the right-handed lamp is turned on also in the status display lamp 222, and right-handed notification is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 as notification means capable of notifying the right-handed information as the game information regarding the game are provided, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit With control of 400, with respect to right-handed information, the lighting mode of the status display lamp 222, the display mode in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b Right-handed notification can be performed. According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places for one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information. Note that the notification means may be a single effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a plurality of effect means capable of at least executing effects relating to a game, for example, a state display lamp 222, board surface lamps 224a and 224b, and a decorative symbol display device 208 are provided. As, for example, using a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp 224, and the status display lamp 222, notification of right-handed information can be performed at three or more locations. As described above, notification may be made noticeable by notifying using a plurality of effect means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control means capable of executing at least a main control unit timer interrupt process which is control processing relating to a game, and a big hit start command etc. sent from the main control unit 300. And a first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control means capable of executing at least a first sub-control unit main process that is control processing relating to a game. The state display lamp 222 as at least one of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main control unit 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the state display lamp 222 controlled by the main control unit 300 and having high reliability of right-handed information is used as one of the plurality of effect means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least two of the notification of right-handed driving performed at three or more positions of the status display lamp 222, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 at least two by lighting the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Notification of right-handed by is performed for the same period. According to the present embodiment, the interest of the game may be improved by executing at least two notice effects during the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of effect means is the decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute, for example, notification of right-handed as at least one notification. According to this embodiment, it may be possible to execute notification at a portion where the player is most likely to look at.

  FIG. 401 (e) shows the state in which the first round of the big hit game has been started. When the big hit game is started, the right-handed notification at three or more places by the plurality of effect means ends, and the big hit effect of the first round is started. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a display for notifying that the round is 1R is performed together with an effect that the face of the adolescent man wearing the learning cap is displayed. In addition, the display of the "right strike" of the right strike instruction is also performed. Further, the board lamp 224 performs a lighting operation based on the jackpot effect. Further, it is shown that the special figure 2 start opening 232 has won by right-handling and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 has one reserve.

  Next, a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 402 (a) shows an example of effect in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 when a ball or an error occurs during the big hit game. If a ball or an error occurs during the big hit game, a display of "a ball or an error clerk is called" is displayed on the effect display area 208d to notify the ball or the error. Also in this case, the “right-handed” display of the right-handed instruction continues in the effect display area 208d.

  As described above, in this embodiment, an error notification can be performed when a sphere or an error occurs in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, as the effect means of at least a part of the plurality of effect means. Even when an error notification is given, for example, a right-handed instruction can be continued as notification of at least one game information. According to the present embodiment, even if an error notification is made, the information on the notification of the right-handed command remains, so there may be a case where the player can be given a sense of security. The board lamps 224a and 224b light up in an error notification light emission mode corresponding to the error.

  FIG. 402 (b) to 402 (f) show, in this order, effects using the chance button 136 in the big hit game with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the player has a chance button 136 as operation means operable by the player, and a decorative symbol display device 208 as image display means capable of displaying an image, and the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 An operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 can be displayed. The effect display area 208 d can display a plurality of operation request images for the chance button 136, and can perform effects according to a plurality of operations for the player's chance button 136.

  FIG. 402 (b) exemplifies an image in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start time of the effect using the chance button 136. In the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds (= 8), an image of a right-handed instruction, and the face of the adolescent wearing a school cap are displayed, and further, a character string image of “if positive alignment is definite” is displayed. ing.

  Next, FIG. 402 (c) shows a state in which an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 as an effect during a big hit is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 is schematically shown at the lower right of the figure.

  Three operation request images are arranged in the lateral direction. The display mode of the operation request image on the left side and the middle side is “normal” shown in FIG. 387 (a), and the display mode of the operation request image on the right side is “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 387 (c). At the lower part of each operation request image, an effective period image showing an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed. Further, an area for displaying the result of pressing the chance button 136 by the player is provided below each operation request image, and a downward arrow is displayed before the result is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 402 (c), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed is the "normal" shown in FIG. 388 (a).

  FIG. 402 (d) shows a state where the player presses the chance button 136 once and the operation request image on the left side disappears and an image of “o” is displayed below it. As described above, in this embodiment, each time the player presses the chance button 136, the operation request image disappears sequentially from the left. The valid period images of the middle and right operation request images both indicate that a certain amount of time has elapsed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 402 (e), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed is "normal". In addition, the player further presses the chance button 136, and the operation request image on the middle side disappears, and the state of the image of “o” is displayed below it. The valid period image of the operation request image on the right side further indicates that the operation valid period has elapsed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 402 (f), the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed is "vibration + rotation". That is, the button mode changes in accordance with the display mode of the operation request image. Thus, the chance button 136 can operate in a mode in which the operation request image is displayed. Since the operation of the aspect similar to the aspect which the operation request | requirement image shows is possible for the chance button 136, the operation of the chance button 136 may be able to be alert | reported to a player. Further, the player further depresses the chance button 136, and the operation request image on the right side disappears, and a state in which “o” is displayed below the image is shown. Furthermore, a character string of “probable change!” Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d.

  According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to simultaneously execute a plurality of image displays for prompting an operation to one operation means, the interest of the game may be improved. Also, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform at least a plurality of operations. Also, by causing the player to perform a plurality of operations, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

  In the above embodiment, regarding the operation on the operation means of the player, the effective period display image showing one or a plurality of effective periods of operation represents a lapse of time by a display in which the bar portion gradually shortens. Instead, for example, a countdown of numbers may be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the valid period display image is provided for each of the plurality of operation request images. By doing this, it may be possible to inform the player of the effective period for each operation in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in order to avoid complicated display, it is of course possible to display a smaller number (for example, one) of effective periods with respect to a plurality of operation request images.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation valid period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136, and one valid period display image can be displayed for a plurality of operation request images. By doing this, it may be possible to notify that the valid period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136 in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the third operation request image of the plurality of operation request images is "vibration + rotation" and the display mode of the other operation request images on the left side and the middle side is "normal And different. By doing this, the display mode of the operation request image may be able to function as a predetermined advance notice. In this example, the display mode of the third operation request image on the right side functions as a notice of a probability change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, one operation request image is made to disappear in response to one operation of the chance button 136. By doing this, it may be possible to notify the number of remaining operations to be operated by the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in some cases, it may be easy to understand whether or not the operation of the operation means is effective.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation request image which is a display mode different from the other is adapted to correspond to the last operation among the plurality of operations of the chance button 136. By doing this, a display mode different from the others may be able to function as a notice. And, by setting the operation corresponding to the different display mode as the last of a plurality of times, there are cases where it can contribute to causing the player to positively perform the necessary number of operations.

  It should be noted that when the effective period of the operation request image has expired, a predetermined effect may be automatically executed even without pressing the chance button 136.

  Next, the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 403 (a) shows an example in which when seven or more big hit games are seven or more consecutive homes, it is notified in three places as game information that the seven or more consecutive homes are concerned.

  In FIG. 403 (a), a special music for notifying that it is seven or more consecutive units is output from the speaker 120, and in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, notification using a character string of "in eight consecutive units!" Is displayed, and lighting is performed in a special lighting mode informing that the board surface lamp 224b indicates seven or more consecutive homes, and a total of three places are notified that the current big hit game is seven or more consecutive homes . According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places in response to being one or more seven consecutive units, which is one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information. In the effect display area 208d, the current number of consecutive houses is displayed as a number, but with the speaker 120, the board lamp 224, etc., the same effect is executed regardless of the number of consecutive houses with seven or more consecutive suites.

  FIGS. 403 (b) to 403 (d) show modified examples of effects using the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. 402 (c) to 402 (f). In the example shown in FIGS. 402 (c) to 402 (f), each time the player presses the chance button 136, the operation request image disappears in the order of left, middle and right, but in this modification, the player However, after pressing the chance button 136 three times, the three operation request images disappear simultaneously.

  FIG. 403 (b) shows the same state as FIG. 402 (c). FIG. 403 (c) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 three times and the images of "o" are displayed below the operation request image on the middle left and right sides, respectively. FIG. 403 (d) shows a state in which three operation request images disappear simultaneously after the player presses the chance button 136 three times.

  Also according to this modification, since it is possible to simultaneously execute a plurality of image displays for prompting an operation to one operation means, there may be cases where the interest of the game can be improved. Also, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform at least a plurality of operations. Also, by causing the player to perform a plurality of operations, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

  Next, a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 404 (a) shows a modified example of the effect using the operation request image for urging the chance button 136 to be pressed. Although a character string “press more than 5 times!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d, only two operation request images are displayed. In addition, the effective period is not displayed. As described above, the number of pressing requests of the chance button 136 and the number of operation request images do not have to match. As in this example, it may be an extent that the player can recognize that a plurality of operations are required.

  FIG. 404 (b) shows the case where the display mode of the operation request image is “vibration + rotation” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. Thus, the display mode of the operation request image may be more flashy than the button mode of the chance button 136. Further, FIG. 404 (c) shows a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “normal” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. Thus, the display mode of the operation request image may be more plain than the button mode of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 404 (d) shows a case where the display mode of the operation request image is "deca-button display (vibration + rotation)" and the button mode of the chance button 136 is "vibration + rotation". Also in the “display mode / button mode”, the operation request image is included in a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 during display of the operation request image.

  Next, a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 405 (a) shows a state in which one common effective period display image is used for a plurality of operation request images. By doing this, it may be possible to notify that the valid period is common to multiple operations of the chance button 136 in an easy-to-understand manner. As described above, the number of valid period displays does not have to be the same as the number of operation requests. For example, two valid period display images may be displayed for three operation requests. By doing this, the number of display of the effective period may be set in accordance with the display area of the image display means, which contributes to the improvement of the interest to the effect.

  FIG. 405 (b) shows a case where a plurality of operation request images have the same display mode. Of course, such an effect may be used. FIG. 405 (c) shows the case where the pachinko machine 100 has the sub liquid crystal display device 209 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub liquid crystal display device 209 displays “2” indicating the number of reservations. As described above, the number of reservations may be notified at three locations of the special view 1 suspension lamp by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub control, and the sub liquid crystal display device 209.

  Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above embodiment, among the plurality of operation request images, the display mode is different with respect to the operation request image in which the display mode of the last operation request image disappears before that, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, as shown in a), the display mode of the operation request image other than the last operation request image may be different from the display mode of the other operation request image. In FIG. 406A, the second operation request image is displayed in a display mode different from that of the other operation request images.

  FIGS. 406 (b) to 406 (d) show the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment. 397 (d) to 3 (f) of the above embodiment show an example in which one operation request image is displayed to request pressing of the chance button 136 in the symbol variation game, but FIG. 406 (c) shows. As shown, a plurality of operation request images may be displayed during the special figure variation game to perform an effect of requesting pressing of the chance button 136 a plurality of times.

  Further, for example, 10 seconds is set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the operation request image as at least a part of the operation valid period, for example, in the first 5 seconds. The operation request image includes, for example, a display in which the rod-like portion is shortened with the passage of time as the operation request image indicates information on the operation effective period, and the operation period image of the operation request image on the left side and the center side is As shown in FIG. 406 (c), as the first effective period image, for example, the bar portion is blue-displayed, and the effective period image of the operation request image on the left has the rod portion as the second effective period image. The first and second valid period images can be displayed in the same operation valid period, and the first operation request image includes the first valid period image. A second operation requested image may be to include a second validity period image. By doing this, the valid period image may be able to function as a notice.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 407, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification includes a direction key 137 in addition to the chance button 136 as an operation means. The direction key 137 is used when selecting a desired option by a selection effect or the like displayed in the effect display area 208d. FIGS. 407 (a) to 407 (c) according to the modification correspond to FIGS. 397 (d) to 3 (f) of the above embodiment. In the present modification, as shown in FIG. 407 (b), not only the chance button 136 but also the direction key 137 can be used as the operating means. In this example, even when the direction key 137 different from the chance button 136 indicated by the operation request image has a plurality of effect buttons, the operation becomes effective, and display effects are displayed as shown in FIG. 407 (c). To be executed. In this case, depending on the type of the effect button operated, the display effect of "character A" is executed when the chance button 136 is pressed, and when "Chara C" is effect displayed when the direction key 137 is operated. The display effect may be changed, the lottery ratio may be changed, or the display effect itself may be different.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 407 (d), when the direction key 137 is provided in addition to the chance button 136 as the operation means, the effect of using the chance button 136 and the direction key 137 in parallel is also used for the operation request image. May be

  Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 408 (a) shows an image of a right-handed instruction displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 408 (b) shows a simplified image of the image of the right-handed instruction shown in FIG. 407 (a). A horizontally long rectangular frame portion indicating the variable winning opening with the simplified image is displayed in a mode different from the display mode of the variable winning opening 234 shown in the image of the right-handed instruction in FIG. 408 (a).

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 366 to 408. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment,

  A game provided with informing means (for example, an informing control mechanism for informing using at least one effect means) that at least the execution of informing of game information (for example, information on the number of reservations, information on right strike) related to the game Stand,

  The notification means notifies the game information of the same type at three or more locations (for example, when the game information is the number of reservations, the notification of the number of reservations by the special view 1 suspension lamp 218, decoration The number of reservations is notified at a total of three locations of the symbol display device 208 and the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and notification of the number of reservations by the sub liquid crystal display device 209, and three in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is characterized in that at least notification of the number of holdings at a location or more, a combination thereof, and the like can be performed at least.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, notification of three or more places can be made with respect to one of the information regarding the game, so the interest of the game may be able to be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information.
Note that the notification means may be a single effect means or may be a plurality of effect means (2) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  It is equipped with a plurality of effect means (for example, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, board lamp 224a, 224b, decorative symbol display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 209) capable of at least executing effects related to games,

  The notification means can execute notification of the same type of game information at three or more locations using the plurality of effect means (for example, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp, and the special view holding lamp) It is characterized by being.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the notification may be made noticeable by notifying using a plurality of rendering means (3) The pachinko machine 100,

  Main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of at least executing control (e.g., main control unit timer interrupt processing) relating to the progress of the game;

  Sub-control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing control (for example, first sub-control unit main processing) relating to the effects of the game;

  At least one of the plurality of effect means (for example, the special view 1 reserve lamp 218) is controlled by the main control means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the reliability of the information of the rendering means (notification means) controlled by the main control means may be high (4) the pachinko machine 100,

  The notification means is a notification of the same type of game information to be executed at the three or more locations (for example, notification of the number of reservations by special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, board lamp 224a, and decorative symbol display device 208, or 1 At least two notification (for example, the special figure 1 suspension lamp 218 and the number of reservations by the decoration symbol display device 208) of the reservation lamp 218, the decoration symbol display device 208, and notification of the number of reservations by the sub liquid crystal display device 209, etc. Notification, notification of the number of reservations by special display 1 suspension lamp 218 and board lamp 224a, or notification of the number of reservations at two places in the decorative symbol display device 208, etc., for the same period (eg, suspension after increase of the number of reservations) It is characterized in that it is practicable including at least a pre-reading notification period) during the period until the number reduction.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by performing at least two notification effects in the same period, the interest of the game may be improved (5) the pachinko machine 100,

  At least one of the plurality of effect means is an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the notification may be executable at a portion where the player's eyes are most likely to go (6) the pachinko machine 100,

  It is characterized in that it comprises symbol display means capable of at least executing symbol variation display, and the same type of game information is information on the number of holding times regarding the execution of the symbol variation display.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the symbol variation display is an important effect for informing the player whether or not the jackpot advantageous to the player is given, and the number of pending important effects is played at a plurality of places. (7) The pachinko machine 100 described above may be notified in a way that is easy to understand

It is characterized in that at least one of the notification of the number of holding times can be notified as a pre-reading advance notice. According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, there may be cases where reliable notification can be performed while increasing the expectation to the big hit (8) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The notification means can at least execute the error notification using the first rendering means when an error (for example, a ball or an error) occurs.

  The notification means is capable of continuing notification (for example, a right-handed instruction) of the same type of game information using the second effect means even when the error occurs. I assume.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, even if an error notification is made, the information of the notification remains, so that in some cases a sense of security can be given to the player (9) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is ,
A game console provided with a plurality of notification means capable of at least notifying of game information,

  At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a first informing means (for example, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218),

  At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a second informing means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a third informing means (for example, a board lamp 224a),

  The game information is information including at least information related to a game (for example, information on the number of reservations),

  The first notification means can execute at least notification of the first game information (for example, information on the number of reservations) in a first period (for example, one operation valid period among a plurality of operation valid periods). And

  The second notification means is capable of at least executing a notification regarding the first game information in a second period (for example, one operation valid period of a plurality of operation valid periods),

The third informing means is capable of at least executing informing about the first game information in a third period (for example, one operation valid period among a plurality of operation valid periods),
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The first period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The second period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
(10) A pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and image display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least displaying an image;
Rendering means capable of at least performing rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,

  The image display means can display at least a first image (for example, an operation request image);

  The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means,

The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect (for example, effect for displaying a predetermined image (eg, a character or the like) at each operation) according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since it is possible to simultaneously execute a plurality of image displays for prompting an operation to one operation means, the interest of the game may be improved. Also, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform at least a plurality of operations. Also, by causing the player to perform a plurality of operations, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand (11) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, a display image for a valid period),

  The second image is an image including at least an image (for example, a display for shortening a bar, a countdown of numbers, etc.) indicating an operation valid period of the operation means,

The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or more of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
(12) The above pachinko machine 100, characterized in that

The image display means can display one of the second images with respect to one of the first images.
A game stand characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player may be able to easily notify the player of the effective period for each operation (13) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,

  The image display means is capable of displaying one of the second images when a plurality of first images (for example, a display prompting to press a plurality of chance buttons) is displayed. It features.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, in some cases, it may be possible to easily notify that the effective period is common to a plurality of operations of the operation means (14) the pachinko machine 100,

(15) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention is characterized in that the image display means can display one of the first images in response to an operation request of the operation means at one time.

  The image display means is characterized in that the first image can be erased in response to one operation of the operation means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where it is possible to easily notify the remaining number of operations that the player should operate. Moreover, it may be easy to understand whether or not the operation of the operation means is effective (16) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The image display means may display at least one display mode (for example, vibration on the chance button) of the plurality of first images (for example, a display prompting pressing of the plurality of chance buttons). It is characterized in that it can be displayed at least in a display mode different from the display mode of the image (for example, no vibration on the chance button).

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the display mode of the operation request image may be able to function as a notice (17) in the pachinko machine 100,

  The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operation means.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, a display mode different from the others may be able to function as a notice. Then, by setting the operation corresponding to the different display mode as the last of a plurality of times, it may be possible to contribute to causing the player to actively perform the necessary number of operations (18) according to the present embodiment Pachinko machine 100 is

  Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

An image display means capable of displaying at least an image (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208); and an effect means capable of at least performing an effect in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) ,
A game console equipped with

  The operation means is at least capable of taking a first state (e.g., a button mode in which the chance button 136 is neither vibrating nor rotating)

  The operation means is at least capable of taking a second state (for example, a display mode in which the chance button 136 is both vibrating and rotating),

  The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the operation means is different,

  The image display means can display at least a first image (for example, an operation request image requesting an operation of the operation means),

  The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate (for example, an operation request period),

  The first image is an image including at least an image that can indicate that the operation means is in the first state (for example, the same display mode as a button mode in the first state),

  The image display means can display at least a second image (for example, an operation request image requesting an operation of the operation means),

  The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate.

  The second image is an image including at least an image (for example, the same display mode as the button mode in the second state) capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the second state,

  When the first condition (for example, one lottery result in the notice lottery 4 in step S1141 of the normal notice lottery processing shown in FIG. 395) is satisfied when the operation means is in the first state. Is capable of displaying at least the first image,

When the second condition (for example, another lottery result in the notice lottery 4 in step S1141 of the normal notice lottery processing shown in FIG. 395) is satisfied when the operation means is in the first state, the image display means Is capable of at least displaying the second image,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation request image display different from the appearance is performed on the rendering means, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there are cases where it can be made to pay attention to the rendering means. In addition, the operation request image may be able to function as a notice or a notice. Further, even when the image display is simplified, the player may be able to convey necessary information to the player (19) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

The image display means can display at least the operation request image (for example, the image of the chance button 136) in the same mode as the mode of the operation means (for example, the button mode in which the chance button 136 is neither vibrating nor rotating) It is characterized by being.
further,
The effect means can at least execute a plurality of effects.

  At least one of the plurality of types of display effects is a first effect (for example, "character A" display in a system with effect buttons),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, "character C" display of a system with effect buttons),

  If the second effect is executed rather than the first effect, it is more likely to be connected to the big hit (for example, the reliability of the big hit is higher),

  When the effect means executes the second effect, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it may be possible to function as a notice as to whether or not the second effect with high reliability of the big hit is performed. As a result, the operation request image itself may be able to function as a notice.

  In the first state, the button mode of the operation means may be relatively rough compared to the display mode (for example, the display mode may be vibration or rotation, and the button mode may not be vibration or rotation). In this case, the so-called button mode may be in a state where the so-called broken law becomes hot. That is, the button mode is plain and the display mode is brighter than the case where the button mode is plain and the display mode is plain.

In the first state, the button mode of the operation means may be relatively bright as compared to the display mode (for example, the button mode may be vibration or rotation, and the display mode may not be vibration or rotation). In this case, if the button mode is flashy, so-called breaking of the law may become hot. In other words, the button mode is flashy and the display mode is more sober than the case where the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy. Alternatively, if the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy, the button mode may be flashy and the display mode may be hotter if the display mode is plain (20) the pachinko machine 100 described above ,

It further comprises another operation means (for example, direction key 137) different from the operation means (for example, chance button 136),
The other operation means is at least operable by the player,

  The presentation means is characterized in that the presentation can be performed even when the other operation means is operated.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, there are cases where it is possible to selectively use the effect button according to the player's preference (21) the pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a third image (for example, a bar display in which the effective period image indicating the operation effective period is blue) indicating the operable period of the operation means,

  The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image (for example, a bar display in which the effective period image indicating the operation effective period is red) showing the operable period of the operation means,

  The third image is an image that can be displayed at least according to the first image,

The fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least corresponding to the second image,
The third image and the fourth image are different images.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the valid period image may be able to function as a preliminary notice (22) in the pachinko machine 100,

  The image display means can display at least the first image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period,

  The image display means can display at least the second image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the operation means may be capable of performing the same operation as the operation request image, so the player may be notified of the operation of the rendering means. .

Note that either the first condition or the second condition can be satisfied when the operation effective period of the operation means is the same.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment is a game console installed on an island facility, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pachinko machine 100 is an enclosed type game stand, the same effect as the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment can be obtained.

  Moreover, in the example of the said embodiment, although the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places is altogether started by the substantially same timing, the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places may be started at a different timing altogether. In addition, any two broadcasts may be started at substantially the same timing, while the remaining broadcasts may be started at different timings.

  Moreover, in the example of the said embodiment, although the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places all is complete | finished by substantially the same timing, you may complete | finish the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places altogether by different timing. Also, any two reports may end at substantially the same timing, while the remaining reports may end at different timings.

  Moreover, although the Example using the said embodiment demonstrates alerting | reporting using several rendering means, you may make it alert | report in three or more places in one rendering means. In addition, at normal times, notification may be made at predetermined locations with two places, and notification may be made at three or more places only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the number of notifications may be reduced at a predetermined timing of symbol variation display. The presentation means controlled by at least the main control means may continue the notification when the predetermined opportunity is established. In addition, at least one of the rendering means (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220) may always be notified. Further, any of the plurality of hold notifications controlled by the sub control may be able to execute the advance notice.

  Moreover, the modification in case predetermined | prescribed game information is suspension is demonstrated below. As a combination of notification performed at three or more places when game information is on hold, for example, the special view 1 stop lamp 218 or the special view 2 stop lamp 220 by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the board lamp 224 It may be a combination of In addition, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, combination of two places inside the decoration design indicator 208 or the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, the decoration design indicator A combination of the liquid crystal display 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 209 is possible.

  In addition, the advance notice may be given by the on-hold display of the panel lamp 224, various lamps, the decorative symbol display device 208, or the sub liquid crystal display device 209. For example, the lamp may be rendered as a function different from the advance notice in a predetermined period (for example, symbol variation display of special reach determination) or the like. Under normal conditions, the on-hold display function may be provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied while performing effects as a decorative function.

  In addition, it is not necessary for one informing means to correspond to informing one pending number. Three or more points may be displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the number of alerting | reportings may be reduced at predetermined | prescribed opportunity (for example, special reach start time) during alerting | reporting in three or more places (only alerting | reporting by main control is left and alerting | reporting by sub control is extinguished) may be sufficient.

  In addition, even if at least one notification means (for example, special figure 1 hold lamp 218 by main control) indicates accurate hold number information, other effect means may be used for other effects (for example, advance notice, pseudo hold, etc.) Good.

  Indirect notification is also included in the notification of the present embodiment. For example, in the case where a notice effect or a decorative symbol variation display that appears only in three or more reservations is performed, it is included as one notification of "three or more reservations".

  In addition, a modified example in the case where predetermined game information is continuous big hit (so-called consecutive home) will be described below. In the case of combination of notification performed in three or more places when the game information is continuous information, for example, 7 consecutive display or special background display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the middle of a big hit or in the power support It is possible to use a combination of the panel lamp 224 emitting light in a row or more, and a special music or the like flowing from the speaker 120 above the consecutive house.

  It is not necessary that the notification of the continuous information be completely coincident with all the presentation means. The notification in the 7 consecutive villas and the notification in 7 or more consecutive villas may be the same. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the notification from being overwhelmed to the player. In addition, as an example of indirect notification, for example, when display of around 10000 is performed with specifications that can obtain about 2000 game balls in one big hit, it is included as a notification of 5 consecutive houses. It is also good.

  In addition, a modification in the case where the predetermined game information is a right-handed instruction will be described below. As a combination of notification performed at three or more places when the game information is a right-handed instruction, for example, the right-handed lamp of the status notification lamp 222 by the main control, the light emission gradation control of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the board surface lamp 224 A combination such as an audio output of a right-handed instruction by the speaker 120 is possible.

  The notification once ended may be re-executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when the player performs a left strike while the notification display of the right strike lamp of the status notification lamp 222 by the main control and the notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub control, to prompt the right strike of the alert. In addition, those which perform the notification sound with the speaker 120 and the notification lighting with the board surface lamp 224 are included.

  Moreover, although the alerting | reporting in three places was mainly shown in the said Example, the alerting | reporting of four or more places may be sufficient.

  The contents of the notification may be configured to perform notification on other game information, including at least notification on predetermined game information as well as notification on only predetermined game information. For example, the game information such as the probability change may be notified by the light emission color of the right-handed notification board lamp 224. In addition, as long as symbol variation display is in progress, notification regarding predetermined game information may be configured to function as advance notice or big hit advance notice. By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to have diversity as well as the function as a mere notification.

  The plurality of effect means may all be controlled by the main control means, or all may be controlled by the sub control means. Further, the configuration may be controlled by a plurality of sub control means. If controlled by the main control means, the certainty of notification is maintained, and if controlled by the sub control means, there is an effect of reducing the burden on the main control means.

  The configuration may be such that at least one notification is performed during a period different from the other. The configuration may be such that at least one notification is executed based on a condition different from the execution condition of the other notification. Moreover, the structure provided with multiple execution conditions of alerting | reporting may be sufficient. By doing this, it may be possible to effectively notify the establishment itself of different conditions such as, for example, right-handed attention.

  The start timing and the end timing of the plurality of notifications may all be the same. Also, only the start time may be the same and the end time may be different, or the start time may be different and the end time may be the same. By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to give diversity to the notification depending on the combination of the start timing and the end timing of the notification.

  The notification of the number of start pending operations by the start pending display can be notified by various combinations. For example, it is possible to give two notices by the decorative symbol display device 208 and further combine the notices by the main control means. In the case where a plurality of suspension displays are performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, there are cases where it is possible to provide diversity in pre-reading notices such as suspension pre-reading. Further, two or more notifications may be performed on the main control means side.

  With regard to the notification of the number of start pendings by the start pending display, there is no need to perform one start pending display for all the start pendings. For example, the lamp device may be configured to perform one display in response to one start reservation, and to directly notify the start reservation number by a number in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. By broadcasting in different patterns, diversity may be increased. Further, there may be a case where it is possible to execute a combination of notifications that can be easily understood by the player by the effect on the game.

  As notification of the predetermined game information, notification regarding the suspension of the common drawing may be used. For example, with regard to the electric chew that can be opened for a relatively long time or the one that has a benefit by winning the effect of the popular drawing, the amusement display of the game may be improved by performing the hold display at three or more places.

  In the above embodiment, the operation effective period in the operation of the plurality of operation means is common. In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that the continuous operation of the operation means is necessary. There are cases where it is possible to reduce the risk of disabling the operation of the operating means multiple times.

  In addition, the operation of the operation means may be settable during at least one symbol variation display. If the configuration is performed by a plurality of times of symbol variation display, for example, the player may be able to expect a player across multiple variations by performing an operation related to the operation means in association with the preview notice.

  A plurality of modes of the operation means are provided, and the operation mode and the operation request image are associated with each other, and the display mode (only) different from the others may be such that the operation request image different from the association is displayed. . In some cases, it is possible to emphasize the function as a notice.

  A plurality of modes of the operation means may be provided, and the operation mode and the operation request image may be associated with each other. Then, one operation request image may be deleted by performing the operation of the operation means one or more times. Further, the operation mode of the operation means may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the operation request image corresponding to the next operation, and may be changed when it is different from the previous operation mode. By doing this, the operation request image may be able to function as a change notice of the operation mode.

  The operation valid periods in the plurality of operation means may not be common, and may be configured to be individually set. By doing this, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from being flooded by setting the effective period individually while urging the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to equally assign the operation of the operation means a plurality of times to the effect time (mainly, the operation effective period) of the symbol variation display. Therefore, in some cases, the player's dissatisfaction can be alleviated due to excessive operation validity period.

  The above embodiment is also applicable to a game console having a plurality of operation means. At least one of the plurality of operation means may have the contents of the above embodiment. Further, the operation request image and the effective period display image corresponding to the plurality of operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  Moreover, the operation valid period may be configured to be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. By doing this, it may function as a prefetch notice.

  In the above embodiment, one valid period display image is erased by one operation of the operation means, but one valid period displayed image is erased by performing a predetermined number of operations twice or more. The configuration may be different. Further, the display of all valid period display images may be continued until the required number of operations for operating the operating means is performed. By doing this, for example, it may be possible to emphasize that the plurality of valid period displays prompt the operation by leaving all the valid period displays even when the remaining valid period is reduced.

  In addition, the correspondence between the operation mode of the operation means and the relationship of the operation request image may be partially different. By doing this, it may be possible to cause the so-called “breaking of the law (correspondence (law))” to break down, which can function as a notice of a big hit decision or a notice that enhances the expectation of the big hit.

  Further, the condition as to whether or not the operation of the operation means is valid can be arbitrarily set. It may be configured to become effective (effects to operations are executed) by performing lottery by winning once or a plurality of operations, which becomes effective in one or a plurality of operations. By doing this, the number of operations may be able to be adjusted in accordance with the presentation time and the like.

  Further, in the case of having a plurality of operation means, even if the operation request image is common (even if it is an image display prompting the operation of any operation means), the operation of other operation means is validated. It may be. By doing this, there may be a case where the amount of data can be reduced by sharing the operation request image.

  Also, the operation of the other operation means may be valid or invalid. In some cases, the same effect as the above-mentioned "break in the law" can be achieved.

  In the above embodiment, the operation means may be attached to the frame side of the pachinko machine 100. For example, in the process of developing a game console, it may be assumed that the design of the rendering means itself is changed due to the design change of the frame. Then, even when the image display and the effect means are different, the purpose of the important notification (such as pushing the effect button or hitting the right) may be maintained to the player.

  In the above embodiment, the effect button is set to the operation effective period, and the image display means executes at least the display effect after the end of the effective period when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It may be possible. By doing this, the display effect may be performed even when the button is not operated.

  In the above embodiment, the effect button is set to the operation effective period, and the image display means does not execute the display effect when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It is also good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the reference is set to the second display effect, so when the second display effect is performed, the second operation request image is easily output. Further, the operation request image related to the effect button may be displayable during at least a part of the operation valid period of the effect button.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the case where the operation request image is displayed in a mode different from the mode of the operation means during display of the operation request image, the color of the effect button or the logo combination, the operation request image is the first. There is an indication indicating the position, the effect button and the logo feature are in the second position, and so on.

  Further, the rendering means is at least operable in the first aspect and the second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means is configured to When the display corresponding to the aspect of is performed, the rendering means may be at least operable in the second aspect. By doing this, when the effect means (operation means) is brighter, it may be possible to notice when the player operates the operation means.

  Alternatively, the rendering means is at least operable in the first aspect and the second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means is configured to When the display corresponding to the second aspect is performed, the rendering means may be at least operable in the first aspect. By doing this, when the operation request image is brighter, the player can look at the operation request image first to increase the expectation and operate the operation means to give a sense of incongruity. There are cases where it can be enhanced.

  The operation request image may have not only an aspect different from the aspect of the rendering means but also a pattern of the same aspect. By doing this, it may be possible to function as a notification or a notice by properly using the same aspect and a different aspect. For example, there are cases where it can be used for a notice that the symbol variation display will be a big hit, a pre-reading notice, a notification of the number of reservations, and a notice of consecutive units, etc.

  The operation request image may be performed only in a mode different from the mode of the rendering means in one trigger (for example, a button effect performed during symbol variation display), or may be performed only in the same mode. By doing this, the player may easily recognize the trigger by associating the operation request image with each trigger.

  About the operation request image, the operation request in at least a different mode in any of a plurality of triggers corresponding to one effect means (for example, a button effect performed before reach during symbol fluctuation display and a button effect performed after reach) It may be any configuration that can display an image.

  The operation means that can be operated by the player include not only the effect button and the operation button used in the service in which the game console and the mobile site are linked, but also the ball firing handle 134. As an example, there is a case where an image display is performed to notify of a right-handed hit at the time of a big hit start or a power support start. At this time, a content such as displaying on the image display means a display obtained by twisting the ball emission handle 134 to the right is also included in the present embodiment. At this time, as an example of an aspect different from the aspect of the rendering means, there is an image display in which the display of the ball emission handle 134 itself is deformed. In this case, even if there is a change in the design of the ball emission handle 134, it may be possible to reliably perform the most important notification on the game feature of right-handed notification.

  As an example of the effect means, it may be winning means provided on the game board, such as an attacker. By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to cope with design changes.

  In the above embodiment, when two effect buttons are used, the two effect buttons do not have to be effective for all the operations of the effect buttons, and both effect buttons are effective only at the time of predetermined effects. Good. Further, the player may or may not be notified as to whether or not the operation of the second effect button is effective when the first effect button is displayed as the operation request image. . By doing this, the number of effect buttons that are activated may be able to function as a notice. And, as an effect when not notifying the player whether or not the second effect button is effective, the player can have an expectation when the display effect is performed by operating the second effect button. The player can be made to select whether or not to operate the second effect button.

  The correspondence between the operation request image and the valid period image is that the first valid period image corresponds to the first operation request image, and the second valid period image corresponds to the second operation request image. It does not have to be. For example, by changing a part of the combinations, the player may feel discomfort and may function as a notice.

  In addition, the operation request image or the validity period image (and the combination thereof) may be changed according to conditions such as the gaming state. By doing this, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, with regard to the button operation of the chance button 136 in each example of the above embodiment, even when the player does not operate the button during the effective period of the button operation, it is equivalent to the case where the button operation is performed. The presentation may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, this is referred to as an auto button and will be described in detail below.

  First, the setting method of the auto button may be configured to be arbitrarily set by the player, or may be set according to the gaming state or the like. As an example which can be arbitrarily set by the player, it is possible for all players to set by operation of other operation means such as the chance button 136 or the direction key 137 or other cross keys during demonstration effect etc. The game is set under predetermined conditions, such as an original mode in which customization of the game stand and game history can be accumulated for each player, on condition that the player inputs unique information such as a password, etc. Possible configurations are mentioned. The configuration that is set according to the gaming state is, for example, the presence or absence of the power support state, the same gaming state, and an automatic button when the same gaming state and rendering mode continue for a predetermined period or a predetermined number of times. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the operation for continuous operation.

  The notification that the button is an auto button may be always notified by the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 209, etc., or may be notified only when the auto button is set. Further, even when the setting of the auto button is released, the notification may be made or the notification may not be made at all.

  Further, with regard to the display in the auto button, the image of the button and the effective period may be displayed in the same manner as in the non-auto button, or a part of the images may not be displayed. Not displaying a part of the image may in some cases be a notification that the above-mentioned auto button is in progress. In addition, as an example of a configuration in which a part of the image is not displayed, if only the button display is displayed and the effective period display is not performed, the notification that there is a button effect originally is not extremely annoying display effect. There is a case. In addition, the display may not be performed at all.

  The operation timing of the auto button may be any timing during the effective period. For example, if it is the beginning of the effective period, it is possible to perform presentation accompanying the button operation without giving the player the fear that presentation of the auto button may not be performed. If it is in the middle of the effective period, there is a possibility that balance can be taken without extension between before and after the effect accompanying the button operation. At the end of the term of validity, it may lead to an improvement in interest by teasing the player. However, in the case where the effect accompanying the button operation appears at the end of the effective period, there is a risk that the visual effect may be the same as the case where the effect is forcibly output at the expiration of the non-auto button. In this case, for example, when the auto button is used, an application according to the reliability is applied, and in the case of the non-auto button valid period expired, the lowest reliability operation is forcibly caused to appear regardless of the status. It is also possible to put out.

  As an example of the game for the auto button, when the auto button is set as described above, all button effects may be set to automatic, or some button effects may be set to automatic. As an example of the partial auto, for example, the advance notice before reaching may be automatic, the non-automatic after reaching may be performed, or the non-automatic (desired to be operated by the player) may be performed only during intense heat production. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to give diversity to effects by combining auto and non-auto. For example, there is a case where the effect of changing the holding icon may be set to a valid period over a plurality of symbol variation displays in response to a button effect in the pre-reading hold notice and the button operation. During this time, when the button effect is produced in the symbol variation display, the button effect may be duplicated, and the player may be confused. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give variety to the rendering while solving the problem by making one of the button renderings automatic. In addition, it is also possible to make individual settings for each device, such as making only the button effect of the sub liquid crystal automatic.

  With regard to the auto of the button effect requiring a plurality of button operations, a predetermined number of times determined for each effect, a number of times installed according to the number of operations of the player at the non-auto button, etc. are assumed. Generally, the effective period of the effect that requires multiple button operations is slightly longer. Therefore, there is a limit (the parameter does not advance any more) when the parameter display or the like accompanying the button effect is determined according to the acceptance determination. In such a case, if the number of times of auto is increased, there is a risk that the parameter display does not progress even though the effective period remains, and the player is discouraged. Therefore, it may be preferable to perform a predetermined number of automatic operations in consideration of the effective period. In addition, only a part of multiple operations may be performed, such as only part of the operation. In some cases, it may be possible to use an auto button function as a configuration for prompting a button operation.

  Also, when the auto button is set, a command may be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the control system of the decorative symbol display device 208, and after that, the display control on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be taken care of. The command may be sent at the same timing as the non-auto button.

  In addition, when an accidental condition is established, an auto button may be used. For example, when there is an error such as a bottom hit during a big hit, both hands may be used by the discharge operation of the game ball and the launch of the game ball. In such a case, the configuration may be such that an automatic button is automatically provided. Further, even during the auto button, if the player operates the button before the (automatic) button operation, effects may be provided. The auto button may be released (non-auto) when the player operates the button during the auto button.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 409, corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 410 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.
The above embodiments can be combined with each other.
The gaming machine of the above embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.

(Appendix A1)
A game console provided with notification means capable of at least notifying of game information related to a game,
The notification means is capable of at least executing notification of the game information at three or more places with respect to the same type of the game information.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A1,
Equipped with a plurality of effect means capable of at least effect effects relating to a game,
The notification means can execute notification of the same type of game information at the three or more locations using the plurality of effect means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3)
It is a game console described in Appendix A2,
Main control means capable of at least control over the progress of the game;
And sub control means capable of at least executing control relating to a game presentation,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main control means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A4)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2 or A3, wherein
The notification means is capable of executing at least two of the notifications of the same type of game information performed at the three or more locations, including at least the same period.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2 to A4,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is an image display means,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein
It has symbol display means capable of at least performing symbol variation display,
The gaming machine characterized in that the same type of game information is information on the number of holding times regarding the execution of the symbol variation display

(Appendix A7)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6,
At least one notification of the notification of the number of holding times can also be notified as a prefetch notice.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2 to A7, wherein
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means,
The notification means can at least execute the error notification using the first effect means when an error occurs.
The notification means is capable of continuing the notification of the same type of game information using the second effect means even when the error occurs.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A9)
A game console provided with a plurality of notification means capable of at least notifying of game information,
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a first informing means,
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a second informing means,
At least one of the plurality of informing means is a third informing means,
The gaming information is information including at least information on gaming,
The first informing means is capable of at least executing informing for the first game information in a first period,
The second notification means is capable of at least executing a notification regarding the first game information in a second period,
The third notification means is capable of at least executing a notification on the first game information in a third period,
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The first period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The second period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A10)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of at least displaying an image;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means can display at least a first image,
The image display means can display a plurality of the first images,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means,
The effect means can at least execute the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10,
The image display means can display at least a second image,
The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation valid period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or more of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A12)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A11,
The image display means can display one of the second images with respect to one of the first images.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A13)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A11,
The operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means can display one of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A10 to A13, wherein
The image display means can display one of the first images in response to a single operation request of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A10 to A14, wherein
The image display means is capable of erasing the first image in response to one operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A10 to A15, wherein
The image display means can display at least one of the plurality of first images in a display manner different from the display manner of the other first images.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A17)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A16,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A18)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of at least displaying an image;
Rendering means capable of at least performing rendering in response to the operating means being operated;
A game console equipped with
The operating means is at least capable of taking a first state,
The operating means is at least capable of taking a second state,
The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the operation means is different,
The image display means can display at least a first image,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate.
The first image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the first state,
The image display means can display at least a second image,
The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate.
The second image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the second state,
The image display means can display at least the first image when the first condition is satisfied in the first state of the operation means,
The image display means can display at least the second image when a second condition is satisfied in the first state of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18,
The effect means can at least execute a plurality of effects.
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
If the second effect is executed rather than the first effect, it is easier to connect to the jackpot,
When the effect means executes the second effect, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A20)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A18 or A19,
It further comprises an operating means different from the operating means,
The other operation means is at least operable by the player,
The effect means can execute the effect even when the other operation means is operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A18 to A20, wherein
The image display means can display at least a third image indicating a period in which the operation means can be operated;
The image display means can display at least a fourth image indicating a period in which the operation means can be operated;
The third image is an image that can be displayed at least according to the first image,
The fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least corresponding to the second image,
The third image and the fourth image are different images,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A22)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A18 to A21, wherein
The image display means can display at least the first image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period,
The image display means can display at least the second image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A23)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of at least displaying an image;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means can display at least a first image,
The image display means can display a plurality of the first images,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means,
The effect means can at least execute the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A24)
The game console described in Appendix A23,
The image display means can display at least a second image,
The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation valid period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or more of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A25)
It is a game console described in Appendix A24,
The image display means can display one of the second images with respect to one of the first images.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A26)
It is a game console described in Appendix A24,
The operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means can display one of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A23 to A26,
The image display means can display one of the first images in response to a single operation request of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A28)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A23 to A27,
The image display means is capable of erasing the first image in response to one operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A29)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A23 to A28,
The image display means can display at least one of the plurality of first images in a display manner different from the display manner of the other first images.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A31)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
Rendering means capable of at least carrying out the first rendering;
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image at least includes an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image includes at least an image indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The first image can at least start to be displayed in a first period,
The second image can at least start display in a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means can display at least the first image as the first number,
The first number is two or more,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period reaches the first number.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A32)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A31,
The image display means can display at least a second number of the second image,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A31 or A32,
The image display means is capable of erasing one of the first images in response to one operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A31 to A33, wherein
The rendering means is at least capable of performing a second rendering,
The second effect is an effect that can be performed for each operation of the operation means,
The first number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A31 to A34, wherein
Equipped with a means of notice that can carry out notices,
The first image can be displayed at least in a plurality of modes,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The notice means is capable of executing the notice by displaying the first image according to the second aspect on the image display means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A36)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A35,
The first image according to the second aspect is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operations of the operation means to be the first number,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A37)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A35 or A36, wherein
The operating means is at least capable of being in a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The first aspect is an aspect that can at least suggest that the operation means is in the first state,
The second aspect is an aspect capable of at least suggesting that the operation means is in the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A38)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image at least includes an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image at least includes an image suggesting a period during which the operation by the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The first image can at least start to be displayed in a first period,
The second image can at least start display in a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means can display at least the first image as the first number,
The first number is two or more,
The image display means can display at least a second number of the second image,
The second number is one,
The effect is at least executable when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period reaches the first number.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A 39)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image is an image including at least an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image is an image including at least an image suggesting a period during which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”),
The first image is an image that can at least start display in a first period,
The second image is an image that can at least start display in a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first image to be the first number,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times of reception of the operation of the operation means in the third period reaches the first number,
The second effect is an effect to be executed each time the operation of the operation means is received,
The first number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A40)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A39,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second image as a second number,
The second number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A41)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A39 or A40,
The image display means is means capable of erasing one of the first images in response to acceptance of one operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A42)
The game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A41, wherein
The image display means can start displaying at least one of the first images in a fourth period,
The fourth period is a period different from the third period as a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is effective.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A43)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A42,
The first image is a button image,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A44)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A43,
The second image is a gauge image,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix A45)
The game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A44, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the image display means.
A game console characterized by the above [eighth embodiment]

  Next, the game effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 411 to FIG. 435 are basically used only for the description of the eighth embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, the present embodiment. In the description of FIG. 411, the reference numerals shown in FIG. First, the configuration shown in each of FIGS. 411 to 435 (excluding FIGS. 430 and 431) will be described.

  In each figure, as shown in FIG. 411 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 368, a special view 1 display 212, and a special view 2 display A device 214, a special view 1 holding lamp 218 and a special view 2 holding lamp 220 are schematically shown. The special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and the special view 2 hold lamp 220 are shown below the decorative symbol display unit 208, and the special view 2 display 214 is special view 1 The special view 1 retention lamp 218 is shown on the right side of the display 212, the special view 1 display 212 is shown on the upper side, and the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special view 2 display 214. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 is displayed in white in this embodiment, but in fact, the special figure change is in progress by repeating the blinking of the segments in a predetermined order. It can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is a fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 and the right side is a fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. When the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a release, an image representing "x" is displayed as a fourth symbol, and in the case of a hit, an image representing "A" is displayed. In addition, during execution of the special figure fluctuation game, the picture which displays “-” as a 4th design is displayed.

  A special view 1 reserved icon display area is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area, a number of special figure 1 pending icons corresponding to the number of pendings are displayed. In addition, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is notified or not can be notified (predictive notice) with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserve icon. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special drawing 1 holding icons can be displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area. The plurality of special view 1 hold icons are displayed in order from left to right in the special view 1 hold icon display area as the hold order becomes lower. In this example, only the special view 1 suspension icon display area is displayed, but the special view 2 suspension icon display area may be displayed together as a matter of course.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 411 (b), the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special view 1 display device 212 indicates that the special view 1 variation display is being performed. The same applies to the special view 2 display device 214.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 411 (c), the variation display of each decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c during the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation game shown in each example of this embodiment is executed by the same control operation as that described in the seventh embodiment. In the example of the present embodiment, the effects to be performed in the special figure variation game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises (Example 1).

  First, the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment is explained using FIG. 411 and FIG. FIGS. 411 (a) to 412 (e) show, in this order, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 411 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". An “x” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special drawing 1 indicating that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special drawing 2 An "x" image is displayed indicating that the result of the game is out. "Decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is lost.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIGS. 411 (b) to (g) show the start and end of the special view 1 change game. FIG. 411 (b) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. For example, at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation display is first started in the left symbol display area 208a, then the variation display is started in the middle symbol display area 208b, and then the variation display is started in the right symbol display area 208c . Of course, the variable display may be simultaneously started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIGS. 411 (c) to 411 (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. FIG. 411 (d) shows that the symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 411 (e) shows that the symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display area 208b, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. In FIG. 411 (f), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Shows the condition. The decorative symbol at the temporary stop is not in a stationary state, but is in a swinging fluctuation state in which it slightly vibrates in the vertical direction, for example.

  FIG. 411 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off . Special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in Drawing 411 (a)-(g) is a basic pattern of a usual fluctuation state. In the following description, the description of the detailed operation order is omitted for the special figure fluctuation game of the normal fluctuation state.

  FIG. 411 (h) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 change game, the reserve is digested, and all LEDs of the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned off, and it is informed that the special figure 1 is not reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area.

  FIG. 411 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special view 1 change game.

  411 (j) shows that "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 change game, and the character of "reach" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reach effect is displayed. It shows the started condition.

  FIGS. 411 (k) to 412 (c) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 411 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed. In the following description, "the state in which the button effect is started" indicates that the reception of the button operation is not activated yet, and the "state in which the button effect is started" is a button It indicates that the reception of the operation has become effective. Further, "during the execution of the button effect" indicates that the reception of the button operation is in a valid state.

  FIG. 411 (l) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “button images”) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are arranged in a row in almost the center of the effect display area 208 d. Is displayed. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 411 (m) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 411 (n) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “button delete animation”) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 411 (o) shows that the button effect is being performed and the effect to be executed next to the button erasing animation (the effect may be referred to as the "second effect" with respect to the "first effect" described later) Is shown. As a second effect, an image of the panda (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “panda image”) is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 411 (p) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 411 (q) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 411 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 412 (a) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation following FIG. 411 (r). As a second effect, a character image of the "bad merchant Echigoya" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Echigoya image") is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 412 (b) shows the state of execution of the second effect in the button effect. Since an Echigoya image different from the panda image corresponding to the button image on the left side is displayed at the position of the button image in the center, it is displayed in the explanation display of the button effect regardless of the presence or absence of the third depression of the chance button 136 by the player. The condition of "three sets and SP reach development!" Is not satisfied. Therefore, the second effect is executed in which the button image on the right side is erased and the Echigoya image is displayed instead without waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains.

  FIG. 412 (c) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as a first effect, the Echigoya image is largely displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string "Sorry!" Is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed into the SP (super) reach. As described above, the first effect may be performed with the number of pressings (two in this example) less than the number of displayed button images (three in this example). In the first effect, the button image, the valid period image, and the image displayed in the second effect are not displayed. The effect mode of the first effect is determined by the combination (matching method) of the panda image and the Echigoya image displayed in place of the button image in the second effect.

  "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed temporarily.

  FIG. 412 (b ′) shows a modified example of the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. In FIG. 412 (b ′), the Echigoya image of a pattern different from the panda image for the button image on the left side is displayed at the position of the button image in the center, and the condition where three images are aligned is not satisfied This shows a state where the operation valid period has been lost without the third pressing of the chance button 136 by the player being performed. In this case, the second effect on the button image on the right side is not performed.

  FIG. 412 (c ′) continuing from FIG. 412 (b ′) shows a state in which the first effect is not executed after the end of the second effect, and instead the ineffective period notification animation is being executed. As described above, in the case where the operation effective period is lost in the state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the first effect or the second effect may not be performed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed temporarily.

  412 (c) or FIG. 412 (d) continuing from FIG. 412 (c '), the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the state normally displayed. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 412 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off .

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above includes a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and a presentation display area 208 d as a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. And a decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a button image as a first display, and the display of the button image is a display including a display that suggests the chance button 136. One of the plurality of types of display is the display of the effective period image as the second display, and the effective period image is an operation effective period as a third period in which acceptance of pressing of the chance button 136 is effective. Is displayed. The display of the button image is a display that can be started in the first period, and the first period is a period including a part of the operation valid period. The display of the valid period image is a display that can start in a second period, and the second period is a period including a part of the operation valid period. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display, for example, three button images as the first number (two or more). One of a plurality of types of effects is an effect to be executed after the button deletion animation as the second effect, for example, an effect that causes a predetermined image to appear at the position at which the deleted button image was displayed It is. In addition, one of a plurality of types of effects is an effect of notifying a result of button operation performed after the second effect as the first effect. The first effect can be executed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated in the operation effective period is, for example, twice as the second number (two or more). In addition, the second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding a part of the three button images.

  The second effect is an effect to be executed each time the operation of the chance button 136 is received. Since the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, the first effect may be expected by performing the second effect before the first effect is performed.

Further, the second effect is an effect to be executed for each operation of the chance button 136, but the display of the button image and the display of the gauge image are hidden in all of the second effects performed for each operation. Alternatively, the display of the button image or the gauge image may be hidden only by the second effect which is performed by a part of the operation and started (the second embodiment).

  Next, the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 413 and 414. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG. 411 (j) of the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 413 (a) continues from FIG. 411 (j). Drawing 413 (a)-Drawing 413 (p) show the state where button production of this embodiment was performed during reach production in the special figure 1 change game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 413 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed.

  FIG. 413 (b) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 413C shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being performed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (d) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (e) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (f) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (g) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (h) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (i) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the center button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed with a size that hides a part of the panda image adjacent to the left and a part of the valid period image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. As described above, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the gauge of the effective period image decreases and the direction in which the button images are erased are the same.

  FIG. 413 (j) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the central panda image is reduced and displayed, and the panda image on the left side and the effective period image are all visible by reduced display of the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In (k) of FIG. 413, the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d changes from “normal” to “vibration + rotation” to give notice of the result of the change. As described above, the display mode of the button image may change in the middle of the operation valid period. In addition, the button mode may be changed according to the change in the display mode of the button image.

  FIG. 413 (l) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 413 (m) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, for the gauge display, an effective period image erasing animation is performed. The gauge display is a display that can be erased when the pressing of the chance button 136 by the player reaches a predetermined number of times, even if the operation valid period remains. In the effective period image erasing animation, an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display is 0 is displayed as the third display. After the empty frame image is displayed for a predetermined time, the gauge display is erased. By performing an animation display of 0 with the display of the length of the gauge, it may be possible to easily notify that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display to be deleted or the button display has been accepted.

  Further, in the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 413 (m), since the button image having the display mode of "vibration + rotation" is displayed, the button display animation of which the display mode is "normal" is displayed as the button deletion animation The effect image is displayed that is larger than the effect image. As described above, in the button rendition of the present embodiment, button images can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and a button image having a display mode of “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is "normal" can be used. By doing this, it may be possible to cause the button display and the animation display of the button deletion to function as a notice depending on the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

  FIG. 413 (n) shows a state in which a second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the right side was displayed. The panda image is displayed so as to hide a part of the central panda image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. If the button image is erased by the last button operation and there is no button image in the display area, the effect of hiding the button image is not performed. Since the operation effective period has passed, the effective period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 413 (o) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image on the right side is reduced and displayed, and it is informed that three panda images of the same size are aligned in a single horizontal row and the condition of “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is satisfied. It is done.

  FIG. 413 (p) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 385 (a) is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character “SP development” is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  Fig. 413 (q) to Fig. 414 (e) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 413 (q) shows a state in which SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 414 (a) following FIG. 413 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In this button effect, there is one button image, and the display of the effective period image is not performed. Deca-button display is provided with a function as a notice to make a player expect by being different from a normal button display. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to prompt the player to perform the button operation by making the effect not to display the effective period. Further, it can be said that the deca-button display itself is an effect that urges the player to perform the button operation more strongly. In FIG. 414 (b), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts “Well! FIG. 414 (c) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 414 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208 a to 208 c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208 and displayed normally. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 414 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit (Example 2-3)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG. 411 (k) of the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 415 (a) continues from FIG. 411 (k). FIG. 415 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The valid period image of this example is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 415 (b) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 415C shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 415 (d) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the second pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 415 (e) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 415 (a) to 415 (e), one button image is erased by a plurality of (two in this example) button operations, and a second effect is started. By thus changing the number of button operations to execute the button image erase animation or executing the button image erase animation for each button operation, the player can enjoy the button effect more There are times when you can.

  FIG. 415 (a ′) continues from FIG. 411 (k). FIG. 415 (a ′) shows the start of the button effect similar to that of FIG. 415 (a), so the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 415 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 415 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left as well as the button image in the center are also erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image is displayed at each display position in place of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 415 (d ') shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed and the position where the center button image was displayed.

  In the button effects shown in FIG. 415 (a ′) to (d ′), a plurality of (two in this example) button images are erased by one button operation, and respective second effects are started. As described above, by changing the number of button images to be deleted in one button operation to execute the button image deletion animation, it may be possible for the player to enjoy the button effect more.

  FIG. 415 (a ′ ′) continues from FIG. 411 (k). FIG. 415 (a ′ ′) is an image of a display mode in which the button image on the left simulates the light emission state of the chance button 136 with respect to the button effect shown in FIG. 415 (a) or 415 (a ′). It has a feature in Since the other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 415 (b ′ ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The button image on the left side is displayed so as to stand out with higher brightness than the other button images. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 415 (c ′ ′) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side imitating the light emitting state of the button is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image is displayed at each display position in place of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 415 (d ′ ′) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed.

In the button effects shown in FIG. 415 (a ′ ′) to (d ′ ′), as an example in which the display modes of the three button images aligned in a single horizontal row are different, even if only the portion simulating light emission is different. , And different display modes. In this example, the effect part corresponding to the first button operation is suggested by making the light emission mode different from other button images (Example 4).

  Next, the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 416 (a), while "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 change game, the character of "reach" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and reach effect is displayed. It shows the started condition.

  FIG. 416 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIGS. 416 (c) to (e) show effects from immediately after the start of the animation relating to the button image. FIG. 416 (c) shows a state in which a relatively small button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 416 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which the button image is gradually enlarged is being executed. FIG. 416 (e) shows a state in which three button images are displayed in a horizontal row, and the size of the central button image is larger than the size of the left and right button images. In this example, button display is performed by animation, and the case where the display of the button image of a decabutton display and the display of a normal display is mixed is shown. Also in this example, the display mode of the button image in the center of the deca-button display is different from the display mode of the normal button images on the left and right.

  FIGS. 416 (a ') to (d') show effects from immediately after the start of the animation relating to the button image. In this example, an effect movable body imitating an arm is disposed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body can be driven to move to the front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that a part of the image displayed in the image display area can be hidden. FIG. 416 (a ′) shows a state in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect display area 208d. Three button images are displayed in a row in the center of the effect display area 208d. An effective period image is displayed occupying an area of about 1/3 of the lower side of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 416 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. In the valid period image, the gauge portion is shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is shortened is notified.

  FIG. 416 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image is displayed at each display position in place of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 416 (d ′) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, the arm of the effect movable body extends to the front of the image display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and hides a part of the button image on the right side and the effective period image.

In the button effects shown in FIGS. 416 (a ') to (d'), the gauge image is an image (decagauge image) larger than normal, and the second effect is the effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and the effect movable body Hide part of button images and gauge images. The deca gauge image may be configured to function as a preview on its own. For example, there are cases where it is possible to make a player expect a big hit etc. by displaying a large gauge image at the timing when a normal gauge image appears. In this case, even if it is a deca gauge image, it is desirable to have the same effective period as a normal gauge image, but for example, time is adjusted by swing fluctuation (temporary stop) etc. (special pattern fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern of decorative pattern And (d) may be different from each other because it is possible to The first effect may also be performed by the effect movable body (Example 5)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The present embodiment describes the case where the same reach effect (the same change time) is performed as that of the second embodiment (see FIGS. 413 and 414) but no button effect is performed.

  The special figure variation game shown in FIGS. 417 (a) to 417 (d) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 411 (g) to 411 (j), and therefore the explanation thereof is omitted. In addition, the special figure fluctuation game (including the SP reach effect) shown in FIGS. 417 (i) to 417 (n) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 413 (q) to 414 (e), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 417 (e) to (h) show effects from the start of reach effect to development to SP reach effect. The second effect is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, step-up notice, advance notice, cut-in notice, notice such as popular drawing effect, etc.) It may be information related to the game such as time saving, latency mode, etc.). In this example, the case of performing a cut-in effect (step-up) after reaching is described as a second effect. FIG. 417 (e) shows a cut-in effect executed during reach effect. In the middle symbol display area 208b, a face image of a character image of "bancho" is displayed as a cut-in effect. Next, in FIG. 417 (f), the whole-body image of the character image of "bancho" is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b, and is displayed as a step-up notice. Next, in FIG. 417 (g), the image of character F shown in FIG. 390 (c) is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b, and is displayed as a step-up notice.

  FIG. 417 (i) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

As described above, even if the button effect is not performed at the time of the reach effect execution, the second effect is, for example, an advance notice such as a step-up notice, a pre-reading notice, a cut-in notice, a press drawing effect, etc. Or, it can be performed in relation to the game information such as the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive villas, the probability change, the time saving, and the latent mode (example 6)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 418. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG. 411 (j) of the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 418 (a) continues from FIG. 411 (j). FIG. 418 (a)-FIG. 418 (l) have shown the state in which the button effect of this embodiment was performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 418 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, tutorial display of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, one image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed substantially at the center of the effect display area 208d. The image imitating the chance button 136 is the same display mode as the button image whose display mode is "vibration + rotation". The upper left of the image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed with the string “3 sets of SP reach development! Three press”, and the upper portion with the string “Ready”.

  FIG. 418 (b) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, one operation request image (button image) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 is displayed substantially at the center of the effect display area 208d. The display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation". At the top of the button image, the text “3 sets and SP reach development! Press three times” is displayed, and the top “Go” is displayed. At the bottom of the button image, one valid period image is displayed. The valid period image of this example has a relatively long elongated rectangular frame shape (long gauge), and initially, the entire period of the valid period in the frame shape is indicated by a bar of a predetermined color, and The bar-like portion of the predetermined color is displayed to be gradually shortened to the right with the passage of time. More specifically, the display of the valid period image is a long gauge display, and the long gauge display is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by performing an animation for reducing the length of the long gauge. . The display of the long gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the long gauge is zero. In addition, a long gauge can also be functioned as a notice like a deca gauge image. In order to make the lifetime of the normal gauge image and that of the button the same, the rate at which the gauge in the long gauge decreases can be made faster than the rate at which the gauge in the normal gauge image decreases. As described above, by using a plurality of display modes in which the number of button displays and the mode of the gauge display are different, it may be possible to use for the notice of the variation.

  FIG. 418 (c) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (d) shows a second effect performed during execution of the button effect. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed on the right side of the display of the central button image. In the present embodiment, at the first press of the chance button 136, the button image delete animation for deleting the button image is not executed. When the acceptance of the first depression of the chance button 136 is received, then the second rendering is started. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (e) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. Above the display of the button image in the center and the panda image of the second effect, a string of "two more times" is displayed on the right side of the string of "three aligned in SP reach development!" On the other hand, it is informed that the remaining number of operations is two. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (f) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (g) shows the second rendering performed during execution of the button rendering. As a second effect, another panda image is displayed to the right of the panda image on the right of the center button image. In the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the button delete animation for deleting the button image is not executed. When the second depression of the chance button 136 is received, the second effect is started. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (h) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. The character string of "last" is displayed on the right side of the character string of "3 sets and SP reach development!" On the upper side of the display of the central button image and the two panda images of the second effect. The user is informed that the remaining number of operations is one. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (f) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 418 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this embodiment, an animation of button display elimination is performed only for the last button operation.

  FIG. 418 (k) exemplifies the case where the image erasing animation for the effective period is not executed for the gauge display. The gauge display is a display that can be erased when the pressing of the chance button 136 by the player reaches a predetermined number of times, even if the operation valid period remains. In this example, an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display as shown in FIG. 413 (m) is 0 is not displayed. In addition, on the right side of the effect display area 208d, the three panda images arranged at the positions of the vertices of the inverted triangle are displayed as the second effect, respectively, and the condition of "three sets in SP reach development!" It reports that it has been satisfied.

  FIG. 418 (l) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as a first effect, three panda images having the same shape and the same size are displayed in a row in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the characters "SP reach confirmed" are displayed below them. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 418 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 413 (q) to FIG. 414 (e) is executed.

According to the present embodiment, when it is determined by the button effect whether or not to develop to the SP reach during the reach effect, by preparing a plurality of effect patterns different in the number of button display and the aspect of the gauge display, It is also possible to perform advance notice by means of button effects, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game (Example 7).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 419. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG. 411 (k) of the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 419 (a) continues from FIG. 411 (k). FIG. 419 (a)-FIG. 419 (l) have shown the state in which the button effect of this embodiment was performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 419 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 419 (b) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (c) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (d) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the adolescent is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (e) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (f) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, an effect change animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "effect change animation") is executed in which the image of the head of the young man on the left is erased and a large effect image is displayed in parallel with the button erase animation. It is done. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (g) shows a state in which a second effect is performed after the button deletion animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of the adolescent is displayed near the position where the left and center button images were displayed. The standing image is displayed in a size that hides a part of the valid period image. As described above, in the present embodiment, the character image of the same type (youth) is changed and displayed for each button operation. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. In the present embodiment, the decreasing direction of the gauge of the effective period image and the direction of the erasing order of the button images are the same.

  FIG. 419 (h) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (i) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Further, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a presentation change animation in which a standing image of a youth is deleted and a large effect image is displayed is executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (j) shows a state in which a second effect is performed after the button deletion animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of a young man similar to the character F in FIG. 390 (c) is displayed near the position where the left and center button images have been displayed. The standing image is displayed in a size that hides a part of the valid period image. As described above, in the present embodiment, the character image of the same type (youth) is changed and displayed for each button operation. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 419 (k) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the fourth time while the button effect is being executed. This button operation is a condition for generating the first effect. In this example, there are three button displays, and the effect of performing the button operation for each button display requires three button operations, and further, the fourth button operation is necessary to generate the first effect. It has become. That is, four button operations (depression) are required to generate the first effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

FIG. 419 (l) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the character image of the adolescent is largely displayed on the center right side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string of "super heat! SP reach!" Is displayed on the left side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 419 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 413 (q) to FIG. 414 (e) is executed (Example 8).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 420 (a)-FIG. 420 (q) have shown the special figure change game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 420 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIG. 420 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 420 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special view 1 change game.

  In (d) of FIG. 420, while "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 change game, the character of "reach" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and reach effect is displayed. It shows the started condition.

  FIG. 420 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIGS. 420 (f) to 420 (k) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 change game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case is shown where the continuous hit effect animation is executed as a button effect after the start of the reach effect.

  FIG. 420 (f) shows a state in which the continuous shot effect animation has been started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, an operation request image of a circular display mode in which the character of “push” is displayed inside as an image suggesting the chance button 136 as the operation means slightly right of the effect display area 208 d , And one "push" button image is displayed. In the upper left corner of the "push" button image, a character string of "drop continuously" is displayed. One valid period image is displayed below the "push" button image. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge display, and the gauge display is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The gauge display is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 420 (g) shows a state in which the continuous hit presentation animation is being executed. The display of the “push” button image increases as the operation effective period elapses. At least one of the display of the plurality of "push" button images hides a part of the gauge display. Also, only one gauge image is displayed for display of a plurality of “push” button images. Informing the player that the common operation valid period is easy to understand by setting the gauge display to one while plural button operations are requested by displaying a plurality of "push" button images. There are times when you can. The gauge display may be plural. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 420 (h) shows a state in which the continuous shot effect animation is being executed. In the effect display area 208 d, one “push” button image of the deca-button display is displayed as a first animation mode among the display of a plurality of “push” button images. The first animation mode of the deca-button display is an image larger than the second animation mode which is a button display mode other than the deca-button display. In addition, the button display mode other than the deca-button display is displaying a black "press" character on a white background, but the button display mode of the deca-button display is displaying a black "push" character on a green background. There are cases where it is possible to cause the button display itself to function as a notice such as the change due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display. Also, among button display modes other than the deca-button display, there are button display modes in which a red "push" character is displayed on a white background, for example, in addition to the black "push" character display on the white background May be There are also cases where the button display itself can be functioned as a notice of the change or the like depending on the difference in the button display mode. In addition, part of the hold icon and part of the gauge display are hidden by the "push" button image.

  FIG. 420 (h) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being performed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  Further, FIG. 420 (h) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. Every time there is an acceptance of pressing of the chance button 136, the button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erase animation, instead of the display of the button image as the first display, the display of the effect image as the third display is performed. The effect image is a button erased image and is included in the button erased animation. The display of the button image is an erasable display in association with the operation of the chance button 136, and the display of the button-deleted image is an executable display when the display of the button image is erased. The display of the button-deleted image is a display that can be started in association with the chance button 136 being pressed (operated). As described above, since the button deletion animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform the button operation. Note that the display of the button-deleted image may be a display that is executed regardless of the operation of the operation unit. By executing the deletion animation of the button display, it may be possible to notify that the player has accepted the pressing of the chance button.

  Furthermore, after the disappearance of the effect image, as a second effect, an image of the character with the button image of "excellent" (hereinafter may be referred to as an "excellent" image) or an image of the character of "good" (hereinafter, "good" image The effect that changes to) may be executed. An effect that changes to an "excellent" image or a "good" image is an effect that can be started in conjunction with the chance button 136 being pressed. The effect that the button image changes to the "excellent" image or the "good" image is an effect that can be started after the button deletion animation is performed. Since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the deletion animation of the button display, the second effect may be made noticeable. Also, the second effect may be an effect that can be started during execution of the button delete animation or before the start of the button delete animation. Note that it is not necessary to always execute the button deletion animation every time the acceptance of the pressing of the chance button 136, and it may be executed for some or all of the plurality of button images.

  FIG. 420 (i) shows a state in which the player continuously hit the chance button 136 during execution of the hit sequence animation. By the player's continuous hit of the chance button 136, an effect is performed in which a plurality of "push" button images change from effect display to button display of "excellent" images or "good" images by button deletion animation. Notice that the "push" button image of the Deca button display is also changed to an image of the character "" (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the" image) through the effect display and there is a high possibility of development to SP reach. doing. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 420 (i) shows a pattern imitating a speaker and a character string "Keen", and a sound that indicates a high possibility of SP reach entry from the speaker 120 is used as a sound effect for an image preview effect. Synchronized and running. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is greatly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is reduced is notified.

  FIG. 420 (j) shows a state where the operation effective period is lost while the player is continuously hitting the chance button 136 and the continuous hitting effect animation is ended. When the operation effective period disappears, the effective period image deletion animation is started. In the effective period image deletion animation, instead of the display of the effective period image as the second display, the effect image as the third display is displayed. The effect image is an effective period image deletion image and is included in the effective period image deletion animation.

  FIG. 420 (k) shows a first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of the button continuous hitting operation. In this example, as a first effect, the image of the character F shown in FIG. 390 (c) is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character “I” is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIGS. 420 (l) to (o) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 420 (l) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 420 (m) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 420 (n), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the samurai shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. FIG. 420 (o) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 420 (p) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c is displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 420 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit (Example 9)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. FIGS. 421 (a) to 422 (c) show the special figure variation game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 421 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 stop and display the first special figure "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIG. 421 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 421 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 421 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 421 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and are displayed adjacent to the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of a display mode imitating the direction key 137 is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 421 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 while executing the button effect. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (g) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and received, the button image on the right (direction key image) is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (h) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (i) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the second button operation during execution of the button effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (k) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (l) shows a special effect performed during execution of the second effect in the middle of the operation effective period. In the effect, although the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208 b is “normal”, it is changed to “vibration + rotation”. Moreover, what the color of a gauge was "blue" as a display mode of a gauge display is changing to "yellow". In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. As described above, it may be possible to give notice of the change by changing the display mode of the button image or the gauge image.

  FIG. 421 (m) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 421 (n) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Also, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a gauge image deletion animation is executed in which the effect image is also deleted after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  FIG. 421 (o) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In the present example, as a first effect, the character string “SP” is largely displayed between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIGS. 421 (p) to 422 (a) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 421 (p) shows a state in which the SP reach effect has been started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 421 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 421 (r), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect advances to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. In this example, while the display mode of the button image is “signal + rotation”, the button mode of the chance button 136 is “normal”. Thus, the display mode of the button image and the button mode of the chance button 136 may be different. FIG. 422 (a) following FIG. 421 (r) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 422 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208 from the reduction display. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 422 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit (Example 10)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 423. In the present embodiment, characteristic effects performed from the start of the button effect to the start of the first first effect will be described. FIG. 423 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 423 (b) shows a state in which the player presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 423 (c) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the pressing of the direction key 137 is accepted instead of the chance button 136, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 423 (d) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the adolescent is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second effect is performed even when the direction key 137 other than the chance button 136 is pressed while the image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed as the button image. (Example 11)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 424 (a) to 424 (r) show the special figure changing game in this order in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 424 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special view I" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIG. 424 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 424 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 424 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 424 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and are displayed adjacent to the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of a display mode imitating the direction key 137 is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 424 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 while executing the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 424 (g) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is first pressed and accepted, the button image on the left is erased by the button erasure animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 424 (h) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 424 (i) shows a state in which the rod portion of the effective period image is reported to be further shortened in the left direction, indicating that the operation effective period during execution of the button effect is reduced to about half. ing.

  FIG. 424 (j) shows a state in which the operation valid period has expired and the remaining period of the gauge display is 0 as an empty frame image without a gauge portion.

  In (k) of FIG. 424, the button deletion animation starts when the next button operation is not performed within the operation valid period after the first chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation valid period has expired. It shows the condition that has been In the button deletion animation, the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d and the direction key image displayed on the right side thereof are deleted. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Thus, the display mode of the button deletion animation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the button operation during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 424 (l) shows a third effect (for example, corresponding to the first effect of Example 2-1) executed after the second effect during execution of the button effect. In the third effect of this example, forced display of a decorative symbol is performed. As a third effect, the "decoration 3" stop display is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since "decoration 3" is displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, reach effect is started from this time. In addition, an image imitating "decoration 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left of the effect display area 208d was displayed, and an image imitating "decoration 3" in the area where the direction key image on the right is displayed. Is displayed, and in the area where the button image at the center was displayed, an image simulating the variable display of the decorative symbol is animated. In this example, when the number of button operations within the operation effective period is smaller than the number of button images displayed in the effect display area 208d, the variation display of the decorative symbol is simulated as a third effect in the effect display area 208d. The displayed image is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIGS. 424 (m) to 424 (p) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 424 (m) shows a state in which the SP reach effect has been started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 424 (n) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 424 (o), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts “Well! FIG. 424 (p) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 424 (q) shows a state where the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 424 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit (Example 12)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 425. FIG. 425 (a)-FIG. 425 (n) have shown the special figure change game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 425 (a) has shown the state in which the special figure change game was complete | finished. In the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special view I" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIG. 425 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started and the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 425 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area ing.

  FIG. 425 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 425 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and are displayed adjacent to the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of a display mode imitating the direction key 137 is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 425 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 425 (g) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is first pressed and accepted, the button image on the left is erased by the button erasure animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 425 (h) shows the second rendering to be performed next to the button deletion animation while the button rendering is being performed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 425 (i) shows a state in which the rod portion of the effective period image is further shortened in the left direction to notify that the operation effective period during execution of the button effect is reduced to about half. ing.

  FIG. 425 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. In this example, when the button operation is not performed for a predetermined time within the operation valid period, the button deletion animation is executed as an effect based on the button operation triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Thereby, the button image on the right side (direction key image) is erased by the button erasure animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 425 (k) shows a second rendering that is forcibly performed after the button deletion animation while the button rendering is being performed. In the second effect of this example, forced display of symbols is performed. As a second effect, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since "decoration 3" is displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, reach effect is started from this time. Moreover, the image which imitated "decoration 3" is displayed on the area | region where the button image of the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 425 (l) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time while the button effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 425 (j), once the button deletion animation is executed without performing the button operation, then the second effect is executed, but if the operation valid period remains, the remaining buttons A new button operation may be performed on the display of the image to proceed to the effect of the next button deletion animation. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 425 (m) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Also, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a gauge image deletion animation is executed in which the effect image is also deleted after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

FIG. 425 (n) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In the present example, as a first effect, the character string “SP” is largely displayed between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.
It will be as follows if it summarizes about Examples 9-12 demonstrated above.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 and a direction key 137 as a plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate. At least one of the plurality of operation means is, for example, the chance button 136 as a first operation means, and at least one of the plurality of operation means is, for example, the direction key 137 as a second operation means. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, an effect display area 208d as display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the display of the chance button image as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the display of the direction key image as the second display. It is. The first display is a display of a button image including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136, and the second display is a display including at least a display of a directional key image suggesting the directional key 137. The first display is, for example, a display that can be started at least during the execution of a button effect as a first period, and the second display is also a display that can be started at least in the first period.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image as the first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the second As an effect, for example, it is an effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image. The first effect is, for example, an effect that can be started at least in association with pressing of the chance button 136, and the second effect can be started, at least, in response to pressing of the direction key 137, for example. It is an effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the effect are in a corresponding relationship, and the effect order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. Can provide a game console with Moreover, there are cases where it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the operation means.

  In addition, for example, in the operation valid period, at least the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is valid as the second period, and the direction key 137 is at least valid as the reception of the operation of the direction key 137 in the operation valid period. Become. The execution period of the button effect is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period. When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image, and the direction key 137 is operated during the operation valid period. If so, it is possible to at least start an effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation effective periods of the plurality of operation means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operation means in one operation effective period.

  In addition, as the first condition, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the direction key image when the chance button 136 is operated before the direction key 137 is operated in the operation effective period as another condition. The effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image can be started earlier than the effect of displaying the image, and the second condition is the direction before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. When the key 137 is operated, it is possible to start an effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image rather than an effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effects corresponding to the operation means operated earlier are performed first, there is a case where the player can select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.

  When only the chance button 136 is operated prior to the direction key 137 being operated in the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes an effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image. If it is possible and only the direction key 137 is operated before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, only the effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image is executed. It is possible.

  The effect display area 208 d can execute at least the display of the chance button image of, for example, 2 as the first number, and can at least the display of the direction key image of, for example, 1 as the second number. In addition, at least one of a plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect (see FIG. 424) in which a decorative symbol is forcibly displayed as a third effect, and an effect in which a decorative symbol is forcibly displayed is a third condition. This is an effect that can be performed at least when the chance button 136 is operated two times as the first number and the direction key 137 is operated one time as the second number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there is a third effect as effects appearing in multiple operations, and there are a plurality of operation means, so the need for the first operation means and the second operation means In some cases, notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner by matching the number of operation times with the number of displays.

  The third condition may be satisfied when the operation effective period ends. A third effect may occur at the end of the operation effective period. The third effect may not be performed when the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation effective period.

  The chance button 136 can at least take, for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.) as a plurality of states, and among the plurality of states In at least one of the first states, for example, the button mode is "normal", and in the at least one of the plurality of states, for example, the button mode is "vibration" as the second state; The second state is a state different from the first state. The display of the chance button image can be displayed at least in, for example, “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “decabutton display”, etc., as a plurality of display modes, and at least one of the plurality of display modes One is, for example, "normal" as the first display mode, at least one of the plurality of display modes is, for example, "vibration" as the second display mode, and the second display mode is This is a display mode different from the first display mode. The first display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the first state, and the second display mode is a display mode at least corresponding to the second state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, variations may be increased between the button state and the display mode depending on the display mode according to the state of the first operation means.

  The first operation means is a chance button 136 capable of rotation, vibration and light emission, and the second operation means may be the direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operation means may be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operation means and the second operation means may be configured to be capable of taking a plurality of states.

  Further, the first display mode may be configured to correspond to the second state, and the second display mode may be configured to correspond to the first state.

  At least one of the plurality of types of displays is, for example, a display of the effective period image as the third display, and the display of the effective period image can at least suggest the operation effective period,

  The effect display symbol 208d can execute at least the display of the effective period image which is, for example, 1 as the third number.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. Note that the third display may be plural (Example 13)

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 426 to 429. FIGS. 426 (a) to 429 (c) show, in this order, the special figure variation game with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment and the subsequent big hit game in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game and the following big hit game in time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 426 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". An “x” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special drawing 1 indicating that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special drawing 2 An "x" image is displayed indicating that the result of the game is out. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIGS. 426 (b) to (f) show the start and end of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. FIG. 426 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 426 (c) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon a2 related to the reserve of the second special figure 1 is displayed not as a normal display but as an image imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “button reserve icon”) In the predetermined reliability, the advance notice for warning that indicates the jackpot of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is performed. The button hold icon is also an image display for prompting the player to press the chance button 136, and the appearance of the image causes an effect by the button hold icon to be started. In the effect by the button holding icon, the display of the operation effective period using the gauge display etc. is not performed. As long as the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effective period of operation in the effect by the button hold icon is ended with the start of the special view fluctuation game according to the button hold icon.

  FIG. 426 (d) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time of pressing the chance button 136, no other button effect is started, so the acceptance of the pressing is used for the effect by the button hold icon.

  FIG. 426 (e) shows a state in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon a2 has been changed from the button hold icon image to the normal display image, triggered by the reception of the pressing of the chance button 136. The effect by the button holding icon here is an effect that it is changed from the button holding icon image to the normal display image and it becomes clear that the advance notice is a false notification.

  FIG. 426 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is out.

  FIG. 426 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 426 (h) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon a2 pertaining to the reserve of the second special figure 1 is a display mode that is not a normal display but is displayed as a button reserve icon, and the special figure 1 variation game pertaining to the reserve with a predetermined reliability We give advance notices that suggest a big hit. Moreover, the effect by the button hold icon is started earlier than the button effect. In the effect by the button hold icon, the effective period image is not displayed. The operation effective period of the effect by the button holding icon ends, for example, before the special map change game relating to the holding is started.

  FIG. 426 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, the variation display of the decoration symbol is continued.

  In FIG. 426 (j), with "decoration 3" temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b The variable display continues, and the character string "reach" is displayed in the center, indicating that the reach effect has been started.

  FIG. 426 (k) to FIG. 427 (c) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 426 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed.

  FIG. 426 (l) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 426 (l) to the state shown in FIG. 427 (c), the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect overlap.

  FIG. 426 (m) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed in an overlapping manner. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 426 (n) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this example, when the depression by the chance button 136 is received when the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed in an overlapping manner, the button effect is preferentially processed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 426 (o) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button delete animation while the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 426 (p) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 426 (q) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 426 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 427 (a) shows a state in which a second effect is performed after the button deletion animation following FIG. 426 (r). As a second effect, the Echigoya image is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 427 (b) shows the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since the Echigoya image different from the panda image for the button image on the left side is displayed at the position of the button image in the center, the three displayed in the button effect description display regardless of the presence or absence of the third depression of the chance button 136 by the player. The condition of “SP reach development!” Is not satisfied. Therefore, the second effect is executed in which the button image on the right side is erased and the Echigoya image is displayed instead without waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains.

  FIG. 427 (c) shows a first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as a first effect, the Echigoya image is largely displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string "Sorry!" Is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed into the SP (super) reach. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed temporarily.

  FIG. 427 (d) continuing from FIG. 427 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed normally. ing. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 427 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off .

  FIGS. 427 (f) to 427 (j) show the start and end of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. FIG. 427 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special view 1 reserve icon display area, the special view 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in response to the saving of the reserve, and the button reserve icon image next to the right moves to the left and is displayed as the special view 1 reserve icon a1. Be done. The presentation by the button hold icon is ongoing.

  FIG. 427 (g) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. In this example, the second special view 1 hold icon a2 is restricted because the button hold icon is already displayed on the first hold even if the button hold icon is scheduled to appear in the pre-reading notice lottery. , Is a display mode of normal display.

  FIG. 427 (h) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time of pressing the chance button 136, no other button effect is started, so the acceptance of the pressing is used for the effect by the button hold icon.

  FIG. 427 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon a1 has been changed from the button hold icon image to an image resembling the head of a youth, triggered by acceptance of pressing of the chance button 136. The effect by the button hold icon in this example is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of the adolescent, and a predetermined advance notice is given.

  FIG. 427 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is finished. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is out.

  FIG. 427 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 427 (l) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon a2 pertaining to the reserve of the second special figure 1 is a display mode that is not a normal display but is displayed as a button reserve icon, and the special figure 1 variation game pertaining to the reserve with a predetermined reliability We give advance notices that suggest a big hit. Also, the effect by the button hold icon is started.

  FIG. 427 (m) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, variation display of the decoration symbol is continued.

  In FIG. 427 (n), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c in a state where "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and in the middle symbol display area 208b The variable display continues, and the character string "reach" is displayed in the center, indicating that the reach effect has been started.

  FIG. 427 (o) to FIG. 428 (n) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 427 (o) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed.

  FIG. 427 (p) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 427 (p) to the state shown in FIG. 428 (r), the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect overlap.

  FIG. 427 (q) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed in an overlapping manner. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 427 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. The figure shows a state in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon a2 has been changed from the button hold icon image to an image resembling the head of a youth, triggered by the reception of the first press of the chance button 136. The effect by the button hold icon in this example is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of the adolescent, and a predetermined advance notice is given. In this example, when the depression by the chance button 136 is received when the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are executed in duplicate, the effect by the button hold icon is processed with priority. There is. In the effective period image of the button effect, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation effective period is further shortened is notified.

  FIG. 428 (a) shows a state where the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (b) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (c) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (d) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (e) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (f) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (g) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the center button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed with a size that hides a part of the panda image adjacent to the left and a part of the valid period image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (h) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the central panda image is reduced and displayed, and the panda image on the left side and the effective period image are all visible by reduced display of the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d has changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. As described above, the display mode of the button image may change in the middle of the operation valid period. In addition, the button mode may be changed according to the change in the display mode of the button image. In some cases, it is possible to give notice of the change.

  FIG. 428 (j) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 428 (k) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  Further, in the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 428 (k), since the button image having the display mode of “vibration + rotation” is displayed, the button display animation of displaying the “normal” button mode is displayed The effect image is displayed that is larger than the effect image. As described above, in the button rendition of the present embodiment, button images can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and a button image having a display mode of “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is "normal" can be used. By doing this, the button display itself may be able to function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

  FIG. 428 (l) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the right side was displayed. The panda image is displayed so as to hide a part of the central panda image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. Since the operation effective period has passed, the effective period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 428 (m) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image on the right side is reduced and displayed, and it is informed that three panda images of the same size are aligned in a single horizontal row and the condition of “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is satisfied. It is done.

  FIG. 428 (n) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 385 (a) is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character “SP development” is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. Moreover, in this example, the image of the hold icon is erased and not displayed until the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 428 (o) to FIG. 428 (r) is finished after the first effect.

  FIGS. 428 (o) to 428 (r) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 428 (o) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 428 (p) shows a state in which the deca-button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 428 (q), when the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. FIG. 428 (r) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 429 (a) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208 and displayed normally. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 429 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit . After this, the 15R special big hit game is started.

FIG. 429 (c) shows the big hit game end production in which the 15R special big hit game is finished. After the big hit game, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed again in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string of "probable change: right strike" It is displayed. As for the special figure 1 hold, since the big hit game has passed, the display mode of all the hold icons is the default normal display.
The following is a summary of the thirteenth embodiment described above.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of effect display areas 208d as a display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays. For example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of at least performing various types of effects is provided. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the display of the chance button image as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the button hold as the second display. It is a display of an icon. The display of the chance button image is a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136, and a display of the button hold icon is also a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136.

  The effect display area 208d can at least display the first number (for example, three) of the chance button images. The display of the chance button image can be started at least during, for example, the period of the special feature variation game as a first period, and the display of the button holding icon is as a second period, for example, during the special feature variation game period It can at least start. The chance button 136 is controlled such that acceptance of the operation becomes effective in a plurality of periods, and at least one of the plurality of periods is, for example, an operation effective period in the button effect as a first effective period. The at least one of the plurality of periods is, for example, a second effective period, which is an operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon. The first period is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period in the button effect, and the second period is a period including at least a portion of the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon.

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect that notifies the result of the button operation as the first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, the second effect. It is an advance notice announcement effect by the hold icon. The effect of notifying the result of the button operation is an effect performed at least in relation to the display of the chance button image, and the pre-read notice effect by the hold icon is an effect performed at least in relation to the display of the button hold icon. The effect of notifying the result of the button operation is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period of the button effect reaches a second number (for example, three). The first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, and the second period is a period that may overlap with the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, so that the game console having a feature in the display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, variations of button effects may be able to be increased.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d can at least display an effective period image, for example, as a third display capable of suggesting an operation effective period in the button effect, and the effect display means 208d can display the effect by the button hold icon. It does not display that can suggest the operation effective period. In the button effect, the effective period is displayed, and in the effect by the button hold icon, the effective period is not displayed, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  Moreover, the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon is a period longer than the operation effective period in the button effect. Since the effective period of operation in the effect by the button hold icon with no effective period display is longer than the effective period of operation with the button effect with effective period display, the button operation for the effect of notifying the result of the button operation by the effective period display It may be possible to prompt.

  In addition, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 as an advance notice means capable of at least executing a preliminary announcement for the special figure variation game and a preliminary announcement for the special figure variation game relating to suspension, for example, as a preliminary notice. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 as at least a pre-read advance notice means that can be executed, and the notice means causes the effect display area 208 d to notify the result of the button operation to the special figure change game The advance notice means can execute at least the advance notice by causing the effect display area 208d to perform the advance notice effect by the hold icon.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button effect includes notification of the notice of the change, and the effect by the button hold icon includes notification of the advance notice, so the combination of the display type of the button and the type of notice In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation.

  Further, for example, a special display area 208d defining a special view 1 reserve display area as a reserve display means capable of displaying at least special figure 1 reserve icons a1 and a2) as a plurality of types of reserve icons is provided. At 208d, it is possible to at least notify the number of reservations regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of suspension icons displayed. At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is, for example, a button holding icon as a first holding icon, and at least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is, for example, a second holding icon. It is a holding icon of the image imitating the head of the adolescent. The display of the button hold icon is a button hold icon. The pre-read notice effect by the hold icon includes at least an effect of changing the button hold icon into a hold icon of an image imitating the head of a youth in association with the operation of the chance button 136.

  Since the effect by the button hold icon includes the pre-reading notice of the hold icon, the hold icon is a display that is erased in relation to the start of the symbol variation display, and the display of the effective period regarding the second effective period is not performed. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to recognize.

  Further, the effect display area 208d does not display a new button hold icon during a period in which the button hold icon is displayed. Since a plurality of button holding icons are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the button rendering from becoming too complicated.

  In addition, the pre-read notice effect by the hold icon is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the effect by the button hold icon becomes the third number, and the third The number is a number smaller than the second number. The number of button operations for performing the second effect is smaller than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208, when the operation effective period in the button effect and the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon overlap, pre-read advance notice effect by the hold icon rather than the effect of notifying the result of the button operation It is feasible first. In the button operation when the effective periods overlap, priority is given to the pre-reading advance notice effect by the hold icon, so by performing the pre-reading advance notice effect by the hold icon not suggesting the effective period first, the operation effect in the button effect is effective In some cases, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the button in order to perform both the advance notice effect by the hold icon and the effect of notifying the result of the button operation during the period.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208, when the operation effective period in the button effect and the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon overlap, the effect of notifying the result of the button operation rather than the advance notice effect by the hold icon It is feasible first.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, in the button operation in the case where the effective periods overlap, priority is given to the effect of notifying the result of the button operation, so the effect by the operation effect in the button effect and the effect by the button hold icon Even when the effective period of the operation overlaps, by giving priority to one of the effects, it may be possible to continue the button operation until the other effect is performed.

  Further, the effect display area 208d can display at least the display of the fourth number effective period image, and the fourth number is one. By setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests), it may be possible to inform the player of the common operation valid period in an easy-to-understand manner. The second display may be plural.

Also, the second number may be the same as the first number. By doing this, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, it may be possible to inform the player of the number of times of button operation necessary to execute the first effect. Example 14)

Next, a specific example of a button image according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 430. Although the display mode of a plurality of button images is shown in FIG. 387 of the seventh embodiment, a button image of a display mode when the chance button 136 is viewed from obliquely above as shown in FIG. It may be In the button image shown in (a) of the figure, the character of “push” is displayed in the area indicating the pressed surface. The button image shown in FIG. 6B has the same outline as that of the button image shown in FIG. 6A, but the display color is different. Moreover, the character string "PUSH" is displayed on the area | region which shows a pressing surface. In this manner, it is possible to notify the advance notice of the success or failure of the change by changing the display of the color or the pressed surface with the same outline. The figure (c) is a button image of the display mode of the state which looked at the vertically long chance button 136 from diagonally upward, and the character image is added to the button side and a pressing surface. If at least a notification prompting the button operation is included, it can be recognized as a button, and the button image may include a character image or the like (Example 15).

Next, a specific example of a gauge image (effective period image) according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 431 shows a specific example of a gauge image which can be displayed in place of the gauge image shown in, for example, FIG. 428 (a). In the gauge image shown in FIG. 431 (a), a character image is displayed in the gauge. It may be a gauge with a pattern or a pattern outside the character image. In the gauge image shown in FIG. 431 (b), the button image is displayed integrally with the gauge image. In this example, three button images are displayed in one horizontal row, but one or more button images may be used. The gauge image shown in FIG. 431 (c) includes an image suggesting the timing of button operation within the operation valid period. In this example, the display mode is such that three button images are respectively arranged at positions of times at which button operations in the gauge are to be performed. In the same figure (c-1), when the operation effective period has passed a little, the rod-like portion of the gauge image becomes somewhat short in the right direction, and a state in which the operation effective period becomes a little short is reported. The same figure (c-2) has shown the state which the rod-shaped part of a gauge image becomes short rightward, and the tip of a stick has overlapped with the button image on the left side after the operation effective period passes further. It indicates that this display is the timing when the chance button 136 is pressed first. The figure (c-3) has shown the state which the rod-shaped part of a gauge image becomes short rightward, and the tip of a stick has overlapped with the 2nd button image from the left after the operation effective period passes further. . This display indicates that it is the timing to press the chance button 136 for the second time (Example 16)

  Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 432 (a) to (f), FIGS. 432 (a ') to (f'), and FIGS. 432 (a '') to (f '') are, in this order, especially the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Figure fluctuation game is shown in time series. FIGS. 433 (a) to (f), 433 (a ') to (f'), and 433 (a ′ ′) to (f ′ ′), respectively, in this order, are particularly suitable for the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Figure fluctuation game is shown in time series. FIG. 433 (a) continues from FIG. 432 (f), FIG. 433 (a ') continues from FIG. 432 (f'), and FIG. 433 (a ′ ′) shows FIG. Continued from f ′ ′). FIGS. 434 (a) to (f), 434 (a ') to (f'), and 434 (a ′ ′) to (f ′ ′) are, respectively, in this order, especially in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Figure fluctuation game is shown in time series. FIG. 434 (a) continues from FIG. 433 (f), FIG. 434 (a ') continues from FIG. 433 (f'), and FIG. Continued from f ′ ′). Further, FIGS. 434 (d) to (i) show, in this order, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Further, FIG. 434 (d) continues from each of FIG. 434 (c), FIG. 434 (c '), and FIG. 434 (c' '). In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game and the following big hit game in time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 432 (a)-FIG. 434 (c) have shown the special figure change game in non-auto button mode in time series. FIG. 432 (a ')-FIG. 434 (c') have shown the special figure fluctuation game in 1st auto button mode in time series. FIG. 432 (a '')-FIG. 434 (c '') have shown the special figure change game in 2nd auto button mode in time series.

  Each of FIG. 432 (a), (a '), and (a' ') has shown the state in which the special figure fluctuation game was complete | finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 stop and display the first special figure "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIG. 432 (a) shows the state in the non-auto button mode. FIG. 432 (a ′) shows the state in the first auto button mode. In the first auto button mode, the display mode is the same as the non-auto button mode, and it is difficult for the player to know that the auto button mode is currently in progress. FIG. 432 (a ′ ′) shows the state in the second auto button mode. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the player is notified that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  Each of FIG. 432 (b), (b ') and (b' ') has shown the state in which the following special figure 1 fluctuation game is started and the said special figure 1 fluctuation game is performed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the second auto button mode of FIG. 432 (b ′ ′), the character string “Auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208 d.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (b ') is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (b), and the player knows that the auto button mode is currently in progress. It is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (b ′ ′), a character string of “Auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208 d to inform the player that the current mode is the auto button mode. It is done.

  In each of FIGS. 432 (c), (c ′) and (c ′ ′), the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced and displayed from the center of the original display area to the upper left corner of the display area. A state 208d indicates that the display area is enlarged at the center.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (c ') is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (c), and the player knows that the auto button mode is currently in progress. It is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (c ′ ′), a character string of “auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to inform the player that the current mode is the auto button mode. It is done.

  FIG. 432 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  Although the explanatory display of the button effect is performed even in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (d ′), since the button operation during the button effect is performed automatically, the display mode of the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. Is displayed in a display mode in which the character string "PUSH" is deleted. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (d ′ ′), no button effect is performed. For this reason, the explanation display of the button effect is not executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 432 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed on the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of the display mode is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  The display mode of the start of the button effect in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (e ′) is also an effective period image showing the operation effective period in which the character string “PUSH” shown in FIG. 432 (e) is erased. Is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (e ′ ′), only the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, but the button effect is not started. Therefore, no button display or gauge display is performed.

  FIG. 432F shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (f '), the button effect is executed in a display mode in which the character string "PUSH" shown in FIG. 432 (f) is deleted. Moreover, the effective period image which shows the operation effective period of button production is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 432 (f ′ ′), another effect different from the button effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 433 (a) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and received, the button image on the right (direction key image) is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (a ′), the button image on the left side is automatically deleted even though no button operation is performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Further, the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 433 (a) is not executed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (a ′ ′). In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 433 (b) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (b ′) also shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in response to the automatic button operation. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (b ''). In another effect, the character string "3 on the left" is displayed to notify the left symbol display area 208a that "decoration 3" has been temporarily stopped. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 433 (c) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 as the second button operation during execution of the button effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (c '), the button operation is automatically performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (c ′ ′). In another effect, an image imitating "decoration 3" is displayed on the left side. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 433 (d) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (d '), the button image on the right side is automatically deleted even though no button operation is performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (d ′ ′). In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 433 (e) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  Also in the first automatic button mode shown in FIG. 433 (e '), in the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a triggered by an automatic button operation. There is. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the right side of the effect display area 208 d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (e ′ ′). In another effect, a character string "3 on the right" is displayed to notify the right symbol display area 208c that "decoration 3" has been temporarily stopped. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 433 (f) shows a special effect performed during execution of the second effect in the middle of the operation effective period. In the effect, although the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208b is "normal", it is changed to "vibration + rotation" to give notice of the change. Further, as the display mode of the gauge display, for example, the one in which the color of the gauge is "blue" changes to "yellow" to give notice of the change. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (f '), the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208b is "normal", but changes to "vibration + rotation", We have indicated the change. In the first auto button mode, even if the button mode of the chance button 136 is not changed, it is possible to notify the player of the change in advance by button display. In addition, the button mode may be changed to give advance notice. Further, as the display mode of the gauge display, for example, the one in which the color of the gauge is "blue" changes to "yellow" to give notice of the change. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (f ′ ′). In another effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed on the right. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 434 (a) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 434 (a ′), button operation is automatically performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 433 (c ′ ′). In the second auto button mode, the character string "Auto" in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d is deleted.

  FIG. 434 (b) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Also, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a gauge image deletion animation is executed in which the effect image is also deleted after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 434 (b ′), the button deletion animation is executed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 434 (b). Thus, the button deletion animation may be executed in the first auto button mode, or the button deletion animation may or may not be performed for each button operation. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 434 (b '').

  FIG. 434 (c) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In the present example, as a first effect, the character string “SP” is largely displayed between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 434 (c '), the same first effect as that shown in FIG. 434 (c) is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 434 (c ′ ′), as another effect, the same image as the character F shown in FIG. 390 (c) between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208 d Is displayed, and the text "It's SP reach" is displayed at the top of it. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIG. 434 (d) to FIG. 434 (i) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 434 (d) shows a state in which the SP reach effect has been started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 434 (e) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 434 (f), when the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. FIG. 434 (g) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 434 (h) shows a state where the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 434 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit (Example 17)

  Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 435 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 stop and display the first special figure "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG. 380 (a).

  FIG. 435 (a) shows the state in the third auto button mode. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the player is notified that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  FIG. 435 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 435 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 435 (d) shows a state where the button effect in the third auto button mode is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 435 (e) shows a state in which the button effect in the third auto button mode is started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed on the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of the display mode is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 435 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 while executing the button effect in the third auto button mode. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 435 (g) shows a state in which a button operation performed by the player is effective during execution of the button effect in the third auto button mode, and a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed. When the direction key 137 is pressed first and there is a button acceptance, the button image on the right side (direction key image) is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 435 (h) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation during execution of the button effect in the third auto button mode. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 435 (e ′) shows a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 (e). This modification shows that the number of button images may be smaller than the number of button images in the non-automatic button effect. In the auto button state, since the button operation is automatically performed, it is sufficient for the player to recognize that the effect is the button effect, and therefore, the button display may be one.

As described above, the button effect in the auto button mode can be performed in the same display mode as the button effect in the non-auto button mode. Further, in the auto button mode of this embodiment, the button operation by the player is also effectively accepted to perform a predetermined effect.
The following is a summary of the embodiments (2-16 to 17) described above.

  The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a presentation display area 208d as a display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect means capable of at least executing an effect notifying the result of a button operation as one effect, and a mode control means capable of at least executing switching control of a plurality of types of modes. For example, the first sub control unit 400 is provided. At least one of the plurality of types of modes is, for example, a non-auto button mode as a first mode, and at least one of the plurality of types of modes is, for example, an auto button mode as a second mode It is. The non-auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and the auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated.

  At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a button image including, for example, a character string of "PUSH" as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is the second As a display, for example, display of a button image not including the characters “PUSH” or non-display of a button image. The display of the button image containing the character string "PUSH" is a display corresponding at least to the non-auto button mode, and the display of the button image not containing the characters "PUSH" is a display corresponding at least to the auto button mode . The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" can be started at least, for example, in the execution period of the special figure variation game as the first period, and the display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" is It is possible to start at least in the execution period of the special figure change game. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136. The execution period of the special feature variation game is, for example, a period including at least a part of the operation effective period as the third period of the period during which the reception regarding the operation of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The effect display area 208 d can at least display a display of a button image including a character string “PUSH” which is the first number (for example, 3). The effect of notifying the result of the button operation can be performed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated in the operation valid period becomes a second number (for example, 2). The first number is two or more, and the second number is two or more. The display of the button image not including the characters “PUSH” is at least partially different from the display of the button image including the character string “PUSH”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display of the button effect differs between the auto button mode and the non-auto button mode, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means. In addition, there are cases where the mode can be easily recognized due to the difference between the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an effect display area 208d as decorative symbol display means capable of at least performing decorative symbol variation display. The effect display area 208d can at least execute, for example, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right pattern display regions 208a to 208c as the first decorative symbol fluctuation display. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the non-auto button mode, The display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the operation of the button is necessary by clarifying the part where the display is different depending on the mode in the same kind of decorative symbol variation display. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 as a notice means capable of at least executing, for example, a notice of whether or not to develop the special game with the special map change game. ing. The display of the button image including the character string of "PUSH" is a display that is at least a part of the notice of the success or failure of the special figure variation game, and the display of the button image not including the characters of "PUSH" is the special figure variation It is a display that becomes at least a part of the notice of the game. The display of the button image including the character string of "PUSH" may not be started during the execution period of the special figure variation game in the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and the characters of "PUSH" The display of the button image not including may not be started during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game in the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c.

  Further, the effect display area 208d can at least execute the variable display of another decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display region 208a to 208c as the second decorative symbol variable display. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" is, for example, another special view change game execution period as another special view change game execution period of another decorative symbol change display in the non-auto button mode. The display of the button image that can be started at least and does not include the character string "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of another special-pattern variation game of the variation display of another decoration symbol in the auto button mode. By doing this, it is possible to execute the button effect even in another decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" is a display including at least the display of the operation period image as a display capable of suggesting the operation valid period, and a button not including the character string "PUSH" The display of the image is a display not including at least a display capable of suggesting the operation effective period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display of the effective period is not performed in the auto button mode. In the auto button mode, since the button operation is automatically performed, it is not necessary to display the effective period, and there is a case where it is possible to reduce the risk of the player making a false recognition (a false recognition that the button operation is necessary). .

  The display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" is a display including at least the display suggesting the chance button 136, and the effect display area 208d is a character of "PUSH" which is a third number (for example, 0) And the third number is a number smaller than the first number. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button displays in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of displays in the non-auto button mode.

  Also, when the third number is one, the button display in the auto button mode is one, so the player recognizes that the button effect has been made in the non-auto button mode while thinning out the number of button displays. There are cases where you can Further, the number of displayed buttons in the auto button mode may be larger than the first number, or may be the same. Moreover, the button display may not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if manual button operation is enabled, it may be possible to function as a hidden button effect.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least execute, as a second effect, an effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image. The effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image is at least executable each time the chance button 136 is operated in the non-auto button mode, and the effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image is It is characterized in that the effect is at least executable in the operation valid period in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect performed for each operation of the operation means (an effect performed during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode), the second effect is performed in the non-automatic button mode. The effect that can be performed for each operation may also be able to be performed at a timing that causes no trouble in the auto button mode.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the auto button mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image in relation to the operation of the chance button 136 Is at least feasible. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect can be executed even by the button operation in the auto button mode, the player may be able to impart a sense of accomplishment by the button operation.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 366 to 435 (1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:

  Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;

Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image),

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

The second display is displayed at least in a period in which the reception of the operation of the operation means (for example, depression of the chance button 136) is valid (hereinafter referred to as "third period (for example, operation effective period)"). And
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3);

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying a result of button operation (see FIG. 412 (c)),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect in which a panda image appears at the position of the erased button image (see FIG. 411 (o)),

The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,

  The second effect may be executed by concealing at least a part of the first display as the first number (for example, an effect of concealing a part of three button images) It is characterized by being.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, at least a part of the plurality of button displays is concealed by the second effect, so it is possible to provide a game console having a feature in the display means. In addition, the appearance of the second effect may be able to improve the interest of the game even during the effective period of the button operation. Also, there are cases where the second effect can be made more prominent than the button display.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “the effect that the second effect may be executed by concealing at least a part of the first display to be the first number” is “the second effect is It may be an effect that may hide at least a part of one of the first indications of the first indication which is the first number, or “the second effect is the first indication of the first number” It may be an effect that may hide at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays of the one display.

In addition, “the second effect may be an effect to be executed by always hiding at least a part of the first display to be the first number”, or “the second effect may be the first effect. The effect may be that the display must at least partially hide at least a part of the first display of the first display that is the number of The effect may be an effect that always hides at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays (1-2) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed for each reception of the operation of the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, it is possible to perform the first effect by performing the second effect before the first effect is performed. There are cases where it can be expected in the production of.

  The second effect is an effect performed for each operation of the operation means, but the first display may be hidden by all the second effects performed for each operation, or a part of The configuration may be such that the first display is hidden only by the second effect performed by the operation and started.

  The second effect is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, step-up notice, advance notice, cut-in notice, notice such as popular drawing effect, etc.) It may be information related to the game such as time saving, latency mode, etc.).

Even when the second effect is performed, there may be an effect (such as the fourth symbol) that is not necessarily hidden.
The above pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect is characterized in that the first display can be started after the display is started.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect started after the display of the button display is started, even if the button display is hidden by the second effect, the button display is displayed. Since the second effect is started after the start, it may be possible for the player not to miss the button display. In addition, the second effect may be an effect that can be started earlier than the first display is started to be displayed (1-3) in the pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is capable of erasing at least one of the first display (e.g. display of a button image on the left side) in response to acceptance of one operation of the operation means (e.g. first press of the chance button 136) Means,

The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of another first display (for example, display of a central button image) whose display is continued.
The thing is special.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it is possible to hide a part of the button display still displayed after the button display is erased. Further, there are cases where the area where the button display is erased can be effectively used as an execution area of the second effect.

  Note that the second effect may be a configuration in which the display of a plurality of buttons may be erased by receiving an operation of a single operation means, or a configuration in which a button display of one is erased by receiving a plurality of operations. Alternatively, a plurality of button displays may be erased by receiving a plurality of operations.

The second effect may not hide the first display even if the first display is continued even after the first display is erased. For example, the second effect is an effect that causes one of a plurality of types of notices to appear, and the first notice can hide the first display, and the second notice can indicate the first display. May not be hidden. Also, even if the second effect of the same type (for example, the third notice) is hidden or not hidden due to, for example, a difference in the number of button operations (first operation and second operation) There may be.
The above pachinko machine 100,

  The second effect hides the first display when there is no first display whose display is continued after the first display is erased (in response to the reception of the operation means) It is characterized by no effect.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when there is no button display after erasing the button display, the button display may not be hidden (1-4). ,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display to be the third number, and the third number is one.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. Note that the second display may be plural (1-5) in the pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The second effect is an effect that may hide at least a part of the second display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second effect may hide the gauge display, so the second effect may be made more noticeable.

Note that the second effect may be configured to hide at least a part of the second display, may be configured to hide only the first display, or is configured to hide only the second display. It may be. When a plurality of second displays are displayed, one of them may be hidden, or the other may be hidden. Further, the second effect may not hide the second display (1-6) in the pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a button display,
The second display is a gauge display,
The third number is one,

  The display means is a means capable of arranging at least a plurality of the button displays in a first direction and displaying them.

The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge.
The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge decreases in a second direction,
The second direction is the same as the first direction,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the direction in which the button display is erased and the direction in which the gauge decreases are the same direction, so even if the second display hides the second display, the gauge In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player of the remainder of (the remaining period of the effective period) in an easy-to-understand manner. The first direction and the second direction may be different directions (1-7) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player is required to operate the button necessary for executing the first effect. In some cases, it may be easy to understand.

The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to indicate that multiple button operations are necessary by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be able to be surely executed.
In addition, it is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
(1-8) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 characterized in that

  The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes, and at least one of the plurality of modes is a first mode (for example, the button display mode is “normal”) And

At least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect (for example, the button display aspect is "vibration"),
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the button display itself may be able to function as a notice depending on the difference in the mode of the button display.

When the button display functions as a notice, the modes do not have to be different for all button effects. Further, the third aspect may be provided (1-9) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the rendering means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means (1-10).
The second effect is an effect not at least related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is a notice,
It is characterized by

The notice includes not only a notice about the change game but also a advance notice (such as an effect including at least a hold icon and an effect relating to the advance notice) (1-11) the pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an animation display,
The second display is an animation display,
It is characterized by
The above pachinko machine 100,
At least in front of the display means is movable movable means,

The second effect is an effect that may be executed by hiding at least a part of the first display by the operation of the movable means.
The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is characterized by (2-1),

  Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;

Rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing a first effect (for example, an effect notifying a result of a button operation);
A game console equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image),

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

  The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period” (for example, an operation valid period)) in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, depression of the chance button 136) is valid. And

  The first display is at least an animation display (for example, button animation),

The second display is at least an animation display (e.g., an end-of-life animation),
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3);

The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The thing is special.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to execute animation display related to the first display, and to perform animation display with respect to a plurality of button displays. Can provide In addition, in some cases, it is possible to further prompt the button operation in comparison with the still image display by the animation display (2-2) in the pachinko machine 100,

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, a button-deleted image),

  The third display is animation display (for example, button deletion animation or valid period image deletion animation),

The third display is at least a display that can be started in connection with the operation means being operated.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, it may be possible to prompt the button operation.

Further, the third display may be a display that is executed without being related to the operation of the operating means (2-3).

  The first display is at least an erasable display in relation to the operation of the operation means,

The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as a “first erasing animation (for example, button erasing animation)”) that can be performed when the first display is erased.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to notify that the player has accepted the pressing of the chance button by executing the deletion animation of the button display (2-4) the pachinko machine 100 And

  The effect means is means capable of at least executing a second effect (for example, an effect in which the button image changes to the display of the “excellent” image or the display of the “good” image (see FIG. 420 (h)).

  The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the operation means,

The second effect is at least a startable effect after the first erasing animation is performed.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the deletion animation of the button display, the second effect may be able to be highlighted.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that can be started during execution of the first deletion animation or before the start of the first deletion animation (2-5) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,

  The second display is at least an erasable display in association with the operation of the operation means,

The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as “second erasing animation (for example, valid period image erasing animation)”) that can be performed when the second display is erased.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it is possible to execute the deletion animation of the gauge display (2-6).
The second display is a gauge display (for example, an image in the shape of a long rectangular frame),

  The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting a remaining period of the third period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced.

  The gauge display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0,

The second erasing animation is an animation in which the length of the gauge is 0 even when the length of the gauge remains in relation to the operation of the operation means in the third period. An animation that at least includes
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by displaying an animation of 0 by displaying the length of the gauge, it is easily informed that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display to be erased or the button display has been accepted. (2-7) the above pachinko machine 100, which may be able to

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes,

  At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a first animation mode (for example, deca-button display),

  At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode (for example, a button display mode other than a deca-button display),

The second animation mode is an animation mode different from the first animation mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the button display itself may be able to function as a preview according to the difference in the animation mode of the button display (2-8).

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display to be the third number, and the third number is one.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. Note that the second display may be plural (2-9) in the above pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player can know the number of times the button is operated to perform the first effect. It may be easy to notify.

The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to indicate that multiple button operations are necessary by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be able to be surely executed.
In addition, it is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
(2-10) the above pachinko machine 100 characterized in that
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body movable at least in front of the display means (3-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  A plurality of operating means (for example, chance button 136, direction key 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;

Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (e.g., chance button 136),

  At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, direction key 137),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a direction key image),

The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operating means, and the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operating means. One display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, an execution period of a button effect),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of erasing a button image and displaying another image),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image).

  The first effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the first operation means (e.g., depression of the chance button 136),

The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the second operation means (for example, depression of the direction key 137).
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the effect are in a corresponding relationship, and the effect order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. Can provide a game console with Moreover, there are cases where it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the operation means.

The correspondence between the first display and the first operation means and the second display and the second operation means may not be unique. For example, the first display may correspond to the second operation means, or any operation means is effective regardless of the type of the first display or the second display. (3-2) The above pachinko machine 100, which is

  The first operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the first operation means is effective in a second period (for example, an operation effective period),

The second operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the second operation means is effective during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period,

  The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the first effect when the first operation means is operated in the second period,

The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the second effect when the second operation means is operated during the second period.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation effective period of the plurality of operation means is the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operation means in one operation effective period ( 3-3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  The effect means is a means capable of starting the first effect earlier than the second effect when the first condition is established,

  The effect means is means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect when the second condition is satisfied,

  The first condition is a condition established when the first operation means is operated prior to the second operation means being operated in the second period,

The second condition is a condition that holds when the second operation means is operated prior to the first operation means being operated during the second period.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effects corresponding to the operation means operated earlier are performed first, there is a case where the player can select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.
The above pachinko machine 100,

  The rendering means is means capable of performing only the first rendering when only the first condition is satisfied in the second period,

The effect means is a means capable of executing only the second effect when only the second condition is satisfied in the second period.
It is characterized by

Here, "only the first effect" or "only the second effect" may be only one of the first effect and the second effect. In addition, “only the first effect” or “only the second effect” may be only one of the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect described below ((1) 3-4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  The display means is means capable of at least performing the first display to be a first number (for example, 2);

  The display means is a means capable of at least performing the second display of a second number (for example, 1),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, an effect of forcibly displaying a decorative pattern (see FIG. 424)),

The third effect is an effect that can be performed at least when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is operated the number of times that the first operation means becomes the first number, and A condition which at least holds when the second operation means is operated a number of times equal to the second number;
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there is a third effect as effects appearing in multiple operations, and there are a plurality of operation means, so the need for the first operation means and the second operation means In some cases, notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner by matching the number of operation times with the number of displays.
The above pachinko machine 100,

  The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second period ends.

A third effect may occur at the end of the operation effective period. The third effect may not be performed when the third condition is not established at the end of the operation effective period (3-5) in the pachinko machine 100,

  The first operation means is a means capable of at least taking a plurality of states (for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.));

  At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, the button mode is “normal”),

At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, the button mode is "vibration"),
The second state is a state different from the first state,

  The first display can be displayed at least in a plurality of display modes (for example, “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “deca-button display”, etc.),

  At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode (for example, "normal"),

At least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, "vibration"),
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode at least corresponding to the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the second state.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, variations may be increased between the button state and the display mode depending on the display mode according to the state of the first operation means.

  The first operation means is a chance button 136 capable of rotation, vibration and light emission, and the second operation means may be the direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operation means may be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operation means and the second operation means may be configured to be capable of taking a plurality of states.

Further, the first display mode may be configured to correspond to the second state, and the second display mode may be configured to correspond to the first state (3-6) as described above It is a pachinko machine 100,

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The third display is a display capable of at least suggesting the second period,

The display means is a means capable of at least performing the third display to be the third number, and the third number is one.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. The third display may be plural.
In addition, it is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The sum of the first number and the second number is three,
(3-7) the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 characterized in that
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body movable at least in front of the display means (4-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;

Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with

  The reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least valid in a first valid period (for example, a valid period of operation with a button effect),

  The reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least valid in a second valid period (for example, a valid period of operation in effect by a button hold icon),

  The second valid period is a valid period that is at least partially different from the first valid period,

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),

At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button hold icon);
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, three);

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special map variation game period),

The second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during a special map variation game period),
The first period is a period including at least a part of the first effective period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the second effective period,

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying the user of the result of the button operation),

At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (e.g., advance notice effect with a hold icon),
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,

The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operating means is operated in the first effective period reaches a second number (for example, three).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, so that the game console having a feature in the display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, variations of button effects may be able to be increased. Also, the second period may not overlap with the first period. For example, when the second effect is the effect by the button holding icon, since the display timing of the button holding icon (due to the winning timing to the start winning opening of the gaming ball) is irregular, the two periods overlap In this case, any configuration may be used as long as the above content is at least satisfied. In addition, it may further be equipped with the 3rd display which suggests operation means (4-2) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display capable of suggesting the first effective period (hereinafter, referred to as “third display (for example, display of effective period image)”).
The display means is a means which does not perform display capable of suggesting the second effective period.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effective period display is performed in the button effect and the effective period display is not performed in the effect by the button holding icon, the interest of the game may be improved.
The above pachinko machine 100,
The second effective period is a period longer than the first effective period,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effective period without the effective period display is longer than the first effective period with the effective period display, the button operation for the first effect is performed by the effective period display. May be able to

Also, the display means may provide a display capable of suggesting a second effective period, or there is one display capable of suggesting a period in both the first effective period and the second effective period. May be Also, the second valid period may be a shorter valid period than the first valid period. For example, in the example of the button hold icon, when the display of the button hold icon is hold 1 (erased in relation to the start of the next symbol variation display), the operation effective period corresponding to the button hold is The pachinko machine 100 may be shorter than its effective period (4-3).

  At least a notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing a notice (for example, a notice of success or failure of the special figure change game)

  (E.g., a first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least advance preview notice (e.g., advance notice of special game variation game related to suspension).

  The notice means is means capable of at least executing the notice by causing the effect means to perform the first effect,

The pre-reading advance notice means is means capable of at least executing the pre-reading advance notice by causing the effect means to perform the second effect.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button effect includes notification of the notice of the change, and the effect by the button hold icon includes notification of the advance notice, so the combination of the display type of the button and the type of notice In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation.

In addition, the first effect may be the advance notice and the second effect may be the notice, or both effects may be notices, and both effects may be advance notice (4-4) the pachinko machine 100 And

  Hold display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons (for example, special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2) (for example, effect display area 208d defining a special figure 1 hold display area);

  The holding display means is a means capable of at least informing the number of holdings regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the holding icons to be displayed,

  At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon (e.g., a button hold icon);

At least one of the plurality of types of pending icons is a second pending icon (e.g., a pending icon indicating a predetermined big hit reliability),
The second display is the first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,

The second effect is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in relation to the operation of the operation means.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the effect by the button hold icon includes the advance notice of the hold icon, so the hold icon is a display that is erased in relation to the start of the symbol variation display, the second (4-5) The pachinko machine 100 may be made to be able to be recognized by the player without displaying the effective period regarding the effective period of (4-5).

The hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon while the button hold icon is displayed.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, a plurality of button hold icons are not displayed, so that it may be possible to prevent the button effect from becoming too complicated.

Moreover, even if it is a period during which the first hold icon is displayed, a new first hold icon may be displayed (4-6).

The second effect is at least executable when the number of times the operating means has been operated in the second effective period becomes a third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button operations for performing the second effect is smaller than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

The third number may be one or two or more. In another effect, the third number may be a number larger than the second number (4-7) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,

When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the first effect.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second effect is prioritized in the button operation in the case where the effective periods overlap, so that the second effect in which the effective period is not suggested should be executed first. In some cases, it is possible to prompt the button operation to perform both the second effect and the first effect during the first effective period (4-8).

When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the second effect.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, in the button operation in the case where the effective periods overlap, priority is given to the first effect, so even in the case where the first effective period and the second effective period overlap. By giving priority to the effect of the button operation may be able to be continued until the other effect is performed.

In addition to the operation means, it is possible to select whether to execute the first effect first or the second effect first by the operation of the second operation means (for example, the direction key 137). Good. In addition, it may be configured to perform an effect corresponding to the button effect generated earlier (4-9) in the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display having a fourth number, and the fourth number is one.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. Note that the second display may be plural (4-10) in the pachinko machine 100 described above,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player can know the number of times the button is operated to perform the first effect. It may be easy to notify.

The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to indicate that multiple button operations are necessary by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be able to be surely executed.
The above pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
(4-11) the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 characterized in that
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the effect means may not include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body movable at least in front of the display means (4-12) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is

  A plurality of operating means (for example, chance button 136, direction key 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

  Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;

Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button hold icon);

  The first display is a display including at least a display indicating a first operation means (for example, the chance button 136),

  The second display is a display including at least a display indicating a second operation means (for example, the direction key 137),

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, three);

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special map variation game period),

  The second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during a special map variation game period),

  The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (for example, an operation effective period with a button effect) in which acceptance regarding the operation of the first operation means is valid,

  The second period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception regarding the operation of the second operation means is valid (e.g., an operation valid period for effect by a button hold icon),

  At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying the user of the result of the button operation),

At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (e.g., advance notice effect with a hold icon),
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,

The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period reaches a second number (for example, three).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, so that the game console having a feature in the display means is provided. Can be provided. Moreover, the variation of a button effect may be able to be increased (5-1) The pachinko machine 100 by this embodiment is

  Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with

  The effect means is means capable of at least executing a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying a result of button operation),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image including a character string of "PUSH"),

  At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button image not including the characters “PUSH” or non-display of a button image).

  The first display is a display at least corresponding to a first mode (for example, non-auto button mode),

  The second display is a display at least corresponding to a second mode (for example, an auto button mode),

  The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.

  The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is operated automatically,

The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, a special drawing variation game execution period),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

  The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period (for example, operation effective period)”) in which acceptance regarding the operation of the operation means is effective.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3);

The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second display is a display at least partially different from the first display.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display of the button effect differs between the auto button mode and the non-auto button mode, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means. In addition, there are cases where the mode can be easily recognized due to the difference between the first display and the second display.

In addition, notification means for notifying whether it is the first mode or the second mode may be separately provided. Also, the second display may be absent (no display may be the second display)
(5-2) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  A decorative symbol display unit (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of performing at least decorative symbol variation display;

  The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of at least executing the first decorative symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c),

  The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the first mode,

The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the operation of the button is necessary by clarifying the part where the display is different depending on the mode in the same kind of decorative symbol variation display. .
The above pachinko machine 100,

It comprises a notice means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least executing notices (for example, notice of success or failure of the special figure change game, notice of whether to develop to SP reach),
The first display is a display to be at least a part of the notice,
The second display is a display to be at least a part of the notice,

  The first display is a display that may not be started during the first period in the first decorative symbol variation display,

The second display is a display that may not be started in the first period in the first decorative symbol variation display,
It is characterized by
The above pachinko machine 100,

  The decorative symbol display means is means capable of at least executing a second decorative symbol variation display (for example, variation display of another decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c),

  The first display is a display that can be started at least in a second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the first mode (for example, an execution period of another special pattern variation game),

The second display is a display that can be started at least during the second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
It is characterized by
By doing this, the button effect can be executed even with another decorative symbol variation display (5-3) in the above pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period (for example, a display of an operation period image),

The second display is a display not including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display of the effective period is not performed in the auto button mode. In the auto button mode, since the button operation is automatically performed, it is not necessary to display the effective period, and there is a case where it is possible to reduce the risk of the player making a false recognition (a false recognition that the button operation is necessary). (5-4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,

The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display having a third number (for example, 0),
The third number is a number smaller than the first number,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button displays in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of displays in the non-auto button mode.
The above pachinko machine 100,
The third number is one,
It is characterized by

  Since the button display in the auto button mode is one, the player may be able to recognize that the button effect has been made in the non-auto button mode while thinning out the number of button displays.

Further, the number of displayed buttons in the auto button mode may be larger than the first number, or may be the same. Moreover, the button display may not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, when the manual button operation is enabled, it may be able to function as a hidden button effect (5-5) in the pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The effect means is means capable of at least executing a second effect (for example, an effect of replacing the display of a button image with another image),

  The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed each time the operation means is operated in the first mode,

The second effect is an effect that can be performed at least in the third period in the second mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect performed for each operation of the operation means (an effect performed during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode), the second effect is performed in the non-automatic button mode. An effect that can be executed for each operation may also be able to be executed at a timing that causes no trouble in the auto button mode (5-6) in the above-described pachinko machine 100,

When the operation means is operated during the third period in the second mode, the effect means can perform at least the second effect in relation to the operation of the operation means. Is
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the second effect can be executed even by the button operation in the auto button mode, so that the player may be able to achieve a sense of accomplishment by the button operation (5-7) Machine 100,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

  The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

The auto button mode can be set by operating the direction key 137, the chance button 136 or the like while the demonstration screen in the non-game state is displayed. Further, the release of the audio button mode can be released in the same manner as the above setting, or can be released by a button operation in the automatic button mode. In the case of the latter, it may be possible to release only during the effect, or may be continued to the non-auto button mode thereafter.
The above pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
It is characterized by
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the second effect is executed after the button operation is accepted, and the next second effect is executed after the next button operation is accepted. When the second effect is generated, the next button operation may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an aspect in which no effect or display is performed when there is a possibility that an effect or display may be performed is interpreted as an effect or display of "no effect" or "not displayed" is executed. Do.

  Further, the effective period of the button operation in the above embodiment is an example, and when the button effect appears at another trigger, an individual effective period of operation is naturally set. As the button effect, the display of a plurality of buttons need not necessarily be performed, and there may be a case where a single button operation may be performed at another trigger, or although one operation is required, it is A button display and one gauge display may be performed. Moreover, even if it is button effects performed at the same timing or timing, it may be performed by a combination of these. By doing this, it may be possible to function as a notice even with the number of button displays and gauge displays.

  Even when a plurality of button displays are simultaneously displayed, at least a part of the operation valid periods may be different from each other. As an example, at least one of the displayed button displays may be configured to start being displayed in a period other than the operation valid period. For example, displaying the button display before the operation valid period may notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a plurality of button operations.

  Although the button display is the same in that one of the multiple button displays is different from the other, for example, one (button display related to the most recent button operation) is illuminated by an effect or the like, and the other button display is darkened A mode (displayed relatively dark) or the like is included in one of the button displays different from the other.

  The contents described in relation to the button display may be appropriately applied to the gauge display as long as there is no trouble, and the contents described in relation to the gauge display may be appropriately displayed on the button display as long as no trouble occurs. It may apply. The various effects are configured to be started in association with the button operation, but may be configured to be started by another condition. For example, the start time of the effect may be determined in advance, and the button operation may not be performed during that time, or the operation may be performed by an operation of an operation means other than the button.

  The operation means is not limited to the button, and a touch sensor type operation means, a liquid crystal touch panel, a lever type operation means, an operation means by a proximity sensor, and the like can be appropriately used.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, but when the number of button operations for which the first effect is performed has been reached, the second effect and the first effect are performed. The present invention may be configured to execute both of the effects or the configuration to perform only the first effect.

  In addition, a plurality of operation means may be provided, and button effects may be performed using the plurality of operation means. For example, the configuration may be such that one operation is selected from a plurality of options using a touch panel, and the selection made by the effect button is determined.

  The presentation according to the button operation may be performed at another opportunity not to perform the button operation (for example, completely different opportunity different from the timing of automatically appearing at the expiration of the operation valid period).

  The first effect appearing by a plurality of button operations may be configured to appear before the plurality of operations are performed. In this case, before the plurality of operations are performed, for example, the case where the number of button operations does not meet the predetermined number of operations or the case where the valid period ends before the specified number of button operations are performed is equivalent. Do.

  The second effect performed for each button operation may be an effect in which one display changes for each button operation. For example, the character A may appear in the first button operation, and the character A may increase in size and color may change in the second and subsequent button operations, or may be trusted in the second and subsequent operations. It may be configured to change to another character B or character C with a high degree.

  The configuration may be related to the combination of the result of the second effect performed for each button operation and the result of the first effect performed thereafter. For example, the configuration may be such that the SP reach development, the jackpot notification, and the like are performed by the combination of the second effect results.

In addition, the embodiments described above and the embodiments described thereafter are also applicable to an enclosed type game machine which cyclically uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. It is possible to combine the matters described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.
The gaming machine of the above embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.

(Appendix B1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid.
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the first display to be the first number.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note B1,
The game console characterized in that the second effect is at least an effect that can be performed each time the operation of the operation means is received.

(Appendix B3)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note B1 or 2,
The display means is a means capable of at least erasing one of the first display in response to acceptance of one operation of the operation means,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the other first displays whose display is continued.
The game stand which makes a special thing

(Appendix B4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display to be the third number, and the third number is one.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4,
The game console characterized in that the second effect is an effect which may hide at least a part of the second display.

(Appendix B6)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note B4 or B5,
The first display is a button display,
The second display is a gauge display,
The third number is one,
The display means is a means capable of arranging at least a plurality of the button displays in a first direction and displaying them.
The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge.
The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge decreases in a second direction,
The second direction is the same as the first direction,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6, wherein
The second number is the same number as the first number,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein
The first number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B8, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes, and at least one of the plurality of modes is the first mode.
At least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B9, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B10, wherein
The second effect is an effect not at least related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is a notice,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B11, wherein
The first display is an animation display,
The second display is an animation display,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix B14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means capable of at least carrying out the first rendering;
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid.
The first display is at least an animation display,
The second display is at least an animation display,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number, and the first effect is that the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period is second It is at least a viable rendition when it comes to numbers,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The game stand which makes a special thing

(Appendix C2)
The game console described in Appendix C1,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an animation display,
The third display is at least a display that can be started in connection with the operation means being operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C3)
The game console described in Appendix C2,
The first display is at least an erasable display in relation to the operation of the operation means,
The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as “first erasing animation”) that can be performed when the first display is erased.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix C3,
The effect means is means capable of at least performing a second effect,
The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is at least a startable effect after the first erasing animation is performed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C2 to C4, wherein
The second display is at least an erasable display in association with the operation of the operation means,
The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter referred to as a “second erasing animation”) that can be performed when the second display is erased.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix C5,
The second display is a gauge display,
The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting a remaining period of the third period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced.
The gauge display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0,
The second erasing animation is an animation in which the length of the gauge is 0 even when the length of the gauge remains in relation to the operation of the operation means in the third period. An animation that at least includes
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C6, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a first animation mode,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode,
The second animation mode is an animation mode different from the first animation mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C7, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display to be the third number, and the third number is one.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C9)
The game console according to any one of appendices C1 to C8, wherein
The second number is the same number as the first number,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C10)
The game console according to any one of appendices C1 to C9, wherein
The first number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C10, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C11, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix C13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C11, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D1)
A plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operating means, and the second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operating means. One display is a display that can at least start in the first period,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the second operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1,
The first operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the first operation means is effective in a second period,
The second operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the second operation means is effective during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the first effect when the first operation means is operated in the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the second effect when the second operation means is operated during the second period.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2,
The effect means is a means capable of starting the first effect earlier than the second effect when the first condition is established,
The effect means is means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition established when the first operation means is operated prior to the second operation means being operated in the second period,
The second condition is a condition that holds when the second operation means is operated prior to the first operation means being operated during the second period.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D4)
The game console described in Appendix D2 or D3,
The display means is means capable of performing at least the first display to be the first number, and the display means is means capable of performing at least the second display to be the second number. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be performed at least when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is operated the number of times that the first operation means becomes the first number, and A condition which at least holds when the second operation means is operated a number of times equal to the second number;
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D5)
The game console described in Appendix D4,
The first operation means is a means capable of at least taking a plurality of states;
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The first display can be displayed at least in a plurality of display modes,
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode at least corresponding to the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D6)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note D4 or D5,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display capable of at least suggesting the second period,
The display means is a means capable of at least performing the third display to be the third number, and the third number is one.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D7)
Appendices D4 to D6, wherein the game console according to any one of
The sum of the first number and the second number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D7, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix D10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
Reception regarding operation of the operation means is at least valid in a first validity period, reception regarding operation of the operation means is valid at least in a second validity period, and the second validity period is the second validity period. One valid period and at least a part of them are different valid periods,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number, and the first display is a display capable of at least starting in the first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the first effective period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the second effective period,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,
The first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the operating means is operated in the first effective period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display capable of suggesting the first effective period (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The display means is a means which does not perform display capable of suggesting the second effective period.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note E1 or E2, and
At least a means for making a notice that can be performed,
Providing a prefetch notice means capable of at least executing a prefetch notice;
The notice means is means capable of at least executing the notice by causing the effect means to perform the first effect,
The pre-reading advance notice means is means capable of at least executing the pre-reading advance notice by causing the effect means to perform the second effect.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein
Hold display means capable of displaying at least multiple types of hold icons,
The holding display means is a means capable of at least informing the number of holdings regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the holding icons to be displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon, at least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon, and the second display is , Said first pending icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second effect is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in relation to the operation of the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4,
The hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon while the button hold icon is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E5, wherein
The second effect is at least executable when the number of times the operating means has been operated in the second effective period becomes a third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, wherein
When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the first effect.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E7, wherein
When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the second effect.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display having a fourth number, and the fourth number is one.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E9, wherein
The second number is the same number as the first number,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E10, wherein
The first number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E11, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E12, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix E15)
A plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting a first operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display indicating a second operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number, and the first display is a display capable of at least starting in the first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception regarding the operation of the first operation means is valid,
The second period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception for the operation of the second operation means is valid,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,
The first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period reaches a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Means of presentation,
A game console equipped with
The effect means is means capable of at least performing a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display corresponding at least to the first mode,
The second display is a display corresponding at least to the second mode,
The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is operated automatically,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is effective.
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number, and the first effect is that the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period is second It is at least a viable rendition when it comes to numbers,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second display is a display at least partially different from the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F1,
A decorative symbol display means capable of at least performing decorative symbol variation display;
The decorative symbol display means is means capable of at least performing the first decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the first mode,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F3)
The game console according to appendix F1 or F2, wherein the first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period, and the second display indicates the third period. A display that does not at least contain possible displays,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F4)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display which is a third number, and the third number is a number smaller than the first number.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F4, wherein
The effect means is means capable of at least performing a second effect,
The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed each time the operation means is operated in the first mode,
The second effect is an effect that can be performed at least in the third period in the second mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F6)
It is a game stand as described in Appendix F5,
When the operation means is operated during the third period in the second mode, the effect means can perform at least the second effect in relation to the operation of the operation means. Is
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices F1 to F6,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F8)
The game console according to any one of appendices F1 to F7, wherein
The first number is three,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix F10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game console characterized by the above [the ninth embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described using the drawings. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 436 to 465 are basically used only for the description of the ninth embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, this embodiment can be used. In the description of Fig. 36, the reference numerals shown in Figs.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “ball”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110 The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player And a ball emission handle 134 for launching the guided game ball into the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a character for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 436) by the operation of the player. With respect to a card unit (CR unit) and a setting operation unit 137 which can make various settings and the like by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), the chance button lamp 138 for emitting light A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 438) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 437 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 436 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 439). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 438 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol starting opening 228, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232 (opened state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (opened state) etc. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the variable winning opening 234, the game of falling on the left path by the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nail 238 and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of balls is relatively easy, and entry of gaming balls falling on the right path is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, a fourth symbol display area 208e, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays a fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 438, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 438, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one in total) is provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both of the special symbols may be provided. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number (for example, four) of common drawing fluctuation games are displayed. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation game is specified It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and variable The winning openings 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The general drawing start port 228 and the general drawing start port 229 are devices, which are called gates and through chuckers, for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the present embodiment In the embodiment, one common drawing start port 228 is disposed on the left side path of the game board 200, and one common drawing start port 229 is disposed on the right side path. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start port 228 or the general drawing start port 229 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 or the drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 start opening 232 has a pair of wing members 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wing members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and win a common drawing fluctuation game, and a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right route. There is only one in the house. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 respectively include openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. For example, when the special figure display device wins the special figure variation game and the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing) Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning any winning opening or start opening, or just out of passing the common drawing start opening 228, 229 The mouth 240 is reached.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230.

  The effect movable body 224 in this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is vertically movable in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208 e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized regardless of the open / close state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 439. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 Volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 439) for adjusting the volume to be set, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the signal to the basic circuit 402 and the signal stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads image data or the like, the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, second sub-control unit 500, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 440 (a) to 440 (d). The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 440 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1, and FIG. 440 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 440 (a), seven types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing G" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special drawing 1. In FIG. 440 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends The state is shifted to the drawing high probability state (see FIGS. 446 (a) and (b)). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state) It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG. 440 (b), four types of special views “special view a” to “special view d” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 440 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc.). When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "and the like.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decor 2-Decor 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 440 (c).

  FIG. 440 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 and the drawing start port 229, the drawing display device 210 displays all the seven segments and the central one. Repeat the lighting of the segment of the "general display of the fluctuation display". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 440 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 , 229 is determined to have been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 are awarded, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start openings 228 and 229, and variable winning openings 234 and 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  If the common drawing start port 228 or the common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generating random number counter The random number value is acquired as a winning random number value, and the common-mode random number value is acquired from the random number counter for general-purpose random number value generation provided in the RAM 308, and stored in the general-purpose random number storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random number values is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common-diagram A or a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 440 (d)) and a dislocated symbol (a common-diagram C shown in FIG. 440 (d)). Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, A table for deciding on a pass / fail judgment stored in the ROM 306 based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 444 (a) and (b) Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 444 (c) shown in FIG. 444 (c) stored in ROM 306 based on the common drawing random number value in the acquired common drawing start information and the determined success or failure determination result. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on Is the special figure a shown in FIG. 440 (b), the 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure b variation flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 status update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability change flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G, the setting area of the RAM 308 Special figure 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special figure 1) using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 445 (a) to (d) described later) stored in Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table (FIG. 446 (a), FIG. 446 (a), stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired and the determined success or failure determination result). Determination of the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 2 is performed using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 447 (a)). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 441 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 443 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the pre-determination result (the special-figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 443 (b) to (d)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 443 (b) to 443 (d) illustrate a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 443 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 443 (b), the special view 1 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 443 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure G" as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 443 (c) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 443 (c), the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the reserve number of the special view 2 variation game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 443 (c), "special figure d" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 443 (c), the state in which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 443 (d) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit during power support. As shown in FIG. 443 (d), "not determined" information is stored in the storage area "pending 1" instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is determined in advance, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result of the pass / fail and the change timer number (change time) are determined in advance. The information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 444 to 447 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 444 (a) and 444 (b) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when performing a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 444 (a) and 444 (b) is composed of the items of “common drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 444 (a) is a success / failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 444 (a), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 444 (b) is a success or failure determination table for general use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 444 (b), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is approximately 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 444 (a), the hit probability is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG. 444 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for common use. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 444 (c), the distribution ratio of each symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the common drawing variation game is a hit is 50% for the common drawing A and 50% for the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 444 (c), the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chow) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 444 (c), the opening operation of the special figure 2 start opening (electric chow) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 445 (a) to 445 (d) show an example of a table for determining a success or failure used when performing a determination on the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 445 (a) to 445 (d) includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 445 (a) is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 445 (a), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 445 (b) is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 445 (b), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success or failure judgment table is compared with the success or failure judgment table shown in FIG. 445 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of small hit is the same.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 445 (c) is a success or failure determination table for Special Figure 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 445 (c), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of small hit is zero.

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 445 (d) is a success or failure determination table for Special Figure 2 used when the special view probability at the time of success or failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 445 (d), when this success or failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of small hit is 0. When this success or failure judgment table is compared with the success or failure judgment table shown in FIG. 445 (c), the probability of the big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 446 (a) shows a symbol sort table for Special Figure 1. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 446 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the special figure A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG. 446 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 446 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 447 (a) has shown the symbol allotment table for special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 447 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 447 (b) shows an example of the big hit time operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 447 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or the special view c is stopped and displayed In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 446 and FIG. 447, Special Figure 2 has a high probability that time reduction is given as compared with Special Figure 1, and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIGS. 448 and 449. FIG. FIG. 448 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 448 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric Chu-long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 448 (b) is a flow chart showing a flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 448 (c) is a flowchart showing a flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 448 (d) is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S413) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 449 (a) shows the flow of electric power long open effect processing that is executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first auxiliary control unit 400. FIG. 449 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  The electric power long open effect processing shown in FIG. 449 (a) starts the symbol fluctuation start of the common figure from the main control unit 300 in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 of FIG. 448 (a). (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit with reference to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing disengaging flag.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S817, the process proceeds to step S817, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B", and sets it as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric Chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 449, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the electric Chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit. An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG. 449 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect. FIG. 449 (b) shows the display effect being performed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which "decoration 0" to "decoration 9" sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 449 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 450A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, various initial settings are performed in step S901 in FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 450 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 450C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, effects and the like of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 451 to 463. FIG. 451 (a) has shown the flow of the button presentation control processing performed by the presentation control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. In the button effect control process, first, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the button effect flag in-progress flag is on (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period in which the operation of the player's chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is validated (within the operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state It judges and transfers to the process of step S1203, when the value of a button effect flag is "0", it judges that a button effect flag is an OFF state, and transfers to the process of step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether the button reception flag is in the on state. The button reception flag is turned on when each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the button acceptance flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button acceptance flag is “1”, the button acceptance flag is in the on state. If it is determined that the button reception flag is “0”, it is determined that the button reception flag is off, and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first secondary control unit 400 executes button reception control processing. In the button reception execution process, control is performed to execute an effect to be performed based on an operation of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the operation valid period, when each button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a predetermined order, or when the operation valid period ends, the button effect end condition is To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209, and if the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the button rendering in-progress flag. Since the first sub control unit 400 determines that the operation effective period has ended in step S1207, the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 is overwritten with “0”, and the button effect flag under execution flag Turn off.

  On the other hand, in step S1211 when it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect executing flag is off, it is determined whether the button effect executing condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is satisfied when the player has won the execution of the effect to be the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 in the predetermined lottery process. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect executing flag is turned on. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the effect of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is effective and the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the button effect is executed. The button effect executing flag indicating that is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 451 (b).

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like is performed to determine the presence or absence of the effect with the operation effective period. After completing the other button effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control process, and returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

  FIG. 451 (b) shows the flow of the auto button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, first, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, the auto button mode is set. It is determined that the in-setting flag is in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1303. If the value of the in-auto button mode in-progress flag is "1", it is determined that the in-auto button mode in-progress flag is on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting condition is satisfied when the auto button mode setting is called in a user mode (menu) which can be called by the player while the special figure variation game is not being executed. In addition, the auto button mode setting condition may be established when a predetermined lottery is won, or when the number of big hits since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number. In addition, the automatic button mode setting condition may be forcibly established when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the automatic button mode as the automatic button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, auto button mode setting is performed. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of modes 1 to 4 can be set by the operation of the player. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the auto button mode is set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on an auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the auto button mode setting flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and shifts to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, in the next step S1309 when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect in-progress flag is off, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied when the player cancels the auto button mode. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is not satisfied, the auto button mode setting process is ended. Then, the process shifts to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311 following step S1309, the flag during the setting of the auto button mode is turned off. Since the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 turns off an auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “0” in the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the auto button mode under-setting flag is turned off, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and shifts to other button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 452 shows a flow of processing of chance button control processing (S411) of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. In the chance button control process, first, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the button reception flag (step S1401). As described above, each time the chance button control process is executed, the button acceptance flag is once turned off. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “0” in the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, turns off the button reception flag, and shifts to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the button effect flag in-progress flag is on. The button effect flag is turned on within a period in which the operation of the player's chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is validated (within the operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state It judges and shifts to processing of Step S1405, when value of a button production flag is "0", it judges that a button production flag is OFF state, and ends chance button control processing.

  In step S1405, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting flag is in the on state. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, the first sub control unit 400 performs the auto button mode. It is determined that the in-setting flag is in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value in the in-auto button mode setting flag is "0", it is determined that the in-automatic button mode in-progress flag is off Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated.

  In step S1409 following step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether to accept a button operation. If it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 receives a button operation, the process proceeds to step S1413. If it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 does not receive a button operation, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  On the other hand, in step S1411 when it is determined in step S1405 that the auto button mode setting flag is off, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 is operated when the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is on, and the setting operation unit 137 is operated when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is on to decide. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1413, and if it is determined that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated finish.

  In step S1413, the button reception flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is operated automatically or manually, the first sub control unit 400 turns on a button acceptance flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the button acceptance flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  FIG. 453 shows various settings of the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners and there is no settable condition. Therefore, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for middle-class players and can be set by players who have reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 3 is for advanced users, and can be set by a player who has reached level 100 in Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is for all players, but can not be set unless a predetermined opening date is reached.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation valid period the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of "sex" in the figure, "loosely" is set in mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period. Further, in mode 2, "impossible" is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated in the early stage of the operation valid period. Further, in the mode 3, the "mood shop" is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation effective period. Further, in mode 4, the player can be arbitrarily set to any one of “slow”, “sick” or “feeling”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of times of operation per unit time of the chance button 136 is set to "low speed" in mode 1, "medium speed" in mode 2, and "high speed" in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player performs a continuous hit without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player performs a continuous hit only when the player keeps pressing the chance button 136. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set any one of "low speed", "medium speed" and "high speed".

  In addition, in the effect (for example, princess dance SP reach described later) in which the operation timing of the chance button 136 is adjusted, the operation timing is set to “GOOD” of the allowable range in mode 1 and the operation timing is slightly deviated in mode 2 “GREAT Mode 3 is set to "PERFECT" in which the operation timing is perfectly matched. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “GOOD”, “GREAT” or “PERFECT”.

  In addition, in the setting of the “back button” that does not perform operation promotion leaving for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 1 during the operation valid period, In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate.

  In addition, when the holding icon indicating the number of holdings of the special figure variation game is displayed as a pattern imitating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation valid period is displayed. In mode 1, chance button 136 is automatically operated, in mode 2, chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and in mode 3, chance button 136 is not automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate. When the chance button 136 is operated while the "button hold" is displayed, the display mode of the "button hold" hold icon is changed.

  In addition, the cross key (command input of the cross key) for operating the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be operated automatically in mode 1, and is set to be operated automatically in mode 2. , Mode 3 is set not to be operated automatically. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate.

  In addition, mode 1 is set to "indecision" in which the option is not decided immediately, and mode 2 is set to "immediately in prompt decision" in which the option is immediately decided in the selected effect for making the player draw an object etc. Is set to "default" where the choice is determined as the initial choice. In the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of "indecision", "immediate decision and decision", and "default".

  In addition, it is possible that the player's chance button 136 and the button operation of the setting operation unit 137 being set to each mode are effectively accepted in mode 1, accepted in mode 2 and not accepted in mode 3 It has become. In the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the player can effectively receive the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137.

  In addition, as described in the “remarks” column in the figure, mode 1 is an auto button setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during non-execution (non-playing) of special figure variation game, or special figure The on / off setting is possible by the cross key command input during the variable game (during game). In mode 2, when the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is actually operated by the player in the auto button mode on state, the auto button mode is switched to the off state. Mode 3 is designed to be continuously hit at a speed that can not be achieved when the hit button 136 is physically operated (directly by the player). In addition, an effect is provided that appears only when the operation timing is "PERFECT".

  FIG. 454 shows the method of setting the mode 1 in the auto button mode in chronological order. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 454 (a) has shown the display content of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in the demonstration production performed during non-execution of a special figure change game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", which is the nearest stop symbol, is displayed. In addition, in the effect display area 208d, “Call menu with chance button” is displayed, and by operating the chance button 136, it is informed that the menu screen is called (displayed).

  FIG. 454 (b) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect, and the menu screen at the time of login of Daitomo (when password is not entered) is displayed. The player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operates the chance button 136 to decide on the selected item. In addition, a tutorial display composed of a whistle character displayed in the effect display area 208 d and a balloon message “Determine selecting an item” is displayed. The menu of this example is provided with "member registration", "password input", "QR code (registered trademark) issuance", "data clear", "volume and light amount adjustment", and "auto button mode". "QR code (registered trademark) issued" and "data clear" are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 454, since the user is not logged in to Daitomo, “QR code (registered trademark) issue” and “data clear” are displayed darker than the other menus (indicated by hatching upward in the figure) and can not be selected. It is shown to be.

  FIG. 454 (c) shows a state in which "auto button mode" is selected on the menu screen. At the time shown in 19 (c), the cursor e1 is located in "mode 1" and "mode 1" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the explanation of the mode being selected is made by the tutorial display including the princess character and the balloon message "mode 1 is recommended for beginners". Also, mode 2 and mode 3 are modes that can be selected only while logging in to Daitomo, and the open date of "mode 4" has not arrived. Therefore, "mode 2", "mode 3" and "mode 4" are not selectable. In addition, when "return" is selected and determined, the screen is returned to the menu screen shown in FIG. 454 (b).

  FIG. 454 (d) shows the state determined to be mode 1. The item “mode 1” is displayed to light up (indicated by a dotted frame in the drawing), and the princess balloon message “decide on mode 1!” Is displayed. In addition, "mode 1" is displayed on the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode under setting is displayed.

  FIG. 454 (e) shows a state in which the mode is determined and the menu screen is returned. When "end" of the menu item is selected, a brow character and a balloon message "I will do my best!" Are displayed, and the demonstration effect is resumed as shown in FIG. 454 (f). Further, as shown in FIG. 454 (e), the display of “mode 1” at the lower left may be hidden by a display (for example, “end” of the menu item) different from the display related to the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 454 (f), the display of "mode 1" at the lower left may hide a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, a frame of "menu call by chance button").

  FIG. 455 shows the method of setting the mode 4 in the auto button mode in chronological order. FIG. 455 (a) shows a state in which “enter password” is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 454 (b). The player operates the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password and can log in to the Daitomo.

  FIG. 455 (b) shows a state where the password has been successfully input. After the message "The input of the password has been accepted" is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, a menu screen shown in FIG. 455 (c) is displayed. Since login to Daitomo, the menu item "QR code (registered trademark) issuance" and "data clear" can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display is displayed, which is composed of a broom character and a balloon message "Select an item and decide". Further, "Level: 250" is displayed on the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the player who has logged in is shown. Since the title corresponding to each level is provided and the title of level 250 is a general, it is displayed as "title: general" below "level: 250".

  In this state, when the player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the "auto button" of the menu item and operates the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 455 (d), the auto button mode is set. The screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is located in "mode 4", and "mode 4" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the explanation of the mode being selected is made by the tutorial display configured by the princess character and the balloon message "mode 4 can customize all functions". In addition, since the user is logging in to Daitomo and the Daitomo level is 250, "Mode 2" and "Mode 3" can be selected. Further, since the opening date of "mode 4" has arrived, "mode 4" is also selectable.

  FIG. 455 (e) shows the state after the mode 4 is selected and determined. The player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select a function to be set, and operates the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to set each function. The selection item of each function selected by the player is displayed brighter (indicated by dot hatching in the drawing) than the item of non-selection. When “decision” shown below the effect display area 208 d is selected and determined, setting (customization) of mode 4 is finished, and when “cancel” is selected and determined, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. 455 (d) It is supposed to go back to

  FIG. 455 (f) shows a state in which “decision” has been selected and determined, and setting of mode 4 of the auto button is completed. In the lower left of the effect display area 208d, "mode 4" is displayed, and the mode being set is displayed. Also, instead of the “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be notified individually.

Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described (Example 1)

  FIG. 456 shows an example of effect display in the example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 456 and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a downward thick arrow. In FIG. 456 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 holding lamp 218, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 holding lamp 220 and the special view 2 display 214 Are shown differently to the illustration of FIG. In FIG. 456 and each figure to be described later, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 1 display 212 are shown at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the special figure 2 are displayed on the right Device 214 is shown. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. Further, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214 indicates that the variable display of the special view 1 or the special view 2 is performed. Also, illustration of the fourth symbol is omitted. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 456, and the chance button 136 viewed from the player is shown on the left side.

  FIG. 456 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 456 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  FIG. 456 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the present embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. Therefore, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation effective period. As shown in FIG. 456 (c), when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 456 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the hall f1 is displayed in the up position Is executed. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 456 (c) and (d).

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects (Example 2)

  FIG. 457 shows an example of effect display in the second example of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 457 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 457 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 457 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promptings of the character string "PUSH!" May not be displayed.

  FIG. 457 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 453, the "sex part" in mode 3 is the "feeling store", and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation effective period as in the case of the "loosely". When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 457 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is performed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 457 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 456 (d)) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. Also, different cut-in effects may be performed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting state of the auto button mode. In particular, as long as the auto button mode is not set, there may be an aspect or the like which is not displayed, or vice versa.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not by the player) in the auto button mode within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, while the chance button 136 is lit during the operation valid period, the meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed. However, when the auto button mode is not set, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed while the chance button 136 is lit, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or either It is not necessary to execute both (Example 3)

  FIG. 458 shows an example of effect display in the example 3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 458 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during the execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 458 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 458 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promptings of the character string "PUSH!" May not be displayed.

  FIG. 458 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 453, the "sex part" in mode 3 is the "feeling person", and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the early stage of the operation effective period as in the case of the "sick side". When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 458 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is performed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 458 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 456 (d)) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not by the player) in the auto button mode within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects (Example 4)

  FIG. 459 shows the chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate, and is configured to be depressible. Also, the chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the rotating light. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is disposed.

  FIGS. 459 (a) to (d) show an example in which the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 459 (a) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 is not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700 a is turned off without being rotated.

  FIG. 459 (b) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (the operation valid period has been started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without being rotated.

  FIG. 459 (c) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 700. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 459 (c) and (d), the lamp 700a is turned on while being rotated. As described above, when the chance button 700 is operated, an effect of turning on the lamp 700 a while rotating is started. However, if the player holds the hand on the chance button 700 after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by hand.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 459 (e) to (g) show an example where the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 459 (e) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 is not started and the chance button 700 is waiting. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700 a is turned off without being rotated.

  FIG. 459 (f) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (operation valid period has been started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without being rotated.

  FIG. 459 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while being rotated. As described above, at the time of setting the auto button mode, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button, the lamp 700a is turned on and turned on based on the automatic operation. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the player 700 from lowering the visibility of the lamp 700a.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a case (for example, the lamp 700a) is moved by operating the chance button 700 while sacrificing visibility depending on whether or not the auto button mode is set. The player can select the case of securing the visibility of the character while sacrificing the operation of 700 (Example 5).

  FIG. 460 shows an example of effects according to Example 5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 460 (a) shows a state in which super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a shooting reach is performed in which the f1 defeats the Echigo f3 with a beam.

  In the shooting reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is emitted from the sword of the f1 number of times the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. In order to notify of this, at the start of shooting reach, a string of "shooting reach ~ defeat Echigoya with a button hit ~" is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 1" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 460 (b) shows a state where shooting reach has been started. The effective period of operation of the chance button 136 starts with the start of shooting reach, and in the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and "PUSH!" A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating an operation effective period is displayed below the image, and operation promotion notification is performed.

  The continuous hitting speed in mode 1 of the auto button mode is "low speed" as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 460 (b) and 460 (c), since the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, the beam emitted from the sword of the temple f1 is reduced.

  FIG. 460 (d) shows a state in which the player has started to hit the chance button 136 by himself. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is also validated. For this reason, more beams are emitted from the sword of the lord f1 than when the chance button 136 is operated automatically.

  FIG. 461 is a timing chart showing the state of the chance button sensor 426 at the time of effect execution shown in FIG. 460, the result of the automatic button processing determination (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button acceptance flag. FIG. 461 shows the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the auto button determination processing result (determination in step S1409 from step S1407), and the on / off state of the button reception flag in order from the top. The horizontal axis in FIG. 461 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The auto button determination processing result is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button acceptance flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode.

  Time t1 of FIG. 461 is a time shown in FIG. 460 (b). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at time t1.

  Time t2 in FIG. 461 is the time shown in FIG. 460 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t2 is automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at time t2. In addition, the operation of the chance button 136 at time t3 to t4 is also automatic operation in the automatic button mode. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is performed at equal intervals. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be performed randomly or may be performed in a pattern with a different cycle.

  An operation of the chance button 136 by the player is started from time t5. Therefore, at times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on, and the button acceptance flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only one of the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is effective, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, it may be determined that both are valid. For example, even when the chance button 136 pressed at time t6 is maintained as it is, the result of the automatic button processing determination result at time t7 and time t10 may be ON, or conversely, the chance button 136 If it is maintained in the ON state, the button reception flag may be turned OFF without being turned ON even when the automatic button processing determination result is ON.

  At time t8, the player operates the chance button 136. At time t9, the player operates the chance button 136. Time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 460 (d).

  Although the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, the button reception flag is not turned on at time t10. Therefore, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalidated. In this manner, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be invalidated for a predetermined period after the player operates the chance button 136. After that, the chance button 136 is operated by the player at time t11.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is validated. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to cope with the player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136 . In addition to the operation performed automatically, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture continuous hit effects and the like (for example, shooting reach) by operating the chance button 136 manually.

Here, the configuration may be such that the result of the automatic button processing determination processing is turned ON at the same time as the reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the player presses the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 simultaneously with the start of the period even when waiting for the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Therefore, the chance button It takes time from the start of the reception period of 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In that respect, when the auto button mode is set, the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost simultaneously with the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, so it may be possible to see the effect faster Example 6

  FIG. 462 shows an example of effect display in the sixth example of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 462 (a) to (d) show an example in which the auto button mode is activated. FIG. 462 (a) has shown the state in which the super reach production | presentation is performed during execution of the special figure 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 462 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 462 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 453, the “sex part” in mode 3 is the “mood man”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation effective period.

  FIG. 462 (d) shows a state in which a cut-in effect has been performed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 462 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed up. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 456 (d)) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period.

  FIGS. 462 (e) to (h) show an example in which the auto button mode does not operate. FIG. 462 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is executed. Further, since mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, "mode 3" is displayed on the upper left of the effect display area 208d. The position of the display showing that the auto button mode is being set is at the lower left when executing the super reach effect, and the position of the display showing that the auto button mode is being set is not active at the non effect of the super reach effect It has become. Thus, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set may be changed depending on the state.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left area is a variation icon display area a. In the variation icon display area a, one variation icon can be displayed, and it is possible to give notice of the success or failure of the variation with a predetermined reliability (notice of the variation) by the display mode of the variation icon. In the variation icon display area a, a variation icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  In addition, a horizontally long area adjacent to the right side of the variation icon display area a, which is a lower part of the effect display area 208d, is a special view reserve display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special view hold display area c, one or more hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure reserve display area c, it is possible to notify the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation game by the number of reserve icons, and notify the propriety of the reserve with predetermined reliability by the display mode of each reserve icon (prefetching It is possible to give notice. Further, in the special view reserve display area c of the present example, a reserve icon indicating the hold of reserve orders 1 to 4 is displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the number of reservations for the current special drawing 1 variation game is two, as shown in FIG. 462 (e), the two special icons b1 and b2 have white circles (default) in the special drawing suspension display area c. It is displayed in the form.

  FIG. 462 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special view 1 start port 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the number of reserved special view 1 change games is increased by one. . A reserve icon b3 is newly displayed in the special view reserve display area c.

  The hold icon b3 is a button hold displayed in a display mode of a pattern imitating the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a prefetch notice. While the button hold is displayed, the operation period of the chance button 136 is valid. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. In addition, when multiple buttons are displayed while the auto button mode (except mode 3) is set, only the display mode of the previously displayed buttons is displayed when the auto button mode is activated. Alternatively, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. Moreover, in that case, the display modes of both button hold may not be changed, and the display modes of both button hold may be changed simultaneously. Also, these controls may be different or the same in the setting of the auto button mode and the other states. In addition, the display mode after the change may be different between the change of the display mode by the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the actual pressing of the chance button 136, or even the same. Good. In addition, there may be an aspect or the like that is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, but as shown in FIG. 453, mode 3 does not perform automatic operation at the time of button hold display, and operation by the player is not valid. Therefore, when mode 3 is set, the display mode of the button hold does not change.

  FIG. 462 (g) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game has been started which has been indicated by the hold icon b3. The button hold pending icon b3 is a variation icon a2 with the display mode unchanged. The fluctuation icon a2 gradually moves toward the fluctuation icon display area a.

  FIG. 462 (h) shows a state where the fluctuation icon a2 has moved to the fluctuation icon display area a. The display mode of the fluctuation icon a2 changes after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area a is completed. For example, the change icon a2 changes to a display mode of a pattern drawn as “heat” in a circle of red (indicated by cross hatching in the figure), and a notice display of a special figure 1 change game being executed ( It has become a notice of the change).

As shown in FIGS. 462 (a) to (d) of this embodiment, the automatic button mode may be activated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may be automatically operated. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 462 (e) to (h), the automatic button mode may not be activated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may not be automatically operated. When cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may be activated, or when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode May operate. Further, when cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode does not have to be activated, or when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, The auto button mode may not operate (Example 7)

  FIG. 463 shows an example of effect display in a seventh example of the present embodiment in time series. The left side of FIG. 463 shows the decorative symbol display device 208 etc., and the right side shows the chance button 136 viewed from the player.

  FIG. 463 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of this embodiment, a princess dance super reach is performed where the princess dances.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the effect of operating the chance button 136 in a timely manner is executed. In order to notify of this, at the start of the princess dance super reach, a character string of "hime princess SP reach ~ press flowing buttons with good timing! ~" Is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 463 (b) shows a state in which the princess dance super reach has been started. The activation period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the princess dance super reach. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 lights up.

  Further, in the effect display area 208d, the image of the princess, the chance button image g, and the aiming frame h are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from the top toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically at timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 463 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, the chance button 136 is movable by drive means such as a motor or a solenoid. At the timing when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, it is retracted as if the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may be operated to protrude upward. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is provided with a driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed by operating the driving means according to the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the drive means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the auto button mode being set to ON. For example, the chance button 136 can be pressed by applying a force from the inside to the outside from the inside of the chance button 136 to fix the chance button 136 so as not to move or retracting the chance button 136 and fixing the chance button 136 in the retracted state. You may lose it.

  Thus, when automatically operating the chance button 136 in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is operated as if it were actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the player operates the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is automatically operated by the operation of the auto button mode. By turning off the chance button lamp 138 based on the operation, it may be possible to make the player illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, in order to make the player illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated. The appearance of the chance button 136 should be common. In this case, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the lighting condition of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, presence / absence of issuance, light emission color, brightness) At least one element among a plurality of elements such as the posture and the state of movement may be made common.

  FIG. 463 (d) shows the state after the chance button 136 has been operated automatically. As shown in FIG. 453, in mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing when all become "PERFECT". For this reason, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, an effect image including the character string "PERFECT" is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played without operating the chance button 136 even for the player who feels that the operation of the chance button 136 is troublesome. May be shown to

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 436 to 463. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:

  Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136 and 700, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

At least one of a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effect, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP reach effect) at least one of the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) that can be executed;
A game console equipped with

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (e.g., a cut-in effect, change in button hold, etc.),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold),

  The rendering means is capable of at least executing the first rendering (for example, cut-in rendering (see FIG. 456)) when the first condition is established.

The effect means is capable of at least executing the second effect (for example, change of button hold in mode 3) when the second condition is satisfied.
The first effect is at least a different effect from the second effect,

  The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player,

The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to show the same effect as in the case of operating the operating means without operating the operating means even to the player who feels that the operation of the operating means is troublesome. There is a case. In addition, by providing an effect that can be viewed by not operating the operating means, there may be a case where a new way of enjoying the game can be performed in which the operating means is not operated intentionally (2) The pachinko machine 100,

  A game console comprising presentation mode control means capable of at least switching control of a plurality of presentation modes,

  At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode (for example, non-setting of an auto button mode),

  At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode (for example, an auto button button mode),

  The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

  The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

  The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.

The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A game stand characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a player who does not want to operate the operation means does not operate the operation means by providing the effect to be performed only in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. In some cases there is no loss. Conversely, a player who does not want to operate the operation means may obtain the game by not operating the operation means (3) The pachinko machine 100 described above,

  The effect means can at least execute an operation promotion notification (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136, a meter image),

  When the effect mode is the first effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification.

When the effect mode is the second effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is a notification to urge the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even if the effect mode in which the operation on the operation means is automatically performed, the operation is promoted by executing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the operation means to automate the operation. It may be possible to rescue a player who is feeling backwards. In addition, it may be difficult to understand that the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode) is set by another player. Further, since control can be made common in a plurality of effect modes, the control load can be reduced and the process of design work can be reduced (4) The above-described pachinko machine 100,

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, a cut-in effect),

The rendering means is capable of at least executing the third rendering when the third condition is established.
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,

The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated by the player.
(5) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, wherein

  The third effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,

The first effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, a game in which the player suddenly wants to operate the operation means by accepting the operation of the operation means by the player even in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. It can cope with the Moreover, in addition to the operation performed automatically, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture continuous hit effects etc. by operating the operation means manually (6) the above game console,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 464, which corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 465 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  In conventional gaming machines, there was an effect that would not be executed unless the player operated the operation means. Also, in the conventional gaming machine, depending on conditions such as time-up of the operation effective period of the operation means, even when the player does not operate the operation means, the same effect as when the operation means is operated may be executed. there were. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect to be executed based on the operation of the operation means is likely to be monotonous, and the predetermined effect is executed at the determined timing, so the player is started. There is a problem that it is easy to predict the contents of the presentation and it is easy to get bored with the presentation.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment makes various effects to be performed based on the operation of the operation means, and randomizes the timing of effect execution, thereby providing effects to be started by the player. This makes it difficult to predict the contents of the game, and can be used to create timeless effects.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows:

(Appendix G1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
At least one of a plurality of effects, and at least one effect means that can be performed;
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The rendering means is capable of at least performing the first rendering when the first condition is established.
The rendering means is at least capable of executing the second rendering when the second condition is established.
The first effect is at least a different effect from the second effect,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix G2)
The gaming machine described in appendix G1,
A game console comprising presentation mode control means capable of at least switching control of a plurality of presentation modes,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix G3)
The game console described in Appendix G2,
The rendering means is at least capable of executing an operation promotion notification.
When the effect mode is the first effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification.
When the effect mode is the second effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is a notification to urge the player to operate the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix G4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2 or G3,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The rendering means is capable of at least executing the third rendering when the third condition is established.
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated by the player.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix G5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G4,
The third effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix G6)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices G1 to G5, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game console characterized by the above [10th embodiment]

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to an example of the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 466 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed, for example, on an island facility, the side closer to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as the “front side”, and the side farther to the player than the “front side” is the “rear side”. It is written as

  As shown in FIG. 466, a decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 (second display means), and a decorative portion 814 are arranged in this order from the rear side to the front side. The decorative portion 814 is disposed on the rear side of the front stage 244. In FIG. 466, the decoration parts 810 and 814 are illustrated in a simplified manner in the form of a horizontally long flat plate. On the front surface of the decorative portions 810 and 814, for example, a decorative member or a lamp or the like formed in a predetermined shape by resin or the like is installed. Further, in the decorative portion 810, an opening portion 810a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is opened. The decorative portion 810 is arranged such that the opening 810 a overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the area of the opening 810 a is smaller than the area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the decorative portion 810. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a portion (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the drawing) which is viewed through the opening 810a is a region which can be viewed by the player. In addition, the frame area 805 surrounding the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured so as not to be recognized by the player.

  The light guide plate 812 is made of, for example, an acrylic resin. A plurality of LED lamps (not shown) are disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate 812. In addition, on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812, a lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed. As a result, a light beam incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 from the LED lamp is reflected toward the player by a lens cut formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812 and is emitted from the light guide plate 812. Light is emitted in a predetermined color (for example, red, green, blue) from the light guide plate 812 to a predetermined pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 466) It is viewed by the player as if Thereby, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 812. In the present example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 is one type of the face 705 of the crown, but a plurality of patterns may be displayed on the light guide plate 812. Further, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be made different depending on the pattern of the lighted LED lamp. Further, the pattern (light emission pattern) displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be made different depending on the lens cut pattern formed on the light guide plate 812. Further, in this example, when the LED lamp is not lit, the player is able to see what is disposed behind the light guide plate 812 such as the decorative portion 810 and the decorative symbol display device 208. The pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be visible from the player even when the LED lamp is not lit, or it may be easy to view or hard to view. , And may not be visible.

  A decorative portion 814 is disposed on the front side of the light guide plate 812. In the decorative portion 814, a horizontally long rectangular opening 814a is opened. The decorative portion 814 is disposed such that the opening 814 a and the front surface of the light guide plate 812 overlap. The area of the opening 814 a is smaller than the surface area of the light guide plate 812. Therefore, a part of the light guide plate 812 is hidden by the decoration portion 814. A portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is viewed through the opening 814a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is a display area that can be viewed by the player. Therefore, an outer peripheral portion 812a (outside of a dotted line in the drawing) surrounding the display area of the light guide plate 812 is not seen by the player. Further, in this example, the area other than the pattern in the portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is viewed through the opening 814a is the decorative portion 810 and the decorative symbol display device regardless of non-emission when the LED lamp emits light. What is disposed behind the light guide plate 812 such as 208 is visible or easy to see from the player.

  The decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814 are installed in the rendering device 206. A plurality of effect movable bodies such as the effect movable bodies 224 and 800 may be disposed between the decorative portion 810 and the light guide plate 812. Further, a plurality of effect movable bodies may be disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a transparent plate formed of transparent resin or the like may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decoration portion 814. In addition, one or more effect movable bodies (for example, effect movable bodies 806) may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. Moreover, the transparent plate formed with transparent resin etc. may be arrange | positioned at the front side of the said effect movable body.

  Next, a display example displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 467 is a schematic view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814 viewed from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 467 (a), the domed face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is viewed through the opening 814a of the decoration 814. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized through the opening 810 a of the decorative portion 810.

  FIG. 467 (b) shows a state in which the effect is actually executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 467 (c) is a view shown in FIG. 467 (b) with the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 removed. An area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 467 (c) indicates a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which the player can actually visually recognize through the opening 810a.

  As shown in FIG. 467 (c), "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are provided above the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, below the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2, number-of-holds display areas 712a and 712b are provided. In the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a1, a2, and a3 are displayed, respectively. When the face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 while the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the effect as shown in FIG. 467 (c), the player is displayed as shown in FIG. 467 (b). Is visible. Since the domed face 705 is displayed by emitting light of a predetermined color on the transparent light guide plate 812, the back side is displayed so as to be transparent (the back side is visible). For this reason, in the image or pattern displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the visibility of the portion overlapping with the face 705 of the crown becomes relatively low, and the visibility of the portion not overlapping the face 705 of the crown It is relatively high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 467 (b), the entire fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the number-of-holds display area 712a, and substantially the entire number-of-holds display area 712b (the part where the number of reservations is displayed by numbers) And are displayed so as not to overlap with the face 705 of the lord. For this reason, even when the domed face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player does not lower the visibility of the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the number-of-holds display areas 712a and 712b. In some cases, it may be possible to easily recognize whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed, or the number of reserved special figures.

  The position where all or part of the whole or a part of the number-of-holds display area 712a (shows the number of reservations in special figure 1) and all or part of the number-of-holds display area 712b (shows the number of reservations in special figure 2) It may be displayed on the screen.

  At least one of the hold icon and the number-of-holds display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping with the face 705, and the other may be displayed at a position not overlapping the face 705. In addition, both the holding icon and the number-of-holdings display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at positions overlapping with the donkey face 705, and both may be arranged at positions not overlapping with each other.

  Next, specific effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 468 and 469. FIGS. 468 (a) to 468 (g) show, in this order, specific effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  In FIGS. 468 to 469, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are not shown. In addition, when the LED lamp arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 emits light and the face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the face 705 on the decorative pattern display device 208 is illustrated. .

  In FIG. 468 (a), the special symbol 2 variation game is over, and the decorative symbol of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the rectangular display area central part of the decorative symbol display device 208 The stop display is shown, and it is indicated that the special decision result concerning the special figure 2 fluctuation game is informed that it is a special big hit. Since the special figure 2 variation game is over, and the special figure variation game of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not executed, both of the two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with the predetermined color .

  The gaming state at the time point shown in FIG. 468 (a) is the special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state (power-added probability change state). For this reason, "in the middle of a definite change" is displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that it is a special figure high probability state (a positive change state).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to display only the holding icon indicating the holding of the special drawing 2 in the common drawing high probability state (during power support). For this reason, in the pending icon display area 710, pending icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 indicating the pending count of the special view 2 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icons a11, a12, a13 and a14 correspond to the first to fourth hold orders in this order. That is, the hold icon a11 indicates the first hold (first hold), the hold icon a12 indicates the second hold, and the hold icon a13 indicates the third hold. The hold icon a14 indicates the fourth hold pending. In addition, the display mode of the hold icons a11 to a14 is white and circular. In addition, since the number of reservations of the special view 1 at the current time is four, "4" is displayed in the number of reservations display area 712a, and the number of reservations of the special view 2 is four. Is displayed as "4". The pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon indicating the hold of the special view 1 in the hold icon display area 710 even during power support.

  FIG. 468 (b) continued from FIG. 468 (a) shows a state in which it is notified that the special jackpot is won in the special figure 2 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 468 (a). The special big hit (big hit in special figure A) shifts to a definite change state (special figure high probability state) in the gaming state after the big hit game. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the hold icon display area 710 also disappears, and the hold icon is not displayed. Instead of them, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the special jackpot winning notification effect by the character string of "probable variation big hit" is executed.

  FIG. 468 (c) continuing from FIG. 468 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game has been started. When the big hit game is started, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the stop display of the decorative symbol is not performed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the hold icon in the hold icon display area 710 even during the big hit game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 468 (c), the first round (1R) of the 15R big hit game is being executed. In the effect display area 208d which has spread over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of the beach is displayed. In addition, the upper right of the effect display area 208d is a number-of-rounds display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in execution of the big hit game. Here, "1 R" is displayed and the first round of the big hit game is being executed. It is informed that there is. Further, the upper left of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type, and here, "decoration 7" is displayed and it is reported that the big hit is the 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 468 (d) continuing from FIG. 468 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game has entered the sixth round (6R). “6R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717 to notify that the sixth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  In FIG. 468 (e) continued from FIG. 468 (d), the state in which the face 705 (second display) of the you are displayed on the light guide plate 812 which was not displayed in FIGS. 468 (a) to 468 (d) Is shown. Since the domed face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the visibility of the display (for example, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the number of rounds display, the big hit type display) by the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced. In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 468 (e) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6 R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717.

  In the present embodiment, if it is determined that there is a big hit in the pre-reading result for the special-figure fluctuation game being suspended at the current time, as a result of the special drawing pre-reading process, the youtube-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 (so-called It is displayed only when it is determined that there is a pending party. In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the pre-determination result (special drawing pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special view prefetching process is executed in the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. For example, in the special view prefetching process executed up to the time shown in FIG. 468 (a), when there is a big hit in the hold, the face 705 of the lord is displayed that there is a hold inside connection in the big hit game. Inform by In the present embodiment, the tombstone's face 705 is used as a premier effect (display of a big hit decision) for informing that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In FIG. 468 (f) continuing from FIG. 468 (e), the winning balls based on the game ball's winnings to the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game are paid out to the lower plate 128, and the lower plate 128 becomes full. It indicates a condition where a lower error has occurred. When the lower tray full error occurs, a lower tray full error display (ball removal notification) 704 (first display) is displayed on the left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower-plate full-tan error display 704 includes a rectangular frame and a character string "Please pull the ball" displayed in the frame. The lower tray full error display 704 is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower tray full error from the main control unit 300. The lower tray full error display 704 corresponds to an operation request notification that requests the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. When the face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower-level full-tan error display 704 has relatively low visibility. In addition, the lower tray full tank error display 704 is displayed until the gaming bowl (prize ball) stored in the lower tray 128 is discharged to, for example, a dollar box by the operation of the ball discharging lever 132 and the lower tray full tank error is cancelled. Keep being done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 468 (f), the display color of the hold icon a13 is changed from white (indicated by hatching in the upper right of the figure). The pachinko machine 100 changes the display color of the hold icon a13 to notify that the prefetch result relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation game with the hold order 3 is a big hit. The hold icon a13 whose display color has been changed during the big hit game is used as a premier effect (show effect of big hit determination) notifying that there is a big hit in the hold. In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 468 (f) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6 R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717.

  FIG. 468 (g) continued from FIG. 468 (f) shows a state where the display color of the reserve icon a13 is further changed from the time point shown in FIG. 468 (f) (indicated by cross hatching in the drawing). As described above, in the premium effect executed using the hold icon during the big hit game, the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is changed as needed. The change in display color of the hold icon may be, for example, continuously changing from blue to green to red, or as the hold icon emits light. It may be. In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 468 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6 R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717.

  FIG. 469 shows a specific effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example of the present embodiment. FIGS. 469 (a) to (c) are effects that are executed subsequently to FIG. 468 (g), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 469 (a) shows a state in which the change of the display color of the hold icon a13 is completed. The hold icon a13 is then displayed in a color when the change in display color is completed until the corresponding hold is digested and deleted. In addition, if the display mode of the reserve icon in the special game (for example, in the big hit game) and the display mode of the reserve icon in the normal game (for example, during the odd change, during the short time, the special figure low probability diagram low probability state etc.) are different. You may make it In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 468 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6 R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717.

  FIG. 469 (b) continuing from FIG. 469 (a) shows a state in which the LED lamps arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 are turned off and the face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is erased. There is. In this example, after the change of the display color of the hold icon used for the premiere effect is completed, the doll's face 705 is erased. Note that the deletion timing of the face 705 may be earlier than, simultaneously with, or later than the change completion timing of the hold icon. In addition, since the face 705 of the lord is deleted, the visibility of the lower right error display 704, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the number of rounds display, and the big hit type display is improved. In addition, you may be displayed straddling between a plurality of rounds.

  In addition, the text "Please remove the ball" included in the lower tray full error display 704 is displayed in black, for example. Moreover, the part of the sea of the background image displayed on the back of the said character string is displayed with dark blue, for example. Since a text string “Please drop a ball” is displayed overlapping the dark blue, the text string that is a part of the lower tray full error display 704 is difficult to see. As described above, depending on the color of the background image, it may be difficult to see a part of the lower plate full error display 704.

  FIG. 469 (c) continued from FIG. 469 (b) shows a state in which the sixth round of the jackpot game is over and the interval between the rounds is entered. The inter-round interval refers to a period from the closing of the variable winning opening 234 in one round in the big hit game to the opening of the variable winning opening 234 in the next round of the round. In the inter-round interval, the number-of-rounds display area 717 is erased and the number of rounds is not displayed. In addition, even in the interval between rounds, the lower right error display 704 continues to be displayed. Also, the face 705 may be continuously displayed in the interval between rounds, may be hidden in the interval between rounds, and may be displayed again after transition to the next round. In addition, round number display (for example, 6R) of the round which ended also during the interval between rounds may be displayed continuously, and the round number display of the round which starts after opening simultaneously with opening of the variable winning a prize opening 234 (( For example, 7R) may be displayed. In addition, after the closing of the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the closing of the variable winning opening 234 in the sixth round) simultaneously or after closing, a round number display (for example, 7R) to be started next may be displayed.

  FIG. 469 (d) continued from FIG. 469 (c) shows a state in which the seventh round of the jackpot game has been started. Since the inter-round interval ends and the seventh round starts, a round number display area 717 is provided and displayed as "7R".

  FIG. 469 (e) continued from FIG. 469 (d) shows a state in which the bottom plate error has been cancelled. For example, since the ball discharging lever 132 is operated by the player and the winning balls (game balls) stored in the lower tray 128 are discharged to the dollar box, the lower tray full error is canceled. As a result, the lower plate full error display 704 is erased.

  FIG. 469 (f) continuing from FIG. 469 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the fifteenth round which is the final round of the big hit game. “15R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717 to notify that the fifteenth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 469 (g) continuing from FIG. 469 (f) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended. Since the success or failure judgment result concerning the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is special big hit (big hit of special figure A), after the big hit game ends, the game state becomes special figure high probability state (certainly probability state). In addition, the game state at the end of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is also the special figure high probability state. For this reason, in the effect display area 208d expanded to the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Probability variation continued!" Is displayed, and it is informed that the gaming state is shifted to the special figure high probability state. At the end of the big hit game, the hold icon display area 710 disappears and the hold icon is not displayed. The hold icon may be displayed continuously even at the end of the big hit game.

  In the interval between rounds, the lower right error display 704 may be hidden. In addition, when a bottom plate full-time error occurs, a voice error notification may be performed along with the bottom plate full-time error display 704.

  In addition, the domed face 705 may be displayed by repeating lighting and extinguishing (repeating lighting and extinguishing of a plurality of LED lamps provided on the side surface of the light guide plate 812). In addition, the domed face 705 may be displayed to blink (by flashing a plurality of LED lamps). In addition, the face 705 of the lord may continue to be displayed at a predetermined brightness (with the plurality of LED lamps continuing to be lit at the predetermined brightness).

  In addition, the domed face 705 may be displayed in a single color, may be displayed so that the color changes continuously with the passage of time, or may be displayed in gradation.

Also, if a serious error occurs (for example, an error that needs to be canceled by a store clerk at a game store), the doll's face 705 may be deleted.
Also, even if a serious error occurs, your face 705 may be displayed continuously.

  Also, if a serious error occurs, the round number display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed to another display.

  When a serious error occurs, all the displays including the number of rounds display may be hidden, and only a display notifying that a serious error has occurred may be displayed. Also, even if a serious error occurs, the round number display may be continued.

  In addition, when a power interruption occurs during the game (during a big hit, during symbol fluctuation) (for example, when an abnormality occurs in the electrical system such as a drop in the power supply voltage due to lightning, and then the power returns), the predetermined timing (The start of the next round during the big hit round, the start of the next change if the symbol changes) You may hide the effect display and display the power recovery display such as "power is restored". In addition, a message such as "Please strike a ball" may be displayed. In this case, if an error has occurred, it may be displayed that an error has occurred. Also, only serious errors may be displayed. In addition, even if an error is not displayed, another display means (for example, an LED lamp, a sub display device 808, etc.) or a sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) may notify that an error has occurred. Good.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means and a light guide plate 812 as a second display means.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is capable of displaying at least a lower bowl full error display (ball removal notification) 704 as a first display.

  The sub display device 808 is capable of displaying at least the face 705 of the lady as the second display.

  At least a part of the lower disk full error display (ball dropping notification) 704 is such that the visibility is at least lowered when the light guide plate 812 is in the first state.

  The first state is a state in which at least the face 705 is displayed by the light guide plate 812.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the visibility of the lower tray full error display 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may become low, so that the decorative symbol display with an error display which is hard to see In some cases, it may be possible to make the device 208 pay attention to the player and concentrate on the game. In addition, the visibility of the lower tray full error display 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, so that the player's gaze can be seen more easily on the face 705 of the grandmother than the lower tray full error display 703. It may be possible to direct it.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, as the first display, the alert notification effect 722, the right alert effect 724, the alert alert effect 750, and the alert alert effect described later. 772. The first display 790 may be displayed. In addition, as the second display, the sub display device 808 performs the advance notice notification effects 730 and 740 described later, the electric Chu Long open effect, the electric Chu Long open false effect 760, the user level informing effect 775, and the second display 792. It may be displayable.

  The lower tray full error display 704 can be replaced with an operation request display (button image, meter of effective period image, touch operation animation, etc.).

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 466 to 469. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
A first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A second display means (for example, a sub display device 808, a light guide plate 812);
A game console equipped with

  The first display means is a first display (e.g., a bottom full error display (ball drop notification) 703, 704, alert notification notification effect 722, right strike notification effect 724, alert notification notification effect 750, alert notification At least the effect 772, the first display 790) can be displayed,

  The second display means displays a second display (for example, effect display, domino c1, villager c5, donosama's face 705, pre-reading advance notice annoyance effects 730, 740, electric Chu Long opening effect, electric Chu Long opening false effect 760 , User level notification effect 775, second display 792) can be displayed at least

  At least a part of the first display is at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state,

The first state is a state in which the second display is at least displayed on the second display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player may try to recognize the notification content by the first display. It may be possible to focus on the means and focus the player on the game. Further, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, so that the line of sight of the player can be directed to the second display which is easier to see than the first display. There is a possibility.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying one or more displays different from the first display.

The second display means may be capable of displaying one or more displays different from the second display.
The second display means may be capable of displaying only the second display.

  The whole or a part of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  The first state may be a state in which only the second display is displayed by the second display means.

  The first state may be a state in which one or more displays including the second display are displayed by the second display means.

  At least a portion of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

  At least a portion of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.

The first state may be a state in which the second display is at least displayed by the second display means (2) the pachinko machine 100,

  The first display is a display relating to a game (for example, a bottom plate full error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704),

The second display is an effect display (for example, an effect display, a lord c 1, a villager c 5, a lord 705).
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, the display relating to the game displayed on the first display means becomes difficult to see by the effect display displayed on the second display means, so the effect display displayed on the second display means In some cases (3) the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100.

  At least a part of the first display is at least higher in visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state;

The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than that in the first state, so the first display is displayed in the first state. In some cases, it may be possible to make it easy for the player to guess.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the one or more states including the first state when the second display means is in the second state .

  In the case where the second display means is in the second state, part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state, and one or more states different from the first state Also, the visibility may be low.

  The second state may be a state in which one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the second display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the second display means (4) the pachinko machine 100,

  The first area is provided at least at a position overlapping at least the second area in the first state,

  The first area is at least a part of the first display means (for example, an area for displaying a display regarding a game, an image display area, a frame area 805).

The second area is at least a part of the second display means (for example, a display area for displaying effect display, an image display area, a frame portion 807, an outer peripheral portion 812a).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, thereby making the player pay attention to the first display means and concentrating on the game. There is a possibility. Further, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, so that the line of sight of the player can be directed to the second display which is easier to see than the first display. There is a possibility.

  The first area may be the area of only part or all of the first display means.

  The second area may be an area of only part or all of the second display means.

  The first region may be provided at a position overlapping only the second region in the first state.

The first area may be provided on one overlapping with one or more areas including the second area in the first state (5) the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

The first display is an error display (for example, a bottom full error display 703, 704),
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, in the case of the first state, the player is made to make an effort to make the player recognize the error display by lowering the visibility of the error display, and make the player carefully watch the error display. There is a possibility. In addition, when the error display is displayed, it may be possible to prevent the second display (effect display) from being overlooked (6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  The second display means is provided at least in front of the first display means.

  The second display may be displayed at least in front of the first display.

According to this configuration, when the second state is displayed in front of the first state in the first state, it may be possible to make the second display easy to pay attention to the player. . Also, in the case of the first state, displaying the first display behind the second display may allow the player to watch the first display carefully.
The second display means may be provided on the front side of the first display means.

  The second display means is one or more components including the first display means (for example, display means, effect means, movable means, winning means (variable winning means, start winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate It may be provided on the front side of the member, etc.).

The second display means is provided on the front side of the first display means, and is a component different from the first display means (for example, display means different from the first and second display means, effect means, movable means, prize winning It may be provided on the rear side of the means (variable winning means, start winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate member, etc.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed in front of the first display and may be displayed behind one or more displays different from the first and second displays.

The second display may be displayed on the front side of the one or more displays including the first display (7) the pachinko machine 100,

  The first display means is provided with at least a first display area (for example, an image display area, an area for displaying a display regarding a game),

The second display means is at least provided with a second display area (for example, an image display area, a display area for displaying effect display).
The first display area can display at least the first display,
The second display area can display at least the second display,

The third display area is provided at least at a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,
The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,
The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area.
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, in the first state, the third display area and the fourth display area are provided at overlapping positions, so that the player can see the first display displayed in the first display area. You may be able to make them look carefully. In addition, in some cases, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the second display displayed in the second display area.
The first display means may be provided with only the first display area.

The first display means may be provided with one or more display areas including the first display area.
The second display means may be provided with only the second display area.

  The second display means may be provided with one or more display areas including the second display area.

The first display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the first display.
The first display area may be capable of displaying only the first display.

The second display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the second display.
The second display area may be capable of displaying only the second display.
The third display area may be part or all of the first display area.
The fourth display area may be part or all of the second display area.

A part or all of the third display area may be provided at least at a position overlapping with a part or all of the fourth display area in the first state (8) With the pachinko machine 100 There,

The first display indicates information that is more important to the player than the second display (for example, information requesting an operation of a store clerk or a player at a game store (ball drop notification, error notification, pressing of a chance button At least include request notification etc.)
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, a part of the display (first display) including the information having high importance to the player is lowered in the visibility due to the part of the effect display (second display). There are cases where it is possible to make it easy for the player to look at the display means.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display is one or more pieces of information more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information less important than the second display (for example, a character image, a background, etc. ) May be included.

The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the one or more displays different from the second display (for example, (9) The pachinko machine 100 may be a display including an image of a character, a background, and the like.

  An operating means (for example, ball discharge lever 132) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

The first display includes at least a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display by lowering the visibility of at least a part of the notification that prompts the operation of the operation means by the effect display.
The operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate.

  The first display may include only a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The first display may include one or more notifications including a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes rendering means (for example, a rendering movable body 806). The effect means is at least movable (for example, moving, rotating, vibrating). The effect means may be one performing one or more of movement, rotation, and vibration, or may be capable of performing all of movement, rotation, and vibration. Further, the effect means may be provided with a second display means (for example, the sub display device 808 and the light guide plate 812 (PM plate)).

  The first display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) does not move. Also, the first display means is fixed.

  At least a part of the display area of the second display means is at least transparent. A transmissive liquid crystal display may be used for the second display means. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. When the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitted, the player can visually recognize the back (rear side) of the display area.

In addition, at least a part of the second display means is at least transparent. For the second display means, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the surface of a transparent plate or a glass plate, and when the LED lamp is arranged in the vicinity and the LED lamp emits light, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Emits a pattern.
The transmittance of at least a part of the second display means may not be 0%.
The whole of the second display means may be transparent.
The transmittance of at least a part of the second display means may be 100%.

  Note that at least a portion of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a portion of the second display means.

  Note that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means.

  The transmittance of at least a part of the second display means is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may change stepwise. This stepwise change indicates that the transmittance changes in order with the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  The transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  The transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the state of the second display means is changed from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The second display means may be a movable (movable, rotatable, vibrateable) liquid crystal display device.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with the third display means, and at least one of the second display means and the third display means may be transparent.

  At least both of the second display means and the third display means may be transparent.

Note that only one of the second display means and the third display means may be at least transparent.
The third display means may be the same as the second display means.

Note that the third display means may be installed in movable (movable, rotatable, vibrateable) effect means.
The third display means may execute an effect that can be performed by the second display means.

  The technical matters applied to the second display means are also applicable to the third display means.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with a further display means (for example, a display means composed of a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate).

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 0% (the second display may be transparent).

The transmittance of part or all of the second display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Note that the entire second display may be transparent.
Note that only part of the second display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  Note that part or all of the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  Note that part of one or more displays including the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  Note that all of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  Note that a part of one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.

  In addition, all of one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through part of the second display.

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display is a first value, and the first value may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display may change stepwise. This stepwise change indicates that the transmittance changes in order with the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  The transmittance of part or all of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  The transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing the state of the second display from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  As a result, the second display may be easily seen, and it may be difficult for the player to miss the second display.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 0% (the second display may be transparent).

In addition, 0% may be sufficient as the one part or all part of the transmittance | permeability of 1st display. (The second display may not be transparent).
Note that only part of the first display may have a transmittance of 100%.

  Note that part or all of the second display may be visible through part of the first display.

  Note that a part of one or more displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  In addition, all of one or more displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display is a first value, and the first value may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display may change stepwise. This stepwise change indicates that the transmittance changes in order with the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.

  The transmittance of part or all of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  The transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing from the low state to the high state of the transmittance of the first display. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least difficult to view from the player.

  The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least invisible to the player.

  The first area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.

  The first area may be an area including at least a portion of the second display area.

  The second area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.

  The first area may not include the first display area. Here, the first area corresponds to part of a so-called center character.

  Note that the second area may not include the second display area. Here, the second region corresponds to the decoration portion of the sub display device 808 or the like.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with error notification means capable of at least notifying of an error.

  The error notification means includes a decoration lamp (lighting notification), a speaker (lighting notification), a light guide plate (transparent plate) (light emission makes characters and patterns appear), liquid crystal (display by image and characters), and the like.

There is a first error in which an error display is performed by display means such as the first display means or the second display means.
There is a second error in which the display means does not display an error.
The error indication is the first error.

  Note that the first error may be an error that is difficult for the player to notice if the error is not displayed (the error is not notified). For example, the first error is a door open error or a bottom full error.

  The first error may be an error for warning the player of fraud. The pachinko machine 100 performs an error notification to warn the player of fraud when a predetermined sensor detects an external radio wave, magnetism, vibration or the like.

  Note that the first error may be an error for notifying a salesperson of a game arcade of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 carries out an error notification to notify an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when a radio wave, magnetism, vibration and the like from the outside are detected by a predetermined sensor.

  The second error may be an error which is less likely to be eliminated immediately. The second error is, for example, a door open error or a bottom full error.

  Note that the second error is an error that makes it easy for the player to notice even if the error is not displayed (for example, the game ball can not be fired, the image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the award ball is not paid out, effect movable body 224 Etc.) may be an error.

  The errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, an error related to an abnormality in the number of game balls paid out, a lower plate full error (informing the ball removal) notified when the lower plate is full, an open condition of an attacker or electric chew An abnormal winning error that is notified when a winning of the gaming ball to the attacker or the electric chew is detected when the is not established. An error (a radio wave sensor error, a magnetic sensor error, etc.) for notifying fraud as an act of fraud when a sensor (eg, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) detects a fraud (when a vibration is given to the pachinko machine 100 from outside) Vibration detection error reported on (The vibration detection error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, or any of Even in the gaming state, it may be left on the display means), a gaming machine failure error notifying a failure of the pachinko machine 100, a door opening error, a payout means error relating to a payout means abnormality, an error regarding connection failure of a board, effect movable body 224 There is an error related to the stop position abnormality such as.

  Any of the above errors may be the first error. Moreover, any of the above errors may be the second error.

  The above error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, or left in the display means in any game state. It may be done.

  Pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a storage tray (for example, lower tray 128) capable of storing at least gaming balls.

  The above operation means is capable of at least discharging the game balls stored in the storage tray when operated.

  The first display described above includes at least a notification for prompting the player to eject the game ball from the storage tray.

  According to this configuration, the player is concentrated on the effect display by reducing the visibility of the notification by hiding at least a part of the notification prompting the game ball to be discharged from the storage tray by the effect display. May be entertaining.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a first operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a second operation means (for example, the chance button 136).

The above operation means may be at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means.
The operation means may be a chance button.

  The operation means may be a return button (for example, return operation button 142).

  The operation means may be a lending button (for example, a ball lending operation button 140).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of movable (for example, movable, rotatable, and vibrateable) movable display devices. For example, a liquid crystal display device is used as the movable display device.

  By moving one of the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of part of the first display may be reduced.

  By moving one of the plurality of movable display devices, the overall visibility of the first display may be reduced.

  By moving the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of part or all of the first display may be reduced.

By moving only one of the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of part or all of the first display may be reduced.
One of the plurality of effect movable bodies may be a movable display device.

  At least a portion of the display area of the movable display is at least transparent. A transmissive liquid crystal display may be used for the movable display. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. When the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitted, the player can visually recognize the back (rear side) of the display area.

In addition, at least a part of the movable display device is at least transparent. A transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used for the movable display device. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the surface of a transparent plate or a glass plate, and when the LED lamp is arranged in the vicinity and the LED lamp emits light, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Emits a pattern.
The transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may not be 0%.
The entire movable display device may be transparent.
The transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may be 100%.

  Note that at least a portion of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a portion of the movable display device.

  Note that at least a part of the game area may be visible at least through at least a part of the movable display device.

  The transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device is a first value, and the first value may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  The transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display may be changed stepwise. This stepwise change means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, and a third value. It shows that it changes in order, and the 1st value, the 2nd value, and the 3rd value may be respectively different values.

  The transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  The transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the movable display device is changed from the low transmittance state to the high transmittance state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  When the first display and the second display are displayed respectively, the visibility of the first display may be relatively high, and the visibility of the second display may be relatively low. .

  Display related to the game, for example, error display, operation request notification, alert display, effect display, notice display, user mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demo display, power on display (power supply During power on, during power recovery, etc.).

  The player may be provided with operating means (launch intensity changing operation means) capable of at least changing the launch intensity of the gaming ball while operating the ball launch handle 134. The launch intensity of the gaming ball may be changed so as to increase only when the launch intensity changing operation means is operated. The launch intensity of the gaming ball may be changed to be stronger based on one actuation of the launch intensity changing operation means. In this case, the launch intensity of the gaming ball may be returned to its original value when the launch intensity changing operation means is operated once.

  As an example of the first display, a display capable of informing that the emission intensity change operation means is operated, a display prompting the operation of the emission intensity change operation means, and the release of the operation of the emission intensity change operation means (e.g. Display prompting release of the release intensity change operation means of the formula, display reminding of operation of the release intensity change operation means (for example, an image reminiscent of the emission intensity change operation means by the roulette effect of the electric tuong open effect , In the case of playing a big hit game by right-handling, when the notice of the big hit decision of the special figure fluctuation game in progress is stopped) and the like.

  The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means may have different display modes (for example, during power support and during non-power support) according to a plurality of gaming states. In this case, for example, at least a part of the display related to the firing intensity change operation means of the display mode of one of the gaming states (during power support) may be hidden by the second display, and the other gaming state (non-electric The display regarding the emission intensity change operating means of the display mode of (in the middle) may not be hidden by the second display. Also, for example, at least a part of the display regarding the emission intensity change operation means of the display mode of one of the gaming states (during power support) may not be hidden by the second display, and the other gaming state (non-playing The display regarding the emission intensity change operating means of the display mode of the power support) may be hidden by the second display.

  The display related to the emission intensity changing operation means may be a display mode different from that for right-handed notification (for example, right-handed notification effect 724 described later), or may be a display mode included in right-handed notification, right The display mode may be the same as the hit notification.

Note that the display regarding the right-handed notification and the emission intensity change operation means may partially overlap the displayed periods. The period in which "Please return the handle to the left" is reported at the end of the charge support, for example, is the period from the end of the charge support to the end of the fourth special figure change game, The period in which it is reported that “Please release the key” is, for example, a period from the end of the power support to the end of the first special figure fluctuation game [the eleventh embodiment]

  Next, a game console according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. An example in which the visibility of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes will be described using FIG. First, an example in which the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes will be described using FIGS. 470 (a) to 470 (f).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 470 (a), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed at predetermined intervals. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a second display 792 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the first display 790, as shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (a). Thus, by displaying the second display 792 in front of the first display 790, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed, and the first display 790 is changed to the second display 790. In some cases, the second display 792 can be made more visible than the first display 790, making it more invisible than the display 792. When the display is switched from the state shown on the left of FIG. 470 (a) to the state shown on the right, the display may be switched in stages. For example, the first display 790 may move toward the second display 792 when the display switching starts. Thereby, when the first display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, attention is focused on the moving first display 790, and the first display 790 is stopped. It may be easier to see than the second display 792 in some cases.

  Alternatively, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (a) to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be changed. When the display is switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (a) to the state shown on the left side, the display may be switched in stages. For example, the first display 790 may be gradually separated from the second display 792 when the display switching is started. As a result, when the first display 790 overlaps the second display 792 and moves, the first display 790 moving is made more difficult to see than the second display 792 stopped, When the display 790 does not overlap the second display 792, the moving first display 790 may be easier to see than the stopped second display 792.

  In addition, as shown on the left side of FIG. 470 (b), the first display 790 is displayed on the front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are superimposed and displayed. In this case, for example, based on the pressing of the chance button 136, the display color of the second display 792 may be changed to be dark as shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (b). As a result, when the display color of the second display 792 is changed, the second display 792 whose display color is changed is more easily seen than the first display 790 in which there is no change. After the end of the display color change, the second display 792 displayed on the back of the first display 790 may be made less visible than the first display 790 in some cases.

  Alternatively, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (b) to the state shown on the left side. In this manner, the display color of the second display 792 is changed to be lighter while the first display 790 and the second display 792 overlap, and the display color is superimposed on the front surface of the second display 792. In some cases, it may be possible to make the first display 790 more visible and the second display 792 more obscure.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 470 (c), the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval D1. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the distance between the first display 790 and the second display 792 is D2 (D1> D2) as shown on the right side of FIG. Become. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it difficult to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Alternatively, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (c) to the state shown on the left side. As a result, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to facilitate the distinction between the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  When switching from the state shown on the left in FIG. 470 (c) to the state shown on the right or from the state shown on the right to the state shown on the left in a step-by-step manner, draw attention to the moving display In some cases, the display of the moving display among the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be easier to view than the display of the non-moving display.

  In addition, as shown on the left side of FIG. 470 (d), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are superimposed and displayed. If, for example, the context of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is reversed as shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (d) based on the pressing of the chance button 136, The second display 792 may be displayed in front of the first display 790. Thus, by displaying the second display 792 displayed on the back of the first display 790 on the front of the first display 790, the second display 792 can be made more visible than the first display 790. , The first display 790 may be less visible than the second display 792 in some cases.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (d) to the state shown on the left side. Displaying the first display 790 displayed on the back of the second display 792 on the front of the second display 792 makes the first display 790 more visible than the second display 792, and the second display 790 In some cases, the indication 792 may be less visible than the first indication 790.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 470 (e), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped, If the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792, for example, as shown on the right of FIG. 470 (e) based on the pressing of the chance button 136, the first display 790. The display color of the second display 792 may be changed. In this case, by displaying the first display 790 brighter than the second display 792 even after a change in display color, the first display 790 can be maintained in a more visible state than the second display 792 There is a case.

  In addition, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (e) to the state shown on the left side. Thus, the first display 790 is displayed by making the first display 790 brighter than the second display 792 even after the change of the display color that makes both the first display 790 and the second display 792 brighter. It may be possible to maintain a more visible state than the second display 792.

  The first display 790 and the second display 792 include decorative symbols, hold icons, fluctuating icons, effect displays such as character images or background images, error displays, displays of operation request notifications, tutorial displays, and the like. The first display 790 and the second display 792 may be a combination of different types of display (for example, an error display and a display of a decorative symbol) or the same type of display (for example, three decorative symbols) The combination of two of the two, pending icons) may be used. Also, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to change the visibility of at least a portion or only a portion of the first display 790 and the second display 792. . In this case, one of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be less visible (easier to see) than the other.

  As shown in the left side of FIG. 470 (f), when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light black is less visible than the second display 792 displayed in dark gray. It has become. As described above, when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in a light black color close to white is relatively difficult to see, and the second display 792 displayed in a gray close to black. Is relatively easy to see.

  On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 470 (f), the display colors of the first display 790 and the second display 792 do not change from the state shown on the left of FIG. When the color changes from white to black, the first display 790 displayed in a light black color close to white is relatively easy to view, and the second display 792 displayed in gray close to black is relative It becomes difficult to see. Thus, even if the first display 790 and the second display 792 themselves do not change, the change in the background color may change the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792. is there.

  Also, FIGS. 470 (a) to (f) show an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes, but displays (for example, not related to the change in the visibility) , There may be a third indication). For example, when the display A, the display B, and the display C are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display A corresponds to the first display 790, and the display B corresponds to the second display 792. May be In this case, the visibility of the display C may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display A and the display B. In addition, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of the display A may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display B and the display C. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of the display B may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display C and the display A.

  Also, FIGS. 470 (a) to (f) show an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes, but the display related to the change in the visibility is 3 There may be more than one. For example, display A and display B may correspond to first display 790 and display C may correspond to second display 792. The display B and the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display C and the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays B and C may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display A and the display B may correspond to the second display 792 corresponding to the first display 790 of the display C. As a result, the visibility of the three displays may be changed to allow the player to focus on the three displays.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 470 (g), the background color of the hold icon display area 794 displaying the hold icons a1 to a4 is different from the background color of the other icons, and the hold icon display area 794 clearly distinguishes. In the case where the display shown in FIGS. 470 (a) to (e) is switched in the reserved icon display area 794, the visibility of the effect display changes in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. May be limited to the hold icon display area 794 only.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of the two displays changes due to the lightness difference (contrast) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 471 shows a color chart in the case where the gradation levels of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) are changed by 40 gradation levels between 0 gradation value and 255 gradation values. . In this example, an example in which gradation levels of a circular image and a square image displayed overlapping with the circular image are changed will be described. The circular image and the square image are displayed overlapping so that the center of the circle and the intersection of the diagonals of the square coincide. Further, the diameter of the circle of the circular image is shorter than the length of one side of the square image. Also, the circular image is displayed in a layer in front of the square image. In addition, the transmittance of the circular image and the square image is 0%.

  In the color chart of FIG. 471, R values, G values and B values of a circular image are shown in the vertical direction, and R values, G values and B values of a square image are shown in the horizontal direction. In this example, the gradation values of each color are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, 255, with the R, G, and B values of the circular image being the same. Similarly, the tone values of each color are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, 255, with the R, G, and B values of the square image being the same.

  For example, as shown in the first row and first column of FIG. 471, the R value, G value and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value and G value of the square image When the B and B values are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in black, so that they can not be distinguished and recognized. Also, as shown in the eighth row and the eighth column of FIG. 471, the R value, the G value and the B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value and the G value of the square image If the B and B values are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in white, so that they can not be distinguished and recognized. Thus, when the lightness difference between the circular image and the square image is small, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively low.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eighth row and first column of FIG. 471, the R, G and B values of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R and G values of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image is displayed in white and the square image is displayed in black, so identification of both is easy. Further, as shown in the first row and the eighth column of FIG. 471, the R value, G value and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value and G value of the square image And when the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image is displayed in black and the square image is displayed in white, so identification of both is easy. Thus, when the lightness difference between the circular image and the square image is large, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively high.

  Thus, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, making the difference in brightness between the two images the same or smaller makes it difficult to distinguish between the two images and also reduces the visibility of the two images. be able to. In addition, if the lightness difference between the two images is increased, identification of the two images can be facilitated and visibility of the two images can also be improved.

  In order to improve the visibility of the image by the player, the lightness difference (contrast difference) between the image displayed in the back layer of the two images displayed overlapping and the image displayed in the front layer It is effective to put Further, in order to improve the visibility of the display of the player, a hue difference or a saturation difference may be added to the image displayed on the back layer and the image displayed on the front layer. However, even if the hues of the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer are different, the visibility of the two images is reduced if the lightness and the saturation are substantially the same. . For this reason, in order to improve the visibility of the two images, it is most effective to provide a lightness difference between the two images.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 470 to 471. (1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The display means is a first display (e.g., a bottom full error display (ball drop notification) 704, alert notification effect 722, right impact notification effect 724, alert notification effect 750, alert notification effect 772, first And the display 790) of the

  The display means is a second display (for example, effect display, tutorial display 709, advance notice announcement effect 730, 740, electric Chu-long opening effect, electric Chu-long opening false effect 760, user level notification effect 775, second At least the display 792).

  The display means displays the third display (for example, the lack of sphere error display 706, the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the number of reserved special figures displayed in the special figure display number display area 208f) At least displayable,

  At least a part of the first display is at least low in visibility when the display means is in the first state,

  The first state is a state in which at least the second display is displayed on the display means,

At least a part of the third display is at least higher in visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display may be lowered, so that the player is focused on the display means in an attempt to recognize the notification content by the first display, and the player is concentrated on the game. There are times when you can. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the display means may be lowered, it may be possible to direct the line of sight of the player to the second display. In addition, since the third display can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may easily confirm the third display while viewing the second display.

  The first display may be displayed at a first display position on the display means.

  The second display may be displayed at a second display position on the display means.

  The third display may be displayed at a third display position on the display means.

  The third display position may be a position where the visibility is higher than that of the first display position when the display means is in the first state.

  The first display position may be a position with lower visibility than the third display position when the display means is in the first state.

  The first display position may be a position with lower visibility than the second display position when the display means is in the first state.

-Part or all of the third display may be at least higher in visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state (2) The above pachinko machine 100 ,
The first display is a display regarding a game,
The second display is an effect display.
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, since the display regarding the game becomes difficult to be seen by the effect display, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the effect display. In addition, since the player can easily confirm the third display even if the effect display is displayed, the player may easily confirm the third display while watching the effect display (3) The pachinko machine 100 described above ,

  At least a portion of the first display is at least higher in visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state,

The second state is a state in which the second display is not at least displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, in the case of the second state, the first display is displayed in the case of the first state by the visibility of the first display being higher than in the case of the first state. May make it easier for the player to guess.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the one or more states including the first state when the display means is in the second state.

  When the display means is in the second state, part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state, and one or more different from the first state and the second state The visibility may be lower than that in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the display means.

The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the display means (4) the above pachinko machine 100,

The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, in the case of the first state, the second display is displayed on the front side of the first display, which may make it easier for the player to pay attention to the second display. . In addition, in the case of the first state, the first display may be displayed behind the second display, so that the player may be able to watch the first display carefully.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.

  The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.

The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays other than the first display (5) With the pachinko machine 100 There,
The first display is an error display,
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, when in the first state, the player is reminded of the notification content of the error display by lowering the visibility of the error display, and the player is carefully watched the error display. There are cases where you can In addition, since the visibility of the second display is higher than the error display, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the second display. In addition, the third display may be easily confirmed even when an error is displayed (6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,

  The first display at least includes information that is more important to the player than the second display,

The third display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the visibility of part of the first display including information of high importance to the player is reduced by being hidden by part of the presentation display, so that the line of sight of the game is directed to the display means. There are times when you can. Further, since the third display of high importance to the player can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may be able to play the game with ease.

  The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The first display is one or more pieces of information more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information less important than the second display (for example, a character image, a background, etc. ) May be included.

  The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the one or more displays different from the second display (for example, , A character image, a background, etc.).

  The third display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.

  The third display is one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image, a background, etc. ) May be included.

The third display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display, and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the one or more displays different from the second display (for example, (7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 may be a display including an image of a character, a background, and the like.

  And an operation means (for example, ball discharge lever 132, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;

The first display includes at least a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification for prompting the operation of the operation means by the effect display is hidden, and the visibility of at least a part of the notification is lowered. Therefore, the player is concentrated on the effect display to play the game. Sometimes it can be entertaining. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to easily confirm the third display while concentrating the player on the effect display.

  The above-mentioned "position at least higher in visibility than the first display" is a position where the player can always at least confirm the third display when the second display is displayed. As a result, even if the first display is hidden by the second display and the visibility of the second display is low, the third display can always be confirmed by the player. In some cases, it may be difficult to miss the display.

  The above-mentioned “information of high importance to the player” may at least include information related to the payout of the game ball (for example, notification of ball removal, an error regarding the payout means, etc.). This may prevent the player from missing information related to the profit of the game.

  Further, the above-mentioned "information of high importance for the player" is information related to the progress of the game (for example, the fourth symbol (indicating that it is fluctuating), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, the hold icon, the strike notification It may include at least (right-hand notification, notification of “return steering wheel to the left”, and the like).

  Further, the “information of high importance to the player” may at least include information related to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 (such as an abnormal connection of a board or an abnormal position detection of the effect movable body).

  Further, the above-mentioned “information of high importance to the player” may include at least information on fraud (a radio wave sensor error, a magnetic sensor error, etc.).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with a first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with a second display means (for example, a sub display device 808).

  The above-mentioned "display means" may be a display means of at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with two types of hit symbols of a common drawing. For example, when one winning symbol is won, the blade member 232a is opened so that four game balls can enter the special figure 2 starting opening 232 even in non-power support, and when the other hitting symbol is won non-power support The wing member 232 a may be opened to such an extent that the game ball can not enter the special figure 2 start opening 232. When the player wins the other hit symbol during non-power support, the same effect as in the case of shifting in the regular game fluctuating game may be executed in the power Chu Long open effect.
<Other Embodiments (Embodiment 1 of Character Select Effect)>

Next, with reference to FIG. 472 to FIG. 493, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the button operation is enabled even when the button operation is not displayed). The ball game machine and the rotating game machine such as slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 472 to FIG. 493 are in principle used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where the overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment Priority is given to the symbols shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals as those in the above embodiment are used for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member provided inside the outer frame 102 and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 473 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 472 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. RWM clears by operating the power switch 178 for configuring the launch board case 176 housing 174 and the power management unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines and turning the power on / off by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 474 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. And the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is not possible to enter a ball while the wing is closing, and it is won a common drawing fluctuating game, a common drawing display device is hit and a symbol When the stop display is performed, the blade opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 has an openable / closable door member, and while the door member is closed, it is not possible to enter a ball, and the special view variable game is won and the special view display device stops displaying the big hit symbol In this case, the door member opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Receives the signals output from various sensors 320 including the counters) and the ball detection sensors provided inside each start opening, the entrance of the winning opening and the variable winning opening, and the amplification result and the reference voltage A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result with the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of figure display device 210, various state display section 328 (for example, common view reserve lamp 216, first special view reserve run 218, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the second special view holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special view start port 232, the variable winning opening 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 126, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special figure start port 126. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 128, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 128. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, game control is started.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. Circuit 422, effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting current position of effect movable body 224, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, detection from effect movable body sensor 424 and chance button detection sensor 426 A sensor circuit 428 for outputting a signal to the basic circuit 402 and a second sub control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 are connected.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power management unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, a special view in which the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display using FIGS. 476 (a) to (c) (special views 1 and 2). A description will be given of the decorative symbol that the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays, and the types of common drawings that the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays.

  FIG. 476 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2). The first special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting opening 230, and the spherical has entered the second special figure starting opening 232 The second special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects. When the first special figure variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 performs “variation display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. . In addition, when the second special figure variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 2" I do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special view 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1, Also, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special drawing 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special drawing display device 214 displays the stop symbol form of the special drawing 2 stop display Do. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as "symbol fluctuation stop display". As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 476 (a), three types of special views from “special view A” to “special view C” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display. In the figure, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special big hit symbol (big hit symbol 1), and "special figure B" is a 15 round (15R) big hit symbol (big hit symbol 2) and a predetermined number of times after the big hit game ends ( In the present embodiment, transition to the power-supply state of 100) is performed. In addition, the power support state refers to a state in which the blade 232a of the second special view start port 232 (electric chew) is opened and closed for a predetermined time at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 seconds open, 0.5 seconds closed). .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers . The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, the state which transfers to the above-mentioned electric support state is called a common drawing high probability state, and the state which does not transfer to a electric support state is called a common drawing low probability state. That is, the above-mentioned big hit symbol 1 is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state, and the big hit symbol 2 is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The big hit symbol 1 and the big hit symbol 2 are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large. In addition, “special figure C” is a lost pattern, and is a pattern in which the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively small amount of profit.

  FIG. 476 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. Under the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 or the first special view start opening 232 (as a condition of the start of the first special view fluctuation game), the decorative symbol display In the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area of the device 208, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration” 10] "display 1" → "display the change in the order of" display "variation display of decorative pattern" is performed. In addition, for example, when notifying 15R big hit of “special figure B”, the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit that three same decorative designs are lined (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” and “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 and the like) is stopped and displayed in three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying 15R special jackpot of “special figure A”, the symbol combination which 3 same decoration patterns of the same odd number are lined (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7- The decoration 7 "and the like) are stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying the release of “special figure C”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 6B are stopped and displayed in three symbol display areas.

FIG. 476 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in the figure, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 477 (a). In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a main processing shown in (a) of the main control shown in FIG.

  First, in step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. Also, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, first sub control Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, setting for interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value for the stack pointer (this setting), all storage areas of the RAM 308 Perform initialization and so on.

  In step S103, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer The two random number counters for generating each random number value (random number value for timer number determination) are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. Further, after the basic random number initial value update processing is completed, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a first special figure notice lottery random number counter that generates a first special figure notice lottery random number value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 127, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 similarly A second special drawing notice lottery random number counter is provided to generate a second special drawing notice lottery random number value to be obtained. In step S105, the value of each of these counters is updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S103 and step S105 except while performing the timer interrupt processing which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 477 (b). In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, etc. and various ball detection sensors via the input port of the I / O 310 A signal is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S201, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S201, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 475, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S201, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S203 and S205, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process of the present embodiment, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S103 is updated, and then the special control 1 disturbance used by the main control unit 300 is performed. The two random number counters for generating the numerical value (random number value for big hit determination) and the special figure 2 random number value (random number value for big hit determination) are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a special figure 1 random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the special figure 1 random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter 1 Set the random number counter for random number value generation and store the initial value set this time in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation has made one turn next Keep it.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S209, a winning determination process is performed. In this winning determination process, when there are winnings in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S211, general drawing related processing is performed. In this common drawing related process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state is performed. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either one of the hit symbol and the off symbol. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) While setting the general drawing operation in the setting area, hold the blade member in the open state in the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting the predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S213 without doing anything.

  Further, in the common drawing related process of step S211, a common drawing related lottery process is subsequently performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S213, special figure status update processing (special figure 2 status update process and special figure 1 status update process) and special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process and special figure 1 related lottery process) are performed. First, in the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure related process in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and extinguishing of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is repeated. Turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a big hit flag, a first loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the second special symbol display device 214 is configured The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs finalized display of a big hit symbol, an off symbol, and the like. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player.

  In addition, 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above transmission information storage area to execute general command rotation stop setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215), and the symbol for stopping the variable display Is added to the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  Also, when the big hit flag is on, in the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The special figure 2 is being set in the setting area of, and while waiting a period displaying an image notifying the player that a big hit is to be started by the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, a predetermined winning effect period (for example 3 seconds) In order to do this, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, hold the door member in the open state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member of the variable winning hole 234 until the variable winning hole 234 detects the winning of the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a closing period is indicated in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. In addition, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol Information indicating the effect waiting period in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is finished Set Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out, the first out flag is turned on. When the first outfall flag is on, the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special feature 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) Even in the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set.

  In step S213, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is subsequently performed. In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process is finished, special figure related lottery process is performed for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 respectively. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed, and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 1 related lottery process) for the special figure 1 is performed. With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S215, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the present embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 11 To 14 are command types (in the present embodiment, basic commands, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information which can specify the type) and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command setting transmission process. Further, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the stop command, the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc. In the case of the round number specification command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related process, which is stored in the command data in the RAM 308 The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect setting setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, special view probability fluctuation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the held first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game, etc. is set. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, special view probability fluctuation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the held first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned general command big winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit round which is remembered in RAM308 in command data, value of special figure probability fluctuation flag, 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation which is suspended Set information that indicates the number of games, etc. In the above-mentioned general command big winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit round which is remembered in RAM308 in command data, value of special figure probability fluctuation flag, 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation which is suspended Set information that indicates the number of games, etc. At step S215, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process, the output schedule information and the payout request information are output to the payout control unit 600. The output schedule information and the payout request information consist of 1 byte, and the strobe information in bit 7 (in the case of ON, indicates that data is set) and in the bit 6 the power on information (in the case of ON) Indicates that this is the first command transmission after power on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the number of withdrawal requests after encryption processing It is like that.

  In step S217, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

A step S219 performs device monitoring processing. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the input port state update process of step S201 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the underfill error. In the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 when the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, set the device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error Do. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the command setting transmission process of step S215 is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Present reading table>

  The table for preemptive reading shown in FIG. 478 (a) associates the type (special figure probability) of the special figure lottery state stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the result of the preemptive reading. It is an example of the data table memorized and stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit) or not (on the basis of the table for preliminary reading of the success and the special figure lottery state (special figure probability)). To make a decision in advance, make a special drawing look-ahead lottery.

  In addition, the information of the special figure lottery state is information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure fluctuation game is determined to be won with a predetermined low probability (about 1/300 (= 218/65536) in this example), and low probability Higher probability (in this example, about 1/60 (= 1090/65536) in this example) includes information indicating the high probability state of determining a special figure fluctuation game to be won, etc. Or it may be referred to as no probability variation and high probability (or with probability variation).

  The lottery data of the success / prediction table is lottery data used to determine the success / failure result of the special figure change game. For example, when the special map probability is a low probability and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the jackpot result is a success read result. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery state is a low probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the success or failure read-ahead result is missed.

In this embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 (the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot data with low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical range) Since the length is 218), the probability of determining a big hit with low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the lottery data for the big hit with high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the probability of determining a big hit with high probability is about 1/60 (= 1090 / 65536).
<Table for special result check results>

  The special drawing readthrow result table shown in FIG. 478 (b) is an example of a data table in which the special look change result of the special drawing variation game described above, the lottery data, and the special drawing readback result are stored in association with each other. .

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special drawing look-ahead table, the special drawing fluctuation read-out result of the special drawing fluctuation game, and the special hit special drawing when the above-mentioned special drawing fluctuation game has a big hit. Based on the random number value, a big hit type pre-reading lottery is determined in advance to determine the type of big hit (special figure pre-reading result).

For example, when the success prediction result of special figure fluctuation game is big hit, when the random number value for big hit special figure decision is the numerical value 0-49 for big hit, it selects the big hit design 1 as special figure pre-reading result, for big hit When the random number value for special drawing determination is a numerical value of 50-99, the big hit symbol 2 is selected as a special drawing prefetch result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot special figure determination random number value is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the success pre-fetching result of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss, the special figure C (a missing symbol) is selected as a special figure pre-reading result without using the special figure pre-reading table.
<Table for judging the success or failure>

  FIG. 479 (a) relates the type of the special figure lottery state (special figure probability) stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the result of the propriety determination. It is an example of the data table memorized and stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit) or not based on the success / failure determination table and information (special figure probability) of the special figure lottery state. In order to decide whether or not to take place, a special drawing hit / off lottery is performed.

  The lottery data of the success / failure determination table is lottery data used to determine the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the obtained jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery state is a low probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is lost and the big hit flag is set off. Do.

In this embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 (the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot data with low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical range) Since the size is 218), the winning probability of the special pattern variation game with low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the lottery data of the big hit with high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the winning probability of the big hit of the special figure fluctuation game of high probability is about 1/60. The jackpot probability of the special figure fluctuation game is set such that the high probability is higher than the low probability.
<Table for special drawing determination>

  The special drawing determination table shown in FIG. 479 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-mentioned special drawing variation game determination result, lottery data, and the special drawing determination result are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special drawing determination table, the special drawing fluctuation game of success or failure judgment result, and the big hit special drawing when the judgment result of the special drawing fluctuation game mentioned above is a big hit. Based on the random number value, a big hit type lottery to determine the type of big hit (special drawing decision result) is performed.

For example, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, and the random number for special hit determination for big hit is a numerical value of 0 to 49, select the big hit symbol 1 as the special result decision result, and use it for big hit When the random number value for special drawing determination is a numerical value of 50-99, the jackpot symbol 2 is selected as a special drawing determination result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot special figure determination random number value is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game is disapproval, the special figure C (disappeared symbol) is selected as the special figure determination result without using the special figure determination table.
<Table set selection table>

  FIG. 479 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a table set selection table. The table set selection table is a data table in which the above-mentioned special drawing determination result, the special drawing fluctuation number, and the timer selection table are stored in association with each other.

  When the above-mentioned special figure determination result is selected, basic circuit 302 of main control unit 300 determines the number of special figure fluctuations and the timer selection table based on the table set selection table and the selected special figure determination result. Perform a table set selection lottery to determine

For example, if the selected special figure determination result is big hit symbol 1 (special figure A), the number of changes is 90 times, the timer selection table is a combination of table 2, the number of changes is 10 times, the timer selection table is a table The combination of 3 and the variation count of 0 are selected, and the timer selection table selects the combination of Table 2.
<Special drawing timer number selection table>

  FIG. 480 is a diagram showing an example of a special drawing timer number selection table. This special drawing timer number selection table is a special drawing determination result based on the above-mentioned special drawing determination table, the above-mentioned timer selection table, and the special drawing fluctuation game storage stored in the above-mentioned special drawing reservation number storage area It is a data table which matched and stored lottery data classified by a number, and a timer number decision result.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special drawing timer number selection table, the special drawing determination result based on the special drawing determination table described above, the timer selection table selected in the table set selection lottery mentioned above, the special drawing described above A special drawing timer number lottery is performed to determine the timer number based on the number of reservations and the random number value for timer number determination. For example, the special drawing determination result described above is special drawing C (disappeared symbol), the above timer selection table is table 1, the number of special drawing reservations is 0 to 2, and the acquired random number value for timer number determination is 0 to 89 If the timer number is within the range, the timer 3 (10 seconds of fluctuation time) is selected as the timer number. In addition, for example, the above-mentioned special figure decision result is the big hit symbol 1 (special figure A) or the big hit symbol 2 (special figure B), the above-mentioned timer selection table is table 1 and the special figure reservation number is 3 and acquired When the timer number determination random number value is in the range of 0 to 1, the timer 4 (the fluctuation time 12 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the timer number determination random number is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100).
<Variation time table>

  FIG. 481 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation time table. The fluctuation time table is a data table in which the above-described timer number determination result and fluctuation time are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects a variation time based on the variation time table and the above-described timer number determination result. For example, when the above timer number determination result is timer 1, 2 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time, and when the above timer number determination result is timer 7, 20 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311, chance button control processing is performed. In this chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, the image control process (details will be described later) shown in FIG. In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S321, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Character select effect>

  Next, the character selection effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 483 is a view showing an example of the character select effect, and FIG. 484 is a time chart of the character select effect.

  The main control unit 300 executes the character selection effect to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of step S215 when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit is won in the big hit determination). Send a character select effect start command to instruct. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 detects the winning of the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or the variable winning opening 234) in the special drawing related process of step S213. ) After outputting a signal for holding the door member in the open state to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234, a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends. And outputs a signal for holding the door member in the closed state to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing drive of the door member of the variable winning opening 234. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the opening / closing control (big hit game) of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15R (round)). The effect shown in FIG. 483 is an example of the character select effect being executed at the 10R (round) of the big hit game.

The first sub control unit 400 having received the above-mentioned character select effect start command starts the character select effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the start condition of each round in the big hit game is satisfied). . The character selection effect according to the present embodiment is two of the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 483 (a) to (c) and the character selection effect shown in (d), (f), (h) and (j) in FIG. It consists of various types of effects.
<Character introduction effect>

  First, the character introduction presentation will be described. In the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first character (in this example, the head) in the front center of the display area as shown in FIG. 483 (a). An image in which the second character (in this example, a whistle) is located at the rear left, and the third character (in this example, a princess) is at the rear right (hereinafter, "introduction image of the first character (tendon)" Image data of an image, which may be referred to), image data of an image containing the characters "Please choose your favorite character!", And an image showing the current number of rounds (in this example, an image containing the characters 10R) Processing such as reading out image data from the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the plurality of image data described above from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In the next step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. Thereby, an introduction image of the first character (殿) as shown in FIG. 6A is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, in the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 locates the first character (殿) of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. The third character (hime) was the second character (爺) in the right front where the first character (the princess) was located in the center of the front. Processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 is performed on image data of a moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introductory image of the second character (爺)”) moving backward to the left. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction of step S601. Thereafter, in the next step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the second character (よ う) as shown in FIG. 6B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, in the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the third character (hime) is the second character (姫) as shown in FIG. The second character (殿) was in the center of the front, and the first character (殿) was in the right rear where the first character (殿) was the third character (() Processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 is performed on image data of moving images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introductory image of third character (princess)”) moving to the rear left side. Subsequently, in step S601, the first secondary control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, an introduction image of a third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 6C is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, during the execution of the character introduction effect, even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the effect data updated in step S309 (this data (this data) In the example, the process of changing the effect data for the character introduction effect to the effect data according to the pressing of the chance button 136 is not performed. That is, the execution period of the character introduction effect shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 484 is set as the button non-reception period in which the acceptance of the chance button 136 is not performed (ignoring the pressing operation of the chance button 136). .
<Character selection effect>

  Next, the character selection effect will be described. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 executes the character introduction effect after executing the character introduction effect described above for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this character selection effect, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 controls the first character (head) as shown in FIG. 483 (d) in the center of the front of the display area in the effect control process of step S309. An image in which the second character (後方) is located at the rear left and the third character (hime) is located at the rear right, and the first character (殿) in the center of the front is highlighted and displayed brightly (hereinafter referred to as " Image data of an image showing the current number of rounds, image data of an image imitating the chance button 136, and image data of an image showing the current number of rounds; Processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 is performed on image data of an image including characters of “Press and select character!”. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction instructing transfer of the plurality of image data described above from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436. In S601, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, a temporary selection image of the first character (殿) as shown in FIG. 6D is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this display, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the RAM 408 to display character identification information (for example, numerical value 1) indicating that the temporary selection image of the first character is being displayed. The character identification information storage area provided in

  Further, during the execution of the character selection effect, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the effect data updated in step S309 (this data (this data) In the example, the process of changing the effect data for the character selection effect to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. That is, the execution period of the character selection effect shown in (d) to (k) of FIG. 484 is set as the button reception period for receiving the chance button 136.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 483 (e), when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates in step S309. In the previous effect data, the second character (爺) is at the center of the front where the first character (殿) was located, and the first character (殿) is the third character (姫) A movie in which the third character (Hime) moved to the rear left where the second character (爺) was located to the right and back, and the second character (爺) moving to the front center was brightened A process of changing to image data of an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “temporarily selected moving image of second character (爺)”) is performed. As a result, a temporarily selected moving image of the second character (よ う) as shown in FIG. 6F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when displaying the moving image, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, 2 of the numerical value) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) is performed. ) Is stored over the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 485 is a diagram showing in detail an example of the above-mentioned temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the second character (爺). The figures (a), (b) and (f) are figures corresponding to the above FIGS. 483 (d), (e) and (f), and the figures (c) to (e) are the above FIG. 483 is a view showing how a moving image changes between FIG. 483 (d) and (f).

  The first sub-control unit 400, when detecting the pressing of the chance button 136 during the display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (殿) shown in FIG. As shown in), the second character (爺) is displayed brightly, and the second character (爺) is moved to be moved gradually from the rear left to the front center. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the third character (princess) from the rear right to the rear left in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (爺). Furthermore, in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (殿) and the third character (姫), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the first character (殿) to be displayed dark and also to be centered on the front. Move display to move to the rear right from. Thus, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. 4F and FIG. 483F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Referring back to FIG. 483, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4G, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected in the chance button control process of step S311, as shown in FIG. In the previous effect data updated in S309, the second character (殿) is the first character (殿) at the center of the front where the third character (姫) was the second character (爺). The third character (Hime) moves the first character (Toen) to the rear right where the third character (Hime) was located to the rear right where it was located, and moves to the front center. A process of changing to image data of a lighted moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “temporarily selected moving image of third character (princess)”) is performed. As a result, a temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in (h) of the figure is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 is character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being performed. Is stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6I, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the previous one updated in step S309. The effect data is as follows: the first character (殿) was in the center of the front where the third character (位置) was located, and the third character (姫) was the second character (右) in the right rear A moving image in which the first character (殿), whose third character (princess) moves to the left back where the first character (殿) was located, and moves to the front center, is brightened A process of changing to image data of a character (temporarily selected moving image) of character (1) is performed. Thereby, a temporarily selected moving image of the first character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) as shown in (j) of the figure is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, each time the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed, the first sub-control unit 400 displays and displays the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (殿) shown in FIG. Storage of character identification information (1 in this example) indicating that there is a display of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) shown in (f) of the figure, and character identification indicating that the display is being performed Storage of information (2 in this example) → Display of a temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in FIG. 6 (h) and character identification information (3 in this example) indicating that the display is being performed Processing of switching the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the order of storage of ...) and processing of overwriting and storing character identification information for specifying a temporarily selected character in the character identification information storage area Carried out.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 483 (k), when the big hit game end condition is established in the special figure related process of the above-mentioned step S213 (for example, after the round is started, the main control unit 300 When 30 seconds has passed, or when a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) has won in the variable winning opening 234 during one round), for opening and closing drive of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 of the above, and the general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing of the above-mentioned step S215. A character select effect end command for ending the execution of the select effect is transmitted.

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the character selection effect end command is configured to automatically select one character from the plurality of characters according to a predetermined condition when the command is received. In the present embodiment, the character identification information stored in the character identification information storage area described above (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character) is provided in the RAM 408 as character determination information Store (copy) in the fixed information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects that character (the character) based on the above-described character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (the character)). An image including image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and characters that indicate automatically selected characters (in this example, characters “determine!”) And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406 or the like.

Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of VRAM 436 in the attribute register of VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 6L is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the period shown by (k) to (l) in FIG. 484, that is, the period from the end of the character select effect to the start of the next round (in this example, The reception period is set so that the reception of the chance button 136 is not performed (the pressing of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Button operation during character movement display>

  Next, the change mode of the movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the above-mentioned character movement display will be described.

  FIG. 486 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (() shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed during the movement display of the second character (爺) (the same figure (e)), the second movement display is performed. Instead of the character (爺), movement display of the third character (princess) is performed as shown in (f) to (i) of FIG.

  More specifically, when the first sub control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during movement display of the second character (爺) (the same figure (e)), the second character After moving (爺) from the position shown in (d) to the front center shown in (f) and making it darker, the third character (hime) is shown in (d) (d) After moving from the position shown in) to the position shown in FIG. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the third character (princess) from the left rear to the front center as shown in (g) to (i) of FIG. Display the move display. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (right) from the rear right to the rear left in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the rear right in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime) and the first character (殿). Display the move display. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 6I is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 is character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being performed. Is stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 487 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

If the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (() shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. Then, even when the first sub control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during movement display of the second character (爺) (the same figure (e)), the figures (f) to (g) As shown in (h) to (k) according to the processing of the character movement display described above, continuing the movement display of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. A movement display is performed to move the character (princess) from the left rear to the front center. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (right) from the rear right to the rear left in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the rear right in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime) and the first character (殿). Display the move display. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 6K is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 is character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being performed. Is stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.
<Second Example of Character Select Effect>

  Next, a second example of the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 488 and 489. FIG. 488 is a diagram showing a second example of the character select effect, and FIG. 489 is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) after the end of the character introduction effect is performed. Although this second example is shown in FIG. 488 (a) to (c) during the character introduction effect (during the button non-accepting period effect) the jackpot game ending condition (in this example, during one round) This is an example in which a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is won in the variable winning opening 234, that is, an example in which a jackpot game ending condition is satisfied without the player pressing the chance button 136 once.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the first sub control unit 400 receives the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition, and the above-mentioned character identification information storage area is received. Although the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136), in this second example, the character select effect is ended. Character identification information (in this example, a second character (爺) in this example) determined at a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from the numerical values of 1 to 3) when the command is received 2) is the character determination information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136), the above-mentioned It is stored in the determination information storage area.

  The “predetermined condition” is not limited to the lottery, and for example, the character identification information may be determined based on the gaming state (such as the number of rounds in the big hit game and the number of reserved special figure change games). The character identification information may be determined in advance, may be determined as the character identification information automatically selected in the previous time, or may be determined in advance as the character identification information selected by the player.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects that character (爺) based on the above-mentioned character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 2 indicating the second character (爺)). An image including image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character of “decided to be determined!”) That suggests the automatically selected character (爺). And the image data of the image showing the current number of rounds (in this example, the image including the character 10R) are read out from the ROM 406 or the like.

Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. Thus, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 488 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the period shown from (a) to (e) in FIG. 489, that is, the period from the start of the character introduction effect start to the start of the next round (in this example, 11R). The reception period is set so that the reception of the chance button 136 is not performed (the pressing of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Third Example of Character Select Effect>

  Next, a third example of the character selection effect will be described using FIG. 490 and FIG. 491. FIG. 490 is a view showing a third example of the character select effect, and FIG. 491 is a time chart of the third example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, an example in which the jackpot game end condition is satisfied after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) after the end of the character introduction effect is performed. Although this third example shows the character selection effect (button reception period) shown in FIG. 490 (d) after the character introduction effect (button non-reception period) shown in FIGS. 490 (a) to (c) ends. In the example, the jackpot game ending condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 once.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the first sub control unit 400 receives the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition, and the above-mentioned character identification information storage area is received. In the third example, the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). Character identification information (in this example, a third character (a princess) determined in accordance with a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from the numerical values of 1 to 3) when the character selection effect end command is received. As the character determination information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) of the numerical value 3) Stored in the character confirmation information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects that character (princess) based on the above-described character determination information (in this example, 3 of the numerical value indicating the third character (princess)). An image including image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character of “decided to be a princess!”) That suggests an automatically selected character (princess) And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406 or the like.

  Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. Thereby, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 490 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the period shown by (e) to (f) in FIG. 491, that is, the period from the end of the character select effect to the start of the next round (in this example, 11R). The reception period is set so that the reception of the chance button 136 is not performed (the pressing of the chance button 136 is ignored).

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the character selection effect is ended at the timing of changing the variable winning opening 234 from the open state to the closed state, but as shown in FIG. 492, the variable winning opening 234 is closed from the open state. After changing to the state, the closed state may be held for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the character selection effect may be ended.
<Another Example of Character Select Effect>

  Next, another example of the character selection effect will be described using FIG. 493. In the example shown in (a) of the figure, in the first sub-control unit 400, as shown on the left side of the figure, the first character (殿) located at the front center of the display area is surrounded by the elliptical cursor. Also, processing is performed to display an image in which the second character (爺) is located at the rear left and the third character (hime) is located at the rear right on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) described above, a first character (don't care) as shown on the right side of FIG. The second character (() is the second character (爺) the second character (姫) is the second character (姫) the third character (爺) was the second character (姫) was the second character The second character (爺) at the center of the front is moved to the center of the front where the character (殿) was located, and the second character (爺) at the center of the front is displayed on the display area of the image decorative symbol display device 208 surrounded by the oval cursor. Perform processing to display. As in this example, one of a plurality of characters may be specified using a graphic such as a cursor instead of the brightness of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, the first sub-control unit 400 is a cursor with an elliptical first character located at the front center of the display area as shown on the left side of the figure. A process of displaying an image in which the second character (爺) is located at the rear left and the third character (hime) is located at the rear right on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) described above, as shown on the right side of the figure, the first to third characters The cursor located at the location of the first character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) is moved to the third character (princess) behind the right without moving the As in this example, one of the plurality of characters may be specified by moving a figure such as a cursor without changing the display position of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in (c) of the figure, as shown on the left side of the figure, the first sub control unit 400 is an area positioned at the center of the display area among the plurality of rectangular areas (in this example , And the background color of the area including the characters “M3: Sense or Reality” is set to a color different from the background color of the other image. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) described above, as shown on the right side of FIG. By rotating sequentially from the bottom to the top, the background color of the area located in the center of the display area (in this example, the area including the characters “M2: Distance”) is different from the background color of the other images. Set to As in this example, the color of a specific area may be configured to specify one of a plurality of pieces of information by making the color of another area different.

  In the example shown in (d) of the figure, the character to be selected based on the predetermined condition described with reference to the above-mentioned figure 490 is surrounded by a cursor, and the character to be automatically selected is notified in advance. With such a configuration, since the character to be automatically selected can be grasped in advance, the player who wants to select the character can concentrate on the current game without worrying about the selection of the character. A player who wants to select another character can change to a favorite character in advance.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when the jackpot determination is won in the big hit determination, the predetermined symbol display device (for example, special figure 1 display device, When a specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed on a special figure 2 display device or a decorative symbol display device, a predetermined time (for example, after a symbol fluctuation stop display in which the specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed as a result) The first control state (for example, the state in which the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is closed, predetermined state in which the degree of advantage for the player is the first degree of advantage) The second symbol is a second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from the control status in which symbol fluctuation stop display is performed on the symbol display device, the control status with probability change, the control status with power support, etc.) Second control state ( For example, control state transition means (for example, special figure state update processing in special figure related processing) for shifting the control state to a big hit gaming state in which opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is performed a predetermined number of times Effect image (for example, an image of character selection effect, a plurality of symbol pattern stop display in a predetermined symbol display device, and a specific symbol pattern is displayed as a result of the symbol Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol display device) for displaying a predetermined competition image (for example, a competition) in which a specific character image of the character images of A plurality of images (e.g., first to third images) are generated during a predetermined image selection effect period (e.g., during character selection effect) and a separately provided image display device) Storage means (for example, a character identification information storage area provided in the RAM 408) for storing specific image information (for example, character identification information) capable of specifying an image selected by the player from among the images of characters; Effect control means (for example, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500) for causing the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means, and the player A game console including an operation receiving unit (for example, a chance button 136) for receiving a selection operation, wherein the image selection effect period is a predetermined first period (for example, a character introduction effect execution period) The effect control means includes a predetermined second period (for example, an execution period of a character selection effect) started later than the start of the first period, and the effect control means The specific image information for specifying an image to be displayed on the effect display means is stored in the storage means based on the selection operation by the player received by the operation reception unit during the second period. When a predetermined condition for ending the image selection effect period is satisfied (for example, when the predetermined condition for starting the second period is satisfied (for example, the character introduction effect in the button non-accepting period is ended). One or both of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the start of the round and a case where a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) has won the variable winning opening 234 during one round. In the case of establishment or other predetermined conditions are established, a predetermined image (for example, the character in the center of FIG. 488 (e) or 490 (f) is selected from the plurality of images instead of the player). An image, a predetermined predetermined character image (for example, a character image indicating a hall, a character image selected by the player in the previous character selection effect) is selected, and the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display means It is a game console characterized by

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the image selection effect (character select effect) is canceled due to the rapid progress of the game for the game customer who advances the game quickly because he / she wants to enjoy the game property more than the effect surface. In this case, since the control means changes to the player and selects an image, it is not necessary to force the image selection to all the game customers. For this reason, there are cases where it is possible to enable the game progression to match the individuality of various game players.

  Further, the effect control means is configured to ignore the selection operation by the player received by the operation receiving unit during the first period (for example, an execution period of a character introduction effect (a button non-reception period)) It is also good.

  With such a configuration, by setting, as the first period, the effect period of a specific effect that one wants to execute reliably, it is possible to reliably execute a specific effect regardless of the player's selection operation. There is.

  In addition, a variable prize that can change the open / close state from one of a predetermined closed state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined open state (for example, an open state) in which winning of the gaming ball is easier than that of the closed state. The second control state includes a round operation for changing the open / close state of the variable winning opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state (for example, the second control state) The first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed, and the end condition of the image selection effect period is a specific round in the second control state. It may be configured to be established when the number of gaming balls having won the variable winning opening since the start of the operation is equal to or more than a specific number.

  With such a configuration, the image selection effect is performed during small hit, during variable winning opening operation, during variable winning opening opening or during a big hit, etc. Can be selected, which may make it possible to more enjoy the game. In addition, for game customers who enjoy game characteristics over the presentation side, that is, game players who enter the game ball into the variable winning opening quickly, the control means selects the image instead of forcing the image selection, so It may be possible to play a game.

  In addition, a launcher (for example, launcher 110) which launches game balls at predetermined time intervals based on the operation of the player, and the game balls launched by the launcher are made to flow down and the variable winning opening is A game area (for example, game area 124) provided, and the first period is shorter than a period (for example, 6 seconds) required to fire a specific number of the game balls It may be.

  With such a configuration, gaming balls are stored to a certain extent immediately above the variable winning opening during non-operation (for example, before the start of a specific round), and during the variable winning opening operation (for example, round starting) By setting a difficult time if there is no gaming skill, such as entering a large number of variable prize winning openings, it is configured so as to avoid losing the image selection opportunity if the gaming customer who wants to select the image is careful. In some cases, it is possible to enable the game progress according to the game player.

  In addition, a plurality of the variable winning openings, a game nail (for example, game nail 238) that gives a change in the direction of falling of the game ball, and an entry area for the game ball fired by the launch device to enter Provided in the gaming area, the plurality of variable winning openings are a first variable winning opening (for example, a variable winning opening disposed on the left side toward the pachinko machine 100) and a second variable winning opening (for example, a pachinko machine) 100, a variable winning opening disposed on the right side, wherein the gaming nail may come into contact before the gaming ball entering from the entry area reaches the second variable winning opening Are arranged such that the number of game nails that may come into contact before the game ball entered from the entry area reaches the first variable winning opening is greater than the number of the specific round action, During the second control state Close state of Oite the first variable winning hole may be a round operation for a predetermined number of times change.

  With such a configuration, gaming balls are stored to a certain extent immediately above the variable winning opening during non-operation (for example, before the start of a specific round), and the gaming balls are operated by variable winning opening operation (for example, round starting). Since the configuration is made to enter a large number of variable winning openings, if the gaming customer who wants to select the image is careful, it may be possible to proceed with the game depending on the gaming customer without losing the opportunity of the image selection.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the character selection effect is performed using an image (a still image or a moving image) has been described. However, the effect of sound by the speaker 120, the effect by the operation of the effect movable body 224, various lamps You may perform effects by Further, although the example in which the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect control of the character selection effect based on the command from the main control unit 300 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and it goes without saying that various changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in addition to the above-described pachinko machine 100 (one kind), it can be applied to pachinko machines (two or three kinds), enclosed type pachinko machines, pachilots, etc., arrange ball game machine, baseball game machine, It can be applied to smart balls and the like.

  The present invention is also applicable to, for example, a slot machine using medals (coins) as a game medium. Here, as a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting rotation of the plurality of reels, and each of the plurality of reels Displayed by a stop switch provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for judging whether or not internal winning of a plurality of predetermined types of winning combinations is predetermined by lottery, and the plurality of reels at the time of stopping What has the determination means which determines the prize-winning to the said winning combination by whether the combination of a symbol is a symbol combination of the winning combination internally won by the said lottery means is mentioned as an example.

  Further, for example, even in a game program that virtually executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine, the present invention can be applied to execute the game.

Also, the actions and effects described in the examples of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the examples of the present invention It is not limited to things.
<Other Embodiments (Embodiment 2 of Character Select Effect)>

Next, with reference to FIGS. 494 to 515, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, a slot machine or the like) according to another embodiment (a second embodiment of the character select effect) according to the present invention. The game console will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 494 to FIG. 515 are basically used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 494 to 515, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as the above embodiment. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member provided inside the outer frame 102 and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 495 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 494 as viewed from the rear side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. RWM clears by operating the power switch 178 for configuring the launch board case 176 housing 174 and the power management unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines and turning the power on / off by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 496 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. And the special figure fluctuation game by the first special figure display device is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is not possible to enter a ball while the wing is closing, and it is won a common drawing fluctuating game, a common drawing display device is hit and a symbol When the stop display is performed, the blade opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 has an openable / closable door member, and while the door member is closed, it is not possible to enter a ball, and the special view variable game is won and the special view display device stops displaying the big hit symbol In this case, the door member opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 497. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Receives the signals output from various sensors 320 including the counters) and the ball detection sensors provided inside each start opening, the entrance of the winning opening and the variable winning opening, and the amplification result and the reference voltage A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the comparison result with the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of figure display device 210, various state display section 328 (for example, common view reserve lamp 216, first special view reserve run 218, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the second special view holding lamp 220, a high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special view start port 232, the variable winning opening 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 126, the sensor circuit 320 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 126, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special figure start port 126. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 128, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 128. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 128.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, game control is started.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. Circuit 422, effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting current position of effect movable body 224, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, detection from effect movable body sensor 424 and chance button detection sensor 426 A sensor circuit 428 for outputting a signal to the basic circuit 402 and a second sub control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 are connected.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power management unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, a special view in which the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display using FIGS. 498 (a) to (c) (special views 1 and 2). A description will be given of the decorative symbol that the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays, and the types of common drawings that the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays.

  FIG. 498 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special view (special view 1, special view 2). The first special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting opening 230, and the spherical has entered the second special figure starting opening 232 The second special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects. When the first special figure variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 performs “variation display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. . In addition, when the second special figure variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 2" I do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special view 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1, Also, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation display of the special drawing 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special drawing display device 214 displays the stop symbol form of the special drawing 2 stop display Do. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as "symbol fluctuation stop display". As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 498 (a) shows three types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing C" as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special big hit symbol (big hit symbol 1), and "special figure B" is a 15 round (15R) big hit symbol (big hit symbol 2) and a predetermined number of times after the big hit game ends ( In the present embodiment, transition to the power-supply state of 100) is performed. In addition, the power support state refers to a state in which the blade 232a of the second special view start port 232 (electric chew) is opened and closed for a predetermined time at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 seconds open, 0.5 seconds closed). .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers . The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, the state which transfers to the above-mentioned electric support state is called a common drawing high probability state, and the state which does not transfer to a electric support state is called a common drawing low probability state. That is, the above-mentioned big hit symbol 1 is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state, and the big hit symbol 2 is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The big hit symbol 1 and the big hit symbol 2 are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large. In addition, “special figure C” is a lost pattern, and is a pattern in which the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively small amount of profit.

  FIG. 498 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. Under the condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 or the first special view start opening 232 (as a condition of the start of the first special view fluctuation game), the decorative symbol display In the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area of the device 208, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration” 10] "display 1" → "display the change in the order of" display "variation display of decorative pattern" is performed. In addition, for example, when notifying 15R big hit of “special figure B”, the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit that three same decorative designs are lined (for example, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” and “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 and the like) is stopped and displayed in three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying 15R special jackpot of “special figure A”, the symbol combination which 3 same decoration patterns of the same odd number are lined (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7- The decoration 7 "and the like) are stopped and displayed in the three symbol display areas. In addition, when notifying the release of “special figure C”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 6B are stopped and displayed in three symbol display areas.

FIG. 498 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in the figure, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 499 (a). In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a main processing shown in (a) of the main control shown in FIG.

  First, in step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. Also, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, first sub control Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, setting for interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value for the stack pointer (this setting), all storage areas of the RAM 308 Perform initialization and so on.

  In step S103, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer The two random number counters for generating each random number value (random number value for timer number determination) are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. Further, after the basic random number initial value update processing is completed, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a first special figure notice lottery random number counter that generates a first special figure notice lottery random number value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 127, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 similarly A second special drawing notice lottery random number counter is provided to generate a second special drawing notice lottery random number value to be obtained. In step S105, the value of each of these counters is updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of step S103 and step S105 except while performing the timer interrupt processing which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 499 (b). In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, etc. and various ball detection sensors via the input port of the I / O 310 A signal is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S201, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S201, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 497 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the present detection signal). In this step S201, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S203 and S205, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process of the present embodiment, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S103 is updated, and then the special control 1 disturbance used by the main control unit 300 is performed. The two random number counters for generating the numerical value (random number value for big hit determination) and the special figure 2 random number value (random number value for big hit determination) are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a special figure 1 random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the special figure 1 random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter 1 Set the random number counter for random number value generation and store the initial value set this time in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation has made one turn next Keep it.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S209, a winning determination process is performed. In this winning determination process, when there are winnings in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S211, general drawing related processing is performed. In this common drawing related process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state is performed. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either one of the hit symbol and the off symbol. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) While setting the general drawing operation in the setting area, hold the blade member in the open state in the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting the predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S213 without doing anything.

  Further, in the common drawing related process of step S211, a common drawing related lottery process is subsequently performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S213, special figure status update processing (special figure 2 status update process and special figure 1 status update process) and special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process and special figure 1 related lottery process) are performed. First, in the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure related process in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and extinguishing of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is repeated. Turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a big hit flag, a first loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the second special symbol display device 214 is configured The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs finalized display of a big hit symbol, an off symbol, and the like. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player.

  In addition, 4H is additionally stored as transmission information (general information) in the above transmission information storage area to execute general command rotation stop setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215), and the symbol for stopping the variable display Is added to the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  Also, when the big hit flag is on, in the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The special figure 2 is being set in the setting area of, and while waiting a period displaying an image notifying the player that a big hit is to be started by the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, a predetermined winning effect period (for example 3 seconds) In order to do this, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, hold the door member in the open state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member of the variable winning hole 234 until the variable winning hole 234 detects the winning of the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a closing period is indicated in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. In addition, 8H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol Information indicating the effect waiting period in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is finished Set Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S215).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is out, the first out flag is turned on. When the first outfall flag is on, the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special feature 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) Even in the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set.

  In step S213, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is subsequently performed. In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process is finished, special figure related lottery process is performed for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 respectively. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed, and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 1 related lottery process) for the special figure 1 is performed. With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S215, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the present embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 11 To 14 are command types (in the present embodiment, basic commands, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information which can specify the type) and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command setting transmission process. Further, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the stop command, the value of the big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc. In the case of the round number specification command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related process, which is stored in the command data in the RAM 308 The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect setting setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, special view probability fluctuation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the held first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game, etc. is set. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, special view probability fluctuation Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of the held first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned general command big winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit round which is remembered in RAM308 in command data, value of special figure probability fluctuation flag, 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation which is suspended Set information that indicates the number of games, etc. In the above-mentioned general command big winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of big hit round which is remembered in RAM308 in command data, value of special figure probability fluctuation flag, 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation which is suspended Set information that indicates the number of games, etc. At step S215, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process, the output schedule information and the payout request information are output to the payout control unit 600. The output schedule information and the payout request information consist of 1 byte, and the strobe information in bit 7 (in the case of ON, indicates that data is set) and in the bit 6 the power on information (in the case of ON) Indicates that this is the first command transmission after power on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the number of withdrawal requests after encryption processing It is like that.

  In step S217, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

A step S219 performs device monitoring processing. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the input port state update process of step S201 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the underfill error. In the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 when the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, set the device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error Do. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the command setting transmission process of step S215 is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Present reading table>

  The table for preemptive reading shown in FIG. 500 (a) associates the type (special figure probability) of the special drawing lottery state stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the result of the preemptive reading It is an example of the data table memorized and stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit) or not (on the basis of the table for preliminary reading of the success and the special figure lottery state (special figure probability)). To make a decision in advance, make a special drawing look-ahead lottery.

  In addition, the information of the special figure lottery state is information indicating a low probability state in which the special figure fluctuation game is determined to be won with a predetermined low probability (about 1/300 (= 218/65536) in this example), and low probability Higher probability (in this example, about 1/60 (= 1090/65536) in this example) includes information indicating the high probability state of determining a special figure fluctuation game to be won, etc. Or it may be referred to as no probability variation and high probability (or with probability variation).

  The lottery data of the success / prediction table is lottery data used to determine the success / failure result of the special figure change game. For example, when the special map probability is a low probability and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the jackpot result is a success read result. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery state is a low probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the success or failure read-ahead result is missed.

In this embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 (the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot data with low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical range) Since the length is 218), the probability of determining a big hit with low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the lottery data for the big hit with high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the probability of determining a big hit with high probability is about 1/60 (= 1090 / 65536).
<Table for special result check results>

  The special drawing readthrow result table shown in FIG. 500 (b) is an example of a data table in which the false readback result of the special drawing variation game described above, the lottery data, and the special drawing read-ahead result are stored in association with each other. .

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special drawing look-ahead table, the special drawing fluctuation read-out result of the special drawing fluctuation game, and the special hit special drawing when the above-mentioned special drawing fluctuation game has a big hit. Based on the random number value, a big hit type pre-reading lottery is determined in advance to determine the type of big hit (special figure pre-reading result).

For example, when the success prediction result of special figure fluctuation game is big hit, when the random number value for big hit special figure decision is the numerical value 0-49 for big hit, it selects the big hit design 1 as special figure pre-reading result, for big hit When the random number value for special drawing determination is a numerical value of 50-99, the big hit symbol 2 is selected as a special drawing prefetch result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot special figure determination random number value is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the success pre-fetching result of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss, the special figure C (a missing symbol) is selected as a special figure pre-reading result without using the special figure pre-reading table.
<Table for judging the success or failure>

  In the table for determination of good or bad shown in FIG. 501 (a), the type (special figure probability) of the special figure lottery state stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the RAM 308, the lottery data, and the result of yes or no determination are associated. It is an example of the data table memorized and stored.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit) or not based on the success / failure determination table and information (special figure probability) of the special figure lottery state. In order to decide whether or not to take place, a special drawing hit / off lottery is performed.

  The lottery data of the success / failure determination table is lottery data used to determine the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game. For example, when the special figure probability is low and the obtained jackpot determination random number value is 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when the special figure lottery state is a low probability state and the acquired jackpot determination random number value is a numerical value other than 1000 to 1217, it is determined that the special figure fluctuation game is lost and the big hit flag is set off. Do.

In this embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 (the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot data with low probability is 1000 to 1217 (large numerical range) Since the size is 218), the winning probability of the special pattern variation game with low probability is about 1/300 (= 218/65536). On the other hand, since the numerical range of the lottery data of the big hit with high probability is 1000 to 2089 (the size of the numerical range is 1090), the winning probability of the big hit of the special figure fluctuation game of high probability is about 1/60. The jackpot probability of the special figure fluctuation game is set such that the high probability is higher than the low probability.
<Table for special drawing determination>

  The special drawing determination table shown in FIG. 501 (b) is an example of a data table in which the above-mentioned special drawing variation game determination result, lottery data, and the special drawing determination result are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the special drawing determination table, the special drawing fluctuation game of success or failure judgment result, and the big hit special drawing when the judgment result of the special drawing fluctuation game mentioned above is a big hit. Based on the random number value, a big hit type lottery to determine the type of big hit (special drawing decision result) is performed.

For example, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, and the random number for special hit determination for big hit is a numerical value of 0 to 49, select the big hit symbol 1 as the special result decision result, and use it for big hit When the random number value for special drawing determination is a numerical value of 50-99, the jackpot symbol 2 is selected as a special drawing determination result. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the jackpot special figure determination random number value is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100). In addition, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game is disapproval, the special figure C (disappeared symbol) is selected as the special figure determination result without using the special figure determination table.
<Table set selection table>

  FIG. 501 (c) shows an example of the table set selection table. The table set selection table is a data table in which the above-mentioned special drawing determination result, the special drawing fluctuation number, and the timer selection table are stored in association with each other.

  When the above-mentioned special figure determination result is selected, basic circuit 302 of main control unit 300 determines the number of special figure fluctuations and the timer selection table based on the table set selection table and the selected special figure determination result. Perform a table set selection lottery to determine

For example, if the selected special figure determination result is big hit symbol 1 (special figure A), the number of changes is 90 times, the timer selection table is a combination of table 2, the number of changes is 10 times, the timer selection table is a table The combination of 3 and the variation count of 0 are selected, and the timer selection table selects the combination of Table 2.
<Special drawing timer number selection table>

  FIG. 502 is a diagram showing an example of a special view timer number selection table. This special drawing timer number selection table is a special drawing determination result based on the above-mentioned special drawing determination table, the above-mentioned timer selection table, and the special drawing fluctuation game storage stored in the above-mentioned special drawing reservation number storage area It is a data table which matched and stored lottery data classified by a number, and a timer number decision result.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special drawing timer number selection table, the special drawing determination result based on the special drawing determination table described above, the timer selection table selected in the table set selection lottery mentioned above, the special drawing described above A special drawing timer number lottery is performed to determine the timer number based on the number of reservations and the random number value for timer number determination. For example, the special drawing determination result described above is special drawing C (disappeared symbol), the above timer selection table is table 1, the number of special drawing reservations is 0 to 2, and the acquired random number value for timer number determination is 0 to 89 If the timer number is within the range, the timer 3 (10 seconds of fluctuation time) is selected as the timer number. In addition, for example, the above-mentioned special figure decision result is the big hit symbol 1 (special figure A) or the big hit symbol 2 (special figure B), the above-mentioned timer selection table is table 1 and the special figure reservation number is 3 and acquired When the timer number determination random number value is in the range of 0 to 1, the timer 4 (the fluctuation time 12 seconds) is selected as the timer number. In the present embodiment, the possible numerical range of the timer number determination random number is 0 to 99 (the numerical range is 100).
<Variation time table>

  FIG. 503 is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation time table. The fluctuation time table is a data table in which the above-described timer number determination result and fluctuation time are stored in association with each other.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects a variation time based on the variation time table and the above-described timer number determination result. For example, when the above timer number determination result is timer 1, 2 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time, and when the above timer number determination result is timer 7, 20 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311, chance button control processing is performed. In this chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, the image control process (details will be described later) shown in FIG. In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S321, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Character select effect>

  Next, the character selection effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 505 is a view showing an example of the character select effect, and FIG. 506 is a time chart of the character select effect.

  The main control unit 300 executes the character selection effect to the first sub-control unit 400 in the command setting transmission process of step S215 when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the big hit is won in the big hit determination). Send a character select effect start command to instruct. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 detects the winning of the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or the variable winning opening 234) in the special drawing related process of step S213. ) After outputting a signal for holding the door member in the open state to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234, a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends. And outputs a signal for holding the door member in the closed state to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing drive of the door member of the variable winning opening 234. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the opening / closing control (big hit game) of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15R (round)). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 505 is an example of the character select effect executed in the 10R (round) of the big hit game.

The first sub control unit 400 having received the above-mentioned character select effect start command starts the character select effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the start condition of each round in the big hit game is satisfied). . The character selection effect according to the present embodiment is the character introduction effect shown in FIGS. 505 (a) to 505 (c) and the character selection effect 2 shown in FIG. 505 (d), (f), (h) and (j). It consists of various types of effects.
<Character introduction effect>

  First, the character introduction presentation will be described. In the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first character (in this example, the head) in the front center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 505 (a). An image in which the second character (in this example, a whistle) is located at the rear left, and the third character (in this example, a princess) is at the rear right (hereinafter, "introduction image of the first character (tendon)" Image data of an image, which may be referred to), image data of an image containing the characters "Please choose your favorite character!", And an image showing the current number of rounds (in this example, an image containing the characters 10R) Processing such as reading out image data from the ROM 406 is performed. Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the plurality of image data described above from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In the next step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. Thereby, an introduction image of the first character (殿) as shown in FIG. 6A is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, in the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 locates the first character (殿) of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. The third character (hime) was the second character (爺) in the right front where the first character (the princess) was located in the center of the front. Processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 is performed on image data of a moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introductory image of the second character (爺)”) moving backward to the left. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434 in the image transfer instruction of step S601. Thereafter, in the next step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. As a result, the introduction image of the second character (よ う) as shown in FIG. 6B is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, in the effect control process of step S309, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the third character (hime) is the second character (姫) as shown in FIG. The second character (殿) was in the center of the front, and the first character (殿) was in the right rear where the first character (殿) was the third character (() Processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 is performed on image data of moving images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “introductory image of third character (princess)”) moving to the rear left side. Subsequently, in step S601, the first secondary control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer (overwrite) the above-described image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, an introduction image of a third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 6C is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, during the execution of the character introduction effect, even when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the effect data updated in step S309 (this data (this data) In the example, the process of changing the effect data for the character introduction effect to the effect data according to the pressing of the chance button 136 is not performed. That is, the execution period of the character introduction effect shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 506 is set as the button non-reception period in which the chance button 136 is not accepted (ignoring the pressing operation of the chance button 136). .
<Character selection effect>

  Next, the character selection effect will be described. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 executes the character introduction effect after executing the character introduction effect described above for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this character selection effect, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 controls the first character (head) in the front center of the display area as shown in FIG. 505 (d) in the effect control process of step S309. An image in which the second character (後方) is located at the rear left and the third character (hime) is located at the rear right, and the first character (殿) in the center of the front is highlighted and displayed brightly (hereinafter referred to as " Image data of an image showing the current number of rounds, image data of an image imitating the chance button 136, and image data of an image showing the current number of rounds; Processing such as reading out from the ROM 406 is performed on image data of an image including characters of “Press and select character!”. Subsequently, in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets, in the attribute register of the VDP 434, an instruction instructing transfer of the plurality of image data described above from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436. In S601, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM 436 are swapped. As a result, a temporary selection image of the first character (殿) as shown in FIG. 6D is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this display, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the RAM 408 to display character identification information (for example, numerical value 1) indicating that the temporary selection image of the first character is being displayed. The character identification information storage area provided in

  Further, during the execution of the character selection effect, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the effect data updated in step S309 (this data (this data) In the example, the process of changing the effect data for the character selection effect to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. That is, the execution period of the character selection effect shown in (d) to (k) of FIG. 506 is set as the button reception period for receiving the chance button 136.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 505 (e), when the first sub control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub control unit 400 updates the process in step S309. In the previous effect data, the second character (爺) is at the center of the front where the first character (殿) was located, and the first character (殿) is the third character (姫) A movie in which the third character (Hime) moved to the rear left where the second character (爺) was located to the right and back, and the second character (爺) moving to the front center was brightened A process of changing to image data of an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “temporarily selected moving image of second character (爺)”) is performed. As a result, a temporarily selected moving image of the second character (よ う) as shown in FIG. 6F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when displaying the moving image, the first sub-control unit 400 displays character identification information (for example, 2 of the numerical value) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) is performed. ) Is stored over the above-mentioned character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 507 is a diagram showing in detail an example of the above-mentioned temporarily selected moving image (character movement display) of the second character (爺). The same figures (a), (b) and (f) correspond to the figures 505 (d), (e) and (f), and the figures (c) to (e) are the above FIG. 505 is a diagram showing how a moving image changes between (d) and (f) of FIG. 505.

  The first sub-control unit 400, when detecting the pressing of the chance button 136 during the display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (殿) shown in FIG. As shown in), the second character (爺) is displayed brightly, and the second character (爺) is moved to be moved gradually from the rear left to the front center. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the third character (princess) from the rear right to the rear left in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (爺). Furthermore, in synchronization with the movement display of the second character (殿) and the third character (姫), the first sub-control unit 400 causes the first character (殿) to be displayed dark and also to be centered on the front. Move display to move to the rear right from. Thereby, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) as shown in FIG. 5F and FIG. 505F is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Referring back to FIG. 505, subsequently, as shown in (g) of the first sub control unit 400, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected in the chance button control process of step S311, the above step is performed. In the previous effect data updated in S309, the second character (殿) is the first character (殿) at the center of the front where the third character (姫) was the second character (爺). The third character (Hime) moves the first character (Toen) to the rear right where the third character (Hime) was located to the rear right where it was located, and moves to the front center. A process of changing to image data of a lighted moving image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “temporarily selected moving image of third character (princess)”) is performed. As a result, a temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in (h) of the figure is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 is character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being performed. Is stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6I, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected in the chance button control process of step S311, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the previous one updated in step S309. The effect data is as follows: the first character (殿) was in the center of the front where the third character (位置) was located, and the third character (姫) was the second character (右) in the right rear A moving image in which the first character (殿), whose third character (princess) moves to the left back where the first character (殿) was located, and moves to the front center, is brightened A process of changing to image data of a character (temporarily selected moving image) of character (1) is performed. Thereby, a temporarily selected moving image of the first character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) as shown in (j) of the figure is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, each time the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed, the first sub-control unit 400 displays and displays the temporarily selected moving image of the first character (殿) shown in FIG. Storage of character identification information (1 in this example) indicating that there is a display of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) shown in (f) of the figure, and character identification indicating that the display is being performed Storage of information (2 in this example) → Display of a temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) shown in FIG. 6 (h) and character identification information (3 in this example) indicating that the display is being performed Processing of switching the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the order of storage of ...) and processing of overwriting and storing character identification information for specifying a temporarily selected character in the character identification information storage area Carried out.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 505 (k), when the big hit game end condition is satisfied in the special figure related process of the above-mentioned step S213 (for example, after the round is started, the main control unit 300 When 30 seconds has passed, or when a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) has won in the variable winning opening 234 during one round), for opening and closing drive of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 of the above, and the general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing of the above-mentioned step S215. A character select effect end command for ending the execution of the select effect is transmitted.

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the character selection effect end command is configured to automatically select one character from the plurality of characters according to a predetermined condition when the command is received. In the present embodiment, the character identification information stored in the character identification information storage area described above (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character) is provided in the RAM 408 as character determination information Store (copy) in the fixed information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects that character (the character) based on the above-described character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating the first character (the character)). An image including image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and characters that indicate automatically selected characters (in this example, characters “determine!”) And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406 or the like.

Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. As a result, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 6L is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a period shown by (k) to (l) in FIG. 506, that is, a period from the end of the character selection effect to the start of the next round (in this example, 11R). The reception period is set so that the reception of the chance button 136 is not performed (the pressing of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Button operation during character movement display>

  Next, the change mode of the movement display when the chance button 136 is pressed during the above-mentioned character movement display will be described.

  FIG. 508 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (() shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. When the first sub-control unit 400 detects that the chance button 136 has been pressed during the movement display of the second character (爺) (the same figure (e)), the second movement display is performed. Instead of the character (爺), movement display of the third character (princess) is performed as shown in (f) to (i) of FIG.

  More specifically, when the first sub control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during movement display of the second character (爺) (the same figure (e)), the second character After moving (爺) from the position shown in (d) to the front center shown in (f) and making it darker, the third character (hime) is shown in (d) (d) After moving from the position shown in) to the position shown in FIG. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the third character (princess) from the left rear to the front center as shown in (g) to (i) of FIG. Display the move display. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (right) from the rear right to the rear left in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the rear right in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime) and the first character (殿). Display the move display. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 6I is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 is character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being performed. Is stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.

  FIG. 509 is a diagram showing an example in which the character movement display is not interrupted when the chance button 136 is pressed during the character movement display.

If the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during display of the temporarily selected image of the first character (() shown in FIG. As shown in d), the movement display of the second character (爺) is started. Then, even when the first sub control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 during movement display of the second character (爺) (the same figure (e)), the figures (f) to (g) As shown in (h) to (k) according to the processing of the character movement display described above, continuing the movement display of the second character (爺) as shown in FIG. A movement display is performed to move the character (princess) from the left rear to the front center. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs movement display for moving the first character (right) from the rear right to the rear left in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime). Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 moves the second character (爺) from the front center to the rear right in synchronization with the movement display of the third character (hime) and the first character (殿). Display the move display. As a result, the final image of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) as shown in FIG. 6K is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when performing this moving image display, the first sub-control unit 400 is character identification information (for example, numerical value 3) indicating that the display of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (princess) is being performed. Is stored in the above-described character identification information storage area.
<Second Example of Character Select Effect>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 510 and 511, a second example of the character selection effect will be described. FIG. 510 is a diagram showing a second example of the character select effect, and FIG. 511 is a time chart of the second example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 505 and 506, after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the end of the character introduction effect, an example in which the big hit game end condition is satisfied is described. Although this second example is shown in FIGS. 510 (a)-(c) during the character introduction effect (during the button non-accepting period effect) the jackpot game ending condition (in this example, during one round) This is an example in which a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is won in the variable winning opening 234, that is, an example in which a jackpot game ending condition is satisfied without the player pressing the chance button 136 once.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 505 and 506, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition, the first auxiliary control unit 400 Although the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136), in this second example, the character select effect is ended. Character identification information (in this example, a second character (爺) in this example) determined at a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from the numerical values of 1 to 3) when the command is received 2) is the character determination information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136), the above-mentioned It is stored in the determination information storage area.

  The “predetermined condition” is not limited to the lottery, and for example, the character identification information may be determined based on the gaming state (such as the number of rounds in the big hit game and the number of reserved special figure change games). The character identification information may be determined in advance, may be determined as the character identification information automatically selected in the previous time, or may be determined in advance as the character identification information selected by the player.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects that character (爺) based on the above-mentioned character determination information (in this example, the numerical value 2 indicating the second character (爺)). An image including image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character of “decided to be determined!”) That suggests the automatically selected character (爺). And the image data of the image showing the current number of rounds (in this example, the image including the character 10R) are read out from the ROM 406 or the like.

Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. Thereby, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 510 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the period shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 511, that is, the period from the start of the character introduction effect start to the start of the next round (in this example, 11R). The reception period is set so that the reception of the chance button 136 is not performed (the pressing of the chance button 136 is ignored).
<Third Example of Character Select Effect>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 512 and 513, a third example of the character selection effect will be described. FIG. 512 is a diagram showing a third example of the character select effect, and FIG. 513 is a time chart of the third example of the character select effect.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 505 and 506, after the player presses the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button reception period) after the end of the character introduction effect, an example in which the big hit game end condition is satisfied is described. Although this third example shows the character selection effect (button reception period) shown in FIG. 512 (d) after the character introduction effect (button non-reception period) shown in FIGS. 512 (a) to (c) ends. In the example, the jackpot game ending condition is established without the player pressing the chance button 136 once.

  In the character select effect shown in FIGS. 505 and 506, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the character select effect end command based on the establishment of the big hit game end condition, the first auxiliary control unit 400 In the third example, the stored information is stored (copied) in the above-described character determination information storage area as character determination information (based on the player's operation of the chance button 136). Character identification information (in this example, a third character (a princess) determined in accordance with a predetermined condition (for example, a lottery for determining one numerical value from the numerical values of 1 to 3) when the character selection effect end command is received. As the character determination information (not based on the player's operation of the chance button 136) of the numerical value 3) Stored in the character confirmation information storage area.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 automatically selects that character (princess) based on the above-described character determination information (in this example, 3 of the numerical value indicating the third character (princess)). An image including image data of an image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “character determination image”) and a character (in this example, a character of “decided to be a princess!”) That suggests an automatically selected character (princess) And the image data of the image indicating the next round number (in this example, the image including the character 11R) are read out from the ROM 406 or the like.

  Subsequently, in the image transfer instruction in step S601, the first sub-control unit 400 sets an instruction to transfer the above-mentioned image data from the ROM 406 to the drawing area of the VRAM 436 in the attribute register of the VDP 434. In step S601, the designations of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B are swapped. Thereby, a character determination image as shown in FIG. 512 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a period shown by (e) to (f) in FIG. 513, that is, a period from the end of the character selection effect to the start of the next round (in this example, 11R). The reception period is set so that the reception of the chance button 136 is not performed (the pressing of the chance button 136 is ignored).

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the character selection effect is ended at the timing of changing the variable winning opening 234 from the open state to the closed state, but as shown in FIG. 514, the variable winning opening 234 is closed from the open state. After changing to the state, the closed state may be held for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and then the character selection effect may be ended.
<Another Example of Character Select Effect>

  Next, another example of the character selection effect will be described using FIG. 515. In the example shown in (a) of the figure, in the first sub-control unit 400, as shown on the left side of the figure, the first character (殿) located at the front center of the display area is surrounded by the elliptical cursor. Also, processing is performed to display an image in which the second character (爺) is located at the rear left and the third character (hime) is located at the rear right on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) described above, a first character (don't care) as shown on the right side of FIG. The second character (() is the second character (爺) the second character (姫) is the second character (姫) the third character (爺) was the second character (姫) was the second character The second character (爺) at the center of the front is moved to the center of the front where the character (殿) was located, and the second character (爺) at the center of the front is displayed on the display area of the image decorative symbol display device 208 surrounded by the oval cursor. Perform processing to display. As in this example, one of a plurality of characters may be specified using a graphic such as a cursor instead of the brightness of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, the first sub-control unit 400 is a cursor with an elliptical first character located at the front center of the display area as shown on the left side of the figure. A process of displaying an image in which the second character (爺) is located at the rear left and the third character (hime) is located at the rear right on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) described above, as shown on the right side of the figure, the first to third characters The cursor located at the location of the first character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) is moved to the third character (princess) behind the right without moving the As in this example, one of the plurality of characters may be specified by moving a figure such as a cursor without changing the display position of the character.

  Further, in the example shown in (c) of the figure, as shown on the left side of the figure, the first sub control unit 400 is an area positioned at the center of the display area among the plurality of rectangular areas (in this example , And the background color of the area including the characters “M3: Sense or Reality” is set to a color different from the background color of the other image. Subsequently, when the first sub-control unit 400 detects pressing of the chance button 136 in the character selection effect (button acceptance period) described above, as shown on the right side of FIG. By rotating sequentially from the bottom to the top, the background color of the area located in the center of the display area (in this example, the area including the characters “M2: Distance”) is different from the background color of the other images. Set to As in this example, the color of a specific area may be configured to specify one of a plurality of pieces of information by making the color of another area different.

  In the example shown in (d) of the figure, the character to be selected based on the predetermined condition described with reference to FIG. 512 is surrounded by a cursor, and a character to be automatically selected is notified in advance. With such a configuration, since the character to be automatically selected can be grasped in advance, the player who wants to select the character can concentrate on the current game without worrying about the selection of the character. A player who wants to select another character can change to a favorite character in advance.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when the jackpot determination is won in the big hit determination, the predetermined symbol display device (for example, special figure 1 display device, The first control state (for example, the state in which the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is closed, a predetermined symbol display, and the special figure 2 display device, the decorative symbol display device) has a first advantage degree to the player. A second advantage, which is a second advantage that is higher than the first advantage, from the control state in which symbol fluctuation stop display is performed in the device, the control state with positive variation, the control state with power support, etc.) Control state transition means (for example, special figure state update processing in special figure related processing) for shifting the control state to a control state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is performed a predetermined number of times); Produce a game Effect image (for example, an image of character selection effect, a plurality of symbol pattern stop display is performed in a predetermined symbol display device, and a plurality of symbol Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol display device) for displaying a predetermined competition image (for example, a competition) in which a specific character image of the character images of The image display device (provided separately) and the player from among a plurality of images (for example, images of the first to third characters) during a predetermined image selection effect period (for example, during character selection effect) Storage means (for example, character identification information provided in the RAM 408) for storing specific image information (for example, character identification information) that can specify the selected image Storage area) and effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) for displaying the image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means on the effect display means And an operation receiving unit (for example, a chance button 136) for receiving a selection operation by a player, and the game selection period is performed during the image selection effect period (for example, while the character selection effect is being executed) A selection state image (for example, the second shown in FIGS. 509 (c) to (g)) indicating that a predetermined image (for example, an image of a second character (爺)) is in a selected state among the plurality of images Of the character (爺) of the character (爺) is displayed on the effect display means, and the operation reception unit is operated by the player when the selected image indicates that the predetermined image is in the selected state. When the game is received, a predetermined selection change animation (for example, a temporary selected moving image of a third character (princess) as shown in FIGS. 509 (h) to (k)) is displayed on the effect display means, The selected state image (eg, as shown in FIG. 508 (k)) indicates that an image different from the predetermined image (eg, the image of the third character (princess)) among the plurality of images is in the selected state. The final image of the temporary selected moving image of the 3rd character (princess) is displayed on the effect display means, and when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the start of the round) If one or both of the game balls with a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234 during one round or when one or both of the predetermined conditions are satisfied. ) Image in selected state The specific image information (for example, character identification information) that can be specified is configured to be stored in the storage unit, and the operation reception unit receives the selection operation by the player after the selection change animation. When the selected state image indicating that a specific image is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means, the selection change animation is received when the operation reception unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation. The selected state image showing that the image different from the specific image (for example, the image of the second character (爺)) (for example, the image of the third character (姫)) is in the selected state It is a game console characterized by displaying on a display means.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player's intention can be easily reflected in the effect, which may increase the player's participation in the game, which can enhance the effect of the effect and improve the interest of the game. There is a case.

  In addition, when the selected state image indicating that the predetermined before change image is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means, the operation receiving unit receives the selection operation by the player, After the selection change animation is displayed, the selected state image indicating that the predetermined post-change image is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means, and the selection change animation includes the after-change image ( For example, when the image of the second character (爺) shown in FIG. 508 (d) is included, and the operation reception unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the selection is performed. The image after change in the change animation is shown as an image that is indicated as being selected by the selected state image after the animation (eg, FIG. 508 (f)). It may be configured to replace the third character image (princess)).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that the player has accepted the selection operation, and in some cases, it is possible to improve interest by concentrating on the game without giving the player anxiety.

  In addition, a variable prize that can change the open / close state from one of a predetermined closed state (for example, a closed state) and a predetermined open state (for example, an open state) in which winning of the gaming ball is easier than that of the closed state. The second control state includes a round operation for changing the open / close state of the variable winning opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state (for example, the second control state) The first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed, and the end condition of the image selection effect period is a specific round in the second control state. It may be configured to be established when the number of gaming balls having won the variable winning opening since the start of the operation is equal to or more than a specific number.

  With such a configuration, the image selection effect is performed during small hit, during variable winning opening operation, during variable winning opening opening or during a big hit, etc. Can be selected, which may make it possible to more enjoy the game. In addition, for game customers who enjoy game characteristics over the presentation side, that is, game players who enter the game ball into the variable winning opening quickly, the control means selects the image instead of forcing the image selection, so It may be possible to play a game.

  In addition, a launcher (for example, launcher 110) which launches game balls at predetermined time intervals based on the operation of the player, and the game balls launched by the launcher are made to flow down and the variable winning opening is A game area (for example, a game area 124) may be provided, and the reproduction time of the selection change animation may be longer than the emission period (for example, 6 seconds).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to visually display that the selection has been accepted by animation in a manner that is easy for even beginners to understand, and it may be possible to enhance the rendering effect. On the other hand, especially during the end of the selection period, the animation reproduction period may seem annoying to the player who makes a quick selection. In the case where it is possible to increase the player's participation awareness by configuring to accept the player's selection so that the selection period does not end by winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening during animation. There is.

  In addition, the image selection effect period includes a first period and a second period starting later than the first period, and during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 509 (c) to (g)). During the reproduction of the temporarily selected moving image of the second character (爺) shown in) or during the button non-acceptance period) ignores the selection operation in the selection change animation (a temporary of the second character (爺)) During the second period (eg, during reproduction of the temporarily selected moving image of the third character (hime) shown in FIGS. 509 (h) to (k)) And during a button acceptance period) changes an image (for example, an image of a third character (princess)) indicated as being in a selected state by the selected state image based on the selection operation in the selection change animation. It may be configured as follows.

  With such a configuration, in the late stage of the end of the selection period, there are many situations where selection can be made for various reasons, such as wanting to hurry the selection due to a selection error, etc. May be able to raise the awareness of people

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the character selection effect is performed using an image (a still image or a moving image) has been described. However, the effect of sound by the speaker 120, the effect by the operation of the effect movable body 224, various lamps You may perform effects by Further, although the example in which the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect control of the character selection effect based on the command from the main control unit 300 has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and it goes without saying that various changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, in addition to the above-described pachinko machine 100 (one kind), it can be applied to pachinko machines (two or three kinds), enclosed type pachinko machines, pachilots, etc., arrange ball game machine, baseball game machine, It can be applied to smart balls and the like.

  The present invention is also applicable to, for example, a slot machine using medals (coins) as a game medium. Here, as a slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols, a start switch for starting rotation of the plurality of reels, and each of the plurality of reels Displayed by a stop switch provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, lottery means for judging whether or not internal winning of a plurality of predetermined types of winning combinations is predetermined by lottery, and the plurality of reels at the time of stopping What has the determination means which determines the prize-winning to the said winning combination by whether the combination of a symbol is a symbol combination of the winning combination internally won by the said lottery means is mentioned as an example.

  Further, for example, even in a game program that virtually executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine, the present invention can be applied to execute the game.

  Also, the actions and effects described in the examples of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the examples of the present invention It is not limited to things.

  <Other Embodiments (embodiment in which the operation of the button is effective even if the button operation display is not performed)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 516 to 533, a game console (e.g., a pachinko machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which the button operation is enabled even if the button operation is not displayed). The ball game machine and the rotating game machine such as slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 516 to 533 are basically used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where the overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 516 to 533 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 516 to FIG. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 516 is a view for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in the figures (a) and (d), an operation means image BG (in this example, the chance button 136 is suggested to suggest operation of the operation means (here, the chance button 138) to the decorative symbol display device 208) And the elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the acceptance period of the operation means (in this example, the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 The operation of the chance button 136 is performed when the operation means operation display (hereinafter referred to as the button operation display) by the image (the reduced display of the scale) is displayed and the effect during the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is executed. (Figures (b) and (e)), the operation is accepted, and as shown in the figures (c) and (f), the player receives an operation by changing the effect mode. To inform that was.

  Here, as an example, the reduction display of the scale of the elapsed time notification image TG is temporarily stopped, and another effect display is performed such as executing another effect display. That is, in this case, when the display for prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) (hereinafter referred to as a button operation display 800) is executed, it corresponds to the button operation display 800 (suggested by the button operation display 800). ) Operation of the chance button 136 (operation acceptance) is effective. In the following description, the button operation display 800 will be described as an example of a display including an operation means image BG imitating the chance button 136 and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying an elapsed state of the reception period. However, the button operation display 800 is not limited to this example as long as the effect display is for urging the player to operate the specific operation means (informing that it is a reception period of the operation means). In addition, the button operation display 800 may not include the elapsed time notification image TG.

  On the other hand, in the figure (g), there are a plurality of operation buttons which can be operated by the player (here, the chance button 136 and the other operation button 810), and in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 The button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of is displayed, but the button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810 is not displayed. In this case, even if the chance button 136 corresponding to the button operation display 800 (indicated by the button operation display 800) is operated, the operation becomes invalid and the operation of the other operation button 810 becomes effective.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, even when the operation means operation display (button operation display) of the first operation means (the other operation button 810) is not executed, the first operation means (the other operation means) is The reception of the operation of the operation button 810) is enabled.

In addition, in the game console having the first operation means (other operation button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the operation operation means operation display (button operation display 800) related to the second operation button is executed If the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 800 is invalidated, the first operation means (other operation button) in which the button operation display is not performed is performed. The operation of 810) is effective. As a result, there may be a case where the player's interest can be enhanced by giving variety to the button operation effect. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Circuit configuration of control unit>

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 roughly divides various devices according to a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the first sub-control unit 400 to control, the second sub-control unit 500 mainly controlling the effect based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, a counter circuit (random number value generation circuit) 318 (random number value generation circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received in the basic circuit 302. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 A predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214; A pattern display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a common view hold lamp 216, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high accuracy lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special view start port 232 or a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 to be driven is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game stand lamp 122 etc.) A circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the movable portion of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, a button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136 and pressing of the button unit 190, and various sensors 430; A sensor circuit 428 outputting detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the movable portion of the movable display device 288, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 at present. The effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the position, the sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532. And a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the basic circuit 502 and the game board lamp driving circuit 530.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Liquid crystal control unit>

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data based on the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. The ROM 708 for controlling the whole of the liquid crystal control unit 700, a ROM 506 for storing data for image display, etc., and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 710 are provided. The CPU 704 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 714 B as a system clock, reads image data and the like stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and uses a work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.
<Transmission and reception of data between first sub control unit 400 and liquid crystal control unit 700>

  Next, as a premise of the present embodiment, a general data transmission / reception relationship between the first auxiliary control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 518 to 521.

  First, FIG. 518 (a) shows an example of data held by the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a liquid crystal command. Further, (c) of the figure is a timing chart showing the relationship of transmission and reception of data between the first auxiliary control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The first sub-control unit 400 displays box data (for example, box data A1) shown in (a) of the figure at the timing of each effect execution, such as change start, hold increase, big hit start, button operation effect occurrence, etc. Are set in the box data setting area of the RAM 408. The box data is constituted by a liquid crystal command (here, liquid crystal command 05), a position (here, as an example, a position 00, a position 01) and the like. Thus, the storage position (position) of each part is set in the box data. Here, the position 00 (the start address of) of the part 01 is set as the storage position of the part 01 in the box data, and the position 01 (the start address of the position) is set as the storage position of the part A2. The box data is also set when the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The position is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and parts corresponding to a plurality of positions (here, positions 00 to 9F) are stored. For example, in the example of the figure, the part 01 is stored at the position 00, the part 01 is stored at the position 01, and the part A1 is stored at the position 04. The parts may not be stored in all of the plurality of positions.

  The parts data list is arranged in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and stores parts data corresponding to a plurality of parts (here, parts 00, 01, A1 and A2. Parts data corresponds to respective effects. Output sound from the speaker 120 (sound), light emission mode of the lamp L (various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138), game board lamp 532 etc.), movable objects (effect movable bodies 246, 224, movable It is the information of the movable aspect of display 288).

  Each part data includes a sound layer having sound device data, a lamp layer having lamp device data, and an item operation layer having shutter device data and sub liquid crystal movable unit device data. The sound device data, the shutter device data, the sub liquid crystal movable unit device data, etc. have one or more device data here. For example, in the case of having a plurality of lamp device data, the first lamp device data is information of the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of BGM output, and the second lamp device data is information of the light emission mode of the lamp at the time of one-shot notification is there. Also, for example, the number of each layer is one or more, and when there are a plurality of layers, each has a different priority.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal commands (here, the liquid crystal command 05 of the box data A1) correspond to the start of fluctuation, increase of hold, start of big hit, generation of button operation effect, etc. The command (for example, liquid crystal display 0D) for displaying the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the return commands 00 and 01 are included.

  The first sub-control unit 400 sets the above-mentioned box data (liquid crystal command) at each presentation execution timing (for each effect), transmits the liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and sets each part at the position. Do. When the first sub control unit 400 receives a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, it refers to the corresponding position in the RAM 408, and when part data is stored, the sound of the sound layer of the part data is stored. The light emission mode of the lamp layer and the movable mode of the accessory operation layer are set as transmission commands and transmitted to each device, and effects corresponding to the effect display are performed.

  In addition, fixed data are not stored in a position, but data are replaced at each production execution timing (for each presentation).

  As shown in the figure (c), the first sub control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control processing of the first sub control unit main processing, and the liquid crystal control unit so as to perform each effect according to the result. A command for control is sent to 700 and the speaker 120, a lamp, a movable object, and the like. Here, in the present embodiment, a button operation effect (effect related to the operation acceptance of the chance button 136) will be described as an example of the effect. As the effects related to the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, the button operation display 800 ((liquid crystal) effect display in the figure) by the decorative symbol display device 208, the light emission effect ((sub) button LED in the figure) of the chance button lamp 138, There are other sounds and light-emitting effects (in the figure, effects such as (sub) sound lamps), and the timing charts of FIG. 518 to FIG. 524 mainly show these effects.

For example, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a plurality of box data A1... (That is, liquid crystal commands) to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when performing an effect of starting symbol variation (A). A plurality of liquid crystal commands are prepared according to the type of effect, and in this case, for example, in the liquid crystal command, for example, information such as data returned after pressing the chance button 136 or information on the decorative symbol display device 208 A command for instructing the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol is included.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the variable display of the decorative symbol and the notice effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 although not shown, and transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (B). The return command also includes information on the position, and the first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command corresponds to the part data if there is a setting of the position (part data) corresponding to the box data. Configure command transmission settings. For example, when position information is included in the return command, data of various part data (sound, lamp emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408 is set as a transmission command, and the speaker 120 , Send to the chance button lamp 138, respectively. Thus, the first sub control unit 400 executes various effects. Although there may be a case where a position which can be said to be a single command is transmitted as a return command, a plurality of positions may be transmitted like box data.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs timing of performing a button operation effect (a button operation display 800 and an effect accompanying the same) (at timing (C), the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is activated (reception is started)). The effect display (button operation display 800) for prompting the user to press the button is executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (D).

  Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns a command to the first sub control unit 400 at the timing of performing the button operation effect (C). This return command includes position information as data for effecting button operation, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received it makes the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 valid (E), and the RAM 408 Data of various part data (light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138) corresponding to the part stored in the position is set as a transmission command, and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138. Also, the drive command of the chance button lamp 138 is transmitted. Thereby, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined light emission mode (F).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period of the chance button 136 (G), the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (G). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136 (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (H). Also, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended (I).

The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation reception valid period (disabling the operation reception (J)), and various part data (chance button lamp corresponding to the parts stored in the position of the RAM 408 Data of light emission mode 138 and sound etc. are set as a transmission command and transmitted to the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120. It also sends these drive commands. Also, control of the chance button lamp 138 and the speaker 120 is performed. As a result, the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 ends (K), and effects such as sounds and other lamps L are executed for a predetermined period ((K) to (L)). Thereafter, symbol variation ends (M).
<Example 1 of Timing Chart>

  FIG. 519 is a timing chart showing an example of general data transmission / reception between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, and a command (liquid crystal command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400). It is an example in case button operation production is performed based on a. The same figure (a) shows the case where operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of operation reception of the chance button 136, and the same figure (b) shows during the effective period of operation reception of the chance button 136. , Indicates that the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In the timing chart described below with reference to the drawings, only main timings are extracted, but as described above, transmission and reception of liquid crystal commands and return commands are appropriately performed. In the following timing chart, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 (operation state of the chance button 136, ie, input (operation) present, input (operation) wait, no input (operation)) is also described. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first sub control unit 400 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub control unit 400 (at the start of the reception) at the timing (A) of the liquid crystal control unit. Send the liquid crystal command to 700. Thereafter, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (B).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts an operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 (D ).

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid) (E). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disabling the operation reception) (G), and the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 End the execution of (H).

  In this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation acceptance valid period, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is maintained in the state of input waiting (waiting for operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the first sub-control unit 400 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub-control unit 400 (at the start of the reception) the liquid crystal at timing (A). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the control unit 700. Thereafter, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (B).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts an operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C), and starts executing the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 (D ).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 (E), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is in the state of presence of input. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation acceptance valid period (disabling the operation acceptance), and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (F). Further, in this example, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (disabling the operation reception) (G), and the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 End the execution of (H). Although illustration is omitted, when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, other effects (for example, display of a cut-in image, etc.) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 after completion of the button operation effect are displayed. It carries out (it is the same also in the following examples).

Thus, in the case of FIG. 519, the operation acceptance effective period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is started based on the command (liquid crystal command) from the first sub control unit 400. As shown in FIG. 6B, in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command from the first sub control unit 400 (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) at an unintended timing (I). Even if this is ignored.
<Example 2 of Timing Chart>

  FIGS. 520 and 521 are timing charts showing another example of general transmission and reception of data between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (return It is an example in case a button operation production is performed based on command. FIGS. 520 (a) and 521 (a) show cases where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, and FIGS. 520 (b) and 521 (b) In the valid period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 520 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (at the start of acceptance) to the first sub-control unit 400 at timing (A). Send a return command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (E), and then displays a decorative symbol. Execution of the button operation effect is ended by the device 208 (F). The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disabling the operation acceptance) (G), and the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 End (H).

  In this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation acceptance valid period, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is maintained in the state of input waiting (waiting for operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub-control unit. Return to 400 and send the command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), returns to the first sub control unit 400, and transmits the command (F). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (G).

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (H), and then ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (I) . Further, in this example, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (I).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the timing (H) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  FIG. 520A is an example of a timing chart of a configuration for effectively receiving the operation of the chance button 136 immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to validate reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception), and transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 at timing (A). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  At the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits a command (E). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation reception valid period, but immediately before that, when the operation of the chance button 136 is executed, the liquid crystal command (broken line While transmitting the arrow (G), the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub-control unit 400 (disables the operation reception (G)), and emits the light of the chance button lamp 138 End (H).

  In this example, in order to effectively receive the operation of the chance button 136 pressed immediately before the end of the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is shown in FIG. It is longer than in the case of. Specifically, the operation acceptance effective period of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (when the operation acceptance is invalidated (G)) (for example, the chance button lamp 138 The timing (H) at which the light emission ends is ended. After that, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated immediately before the end of the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 effectively receives the operation, and the chance button is displayed after the end of the button operation effect. Although the effect (not shown) based on the operation of 136 is started, there is a case where the first sub control unit 400 does not effectively receive the operation (does not start the effect).

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not effectively receive the operation and does not start the effect based on the operation of the chance button 136, but until the time when the effect is scheduled to start May run. In addition, at the timing (H) at which the button display effect ends, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the input waiting state is maintained.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 521 (b), the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub control unit Return to 400 and send the command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts executing the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits the command (F). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (G), and thereafter ends the light emission of the chance button lamp 138 (H). Further, in this example, at this timing, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (H).

Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception effective period (H), and thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the execution of the button operation effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 (J).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at timing (G) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  As described above, each timing chart shown in FIGS. 520 to 521 shows an example in which the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 starts based on the command (return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 520 (b) and 521 (b), in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 responds to a command (for example, button operation) from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at an unintended timing (J). Even if it receives a return command, it ignores this.

522 to 524 are timing charts showing the relationship of transmission and reception of data between the first auxiliary control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 according to the present embodiment.
<Example 3 of Timing Chart>

  FIG. 522 is an example of the case where the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is enabled based on the command (liquid crystal command) transmitted from the first sub control unit 400, and FIG. 522 (a) is the operation acceptance of the chance button 136. (B) shows the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the valid period of the operation reception of the chance button 136 during the effective period of the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the first sub control unit 400 enables liquid crystal control at timing (A) where the first sub control unit 400 enables reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (starts reception). The liquid crystal command is transmitted to unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not start the execution of the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid) (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (makes the operation reception invalid) (D).

  Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, the first sub control unit 400 validates the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the first sub control unit 400 (at the start of the reception) timing (A)). A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (B), but does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 (C), the internal state of the first sub-control unit 400 is in the state of presence of input. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Thereafter, in this example, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start the execution of the effect such as sound (D).

  The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command from the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (makes the operation reception invalid) (E).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the light emission of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 regarding the chance button 136) is not performed, the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit At 700), the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is effective. As shown in FIG. 6B, in this example, the liquid crystal control unit 700 receives a command from the first sub control unit 400 (for example, a liquid crystal command corresponding to a button operation) at an unintended timing (F). Even if this is ignored.
<Example 4 of Timing Chart>

  FIGS. 523 and 524 are an example of the case where the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 becomes effective based on the command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700, and FIGS. 523 (a) and 524 (a). Shows the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the effective period of the operation reception of the chance button 136, and FIGS. 523 (b) and 524 (b) show the operation during the effective period of the operation reception of the chance button 136. , Indicates that the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 523 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub-control unit 400. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  At the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (the operation acceptance becomes invalid), the liquid crystal control unit 700 sends a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (C). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (makes the operation reception invalid (D)).

  In this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the operation acceptance valid period, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is maintained in the state of input waiting (waiting for operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) timing (A), the first sub-control. Return to unit 400 and send a command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). On the other hand, the first sub control unit 400 does not transmit part data to the chance button lamp 138 and does not cause the chance button lamp 138 to emit light.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 that has received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (D).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (E). Further, in this example, after that, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like at this timing to start execution of effects such as sound (F).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at timing (E) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  As shown in FIG. 524 (a), the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub-control unit 400. Send a return command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138, and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ').

  The first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the timing when the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub-control unit 400 ends (operation acceptance becomes invalid) (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command ends the operation reception valid period. Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138 (D).

  When the chance button lamp 138 is always on during the operation reception valid period, when it blinks within the operation reception valid period, it is lit (instantly) only for a partial period including the start time of the operation reception valid period. It is assumed that the case is included, and the same applies to the other embodiments.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 524 (b), the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables the liquid crystal control unit 700 to accept the operation of the chance button 136 (at the start of acceptance) at timing (A) the first sub control unit Return to 400 and send the command. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 700 does not execute the button operation effect in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (B). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138, and causes the chance button lamp 138 to emit light (B ').

When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (C), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (C). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits the command (E). The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first secondary control unit 400 (F). After that, the first sub control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and the like to start execution of effects such as sound (G). Then, at this timing, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the operation reception valid period, and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (G).

  In this example, the internal state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the timing (F) at which the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 ends, and is in the state of presence of input.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the button operation effect (the light emission of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 regarding the chance button 136) is not performed, the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control In part 700), operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is effective. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (for example, a return command corresponding to a button operation) at an unintended timing (H) as shown in FIG. Even if this is ignored.

An example of the button operation acceptance state and the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 525 to 533.
<Example 1 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 525 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 519.

  As shown to the same figure (a), the 4th symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, for example, by the upper right side. For example, in the fourth symbol display area 208e, for example, "o" is displayed by filling in blue, etc., during the execution of the variation game of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), and is displayed in white while the variation game is stopped. . In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 can perform variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, as indicated by a downward arrow in the upper left of the figure (b), in a part of the display area.

  Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special view 1 display device 212 and a special view 2 display device 214 are provided, and variable display and stop display of the special view are executed. In addition, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 indicate the number of suspended variable games by turning on and off the LED.

  Here, in the display examples shown in FIGS. 525 to 533, the variation display on the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 are not distinguished. Although described, the variable display in the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 is executed by the main control unit 300, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400. To be executed.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure ends, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the stop display of the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is in progress. In the special view 2 display device 214, the stop symbol form is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In addition, the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. That is, a state in which the button operation effect is not performed is shown. In the present embodiment (FIGS. 525 to 533), as shown in FIG. 5A, when nothing is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, at least the button operation display 800 (only) is not displayed. And other displays may be displayed.

  This timing is a period other than the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400, that is, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid. Similarly, the liquid crystal control unit 700 is a period other than the operation reception effective period, that is, the operation reception state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure indicates that the variation game of the special figure has started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is being executed. The special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol form in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the decorative symbol.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off.

  The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). In this state, during the special game variation game, the button operation effect is not started, but in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance effective period has started, that is, the first sub control unit 400 The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). In this state, during the variable game of the special drawing, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is on. Further, although the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is valid, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is on. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance effective period has started in the liquid crystal control unit 700, that is, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also It is effective.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying. Specifically, the operation means image BG (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 and the character "PUSH !!" suggesting that the image is pressed and the down arrow substantially at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 And the elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the scale of the meter is filled in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) Image is displayed.

  In addition, the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 continues lighting. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). That is, here, the button operation display 800 continues in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduction display in which the filling of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG gradually decreases is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 is made to emit the chance button 136 Continues to light, and in the state where the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) It shows.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (F) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. 519 and shows the state immediately after (g) of the figure. Although the button operation display 800 continues in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrement display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 continues lighting, but In the 1 sub-control unit 400, the pressing of the chance button 136 ends the operation acceptance effective period, and the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (G) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is turned off. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalidated, but the liquid crystal control unit 700 is effective in the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is, for example, the timing between (G) and (H) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). The button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is turned off, and the first sub The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the control unit 400 is invalid. Further, at this timing, the operation acceptance effective period in the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5K is, for example, the timing immediately before (H) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b), and the image immediately before the end of the display of the button operation display 800 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. doing. That is, in the operation means image BG, the chance button 136 is filled with white, the character of "PUSH !!" is not displayed, and the reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is ended. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, timing after (H) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 519 (b). The button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and another effect display (for example, the display of the cut-in image 806 of the character) is executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.
<Example 2 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 526 is a diagram sequentially illustrating an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart illustrated in FIG. 520.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows a state in which the variation game of the special figure ends, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the stop display of the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is in progress. In the special view 2 display device 214, the stop symbol form is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not performed.

  At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure indicates that the variation game of the special figure has started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, the variation game of the special figure (for example, the special figure 2) is being executed. The special symbol 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol form in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the decorative symbol.

  On the other hand, at this timing, the button operation effect is not started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off.

  The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (A) of the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the special game is in the variation game, and the button operation effect is not started, but the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. On the other hand, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying, while the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is turned off. Further, although the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 continues, and the decrease display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, but the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is extinguished. ing. Further, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also effective.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). In this state, the display of the button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for lighting the chance button 136 is on. The operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is effective, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). That is, here, the button operation display 800 continues in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reduction display in which the filling of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG gradually decreases is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 is made to emit the chance button 136 Continues to light, and in the state where the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid in both the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) It shows.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5H is, for example, the timing of (F) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). While the button operation display 800 continues on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decrease display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG is executed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 continues lighting, but the liquid crystal In control unit 700, the operation reception effective period is ended by pressing of chance button 136, and the operation reception state of chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is, for example, the timing immediately before (G) in the timing chart shown in (b) of FIG. (The reduction display of the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG has ended). The chance button lamp 138 lights up, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalidated, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (H) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is on, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalidated. It has become.

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). The button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalidated. .

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is, for example, the timing after (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 520 (b). The button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and another effect display (for example, the display of the cut-in image 806 of the character) is executed. The chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the operation acceptance state of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.
<Example 3 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 527 is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to the third embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 522.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was complete | finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not performed.

  At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was started. The button operation effect has not been started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (A) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 522 (b). In this state, during the special game variation game, the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 becomes valid, and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 The operation acceptance status of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 in the first sub control unit 400 is valid.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 522 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 remains non-display, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 522 (b). In this state, the button operation effect (lighting of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138) is not being performed, and the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) is shown.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing after (C) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 522 (b). Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the first sub control unit 400, the pressing of the chance button 136 ends the operation acceptance effective period, and the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 522 (b). The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but in the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is It becomes effective.
<Example 4 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 528 is a diagram illustrating an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect in time series.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure is performing. Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first image 804 other than the button operation display 800 is displayed. In addition, the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state after operating the chance button 136 by the timing following the figure (a). Although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, when the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), a second image (for example, a cut-in image of a character (for example, a character)) is displayed, as shown in FIG. It overlaps at least a part of the first image 804 displayed in a). As a result, at least a portion of the first image 804 is covered by at least a portion of the second image 806, and visibility for the player becomes low (impossible to see or difficult to see).

In addition, the first image (image to be hidden) 804 may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the status notification image SG, the hold display, the pre-reading notice effect display, other effect display, or a combination of these. . The status notification image SG is a meter display, and refers to a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition is, for example, when the time from the start of display of a predetermined image (state notification image SG) has elapsed, or when a predetermined operation means is operated (one or more operations, long press, etc. Etc.). Specifically, it means an image in which the filled portion of the meter increases (or decreases) depending on the number of times of continuous hitting of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) or the time of long press. In addition, the second image 806 (image to be hidden) may be at least one of the elapsed time notification image TG, the hold display, the status notification image SG, the advance notice effect display, and other effect display, or a combination thereof. When the first image is a meter display such as the elapsed time notification image TG or the status notification image SG, either the start end (start time) or the end end (end time) is the second image 806. It may be hidden or an intermediate part (intermediate time between the start time and the end time) may be hidden by the second image 806.
<Example 5 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 529 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect corresponding to the fourth embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 523.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was complete | finished. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off, indicating that the button operation effect is not performed. At this timing, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 is invalid, and the operation acceptance state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also invalid.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was started. The button operation effect has not been started, the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. The operation acceptance states of the first sub control unit 400 and the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (A) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 523 (b). In this state, the special game variation game is underway, and the button operation effect is not started, but the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes valid, and the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 The operation acceptance status of is invalid. That is, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed, the operation accepting state of the chance button 136 is effective in the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 523 (b). In this state, the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 remains non-display, and the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 is also turned off. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is valid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is, for example, the timing of (C) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 523 (b). In this state, the button operation effect (lighting of the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138) is not being performed, and the state where the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) is shown.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (D) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 523 (b). Although the button operation effect is not executed, in the liquid crystal control unit 700, the operation reception valid period ends when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation reception state of the chance button 136 is invalid. On the other hand, in the first sub control unit 400, the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is effective.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 523 (b). The button operation effect is not executed, and the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in the figure (l) is a timing following the figure (g). The button operation effect is not executed, and another effect display (for example, a cut-in image 806 of a character (a character)) is displayed. The operation acceptance states of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 are both invalidated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the button operation effect is not executed (the button operation display 800 is not displayed), but in the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the operation acceptance state of the chance button 136 is It becomes effective.
<Example 6 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 530 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of operation means operable by the player, and specifically, in addition to the chance button 136, at least another operation button 810.

  Another operation button 810 is an operation button different from the chance button 136 suggested to be operated by the button operation display 800. Further, even if there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the other operation button 810, the effect is executed by the operation of the other operation button 810. In the present embodiment, such other operation button 810 is described as a back button.

In the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure, the variation game of the special figure is started, and the button operation display 800 indicating the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the chance button lamp 138 is off.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the state after pressing the chance button 136. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being performed, and only the decrease display of the elapsed time notification image TG is performed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed while the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation is invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed), which is not suggested by the button operation display 800.

The figure (f) has shown the state after pressing the back button 810. FIG. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (ten)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the operation of the button is not performed (the lighting of the button is not performed) is made effective. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is effective.
<Example 7 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 531 is a diagram showing an example of a button operation acceptance state and a button operation effect in time series. The present embodiment is also configured to include the chance button 136 and the back button 810.

In the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure, the variation game of the special figure is started, and the button operation display 800 indicating the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the chance button 136 whose operation is suggested by the button operation display 800 is pressed. In this example, even when the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed, the chance button lamp 138 is off.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows the state after pressing the chance button 136. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is no change such as a new effect being performed, and only the decrease display of the elapsed time notification image TG is performed. That is, even if the chance button 136 is pressed in the period in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is displayed (the same figure (c)), the operation is invalidated.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E shows a state in which the back button 810 is lit by the back button lamp 812 not suggested by the button operation display 800. The back button lamp 812 is turned on, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136. Alternatively, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on at the timing when the operation reception effective period of the back button 810 starts.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state where the back button 810 is operated (pressed) while the back button lamp 812 is on.

  FIG. 6G shows a state after the back button 810 is pressed. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (ten)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the operation of the button is not performed (the lighting of the button is not performed) is made effective. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is effective. Furthermore, when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied, the back button lamp 812 is turned on. The lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 can be, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136, or after the operation reception valid period of the back button 810 starts.

In the present embodiment, in the figures (c) and (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is invalidated, but may be effective.
<Example 8 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 532 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. The present embodiment is also configured to include the chance button 136 and the back button 810.

The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the variation game of the special figure starts and the button operation display 800 which suggests operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates a state in which the chance button lamp 138 of the chance button 136 indicated by the button operation display 800 is lit. On the other hand, the button operation display of the back button 810 is not performed, and the back button lamp 812 is also turned off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the back button 810 is operated (pressed) that is not suggested by the button operation display 800.

  The figure (d) shows the state after pressing the back button 810. When the back button 810 is pressed, a new effect (for example, a display effect of a cut-in image of a character (ten)) is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the back button 810 in which the button operation display indicating the operation of the button is not performed (the lighting of the button is not performed) is made effective. Alternatively, the operation of the back button 810 which is different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by the button operation display 810 is effective. That is, even if there is a button operation effect (the button operation display 800 and the chance button lamp 138 being lit) indicating the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIGS. The operation of a button (back button 810) different from the button (chance button 136) suggested by is effective.

Also in this example, the operation of the chance button 136 may be enabled, or the back button lamp 812 may be turned on when the lighting condition of the back button lamp 812 is satisfied.
<Example 9 of button operation acceptance state and effect>

  FIG. 533 is a diagram showing an example of the button operation acceptance state and the button operation effect in time series. In the present embodiment, only the chance button 136 is provided.

  The timing shown to the figure (a) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure is stopping. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is also turned off. Further, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown to the figure (b) has shown the state in which the fluctuation game of the special figure was started. At this timing, the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 is also turned off. Further, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is invalid.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the button operation display 800 of the chance button 136 starts displaying during the variation game of the special view and the chance button lamp 138 is lit. At this timing, the accepting state of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 becomes effective.

  The timing shown to the figure (d) has shown the state in which the button operation display 800 started display, and predetermined time passed. The button operation display 800 is continued, and the chance button lamp 138 is also kept on. Further, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is effective.

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) of the figure show a state where the deletion condition of the button operation display 800 is satisfied and the button operation display 800 is not displayed. The deletion condition of the button operation display 800 can be an operation of the chance button 136 (or another button), an elapse of a predetermined time, or the like. Further, even at this timing, the acceptance status of the operation of the chance button 136 of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 is valid. In these timings, the chance button lamp 138 may be kept on even after the button operation display 800 is not displayed.

  As described above, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes the first operation means (for example, chance button 136) and the display means (for example, with the decorative symbol display device 208). A control unit (for example, in the first sub control unit 400), the display unit is a unit capable of at least executing a plurality of types of display, and the control unit is a plurality of types At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, a display displayed when executing a normal button operation effect), At least one of the displays is a second display (for example, a display displayed when a normal button operation effect is not performed, a display at the time of back button effect, etc.), and among the plurality of types of displays, At least one of them is a third display (for example, a display at the time of a button operation effect (including a button operation display 800)), and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, , Back button operation effects, etc. effects that do not include the button operation display 800), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state (for example, normal button operation effects can be performed) State, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state (e.g., a state in which a normal button operation effect is not performed), and the first state is the first state. When the operation means is operated, at least a first control (for example, control for executing a normal button operation effect) can be performed, and the second state is the first state. There is an operation of the operation means In a case, at least a second control (for example, a control in which a normal button operation effect is not executed) can be performed, and the first control executes the first display on the display means. The second control is at least control including the control for causing the display means to execute the second display, and the third display is the case in the first state And the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the case of the second state, and the third display is a first image For example, it is a display including at least a button operation display 800), and the fourth display is a display not including at least the first image, and the first image (for example, the first operation means (for example, , Chance button 136) The first operation means is a means including at least a light emitting means (eg, chance button lamp 138), and the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the first state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the light emitting means is means which does not emit light in the second state.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects.

  Also, the chance button lamp 138 may emit light in the first state and may not emit light in the second state. The light emission of the chance button lamp 138 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400, but the light emission may be controlled by another control means.

  In addition, a second operation means (a back button 810, another chance button, a button used when changing the volume, etc.) is provided, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display (for example, , Display corresponding to the operation of the back button 810), at least one of the plurality of types of states is a third state, and the first state is an operation of the second operation means And the third state is the third control (e.g., the back button 810) when the second operation means is operated. And the third state is a state in which at least the third control is not performed when the first operation means is operated. And the third control is the table Including at least control a control to execute display the fifth to the means may be a thing.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects.

  In addition, after the control means receives the first command from the other control means (for example, the liquid crystal control unit 700), at least transition to the second state (for example, a state in which normal button operation effect is not performed) It may be a means to

  Also, the second state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is not performed) is a state different from the first state (for example, a state in which a normal button operation effect is performed) It is also good.

  The second operation means (for example, the back button 810) may be different from the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136).

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of display may be a sixth display (for example, an effect display displayed after the back button 810 is operated).

  Also, the sixth display (for example, the effect display displayed after operating the back button 810) may be a display including at least a second image (for example, an image including information advantageous to the player). Good.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a fourth state (for example, a demonstration image display state or a fluctuation gaming state).

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

  In addition to button operation effects, button operations may be effectively accepted, and even if button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, button operations may be effectively accepted. In addition, when the button reception information is not referred to in a certain control process, the button operation may not be effectively received.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may be provided with a second operation means (back button 810), and the back button 810 in this case is used for other chance buttons, selection buttons, volume change, etc. Or the like. The back button 810 may or may not have a lamp (back button lamp 812) for causing the back button 810 to emit light. In addition, even if the back button 810 is operated with no button operation display suggesting the operation of the back button 810, the operation corresponding to the back button 810 (for example, when the back button 810 is a volume change button, etc.) May be performed, or the operation may not be performed.

  When the back button 810 is another chance button, the effect corresponding to the back button 810 is executed even if the back button 810 is operated in the first state (a state in which normal button operation effects can be performed). Or the effect may not be performed. When the back button 810 is provided, there may be back button operation effects corresponding to the back button 810 or there may be no back button operation effects.

  The first sub control unit 400 may shift to the second state (back button state) when receiving a command (for example, a return command) from the liquid crystal control unit 700.

  As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the first state in which the normal button operation effect can be performed and the second state in which the normal button operation effect is not performed. It is possible to shift at least between the states of Then, in the first state, the first display displayed at the time of executing the normal button operation effect can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the second state, the first display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normally It is possible to display a second display that is displayed when the button operation effect of is not performed. Further, a third display, which is a display (including the button operation display 800) at the time of the button operation effect, can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the third display is in the case of the first state. , Is a display that may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display different from the display at the time of normal button operation presentation (display not including the button operation display 800, or the operation of the button different from the button whose operation is actually effective) A fourth display, which is a suggested display etc.) can be displayed, and the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the second state.

  The second state is the back button state, in which the button operation display 800 is not displayed, but the operation of the chance button 136 can be effectively accepted. Alternatively, although the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation of another button (physical back button 810) different from this is effectively received. That is, when the operation of the back button 810 is effectively accepted, the button operation display 800 suggesting the operation of the chance button 136 different from this when the game is provided with the physical back button 810 is referred to here. It can be said that it is the second display.

  In addition, even when the button operation display 800 is not performed, acceptance of the button operation may be enabled (button reception state).

  When the button operation display 800 is performed, acceptance of the button operation may be enabled (button accepting state), and the lamp of the button may be turned on.

  Further, when the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 is enabled, the back button lamp 812 may or may not be on. Further, when the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 is enabled, the back button lamp 812 is turned on only for a moment and then turned off, but the acceptance of the operation of the back button 810 may be enabled even while the light is off. .

  Further, in the above description, when there are the first operation button and the second operation button, the operation of the first operation button is performed even if there is no button operation display suggesting the operation of the first operation button. The thing that effect is executed by is referred to as the "back button", but there is no button operation indication that suggests the operation of the first operation button, and the lamp that lights the first operation button is extinguished. Even in the presence state or in the presence state, one whose effect is executed by the operation of the first operation button may be set as the “back button”.

  In addition, when the first image 804 is displayed and the button operation display is not performed, when the operation button is pressed, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is performed. It may be overlapped with another display to hide it.

  In addition, when the first image 804 is displayed and the back button 810 in which the button operation display is not performed is operated, another effect display (display of the second image 806) is executed, and the other effect display is performed. It may be overlapped with another display to hide it. For example, the first image 804 (image to be hidden) is the button operation display 800 (operation means image (image imitating the chance button 136) BG and elapsed time notification image (meter) TG) of the chance button 136 and the chance is When button operation display 800 of button 136 (operation means image (image simulating chance button 136) BG and elapsed time notification image (meter) TG is displayed, another effect display (operation of back button 810) The display of the second image 806 is performed, and the other effect display 806 overlaps with a part of the meter (the start time point, the end time point, the middle time point, etc. of the button operation reception period), In this case, the first image 804 may be only the elapsed time notification image (meter) TG). . In addition, the first image (image to be hidden) 804 may be at least one of the state notification image SG, the hold display, the pre-reading effect display, or a combination effect thereof. In addition, the second image 806 (image to be hidden) may be at least one of the hold display, the status notification image SG, the pre-reading display effect, or a combination effect thereof.

  Also, a plurality of back buttons 810 may be provided, in which case the first hidden effect is executed by the first back button, and the second hidden effect is executed by the second back button. It is also good.

  In addition, even after the button operation display 800 is erased based on the display end of the elapsed time notification image (meter) indicating the operation reception period or the button operation, the operation button whose operation has been suggested by the button operation display 800 The operation of (or back button) may be effectively accepted (during the actual operation acceptance effective period), and at that time, the operation button (or back button) may be on or off. It is also good.

  In addition, when there are the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the second operation button does not transmit a command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the first operation button The command may be transmitted only during the operation acceptance valid period of the operation button (during the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400), in which case the operation acceptance valid period of the first operation button (back button 810) A button operation effect (light emission, sound, etc.) of the back button 810 may be executed during that time.

  In addition, even if either the first operation button or the second operation button is operated, a command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (hereinafter referred to as the first sub-control) Control by the unit 400 may be called), or a command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 to the first sub-control unit 400 (hereinafter referred to as control by the liquid crystal control unit 700), or Even if it is, you may add the information of whether it is the operation command in the operation reception effective period.

  Further, in control based on the first sub control unit 400, the liquid crystal control unit 700 may receive a command only during an operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700. Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, shifts to processing for analyzing the received command only during the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, or branches based on the information included in the command. It may be Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 always receives a command, shifts to processing of analyzing the received command only during the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and branches based on the information included in the command. It is also good.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button lighting may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is lit may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation just before the button is turned off may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may not be accepted by the liquid crystal control unit 700, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately before the button lighting may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is lit may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  In addition, the button operation immediately before the button extinguishment may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  Further, the button operation immediately after the button is turned off may not be accepted by the first sub control unit 400, or may be accepted.

  In addition, even when the button operation is performed within the operation reception valid period of the button, the command may be transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 at the end of the operation reception valid period, or the command may be sent to the liquid crystal control unit side. May be transmitted, and the same processing may be performed at the end of the fluctuation. This makes it possible to reset the effect (safety control) when a command is missed.

  In addition, the button lights up at a predetermined timing within the operation acceptance effective period of the button, and the special effect may be executed when the button is operated at that timing, and the special effect is not executed even if the button is operated at the timing ( There is no change in the effect).

  Further, in the configuration provided with the back button 810, the operation acceptance valid period of the first sub control unit 400 may be started even while the auto button is being set. For example, the back button lamp 812 may be turned on during the operation reception effective period of the back button 810 even if the auto button is being set.

  When the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, even if both the second operation button and the first operation button (back button 810) enable the operation reception Good.

  When the button operation display 800 of the second operation button (chance button 136) is displayed, the operation reception of the second operation button is invalidated, and only the operation reception of the first operation button (back button 810) is received. It may be enabled.

  In the configuration that performs control based on the liquid crystal control unit 700, although the button operation display 800 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400 based on the command transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700. You may start the button operation acceptance effective period with. By doing this, for example, after displaying effects (other than the button operation display 800) on the decorative symbol display device 208 in cases other than the effects of the back button, effects such as sound output are performed by the first sub control unit 400. When the processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is lowered, it may be possible to prevent the previous baring by the sound output (the display can not be enjoyed if the lost sound is heard earlier during the display of the stumbling effect). .

  In the above description, the configuration described for the first sub-control unit 400-based control can also be applied to the liquid crystal control unit 700-based control.

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game console described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.
(Supplementary note)

  A game console (e.g., pachinko machine 100) includes control means (e.g., first sub-control unit 400 and / or liquid crystal control unit 700), display means (e.g., decorative symbol display device 208), and operation means (e.g., A game button provided with the chance button 138), wherein the display means is means capable of displaying at least a first display, and the first display is a display (for example, a button relating to at least the operation means) The control means is means for validating at least the reception of the operation of the operation means in the first period, and in the first period, the display means It is a game console characterized by at least a display start period of one display.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, the operation (acceptance) of the operation button (chance button 136) is validated.

  Further, the operation means includes a first operation means (back button 810), the operation means includes a second operation means (chance button), and the first display indicates at least the first operation. A display that does not include a display related to the means (for example, a button operation display for the back button 810), and the first display indicates a display for at least the second operation means (for example, the button operation display 800 for the chance button 136) It is a display including, The control means is means for validating acceptance of the operation of at least the first operation means in the first period.

  That is, in the game console having the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the first operation different from the second operation button whose operation is suggested by the button operation display 800 The operation (acceptance) of the operation button (ie, the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800) is validated.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects. In the present embodiment, a button for which acceptance of the operation is effective regardless of the operation being suggested by the button operation display 800 is referred to as a back button in the present embodiment, but the back button is a physical back button and a control back Includes any of the buttons. That is, even when the operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800, when the operation of the operation button (chance button 136) is enabled (the acceptance thereof), the physical chance button 136 is controlled It also functions as a back button. On the other hand, in the game console having the first operation button (back button 810) and the second operation button (chance button 136), the reception of (the operation of the first operation button whose operation is not suggested by the button operation display 800) In the configuration that enables), the operation button 810 different from the chance button is configured as a physical back button.

  Also, the control unit (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700) is a unit that invalidates the reception of the operation of the second operation unit in the first period. It is also good.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects.

  In addition, the first light emitting means (for example, the back button lamp 812) is provided, and the first light emitting means has a second period (for example, after an operation acceptance period for the back button 810 has elapsed) until a predetermined time has elapsed. Means for enabling the first operation means to emit light in the period (d), and the control means is means for enabling reception of at least the operation of the first operation means in the second period, It may be Further, the control means may be means for invalidating reception of at least the operation of the second operation means in the second period.

  According to such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to increase the interest of the player by giving variety to button operation effects. Further, since the button (back button) whose operation is currently effective can be suggested in stages, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from being ineffective.

  In addition, a second light emitting means (for example, chance button lamp 138) is provided, and the second light emitting means is a means for enabling the first operating means to emit light in a third period, and the third light emitting means The period may be a period starting at least after the first period starts. Further, the game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  According to such a configuration, by causing the player to recognize the button whose operation is invalid as if it is effective and causing the player to recognize it, it is possible to give more variety to the button operation effect to enhance the player's interest There are times when you can.

  <Other Embodiments (embodiment in which there are a plurality of times from the pressing of a button to the execution of effects such as sound output)>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 534 to 541, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine, etc.) according to another embodiment of the present invention (embodiment in which there are a plurality of times from button press to execution of effects such as sound output) The ball game machine and the rotating game machine such as slot machine will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 534 to 541 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where the overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, the diagrams in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 534 to 541 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, as for the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 534 to FIG. 541, the same reference numerals are used as the same constituent elements as the above embodiment. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 534 is a view for explaining the outline of the present embodiment, and shows an example of effects (button operation effects) related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation acceptance of the operation means. Here, the button operation effect in the present embodiment is an effect associated with the operation acceptance of the button (chance button 136), and the button operation display 800 by the decorative symbol display device 208, sound (rendering sound) output based on the button operation Say the production of etc.

  The figure (a) is a figure which shows an example of a normal button operation presentation. The normal button operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables reception of one button operation during a button operation valid reception period.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800) for prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is informed that the operation reception valid period of the chance button 136 is being received.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (once) during the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first sub control unit 400 receives the button operation, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a liquid crystal command based on the button operation. Ru. The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command erases the button operation display 800, and executes a first effect display 820 based on the button operation (here, an effect of displaying a cut-in image of a character). In addition, the first auxiliary control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 at the execution timing of the first effect, and outputs an effect sound.

  As described above, in the normal button operation effect, effects are produced such that the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub control unit 400 and the timing of the first effect display 820 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 are matched.

  On the other hand, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of the button continuous hitting operation effect. The button continuous hitting operation effect is, for example, an effect that enables reception of a plurality of continuous button operations (button continuous hitting operation) during the operation valid acceptance period of the button.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display (button operation display 800A) for prompting the continuous hitting operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is executed, and it is informed that the continuous hitting operation acceptance effective period of the chance button 136 is in effect.

  When the player continuously presses the chance button 136 during the operation acceptance valid period of the chance button 136, the first sub control unit 400 accepts the button operation, and a liquid crystal command based on the button operation is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700. Then, after the first sub-control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 and outputs the effect sound, the liquid crystal control unit 700 that receives the liquid crystal command performs a second effect based on the button operation (the continuous hitting operation of the button is being executed) Display 822) indicating (informing) that

  As described above, in the button continuous hitting operation effect, the effect of the effect sound output by the first sub-control unit 400 and the timing of the second effect display 822 by the liquid crystal control unit 700 do not coincide, for example, the effect sound output is the second It is executed prior to the effect display 822.

  FIG. 535 is a diagram for explaining the outline of this embodiment, and FIGS. 5A and 5B are timing charts showing the relationship between button operation and effect sound output, and FIG. 5A is a normal button. It is an example in the case of operation production, and the figure (b) is an example in the case of button continuous hitting operation production. Further, FIG. 7C is an example of the effect data management table.

  As shown in (a) of the figure, in the first button operation (normal operation of the chance button 136), execution start of button operation effect (output of effect sound according to button operation) from button operation (A) ( The period up to B) is the first period t1.

  On the other hand, as shown in (b) of the figure, in the second button operation (the continuous hitting operation of the chance button 136), the execution start of the button operation effect (effect sound output according to the operation) from the first button operation (A) ( The period up to B) is the second period t2, and the second period t2 is shorter than the first period t1.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the first period t1 and the second period t2 depend on the timing of transmission and reception of commands between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. (C), the first sub-control unit 400 holds the data table, and based on this, the first period t1 and the second period t2 are set. It may be one. For example, in FIG. 6C, the number of interruptions from detection of button operation to output of presentation sound is held as a table. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 can output an effect sound at a predetermined timing with reference to the table at the time of effect execution.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the period from the button operation to the start of the output of the effect sound differs between the normal button operation effect and the button continuous hitting operation effect, and the button operation effect of the button continuous hitting operation effect is more normal It is shorter than that. Further, in the normal button operation effect, the effect display and the output of the effect sound are executed at substantially the same timing, but in the button continuous hitting operation effect, the output of the effect sound is executed prior to the effect display. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the dynamic feeling of the button continuous hitting operation effect, and it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

Hereinafter, this will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The circuit configuration of the control unit of this embodiment is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 517, so the description will be omitted.
<Example 1 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>

  With reference to FIG. 536, the timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect of this embodiment will be described. The figure (a) is a timing chart in the case of button continuous hitting operation, and the figure (b) is a timing chart in the case of usual button operation.

  The first sub control unit 400 performs the effect lottery process in the effect control process of the first sub control unit main process, and performs the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the speaker 120, the lamp L, and the movable object so as to perform various effects according to the result. Although a command for control is transmitted to M, here, as an example of the effect, a button operation effect (effect related to operation acceptance of the chance button 136) will be described. As the effects related to the operation acceptance of the chance button 136, the button operation display 800 ((liquid crystal) button display in the figure) by the decorative symbol display device 208, the light emission effect ((sub) button LED in the figure) of the chance button lamp 138, There is an output of the effect sound (and other light emission) effects (in the figure, effects such as (sub) sound), and the timing chart of FIG. 536 shows only these effects. FIG. 536 is an example of the case where the button operation effect is executed based on the command (return command) transmitted from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700).

As shown in FIG. 6A, the liquid crystal control unit 700 activates the acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (at the start of acceptance) to the first sub control unit 400 at timing (A). Send a return command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests button continuous hitting operation of the chance button 136. In addition, the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes according to the state of the button continuous hitting operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button continuous hitting operation changes accordingly. It may be. In this example, with the increase in the number of times the button is continuously hit, the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 changes to three levels (in FIG. In the button operation display 800, the display mode (display state) has three stages (the state (a) shown by the (liquid crystal) button display state in the figure (a)) according to the change of the rendering state of the first sub control unit 400. Shall change to The button operation display 800 displayed at the timing (B) is a display of the status A.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  If the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (if the first operation among the continuous hitting operation is performed) (E1), the first sub control unit 400, A liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E1). In addition, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120 (F1).

  Similarly, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E2 to E6) each time the chance button 136 is continuously hit (E2 to E6), and the first auxiliary control unit 400 receives a speaker The part data is transmitted to 120, and the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 (F2 to F6).

  Moreover, in this example, the effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is the state a from the first to the second in the continuous hitting operation, but at the third timing (E3) in the continuous hitting operation, the first sub control unit The rendering state of 400 changes from state A to state i. At the timing after the output of the effect sound (F3) based on the third time of the continuous hitting operation, the button operation display 800 changes to the display of the state A (G).

  Further, at the timing after the output (F6) of the effect sound based on the sixth time of the continuous hitting operation, button operation display 800 changes to the display of state c, and at the same time, the operation acceptance effective period in liquid crystal control unit 700 is End (operation acceptance becomes invalid) (H). The liquid crystal control unit 700 returns to the first sub control unit 400 and transmits a command (H). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (deletes) the button operation display 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 (I).

  After that, the first sub control unit 400 ends the operation reception valid period (makes the operation reception invalid), and the rendering state of the first sub control unit 400 changes from the state a to the state c (J). Thereafter, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off (K).

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the normal button operation effect, the liquid crystal control unit 700 enables reception of the operation of the chance button 136 in the liquid crystal control unit 700 (timing to start reception) (A) , And returns to the first sub control unit 400 to transmit a command. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display that suggests a normal operation (for example, one press) of the chance button 136. Therefore, in this case, the rendering state of the first sub control unit 400 does not change according to the state of the button operation, and the display mode (display state) of the button operation display 800 suggesting the button operation changes. There is nothing to do.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period in the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (deletes) the button operation display 800 (G).

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (H) and turns off the chance button lamp 138 (I).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect, from the button operation (the timing (E1) in the same figure (a)) to the output of the effect sound (the timing (F1 in the same figure (a)) The period (t2) is shorter than the period (t1) from the button operation of the normal button operation effect (timing (E) in FIG. 7B) to the output (I) of the effect sound.

  That is, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when there is a button operation, but does not wait for a return command for the liquid crystal command. The control unit 400 drives the speaker 120 to output an effect sound.

On the other hand, in a normal button operation effect, when a button operation is performed, a liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs the first sub control After being transmitted to the unit 400, the effect sound is output.
<Example 2 of timing chart of button operation and button operation effect>

  Another example of the timing chart of the button operation and the button operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a plurality of button operations can be performed within a button operation acceptance effective period, and an effect is executed (a state of effect changes) each time a button operation is performed. That is, the state of the effect of the first sub control unit 400 changes from the initial state to the state A whenever the button is operated, and accordingly, the display of the button operation display 800 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 The mode (display state) changes from the initial state to the state A-.

As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to validate reception of the operation of the chance button 136 (start reception), and returns the command to the first sub control unit 400 at timing (A). Send. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts the display of the button operation display 800 on the decorative symbol display device 208 (B). The button operation display 800 in this case is a display of an initial state, for example, a display that suggests the first button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 starts an operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400 (C). Thereafter, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits the part data to the chance button lamp 138 to make the chance button lamp 138 emit light (D).

  When the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (E), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (E) ). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (F). In addition, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from the initial state to the state (G). The display of the status is, for example, a display that suggests the second button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command of the timing (F) transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120. Further, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is initial state Change to state a (H).

  When the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (I), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (I ). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command transmits the return command to the first sub control unit 400 (J). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from state A to state B (K). The display of the state A is, for example, a display that suggests the third button operation of the chance button 136.

  The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command of the timing (J) transmits the part data to the speaker 120 and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120. Further, the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is state-ascribed Change to state a (M).

  If the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation acceptance effective period of the first sub control unit 400 (N), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (N ). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command ends the operation acceptance valid period in the liquid crystal control unit 700, and transmits a return command to the first sub control unit 400 (O). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 changes the state of the button operation display 800 from the state a to the state c (P). The display of the state c is, for example, a display indicating that the operation acceptance effective period of the chance button 136 has ended or the like.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command of the timing (O) ends the operation acceptance valid period in the first sub control unit 400, transmits the part data to the speaker 120, and outputs the effect sound from the speaker 120 Also, the rendering state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed from the state a to the state c (Q). After that, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the chance button lamp 138.

In this embodiment, a button operation can be made a plurality of times within the operation acceptance effective period, and while the state of the effect changes every button operation, the period from the button operation to the effect sound based on the button operation It is slower than in the case of operation effects. That is, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal command is transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the liquid crystal control unit 700 when there is a button operation, as in the case of the normal button operation effect, After the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits to the first sub control unit 400, an effect sound is output.
<Example 1 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 538 is a diagram showing an example of button continuous hitting operation and button continuous hitting operation presentation corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (a) in time series.

  As shown to the same figure (a), the 4th symbol display area 208e is provided in the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, for example, by the upper right side. Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are provided. Since these configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 526, the description will be omitted.

  This timing is, for example, the timing of (B) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (a), and shows the state where the variable game of the special figure has started. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, , The special figure 2) displays that the variation game is being executed, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the stop symbol aspect in the stop state, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area Fluctuation display has been started. Further, the button operation display 800 is displayed substantially at the center of the display area. This button operation display 800 is a display that suggests a button continuous hitting operation, for example, an operation means image BG (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 and a character of "continuous hit !! suggesting to hit it continuously" And the down arrow image) and an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, according to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 And the image is displayed with a filled scale. Further, in this example, a status notification image SG indicating the status of continuous hitting is also displayed. The status notification image SG is a meter display, and refers to a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition means, for example, when the time from the start of display of the display of the predetermined image (state notification image SG) has elapsed, or when the number of times of the continuous hit operation of the button has increased. In addition, at this timing, the speaker 120 does not output the rendering sound.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E1) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (a), and is a state where the continuous hitting operation is started (state where the first pressing is performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is, for example, the timing of (F1) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (a). The state in which the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 after the period t2 has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows, for example, a state after the timing of (F1) to the timing of (E2) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (a). Not showing.
<Example 2 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 539 is a diagram illustrating an example of button operations and button operation effects corresponding to the first embodiment of the timing chart illustrated in FIG. 536 (b) in time series.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (b), and the state of the effect is indicated by the character display of “Please hit continuously in 538 (a)”. The display is the same as that of FIG. 538 (a) except that the character “PUSH !!” is displayed to indicate one button operation instead.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E1) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (b), and is in a state where the button operation (one operation) is performed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows, for example, a state after the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (b) to before the timing of (G). However, the speaker 120 does not output the effect sound corresponding to the button operation.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 536 (b). The state in which the rendering sound is output from the speaker 120 after the period t1 has elapsed since the button operation shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation and the first effect display 820 displayed based on the button operation have substantially the same timing.
<Example 3 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 540 is a diagram showing another example of the button operation and the button operation effect in time series, and is an example of the effect using the character (movable body).

The timing shown in the figure (a) indicates that the character appears by displaying the character "The character is falling intensely at the character falling in addition to the effect display in Fig. 539 (a)". The description is the same as that of FIG. 539 (a) except for the above.
The timing shown to the figure (b) is the state which performed button operation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and another effect display (other than the button operation display 800) displayed based on the button operation (for example, a third effect such as an effect image) A state in which the display 816) is displayed is shown.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which the effect sound is output from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period (for example, period t1) elapses from the button operation shown in (b) of the figure. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button operation display 800 is not displayed, and superimposed on the third effect display, the first effect display 820 (other than the button operation display 800) displayed based on the button operation (for example, , The image of the role is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, the output of the operation sound corresponding to the button operation and the first effect display 820 other than the button operation display 800 displayed based on the button operation have substantially the same timing.

Further, in this effect example, even if the button operation shown in FIG. 6B is a normal button operation or a button continuous hitting operation, the period until the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation is, for example, , 536 (b) is equivalent to the period t1. As described above, in the case of the effect utilizing the special effects, the period from the button operation to the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation may be a fixed period regardless of the state of the button operation.
<Example 4 of button operation and button operation effect>

  FIG. 541 is a diagram corresponding to Example 2 of the timing chart shown in FIG. 537, illustrating an example of a button operation and a button operation effect in time series.

  The timing shown in (a) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (B) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 537, and the state of the effect is the same as that of (a) in FIG. Also, the button operation display 800 in FIG. 6A is in the initial state.

  The timing shown in (b) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (E) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 537, and is a state in which the first button operation has been executed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows, for example, a state after the timing of (F) in the timing chart shown in FIG. 537 to before the timing of (G). Although the button operation display 800 from the figure (a) is continued, the state which the presentation sound corresponding to button operation is not output from the speaker 120 is shown.

  The timing shown to the figure (d) has shown the state of the period of (G)-(H) of the timing chart shown, for example to FIG. Although button operation display 800 is continued, in addition to that, first display 824 is displayed, and the state of button operation display 800 changes from the initial state to the state A (timing (G) in FIG. 537). The first display 824 is, for example, a display of “in normal reach” of the face image of the character (殿) and the balloon. After that, the effect sound corresponding to the first button operation shown in FIG. 5B is output from the speaker 120 (timing (H) in FIG. 537).

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is, for example, the timing of (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 537, and is a state in which the second button operation is executed.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows, for example, a state of a period from the timing (I) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 537 to the timing (H). The button operation display 800 and the first display 824 are continued, and the effect sound is not output from the speaker 120.

  The timing shown in the figure (g) shows the state of the period of (K)-(L) of the timing chart shown in FIG. 537, for example. Although the button operation display 800 is continued, in addition to that, the second display 826 is displayed, and the state of the button operation display 800 changes from the state A to the state A (timing (K) in FIG. 537). The second display 826 is, for example, a display of the face image of the character (殿) and a balloon “When Chibi Princess Appears”. After that, the effect sound corresponding to the second button operation shown in FIG. 5E is output from the speaker 120 (timing (L) in FIG. 537).

  As mentioned above, in this embodiment, although the case where the production sound corresponding to button operation was output was explained to the example as an example of button operation production, other production may be sufficient. That is, it may be the light emission effect of the lamp L (including the chance button lamp 138) corresponding to the button operation, the operation effect of the movable body, or the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 similarly. The same effect can be obtained.

  As described above, the game console (e.g., pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes the operation means (e.g., chance button 136), the presentation means (e.g., speaker 120), and the control means (e.g., , The first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect means is means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects, and the control means is at least capable of transitioning to a plurality of types of states Means, at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first state, and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a second state, the plurality of types of effects At least one of the first effects (for example, effects including at least an effect sound at the time of button operation in button continuous hit effects), at least one of the plurality of types of effects is (Eg, effects including at least a sound effect at the time of a button operation in a normal button effect), and the first state is a first control (eg, a button when the operation means is operated). In the state where it is possible to execute at least the continuous hitting effect control), and in the second state, at least the second control (for example, the normal button effect control) is executed when the operation means is operated. The first control is a control including at least control for causing the effect means to execute the first effect (for example, button continuous hit effect), and the second control is The control includes at least control for causing the effect means to execute the second effect (for example, normal button effect), and the first control is performed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the operation means. The control to be started, the second control is a control that is started after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the operation means, and the second time is longer than the first time. It is a game console characterized by having a long time.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be made according to the button operation, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In addition, the first state is a state in which transition is made in the case of the button continuous hitting effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect of outputting a sound (hereinafter, referred to as "first sound output effect"). The second effect may be an effect including at least an effect for outputting a sound (hereinafter referred to as “second sound output effect”).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic sense of the effect in the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation.

  Further, in the case of the first state (the button continuous hitting operation effect), the first control causes the first sound output effect to be executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second In the case of the state (normal button operation effect), the second sound output effect is executed after the second time has elapsed since the operation of the chance button 136 by the second control, and the second time is It is a time longer than one time.

  The button continuous hitting operation effect here is the first effect including at least the sound effect (effect sound) at the time of the button operation in the button continuous hitting operation effect, and the normal button operation effect is the button operation in the normal button operation effect This is a second effect including at least sound effects of time. The first control is control that is started after the first time from the operation of the chance button 136 and the second control is after the second time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136 In the control to be started, the second time may be shorter than the first time or may be substantially the same time.

  The second effect also includes sound effects other than sound effects at the time of button operation. In addition, the second effect includes an operation of the movable body and a sound effect accompanying the operation of the movable body. In addition, another sound effect may not be output before the second effect starts after the chance button 136 is operated (prior to the second effect).

  Further, in the case of the first state (the button continuous hitting operation effect), the first sound output effect is executed after the first time has elapsed from the operation of the chance button 136, and the second state (normal button operation In the case of the effect), the second sound output effect is executed after the second time has elapsed since the operation of the chance button 136, and the second time is a time longer than the first time.

  Further, the second sound output effect may be an effect different from the first sound output effect.

  Further, the second sound output effect may be the same effect as the first sound output effect.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of states may be a third state (for example, a demonstration state or a fluctuation gaming state).

  Further, at least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a third effect (for example, a demonstration screen display or a variable display).

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest in response to the button operation. That is, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal blow operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  In the first state, the time from the first button operation (normal button operation) to the start of the effect execution corresponding to the button operation effect (effect start period) is the first time, and in the second state The time from the second button operation (button continuous hitting operation) to the start of effect execution may be the second time, and the first time may be shorter than the second time, or the first time and the second time The time may be the same (same) time.

  Further, the effect start period may be different between the normal button operation effect and the button continuous hitting operation effect.

  In addition, in the case of a button operation effect in which an effect is executed each time the button is operated within the operation reception effective time of the button, the effect start period may be the same for each button operation. In this case, the effect start period for each button operation may be approximately the same period as the effect start period of the normal button operation, or may be longer or shorter than that.

  In addition, the presentation start period may be as long as the presentation start period of the normal button operation presentation only when the last button operation in the button continuous hitting operation presentation is performed.

  In addition, at the time of button continuous hitting operation production, 1st secondary control section 400 transmits the liquid crystal command to liquid crystal control section 700 for every button operation, but liquid crystal control section 700 returns to 1st secondary control section 400 each time and transmits the command Alternatively, depending on the content of the command from the first sub control unit 400, a return command may be transmitted. According to the contents of the command from the first sub-control unit 400, the following can be mentioned as an example of transmitting a return command:

(1) The effect state of the first sub control unit 400 is changed by the button continuous hitting operation, etc.

(2) When it is desired to change the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 by the button continuous hitting operation, a predetermined command is transmitted, and the effect state of the first sub-control unit 400 is changed by the return command for that. Thus, the rendering state in the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the rendering state in the first sub control unit 400 can be matched.

(3) It is a case where the return command is sent at the final point of the effect (at the end of the operation acceptance effective time), whereby the first sub control unit 400 side can obtain the final information of the liquid crystal control unit 700 side. That is, by branching the subsequent processing based on the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side, it is possible to perform rendering in accordance with the final information on the liquid crystal control unit 700 side.

  As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 can allocate the time required for processing of the return command reception to the time for executing other processing by configuring the first secondary control unit 400 not to receive the return command each time the button continuous hitting operation effect is produced. In some cases, other effects (for example, lamp lighting and output of other effect sounds) can be made more elaborate.

  In addition, at the time of button continuous hitting operation production, the effect start period is shorter than that at the time of normal button operation production, and after the button operation operation, it becomes effect sound output in a short time (immediately). The effect sound may overlap, resulting in a more powerful effect.

  In addition, at the time of the button continuous hitting operation production, except for the final round of the button operation, the effect sound is output in a short time (immediately) after the button operation, while the final round of the button operation is from the liquid crystal control unit 700. Since the effect sound is output by the return command, the effect start period is extended only in the final round of the button operation, and as a result, it may be possible to prevent a monotonous effect.

  In addition, when the effect start period is extended (in the case of an ordinary button operation effect or the like), for example, the player may be made to recognize that the time for which the other effect sound that has been output before the button operation can be heard is extended. There is a possibility. Alternatively, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to recognize so that other effect sounds output before the button operation can not be heard during a long effect start period.

  Further, in the button continuous hitting operation effect, a plurality of effect sounds that are continuously output in a short period corresponding to the button operation may be overlapped effects or may be an effect not overlapping.

  In addition, the table of the effect start period held by the first sub control unit 400 is not limited to the configuration in which the length of the effect start period is controlled by transmission and reception of commands between the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700. You may manage and may control the length of a presentation start period (refer FIG. 535 (c)).

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment (Supplementary Note)

  The game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment is a game console provided with operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and effect means (for example, the speaker 120 etc.) for executing effects. The operation unit is a unit capable of receiving a first operation (for example, a normal operation), and the operation unit is a unit capable of receiving a second operation (for example, a button continuous hitting operation), The rendering means is a means capable of executing a first rendering (for example, output of rendering sound) in the first state, and the rendering means is a second rendering (for example, outputting of the rendering sound in the second state) The first state is a state after a first time has elapsed after the operation means receives the first operation, and the second state is After the operation means receives the second operation, A state after the second time has elapsed, the first time and the second time is gaming table characterized by a different time, that.

  With such a configuration, various button operation effects can be made according to the button operation, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

  Moreover, the first time may be longer than the second time. The first operation is an operation operated with a first number of times during the reception period of the operation means, and the second operation is a second number of times during the reception period of the operation means The operation may be an operation, and the first number may be a number smaller than the second number. The second operation may be a continuous operation of the operation means.

That is, when there are a plurality of button operation modes (a first button operation mode and a second button operation mode), the button operation is performed from the button operation by the first button operation mode (for example, normal button operation) The period until the effect corresponding to (for example, the output of the effect sound) (hereinafter, this period is referred to as the effect start period) is the first period, and the button operation by the second button operation mode (for example, button continuous hitting operation) The presentation start period from the second to the presentation corresponding to the button operation (for example, the output of the presentation sound) may be a second period, and the first period may be longer than the second period.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic sense of the effect in the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation.

  In addition, the display device (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is provided, and the display device is a first effect (a first effect based on a button operation) corresponding to the first operation (for example, a normal button operation). Means for displaying the display 820), and the display means displays a second display (for example, a second effect display 822 based on the continuous hitting operation) corresponding to the second operation (for example, the button continuous hitting operation) It is a means that can be displayed, and the effect means (for example, the speaker 120) is a means for starting execution of the first effect (for example, output of effect sound) in accordance with the start of the first display, The effect means may be means for starting execution of the second effect (for example, output of effect sound) before the start of the second display.

  That is, in the normal button operation effect, the effect display period displayed according to the timing of the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation and the normal button operation by lengthening the effect start period Control to match the timing with the effect display of 1) is performed. On the other hand, in the button continuous hit operation production, the effect display period displayed according to the timing of the output of the effect sound corresponding to the button operation (button continuous hit operation) and the button operation (button continuous hit operation) by shortening the effect start period Control is performed such that the timing with the second effect display (based on the continuous hitting operation) is not synchronized (the timing is made different).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest in response to the button operation. That is, in the case of the button continuous hitting operation effect in the case of the button continuous hitting operation, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest by emphasizing the dynamic feeling of the effect as compared with the button operation effect by the normal blow operation. The first display and the second display may be the same display.

  <Other Embodiments (embodiment in which the character change effect is canceled when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character change effect (character determination effect))>

  Next, another embodiment of the present invention (an embodiment in which a predetermined interruption occurs during a character change effect, the embodiment for canceling that effect) (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine) Etc.) will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 542 to FIG. 550 are basically used only in the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in 542 to 550 are given priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the reference numerals not shown in FIG. 542 to FIG. 550 use the same reference numerals as the same constituent elements as the above embodiment. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can.

  FIG. 542 is a diagram for describing an overview of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example of a character change presentation.

  For example, when the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the gaming stand of the present embodiment executes effects such as symbol variation display. Then, when a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of a big hit game, an effect of a bonus game) is started, a character change effect capable of selecting and determining a character to be appeared in the predetermined effect from among a plurality of characters It is feasible. The character change effect is configured to include a character introduction effect and a character selection effect. The character introduction effect displays (in the case where the player moves between the characters with the selection button) by displaying (in sequence) a plurality of characters (effects including the case where the player moves between the characters by the selection button) It refers to an effect that displays an image (temporarily selected image) in a state (temporary selection state) in which selection determination has not been made, and the character selection effect is after selecting and selecting a specific character from a plurality of characters ( An effect to be executed after selection with the enter button.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is judged as a big hit determination), the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 to execute the character change presentation start command to execute the character change presentation Send The first sub control unit 400 having received the character change presentation start command starts the character change presentation when a predetermined condition is established (for example, when the start condition of each round in the big hit game is established).

  The character introduction effect is, for example, sequentially centering a plurality of selectable characters based on acceptance of the operation of the selection button (left button) 136a or the selection button (right button) 136b during execution of the character introduction effect. It is an effect that makes it move and make it stand out. Specifically, as shown in the figure (a), the first character (殿) is the front center of the display area, and the second character (爺) is the rear left, and the third character (キ ャ ラ ク タ) is An image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “temporarily selected image of the first character (ten)”) is displayed that is located respectively in the rear right and makes the first character (ten) in the center of the front stand out clearly If, for example, the operation of the selection button (left button) 136a is accepted while the character introduction effect is being executed, the second character (character (殿)) currently displayed (provisionally selected) is displayed. It is an effect of executing an animation to change to a character (爺).

  In addition, with the character selection effect, as shown in the figure (b), the character currently being temporarily selected (here, the character (爺)) is received based on the fact that the operation of the determination button 136 is accepted during execution of the character introduction effect. Is selected as the character after change, and, for example, a character string of a balloon "I'll put it to you" is displayed, and an effect sound "I'll leave it to you" is outputted from the speaker 120.

  Then, in the normal character change effect, the character is changed to the character determined by the character selection effect, but in the present embodiment, in the character selection effect (the state of FIG. In the case where the game ball wins in the starting opening (for example, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and / or the second special drawing starting opening 232) as shown in, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 In the process, the character selection effect is canceled.

As described above, by making it impossible to change the character until the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, it is possible to secure a sufficient game interval when changing the character, and to suppress the player's irritability. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Example 1 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 543 is an example of a timing chart of character change effect according to the present embodiment, in which processing is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control led by the first sub control unit 400). It is an example. The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change presentation, and the figure (b) shows the timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change presentation. In the same figure, the outline of the effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 is also described. Further, “representation” in the figure indicates a character selection effect, and “operation” indicates an operation of the determination button 136.

  As shown in the figure (a), in the normal effect, the character introduction effect is being executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 at timing (1). In this state, since the character is undecided, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 maintains the state of the character (here, the character A) determined by the previous character change effect. Further, in this example, the character A is in the temporary selection state in the decorative symbol display device 208, but the character of the temporary selection can be moved between the characters A and B by the operation of the selection button. In the meantime, the internal selection state does not change.

  When the operation of the determination button 136 is performed in a state in which the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a and 136b (2), the character selection (determination) effect of the character B is started. When the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends (3), the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated to the character B, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, another effect (for example, a demonstration screen etc.) Is executed (4). Thereafter, the determined character B appears and the game proceeds (5).

In the figure (b), in the state where the character B is temporarily selected by the operation of the selection buttons 136a and 136b as in the figure (a), the operation of the determination button 136 is performed (2). ) Start the production. Then, if an interrupt occurs before the predetermined execution period of the character selection effect ends, the character selection effect is canceled halfway (3). Since the character selection effect is canceled, the determination of the character B is also canceled, and the character A determined last time is also maintained in the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400. Then, the character A appears and the game proceeds (4).
<Example 2 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 544 is an example of a more detailed timing chart of FIG. The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change production, and the figure (b) is an example of a timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change production. Further, “cursor position” in the drawing indicates the position (one of the characters A to C temporarily selected) temporarily selected by the selection buttons 136 a and 136 b.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 Execution of the effect ("C effect" shown) is started. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined to be a character C” from the speaker 120 (4). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” shown in the drawing) of the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (5). When the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 ends (6) and the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the first sub control unit 400 starts the internal selection state from the character A of the previous time. The character C determined this time is updated, and a liquid crystal command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (8). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  As shown in (b) of the figure, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown here).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the character selection of the character C in the first sub control unit 400 Execution of the effect ("C effect" shown) is started. The C effect is, for example, an effect of outputting an effect sound such as “determined to be a character C” from the speaker 120 (4). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command from the first sub-control unit 400 starts executing the character selection effect (“C effect” shown in the drawing) of the character C in the decorative symbol display device 208 (5).

If an interrupt (cancel factor) occurs during execution of the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (6), the first sub control unit 400 cancels the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (cancellation) And transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). Upon receiving the liquid crystal command, the liquid crystal control unit 700 cancels (cancels) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (7). Since the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400 is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the character A determined last time is It is held. Similarly, in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the information of the character A is held.
<Example 3 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 545 is another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example in the case where control is executed based on a command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control led by the liquid crystal control unit 700). The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change presentation, and the figure (b) shows the timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change presentation. Also, FIGS. (C) and (d) are examples of specific effects.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporarily selected state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (3), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 having received this returns a return command. Are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 (4). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to start executing the character selection effect of the character C (5). The first sub-control unit 400 having received the return command executes the character selection effect of the character C in the first sub-control unit 400 (for example, an effect such as outputting an effect sound such as “decided to the character C” from the speaker 120). Start (6). When the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends (7), the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700 from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and performs the first sub control. Return to the unit 400 and transmit a command (8). When the predetermined execution time is over, the first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (8). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the return command, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (9).

  In (b) of the figure, the timings (1) to (6) are the same as (a) in the figure, so explanations will be omitted, and the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be executed. If an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs during the process (7), the first sub control unit 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700. The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command returns to the first sub-control unit 400 and transmits the command (8) to cancel (cancel) the character selection effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 (9). The first sub control unit 400 having received the return command cancels (cancels) the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 (10). Since the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400 is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated to the determined character C, and the information of the character A determined last time is It is held. Similarly, in the internal selection state of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the information of the character A is held.

  FIG. 6C is a view showing an example of the configuration of the effect sound as the character selection effect in the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in the figure, the effect sound consists of the introduction and reproduction unit 850 and the loop reproduction unit 852. In one character selection effect, the introduction and reproduction unit 850 is reproduced once and then the loop reproduction unit 852 is repeated a predetermined number of times. End.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the character selection effect is canceled (cancelled) halfway, for example, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction and reproduction unit 850, the introduction and reproduction unit 850 is cancelled. The loop playback unit 852 also cancels), but if an interrupt occurs during playback of the loop playback unit 852, playback of the loop playback unit 852 may be continued. Further, when an interruption occurs during the reproduction of the introduction and reproduction unit 850, the loop reproduction unit 852 may be canceled without canceling the introduction and reproduction unit 850. As described above, when the effect sound is composed of a plurality of parts, there may be a case where cancellation is not performed and a case where cancellation is performed depending on the part.

  Also, as shown in (d) of the figure, when the playback time is set for each of the effects (sounds A to C), an interruption (from the start of the output of the effect sound to the lapse of the set time) When a cancellation factor occurs, the subsequent output may be cancelled. The reproduction time is an example, and may be shorter than this.

Also, in the figures (c) and (d), the effect sound has been described as an example, but it can be implemented similarly even in the case of animation.
<Example 4 of Timing Chart of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 546 is another example of the timing chart of the character change effect, and is an example in the case where control is executed based on a command from the first sub control unit 400 (control led by the first sub control unit 400). is there. The figure (a) is a case of a normal character change presentation, and the figure (b) shows the timing chart when a predetermined | prescribed interruption exists during execution of a character change presentation.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character A to the character B (1), the first sub control unit A command 400 transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 performs control to change the temporarily selected character A to the character B in the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown).

  Similarly, when the selection buttons 136a and 136b are operated during the character introduction effect and the cursor position (temporarily selected character) moves from the character B to the character C (2), the first sub control unit 400 sends the liquid crystal control unit 700 A liquid crystal command is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the temporarily selected character B to the character C (not shown).

  When the decision button 136 is operated in the temporary selection state of the character C, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time, and causes the liquid crystal control unit 700 to Send a command (3). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command updates the internal selection state from the previous character A to the character C determined this time (4). At this timing, the first sub control unit 400 starts the execution of the character selection effect (4). Thereafter, the liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to start executing the character selection effect of the character C (5). The first sub control unit 400 ends the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 when the predetermined execution time ends (7), and the liquid crystal control unit 700 ends the predetermined execution time. Then, the character selection effect of the liquid crystal control unit 700 is ended (7).

  In the figure (b), the timings (1) to (5) are the same as the figure (a), so the explanation is omitted, and the character selection effect of the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700 is executed. If an interrupt (cancellation factor) occurs during that time, the first sub control unit 400 cancels (cancels) the character selection effect, and transmits a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal control unit 700 (6). The liquid crystal control unit 700 having received the liquid crystal command cancels the character selection effect (7).

In the present embodiment, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is updated at the start of the character selection effect (timing (3)). Further, the liquid crystal control unit 700 updates the internal selection state based on the update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (timing (4)). Therefore, even if an interruption occurs during execution of the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (and the liquid crystal control unit 700) is newly determined. The updated character (here, character C) is maintained. Such a configuration of the character selection effect may be included.
<Example 1 of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 547 is a diagram showing an example of the character change presentation corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 544 (a) in time series.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) shows the state in the change game, the timing shown in the figure (b) shows the state in the change stop, and the figure (c) is a notification to display the menu screen during the change stop. A state is shown in which an image 880 (here, an image imitating the determination button 136 and an image formed of characters such as “menu screen display”) is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (d) shows a state in which the decision button 136 is operated, and a menu screen for setting the volume adjustment, member registration, and character (character) change is displayed.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which character change is selected and a character introduction effect is being executed, and shows a state prior to the timing (1) in FIG. 544 (a). Here, for example, the currently selected (previously determined) character (palm) is displayed bright on the front, the character (princess) is displayed on the right rear and the character (palm) is displayed dark on the left rear.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure is the state in which the selection button 136a is operated, and shows the timing of (1) in FIG. 544 (a).

  The timing shown in the figure (g) is a state in which the character (爺) is selected (provisionally selected) by the operation of the selection button 136a during the character introduction effect, and the timing of (2) in FIG. It shows. The temporarily selected character (爺) is displayed bright on the front, the character (殿) on the right rear and the character (hime) on the left rear.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the determination button 136 is operated, and shows the timing of (3) in FIG. 544 (a). Thus, the character (爺) is selected and determined.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection determination of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 544 (a). The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the character (爺) brightly on the front and also performs a character selection effect to display a character of a balloon of "Wait for a while !!", and the first sub control The part 400 outputs the effect sound of "I'll leave it to you!" From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state immediately before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and shows the timing from (6) to (7) in FIG. 544 (a).

The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state where the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends and the menu screen shown in (d) of the figure is displayed again.

The timings shown in (l) and (m) in FIG. 6 indicate that the starting opening (eg, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and / or the second special drawing starting opening 232 etc.) is displayed while the menu screen shown in FIG. ) Shows that the game ball has won a prize ((l) in the same figure), and the next variation game has started ((m) in the same figure).
<Example 2 of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 548 is a diagram showing an example of the character change presentation corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 544 (b) in time series.

  Since the timing shown to the same figure (a)-(h) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 547 (a)-(h), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection determination of the character (爺), and shows the timing of (5) in FIG. 544 (b). The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the character (爺) brightly on the front and also performs a character selection effect to display a character of a balloon of "Wait for a while !!", and the first sub control The part 400 outputs the effect sound of "I'll leave it to you!" From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which the game ball is won in the starting opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing of (6) in FIG. It shows.

The timing shown to the figure (k) has shown the timing after (7) of FIG. 544 (b). That is, the character selection effect is canceled on the way, and the state where the fluctuation game accompanying the winning of the starting opening is started is shown.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined interrupt occurs during execution of the character selection effect, the character selection effect is canceled. In this example, the detection of the winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening or the start of the fluctuation game based thereon) is the interruption factor. In the character selection effect, the effect display by the liquid crystal control unit 700 is also stopped, and the effect sound by the first sub control unit 400 is also stopped ((i) in the figure).
<Example 3 of Character Change Effect>

  FIG. 549 is a diagram sequentially showing another example of the character change presentation corresponding to the second embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG. 544 (b).

  Since the timing shown to the same figure (a)-(h) is the same as the timing shown to FIG. 547 (a)-(h), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure are the states in which the character selection effect is being executed by the selection determination of the character (爺), and show the timing of (5) in FIG. 544 (b). . The liquid crystal control unit 700 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the character (爺) brightly on the front and also performs a character selection effect to display a character of a balloon of "Wait for a while !!", and the first sub control The part 400 outputs the effect sound of "I'll leave it to you!" From the speaker 120 to execute the character selection effect.

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure is a state in which the game ball is won in the starting opening before the predetermined execution time of the character selection effect ends, and the timing of (6) in FIG. It shows.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure indicates the timing after (7) in FIG. 544 (b). That is, the character selection effect is canceled on the way, and the state where the fluctuation game accompanying the winning of the starting opening is started is shown.

  As shown in (i) and (j) of the figure, there may be a case where the character selection effect is canceled in the middle of the effect (see FIG. 545 (c)) or the like in which the effect sound is repeatedly reproduced.

  FIG. 550 shows an example of the various setting screen. Instead of the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 543 (a), the setting screen may be displayed.

  (A) to (c) are a display example where the menu screen display is suggested after the change stop (the same figure (a)), a display example of the menu screen based on it (the same figure (b)), and a menu screen The example of a display of the selected setting screen (the figure (c)). Further, the setting screens of (d) to (g) of FIG. 6 may be displayed as selection items of the menu screen (setting screen corresponding to (c) of FIG. Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 (h) and 5 (i), it is assumed that setting screens (FIGS. 6 (i) to 6 (k) etc. are displayed without the intervention of the menu screen (FIG. 6 (b)). It is also good.

  As described above, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes an operation means (for example, decision button 136), a rendering means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), and a control means (for example, , The first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects, and the control means is at least changeable to a plurality of types of states At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect relating to the selected one), and at least one of the plurality of types of states is a first effect. A selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed (a state in which the character A is selected in the temporary selection state, a state in which no character is selected, etc.)) At least one of the plurality of types of states is a second selection state (for example, a state in which a character selection effect is being executed), and the effect means is configured to execute the first condition when the first condition is met. The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated, and the control means is the first case. First control (control for changing the first selection state to the second selection state, control for changing the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 (for example, changing the non-selection state to the character B Or means for performing at least control to change the character A to the character B, execution control of character selection effect, etc.), and the control means is means for not performing at least the first control in the second case. The first control is at least control including control to change the first selected state to the second selected state, and in the first case, the final first condition is satisfied In the second case, the second condition is established before the first time elapses from the establishment of the first condition (design fluctuation start, big hit) In the case of the next R start in the selection effect of the end, the end of the R concerned, the end of the big hit / small hit, passing the game ball to the gate for operating the feature continuous actuation device), the first effect is It is an effect to be started before the first time period elapses from the establishment of the first condition.

  In addition, after the big hit symbol is stopped, the service product actuating device operating gate is a mechanism serving as a trigger for opening the attacker. After the jackpot symbol is stopped, the condition device is activated, and when the game ball passes the gate for operating the item continuous operation device, processing such as opening the attacker is performed by operating the item continuous operation device. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can. In addition, the player is ended by the elapse of the effect period for which the character selection effect is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400) Can recognize that the In other words, when the character selection effect is canceled (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 It can be recognized that the player can not change the character (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) before the player notices.

  Further, the first effect is an effect relating to the second selection state (for example, a character selection effect to be executed before the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is changed (updated)), and the character selection Also included are speeches and sound effects specific to the selected character (character B) to be executed at the time of presentation. The effects relating to the second selection state also include speeches and sound effects specific to (character B) in the case where the cursor is moved from character A to character B (temporary selection state).

  Further, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of outputting a sound. Further, the first effect may be an effect including at least an effect of displaying an image.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can.

  Further, the control means may be means for not changing at least the second selected state in the second case.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can. In addition, the player is ended by the elapse of the effect period for which the character selection effect is scheduled by displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400) Can recognize that the In other words, when the character selection effect is canceled (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 It can be recognized that the player can not change the character (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) before the player notices.

  Further, the second condition may be a condition that may be satisfied when symbol variation display is performed. Here, the symbol variation display also includes the rotation start of the reel of the slot machine.

  In addition, at least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of symbol variation display), and the effect means is of the second condition (for example, symbol variation start condition) It may be a means capable of at least starting execution of the second effect when it is established.

  With such a configuration, the player changes the character (the first sub-control unit) when the character selection effect is canceled and the symbol variation display or the like is started (without another demonstration screen or setting screen being displayed). Since it can be recognized that the update of the internal selection state of 400 has not been performed, occurrence of a situation where a character change (update of the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400) is performed without the player being aware It can be reduced.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine.

  The game stand of the present embodiment cancels the effect when a predetermined interrupt occurs during the effect (character change effect) executed when the character is changed, and in particular, during the character change effect If a predetermined interruption occurs during the character selection effect to be executed after the character is selected and determined, the selection is canceled. In addition, when a predetermined interruption occurs during the character introduction effect which makes the player recognize the selectable character during the character change effect, the effect may be canceled.

  The predetermined interruption is, for example, the start of symbol variation (special figure variation), and when the symbol variation starts during the character change presentation (in particular, the character selection presentation after the character is selected and determined), the character change is cancelled. . By making it impossible to change the character until the end of the symbol variation, it may be possible to hold the gambling feeling by opening a game interval when changing the character.

  In addition, with "predetermined interruption" which becomes a cancellation factor of character selection production, winning a prize to special figure starting port (for example, 1st special figure starting port 230 and / or 2nd special figure starting port 232), random number Acquisition, command transmission to first sub control unit 400, command reception of first sub control unit 400, command analysis of first sub control unit 400, execution processing of the command (for example, command transmission to liquid crystal control unit 700) The command reception of the liquid crystal control unit 700, the command analysis of the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the execution processing of the command are performed (detected).

  Further, the cancellation factor of the character selection effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a predetermined process in the liquid crystal control unit 700 such as an execution process of a command in the liquid crystal control unit 700 in the predetermined interrupt.

  The cause of cancellation of the internal information update (update of internal selection information) of the first sub-control unit 400 is determined by the predetermined process in the first sub-control unit 400, such as command execution processing in the first sub-control unit 400. Included in the interrupt.

  In addition, after the character selection determination operation by the determination button 136, the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 and / or the liquid crystal control unit 700 may change immediately. For example, if a character change effect starts in a certain round (for example, the 5th R) in the jackpot game and the character is selected and determined (changed from the character A to the character B) and the character selection effect is being executed, In the sub-control unit 400, the internal selection state is updated to the changed character (character B). Then, even if the interruption such as the change start occurs during the character selection effect and the character selection effect is canceled, the next round (for example, the sixth round) (because the internal selection state has been updated) In this case, character change may be completed (character B is selected).

  The character selection effect has a plurality of effect units (effect unit of the former stage and effect unit of the latter stage), and is canceled by a predetermined interruption during the effect execution of the former effect unit, but the effect execution of the latter stage effecter A predetermined interrupt in the middle may not be canceled. In addition, it is not canceled by the predetermined interruption during the rendering operation of the former stage rendering unit, but may be canceled by the predetermined interruption during the rendering operation of the latter stage rendering unit, either during the effect executing of any one of the former stage and the latter stage The predetermined interrupt may be canceled. For example, when the effect is the effect sound output from the speaker 120, the effect section at the front stage is an introduction section, and the effect section at the rear stage is a loop section.

  Further, although the present embodiment is configured to cancel the character selection effect when there is a predetermined interruption during the character selection effect (during the predetermined effect execution time), strictly speaking, the actual effect execution time is Also included is a configuration that cancels the character selection effect (update of the internal selection state) also when a predetermined interrupt (cancel factor) occurs near the end. That is, in consideration of the time required for command transmission / reception between the control units (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the liquid crystal control unit 700), the character selection effect is produced when the cancellation factor occurs in the actual effect execution time + α. Also includes those that cancel.

  In addition, in the configuration in which processing is performed based on the return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (control is led by the liquid crystal control unit 700), the first sub control unit 400 detects the operation of the determination button 136 and When the liquid crystal command is sent to 700, and the main control unit 300 starts to change before the first sub-control unit 400 receives the corresponding return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 (when a predetermined interrupt occurs) ) May cancel the character selection effect.

  Specific examples in the case of canceling the character selection effect are listed below. For example, the character (殿) is selected and determined in the previous character change presentation, the current character change presentation is started from the character (殿), and the character is operated by the player operation (selection button 136a, 136b operation) in the character introduction presentation this time. (爺) is selected, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (selection button 136a, 136b operation) in the character introduction effect of this time, and the character (princess) is selected by the player operation (decision button 136) If the effect is determined during the execution of the character selection effect, the character selection state includes the following cases:

(1) The character (princess) selected and determined before the termination condition is satisfied (before the cancellation factor occurs) becomes the selected character that has been changed

(2) Character change character (previous character) which is determined at the start of the character change effect becomes the selected character which has been changed (3) previous character character (the character) becomes the selected character which has been changed

(4) The character as a default character when there is no player operation becomes a selected character as a changed character (5) Neither character is selected.

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. Note that the following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment (Supplementary Note)

  The game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, the determination button 136) capable of accepting selection operation by the player. It is a game console provided, and the effect means is means capable of executing a selection state effect (for example, a character introduction effect) during a selection effect period (for example, a character change effect), and a plurality of the selection state effects The effect means indicates that the selected image is in the selected state, and the effect means can execute the selection decision effect (for example, the character selection effect) when the selection operation is performed during the execution of the selected state effect. The selection determination effect is an effect indicating one image (hereinafter, referred to as “selected image”) selected from the plurality of images, and the effect means If an interrupt condition during the selection decision demonstration execution is met (for example, if the symbol variable display has started) to a means to cancel the selection decision effect, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to change the character until the effect due to the interruption factor is ended, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the player's irritability There are times when you can.

  In addition, storage means (for example, the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400) capable of storing information on the selected image determined by the selection operation is provided, and the storage means stores the information in the first case. The storage means is means for not storing the information in the second case, and the first case is a case where a predetermined effect execution time of the selection determination effect has elapsed, The second case may be a case where the interrupt condition is satisfied while the selection determination effect is being executed. Further, the rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is a means capable of displaying a first display in the first case, and the first display suggests the end of the selection determination effect It may be a display (for example, a demonstration screen, a setting screen, etc.).

  That is, when a predetermined period (effect execution time) of the character selection effect has passed, the first sub-control unit 400 displays another demonstration screen or setting screen, and then the first sub-control unit 400. The internal selection state in is updated, and the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 is not updated by canceling the character selection effect when a predetermined interrupt occurs during execution of the character selection effect. I assume.

  With such a configuration, the player is ended by the elapse of the effect period for which the character selection effect is scheduled, by the display of another demonstration screen or setting screen, and the character is changed (the first sub control unit 400 It can be recognized that the update of the internal selection state of has been completed. In other words, when the character selection effect is canceled (without displaying another demonstration screen or setting screen) and the symbol variation display is started, the player changes the character (updates the internal selection state of the first sub control unit 400 It can be recognized that the player can not change the character (update of the internal selection state of the first sub-control unit 400) before the player notices.

  In addition, at least one winning opening (for example, the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, etc.) is provided, and the interruption condition is a condition based on the game ball winning in the winning opening. , May be. Further, the game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the character change impossible until the effect of the symbol variation display is finished, and when changing the character, keep the game interval open and hold down the shooting ability of the player. There are times when you can.

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means can display at least a second display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display regarding a hold,
The first display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state in the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The first display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means can display at least a second display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display regarding a hold,
The second display is a display capable of animation display,
The first display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state in the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The first display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Display means,
Operation means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means can display at least a second display,
The first display is a display related to the operation means,
The second display is a display regarding a hold,
The second display is a display capable of moving the display position when there is a change in the number of reservations.
The first display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state in the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The first state is a state in which the second display does not overlap the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The first display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of the second displays.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display relates to the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second period when a display condition is satisfied.
The second period is a period longer than the first period,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation unit is operated.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The first display is a display including at least a meter display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 2,
The meter display is a display that can at least change the display mode according to the passage of time.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is effect display,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 4,
The display means is a means capable of at least starting display of the second display when the display condition is satisfied.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 5,
The operation means is a means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 6,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 6,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display in a second display area,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display in a third display area,
The first display relates to the operation means,
The second display is a display regarding the operation means,
At least a part of the display area of the first display area (hereinafter referred to as "fourth display area") is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the third display area,
At least a part of the display area of the second display area (hereinafter, referred to as “fifth display area”) is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the third display area,
The second display area is a display area larger than the first display area.
The fifth display area is a display area larger than the fourth display area.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is the third display,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The display means is means capable of at least starting display of the first display while the third display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The display means is means capable of at least starting display of the third display while the first display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is a means capable of at least starting display of the second display while the third display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is means capable of at least starting display of the third display while the second display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 6,
The third display is a display in which in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the first display overlaps at least a portion of the third display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
It is a game console described in Appendix 7 or 8,
The first state is a state in which at least a portion of the first display does not overlap at least a portion of the third display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9, wherein
In the fourth state, the third display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the third state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 10,
The fourth state is a state in which at least a portion of the second display overlaps at least a portion of the third display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 10 or 11,
The third state is a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the third display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 10 to 12,
The third display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower in the fourth state than in the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The first display is a display including at least a meter display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 15)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 14,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display in a first display area,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display in a second display area,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display in a third display area,
The first display relates to the operation means,
The second display is an effect display,
The third display is a symbol display,
The display area of at least a part of the second display area is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the first display area,
The display area of at least a part of the third display area is a display area overlapping the display area of at least a part of the first display area.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is the second display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is the third display,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The display means is a means capable of at least starting display of the second display while the first display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The display means is means capable of at least starting display of the first display while the second display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is means capable of at least starting display of the first display while the third display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is means capable of at least starting display of the third display while the first display is displayed.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 6,
The first display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state in the second state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
The second state is a state in which at least a portion of the second display overlaps at least a portion of the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
It is a game console described in Appendix 7 or 8,
The first state is a state in which at least a portion of the second display does not overlap at least a portion of the first display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9, wherein
In the fourth state, the third display is a display in which the visibility is at least lower than that in the third state.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 10,
The fourth state is a state in which at least a portion of the first display overlaps at least a portion of the third display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 10 or 11,
The third state is a state in which at least a portion of the first display does not overlap at least a portion of the third display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The first display is a display including at least a meter display.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display relates to the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first mode,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a second mode,
The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is operated automatically.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The first display is a display including at least a display prompting the player to operate the operation means.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is effect display,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the display condition is satisfied.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 4,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the first mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is a game console described in Appendix 4 or 5,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated in the second mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 4 to 6,
The display condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated in the second mode.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7, wherein
The operation means is a means provided at least at a position where the player can operate.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
When a predetermined transition condition is established, a second advantage is a second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from a first control state where the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means for transitioning the control state to the control state;
Effect display means for displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Storage means for storing specific image information capable of specifying an image selected by the player from a plurality of images during a predetermined image selection effect period;
Effect control means for causing the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means;
An operation receiving unit for receiving a selection operation by a player;
The image selection effect period includes a predetermined first period and a predetermined second period starting after the start of the first period,
The effect control means is
The specific image information for specifying an image to be displayed on the effect display means is stored in the storage means based on the selection operation by the player received by the operation reception unit during the second period.
If the predetermined condition for ending the image selection effect period is satisfied before the predetermined condition for starting the second period is satisfied, the predetermined image is selected from the plurality of images instead of the player. The image display apparatus is selected, and the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display means.
Game console

(Supplementary Note 2)
The effect control means is
The selection operation by the player received by the operation reception unit during the first period is ignored.
The gaming machine described in Appendix 1

(Supplementary Note 3)
It has a variable winning opening that can change the open / close state from one of the predetermined closed state and one of the predetermined open states which makes winning of the gaming ball easier than the closed state,
The second control state is
It is a control state in which a round operation of changing the open / close state of the variable winning opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state is performed a predetermined number of times
The first control state is
It is a control state in which the round operation is not performed,
The ending condition of the image selection presentation period is
The invention is characterized in that it is established when the number of gaming balls that have won in the variable winning opening since the start of the specific round operation in the second control state is equal to or more than the specific number.
The gaming machine described in Appendix 1 or 2

(Supplementary Note 4)
A launcher that launches game balls at predetermined intervals after a predetermined launch period based on the player's operation;
And a game area provided with the variable winning hole and causing the game ball fired by the launch device to flow down;
The first period is
Characterized in that the period is shorter than the period required to launch a specific number of the game balls,
Appendix 3 game stand

(Supplementary Note 5)
A plurality of said variable winning openings,
The game nail which gives change to the direction of the fall of the game ball,
Providing in the game area an entry area for the game ball launched by the launch device to enter;
The plurality of variable winning openings are:
Including a first variable winning opening and a second variable winning opening,
The game nail is
From the number of game nails that may come into contact before the game ball entered from the entry area reaches the second variable winning opening, the game ball entering from the entry area enters the first variable winning opening It is arranged to increase the number of game nails that can be touched before reaching
The particular round action is
It is a round operation that changes the open / close state of the first variable winning opening a predetermined number of times during the second control state,
The game stand as described in Supplementary Note 3 or 4.

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Display means capable of at least display of an image;
Control means capable of at least controlling the display means;
Storage means capable of storing information;
Operation means operable by the player;
A game console equipped with
The display means is at least capable of performing a selection effect.
The display means is capable of displaying a first selection state image during the selection effect,
The display means can display a second selection state image during the selection effect,
The display means can display a third selection state image during the selection effect,
The display means can display a first selection change animation during the selection effect,
The display means can display a second selection change animation during the selection effect,
The first selected state image at least indicates that the selected image is a first image,
The second selected state image at least indicates that the selected image is a second image,
The third selected state image at least indicates that the selected image is a third image,
The first selection change animation indicates at least a mode in which the selected image is changed from the first image to the second image,
The second selection change animation indicates at least a mode in which the selected image is changed from the second image to the third image,
The selected image is an image in a selected state,
The control means is at least capable of performing control for accepting a selection operation,
The selection operation indicates an operation performed by the player using the operation means,
The control means is capable of at least performing the first control when receiving the selection operation during the first period,
The display means is capable of displaying the first selected state image during the first period,
The first control is control for displaying the second selection state image on the display means after the first selection change animation,
The control means is capable of at least executing the second control when receiving the selection operation during the second period,
The display means can display the first selection change animation during the second period,
The second control is control for stopping the display of the first selection change animation and displaying the third selection state image on the display means after the second selection change animation.
The storage means is capable of storing first information when the selection operation is accepted by the control means during the selection effect.
The storage unit is capable of storing second information when the selection operation is not accepted by the control unit during the selection effect.
The first information is information corresponding to the selected image,
The second information is information corresponding to any one of a plurality of images selectable by the player during the selection effect.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The second control stops the display of the first selection change animation, does not display the second selection state image, and the third selection state image after the second selection change animation. Control to be displayed on the display means,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
A control state transition unit capable of transitioning the control state to any one of a plurality of control states including at least the first control state and the second control state when the transition condition is satisfied;
The first control state is an advantage to the player of the first advantage,
The second control state has a second advantage over the player.
The second advantage is higher than the first advantage,
It has a variable winning opening whose state can be changed from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The second state is a game ball easier to win than the first state,
The second control state is a control state in which at least a round operation in which the variable winning opening becomes at least the second state can be performed,
The first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed,
The establishment of the termination condition of the period of the selection effect at least includes the case where a specific number of gaming balls have been won at the variable winning opening after the specific round operation in the second control state is started,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is a game stand according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The second information is information corresponding to the selected image.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game stand according to any one of Appendices 1 to 3,
The second information is information stored in the storage means in the previous selection effect.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The number of selection state images that can be displayed during the selection effect is four or more.
Game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The number of selection change animations that can be displayed during the selection effect is three or more.
A game stand characterized by

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
When a predetermined transition condition is established, a second advantage is a second advantage that is higher than the first advantage from a first control state where the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means for transitioning the control state to the control state;
Effect display means for displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Storage means for storing specific image information capable of specifying an image selected by the player from a plurality of images during a predetermined image selection effect period;
Effect control means for causing the effect display means to display an image specified by the specific image information stored in the storage means;
An operation receiving unit for receiving a selection operation by a player;
During the image selection effect period, a selection state image indicating that a predetermined image among the plurality of images is in a selected state is displayed on the effect display means.
When the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player when the selected image indicates that the predetermined image is in the selected state, a predetermined selection change animation is displayed on the effect display means, and then the selected image is displayed. The selected state image indicating that an image different from the predetermined image among the plurality of images is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means.
The specific image information capable of specifying an image in a selected state when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied is configured to be stored in the storage unit;
In the case where the selected state image indicating that a specific image is in the selected state after the selection change animation is displayed on the effect display means based on the operation receiving unit receiving the selection operation by the player. When the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the effect display means displays the selection state image indicating that an image different from the specific image is in a selection state after the selection change animation. Characterized by displaying,
Game console

(Supplementary Note 2)
The selection change is performed based on the fact that the operation reception unit receives a selection operation by the player when the selected state image indicating that the predetermined before change image is in the selected state is displayed on the effect display means. The selected state image indicating that a predetermined post-change image is in a selected state after displaying an animation is configured to be displayed on the effect display means.
The selection change animation includes the post-change image,
When the operation receiving unit receives a selection operation by the player during the selection change animation, the image after the change in the selection change animation is indicated as being in a selected state by the selection state image after the animation. Characterized by replacing it with
The gaming machine described in Appendix 1

(Supplementary Note 3)
It has a variable winning opening that can change the open / close state from one of the predetermined closed state and one of the predetermined open states which makes winning of the gaming ball easier than the closed state,
The second control state is
It is a control state in which a round operation of changing the open / close state of the variable winning opening a predetermined number of times from the closed state to the open state is performed a predetermined number of times
The first control state is
It is a control state in which the round operation is not performed,
The ending condition of the image selection presentation period is
The invention is characterized in that it is established when the number of gaming balls that have won in the variable winning opening since the start of the specific round operation in the second control state is equal to or more than the specific number.
The gaming machine described in Appendix 1 or 2

(Supplementary Note 4)
A launcher that launches game balls at predetermined intervals after a predetermined launch period based on the player's operation;
And a game area provided with the variable winning hole and causing the game ball fired by the launch device to flow down;
The playback time of the selection change animation is
It is characterized in that it is a period longer than the launch period,
Appendix 3 game stand

(Supplementary Note 5)
The image selection effect period is
A first period and a second period starting later than the first period,
During the first period, the selection operation during the selection change animation is ignored;
During the second period, an image indicated as being in a selected state by the selected state image is changed based on the selection operation in the selection change animation.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4.

  The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the above-described embodiment.

(Supplementary Note 1)
Display means capable of at least display of an image;
Control means capable of at least controlling the display means;
Storage means capable of storing information;
Operation means operable by the player;
A game console equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing information capable of specifying an image in a selected state when a determination condition is satisfied.
The display means is at least capable of performing a selection effect.
The display means can display at least a first selection state image indicating that the first image is in a selection state;
The display means can display at least a second selection state image indicating that the second image is in a selection state,
The display means can display at least a third selection state image indicating that the third image is in a selection state,
The display means can display at least a first selection change animation for changing a selection state from the first image to the second image;
The display means is capable of at least displaying a second selection change animation for changing a selection state from the second image to the third image;
The display means can display the first selection state image during execution of the selection effect,
The display means displays the first selection change animation and then displays the second selection state image when the operation means receives a selection operation by the player while the first selection state image is being displayed. It can be displayed,
When the operation means receives a selection operation by the player while the first selection change animation is being displayed, the display means stops displaying the first selection change animation and changes the second selection. It is possible to display the third selected state image after displaying the animation,
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
When the operation means receives a selection operation by the player while the first selection change animation is being displayed, the display means stops displaying the first selection change animation and the second selection state It is possible to display the third selected state image after displaying the second selection change animation without displaying an image.
Game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
When the transition condition is established, the first control state in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage and the second advantage that is the second advantage that is higher than the first advantage Control state transition means capable of shifting the control state to any of a plurality of control states including the control state;
The game machine further comprises a variable winning opening capable of changing the state from one of the first state and the second state in which the game ball can be more easily winning than the first state,
The second control state is a control state in which at least a round operation in which the variable winning opening becomes at least the second state can be performed,
The first control state is a control state in which the round operation is not performed,
The establishment of the termination condition of the period of the selection effect at least includes the case where a specific number of gaming balls have been won at the variable winning opening after the specific round operation in the second control state is started,
A game stand characterized by

The embodiment and various modifications described above can be implemented in combination with each other.
<Effect that the operation becomes invalid>

Next, although the effect that the operation becomes invalid will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 551 to 557, first, the basic concept of the effect that the operation becomes invalid will be described using FIG. 551.
<Effect / Invalid concept of invalid operation>

FIG. 551 is a diagram for explaining the basic concept of an effect whose operation is invalidated. A gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 199) includes an operating means and a display means.
<Effect / Invalid Concept / Operating Means of Invalidating Operation>

  The “operation means” included in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a means provided at a position at which the player or the like can at least operate, and, for example, of the chance button (effect button) 136 as shown in FIG. In addition, the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, the ball firing handle 134 shown in FIG. 1, the ball removing button 130 shown in FIG. 1, a touch panel not shown, a ball discharging lever, a ball lending operation button, a return operation button, and a touch A sensor etc. correspond.

  The shape of the operation means is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, any of a button shape, a stick shape, and a lever shape. In addition, the game console may have one or two operation means (first operation means and second operation means different from the first operation means). , May be three or more. In addition, the operation means may be one incorporating a light emitting means (for example, an LED) or may be used in combination with a separate light emitting means (for example, an LED).

  Further, the structure or function of the operating means is not particularly limited. For example, the operating means capable of oscillating, operating means capable of advancing and retracting in a predetermined direction, operating means capable of curing, operating means rotatable in a predetermined direction, The operation means may include a light output means (for example, an LED) capable of blinking and lighting, an operation means provided with a wind output means capable of delivering a wind, and an operation means capable of projecting. Also, the operation means may have any one of these functions, or may have any two or more functions. Moreover, it may not have any one function, and may not have any two or more functions.

  Further, the operation means may be configured by a plurality of operation units (four buttons in the upper, lower, left and right and one determination button) as in the setting operation unit 137 described above. In this case, all of the plurality of operation units (The four buttons (upper, lower, left, and right buttons and one determination button) may be defined as operation means according to the present invention, or at least one of a plurality of operation units (for example, upper and lower two buttons, or One determination button may be defined as the operation means of the present invention.

  Moreover, when the operation means includes a plurality of operation units, the case where the first operation unit (for example, the two left and right buttons) which is one of the plurality of operation units can be operated, and the plurality of operation units The function by the operation means may be made different depending on the case where the second operation unit (for example, four buttons in the upper, lower, left, and right directions and one determination button) which is one of the above can be operated.

In addition, the operation by the operation means includes pushing, pulling, tilting up and down, tilting to right and left, pushing in, twisting (rotating), tapping etc. The operation mode of the operation means is one operation or plural times. The operation (for example, continuous hit) or the operation for a predetermined time (for example, long press) may be used.
<Effect / Invalid Concept / Display Means of Invalidating Operation>

  The "display means" included in the gaming table according to the present example is means capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and, for example, in addition to the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 as shown in FIG. A dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector, etc. correspond.

  In addition, the display means according to the present embodiment displays (first display) which is started according to the operation (when the operation by the operation means is accepted) (or when the operation according to the operation is received At least the effect to be started (first effect) and the display (second display) including an image (first image) indicating the appearance of the operation means can be performed.

  For example, the display DP1 shown in FIG. 551 (b-3) is a display (first display) started in response to the operation of the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) or the operating means (in this example) , A chance button 136) is an example of an effect (first effect) started in response to the operation.

  Note that the first display is not limited to the display of the character image of this example, and may be, for example, a notice display for giving a notice of an advantageous result (for example, a big hit or BB) for the player. ) May be displayed, or may be a display notifying of a change in gaming state (for example, probability change promotion, increase in probability of replay role), or a special game (for example, a big hit game, BB game) It may be a display notifying the start or may be a display of a prefetch notice.

  Similarly, the first effect is not limited to the effect including the display of the character image of the present example, and is, for example, the effect including the notice display for notifying the player of an advantageous result (for example, a big hit or BB). It may be an effect including a notice display of false (gasse), or may be an indication including notification of a change in the gaming state (e.g., a probability change promotion, an increase in the probability of a replay role), It may be an effect including a display for informing the start of a special game (for example, a big hit game, a BB game), or an effect including a display of advance notice.

  Further, a display DP2 shown in FIG. 551 (a-1), FIG. 5 (a-3), and FIG. 5 (b-1) is an image BG showing an appearance of the operation means (chance button 136 in this example). This is an example of a display (a second display) including a first image (in this example, a button image).

Note that the second display is not limited to the display including only the button image BG of the present example, and for example, a meter image representing the remaining time of the effective time in which the operation by the operation means can be received. e) reference may be displayed, or a promotion image (for example, an image including the characters “PUSH !!” and “press me”) may be displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation by the operation means. In addition, when the second display includes a plurality of images, the display timing of each image may be different or the same.
<Operation / basic concept / first state, second state where the operation is invalid>

  The gaming machine according to this example can be in a plurality of types of states. Further, one of the plural types of states is a state (first state) in which the first display is not performed when the operation means is operated, and the other of the plural types of states is One state is a state (second state) in which the first display is performed when the operation means is operated.

  For example, in the states shown in FIGS. 551 (a-1) to (a-3), the first display DP1 is not performed when the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is operated. It is an example of (first state). In other words, in the first state, the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is invalidated, and the first display DP1 is not performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. (A-1), the second display DP2 is in the first state (states shown in FIG. 551 (a-1) to FIG. (A-3)). It is a display that may be displayed.

  The first state is not limited to this example. For example, when the setting or non-setting of the above-mentioned auto button mode is further added as a condition, and the auto button mode is set, the operation means is operated. The first display may not be performed, or the first display may not be performed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set.

  On the other hand, in the states shown in FIGS. 551 (b-1) to (b-3), the first display DP1 is performed when the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is operated A second state). In other words, in the second state, the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is effective, and the first display DP1 is performed.

  Further, as shown in (b-1) of the same figure, the second display DP2 is also in the second state (the state shown in (b-1) in FIG. 551 to (b-3) in the same figure). , Is a display that may be displayed.

  The second state is not limited to this example. For example, when the setting or non-setting of the above-mentioned auto button mode is further added as a condition and the operation of the operation means is performed while setting the auto button mode. The first display DP1 may be performed, or the first display DP1 may be performed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. In addition, when an effective time in which an operation can be accepted by the operation means has passed (when the first state in which the acceptance of the operation is effective shifts to a second state in which the acceptance of the operation is invalid), the first The display DP1 may be performed.

  Also, the game console has a first operation means (for example, chance button 136) and a second operation means different from the first operation means (for example, second chance button 810 (back button shown in FIG. 530) In the first state, when there is an operation of the first operation means, the first display DP1 is not performed, and the second state has an operation of the second operation means. In this case, the first display DP1 may not be performed, and the first state may be a state in which the first display DP1 is not performed when the first operation means is operated, When the second operation means is operated, the first display DP1 may or may not be performed.

In addition, the game console is provided with a first operation means (for example, chance button 136) and a second operation means (for example, back button 810 shown in FIG. 530) different from the first operation means. In the second state, in the case where the first operation means is operated, the first display DP1 may be performed (or is always performed), and the second state of the second operation means The first display DP1 may be performed (or always performed) when an operation is performed, or the second state may be a case where the first operation means is operated. While the first display DP1 may be performed (or always performed), the first display DP1 may not be performed when the second operation means is operated.
<Effect / Tutorial display for which the operation is invalid>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 552 and FIG. 553, an example in which tutorial display is performed in an effect in which the operation is invalidated will be described. FIG. 552 is a diagram illustrating an example in which tutorial display is performed in an effect in which an operation is invalidated in time series.

  The gaming table according to the present embodiment includes an operation means (chance button 136) and a display means (decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means (decorative symbol display device 208) holds the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c and An icon display area 208d, a variation icon display area 208e, and a fourth symbol display area 208f are configured.

  The decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are display areas capable of fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and the pending icon display area 208d is a display area capable of displaying a pending icon indicating the number of pending special game variable game. In addition, the fluctuation icon display area 208e is a display area capable of displaying a fluctuation icon capable of notifying of the result of the special figure fluctuation game, and the fourth symbol display area 208f indicates execution and stop of the special figure fluctuation game It is a display area which can display possible 4th design.

  The state shown in (a) of the figure is the state in which the fluctuation is stopped. Here, the stop display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the stop of the special figure change game is notified in the fourth symbol display area 208f. In addition, by displaying four suspension icons in the suspension icon display area 208d, it is notified that the number of suspension of special figure fluctuation games is four.

  The state shown in the same figure (b) is the state which started the change display. Here, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the execution of the special figure fluctuation game is notified in the fourth symbol display area 208f. In addition, by deleting one pending icon in the pending icon display area 208d, it is notified that the number of pending special game variations is reduced from 4 to 3.

  A state shown in the same figure (c) is a reach state in which two similar decorative symbols are stopped during the variable display. Here, the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front view, and the reach display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . In the same state, the hold icon display area 208d and the variation icon display area 208e are erased.

  The state shown to the same figure (d) is a state which is performing the tutorial display during reach. Here, a tutorial display is performed on the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a front view.

  Here, the tutorial display is a display (third display) related to the first state described above. In the tutorial display (third display) of this example, the game console is in the first state by displaying an image including the characters “If the button does not work ~”, that is, the chance button 136 It is suggested to the player that the display started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed (the operation by the chance button 136 is invalidated) when there is the operation of.

  The state shown to the same figure (e) which is continuing is a state which transfers to a 1st state and is performing the 2nd display in this 1st state.

  As described above, the second display is a display including an image (first image) showing the appearance of the operation means. In the state shown in FIG. 6E, as the second display, the second display DP2 including the button image BG indicating the appearance of the operation means (chance button 136) is performed. Further, together with the display of the second display DP2, a meter image MG representing an effect of lighting the operation means (chance button 136) and a remaining time of an effective time in which an operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is acceptable. And the promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means (chance button 136).

  In the state shown in the same figure (f), the operating means (chance is maintained while the first state shown in the figure (e) is continued and the second display DP2 is displayed and the chance button 136 is lit. An operation by the button 136) is received.

  The first state is a state where a display started in response to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is not performed when the operation means (chance button 136) is operated. For this reason, in the state shown in the same figure (g), without performing the display (first display) started according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136), at the timing shown in the figure (e) The display of the started second display DP2 is continued.

  The state shown in the same figure (h) is the state where the effective period which can receive the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) has passed. Here, by setting the scale represented by the meter image MG to 0, it is notified that the effective period in which the operation means (chance button 136) can be received has elapsed.

  A state shown in the same figure (i) is a state in which a big hit notice display for giving a big hit is given during reach.

  Here, as a display (first display) started in response to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) (the operation shown in (f) of the figure), a big hit advance notice for giving a big hit is performed. In this example, the display (first display) started according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. The display may be irrelevant to the operation of

The state shown in the same figure (j) is a state in which the big hit is displayed. Here, the determination display of the big hit is performed by displaying the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6".
<Operation / Tutorial display / Other examples where operation is invalid>

  In this example, an example is shown in which both the tutorial display (third display) and the big hit advance display (first display) are performed during one change display, but during the first change display, the tutorial A big hit notice may be displayed during the second change display which is displayed and executed before (or after) the first change display.

  In addition, the tutorial display is not limited to the display shown in FIG. 552 (a display indicating that the game console is in the first state (indicating that the operation by the operation means is invalidated)). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 553 (a), a tutorial display on the contents of the effect to be executed after the game stand is in the first state (the operation by the operation means has become invalid) (in this example, Display of an image including the characters “falling in a large chance” may be performed in place of (or in addition to) the tutorial display shown in FIG. 552 (d).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 553 (b), a tutorial display (in this example,) regarding the benefit to be given to the player when the game stand is in the first state (the operation by the operation means has become invalid). The display of the image including the characters “the button is not responsive if it is hot” may be performed instead of (or in addition to) the tutorial display shown in FIG. 552 (d).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 553 (c), the display is irrelevant to the game console becoming in the first state (the operation by the operation means becomes invalid), but the display related to the operation by the operation means (In this example, the display of an image including the characters “If you press and hold the button will be continuously hit !!”) may be changed (or added) to the tutorial display shown in FIG. 552 (d) .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 553 (d), the display is irrelevant to the first state (invalidation of the operation by the operation means) but is related to the operation by the other operation means The display (in this example, the display of an image including the characters “deka button is extremely hot !!”) may be changed (or added) to the tutorial display shown in FIG. 552 (d). Note that the deca-button may be an operating means separate from the chance button 136 or is shared with the chance button 136, but it is an operating means set so that the valid periods that can be accepted differ from each other. It may be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 553 (e), the game console is brought into the first state (the operation by the operation means is invalidated) and the operation means is brought to attention (indicating interest) display ( In the present example, the display of the image including the characters “lamp lights when the button is pressed” may be changed (or added) to the tutorial display shown in FIG. 552 (d).

  Further, the tutorial display is not limited to the display executed before the operation by the operation means, and for example, as shown in FIG. 553 (f), the first state or the first display After the operation by the operation means (for example, the finalized display shown in FIG. 552 (j)), a display (in this example, a display of an image including the characters "I saw the button operation invalid effect") And may be displayed simultaneously. Also, this display may be performed in place of (or in addition to) the tutorial display shown in FIG. 552 (d).

  Further, the tutorial display may be one of the above-described plurality of types of tutorial displays, or may be configured by combining a plurality of tutorial displays. In addition, before specific display (for example, display of meter image or button image), tutorial display may not be performed. In addition, the display place of the tutorial display is not limited to the illustrated display place, and may be displayed in another display area in the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed using other display means.

  In addition, a tutorial display including display other than the display related to the game stand becoming the first state (for example, a display suggesting a game method or a display explaining an effect) may be performed. In addition, a tutorial for which the operation is invalidated may be displayed when the corresponding effect is performed within the variation or the hold. In addition, the operation invalidation effect may be performed after the operation invalidation tutorial is displayed, or may be performed without the operation invalidation tutorial being displayed.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 199) is a first operation means (for example, FIG. 551 (a-2) or In addition to the chance button 136 shown in 552, the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, the ball emission handle 134 shown in FIG. 1, the ball extraction button 130 shown in FIG. In addition to a button, a return operation button, a touch sensor, and a display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 551 (a-1) or 552), a dot matrix display device, 7 segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) ) A display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, a projector) The display unit is a unit capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is started in response to an operation (for example, an operation by the chance button 136) Display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, the first display DP1 shown in FIG. 5551 (b-3), the first display DP1 shown in FIG. 552 (i)) One of the displays is a display (hereinafter, “second display”) including an image (for example, a button image BG shown in FIG. 551 or 552 (e)) indicating the appearance of the first operation means. And one of a plurality of types of states is referred to as a "first state" where the first display is not performed when the first operation means is operated. For example, the states shown in FIG. 551 (a-1) to FIG. 552 (e) to (g)), and the second display is a display that may be displayed in the case of the first state, and among the plurality of types of displays, One display is a tutorial display related to the first state (hereinafter referred to as "third display", for example, a tutorial display TG shown in FIG. 552 (d)), It is.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, by performing the tutorial display related to becoming the first state, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort with respect to the fact that the display started in response to the operation is not performed. In addition to being able to be provided, it may be possible to provide a surprising game, and to increase the player's willingness to play.

  The first display may be a display that is displayed only in response to an operation, or may be a display that is displayed even when there is no operation. The first state may be a state in which the first display is not performed only when the first operation means is operated, or according to the operation of the first operation means. The display may not be started.

  Further, the second display may be a display which is always displayed in the case of the first state. Further, the second display may be a display including a notification prompting the player to perform an operation instead of the display including the image indicating the appearance of the first operation means.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which an operation is not received (a state in which an operation for starting the first display according to the operation of the first operation means is not received). May be Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which the first display is performed when the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). The second display may be a display that may be displayed in the first state.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a display (hereinafter, “second display”) including an image (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”) indicating an appearance of the first operation means. And one display of the plurality of types of displays includes an image (hereinafter referred to as a “second image”) indicating an appearance of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the second image”). 4), the second image is an image different from the first image, and one of a plurality of types of states is an operation of the first operation means. The second display may be performed when the second display is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"), and the fourth display may be displayed in the second state. It may be a display.

Further, the first state is a state where a new display according to the operation of the first operation means is not started, and the third display is a display for explaining the first state. Good. Further, the third display is a display showing the reliability when the acceptance of the operation means is invalid (for example, the display of the character "Hot you have no reaction from the button shown in FIG. 553 (b)") A display showing the reliability when the new display according to the operation of the operation means is not started in the state where the second display is made (for example, “the button does not respond as shown in FIG. 553 (b) Then, it may be the display of the character "it's hot" or the display regarding the case where the reception of the operation means is invalid (for example, the display of the character "If the button does not work ~" shown in FIG. 552 (d)) It may be
<Indication for which the operation is invalidated / display according to the operation by the second operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 554, an example will be described in which a display corresponding to the operation by the second operation means is performed in the effect that the operation becomes invalid. FIG. 554 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of performing display according to the operation by the second operation means in the effect that the operation becomes invalid.

  The state shown in (a) of the figure is the state in which the fluctuation is stopped. Here, the stop display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the stop of the special figure change game is notified in the fourth symbol display area 208f. In addition, by displaying four suspension icons in the suspension icon display area 208d, it is notified that the number of suspension of special figure fluctuation games is four.

  The state shown in the same figure (b) is the state which started the change display. Here, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the execution of the special figure fluctuation game is notified in the fourth symbol display area 208f. In addition, by deleting one pending icon in the pending icon display area 208d, it is notified that the number of pending special game variations is reduced from 4 to 3.

  A state shown in the same figure (c) is a reach state in which two similar decorative symbols are stopped during the variable display. Here, the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front view, and the reach display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . In the same state, the pending icon display area 208d and the variable icon display area 208e are erased, and display of duel effect including a scene in which a duel character and a beard character make a duel is started.

  The state shown in the same figure (d) is a state where it shifts to the second state and performs the second display in this second state.

  The second display is a display including an image (first image) showing the appearance of the first operation means. In the state shown in FIG. 6D, the second display DP2 including the button image BG indicating the appearance of the first operation means (chance button 136) is performed as the second display. Further, together with the display of the second display DP2, the effect of lighting the first operation means (chance button 136) and the remaining time of the effective time in which the operation by the first operation means (chance button 136) can be received The display of the meter image MG represented by the image and the display of the promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the first operation means (chance button 136) are performed.

  The state shown in the same figure (e) continues the second state shown in the figure (d), and the display of the second display DP2 and the lighting of the first operation means (chance button 136) are performed. In the state, the operation by the first operation means (chance button 136) is received.

  The second state is a state in which, when an operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) is performed, an effect started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) is performed. For this reason, in the state shown in the same figure (f), the game state is an advantageous game for the player as an effect (first effect) started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) An effect including display of the cut-in image DP1 suggesting transition to the state is performed.

  On the other hand, the state shown in the same figure (g) is a state where it shifts to the first state and performs the second display in this first state.

  The second display is a display including an image (first image) showing the appearance of the first operation means (chance button 136). In the state shown in (g) of the figure, the second display DP2 including the button image BG indicating the appearance of the first operation means (chance button 136) is performed as the second display. Further, together with the display of the second display DP2, the effect of lighting the first operation means (chance button 136) and the remaining time of the effective time in which the operation by the first operation means (chance button 136) can be received The display of the meter image MG represented by the image and the display of the promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the first operation means (chance button 136) are performed.

  In the state shown in the same figure (h), the first state shown in the figure (g) is continued, and the display of the second display DP2 and the lighting of the first operation means (chance button 136) are performed. In the state, the operation by the first operation means (chance button 136) is received.

  The first state is a state in which an effect started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) is not performed when the first operation means (chance button 136) is operated. . For this reason, in the state shown in the same figure (g), without performing the effect (first effect) started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136), the second which does not respond to the operation The display DP2 continues to be displayed.

  The first state corresponds to the operation of the second operating means (right button 190e of the cross key) when the second operating means (the right button 190e of the cross key in this example) is operated. Effects to be started are being performed. For this reason, in the state shown in the same figure (k), the gaming state is for the player as an effect (first effect) to be started in response to the operation of the second operation means (right button 190e of the cross key). An effect is performed including the display of a cut-in image DP1 'that suggests transition to an advantageous gaming state.

In this example, an effect (an effect including the display of the cut-in image DP1 ′ shown in FIG. 6K) started in response to the operation of the second operation means (right button 190e of the cross key) is displayed. Display of the cut-in image DP1 shown in the figure (f), in which the degree of expectation (the degree of the profit to be given to the player) in the event of being started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) Is set to be higher than the degree of expectation in the case where an effect including) is displayed. The former expectation may be 100%, and the latter may be 0%.
<Indication for which the operation is invalidated / Display and sound output according to the operation by the second operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 555, an example will be described in which display and sound output are performed according to the operation by the second operation means in the effect that the operation becomes invalid. FIG. 555 is a diagram showing in time series an example in which display and sound output are performed according to the operation by the second operation means in the effect that the operation becomes invalid.

  The state shown in (a) of the figure is the state in which the fluctuation is stopped. Here, the stop display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the stop of the special figure change game is notified in the fourth symbol display area 208f. In addition, by displaying four suspension icons in the suspension icon display area 208d, it is notified that the number of suspension of special figure fluctuation games is four.

  The state shown in the same figure (b) is the state which started the change display. Here, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the execution of the special figure fluctuation game is notified in the fourth symbol display area 208f. In addition, by deleting one pending icon in the pending icon display area 208d, it is notified that the number of pending special game variations is reduced from 4 to 3.

  A state shown in the same figure (c) is a reach state in which two similar decorative symbols are stopped during the variable display. Here, the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front view, and the reach display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . Further, in the same state, the pending icon display area 208d and the variation icon display area 208e are erased, and the display of a special effect including a scene in which the character of the lord runs is started.

  The state shown in the same figure (d) is a state where it shifts to the fourth state and performs the second display in this fourth state.

  The second display is a display including an image (first image) showing the appearance of the first operation means. In the state shown in FIG. 6D, the second display DP2 including the button image BG indicating the appearance of the first operation means (chance button 136) is performed as the second display. Further, together with the display of the second display DP2, the effect of lighting the first operation means (chance button 136) and the remaining time of the effective time in which the operation by the first operation means (chance button 136) can be received The display of the meter image MG represented by the image and the display of the promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the first operation means (chance button 136) are performed.

  The state shown in the same figure (e) continues the fourth state shown in the figure (d), and the display of the second display DP2 and the lighting of the first operation means (chance button 136) are performed. In the state, the operation by the first operation means (chance button 136) is received.

  In the fourth state, when the first operation means (chance button 136) is operated, display and sound output are started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136). It is.

  Therefore, in the state shown in the same figure (f), the game state is an advantageous game for the player as a display (first display) which is started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136). Along with displaying the cut-in image DP1 suggesting transition to the state, the gaming state as a sound output (output of the first sound) started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) The sound output means (speaker 128) outputs effect sound A indicating that the player shifts to a game state advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth state is a state in which display and sound output are performed in response to the operation of the first operation means when the first operation means is operated. When the first operation means is operated, only the sound output (or only display) started in response to the operation of the first operation means may be performed.

  On the other hand, the state shown in the same figure (g) is a state where it shifts to the third state and performs the second display in this third state.

  The third state is started in response to the operation of the second operation means (the right button 190e of the cross key) when the second operation means (the right button 190e of the cross key in this example) is operated. Display and sound output are performed.

  Therefore, in the state shown in the same figure (h), the gaming state is displayed for the player as a display (first display) which is started in response to the operation of the second operation means (the right button 190e of the cross key). While displaying the cut-in image DP1 suggesting transition to the advantageous gaming state, the sound output (second sound) started in response to the operation of the second operation means (the right button 190e of the cross key) As the output, the sound output means (speaker 128) outputs an effect sound B indicating that the gaming state shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In this example, the third state is a state in which display and sound output are performed in response to the operation of the second operation means when the second operation means is operated. When the second operation means is operated, only the sound output (or only display) started in response to the operation of the second operation means may be performed.

  Also, in this example, the degree of expectation (the output of the effect sound B shown in FIG. 6H) started in response to the operation of the second operation means (right button 190e of the cross key) Expectation when the degree of profit to be given to the player is to be sounded (output of the effect sound A shown in the same figure (f)) started in response to the operation of the first operation means (chance button 136) It is set to be higher than the degree. The former expectation may be 100%, and the latter may be 0%.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1 or the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 199), in addition to the first operation means (for example, chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1, the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, the ball firing handle 134 shown in FIG. 1, the ball extraction button 130 shown in FIG. 1, the touch panel not shown, the ball discharging lever, the ball lending operation button, the return operation button, the touch sensor And second operation means (for example, the right button 190e of the cross key shown in FIG. 554), the setting operation portion 137 shown in FIG. 1, the ball firing handle 134 shown in FIG. A button 130, a touch panel (not shown), a ball discharge lever, a ball lending operation button, a return operation button, a touch sensor, and display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 554). In addition to the above, it is a game table provided with a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector). The display unit is a unit capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is an effect (hereinafter referred to as “the display is started in response to an operation (for example, an operation by the chance button 136) For example, it is an effect including the display of the first display DP1 ′ shown in FIG. 554 (k), and one of the plurality of types of display is the first operation means. A display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) including an image (for example, the button image BG shown in FIGS. 554 (d), (e), (g) to (j)) showing the appearance of And one of a plurality of types of states is a state in which the first effect is not performed when the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). For example, in the state shown in FIG. 554 (g) to FIG. (I), the second display is a display that may be displayed in the case of the first state, and the first The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect may be executed when the second operation means is operated in the state of.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the second operation means is operated in the first state, by making the first effect executable, it is possible to provide a game having a surprising nature. There are cases where it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. In addition, the player can be alerted by inactivating the first operation means, and giving new enjoyment to the concentrated player by activating the second operation means. There are times when you can.

  The first display may be a display that is displayed only in response to an operation, or may be a display that is displayed even when there is no operation. The first state may be a state in which the first display is not performed only when the first operation means is operated, or according to the operation of the first operation means. The display may not be started.

  Further, the second display may be a display which is always displayed in the case of the first state. Further, the second display may be a display including a notification prompting the player to perform an operation instead of the display including the image indicating the appearance of the first operation means.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which an operation is not received (a state in which an operation for starting the first display according to the operation of the first operation means is not received). May be Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which the first display is performed when the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). The second display may be a display that may be displayed in the first state.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a display (hereinafter, “second display”) including an image (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”) indicating an appearance of the first operation means. And one display of the plurality of types of displays includes an image (hereinafter referred to as a “second image”) indicating an appearance of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the second image”). 4), the second image is an image different from the first image, and one of a plurality of types of states is an operation of the first operation means. The second display may be performed when the second display is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"), and the fourth display may be displayed in the second state. It may be a display.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a display that may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), and the plurality One of the types of display is a display that may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the plurality of types of states One of the states is a state in which control (hereinafter referred to as "first control") may be started in which the first display is performed when the second operation means is operated. Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first state”.), And one of the plurality of types of states may be displayed when the second operation means is operated. It is in a certain state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), and the first operation in the first state The probability that the first display is performed by the operation of the stage is the first probability, and in the first state, the probability that the first display is performed by the operation of the second operation means is the second The second probability may be higher than the first probability.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a display that may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first display"), and the plurality One of the types of display is a display that may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the plurality of types of states One of the states is a state in which control (hereinafter referred to as "first control") may be started in which the first display is performed when the second operation means is operated. Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first state”.), And one of the plurality of types of states may be displayed when the second operation means is operated. In a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), the second operation in the first state The probability (hereinafter referred to as “second probability”) that the first display is performed by the operation of the stage is performed by the operation of the first operation means in the first state. It may be a probability higher than the probability (hereinafter, referred to as “first probability”).
<Effect / Operation invalid period when operation is invalid>

  Next, an example of the operation invalid period in the effect in which the operation becomes invalid will be described using FIGS. 556 and 557. FIG. 556 and FIG. 557 are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation invalid period in the effect that the operation becomes invalid.

  Here, the operation invalid period is a period (first period) in which the first state (a state where a display started in response to the operation of the operation means is not performed when the operation means is operated) continues. For example, the periods shown in FIG. 511 (a-1) to FIG. (A-3), and the periods shown in FIG. 552 (e) to FIG.

  The first period (operation invalid period) according to the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and for example, the operation means (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 556 (a) to FIG. Operating means (chance button shown in FIGS. 556 (d) to (f), while the operating means (chance button 136) is on, shown in FIGS. 556 (e) to (f) 136) a period during which a meter image MG for notifying an effective period in which an operation according to 136) can be received is displayed, a period during which the meter image MG is not displayed, the operation means shown in FIG. 556 (d) Operation means (chance button 136 shown in FIG. 556 (d) to FIG. 56 (f)) while the button image BG indicating the appearance of (the chance button 136) is displayed, the period when the button image BG is not displayed ) Operation As shown in FIG. 556 (b) to (c), a period during which the prompting display SG (in the present example, the display of the characters “press !!”) is displayed, and a period during which the promotion image SG is not displayed. It may be one or a plurality of periods of the period in which the animation related to the button image BG indicating the appearance of the operation means (chance button 136) is being executed.

  In addition, when the operation means includes a plurality of operation units, the plurality of operation units are effective while the operation by the first operation unit (for example, the two buttons on the left and right) is effective. The operation by the second operation unit (for example, four buttons in upper, lower, left, and right, and one determination button) which is one of the operation units may be invalid, or vice versa.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 557 (a-1) to FIG. 5 (a-3), an image showing the appearance of a predetermined operation means (in this example, an operation means for performing volume adjustment) is displayed. During the period, in the game console which makes the operation by the predetermined operation means effective, as shown in FIG. 6 (b-1), operation means other than the predetermined operation means (in this example, the music is selected) The operation by the predetermined operation means (in this example, the operation means for performing the volume adjustment) may be invalidated while displaying the image showing the appearance of the operation means).

  Also, as shown in (c-1) of the figure, while displaying an image showing the appearance of the operation means (in this example, the operation means for selecting a character) other than the predetermined operation means In this case, an operation by a predetermined operation unit (in this example, an operation unit for performing volume adjustment) may be invalidated.

  Further, as shown in (d-1) of the figure, an image showing the appearance of the operation means (in this example, the operation means for changing the hold icon) other than the predetermined operation means while the symbol variation is displayed. While the display is being performed, the operation by the predetermined operation means (in this example, the operation means for adjusting the volume) may be invalidated, or, as shown in FIG. While the display is stopped and an image showing the appearance of the operation means (in this example, the operation means for selecting a music piece) other than the predetermined operation means is displayed, the predetermined operation means (this example) In this case, the operation by the operation means for performing the volume adjustment may be invalidated.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. (E-1) to (e-3), the operating means other than the predetermined operating means (in this example, the protruding state shown in FIG. (E-3)) During the period when the operation by the mechanism button (surprise button) is invalidated (during the preparation period changing to the projecting state), the operation becomes effective by the predetermined operation means (in this example, volume adjustment) The operation by the operation means for performing the operation may be disabled.

  In addition, the operation ineffective period (first period) may be one period in one symbol change or may be a plurality of periods in one symbol change. The period during which the operation means is on (or blinks) may be an operation ineffective period (first period), and the period during which the operation means is off may be an operation ineffective period (first period) It may be The period displaying the image showing the appearance of the operation means may be the operation invalid period (first period), or the period not displaying the image showing the appearance of the operation means is the operation invalid period It may be the first period).

  Further, the period during which the operating means is vibrating may be the operation ineffective period (first period), and the period during which the operating means is not vibrating may be the operation ineffective period (first period) . Further, the period in which the operation means protrudes may be the operation ineffective period (first period), and the period in which the operation means does not protrude may be the operation ineffective period (first period).

  Further, some of the configurations of the plurality of embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 552 to 557 may be combined with each other.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 199) has the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1, the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, the ball firing handle 134 shown in FIG. 1, the ball extraction button 130 shown in FIG. 1, the touch panel not shown, the ball discharging lever, the ball lending operation button, the return operation button, the touch sensor And second operation means (for example, the right button 190e of the cross key shown in FIG. 554), the setting operation portion 137 shown in FIG. 1, the ball firing handle 134 shown in FIG. A button 130, a touch panel (not shown), a ball discharge lever, a ball lending operation button, a return operation button, a touch sensor, and display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 556) In addition to the above, it is a game table provided with a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector). The display unit is a unit capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and a display of one of the plurality of types of display is started according to an operation (for example, an operation by the chance button 136) (hereinafter referred to as “ For example, it is a first display DP1 ′ shown in FIG. 554 (k), and one of the plurality of types of displays is an image showing the appearance of the first operation means. (For example, a button image BG shown in FIGS. 554 (d), (e), (g) to (j)) (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”), plural One of the types of states is a state in which the first display is not performed when the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as “first state”. For example, FIG. g) to the state shown in FIG. 5I and the state shown in FIG. 556 (e) to FIG. 5f), and the second display is displayed in the case of the first state The first state is a chance button 136 shown in a first period (for example, FIG. 554 (g) to FIG. I (i) or FIG. 556 (e) to FIG. Is a state shown in FIG. 552 (h), which is a state continuing immediately after a lapse of an effective period in which an operation by the operation means can be received. .

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the player can be alerted by making the first operation means invalid, and making the second operation means effective is a concentrated game. May be able to give new enjoyments to

  The first display may be a display that is displayed only in response to an operation, or may be a display that is displayed even when there is no operation. The first state may be a state in which the first display is not performed only when the first operation means is operated, or according to the operation of the first operation means. The display may not be started.

  Further, the second display may be a display which is always displayed in the case of the first state. Further, the second display may be a display including a notification prompting the player to perform an operation instead of the display including the image indicating the appearance of the first operation means.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which an operation is not received (a state in which an operation for starting the first display according to the operation of the first operation means is not received). May be Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which the first display is performed when the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). The second display may be a display that may be displayed in the first state.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of displays may be a display (hereinafter, “second display”) including an image (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”) indicating an appearance of the first operation means. And one display of the plurality of types of displays includes an image (hereinafter referred to as a “second image”) indicating an appearance of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the second image”). 4), the second image is an image different from the first image, and one of a plurality of types of states is an operation of the first operation means. The second display may be performed when the second display is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"), and the fourth display may be displayed in the second state. It may be a display.

  In addition, when the first period (ineffective period) is defined as a period from a predetermined start to a predetermined end, the predetermined start and the predetermined end indicate the start or end of the symbol variation display, or the specific When a game (for example, a big hit game) start or end and acceptance of an operation by the first operation means (or the second operation means) becomes valid or invalid, a specific image (for example, the first It may be any one of the following: when an image showing the appearance of the operation means (or the second operation means) is displayed or deleted, or when a specific effect starts or ends. In addition, the first period may be a period obtained by adding a plurality of consecutive ineffective periods, or may be a period obtained by adding a plurality of intermittent (discontinuous) ineffective periods.

  The second state may be a state continuing for a second period, and the second period may be a period after the first period. Further, the second state may be a state continuing for a second period, and the second period may be a period between a plurality of the first periods. The first period may be a period before one of the plurality of types of button effects is started, and may be a period before the meter subtraction is started.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of states is a state in which the first display is performed when the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as "second state"). The second display may be a display that may be displayed in the second state. Further, the second display may be a display not including an image showing an appearance of the second operation means. The second display may be a display including an image (for example, a meter image MG) indicating a valid period in which the operation by the first operation means can be received. Further, the second display may be a display (for example, a promotion image SG) including characters prompting an operation by the first operation means.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of display may be variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "symbol variable display"). In addition, the first display may be displayed (or necessarily displayed) (including effect display) that may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display, or in the symbol variation display. It may be a display (including an effect display) that may be displayed (or always displayed) during stoppage. In addition, the first effect may be an effect that may be started (or always started) during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started while the symbol variation display is stopped. The effect may be (or always started).
<Other Embodiments (Button Effect While Setting Auto Button Function)>

  Hereinafter, using the drawings (FIG. 558 to FIG. 570), the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as slot machine) will be described in detail. explain. In addition, in order to avoid the overlapping description, about the same content as other embodiment, suppose that the same code | symbol is attached | subjected in drawing, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the symbols shown in FIG. 558 to FIG. 570 are basically used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIG. In addition, although the numbers of the examples of the present embodiment are in principle used only for the description of the present embodiment, each example of the present embodiment and each example of the other embodiments may be combined and applied to each other. Can. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted.

  First, FIGS. 558 and 559 show an outline of the present embodiment. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes the operation means and the display means, similarly to the gaming machine described using FIG. 271 to FIG. 277 or FIG. It is possible to make the same display. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has an auto button function. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs the same processing as when the operation of the operating means is received, triggered by a predetermined condition, even when the player does not operate the operating means. Alternatively, even if the player does not operate the operation means, the function is to perform processing of effect display similar in appearance to the case where the operation of the operation means is accepted triggered by a predetermined condition. And in this embodiment, "during setting of the auto button mode" means that this auto button function is being set (in operation), and "during setting of the auto button mode" means the auto button function. Means not being set (not in operation).

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 558 and 559, an elapsed time notification image (for example, operation of the chance button 136) for notifying the button effect display 710 of the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the operation means (chance button 136). Although the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of (1), the meter display may or may not be included.

  That is, the gaming table according to the present embodiment is a gaming table provided with an operating means and a display means, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, and the plurality of types One of the effect displays in the effect display is an effect display that can be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first effect display") when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. When one of the plurality of types of effect displays is operated during the non-setting of the auto button mode, an effect display different from the first effect display that can be displayed (hereinafter referred to as , “The second effect display”.) The first effect display is an effect display that can be displayed even when the operation means is not operated during setting of the auto button mode, The second effect display is If during setting of the button mode the operating means is not operated, it is not displayed the effect display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 558, the game console can execute a plurality of effect displays. For example, the effect display (in this example, as shown in FIG. 6A), the button display 710 regarding the display (button display 710) imitating the operation means (eg, the chance button 136) as shown in FIG. And the characters “Press !!” are displayed, and effect display (button effect) for prompting operation of the chance button 136 or character select effect for causing the player to select a character as shown in FIG. Display (character selection effect) or the like.

  Then, in the case of the normal effect display (when the auto button mode is not set), when the player operates the chance button 136 during the execution of the button effect, the effect according to the operation of the chance button 136 The display (for example, the first effect display shown in FIG. 6B) is performed. In this example, the first effect display is a cut-in image of the character.

  In the case of normal effect display (when the auto button mode is not set), the player operates the operation means (such as the chance button 136) to select an arbitrary character during execution of the character selection effect. Then, an effect display (a second effect display (for example, an effect display in which the selected character is displayed, etc.)) corresponding to the operation is executed.

  And, when the button effect is being executed while the auto button mode is set as shown in FIG. 6A, the first effect display can be displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated. It is a display (the figure (b)).

  On the other hand, the second effect display (for example, the effect display (selection effect display) that can be executed when the operation means is operated during the execution of the character selection effect) is, as shown in FIG. If the chance button 136 is not operated while the character selection effect is being performed while the button mode is being set, this is an effect display that is not displayed ((d) in the figure). As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the effect display that the auto button function does not operate (the operation means is not manually operated even when the auto button mode is set) And the effect indication not included).

  Note that the second effect display is displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set in a certain state (for example, a state in which the cursor is on the first choice among a plurality of choices). The possible effect display, the second effect display, in a state (for example, a state in which the cursor is the first choice among a plurality of options), the operation means during the setting of the automatic button mode The effect display may not be displayed when not operated.

  In addition, the game stand according to the present embodiment is a game stand provided with an operating means and a display means, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, and the plurality of types One of the effect displays among the effect displays is an effect display (first effect display) that can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and the one or more of the plurality of effect displays can be displayed. One of the effect displays is an effect display (second effect display) different from the first effect display, which can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. The first effect display is an effect display that can be displayed even when the operation means is not operated during setting of the auto button mode, and the second effect display is of the auto button mode. The operation means operates during setting It is an effect display which is not displayed when it is not displayed, and one effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is an effect display (fourth effect display) including an image showing an appearance of the operation means, One of the effect displays among the plurality of effect displays can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and an effect display different from the second effect display (fifth The fourth effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the fifth effect display is started (the third state) when the operation means is operated. The fourth effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the fifth effect display is not started (the fourth state), and the fourth effect display includes a meter image There is no effect display, on the game stand characterized by That.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 559, the game console can execute a plurality of effect displays, and the plurality of effect displays include the following first effect display, second effect display, third effect display, and the first The fourth effect display and the fifth effect display are included. Although the display example in the setting of the auto button mode is shown in the figure, as shown in the figure, also when the operation means (chance button 136) is operated while the auto button mode is not set. In addition, the effect display corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in some cases, the effect display may be different from when setting the auto button mode) is displayed.

  The first effect display can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set (for example, the effect display when the chance button 136 is operated with a normal button effect), the auto button Even when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the mode, it is an effect display that can be displayed (displayable by the operation of the auto button function).

  The second effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display that can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and the operation is performed while setting the auto button mode. This is an effect display not displayed (for example, an effect display that is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated with a normal button effect) when the means is not operated.

  Further, the fourth effect display is an effect display including an image indicating the appearance of the operation means and not including a meter display (meter image), and when the operation means is operated, an effect display according to the operation In the case where the (fifth effect display) is started (a normal button effect state (third state)), it is an effect display that can be displayed. In the fourth effect display, the fifth effect display is not started (for example, while the auto button mode is set, the effect display (fifth effect display) is on standby until a predetermined time elapses) In the effect standby state (fourth state), it is an effect display that can be displayed.

  The fifth effect display is an effect display different from the second effect display, which can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. In the fifth effect display, after the above-mentioned effect standby state (fourth state) is ended, that is, while the auto button mode is set, a predetermined standby time (standby time when the operation means is not operated) It is an effect display that can be displayed even when the operation means is not operated after the lapse of.

  The first effect display and the subsequent effect display, and the fourth and fifth effect displays may be the same effect display or may be different effect displays.

  And in this embodiment, a plurality of button effects can be executed, and in one of those button effects, the time until the effect display is performed as if the operation means were operated is different while the auto button mode is set. Including things.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 559 (a) and (b), in a certain button effect, when the button effect is started (the execution of the button effect display 710 is started) while the auto button mode is set, Even if there is no operation of the chance button 136), the time until the effect display (the same figure (b)) as if the operation of the chance button 136 was performed is the first time.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 559 (c) and (d), in another button effect, when the button effect is started (the execution of the button effect display 710 is started) while the auto button mode is set, the operation means by the player Even if there is no operation on (chance button 136), the time until the effect display ((d) in the same figure) as if the operation on chance button 136 was performed is the second time, and the second time is It may be longer than the first time.

  Further, as another effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 559 (a) and (b), in a certain button effect, the meter effect is not included in the button effect display 710, and the button effect is started during the auto button mode setting ( When the execution of the button effect display 710 is started), the effect display as if the operation of the chance button 136 was performed even if the player did not operate the operation means (chance button 136) ((b) in the figure). I do.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 559 (c) and (d), in another button effect, the button effect is started while the auto button mode is set (the button effect display 710 (in this case, including the meter display) is started) If the player moves the meter to a certain extent, the effect display as if the chance button 136 was operated even if the player did not operate the operation means (chance button 136) (FIG. 6D). I do.

  Further, although the effect display shown in FIG. 558 (b) and the effect displays shown in FIGS. 559 (b) and 559 (d) are the same image, these images may be other images in different effects. Further, in the drawings (FIGS. 558 to 570) for explaining the following embodiments, another image in another effect may be used for those using the same effect display. For example, in one game stand, a large number of reach effects and button effects are included. Further, even in a certain button effect, the background image before the button effect display 710 and the image of the button effect display 710 may be different from each other, and the effect display (for example, cut-in image) displayed after the button operation is also different. There is.

  The effect display shown in FIG. 559 (b) and FIG. 559 (d) may be another effect display (another effect).

  The second effect display may be performed by the operation of the second operation means. For example, in the case where the effect performed by the operation of the second operation means is the effect with a high hit probability, the auto button function may not operate.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the button effect during setting or non-setting of the auto button mode according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Specific example A of button effect>

  FIGS. 560 (a-1) to (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series when the auto button mode is not set (the auto button function is not in operation). The periods shown in FIGS. 560A-1 to 560A-3 are states before the start of the button effect, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is turned off.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 560 (a-4), the button effect display 710 is started in response to the start of the reach effect display in FIG. 560 (a-3). The button effect display 710 is, for example, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136), and in this example, an image (operation means image BG) imitating the operation means (chance button 136) and the chance button 136 Elapsed time notification image TG for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation (in this example, the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 The image) and the characters "Press!" Are displayed. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 560 (a-5), the player has shown that the chance button 136 has been operated (pressed) by the player and that the operation by the chance button 136 has been accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 560 (a-6). As an opportunity, effect display (in this case, display of a cut-in image of a character (殿)) corresponding to the operation is performed. In addition, at this timing, the chance button 136 is turned off and the button effect is ended in response to the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.
<Specific example B of button effect>

FIGS. 560 (b-1) to (b-2) show another example of the effect display when the button effect display 710 is started at the timing shown in FIG. (A-4) and the chance button 136 is operated. The figures (b-1) and (b-2) correspond to the timings shown in the figures (a-5) and (a-6).
<Specific example C of button effect>

  FIGS. 560 (c-1) to (c-3) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series when the auto button mode is not set (the auto button function is not activated).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 560 (c-1), the button effect display 710 (that is, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 560 (a-4), and FIG. As shown, the predetermined time has elapsed (the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the notification image TG of the elapsed time of the button display effect 710 is decreasing), but the state where the chance button 136 is not operated is shown.

  Further, the timing shown in (c-2) of the figure shows a state in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG disappears, and the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended.

  And the timing shown to the same figure (c-3) is operated when the chance button 136 was not operated during the reception period of operation of the chance button 136 (it became time-out), and the chance button 136 is operated. The effect display in the case of having been performed is not being performed (the effect display to be performed after the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in one button effect of a plurality of types of button effects, a plurality of effect displays (for example, as effect display when the chance button 136 is operated (after button operation) (A-6) and FIG. (B-2).

  In one button effect of a plurality of types of button effects, the effect display after the operation of the chance button 136 may be only one type.

  Moreover, in all the button effects of the plurality of types of button effects, the effect display after the operation of the chance button 136 may have a plurality of types.

  Further, in all the button effects among the plurality of types of button effects, the effect display after the operation of the chance button 136 may be only one type.

In addition, in one of the button effects of the plurality of types of button effects, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, the effect display performed after the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed (the same figure (c-3)) It may be one. Alternatively, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, effect display may be performed only when there is no operation of the chance button 136 (only when there is no operation of the chance button 136). Note that this effect display may not be executed 100% while the auto button mode is set.
<Specific example D of button effect>

  FIG. 561 (a-1) to FIG. 56 (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series when the auto button mode is not set (the auto button function is not activated). The periods shown in FIG. 561 (a-1) to FIG. 6 (a-3) are the states before the start of the button effect, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is turned off.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 561 (a-4), the button effect display 710 is started when the reach effect display is started in FIG. 56 (a-3). The button effect display 710 in this example displays, for example, a large operation means image BG1, an elapsed time notification image TG1, and a large downward arrow and the characters "PUSH !!". At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

The timing shown in FIG. 561 (a-5) shows that the player has operated (pressed) the chance button 136, and that the operation by the chance button 136 has been received at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a-6). As an opportunity, effect display (in this case, display of a cut-in image (first cut-in image) of a character (a person)) is executed according to the operation. In addition, at this timing, the chance button 136 is turned off and the button effect is ended in response to the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.
<Specific example E of button effect>

  561 (b-1) to (b-3) show another example of the button effect display 710 started after the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a-3). In the button effect display 710 of this example, for example, an operation means image BG2 smaller than that in the figure (a-4), an elapsed time notification image TG2, and a small downward arrow and the characters “Press !!” are displayed. is there. Also, at the timing shown in (b-1) of the same figure, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) lights up in the first color (red in this example) simultaneously with the button effect display 710 and the chance button 136 The operation is accepted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6B (b-2), the chance button 136 is not operated (time out) while the button effect display 710 is being executed (during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. It shows that the reception period of has ended.

  And the timing shown to the figure (b-3) is operated when the chance button 136 is not operated during execution of the button effect display 710 (during reception period of operation of the chance button 136), the chance button 136 is operated. The effect display (for example, the display of another cut-in image (second cut-in image) of the character (here) in this case) different from the effect display (for example, the same figure (a-6)) is performed. (No effect display to be performed after operation of the chance button 136 is made).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, for example, the button effect display 710 is executed while the auto button mode is not set, but the chance button is displayed during the execution (during the operation period of the chance button 136). The effect display when the chance button 136 is operated triggered by the fact that the 136 is not operated (a predetermined time has passed (the time has elapsed from the start of execution of the button effect display 710)) (for example, FIG. 6) may be performed effect presentation (for example, the same figure (b-3)).

  In addition, the button effect display 710 is executed during the setting of the auto button mode, and the auto button function is actually activated when the predetermined time has elapsed (time out) from the start of the execution of the button effect display 710, the opportunity An effect display (for example, the same figure (b-3)) different from the effect display (for example, the same figure (a-6)) when the button 136 is operated may be executed.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of operation means are used as button images (operation means images) displayed in a state where effect display is executed by the operation of the chance button 136 (during execution of the button effect display 710). It has an image (for example, operation means images BG1 and BG2).

  In addition, in one button effect among a plurality of types of button effects, only one type of button effect display 710 (operation means image) may be displayed during execution of the button effect.

  Further, in all the button effects among the plurality of types of button effects, the button effect display 710 (operation means image) displayed during execution of the button effects may have a plurality of types.

  Further, in all the button effects among the plurality of types of button effects, only one type of button effect display 710 (operation means image) may be displayed during execution of the button effect.

  In addition, in one button effect of a plurality of types of button effects, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the effect display performed after the operation of the chance button 136 may not be performed. Alternatively, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, it is executed only when there is no operation of the chance button 136 (only for the case where there is no operation of the chance button 136) effect display (FIG. (B-3)) It may be done.

  In addition, the effect display in the same figure (b-1)-(b-3) may be the effect display during non-setting of the auto button mode, or the effect display during the setting of the auto button mode. Good. That is, when the chance button 136 is not operated during the button effect display 710 during non-setting of the auto button mode (during the reception period of the operation of the chance button operation 136), the effect of FIG. The display may be executed, or the effect display shown in (b-1) and (b-2) of the same figure is executed while the auto button mode is set, and a predetermined time elapses while the auto button mode is set. After that (in other words, when the auto button mode is set but the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed), the effect display of FIG. (B-3) may be executed. .

That is, in this example, as shown in (b-1) and (b-2) in the figure, the scale of the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG2 decreases regardless of whether the auto button mode is set or not set.
<Specific example F of button effect>

  FIG. 562 (a-1) to FIG. 56 (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of the button effect in time series. Periods shown in FIG. 562 (a-1) to FIG. 56 (a-3) are states before the start of the button effect, and the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is turned off.

  The timing shown in FIG. 562 (a-4) is a state in which the characters "Confrontation Reach" are displayed small at, for example, the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and super reach effect is executed. Further, at this timing, the button effect display 710 is started in response to the start of the reach effect display in FIG. In the button effect display 710 of this example, for example, reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is effective but the operation means image BG is not displayed (notice of prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period (operation promotion (Notification) is not performed) effect display (back button effect display 710 '). Here, the back button effect display 710 ′ is executed to display the characters “Confrontation reach” as a display indicating that the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. Further, in this case, although the lighting of the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is not performed, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 562 (a-5) shows that the player has operated (pressed) the chance button 136, and that the operation by the chance button 136 has been received at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a-6). As an opportunity, effect display (in this case, display of a cut-in image of a character (殿)) corresponding to the operation is performed. Further, at this timing, the back button effect display 710 'is ended in response to the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.

  In addition, even when the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is operated at a certain timing during super reach (for example, when a specific character is moving), the hidden effect is executed. Good.

As described above, the button effect in the present embodiment includes the back button effect in which the operation means image BG is not displayed (the operation promotion notification is not performed), and the button effect display 710 in the present embodiment includes the operation means image BG Also includes a back button effect display 710 ′ (no operation promotion notification is performed).
<Specific example G of button effect>

  562 (b-1) to (b-6) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series, and during execution of the back button effect display 710 'shown in FIG. 56 (a-4) It is an example of a production | presentation display when operation of the chance button 136 is not performed. Since the same figure (b-1)-the same figure (b-4) are the same as that of the figure (a-1)-the same figure (a-4), explanation is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (b-5), the back button effect display 710 'shows a state in which the player does not operate (press) the chance button 136, and the same applies in FIG. 6 (b-6). It shows a state in which the effect display is being performed.

  As described above, when the player does not operate (press) the chance button 136 on the back button effect display 710 ′, the same effect display is continued during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. That is, the effect display shown in FIG. 6A (a-6) is performed only when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the back button effect display 710 '(during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). It is a display.

  Further, the effect display of FIG. 6A (a-6) is, for example, an effect that is performed when the back button effect display 710 'is executed while the auto button mode is not set and the chance button 136 is operated. Further, the effect display of FIG. 6A (a-6) is an effect display that is not executed unless the chance button 136 is operated even when the back button effect display 710 'is executed during the setting of the auto button mode. is there.

  Note that even if the chance button 136 is operated when the back button effect display 710 ′ is executed, there may be a case where the effect display shown in FIG. Further, in the case where the effect display shown in FIG. 6A can be executed, the chance button 136 may emit light (the button effect display 710 including the operation means image BG is not displayed).

  Further, "back button effect" in the present embodiment means that an operation of the operation means can be accepted without executing the button effect display 710 (or back button effect display 710 ') including the operation means image BG. The button effect display 710 (or back button effect display 710 ') including the operation means image BG may not be executed, and the operation of the operation means may be accepted without causing the operation means to emit light. It may be an effect. Further, in the case of the configuration in which the sound is output when the reception of the operation of the operation means is effective (for example, the sound of “pong” is output only at the start), the sound may not be output.

  Further, the effect display of FIG. 6A (a-6) is an effect display that can be displayed during execution of the back button effect display 710 ', and a button effect for displaying the operation means image BG (an operation promotion notification is executed) It is an effect display that is not executed during the display 710.

  As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has one type of effect display when the chance button 136 is operated (after button operation) in one button effect (back button effect) of a plurality of types of button effects. The effect display (the same figure (a-6)) is executed, but in one of the button effects of the plurality of types of button effects, the effect display after the operation of the chance button 136 may be only one type .

  Moreover, in all the button effects (back button effects) of the plurality of types of button effects, the effect display after the operation of the chance button 136 may have a plurality of types.

  Further, in all the button effects (back button effects) of the plurality of types of button effects, only one type of effect display may be displayed after the chance button 136 is operated.

In addition, in one button effect (back button effect) of a plurality of types of button effects, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the effect display performed after the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed (FIG. b-6)) may be used. Alternatively, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, effect display may be performed only when there is no operation of the chance button 136 (only when there is no operation of the chance button 136).
<Specific example H of button effect display>

  FIGS. 563 (a-1) to 563 (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series when the auto button mode is not set (the auto button function is not activated).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 563 (a-1), a state where the button effect display 710 is started is shown. The button effect display 710 in this example displays, for example, the operation means image BG, the elapsed time notification image TG, and the downward arrow and the characters “Press !!”. In the elapsed time notification image TG, a mark MG (in this example, upper and lower triangular marks in this example) indicating a suitable timing of the operation of the chance button 136 to which a benefit (points) advantageous to the player is given is displayed together It is done. The player may receive a benefit (point) in addition to the effect display according to the operation of the chance button 136 only when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG reaches the mark MG. it can. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  The timing shown in (a-2) of the figure shows that the player has operated (pressed) the chance button 136 in front of the mark MG (earlier than the preferable timing), as shown in (a-3) of the figure. At the timing, upon receiving an operation by the chance button 136, an effect display corresponding to the operation (here, a display of a cut-in image of a character) is executed. In this case, no benefit is given to the player, and only the effect display (FIG. 6A) by the operation of the chance button 136 is executed.

  At the timing shown in (a-4) of the figure, the effect display shown in (a-3) is once erased, and at the timing shown in (a-5), the button effect display 710 is executed again (resume) The chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) lights up in the first color (red in this example), indicating that the operation by the chance button 136 is resumed. Furthermore, at this timing, the chance button 136 is operated at a suitable timing, that is, at the timing when the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG reaches the mark MG.

At the timing shown in (a-6) of the figure, the effect display executed after the chance button 136 is operated triggered by the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in (a-5) of the figure ((A-5) For example, the display of a cut-in image of a character (殿) is executed. Also, at an appropriate timing, in response to the chance button 136 being operated, an effect display (in this case, the display of the character “+1 pt”) indicating that the player has been given a benefit (point) is executed. There is. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is turned off and the button effect is ended, upon receiving the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.
<Specific example of button effect I>

  563 (b-1) to 563 (b-4) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series during the setting of the auto button mode (the state of the auto button function being activated).

  The timing shown in FIG. 563 (b-1) is the same as that of FIG. 5 (a-1), and shows a state in which the button effect display 710 is started.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6B, the state where the player operates the chance button 136 is shown by the auto button function even if the player does not operate the chance button 136. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is operated by the auto button function at the timing (preferred timing) when the meter of the elapsed time notification image TG reaches the mark MG.

  Then, at the timing shown in (b-3) of the figure, the effect to be executed after the chance button 136 is operated triggered by the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in (b-2) of the figure While executing the display (for example, the display of a cut-in image of a character), a benefit (point (1 pt)) is given to the player at the appropriate timing when the chance button 136 is operated. The effect display (in this case, the display of the characters “+1 pt”) is performed. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is turned off and the button effect is ended, upon receiving the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6B (b-4), a bonus (points (1 pt)) is given to the player, and as a result, it is informed that the total earned points have become 31 pt.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed at a suitable timing, an effect display to which a benefit (point) is provided is executed. Specifically, when the player succeeds in operating the chance button 136 at a suitable timing, the effect display (the character (a-6) shown in the figure (a-6)) executed after the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. While the cut-in image display is performed, a predetermined effect display (for example, display of the character of "+1 pt") is performed to indicate that the benefit is given.

  In addition, the result of the predetermined effect display (for example, the display of the character of "+1 pt") indicating that the privilege is given is reflected in the other display executed thereafter (for example, FIG. Display of the characters "31 pt" shown in 4)).

  Further, in this case, during the auto button mode setting, the effect display is executed as if the chance button 136 is operated at a suitable timing (the same figure (b-1) to (b-2)).

In this example, while the auto button mode is not set, a predetermined effect display (same as (a-5) in the same figure (a-5)) is given when the chance button 136 is operated at a suitable timing. In the case where the chance button 136 is operated at a suitable timing (in the case where it is operated (FIG. (B Although the predetermined effect display (display of the character of "+1 pt" shown in the same figure (b-3)) which shows that the privilege of -2) was given shows the example which is the same effect display, These may be different effect displays. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated at a suitable timing during non-setting of the auto button mode (the same as the diagram (a-5) in FIG. Than benefits to be granted during configuration advantageous benefits (e.g., point is higher) may be used.
<Specific Example of Button Effect and Selection Effect J>

  FIGS. 564 (a-1) to 564 (a-5) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series during non-setting of the auto button mode (in a state where the auto button function is not activated). In this example, a selection effect (for example, a weapon selection effect for causing the player to select a weapon) is performed in addition to the button effect. Here, "selection effect" refers to an effect for selecting one of a plurality of options, and "selection effect display" refers to when one of a plurality of options is selected. It refers to the effect display displayed on.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, a weapon selection effect for causing the player to select a weapon is started, and at the same time, a button display effect 710 is started. In the button effect display 710 of this example, an operation means image BG, an elapsed time notification image TG for notifying an effective period (remaining time) in which a weapon can be selected, and an image of a downward arrow are displayed to display a player's chance button. Prompt for 136 operations.

  In addition, in the weapon selection effect, display of selectable weapon types (weapon A, weapon B, weapon C), and cursor display indicating that a predetermined weapon is being selected (here, display of frame surrounding and arrow ) And "Select a weapon !!" are displayed to prompt you to select a weapon.

  In the timings shown in (a-2) and (a-3) in the figure, a predetermined time during the selectable effective period of the weapon has passed, and the selected weapon is transitioning (at the switching of the cursor display) Is shown. Switching of the cursor display for selecting the weapons A, B and C is, for example, to automatically move (switch) (in a predetermined or arbitrary order) at every predetermined time (regardless of the operation of the player). The player may move arbitrarily by operating the chance button 136 (it can move as weapon A → weapon B → weapon C → weapon A ··· with multiple operations of the chance button 136) It may be. In addition, the player may be arbitrarily moved by other operation means (for example, the cross key 141 or the left and right button) other than the chance button 136 or the like.

  The timing shown in the figure (a-4) shows that the player has selected the weapon A (operated the chance button 136) during the selectable effective period of the weapon, and the selection of the weapon A has been confirmed. There is.

  The timing shown in (a-5) of the figure shows the effect display when the weapon A is selected, triggered by the selection of the weapon A being decided at the timing shown in (a-4) of the figure (here, “weapon It shows a state in which "A attack" is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the chance button 136 is turned off and the button effect is ended in response to the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.

Note that FIGS. (A-4) and (a-5) show display examples when the chance button 136 is operated during the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, but in the case of the operation of the chance button 136 Also in the case where the chance button 136 is not operated during the reception valid period (when the filling of the meter display of the filling disappears, in the case of time-out), the effect display shown in FIG.
<Specific example of button effect and selection effect K>

  564 (b-1) to 5 (b-5) are diagrams showing an example of button effects in time series during setting of the automatic button mode (state of operation of the automatic button function). This example is an example in the case where the button effect is executed during execution of the weapon selection effect shown in (a-1) to (a-5) in the same figure, and the auto button function is activated.

  The timing shown to the figure (b-1) is the same as the timing shown to the figure (a-1).

  In the timing shown in (b-3) of the figure, the state that the effect display is executed as if the operation of the chance button 136 was performed by the auto button function even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 Is shown. That is, regardless of the player's operation of the chance button 136 (even if it is not performed), the selection of the weapon B is determined. Note that, while the auto button mode is set, switching of the cursor display for selecting the weapons A, B, and C is performed, for example, in a predetermined or arbitrary order every predetermined time (not depending on the player's operation ) Automatically move (switch) (may be arbitrarily moveable by the player with the chance button 136 or another operation means (for example, the cross key 141 or the left and right button) or the like).

  The timing shown in the figure (b-4) is the effect display when the weapon B is selected, triggered by the selection of the weapon B being decided at the timing shown in the figure (b-3). "Attack in B" is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the chance button 136 is turned off and the button effect is ended in response to the reception of the operation by the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG.

  As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment also has a plurality of types of selection effects (for example, the character selection effect shown in FIG. 262 and the weapon selection effect shown in FIG. 564).

  In addition, one selection effect (for example, weapon selection effect shown in FIG. 564) among a plurality of selection effects is, for example, during the change display of the decoration symbol, or during the big hit game or the non-change display of the decoration symbol. It is executed in any case in the non-big hit game. And other selection effects (for example, character selection effects shown in FIG. 262) are either during display of the variation of the decorative symbol, during the big hit game, or during non-variable display of the symbol, and during non-big hit game. And in the case of a state different from the case where one selection effect is performed (for example, the weapon selection effect is performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the character selection effect is Executed during the game, etc.)

  In addition, among a plurality of selection effects, one selection effect (for example, weapon selection effect shown in FIG. 564) is performed without switching the cursor display, for example, by the operation of the player (automatically, the cursor display moves Yes). In this case, for example, the switching (movement) of the cursor display may be slow, and the player may arbitrarily select it by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The person may not be arbitrarily selected depending on the operation of the operation means (a completed race).

  In addition, when the player can arbitrarily select by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), since the operation means is always operated at the same timing when the auto button mode is set, the same option is always selected It may be possible to Alternatively, different options may be selected in spite of the fact that the operation means is always operated at the same timing (in spite of the same meter position of the elapsed time notification image TG). In this case, when an option (premium with high reliability) different from the normal selection effect is displayed, the different option may be selected.

Further, the switching of the cursor display may be arbitrarily switched only by the operation of the player.
<Specific example L of selection effect>

  FIG. 565 (a-1) to FIG. 565 (a-6) are diagrams showing an example of the selection effect in the non-setting of the auto button mode (the state where the auto button function is not activated) in time series. The figure is a display example of a song selection effect which causes the player to select a song.

  The timing shown in the figure (a-1) shows a state where the song selection effect has started, and here, the display of the selectable song types (song A, song B, song C, secret (?)) , And a cursor display (in this case, displaying a frame and an arrow) indicating that a predetermined song is being selected, and the characters “Please select a song” are displayed to prompt the selection of the song.

  The timings shown in (a-2) and (a-3) of the same figure show a state in which the selected song is transitioning (of switching the cursor display). Songs A, B, C,? The switching of the cursor display for selecting may be, for example, automatically moving (switching) (without the operation of the player) in a predetermined or arbitrary order every predetermined time, The player may move arbitrarily by operating the chance button 136 (it may move as song A → song B → song C →? → song A ... by plural operations of the chance button 136) . In addition, the player may be arbitrarily moved by other operation means (for example, the cross key 141 or the left and right button) other than the chance button 136 or the like.

  In the timing shown in (a-4) of the figure, the player operates the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) during the selectable effective period of the song, and the selection of the song C is determined, which is used as a trigger. The state in which the effect display when the song C is selected (here, the display of the image of the character (princess) and the characters of the “track C”) is performed.

  In addition, as shown to the figure (a-5) and (a-6), you may perform the button effect display 710 during music selection production. In this case, for example, as shown in the figure (a-5), when the operation means image BG1 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed and as shown in the figure (a-6), the cross key 141 is imitated. The operation means image BG2 may be displayed.

  When there is a plurality of selection effects, in a selection effect (for example, a song selection effect), even if the operation means image BG1 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed, the cursor is displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated. When the operation means image BG2 imitating the cross key 141 is operated without moving (the operation of the chance button 136 is not activated), the cursor moves (operation of the cross key 141 becomes effective), and other selection effects (for example, In the weapon effect display), when the operation means image BG1 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed, the cursor moves when the chance button 136 is operated (the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective), and the cross key Even if the operation means image BG2 imitating 141 is operated, the cursor does not move (if the operation of the cross key 141 is valid It may be the stomach) as may be configured vice versa.

In addition, when the operation means is not operated during the acceptance effective period of operation of the operation means (chance button 136, cross cursor 141) (for example, when the determination operation is not performed by 1R to 3R in the big hit game), The song on which the cursor is displayed may be selected and determined.
<Example M of button effect>

  FIGS. 566 (a-1) to (a-3) are diagrams showing an example of the button effect in time series.

  The timings shown in (a-1) and (a-2) of the figure show a state in which the image BG3 (image different from the operation means image BG in the normal button effect display 710) imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. ing. When such an image BG3 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed, even if the player operates the chance button 136, the operation is not validated and the auto button mode is not set (auto Button function does not work).

  On the other hand, the timing shown in (a-3) of the figure is a state where a predetermined time has passed from the timing shown in (a-2) of the figure, and the button effect display 710 has started to be executed. In this example, the operation button image BG4 simulating the chance button 136, the elapsed time notification image TG4 indicating the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the characters "PUSH !!" are displayed, and the player can see the chance button Prompts for 136 operations.

  At this timing, when the player operates the chance button 136, the operation is effectively accepted, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is executed. Also, if the auto button mode is being set, even if the player does not operate the chance button 136, an effect display as if the operation of the chance button 136 was performed (effect display according to the operation of the chance button 136 ) Is executed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the selection effect (the weapon selection effect shown in FIGS. 564 (b-1) to (b-4)) in which the auto button function operates and the selection effect in which the auto button function does not operate A plurality of types of selection effects may be included such as (the song selection effects shown in FIGS. 565 (a-1) to (a-6)).

  In this case, for example, the type (shape) of the operation means that can receive an operation between the selected effect (the weapon selection effect) in which the auto button function operates and the selected effect (the music selection effect) in which the auto button function does not operate. The types (types of images) of the button effect display 710 may be different, and even if the button effect display 710 is executed on the operation means other than the operation means corresponding to each selection effect, The operation of the operation means suggested by the button effect display 710 may not be effective. For example, in the weapon selection effect, the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is effective and the second operation means (for example, the cross key 141) is ineffective in switching the cursor display and determining options. In the song selection effect, it is assumed that the first operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is invalid when switching the cursor display and the selection, and the second operation means (for example, the cross key 141) is effective. . In this case, as shown in FIG. 565 (a-5), even if the button display effect 710 including the operation means image BG1 imitating the chance button 136 is executed, the operation of the chance button 136 is not effective, and Only the operation of the key 141 may be enabled.

  Also, among the multiple selected effects, the button effect is executed in one selected effect (FIG. 564), but the button effect is not executed in the other selected effects (FIGS. 565 (a-1) to (a-4) )) May be.

  Moreover, in one selection effect, the elapsed time notification image TG is displayed on the button effect display 710 (FIG. 564), but in the other selection effect, the elapsed time notification image TG is not displayed on the button effect display 710 (FIG. 565 (a-6)).

  In addition, the number of operation means to be effective may be different between one selection effect and another selection effect. For example, in the case of the song selection effect shown in FIG. 565, selection is made with the up and down buttons of the cross key 141 and determination is made with the chance button 136 (determination button), but in the case of weapon selection effect, only the chance button 136 (determination button) May be selected and determined.

  In addition, in one selection effect among a plurality of selection effects, a predetermined condition may be satisfied (for example, winning a big hit) and the choice may be increased each time. In that case, the auto button function may not be activated in the one selected effect, or the auto button function may be activated.

  In addition, in the selection effect, the effect display (selection effect display) performed when the operation means is operated is one of the options highlighted (displayed during selection) (for example, FIG. 564 (a-5) And (b-4) may be displayed. In addition, when the decision sound is different depending on each selection effect, the effect by the output of the decision sound may be used.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 566 (a-3), an introductory animation portion (FIG. 566 (a-1), (a-)) is performed before the button effect display 710 including the elapsed time notification image TG4 is displayed. In 2), even if the image mimics the operation means, the effect display is not started when the operation means is operated. In this case, the operation means is not operated even when the auto button mode is set, and the effect display is not started even if the player operates the operation means while the auto button mode is set (that is, the operation means is not (Not effective).

  Further, in the case of having a plurality of operation means, the operation means A for operating the auto button function and the operation means B for not operating may be included. In this case, the operation means A may be a button larger than the operation means B, the operation means A may be one button (for example, the chance button 136), and the operation means B may be the cross key 141. In addition, the selection effect that the auto button function does not operate may be an effect using the operation means B.

  The operation means B may be one button (for example, the chance button 136), and the operation means A may be the cross key 141.

  In addition, also in the selection effect shown in FIG. 565, one selection effect (for example, the weapon selection effect shown in FIG. 564) among the plurality of selection effects is, for example, during the variation display of the decorative symbol, or in the big hit game or It is executed during the non-varying display of the decorative symbol and in any of the non-big-hit games. And other selection effects (for example, character selection effects shown in FIG. 262) are either during display of the variation of the decorative symbol, during the big hit game, or during non-variable display of the symbol, and during non-big hit game. And in the case of a state different from the case where one selection effect is performed (for example, the weapon selection effect is performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the character selection effect is Executed during the game, etc.)

  In addition, among a plurality of selection effects, one selection effect (for example, weapon selection effect shown in FIG. 564) is performed without switching the cursor display, for example, by the operation of the player (automatically, the cursor display moves Yes). In this case, for example, the switching (movement) of the cursor display may be slow, and the player may arbitrarily select it by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The person may not be arbitrarily selected depending on the operation of the operation means (a completed race).

  Further, when an option (premium with high reliability) different from the normal selection effect is displayed, the different option may be selected.

Further, the switching of the cursor display may be arbitrarily switched only by the operation of the player.
<Specific example of button effect N>

  FIG. 567 (a-1) to FIG. 567 (a-5) are diagrams showing an example of the button effect in time series. In this example, there is shown a case in which a "hold button" is executed to promote the operation of the chance button 136, with a reserve effect indicating the reserve number of special figure variation games being displayed with a pattern imitating the chance button 136 together with the button effect. Even with "button hold", the auto button function may or may not be activated. That is, the chance button 136 is automatically operated (the auto button function is activated) and the chance button 136 is not automatically operated (the auto button function is not activated) during the operation valid period when the “button hold” is displayed. There is a case where it becomes activated (when the player can arbitrarily operate the chance button 136). When the chance button 136 is operated while the "button hold" is displayed, the display mode of the "button hold" hold icon is changed. Note that “button hold” is also a display imitating the operation means, and is one of the button effect display. In addition, the effect that “button hold” is displayed is also one of the button effects.

  The timing shown to the same figure (a-1) has shown the state which started execution of the button effect (1st button effect) in center vicinity of the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. The button effect display 710A of the first button effect displays an operation means image BG1 imitating the chance button 136 and an elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the effective period of the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow and “V Is displayed to prompt the user to operate the chance button 136. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  Further, in this example, the first button effect is an effect in which the auto button mode is not set (the auto button function does not operate). That is, the player operates the chance button 136 aiming at a suitable timing (a timing at which the meter displayed on the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached “V”).

  The same figure (a-2)-the same figure (a-3) that the number of reservations of special figure change game increased from 3 to 4) becomes the other, in the lower part of the display area of decoration design display 208 Execution of the button effect (second button effect) is started. In the second button effect, an operation means image imitating the chance button 136 from the normal hold icon (in the present example, an image of a black circle as shown by the hold icons PI1 to PI3) the display mode of the increased hold icon PI4. It is changed to BG2 and "button hold" is displayed. That is, the "button hold" is the button effect display 710B in the second button effect. Note that the meter (elapsed time notification image TG) is not displayed in the button effect display 710B of "button hold".

  The timings shown in (a-4) to (a-5) in the same figure are reserved special pattern change games (pre-reading notice etc. for grasping in advance the judgment result of special pattern change games corresponding to "button hold" Is a state in which the display mode of "button hold" is changed.

  Further, in this example, in the second button effect that displays "button hold", the auto button function is activated. That is, even if the player does not operate the chance button 136, the display mode of "button hold" is as if the chance button 136 was operated, effect display (FIG. (A-4))-> character ( It changes with (the figure (a-5)).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the execution of the second button effect (“button hold”) is started during the execution of the first button effect, and the first button effect to be started earlier is A predetermined effect display is performed when the operation means is operated at a suitable timing, and the auto button function is not activated in the first button effect. The second button effect (started during the execution of the first button effect), which is started later, is another button effect (button hold) in which the auto button function is activated, and the second button effect In the second button effect, the auto button function is activated to perform a predetermined effect (hold change).

  The auto button function may be activated in the first button effect to be started first, and the auto button function may not be activated in the second button effect to be started later.

Also, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in (a-3) of the figure, the first button effect (button effect of "Aim for V and press !!") and the second button effect ("Button The operation may be effectively accepted in both of the button effects of “hold” and the operation may not be accepted (ineffective) in any case.
<Specific example of button effect O>

  FIG. 567 (b-1) to FIG. 567 (b-5) are diagrams showing an example of the button effect in the setting of the auto button mode in time series. This example is also a display example in the case where a plurality of types of button effects (first button effect, second button effect) are executed.

  The timings shown in (b-1) to (b-2) of the same figure show, for example, a state where execution of the first button effect is started while setting the auto button mode. The button effect display 710A of the first button effect displays an operation means image BG3 imitating the chance button 136 and an elapsed time notification image TG3 for notifying an effective period of the operation acceptance of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow and “long It is a display that displays the word "save power by pressing" and prompts an operation (long press) of the chance button 136. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  In this example, the meter displayed on the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is raised by the operation of the auto button function, even if the player does not press the chance button 136 for a long time.

  The timing shown to the figure (b-4) is that the meter currently displayed on the left of the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 reached the maximum by long press of the chance button 136 by the action | operation of an auto button function, for example. The second button effect is started to be executed at the same time. The button effect display 710B in the second button effect displays the operation means image BG4 imitating the large chance button 136, the downward thick arrow, and the characters “Determine in a single stroke”, and prompts the operation of the chance button 136. It is. In the button effect display 710B, the elapsed time notification image TG (meter) is not displayed. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  The timing shown in (b-5) of the figure is a state in which a predetermined effect display is executed by the auto button function by the operation of the auto button function (even if the player does not operate the chance button 136). In addition, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is turned off by execution of the effect display.

  In this example, there are button effects (a plurality of button effects) requiring a plurality of types of operations (for example, an operation to store a meter for a predetermined time by long press and an operation to simply press a predetermined time). The function is to operate.

  The auto button function may be activated (or not activated) only with respect to one of the plurality of types of operations (for example, an operation of simply pressing after a predetermined time has elapsed).

  Further, when the auto button function is activated, the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 by the player may be invalidated.

In addition, when the button effect emitted by the light emitting means (chance button lamp 138) provided in the operation means is combined, the light emission of the light emitting means is turned off when one button effect is performed by the auto button function. .
<Specific Example of Setting Screen of Auto Button Mode P>

  FIG. 568 (a-1) to FIG. 568 (a-4) are diagrams showing an example of display relating to setting of the auto button mode in time series.

  The timing shown to the figure (a-1) is an example of a display under non-setting of auto button mode. In this example, notification (display) that the menu screen can be displayed by the operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

In the timings shown in (a-2) to (a-3) of the figure, the menu screen is displayed by operating the chance button 136, the "effect button" is selected by the left and right buttons, and is selected by the determination button (chance button 136). Indicates the determined state.

In the timing (a-4) in the figure (a), the setting (ON) or non-setting (OFF) of the auto button mode is selected and determined for the effect button (for example, the chance button 136) (in this example, The setting (ON) of the auto button mode is selected and determined.
<Specific example of setting screen of auto button mode Q>

FIG. 568 (b) shows an example of another setting screen. The setting screen is a screen that is displayed, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed from the non-playing state (design stop), or when a moving image demo is performed a plurality of times, or the like. In this example, a screen for selecting whether to set the current setting of the auto button mode as a default is displayed.
<Specific example of setting screen of auto button mode R>

  FIG. 568 (c) is a diagram showing a display example of the screen when the auto button mode is being set. As shown in the figure, when the auto button mode is being set, the characters “in auto button setting” are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the auto button mode is being set. Inform.

  Thus, the auto button mode setting can be switched by the menu screen or the like. For example, even if the demo screen displays “↑ for automatic button mode setting ↓, for automatic button mode setting 、”, etc., the transition from the demonstration screen to the automatic button mode setting / non-setting switching screen is also possible. Alternatively, the screen may advance from the menu screen to a transition screen of the auto button mode setting / non-setting.

  Further, the display of "setting of auto button" as shown in FIG. 568 (c) may not be displayed due to the effect. For example, the display may not be displayed during the big hit game. In addition, although illustration is omitted, a display indicating that the auto button mode is being set (for example, characters of "automatic", etc.) is displayed near the chance button 136 (or button effect display), and the auto auto button mode is being set. The player may easily recognize that the In addition, a display indicating that the auto button mode is being set (for example, the characters "automatic", etc.) may not be displayed when the auto button function is not activated while the auto button mode is set, or the auto button Even when the auto button function is activated during the setting of the mode, it may not be displayed.

  In addition, the setting of the auto button mode can be performed by the player's operation, for example, a plurality of (four to four) auto button modes can be set. For example, the setting of the auto button mode can be set by the operation of the direction key 137, the chance button 136 or the like while the demonstration screen in the non-game state is displayed.

  On the other hand, non-setting (cancellation) of the auto button mode is performed by releasing the auto button mode by the player. The release of the auto button mode can be released in the same manner as the above setting, or can be released by a button operation in the auto button mode. In the case of the latter, it may be possible to release only during the effect, or may be continued to the non-auto button mode thereafter. For example, the auto button mode may be canceled (non-auto) when the player operates the button while setting the auto button mode.

  In the present embodiment, “during setting of the auto button mode” is an operation for setting the auto button mode (for example, an operation for displaying a menu screen shown in FIG. After performing the operation for displaying the switching screen of the auto button mode shown in FIG. 7A (a-3) or the operation for executing the auto button setting / non-setting shown in FIG. It may be until the condition that the button mode is not set is satisfied. In this case, the “condition in which the auto button mode is not set” is to perform an operation for setting the auto button mode not set (for example, individual settings in the game (for example, FIG. (A-2) Operation for displaying the menu screen shown, or operation for displaying the switching screen of the auto button mode shown in (a-3), or auto button setting / not shown in (a-4) Operation of setting execution), all clear, etc.) and power on again.

  In addition, “in the setting of the auto button mode” indicates that the automatic button mode is being output continuously and intermittently by the output means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like (FIG. a-6)).

  In addition, “during setting of the auto button mode” means that the cursor is placed on the setting of the auto button mode when the screen for performing the setting is displayed next after performing the operation for setting the auto button mode. For example, the period may be in the auto button mode setting.

In addition, even if the auto button mode may not operate in the above-mentioned "during setting of the auto button mode", the auto button mode may be set.
<Specific example of display when auto button mode is not set>

  FIG. 569 (a-1) to FIG. 5 (a-5) are diagrams showing an example of display during non-setting of the auto button mode in time series.

  In the timings shown in (a-1) to (a-3) of the figure, the button effect starts executing while the auto button mode is not set, and the button effect display 710 is performed. The button effect display 710 is an image (operation means image BG1) imitating the operation means (chance button 136) and an elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (this example Then, according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, an image (filling portion) of the meter gradually decreases) and a downward arrow,

The text "Press!" Is displayed. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

The timing shown in (a-4) of the figure shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 during the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the timing shown in (a-5) in the figure is It shows a state in which the effect display based on the chance button 136 being operated is being executed.
<Specific Example of Display During Auto Button Mode Setting T>

  FIG. 569 (b-1) to FIG. 5 (b-3) are diagrams showing an example of display during setting of the auto button mode in time series.

  As for the timing shown to the figure (b-1), button production starts execution during setting of automatic button mode, and button production display 710 is performed. This button effect display 710 displays an image (operation means image BG2) imitating an operation means (chance button 136), a downward arrow, and a character of "Press!" (The elapsed time notification image TG is Hidden). At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  The timing shown to the figure (b-3) has shown the state in which the effect display is performed by the action | operation of an auto button function.

  As described above, when the elapsed time notification image TG (meter display) for notifying of the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the operation means is displayed on the button effect display 710 during non-setting of the auto button mode, the auto button In the button effect display 710 during setting of the mode, an elapsed time notification image TG (meter display) for notifying of the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the operation means may not be displayed.

  In addition to such effects, an effect may be provided in which an elapsed time notification image TG (meter display) is displayed both when and when the auto button mode is set.

  In addition, in the case of a configuration in which setting / not setting of the auto button mode can be switched during the effect by an operation other than the operation means not used in the effect, the meter display is not displayed even if the auto button mode is switched from not setting It does not have to be the display. Also, the meter display may not be displayed even if the auto button mode is switched from setting to non-setting.

Also, in the case of a configuration in which setting / non-setting can be switched at a predetermined timing to be operated, the auto button does not function (activate) in the effect even if the auto button mode is switched from non-setting to setting. It may also be functional (actuated). Also, even if the auto button mode is switched from setting to non-setting, the auto button may not function (activate) in the effect, or may function (act).
<Specific example of display when auto button mode is not set>

  FIG. 570 (a-1) to FIG. 570 (a-5) are diagrams showing an example of display in non-setting of the auto button mode in time series.

  In the timings shown in (a-1) to (a-3) of the figure, the button effect starts executing while the auto button mode is not set, and the button effect display 710 is performed. The button effect display 710 is an image (operation means image BG1) imitating the operation means (chance button 136) and an elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (this example Then, according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, an image (filling portion) of the meter gradually decreases) and a downward arrow,

The text "Press!" Is displayed. At the same time, the chance button 136 (the chance button lamp 138) is lit in the first color (red in this example), and the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted.

  The timing shown in (a-4) of the figure shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 during the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the timing shown in (a-5) in the figure is It shows a state in which the effect display based on the chance button 136 being operated is being executed.

In this example, when the player operates the chance button 136 during the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 (the same figure (a-4)), the chance button 136 vibrates. The vibration of the chance button 136 continues the operation immediately after the operation until after the effect display is executed by the operation of the chance button 136 shown in (a-5) in the same figure (after the chance button 136 is extinguished) The vibration may be continued between (while pressing).
<Specific example V of display when auto button mode is not set>

  FIGS. 570 (b-1) to (b-4) are diagrams showing an example of display in non-setting of the auto button mode in time series.

  The timings shown in (b-1) to (b-2) in the figure are the same as the timings shown in (a-1) to (a-2) in the figure, so the description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (b-3) of the figure shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 and the chance button 136 vibrates during the reception valid period of the operation of the chance button 136. Further, (b-4) in the same figure shows a state in which the effect display is executed by the operation of the chance button 136 and the chance button 136 is extinguished by the end of the button effect. At this timing, the vibration continues even if the hand is released from the chance button 136 (even if the chance button 136 is not operated).
<Specific example W of display when auto button mode is not set>

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6C, when the button effect (button effect display 710) starts and the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 becomes valid (from before the operation), the chance button 136 vibrates. You may

  As shown in FIG. 570, the operation means may vibrate from the time of operation of the operation means or the start of the button effect. Further, FIG. 570 shows an example of display when the auto button mode is not set, but the operation means may vibrate (only) during the auto button function operation in the auto button mode setting, the auto button mode The operating means may not vibrate during operation of the auto button function being set. In addition, when the operation means vibrates (only) while the auto button function is set in the auto button mode setting, the vibration is started by the operation of the operation means, and the vibration is continued for a predetermined time while pressing (for example, In 570 (a-4) to (a-5), the vibration time during operation of the auto button function may be shortened or lengthened.

  In addition, the vibration of the operation means may be started before the operation of the operation means and the vibration may be stopped by the operation of the operation means, in which case the operation of the operation means is stopped immediately before the effective time of the operation reception ends. The vibration time may be shorter or longer when the operation of the operation means is performed during the effective time of the operation reception than in the case where the operation is performed.

  Note that the “auto button mode” in this embodiment may be a mode in which effect display is performed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means within the effective time of the operation acceptance of the operation means. In addition, it may be a mode in which the effect display is started in a time shorter than the time until the effect display is started when there is no operation of the operation means from the start of the execution of the button effect display 710.

  Further, the “automatic button mode” in the present embodiment may be a mode in which the effect display is performed only when the operation means is operated within the effective time of the operation acceptance of the operation means. In addition, the effect display may be started in a time shorter than the latest time when the effect display is started by the operation of the operation means. Also, the "auto button mode" may be referred to as the "auto operation mode".

  Further, the effect display started by the operation of the operation means may be a effect display started when the operation means is operated (pressed) and released, or is started when the operation means is operated (pressed) It may be an effect display. Moreover, when the operation means is operated before execution of the button effect, the effect display may not be started by the operation of the operation means. That is, the "operation of the operation means" in the present embodiment may be when the operation means is operated (pressed) or may be when the production means is operated (pressed) and released. Moreover, the case where the operation means is operated before the execution of the button effect may be included in the "operation of the operation means", and when the operation means is operated before the execution of the button effect, the "operation of the operation means" Does not have to be included in

Further, the auto button mode is executed when the effect display is performed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and when the operation means is not operated while the auto button mode is not set. The display to be performed (the display that is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (even when the time is over)) may be a mode in which the operation means is executed without being operated.
<Other Embodiments>
The following configurations are also included in all the examples of this embodiment.

  For example, there may be a plurality of button effects, and there may be one in which the auto button mode is active and one in which the auto button mode is active.

  Also, there may be a plurality of button effects, and all the auto button modes may be effective.

  In addition, even when only a part of the plurality of button effects is not set in the automatic button mode and there is no button operation, there may be a case where effect display when the button is operated is executed. In addition, even if only a part of a plurality of button effects is set while the auto button mode is set and the button is operated, the effect display based on the operation of the button is not performed (the auto button mode has priority) Therefore, the operation of the button may be ignored).

  In addition, for all effects among a plurality of button effects, even when the auto button mode is not set and the button is not operated, the effect display when the button is operated may be executed. Further, for all the effects of a plurality of button effects, even if the auto button mode is being set and the button is operated, the effect display based on the operation of the button is not executed (the auto button mode has priority) Therefore, the operation of the button may be ignored).

  Note that the effect display of this embodiment is a display different from the setting display for setting / changing a predetermined property (for example, volume), and the auto button function may not be activated for the setting display.

  Although different button effect display 710 is shown as shown in FIGS. 560 and 561, the meter display (elapsed time notification image TG) may be the same. Further, the display position of the meter display (the elapsed time notification image TG) may be the same even when the auto button function is activated.

  In addition, when the operation means emits light (when the operation means includes the light emitting means) or when the vicinity of the operation means emits light (when the light emitting means is provided near the operation means), the light emitting means is normally Light emission may be performed in the first light emission mode, and light may be emitted in the second light emission mode at the time of the button effect. In addition, the light emitting means may be turned off normally, and may emit light in the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode at the time of the button effect.

In addition, as an example when the vicinity of the operation means emits light, the operation means itself does not include the light emission means, the LED substrate is attached to something other than the operation means, and the operation portion of the operation means has transparency. For example, a lamp cover or the like may be used.
Further, the above-mentioned "cut-in image" may be displayed on the entire screen.

  In addition, the operation means is a presentation button for the player, and in the case where there are a plurality of presentation buttons for the player, either one or both or only one of them may correspond to the above-mentioned operation means. It may be

  Moreover, the "lamp" in each said embodiment is an example of a light emission means, and LED may be sufficient.

As explained above, the gaming table of the present invention (for example, pachinko machine 100) is a gaming table provided with an operating means (for example, chance button 136) and a display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays, and one of the effect displays among the plurality of types of effect displays is operated by the operation unit while the auto button mode is not set. In the case where there is a display that can be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display (for example, effect display shown in FIG. 564 (a-5), effect display shown in FIG. 564 (b-4), etc.)”. The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is an effect display different from the first effect display (hereinafter, “second effect display (for example, shown in FIG. 562 (a-6) Effect display, shown in Figure 558 (c), (d) Effect display etc.)), the second effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and the first effect display The effect display is an effect display that can be displayed even when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the auto button mode, and the second effect display is the operation during the setting of the auto button mode. It is an effect display that is not displayed when the means is not operated.
According to such a configuration, it may be possible to execute a variety of effect display.

  Further, one effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is symbol fluctuation display of a decorative symbol, and the first effect display is effect display which can be displayed during execution of the symbol fluctuation display. May be

  In addition, the second effect display may be an effect display that can be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of effect display includes effect display including an image showing the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display (for example, operation of FIG. 563 (a-1) In the effect image BG and the effect display in the operation means image BG in FIGS. 564 (a-1) to (a-4), etc.)), and in the third effect display, the operation means In the case where the first effect display is started when operated (hereinafter, referred to as “first state (for example, the states of FIG. 564 (a-1) to (a-5))”. The third effect display is a state in which the second effect display is started when the operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as “second state (for example, FIG. 562)). In the case of (a-4) to (a-6))), the effect table not displayed It may be.

  In addition, "when the operation means is not operated while setting the auto button mode" according to claim 1, "when the operation means is not operated when the auto button function is operating" It may be.

  Further, "when the operation means is not operated during setting of the auto button mode" according to claim 1 means "when the operation means is not operated during a reception valid period of the operation means". May be

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set.

  The second effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set.

  In addition, the second effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while setting the auto button mode.

The first state may be included in setting of the auto button mode, and the second state may be included in setting of the auto button mode.
In addition, the gaming machine may be a slot machine.
The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) of the present embodiment is a gaming table provided with operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays, and one of the effect types among the plurality of types of effect displays is operated when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. Displayable effect display (hereinafter, “first effect display (for example, effect display in FIG. 272 (a-6), effect display in FIG. 272 (b-6), effect display in FIG. 561 (b-3), etc. And the effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is different from the first effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display (for example, FIG. 561 (for example, FIG. 561 (a))). -6), or 564 (a-5) Effect display etc.)), the second effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and the first effect The display (for example, the effect display of FIG. 272 (a-6), the effect display of FIG. 272 (b-6), the effect display of FIG. 561 (b-3), etc.) is performed while the auto button mode is set. Even when the means is not operated, it is an effect display that can be displayed, and the second effect display is an effect display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the auto button mode, The effect display including one of the plurality of types of effect displays includes an image showing an appearance of the operation means (hereinafter, “fourth effect display (for example, operation means image of FIG. 567 (a-3) BG2 (pending icon P 4), and the operation means image BG4 in FIG. 567 (b-4) etc.)), and one of the effects of the plurality of effects is different from the second effect. (Hereinafter, “the fifth effect display (for example, the hold icon PI4 in FIG. 567 (a-4), the hold icon PI 4 in FIG. 567 (a-5), the button effect display 710 in FIG. 567 (b-4), etc.) And the fifth effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and the fourth effect display (for example, The operation means image BG2 of FIG. 567 (a-3) is an effect display that may be displayed even when the fifth effect display is not started when the operation means is operated. It is a game stand characterized by.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of effect display includes effect display including an image showing the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display (for example, a button of FIG. 567 (a-1) And the third effect display is an effect display different from the fourth effect display, and the third effect display is If the first effect display is started when the operation means is operated, the display may be an effect display that can be displayed.

Further, the third effect display may be an effect display including a meter image (for example, an elapsed time notification image TG1 of FIG. 567 (a-1)).
The fourth effect display may be an effect display that does not include a meter image.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of executing display of the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending, and the pending icon is an icon that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the plurality of types of display modes One of the display modes is a display mode before holding change (hereinafter, referred to as “first display mode (for example, display mode of holding icon PI in FIG. 567 (a-2))”). The display mode after one of the plurality of display modes is the display mode after the hold change (hereinafter, the second display mode (for example, the hold icon PI4 of FIG. 567 (a-4), (a-5) And the fifth effect display may be the display of the hold icon displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the display mode including one of the plurality of types of display modes includes an image showing the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the third display mode (for example, hold of FIG. 567 (a-3) And the fourth effect display may be a display of the hold icon displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, "when the operation means is not operated while setting the auto button mode" according to claim 1, "when the operation means is not operated when the auto button function is operating" It may be.

  Further, "when the operation means is not operated during setting of the auto button mode" according to claim 1 means "when the operation means is not operated during a reception valid period of the operation means". May be

  The fifth effect display may be an effect display that can be displayed without the operation means being operated during setting of the auto button mode.

  Further, the fourth effect display (for example, the button effect display 710 in FIG. 567 (b-1)) is an effect display that can be displayed during the setting of the auto button mode, and the fifth effect display (for example, The button effect display 710) of FIG. 567 (b-4) is an effect display which is displayed when the operation means is not operated for a predetermined period after the fourth effect display is displayed. May be

  In addition, the third effect display may be an effect display that is displayed while the auto button mode is not set.

  The third display mode may be a display mode different from the first display mode, and the third display mode may be a display mode different from the second display mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine may be a slot machine. The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, it is a game console provided with an operating means (for example, chance button 136) and a display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208), and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display. And one of the plurality of types of effect display can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display (For example, it is referred to as effect display shown in FIG. 564 (a-5).)) The operation means performs one effect display among the plurality of effect displays while the auto button mode is not set. When operated, the first effect display that can be displayed is a different effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display”), and the first effect display (for example, FIG. 564 (b − The effect display shown in 4) Even when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the touch button mode, it is an effect display that can be displayed, and the second effect display (for example, the effect display shown in FIG. 562 (a-6)) is It is an effect display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the auto button mode.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect display. In addition, since it is possible to give a change when the effect display is displayed, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

  Further, one effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is symbol fluctuation display of a decorative symbol, and the first effect display is effect display which can be displayed during execution of the symbol fluctuation display. The second effect display may be an effect display that can be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display.

  Further, one effect display among the plurality of effect displays includes an effect display including an image showing an appearance of the operation means (hereinafter, “third effect display (for example, FIGS. 564 (a-1) to (564 a-4))), and the third effect display is a state where the first effect display is started when the operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as , “In the first state (for example, referred to as states in FIGS. 564 (a-1) to (a-5))”, it is an effect display that can be displayed, and the third effect display is the above-mentioned A state in which the second effect display is started when the operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as “second state (for example, states of FIG. 562 (a-4) to (a-6)). In the case of, the effect display may not be displayed.

  In addition, "when the operation means is not operated while setting the auto button mode" according to claim 1, "when the operation means is not operated when the auto button function is operating" It may be.

  Further, "when the operation means is not operated during setting of the auto button mode" according to claim 1 means "when the operation means is not operated during a reception valid period of the operation means". May be

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set.

  The second effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set.

  In addition, the second effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while setting the auto button mode.

The first state may be included in setting of the auto button mode, and the second state may be included in setting of the auto button mode.
The game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Further, the game console according to the present invention (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is a game console provided with an operating unit and a display unit, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display. There is an effect display that can be displayed when the operation means is operated during non-setting of the auto button mode (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display (for example,“ first effect display (for example, 272 (a-6), the effect display of FIG. 272 (b-6), the effect display of FIG. 561 (b-3), etc.)), among the plurality of types of effect display One of the effect displays can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and an effect display different from the first effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display ( For example, the effect display in FIG. 561 (a-6) The first effect display (for example, the effect display in FIG. 272 (a-6), the effect display in FIG. 272 (b-6), the effect display in FIG. 561 (b-3), etc.) Even when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the auto button mode, the effect display can be displayed, and the second effect display is the operation of the operation means during the setting of the auto button mode It is an effect display that is not displayed when it is not displayed, and one effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays includes an effect display including an image showing an appearance of the operation means (hereinafter, “fourth effect display (for example, 567 (a-3) and the operation means image BG4 shown in FIG. 567 (b-4) etc.)), and one of the plurality of effects is displayed. Effect display, auto button An effect display different from the second effect display (hereinafter referred to as “the fifth effect display (for example, FIG. 567 (a-4) The hold icon PI4, the hold icon PI4 in FIG. 567 (a-5), and the button effect display 710 in FIG. 567 (b-4)) and the like) State of the fifth effect display being started when the operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as “the second operation means image BG2 of -3), the button effect display 710 of FIG. 567 (b-1), etc. In the case of three states (for example, states of FIG. 567 (a-1) to (a-5), FIG. 567 (b-1), (b-2), etc.) ”, display is possible. The fourth effect display (for example, the operation of FIG. 567 (a-3) The means image BG2 is in a state where the fifth effect display is not started (hereinafter, “the fourth state (for example, the operation means image BG4 in FIG. 567 (b-4), (b-5), FIG. 567 (b -1), the state of (b-2), etc.)). And the fourth effect display is an effect display that does not include a meter image.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect display. In addition, since it is possible to give a change when the effect display is displayed, it may be possible to enhance the player's interest.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of effect display includes an image indicating an appearance of the operation means, and an effect display different from the fourth effect display (hereinafter, “third effect display (for example, 567 (a-1), and the third effect display is a state in which the first effect display is started when the operation means is operated (see FIG. 567 (a-1)). Hereinafter, in the case of “the first state”, it is an effect display that can be displayed, and the third effect display is a meter image (for example, an elapsed time notification image TG1 of FIG. 567 (a-1)) It may be an effect display including

  Further, the display means is a means capable of executing display of the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending, and the pending icon is an icon that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the plurality of types of display modes One of the display modes is a display mode before holding change (hereinafter, referred to as “first display mode (for example, display mode of holding icon PI in FIG. 567 (a-2))”). The display mode after one of the plurality of display modes is the display mode after the hold change (hereinafter, the second display mode (for example, the hold icon PI4 of FIG. 567 (a-4), (a-5) And the fifth effect display may be the display of the hold icon displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the display mode including one of the plurality of types of display modes includes an image showing the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “the third display mode (for example, hold of FIG. 567 (a-3) And the fourth effect display may be a display of the hold icon displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, "when the operation means is not operated while setting the auto button mode" according to claim 1, "when the operation means is not operated when the auto button function is operating" It may be.

  Further, "when the operation means is not operated during setting of the auto button mode" according to claim 1 means "when the operation means is not operated during a reception valid period of the operation means". May be

  The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the fifth effect display can be displayed without the operation means being operated during setting of the auto button mode. It may be a display.

  Further, the fourth effect display (for example, the button effect display 710 in FIG. 567 (b-1)) is an effect display that can be displayed during the setting of the auto button mode, and the fifth effect display (for example, The button effect display 710) of FIG. 567 (b-4) is an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is not operated for a predetermined period after the fourth effect display is displayed, It is also good.

  In addition, the third effect display may be an effect display that is displayed while the auto button mode is not set.

The third display mode may be a display mode different from the first display mode, and the third display mode may be a display mode different from the second display mode.
The game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Note that "effect display including an image showing the appearance of the operation means" is an effect display that urges (proposes) the player to operate the operation means, and "image showing the appearance of the operation means" described in the claims. The effect display including “indication” may be replaced with “effect display for prompting (proposing) the player to operate the operation means”. An example of the “display for prompting the player to operate the operation means” is a display for displaying characters such as “please operate”. In addition, “effect display including an image prompting an operation”, “effect display including an image requesting an operation”, and “effect display including an instruction prompting (requesting or suggesting) an operation” are included.

  Further, the timing at which the display of the button image (operation means image BG) and the meter image (elapsed time notification image TG, meter display) starts may be different. For example, in the case of displaying a button image and displaying a meter image, the image may be interpreted as an image prompting an operation at the time of displaying the button image, or may be interpreted as an image prompting an operation at a time of meter display.

  Further, the gaming table of the present invention is a gaming table provided with an operating means and a display means, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, and the plurality of types of effect display One of the effect displays is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”) that can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, One of the type of effect display can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, and an effect display different from the first effect display (hereinafter referred to as " And the first effect display is an effect display that can be displayed even when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the auto button mode. The second effect display is the auto button mode The effect display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the setting, and the second effect display is an effect display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected. The auto button mode is a mode in which a display performed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set is executed even when the operation means is not operated, One of the effect displays in the effect display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display”) including an image showing the appearance of the operation means, and one of the plurality of effect displays. The effect display of is different from the second effect display which can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display"). And the said The effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the auto button mode is being set and the fourth effect display is started, and the third effect display is the auto button mode. The fourth effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the fourth effect display is not started, and the fourth effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display. The fourth effect display may be an effect display that can be started after the third effect display.

  Further, one effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is an effect display including an image showing an appearance of the operation means, and an effect display different from the third effect display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth The fifth effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the auto button mode is being set and the first effect display is started. May be

  Further, one effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “sixth effect display”) which does not include an image indicating an appearance of the operation means, and the sixth The effect display may be an effect display that can be displayed when the auto button mode is being set and the second effect display is started.

  The first effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the button effect is being executed and the auto button mode is not set.

  The second effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the selection effect is being performed and the auto button mode is not set.

Further, the display means may be means capable of executing the display of the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending, and the fourth effect display may be an effect display for changing the display mode of the pending icon. .
Further, the display means is a means capable of performing variable display of a decorative symbol,

  The fourth effect display may be an effect display that is executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the player can operate.

  As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment includes the operation means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137, the ball emission handle 134, etc.) and the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps , And various kinds of LEDs), and the display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays, and one of the effect types of the plurality of types of effect displays is an auto When the operation means is operated while the button mode is not set, a display capable of display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”. For example, FIG. 272 (a-6) or FIG. (B-6) Etc.) and one of the effects of the plurality of types of effects can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. With the first effect display The different effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “second effect display. For example,“ an animation for changing selectable characters ”), the first effect display is the operation means during setting of the auto button mode. The second effect display is an effect display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the setting of the auto button mode, even when the button is not operated. The second effect display is an effect display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected, and in the auto button mode, the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. The display executed in the case where the operation is performed is a mode which is executed even when the operation means is not operated, and one of the plurality of effect Effect display including an image showing the view (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display”. For example, “display of operation means image BG” described in FIG. 274 (a-2) or FIG. (B-2)) The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays can be displayed when the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set, which is an effect different from the second effect display The display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth effect display”. For example, “display for changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the operation of the operation means”), and the third effect display is in the auto button mode. A state in which the fourth effect display is started during the setting (for example, a state in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 274 (a-2) and FIG. In the case of), it is an effect display that can be displayed, and the third The effect display of is in a state in which the fourth effect display is not started while setting the auto button mode (for example, a state in which stop display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 274 (b-2) is performed (non-fluctuating In the case of display state)), the fourth effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display, and the fourth effect display is the third effect display. It is an effect display that can be started after the effect display.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the rendering effect in the auto button mode can be enhanced, and it may be possible to provide a gaming machine with a characteristic display.

  Note that one of the plurality of types of effect displays is an effect display including an image showing an appearance of the operation means, and an effect display different from the third effect display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth The fifth effect display is an effect display that can be displayed when the auto button mode is being set and the first effect display is started. May be Further, one effect display among the plurality of types of effect displays is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “sixth effect display”) which does not include an image indicating an appearance of the operation means, and the sixth The effect display may be an effect display that can be displayed when the auto button mode is being set and the second effect display is started.

  The first effect display is performed when a button effect (at least one of a plurality of types of button effects) is being executed and the operation means is operated while the auto button mode is not set. The effect display may be displayed. The second effect display may be an effect display that is displayed when the operation means is operated while the selection effect is being performed and the auto button mode is not set. Further, the display means may be means capable of executing the display of the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending, and the fourth effect display may be an effect display for changing the display mode of the pending icon. . Further, the display means may be means capable of performing variable display of a decorative symbol, and the fourth effect display may be effect display which is executed while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed. Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the player can operate.

  The present invention takes a pachinko machine as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are circulated and used. The present invention may be applied to an enclosed game machine (eg, an enclosed pachinko machine) or the like. The applicable pachinko machine of the present invention may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a sphere is enclosed and the enclosed sphere is circulated in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine shoots the enclosed sphere. And the payout of the ball may be performed by credit.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a sphere is enclosed and the enclosed sphere is circulated in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit.

  Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, by applying the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in each embodiment to the other embodiments, the scope of the game may be further expanded.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine).

100 pachinko machine 136 chance button 208 decorative symbol display device 300 main control unit 400 first sub control unit 500 second sub control unit 700 liquid crystal control unit

Claims (9)

Operation means,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a fifth display,
One of the plurality of displays is a sixth display,
The fifth display is a display including an image (hereinafter, referred to as “first image”) representing the appearance of the operation means.
The sixth display is a display including an image (hereinafter referred to as a “second image”) representing the appearance of the operation means, which is different from the first image.
The sixth display is a display including an image of a meter (hereinafter, referred to as "third image"),
The display size of the second image is larger than the display size of the first image,
The sixth display, Ri display der a portion of the second image is overlapped by the third image,
The fifth display is a display including an image of a meter having the same display size as the third image.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1 , wherein
The fifth display is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”).
The sixth display is a display including a display (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth display”) prompting the operation of the operation means.
The fifth display may be displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means is received,
The sixth display may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is received,
The fifth display and the sixth display are alternatively displayed,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 2 , wherein
The sixth display is a display in which a portion of the second image is overlapped by the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 2 or 3 ,
The fifth display is a display in which a portion of the first image is not overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 4 ,
The third image is an image (hereinafter referred to as an “effective time notification image”) for notifying an effective time in which the operation unit can accept an operation.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 5 , wherein
"The sixth display, the second Ri display Der being overlapped portion of the image by the third image" described in claim 1 and is "the sixth display, the a portion of the second image is that of the display der Ri "to be the effective time notification image,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display included in a first effect,
The second display is a display included in a second effect,
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
The time from the operation of the operation means to the start of the second effect is better than the time from the operation of the operation means to the start of the first effect long,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7 , which is:
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7 , which is:
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by